HomeMy WebLinkAbout2465.MOWN PMMOLM WAT"D 46n1C Hit EC,S
FIRE STATION NO. 3
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS
BRW PROJECT NO. 2465.00
OCTOBER 20, 2006
COLLEGE STATION OWNER
1900 BARRON ROAD
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS 77845
BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS, INC. ARCHITECT
2700 EARL RUDDER FWAY SOUTH SUITE 4000
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS 77845
(979) 694-1791; FAX (979) 694-8293
ROBERTSON CONSULTING ENGINEERS STRUCTURAL / CIVIL ENGINEER
1008 WOODCREEK DRIVE
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS 77845
(979) 693-5454
DEGELMAN ENGINEERING GROUP MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/
2206 QUAIL RUN PLUMBING ENGINEER
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS 77845
(979) 696-2506
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
APPENDIX A
Figures
Figure 1 — Project Site Vicinity Map
Figure 2 — Project Site Plan and Plan of Borings
Figure 3 — Aerial Photograph (2002) of Site and Surrounding Area
Figure 4 — Site Topography
Figure 5 — Soil Series Map of Project Site and Surrounding Area
Boring Logs
Boring Log B-1
Boring Log B-2
Boring Log B-3
QT7
Key Sheet to
Terms and Symbols Used on the Boring Logs
Southw
\ Park
V --
BJECT PROPERTY
CME TESTI wrAN-5FEM.WEE RING, INC.
`LY
4/ck
SPrin9
2000 FEET
CITY OF COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION
NO. 3 RELOCATION
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS
PROJECT: C of CS Fire Station No. 3 Relocation
LOCATION: College Station. Texas
APPR: MFC REV. DATE:
DRAWN BY: MDK SCALE: As Shown
DATE: 08/19/2004 FIGURE NO.: 1
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
10.0 BASIS OF RECOMMENDATIONS
The recommendations contained in this report are based, in part, on the project information
provided to CME. If statements or assumptions made in this report concerning the location and design of
project elements contain incorrect information, or if additional information concerning the project
becomes available, the owner should convey the correct or additional information to CME.
The field exploration, which provided information concerning subsurface conditions, was
considered to be in sufficient detail and scope to form a reasonable basis for the conceptual planning of
the foundation system of the proposed structure and paved area. Recommendations contained in this
report were developed based upon a generalization of the subsurface conditions encountered at the boring
locations across the site and the assumption that the generalized conditions are continuous throughout the
areas under consideration. However, regardless of the thoroughness of a subsurface exploration, there is
always a possibility that subsurface conditions encountered over a given area will be different from those
present at specific, isolated boring locations.
Consequently, it is recommended that experienced geotechnical personnel be employed to
observe construction operations and to document that conditions encountered during construction
conform to the assumed generalizations which formed the basis for the recommendations presented in
this report. In addition, the construction observers should document construction activities and field
testing practices employed during the earthwork and foundation construction phases of the project.
Questionable procedures and/or practices should be reported to the design team, along with timely
recommendations to solve these problem(s).
The Geotechnical Engineer warrants that the findings, recommendations, specifications, or
professional advice contained herein have been made after preparation in accordance with generally
accepted professional engineering practice in the field of geotechnical engineering in this geographic
area. No other warranty is implied or expressed.
45
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
9.6 FOUNDATION AND PAVING CONCRETE
The following specifications should be employed during construction of the recommended
foundation:
■ The concrete used for the construction of all foundation elements should consist of a mix that
has been shown to comply with the requirements of ACI 214 and ACI 301, Section 3.9.2.1.
■ Submitted mix designs should indicate that the aggregates have been tested in accordance
with ASTM C 33 within a time period that does not exceed one year.
■ If fly ash is used in the concrete, the replacement percentage should not exceed 20% of the
total cementitious material.
■ The concrete should have a minimum 28-day design compressive strength of 3,000 psi as
determined in accordance with ASTM C 39 or C 109. A test set, consisting of three
cylinders, should be cast during each placement at a rate of one set for every 75 yd3 of
concrete placed with at least one set cast during each placement day.
■ Water may be added to the mix at the site by an experienced materials engineer in order to
develop design workability, but only to the extent that the water/cement ratio does not
exceed 0.55 lb/lb.
9.7 UTLITY INSTALLATION AND TRENCHES
The following considerations should be included in the planning of utility installation at the site:
■ Excavation and shoring requirements for all open excavations should be performed in
accordance with applicable provisions of 29 CFR 1926.
■ Soils used to backfill utility trenches shall be free of deleterious material and excessive
amounts of organic matter, silt, or other delirious materials. Native soils or soils meeting
structural fill requirements may be used for backfilling of utility trenches unless otherwise
prohibited by project plans and specifications.
■ Trench backfill shall be placed in loose lifts not to exceed 8 inches and mechanically
compacted to the required moisture/density specifications.
■ Soils used to backfill utilities located beneath buildings, paved surfaces, or other structural
units shall be compacted at moisture contents in the range of the optimum moisture content
(OMC) to 3 percent above the OMC, and to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density
determined in the Standard Proctor compaction test, ASTM D 698.
■ Soils used to backfill utilities located in grass areas shall be compacted at OMC to 3 percent
above the OMC, and to at least 90 percent of the maximum dry density determined in the
Standard Proctor compaction test, ASTM D 698.
■ Provisions should be made to discourage the possibility that utility trenches will serve as
pathways for water to migrate from areas outside of the building area to beneath the building
structure following completion of construction. Sloping the bottom of the utility trench away
from the structure and the use of anti -seep collars should be considered.
44
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Stabilization procedures should be in accordance with the SDHPT Item 260, Lime Treatment
For Material Used As Subgrade (Road Mixed), Type A Treatment specification, or Item 265,
Lime -Fly Ash (LFA) Treatment For Materials Used As Subgrade. Modifications to this
specification should include a minimum of 48 hours of tempering time before final mixing, a
minimum of 60% of the lime/soil mixture passing a No. 4 sieve before compaction, and a
restriction against the use of carbide or byproduct lime.
The stabilized layer should extend at least 3 ft beyond the curb or pavement edge. This
extension of the stabilized area will assist in the formation of a moisture barrier and will help
reduce moisture fluctuations in the underlying expansive soils.
■ Compaction of the stabilized soils or structural fill meeting the requirements presented here
should be at moisture contents within the range of 1% below to 3% above the optimum
moisture content, inclusive. Density should be at least 95% of the maximum dry density as
determined by the standard Proctor compaction test, ASTM D 698.
■ The recommended percentages of lime, fly ash, and cement to be admixed with the subgrade
soils should be confirmed by specific laboratory tests performed at the time of construction.
9.5 DRILLED -FOOTING EXCAVATIONS
In general, the installation of deep foundation elements should be pursued in accordance with
procedures outlined in The Deep Foundations Institute, Drilled Shaft Inspector's Manual, 1989. The
following criteria should be followed during design and construction of the drilled footings, if used:
■ The drilled footings should be checked for size and inspected to ensure that all loose material
has been removed prior to placement of the concrete. Precautions should be taken during
placement of the reinforcement and concrete to prevent any loose, excavated soil from
entering the excavation.
■ Prompt placement of concrete into the excavation, as soon as the excavation is completed,
cleaned, and inspected, is strongly recommended. The actual time period between final
underreaming activities will vary depending upon construction sequence, but should not
exceed one hour. Under no circumstances should a footing be drilled that cannot be filled
with concrete before the end of the workday.
■ The reinforcing steel cage placed in the shaft should extend to within 3 inches of the base of
the shaft. The cage should be designed from the standpoint of meeting three requirements:
(1) structural requirements for column or for wall loads imposed by the supported structure;
(2) swelling force requirements of the upper potentially volumetrically active clays in the
stratigraphy; and (3) stability requirements during placement of the concrete.
■ Verification of the construction process and the dimensional characteristics of the piers or
footings should be performed as part of the project quality assurance (QA) program.
■ Provisions should be made for the use of casing in the event groundwater or sloughing of the
excavation soils occurs during installation.
43
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Soils containing an excessive amount of silt (i.e., greater than approximately 20 to 25
percent) should not be used unless there is a corresponding percentage of clay to "balance"
the potential negative effects of the silt.
■ Compaction of the structural fill should be at a moisture content in the range of the OMC to a
maximum of 3% above the OMC, inclusive, and should be placed in lifts not to exceed 6
inches in compacted thickness. Density should be at least 95% of the maximum dry density
as determined by the Standard Proctor compaction test, ASTM D 698.
■ Compaction characteristics of the fill should be verified by in -place density tests. The tests
should be performed on each 6-inch-thick lift at an average rate of one test for every 2,000 ft2
of plan area.
9.4 PAVEMENT SUBGRADE STABILIZATION REQUIREMENTS
The pavement design recommendations presented in a previous section were developed assuming
that the various materials would comply with the material requirements and be constructed in accordance
with the specifications listed below. The specifications include recommendations for chemical
stabilization of the subgrade soils in the paved areas. If the subgrade soils in the paving area at the site
are wet and not easily workable at the time of construction, the soils can also be chemically stabilized as
-a-construction expedient.
■ A minimum depth of stabilization of 6 inches is recommended.
The pavement subgrade soils will likely consist of clays of high plasticity (i.e., PI > 20).
These soils should be stabilized with Type A hydrated lime or Type C quick lime. For
preliminary planning purposes, the amount of lime to be added to the soils can be estimated
to be approximately 6 percent. The percentage is measured with respect to dry soil unit
weight. For example, for a subgrade soil layer of 6 inches in thickness that has a unit dry
weight of approximately 100 pcf, approximately 27 lb/yd2 of hydrated lime should be used in
the mixture. However, we recommend that specific "lime series" tests be performed to
identify the optimum percentage of lime to be mixed with the subgrade soils to achieve the
desired subgrade layer improvement.
In any of the pavement subgrade soils consists of clayey sands of intermediate plasticity (i.e.,
7 < PI <20), these intermediate plasticity soils should be stabilized with a mixture of Type A
hydrated lime or Type C quick and Class C fly ash in equal parts. We recommend that 3%
hydrated lime and 3% fly ash be used. The percentages are measured with respect to dry soil
unit weight. For example, for a subgrade soil layer of 6 inches in thickness that has a unit dry
weight of approximately 100 pcf, approximately 13.5 lb/yd2 of hydrated lime and 13.5 lb/yd2
Of fly ash should be used in the mixture.
■ Similarly, in the unlikely event that nearly "pure" granular soils of low plasticity (i.e., PI < 7)
are present in some of the areas to be paved, these soils should be stabilized with Class C fly
ash at a rate of 10% as measured by dry weight of soil (36 Ib/yd2 for a lift of 6 inches
thickness). Alternately, Type I Portland cement may be used in lieu of Class C fly ash at a
rate of 18 lb/yd2.
42
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
procedures for select fill as outlined in Section 9.3 of this report. The building pad should be of uniform
thickness as previously discussed and the building pad should extend to at least 5 ft outside of the
proposed building line as depicted in Plate 1. If the clays within the depth zone of potential moisture
variation are excavated and replaced to varying depths, the magnitude of differential movements will
increase across the building area. Excavated soils may be left on -site and used as general fill in areas that
are not designated for future expansion.
Site Drainage. It is critical to foundation performance that an adequate stormwater drainage
system be installed around the building area. Poor building performance has been experienced when
stormwater runoff has not been adequately controlled. We recommend that the building pad be elevation
around all of the surrounding ground elevations. In addition, the finished surface grade around the
building should be sloped at downward grades of at least 5 percent for a horizontal distance of at least 10
ft from the face of the building to assure positive drainage away from the building. If possible, the area
immediately surrounding the building should be paved with sidewalks, patio slabs, etc. to encourage
stormwater runoff away from the building and to serve as a horizontal moisture barrier against loss of
moisture from the foundation soils. In addition, we recommend that stormwater collected from the
building roofs in peripheral gutters and routed through downspouts or roof drains to the ground surface
should be "tight -lined" and routed to the subsurface drainage system or to paved parking areas away from
the building prior to discharging. We also recommend that trees, deep-rooted shrubs, or general
landscaping beds that require irrigation waterings should not be placed in the area immediately
surrounding the building. The additional sources of moisture loss (tree root systems) or gain (landscape
waterings) typically associated with such plantings should not be introduced around the foundation
system. If moisture is introduced into the building area it can pond within the building pad, especially if
the pad included an excavation. The ponded water can migrate downward and produce swelling of clays
below the traditional zone of seasonal moisture change. Any large trees planned as part of the
landscaping plan should not be planted within a distance from the building equal to one-half of the
mature height of the tree or shrub.
9.3 STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL SELECTION AND PLACEMENT PROCEDURES
Structural fill placed in the building pad and in other areas of the site should meet the following
criteria with respect to material and placement requirements for the fill:
■ Selected fill material, placed beneath the proposed structure or paved surfaces for the pur-
pose of replacing excavated material or for raising the grade, should consist of a low -
plasticity material with a PI between 7 and 15.
41
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
9.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS
General construction recommendations for the proposed project are offered in the following
subsections for consideration. These items should be considered "minimum standards" and are intended
to be used in conjunction with project specifications.
9.1 SITE PREPARATION
All surface vegetation, including all major root systems, beneath the proposed building pad or
proposed paved areas should be excavated and removed from the site. Excavated topsoils may be
segregated for landscape plantings in other areas of the site. Any existing organic materials or "muck"
that may be present within former drainage swales or ponds on the site should also be removed. Any
remaining materials that were associated with the former agricultural structures on the site, including all
foundation system elements and abandoned utilities, should be removed from the site to minimize
interference with the proposed construction and potential negative impacts on the proposed structure or
pavement systems.
All surfaces exposed after the stripping of the vegetation should then be proof -rolled with a 10-
ton pneumatic roller or equivalent vehicle and any identified soft or weak areas removed and replaced
with compacted select fill that is placed in accordance with the recommendations presented in Section
9.3. Overexcavated areas or areas of depressions created by the removal of tree root bulbs, the removal of
existing foundation elements or utilities, should also be backfilled with compacted select fill. The
subgrade soils should then be compacted to between 95 percent and 100 percent of the maximum density
determined by the Standard Proctor compaction test (ASTM D 698) at moisture contents in the range of
the optimum moisture content (OMC) to 3 percent above the OMC. Compaction characteristics of the fill
should be verified by in -place density tests. The tests should be performed at an average rate of one test
for every 2,000 ftZ of plan subgrade area.
9.2 GENERAL BUILDING PAD CONSTRUCTION AND SITE DEVELOPMENT
Building Pad Construction. As previously discussed, some success in limiting building
foundation movements has been achieved when the building is supported on a thick building pad of
select fill which encourages moisture migration away from the building area. The building pad should be
constructed of select, non -expansive structural fill that conforms to the requirement and placement
40
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
exposures, such as Sonoborn SL-I, should be used. A periodic inspection program should be conducted
to identify the formation of cracks, eroded areas, and other indications of pavement distress, such as ruts,
pot holes, areas of ponded water, etc. The need for possible patching and overlaying of the pavement
system should be anticipated over the expected life of the pavement.
39
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
transferring loads across joints. Adequate jointing of the concrete pavement should be included in the
design and construction of the pavement system. Concrete pavement should be segmented by the use of
control joints placed a maximum distance of 15 ft each way. Keyed and doweled longitudinal joints
should be located in all roadway sections greater than one lane (10 to 13 ft) in width. Expansion and/or
construction joints should be placed at a maximum spacing of 100-ft intervals. Expansion joints should
not be placed through the middle of area inlet boxes in the pavement. Isolation joints should be placed
between the pavement and all existing or permanent structures (such as drainage inlets). All joints should
be sealed with Sonoborn Sonolastic SL1 (or equivalent) to minimize infiltration of surface water to the
underlying subgrade soils.
The exterior boundary of the base course layer or the chemically stabilized subgrade layer should
extend at least 2 ft beyond the edge of the pavement surface layer. This extension should help to
minimize the formation of edge cracks in the pavement system due to either a lack of boundary support
under wheel loads (especially for flexible pavement systems) or due to shrinking of subgrade soils away
from the outer edge of the pavement during dry weather and subsequent loss of subgrade support.
8.5 PAVEMENT SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
8.5.1 Pavement Drainage
The control of surface and groundwater is a critical factor in the performance of a pavement
system. Adequate surface and subsurface drainage provisions should be included in the pavement design
scheme. Drainage provisions may include, among other things, the following: a steeply graded pavement
surface to quickly transport stormwater to collection or discharge points; an adequate number of
stormwater catch basins or curb inlets in the paved areas to capture the stormwater; and adequately sized
stormwater sewer piping. In addition, for pavement systems placed in cut areas where water may be
seeping from the bottom of the cut into the adjacent subgrade layers, the need for interceptor ditches or
subsurface "French" drains should be considered. Finally, landscaping or "green" areas and other
potential sources for moisture infiltration within the limits of the parking area should be minimized.
8.5.2 Pavement Maintenance
The owner should institute and budget for a regular maintenance program for the paved areas.
Regular pavement maintenance is a prerequisite for achieving acceptable performance levels over the
anticipated life of the pavement system. Cracks occurring in the surface course of the pavement should
be sealed as soon as they occur in order to minimize stormwater infiltration into the underlying pavement
system layers and subsequent degradation of performance. Sealants that can withstand exterior
38
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Table 4. Pavement Thickness Schedule for Portland Cement Concrete Sections in Collector Lanes
Thickness (in) t Material Description
6.0 Reinforced concrete surface course
6.0 Compacted chemically -stabilized subgrade soils or limestone
screenings
12.0 Total constructed pavement thickness
Notes:
1. The design section for entrances to adjoining property driveways and tie-ins to intersecting city and state roadways may differ from those
presented in the table, and should be established based on applicable requirements.
2. Concrete assumed to have a minimum modulus of rupture (as determined in a third point beam loading test) corresponding to 600 psi
(approximately equivalent to concrete with a 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi).
3. The requirements for compaction and chemical stabilization of the subgrade soils or limestone screenings are presented in Section 9.
The recommended pavement thickness sections represent minimum required thicknesses for the
planned main roadway or collector lanes for the project. Tie-ins to existing streets or highways should be
made in accordance with or applicable city/state design criteria, which may include thicker pavement
sections, or with the recommended sections presented Table 4, which is more stringent.
Table S. Pavement Thickness Schedule for Portland Cement Concrete Sections in Parking Space
Areas
Thickness (in) t Material Description
5.0 Reinforced concrete surface course
6.0 Compacted chemically -stabilized subgrade soils or limestone
screenings
11.0 Total constructed pavement thickness
Notes:
1. The design section for entrances to adjoining property driveways and tie-ins to intersecting city and state roadways may differ from those
presented in the table, and should be established based on applicable requirements.
2. Concrete assumed to have a minimum modulus of rupture (as determined in a third point beam loading test) corresponding to 600 psi
(approximately equivalent to concrete with a 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi).
3. The requirements for compaction and chemical stabilization of the subgrade soils or limestone screenings are presented in Section 9.
The computed reduced rigid pavement section thicknesses for the parking areas are presented in
Table 5 should only be used if heavy truck traffic is prohibited from using the parking lot areas, including
turning around within the parking areas. Otherwise, even a few passes by heavy trucks over the thinner
pavement sections may produce distress in the pavement.
J
All of the concrete paving should be reinforced with steel reinforcing bars to minimize
temperature and shrinkage cracking, to discourage widening of any cracks that may form, and to aid in
37
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
However, current design of pavement systems is typically related to the subgrade soil resilient
modulus (MR) and not the CBR value. Research by the Corps of Engineers indicates that there is a
correlation between the CBR of subgrade and the MR and that that relationship can be represented by the
following equation:
MR= 1,500 x CBR value
On the other hand, independent research performed by state agencies as part of the AASHTO
pavement study indicates that a more representative strength relationship can be expressed by the
following equation:
MR = 800 x CBR value
The more conservative relationship developed by the state agencies was used to develop
anticipated strength characteristics for the subgrade soils. The lowest CBR value for chemically
stabilized and compacted natural soils was used in the equation.
As previously discussed, based upon the soil classification test results for the different borings
adross the site, it is likely that a significant percentage of the subgrade soils will consist of high plasticity
clays. Therefore, a CBR value of 6 was chosen as representative of high plasticity clays that have been
chemically stabilized and compacted to a depth of at least 6 inches to improve the support capacity for
the subgrade layer. The soil resilient modulus corresponding to the CBR value of 6 was determined to be
approximately 4,800 pounds per square inch.
8.4 PAVEMENT THICKNESS REQUIREMENTS
Using the previously described traffic conditions and subgrade soil layer properties, the required
total pavement thicknesses were computed for a rigid pavement system for both the collector or drive
lane areas and for the parking areas.
The computed rigid pavement section thicknesses for the collector lanes are presented in Table 4
and the computed rigid pavement section thicknesses for the parking areas are presented in Table 5.
36
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
clays, should be stabilized with Type A hydrated lime. The lower plasticity clayey sands or select fill
soils may also be stabilized with Type A hydrated lime if the soils have a PI value of at least 10.
Otherwise, the lower plasticity soils should be stabilized with a mixture of Type A hydrated lime and a
small percentage of Class C fly ash as described in Section 9. The percentages of lime and fly ash to be
used for stabilization of the subgrade soils should be determined by specific laboratory tests once final
grading operations are complete and the actual subgrade soils are exposed. In the absence of such tests
and given the nature of the near -surface soils across the site, we recommend that site development plans
consider the use of a subgrade soil stabilizing agent consisting of approximately 6 percent hydrated lime
or a mixture of 3 percent hydrated lime and 3 percent Class C fly ash.
Pavement Subgrade Soils Support Capacity. The support characteristics of the subgrade soils in
the planned paved areas were estimated based on correlations between soil classification test indices and
soil support values, such as resilient soil moduli and California Bearing Ratio (CBR) values. Specifically,
the soil classification indices developed from the laboratory tests conducted on the surficial soils at the
boring locations for this study were compared to the indices of other similar soils that had been
chemically stabilized and for which soil moduli were previously determined. For example, natural CH
type soils typically exhibit a CBR value of 2 and SC type soils can be correlated with a CBR value of 10.
Chemical stabilization of the soils with hydrated lime, fly ash, a mixture of lime and fly ash, and/or
Portland cement and subsequent compaction of the soils will normally increase the CBR value. In the
case of the CH type soils, the increase in the CBR value was estimated to be in the range of 6 to 8.
The support capacity of the subgrade soils is frequently expressed in terms of either a California
Bearing Ratio (CBR) or a modulus of subgrade reaction. No specific tests to determine a CBR or a
modulus of subgrade reaction were performed. Rather, the CBR and the modulus of subgrade reaction
used in design were based upon correlations between soil classification indices and CBR or soil modulus
values for various types of soils. Specifically, the soil classification values developed from the laboratory
tests conducted on the natural subgrade soils for this investigation were compared to the classification
values of other soils for which CBR and soil modulus values were previously determined. The CBR
value was determined for soils that had been chemically stabilized and compacted. The comparison pro-
duced a CBR value of approximately 4. Correlations of CBR values and soil resilient modulus values
were used to calculate a soil resilient modulus value of approximately 3,200 psi for chemically stabilized
and compacted lean clays.
Due to the potential loss of support from the subgrade soils due to wet conditions, we assumed in
our analysis that the subgrade soils would be chemically stabilized and compacted to a depth of at least 6
inches to improve the support capacity for the subgrade layer.
35
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
minimum depth of 6 inches in accordance with the provisions of a subsequent section of this report), and
assumed typical rigid paving material strength properties and reliability factors. The ESALs were
computed for a 20-year design period based upon the estimated average daily traffic count of 6 medium
to heavy weight trucks and 100 passenger vehicles and light trucks in the main drive or collector lanes.
Using the indicated design values, the rigid pavement ESALs were calculated to be less than 100,000
ESALs for the rigid pavement section. This ESAL was used to determine the recommended pavement
section thickness in the proposed drive or collector lanes.
8.3 SUBGRADE CLASSIFICATION
Types of Pavement Subgrade Soils. The surficial soils encountered at the boring locations across
the site were variable and consisted of clayey sands and silty sands in the proposed paved areas and of fat
clays in the proposed building area. Except for the silty sands present at the boring B-2 location, the
surface soils at the other two boring locations exhibited PI values of at least 11. In addition, we anticipate
that there will be several feet of cut at the front of the site where boring B-2 was located in order to
develop final site grades. Consequently, based upon the soils encountered at the boring locations and the
assumption that the soils in the surficial zone will be removed from the site as part of the planned site
grading operations, the soils that will comprise the paving subgrade layer are expected to consist of clays
or sandy clays of high plasticity or of clayey sands of low plasticity. It is also possible that the paving
subgrade soils will consist of select fill soils of low plasticity. Consequently, the strength of the subgrade
soils was based upon the assumption that the high plasticity clays or low plasticity clayey sands would
comprise the subgrade materials.
Chemical Stabilization of Pavement Subgrade Soils. The addition and processing of chemical -
stabilizing agents, such as Portland cement, fly ash, and/or hydrated lime, into the subgrade soils can
J
increase the strength and volumetric stability of the soils within the treated subgrade zone, especially
with compaction of the chemically -altered soils. Consequently, we strongly recommend that the subgrade
soils be chemically stabilized. The addition and processing of the chemical -stabilizing agents into the
subgrade soils can increase the strength and volumetric stability of the soils within the treated subgrade
zone, especially with compaction of the chemically -altered soils. Due to the potential loss of support
from the subgrade soils due to wet conditions, we assumed in our analysis that the subgrade soils would
be chemically stabilized and compacted to a depth of at least 6 inches to improve the support capacity for
the subgrade layer.
As discussed in detail in Section 9 of this report, the type and quantity of chemical stabilization
will depend upon the nature of the subgrade soils. Potentially expansive soils, such as the high plasticity
34
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
l Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
8.0 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS
8.1 GENERAL DISCUSSION OF PROJECT PAVED AREAS
The main drive or collector lanes and the parking areas associated with the proposed fire station
relocation are expected to be paved as part of the proposed project. We understand that only rigid
pavement sections composed of PCC are being considered.
The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) design
procedure was used to compute pavement thickness requirements for the rigid pavement sections planned
for the main drive or collector lanes and the parking lot areas. The anticipated traffic loads and the load -
carrying characteristics of the subgrade soils were used to determine required constructed thicknesses for
the proposed rigid pavement section that is to consist of a reinforced Portland cement concrete surface
course over a chemically stabilized subgrade soil layer.
.8.2 ANTICIPATED PROJECT PAVEMENT USE AND VEHICLE TRAFFIC
CHARACTERISTICS
The anticipated traffic conditions for the proposed fire station relocation were presented in
Section 1 of this report. As previously discussed, the assumed traffic pattern over the design pavement
section in the main drive or collector lanes is expected to consist of 6 passes per day by medium to heavy
weight trucks and 100 passes per day by light passenger vehicles and trucks plus other emergency
vehicles and solid waste collection trucks.
The traffic loading of the proposed paved collector lanes was calculated assuming that only rigid
pavement sections with a Portland cement concrete (PCC) surface will be employed for the project. The
loading is expressed as a unit term known as the equivalent 18 kips single -axle load, or ESALs. ESALs
provide a means of expressing traffic loading from numerous types of vehicles with various axle
configurations and loadings in terms of unit 18 kips single -axle loads. Thus, every vehicle, no matter
what the axle loading, can be expressed as a number of 18 kips equivalent single -axle load units. For
example, passenger cars with single -axle loads of 1 kip can have an ESAL of 0.00018, whereas a large
truck with a single -axle loading of 20 kips can have an ESAL of 1.51.
The traffic calculations utilized the previously discussed traffic conditions, the assumed subgrade
strength properties (assuming that the subgrade soils will be chemically stabilized and compacted to a
33
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
7.3 SUBGRADE-SUPPORTED FLOOR SLAB SYSTEM
The subgrade-supported floor system will have to be stiffened and reinforced to minimize
distress due to possible subgrade soil movements as described in Section 5.2.
Although there is always an inherent risk of movement of a subgrade-supported slab system,
some success has been achieved with such systems in this area when the slab is supported on a thick pad
of select, volumetrically stable fill soils, especially when the pad is constructed by excavating some of
the existing high plasticity soils and replacing them with select fill. In addition, some effort to control the
moisture regime around the building should be made during the general construction of the building pad
and the formulation of the grading and drainage scheme for the site by following the recommendations
previously presented in Section 5.3.1 and subsequently discussed in Section 9.
In addition to site considerations, there are some considerations involved in the design of the
building that can be employed to minimize the potential effects of the potential shrink -swell movements
of the subgrade soils on sensitive architectural features of the proposed building, such as exterior
entryways, glass walls or windows, or interior block walls. The superstructure and architectural elements
of the proposed building should be designed to accommodate the predicted movements. For example,
architectural elements that could exhibit distress, such as exterior stone or brick walls, should be avoided,
if possible, and wood exteriors or isolated masonry panels used in lieu of continuous masonry walls. If
masonry walls are desired in a structure, there should be frequent jointing of the wall, especially above
doorways and around windows and other wall openings to allow for some potential movement without
cracking of the masonry features. Also, the use of window frames with caulked gaps between the glass
windows and the surrounding metal frames should be considered.
Similarly, jointing of interior dry walls above door and window openings and the use of slip
joints and flexible comer clips between dry wall panels may be incorporated into the building plans to
provide for some movement. Similarly, the creation of an air gap between the tops of interior non -load
bearing walls and the overhead roof system has also been employed to permit some movement of the
floor slab without distress to the wall. Still another example of detailing to accommodate potential
foundation movement is the use of geotextile reinforcement layers for floor tile bedding or underlayment
layers. In addition, the slab may be lightly doweled into exterior structural grade beams to minimize
potential interference with door functioning associated with slab movement. Finally, the use of flexible
plumbing connections can help reduce potential leakage frequently associated with slab movements.
32
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
7.0 SPECIFIC FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS - DRILLED PIER,
SUPPORT OF GRADE BEAMS AND COLUMNS, WITH SUBGRADE-
SUPPORTED FLOOR SLAB (TYPE II FOUNDATION SYSTEM)
7.1 GENERAL
Although a structurally suspended slab system is the most affirmative means to support the
structure loads while minimizing the potential detrimental effects of expansive soils, cost considerations
for this type of foundation may discourage its use and dictate that consideration be given to other types of
foundation systems, provided that some increased risk of unsatisfactory performance can be accepted.
Support for the proposed building could also be achieved by utilizing drilled piers for support of
load bearing or movement -sensitive walls, while also using a subgrade-supported slab for the floor
system in lieu of a structural slab as is illustrated for the Type II foundation on Plate 2. Any exterior
masonry walls and other movement -sensitive walls should be supported on structural grade beams
-.spanning between the piers as previously recommended for the structural floor system. However, the
floor system itself may be supported on a prepared subgrade of soils as discussed in the following
paragraphs.
The floor system may consist of a concrete slab supported directly on a prepared pad of
volumetrically stable soils. The pad of volumetrically stable soils should be created by excavation of
some of the existing highly plastic clays and replacement of those potentially volumetrically active soils
with more stable select fill soils, as previously discussed. The slab should also be stiffened and designed
to accommodate whatever potential total vertical movements and differential movements may still occur
even with the pad. It is important to note that the success of this type of foundation system will be
dependent on the depth of high plasticity soils that are removed from the site and replaced with select fill
soils and also the extent to which the moisture regime in the vicinity of the building can be controlled
through site grading and stormwater management techniques.
7.2 PIER AND STRUCTURAL GRADE BEAM DESIGN VALUES
The piers should be designed based upon the recommendations presented in Section 6 of this
report. Structural grade beams should be used for support of movement -sensitive walls, such as masonry
walls. Recommendations concerning structural grade beams were also presented in Section 6.
31
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
construction, a permanent void space of at least 6 inches should be maintained between the bottom of the
slab/beam and the underlying soils.
30
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
deeper casing to seal off the pier excavations from groundwater infiltration and caving soils should be
anticipated. In any event, whether the piers are installed with or without casing, we strongly recommend
that pier reinforcement be inserted into the excavation immediately after drilling is complete and that
there be no delays in the placement of concrete into the pier excavation. Typically, the shorter the period
of time that a pier excavation remains open, the lower the possibility that problems with groundwater
migration into the excavation or caving of pier sidewalls will occur. The longer a pier excavation remains
open, the greater the possibility that problems will occur in maintaining the stability of the excavation. In
any event, no pier excavation should remain open (i.e., not filled with concrete) at the end of construction
activities on any day. Typically, the shorter the period of time that a pier excavation remains open, the
lower the possibility that problems with groundwater migration into the excavation or with caving of pier
sidewalls will occur.
Other recommendations concerning pier construction are presented in Section 9 of this report.
6.3 STRUCTURAL FLOOR SLAB SYSTEM
We recommend the use of a structural floor system as the most positive means of support for the
floor area of the proposed building. The structurally suspended floor slab (including exterior and interior
"grade" beams that will be supporting load bearing and movement -sensitive walls) should be designed
with a permanent void space of at least 6 inches between the soil and the bottom of the slab/beam to iso-
late these structural elements from the potentially expansive soils.
The beams may be formed with a void space between the bottom of the beam and the subgrade
soils created by using conventional wooden forms or metal forms. Alternately, wax -coated carton forms
can be placed beneath the bottoms of the beams to create the void space. The carton forms should only be
used if the beams are poured soon after placement of the carton forms in the excavated beam trench, and
only if the trench is not allowed to fill with water in the interim. The presence of water in the trench
excavations can cause collapse of the cardboard carton forms. The carton forms should be sufficiently
strong to withstand the weight of the concrete placed in the beams without collapsing. Suitable rigid
protective shielding made of plastic or concrete should be installed along the outside edge of the grade
beams to minimize sloughing of soils into the void space and compromising of the clear distance between
the bottom of the beams and the underlying soils.
The floor slab can be integrally cast with the "beams" in a metal pan or wood form system.
Alternately, the floor system can be constructed of precast, reinforced concrete panels with tops of the
panels being sealed with a minimum 2-inch concrete topping. Regardless of the selected method of
29
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
6.2.5 Design of Drilled Piers — Upward Acting Tensile Forces on Pier
Tensile steel reinforcement will be required in the pier shaft to resist the uplift forces on the pier.
Uplift forces may potentially be generated by swelling of the near -surface clays as they adhere to the
upper portions of the pier within a zone extending from the ground surface to a depth of approximately
10 ft and attempt to move the pier in an upward direction. The magnitude of the vertical uplift force due
to swelling can be calculated by assuming that a soil -to -pier adhesion value of 2,000 psf is acting in an
upward direction on the sides of the pier shaft within the depth range extending from the ground surface
to a depth of approximately 10 ft.
6.2.6 Design of Drilled Piers — Construction Consideration
The pier shaft diameter should be at least 18 inches in order to facilitate cleaning and inspection
during construction. As previously indicated, the bases of the piers should be belled or underreamed both
to provide an anchor against potential uplift forces and to create a larger bearing area. A maximum bell -
to -shaft diameter ratio of 2 should be maintained in order to provide increased stability for the sidewalls
of the bell excavation (i.e., the diameter of the bell should not be greater than 2 times the diameter of the
shaft).
It is important to realize that there is a potential for groundwater conditions to influence
construction activities associated with pier installation. Although there was no groundwater encountered
during the field exploration within the depth zone planned for pier construction, the possibility exists that
groundwater conditions will change by the time of construction, especially if the piers are constructed
during the wetter seasons of the year. The magnitude of groundwater influence will be somewhat
dependent upon the time of construction and the antecedent moisture conditions. Also, there may be a
tendency for the clayey sands along the sidewalls of the pier excavations to "slough -off' or cave into the
open excavations. Accordingly, the potential need for casing to advance the pier excavations through the
clayey sands and down to the founding clay formation should be anticipated by the drilled shaft
contractor. The casing can also effectively seal off the pier excavations from groundwater infiltration
into open pier excavation. In addition, the need to extend the founding depths of the piers several
additional feet into the founding clay formation in order to permit belling of the pier bases to avoid
conflicts between the bottom of the embedded casing and the top of the belling tool should also be
anticipated.
Accordingly, it is recommended that consideration be given to the installation of a "test" pier on
an outlying site element (e.g., sign, a canopy, light standard, etc.) to identify appropriate installation
techniques. Without the installation of a test pier, the probable need for surface casing and possibly even
28
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
other loads (live load, wind load, seismic load, thermal load, etc.) that produces the highest total or
maximum loading of the pier. The sustained or continuous load condition refers to the combination of
dead load with continuously applied or sustained live load that the pier will have to support on a
"regular" or continuous basis. Most settlement computations are based on the magnitudes of continuous
or sustained loading.
Pier base dimensioning for exterior or interior bearing wall loads should be in accordance with
unit allowable bearing capacities corresponding to the most severe loading condition. The recommended
net allowable unit bearing values incorporate the indicated factors of safety with respect to the theoretical
ultimate bearing capacity.
Table 3. Recommended Unit Net Allowable Bearing Pressures for Pier Foundation Elements
FOUNDING
DEPTH
RECOMMENDED NET ALLOWABLE BEARING PRESSURE,'
pounds per square foot
Maximum or Total Loading
Sustained or Continuous Loading
Factor of Safety of 2
Factor of Safety of 3
18 ft
5,000 psf
3,300 psf
Notes:
1. Recommended allowable bearing pressures were rounded to the nearest 100 pounds per square foot (pso.
6.2.3 Design of Drilled Piers — Positive Skin Friction
The magnitude of skin friction or side resistance along the sides of the pier that can be
considered as resisting applied axial loads will depend upon several factors, some of which include the
type of soil along the sides of the pier, the length and geometry of the pier (i.e., straight shaft or belled
pier), and the type of pier construction (i.e., installed dry or with casing or with drilling mud). Due to the
relatively short length of the piers for this project and the probability that the bases of the piers will be
belled, we do not recommend that a positive skin friction resistance component be utilized in computing
pier capacity.
6.2.4 Design of Drilled Piers — Pier Settlement
The anticipated magnitudes of sustained or continuously applied structural loads to the piers are
expected to be relatively small. Therefore, pier settlement under the anticipated magnitudes of sustained
loading is also expected to be relatively small and elastic in nature. We estimate that maximum
settlement of the piers under the anticipated magnitudes of sustained loading for the proposed structure
will be 0.5 inches or less.
27
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
6.0 SPECIFIC FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS - DRILLED PIER AND
STRUCTURAL FLOOR FOUNDATION SYSTEM (TYPE I FOUNDATION
SYSTEM)
6.1 GENERAL
The most affirmative means of support for the proposed structure at the subject site would be to
use a combination drilled pier foundation and structural floor system. A brief discussion of recommended
design values for the foundation system elements is presented in the following paragraphs.
6.2 DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS
6.2.1 Design of Drilled Piers — Founding Depth and Founding Formation
Positive support of the structural loads of the proposed building can be obtained by using isolated
drilled piers. We recommend that the piers be founded at a depth of 18 ft below the surface grade
existing at the site at the time of the field study. Based upon the single boring drilled within the planned
building location at the site, soils at the recommended founding depth are expected to consist of stiff to
hard, tan, fat clays.
We also recommend that the bases of the piers be enlarged by the construction of a bell or
underream. The bell or underream will provide an anchor for the pier against possible uplift forces
generated by swelling soils within the upper portion of the stratigraphy. The presence of the bell will also
provide increased bearing area for the pier for greater compression load capacity. Formations of clayey
sands were present above the founding depth. Although sands can sometimes present stability problems
for drilled pier excavations, the high clay content in the sands should permit the drilled pier excavation to
remain stable for a short period of time necessary to reach the founding depth and place concrete in the
pier. Other recommendations concerning installation of the piers are offered in a subsequent section of
this report.
6.2.2 Design of Drilled Piers — Allowable Unit Bearing Pressures
We recommend that the base areas of the piers be proportioned based upon the unit net allowable
bearing pressures presented in Table 3 for two loading conditions: (1) maximum or total loading; and (2)
sustained or continuous loading. The maximum load condition refers to the combination of dead load and
26
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
supported slab floor system (Type II — Plate 2) can be considered. The drilled piers and structural grade
beams should be used to support load bearing and movement -sensitive walls. The subgrade-supported
floor system can be employed if the magnitudes of potential shrink -swell movements are significantly
reduced through site grading by employing the previously discussed excavation and replacement
techniques. In addition, the remaining potential shrink -swell movements will have to be considered in
design by heavily reinforcing and otherwise stiffening the floor system to accommodate the predicted
movements. Also, some risk of distress to the floor system will have to be accepted by the owner and
designer.
Design values for each type of foundation system discussed are presented in the following
sections of this report.
25
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
5.3.1 Advantages and Disadvantages of the Various Foundation Systems
The most affirmative means of support for structures located at sites with stratigraphies
composed, at least in part, of soils with significant shrink -swell potential would be to use a foundation
system composed of deep drilled piers with a structural floor system (Type I — Plate 2). The main
superstructure loads are supported by drilled piers that penetrate the upper potentially volumetrically
active soil strata and are founded in the deeper, stable clay stratum below the zone of seasonal moisture
change. The piers are typically constructed with a widened base, called a bell or underream, to provide an
anchor for the base of the pier against potential uplift forces along the upper portion of the pier. The
structural floor system is typically supported by the piers and suspended over a void space, thus freeing
the floor from contact with the potentially volumetrically active soils.
Although a structurally suspended slab system is the most affirmative means to support the floor
loads of building while minimizing the potential detrimental effects of expansive soils, cost
considerations frequently discourage the use of a structural floor system and dictate that consideration be
given to other foundation systems, such as a subgrade-supported slab system used in combination with
drilled piers and structural grade beams that support movement -sensitive exterior walls (Type II — Plate
2). Although there is always the risk of movement of a subgrade-supported slab system, some success has
been achieved with such systems in this area when the slab is supported on a thick pad of select,
volumetrically stable fill soils. The building pad is elevated above the surrounding ground surface to
discourage the ponding of moisture at the building location and a deliberate effort is made in the
formulation of the site development design to control moisture conditions around the building. Moisture
control efforts primarily involve site -grading plans that are formulated to ensure a positive flow of
stormwater runoff away from the building as discussed in Section 9 of this report. Another type of
foundation system that is sometimes utilized is a shallow foundation system with foundation elements
composed of grade beams and spread footings or widened portions of grade beams that are founded in the
shallow foundation soils (Type III — Plate 2). However, we understand that such shallow foundation
systems are not being considered by the owner or designer for the structure planned at the project site.
5.4 RECOMMENDED TYPES OF FOUNDATION
We recommend that a drilled pier foundation system with a structural floor slab system be
utilized (Type I — Plate 2) as the most affirmative means of support for the proposed building at the
subject site. If the costs of constructing the drilled pier -structural floor system cannot be accommodated
within the project budget, then a drilled pier and structural grade beam foundation along with a subgrade-
24
�r---��----a-4
DRILLED PIER
I I
(TYPICAL)
_____________i,
STRUCTURAL SLAB FLOOR SYSTEM
STRUCTURAL
VOID BETWEEN
SLAB I
CONCRETE AND SOIL
IAI
A' FORMED BY CARDBOARD
CARTON FORMS
STRUCTURAL
GRADE 81
FORMED
I 1 VOID SPACE
I
I I
NATURAL SOIL SUBGRADE I 1 (e.g. CARTON FORMS)
�---- -J
\ �----ram i
Ply
STRUCTURAL GRADE BEAM DRILLED PIER
(SPANNING BETWEEN PIERS) (BEYOND SECTION A -A')
SECTION A -A'
TYPE I FOUNDATION SYSTEM: PIER AND STRUCTURAL FLOOR
I I
SUBGRADE SUPPORTED SLAB
DRILLED PIER
I I
(TYPICAL)
I
l
SUBGRADE
SUPPORTED SLAB I
NATURAL SOIL SUBGRADE
I B I
e' OR SELECT FILL PAD I I FORMED
STRUCTURAL
C
(COMPACTED) I I VOID SPACE
GRADE BEAMNL
I I
----- --_-ram __ j�
t.
STRUCTURAL GRADE BEAM DRILLED PIER
(SPANNING BETWEEN PIERS)
(BEYOND SECTION 8-B')
EL6ti
SECTION B-B'
TYPE II FOUNDATION SYSTEM: PIER/STRUCTURAL BEAM AND SUBGRADE SUPPORTED SLAB
I I I I I I
STIFFENED AND REINFORCED
I I I I I I
SUBGRADE SUPPORTED SLAB
L__J L__J L__J
I I I I I I
••
I I I I I I
L__J L__J L__J
C
C' ►,
EXTERIOR
I I I 11 I
NATURAL SOIL SUBGRADE GRADE BEAM
I I I
OR SELECT FILL PAD INTERIOR
(COMPACTED) GRADE BEAM
ELAN
SECTION C-C'
TYPE III FOUNDATION
SYSTEM: SHALLOW, STIFFENED SLAB AND GRADE BEAM
NOTE: SKETCHES ARE SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATIONS ONLY, SPECIFIC DETAILED DRAWINGS SHOULD BE DEVELOPED FOR INDIVIDUAL STRUCTURES.
Schematic Representation of
CME TESTIN
EEjZ-tNF_ERING, INC.
Various Types of Foundation Systems
PLATE 2
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Plate 2.
Types of Foundation Systems Considered
23
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
5.2.4 Potential Differential Shrink -Swell Movements
The magnitude of the vertical displacements due to volumetric changes in the surface and near -
surface clays may vary across a building area and subject site and may depend upon several factors,
including the following: (1) the subsurface stratigraphy at a particular location; (2) the existing moisture
content of the subsurface materials at the time of construction; (3) the magnitude and source of any
changes of the moisture regime in the building area following completion of construction; (4) the
thickness of new fill, if any, placed on the site; and (5) the depth of removal of any existing highly plastic
soils at the site. Due to these potential variations in conditions across the site, the potential differential
movements may be as large as approximately 75 percent of the predicted total vertical movements.
5.3 TYPES OF FOUNDATION SYSTEMS CONSIDERED
The range of potential vertical movements presented in Table 2 is significant and should be
considered in the design of the foundation system for the proposed structure. Accordingly, consideration
was given to foundation systems that would minimize the potential detrimental effects of such
.-movements. The different types of foundation considered for the proposed structure at the subject site are
illustrated on the accompanying Plate 2 and are discussed in the following sections of this report.
1. Drilled pier and structural suspended floor system (Type I — Plate 2)
2. Drilled pier and subgrade-supported floor system (Type II — Plate 2)
3. Shallow stiffened slab and grade beam foundation system supported on subgrade of
either natural soils or select fill soils (Type III — Plate 2)
The foundation systems are listed above in order of increasing risk of unsatisfactory performance
and decreasing cost of design/construction. For example, the first foundation system has the lowest
performance risk, but it also represents the most costly foundation system to construct. Conversely, the
last foundation system in the list has the greatest risk with respect to unsatisfactory performance, but is
also the least expensive to construct. The owner and designer should review the different types of
foundation systems and select the type of system that is most compatible with the owner's and designer's
performance expectations for the structure and the project construction budget that is established by the
owner.
22
PROP. BUILDING
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
�— 5,
MIN I 1—min
SECOND FLOOR
MIN. 5% SLOPE FOR
DRAINAGE AWAY FROM
BUILDING
USE SITE GRADING TECHNIQUES
SUCH AS INTERCEPTOR TRENCHES
AND BERMS TO MINIMIZE STORM
WATER FLOWS FROM UPPER
PORTIONS OF SLOPE TO BUILDING
LOCATION.
EXIST. SLOPING
GROUND SURFACE
APPROXIMATE EXISTING
SURFACE GRADE ACROSS FIRST FLOOR
BUILDING PAD AREA
ASSUME POSITIVE
DRAINAGE AWAY FRO \\ �\\ \ / \ / ,� DEPTH VARIES
BUILDING PAD \�\ /
\� \ \\���\%/�\/�\/��//,�//• /i. /. i.... PAD / 1
//\/�\/i\ / • I UNIFORM
THICKNESS
NOTES:
1. DEPTH OF EXCVATION ACROSS SLOPING GROUND SURFACE
WILL VARY TO PROVIDE UNIFORM BUILDING PAD THICKNESS.
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Plate 1.
Excavation of Existing Soils and Replacement with Select Fill Soils with
Building Pad on Sloping Ground Surface
21
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
' Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Table 2. Calculated Potential Vertical Movements for Various Depths of Excavation of Existing Soils
and Replacement with Select Fill Soils
Depth of Excavation Range in Potential
of Existing Fat Clays Vertical Movements Due
and Replacement to Shrinking or Swelling
With Select Fill Soils of the Foundation Soils
(feet) (inches) Comments
0 3.2 to 3.4 inches
2 1.9 to 2.1 inches
4 0.9 to 1.1 inches
Existing soils in present condition
Excavation and replacement of clays of extremely high
plasticity significantly reduces the PVR
Additional excavation and replacement of clays of very
high plasticity clays further reduces the PVR
6 0.4 to 0.6 inches Anticipated maximum practical depth of excavation and
replacement. Clays within this depth range exhibited high
plasticities at the building boring location.
As can be seen from a review of Table 2, the magnitude of potential vertical movements due to
shrinking or swelling of the near -surface clays will depend upon the selected depth for excavation and
replacement. In most instances the greater the depth of excavation and replacement, the greater will be
the reduction in potential vertical movement. However, it is worth noting that the most volumetrically
active soils are located with the depth range extending from the ground surface to approximately 4 ft
below the present surface grade. The further extension of the excavation and replacement of soil below a
depth of 4 ft will further reduce the potential PVR value.
5.2.3 General Building Pad Design and Construction Techniques
Consequently, if the excavation and replacement option is utilized at the site, we recommend that
the thickness of the pad be uniform across the entire building area as illustrated on the accompanying
Plate 1. In addition, if it is desired to reduce the potential vertical movement of the near -surface clay
formations through the excavation and replacement technique, we recommend that the general
recommendations for building pad construction described in Section 9 of this report be followed.
20
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
The computed potential PVR values are relatively high and are significant with respect to the
selection of an appropriate foundation system for the proposed building. The major portion of this
movement is attributable to the high plasticity clays present from the ground surface to a depth of
approximately 4 ft at the single boring location in the building area. As discussed in the subsequent
subsection of this report, the magnitude of the potential movements can be reduced if some of the
existing high plastic clays are excavated from the building area and replaced with compacted select fill
soils with a lower potential for movement.
5.2.2 Reduction in Magnitudes of Potential Shrink -Swell Movements through the "Excavation
and Replacement" Technique
A site development procedure referred to as the "excavation and replacement technique" could
be employed to significantly reduce the magnitude of potential volumetric movements of the foundation
soils. The "excavation and replacement technique" involves the excavation or removal of some or all of
the surficial and near -surface strata of high plastic clays and the replacement of the existing soils with fill
soils composed of non -expansive select materials. The material and placement requirements for the select
fill used to construct the building pad and general recommendations concerning construction of the
building pad are outlined in Section 9 of this report.
The degree to which the calculated potential shrink -swell movements could be reduced by the
excavation and replacement technique would depend upon the depth of the excavation of the existing
soils and the corresponding replacement with select fill soils. Based upon the idealized stratigraphy at the
site, computations were performed to determine the corresponding reduction in potential shrink -swell
movements with each 2 ft of existing soils that are removed and replaced with select fill soils. The results
of those calculations are presented in Table 2.
19
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
significant thicknesses within the zone of seasonal moisture change, the potential magnitudes of shrink -
swell movement will be lower.
Manmade changes associated with the development of a site can produce moisture changes that
are greater in magnitude and occur to greater depths than are typically associated with natural causes.
Site development actions that frequently produce changes in the moisture regime include the following:
modification of existing grades and stormwater drainage patterns; placement of relatively impermeable
ground covers, such as buildings or paved areas, across a site and the collection and discharge of
stormwater associated with these site features; and the installation and functioning of utilities which may
leak or break over time and introduce water into the subsurface soils. In addition, some long-term
increases in the moisture content of the foundation soils beneath a building can be expected due to the
"sealing off' of the subgrade by the building floor slab and surrounding pavement areas that prevent the
natural loss of soil moisture by evaporation. Similarly, soil moisture changes can also be associated with
site vegetation. Soil moisture loss can be caused by water demand from vegetation, either natural or
landscaped, and particularly vegetation with large root systems. Also, soil moisture increases can be
expected as a result of irrigation associated with landscaping of a site.
Therefore, movements should be expected for either any shallow foundation system or any
foundation element founded within or on top of a stratigraphy composed of moderate to high plasticity
clays. The shrink -swell movements which could occur may produce deflections and differential
movements in foundation systems, which, if not accounted for in the design phase of the project, could
result in distress to the supported structure in the form of excessive masonry, drywall or slab cracking,
and possibly even instability of the structure.
5.2 MAGNITUDES OF POTENTIAL SIiRINK-SWELL MOVEMENTS
5.2.1 Calculation of Magnitudes of Potential Total Shrink -Swell Movements for Existing Soils
Stratigraphy
Calculations were performed to estimate the shrink -swell movements, sometimes referred to as
the potential vertical rise (PVR). The calculations were based upon the plasticities, the existing moisture
contents, and the existing overburden pressures of the existing surface and near -surface soils at the
project site. The calculations performed were based upon a modified procedure developed by McDowell
as outlined in Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Method TEX-124-E. Based upon the
idealized soils stratigraphy of the existing soils at the site, a potential PVR in the range of approximately
3.2 to 3.4 inches was computed.
18
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
5.0 GENERAL FOUNDATION ANALYSIS
The primary considerations in the design of a safe and economical foundation system for a
structure are the shear strength and related bearing capacity of the foundation elements, the
compressibility and settlement characteristics of the foundation soils, and the volumetric stability of the
foundation formations. The soils throughout the depth of exploration at the referenced site consisted
predominantly of clays of high plasticity. In general, the strength and compressibility characteristics of
the clays appeared to be adequate to provide bearing support of the loads associated with similar building
foundation system without excessive settlements. However, the potential volumetric stability and
associated potential for shrink -swell movements of foundation soils in this geographical region must also
be considered in the design of any foundation system. A discussion of the potential shrink -swell
movements that could occur in the foundation soils is presented in the following section of this report.
5.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS — POTENTIALLY VOLUMETRICALLY ACTIVE
FOUNDATION SOILS AND TYPES OF FOUNDATION SYSTEMS
As previously discussed, the soils within the near -surface zone of the stratigraphy at the boring
locations across the site consisted of clays of high plasticity. Empirical correlations exist between the
plasticity of clays, as determined in the Atterberg limit tests, and the potential for volumetric change. The
volumetric change in the soils is manifested as shrink -swell movements. In general, the higher the
plasticity of the clays, the higher the potential for volumetric movements. Accordingly, clays of medium
to high plasticity have the potential to experience significant volumetric changes (i.e., shrink -swell
movements) with even minor variations in moisture content.
The naturally occurring variations in soil moisture content which produce the shrink -swell
movements are assumed to within a depth range below the ground surface known as the "zone of
seasonal moisture change." Moisture fluctuations within the zone of seasonal moisture change are
attributable to natural causes, such as heavy seasonal precipitation or prolonged periods of drought.
Although the extent of this zone of seasonal moisture change can vary with several factors, the depth of
moisture variation in the geographical region of the project site is typically assumed to be on the order of
8 to 10 ft. Consequently, the greater the thickness of high plasticity fat clays within the zone of seasonal
moisture change in the upper 10 ft of the stratigraphy, the greater will be the potential magnitudes of
shrink -swell movements. Conversely, in those areas of a site where low plasticity soils are present in
17
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
sections of this report. The owner, designer, and contractor should recognize that there may be some
changes in the generalized stratigraphy between the boring locations at the site.
4.4.3 Water Level Observations
All of the borings were drilled using dry augering techniques which permitted observation of the
boreholes for groundwater intrusion both during and immediately following completion of drilling
operations. In addition, groundwater observations were made after a time period of approximately 24
hours following completion of drilling. No groundwater was observed in any of the borings during
drilling or during the 24-hour time period following completion of the drilling operations. Following the
completion of groundwater level observations, all of the boreholes were backfilled with soil cuttings as a
safety measure for animals that might be present on the project site.
It should be recognized that water table elevations at any site can fluctuate with time.
Groundwater levels are dependent upon the amount of seasonal precipitation and climatic conditions, as
well as other factors such as the amount and location of antecedent rainfall, the nature of the surface
cover across the site and surrounding areas, the presence of vegetation, and associated evapotranspiration
rates. The groundwater levels at the time of the field investigation may vary from the levels encountered
both during the construction phase of the project and during the design life of the proposed project
elements. If the long-term variation of the groundwater level is critical to some design aspect of the
proposed development, an extended hydrogeologic study should be undertaken to better define the
pertinent groundwater conditions at the site which may influence the design.
CME is not aware of any existing groundwater wells on or in the immediate vicinity of the
subject property. In addition, our site observations did not produce any evidence of the presence of
groundwater production wells or groundwater monitor wells on the subject property. Therefore, it was
not possible to determine the hydrologic profile or slope of the groundwater surface across the property.
However, in the absence of specific site data, an assumption is typically made that the slope of the
shallow groundwater surface parallels the slope of the surface topography. Since the surface grade in the
area of the subject property slopes in a northwesterly direction toward Lick Creek to the west and
northwest of the subject property, it is assumed that local groundwater flows in a similar direction.
16
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
laboratory testing program indicated that the sands contained percentages of fines ranging from 18.7 to
22.9 percent. The fines consisted of either silts or clays as indicated by the variable plasticities of the
sands. The PI values of the sands ranged from non -plastic (i.e., 0) to 11. The sands were very dry at the
time of the field study. The relative density of the sands was estimated from the results of the SPTs to
range from loose to medium dense. The character of the clays within the surficial zone at the building
boring location is similar to that described for the near -surface zone soils in the following paragraph.
Near -Surface Zone. The near -surface zone extended from immediately below the surficial zone
to depths in the order of 8 ft and generally consisted of fat clays with sand, or of sandy, fat clays. The
clays were of high to extremely high plasticity. The color of the clays typically ranged from dark tan to
tan. The geotechnical laboratory study indicated that the LL values of the clays ranged from 59 to 88 and
the corresponding PI values from 38 to 63. The percentage of fines in these clays generally ranged from
approximately 68.0 to 86.5 percent, thereby indicating a corresponding percentage of sands ranging from
approximately 13.5 to 32.0 percent (e.g., 100 percent — 86.5 percent fines = 13.5 percent sand (no gravel
was observed) and 100 percent — 68.0 percent = 32.0 percent). The soils could generally be classified as
CH type soils (clays of high plasticity) under both the originally proposed and the current USCS. The
consistency, i.e., the strength categorization, of these clays was determined from the pocket penetrometer
tests to be in the range of stiff to very stiff.
Intermediate Zone. The soils of the intermediate zone extended from approximately 8 to 17 ft
depth and consisted of tan to light grayish -tan, clayey sands. The sands were thinly interbedded with
seams of brown or tan, fat clay below approximately 12 ft depth. The laboratory determined percentage
of fines ranged from 43.2 to 49.9 percent, indicating a very high percentage of silts and clays within the
sand formations. The fines mostly consisted of clays as indicated by the high Atterberg limit test results.
The LL values ranged from 40 to 54 and the corresponding PL values ranged from 22 to 34 for the sands.
The results of the SPTs indicated that the relative density of the sands could be described as dense.
Deep or Basal Zone. The soils of the basal zone were present from 17 ft depth to the maximum
depth of exploration of 25 ft. These deep soils consisted of tan, fat clays or of dark gray, shaley, fat clays.
The single classification test performed on these clays of the deep zone indicated a LL value of 80 and a
corresponding PL value of 57 with a percentage of fines of 97.2 percent. Therefore, the clays would
classify as CH type soils under the USCS. The results of an unconfined compression test and a pocket
penetrometer test indicated that the clays would have a strength classification in the range of stiff to hard.
General Limitations of Generalized Stratigraphical Descriptions. The generalized stratigraphy
described in the previous paragraphs was utilized in the foundation analysis as described in subsequent
15
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
plastic soils. The LL represents the moisture content at which the soil is on the verge of being a viscous
fluid (i.e., a "very wet" condition), and the PL represents the moisture content at which the soil behaves
as a non -plastic material (i.e., a "slightly moist" condition). The plasticity index (PI) of soil is defined as
the range of moisture contents at which the soil behaves as a plastic material and is defined as the
difference between the liquid limit and the plastic limit (LL - PL = PI). The magnitude of the PI of a soil
is typically considered to be an indication of the clay content and the volumetric change (shrink -swell)
potential of the soils (although the volumetric change can also vary with the type of clay mineral and the
nature of the ions adsorbed on the clay surface).
Although the soil classifications utilized in the subsequently presented descriptions and
discussions generally follow the criteria established by the USCS, there is one exception with respect to
clays of moderate plasticity that are designated by the letters CM. Highly plastic clays with a liquid limit
equal to or greater than 50 are given a CH designation (C for clays and H for high plasticity) under the
USCS. Clays with liquid limits lower than 50 are designated as CL (L for low plasticity) soils under the
current USCS. However, when Arthur Casagrande performed the original work for the soil classification
system, he proposed an intermediate classification in which clays with a liquid limit between 30 and 49
were termed CM (M for moderate) soils, or clays of moderate plasticity. Although not adopted by
ASTM, the CM designation is still sometimes used to describe in greater detail the soils with plasticities
between the low and high ranges.
4.4.2 General Description of Stratigraphy
The subsurface stratigraphy described in this section of the report was determined by the
previously described field study which included a single boring in the proposed building area and two (2)
borings in the proposed parking areas. The subsurface stratigraphy encountered at the boring locations is
shown in detail on the individual boring logs in Appendix A. The stratigraphy encountered at the boring
locations was somewhat similar, but there were important differences between the boring locations, as
well as differences with depth at any single boring location. In general, the surficial soils at the -boring
locations across the site were variable, but the underlying soils appeared to be similar. The stratigraphy
can generally be divided into four (4) distinct zones: (1) a surficial zone; (2) a near -surface zone; (3) an
intermediate zone; and (4) a deep or basal zone. The soils in these four (4) zones can be generally
described as indicated in the following separate paragraphs.
Surficial Zone. The soils of the surficial zone extended from the existing ground surface to
depths in the range of 2 to 2.5 ft below the surface grade. The surficial soils were variable across the site
and consisted of brown, clayey sands and silty sands in the proposed paved areas (borings B-1 and B-2)
and of dark tan, fat clays with sand in the building area (boring B-3). The results of the geotechnical
14
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Subsoil Layer (B12 horizon):
17 to 28 inches — very pale brown clay, pale brown, moist; moderate course
angular blocky structure; extremely hard, extremely firm; grayish brown clay
films on faces of peds; few fine roots; few fine faint brownish yellow masses of
iron accumulation with sharp boundaries; strongly acid; clear wavy boundary.
Parent Material Layer (Cr horizon):
34 to 50 inches — stratified white, yellowish brown and brown siltstone.
The referenced Soil Survey of Brazos County also rates the soils in the Singleton series with
respect to limitations for "Building Site Development." The limitations are summarized in the following
table.
Table lb. Limitations of Soils of the Singleton Series With Respect to Building Site Development
Building Development Magnitude of Description
Category Limitation of Limitation
Shallow excavations
Moderate
Depth to rock; too clayey
Dwellings without basements
Severe
Shrink/swell
Dwellings with basements
Severe
Shrink/swell
Small commercial buildings
Severe
Shrink/swell
.Local roads and streets
Severe
Shrink/swell; low strength
Lawns and landscaping
Moderate
Droughty; depth to rock
4.4 SITE SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
4.4.1 Classification System
The soils were generally classified in accordance with the criteria set forth in the Unified Soil
Classification System (USCS, ASTM D 2487). Classification of the soils was primarily based upon test
results derived from the laboratory testing of the various soils strata within the stratigraphy. The
laboratory -performed classification tests consisted of determining the percent "fines" of the soils and of
determining the Atterberg limits of the soils. The percentages of fines, i.e., the silt- and clay -size
particles, were measured by determining the percentage of soils that would pass or be "finer than" the
No. 200 U.S. Standard sieve size. Soils with a percent fines content of 50 percent or greater would
classify as clays or silts under the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) (ASTM D 2487).
Conversely, by definition, sands and/or gravels would have a percentage of fines of less than 50 percent.
The Atterberg limit tests are composed of the liquid limit (LL) test and the plastic limit (PL) test,
along with the shrinkage limit test. The LL and PL tests were performed as part of the classification
testing of the present study. These limits distinguish the boundaries of the several consistency states of
13
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
l Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Table la. Limitations of Soils of the Shiro Series With Respect to Building Site Development
Building Development Magnitude of Description
Category Limitation of Limitation
Shallow excavations
Moderate
Depth to rock; too clayey
Dwellings without basements
Severe
Shrink/swell
Dwellings with basements
Severe
Shrink/swell
Small commercial buildings
Severe
Shrink/swell
Local roads and streets
Severe
Shrink/swell; low strength
Lawns and landscaping
Moderate
Droughty; depth to rock
Singleton Fine Sandy Loam (SnB)
Soils of the Singleton series (SnB) reportedly consist of soils that are very slowly permeable,
moderately deep, and moderately well drained. The Singleton series soils are fine, smectitic, thermic
Udic Paleustalfs that form in tuffaceous sandstones and mudstones on slopes of 0% to 5%.
The setting of the Singleton series can be described as uplands landform with backslopes
representing landscape positions. The slope is typically very gently sloping plane surfaces. The soils
typically occupy an irregular or elongated shaped area. The native vegetation is Post oak savannah.
In a representative pedon, the surface layer is stated to be a fine sandy loam about 0 to 5 inches
thick that is light brownish gray when moist, and strongly acidic. The subsoil is a very pale brown, fine
sandy loam that exists at 5 to 9 inches below the surface. A dark brown, extremely hard clay is reportedly
present at 9 to 20 inches below the surface. A hard, pale brown clay is stated to be found at 20 to 32
inches below the surface, and a pale brown clay loam layer reportedly extends from 32 to 38 inches
below the surface. A white, weakly cemented sandstone containing layers of sandy clay loam reportedly
extends from 38 to 60 inches below the surface.
The typical profile can be described as follows:
Surface Soil Layer (A horizon):
0 to 9 inches — light brownish -gray, fine sandy loam, dark grayish -brown, moist;
weak medium subangular blocky structure; hard, friable; many fine roots;
slightly acid; abrupt wavy boundary.
Subsoil Layer (Btl horizon):
9 to 17 inches — pale brown clay, brown, moist; moderate medium angular
blocky structure; extremely hard, extremely firm, common fine roots; dark
grayish brown clay films on faces of peds; common medium distinct yellowish
brown masses of iron accumulation with sharp boundaries; very strongly acid;
gradual wavy boundary.
12
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Shiro Fine Sandy Loam (SkB)
Soils of the Shiro fine sandy loam series (SnB) are moderately deep, well drained, slowly
permeable soils formed in tuffaceous sandstone and mudstone. The soils are typically found on nearly
level to gently sloping uplands. Slopes range from 1 to 3 percent.
The setting of the Shiro loamy fine sand series can be described as uplands landform with
summits representing landscape positions. The slope is typically very gently sloping and rounded. The
soils typically occupy a circular or an elongated shaped area. The native vegetation is Post oak savannah.
The typical profile can be described as follows:
Surface Soil Layer (A horizon):
0 to 6 inches — pinkish gray, loamy fine sand, brown, moist; weak fine
subangular blocky structure; loose, very friable; common fine roots; about 5
percent siliceous pebbles; moderately acid; clear wavy boundary.
Subsurface Soil Layer (AE or E horizon):
6 to 15 inches — pinkish gray, loamy fine sand, pinkish gray, moist; weak fine
subangular blocky structure; loose, very friable; common fine roots; about 5
percent siliceous pebbles; moderately acid; abrupt wavy boundary.
Subsoil Layer (B horizon):
15 to 24 inches — stratified gray, brown, and red, moderately alkaline loam
24 to 34 inches — light brownish gray clay, grayish brown, moist; weak medium
blocky structure; extremely hard, extremely firm; few fine roots; clay films on
faces of peds; common medium prominent reddish brown masses of iron
accumulation with sharp boundaries; moderately acid; gradual wavy boundary.
Parent Material Layer (Cr horizon):
34 to 50 inches — light gray siltstone; common medium distinct yellowish brown,
reddish brown, and red masses of iron accumulation; interbedded tuffaceous
sandstone; extremely hard; moderately acid.
The referenced Soil Survey of Brazos County also rates the soils in the Shiro series with respect
to limitations for "Building Site Development." The limitations are summarized in the following table.
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Our review of the referenced topographic maps and our observations of the subject property
indicate that the subject property is relatively elevated as compared to the surrounding area. The general
area of the subject property appears to be near the dividing ridge between the Spring Creek watershed
and the Lick Creek watershed. The highest ground surface elevations are near the eastern corner of the
subject property. There is a distinct slope of approximately 4 percent toward the northwest in the general
direction of the southern tributary of Lick Creek. The ground surface falls approximately 12 ft from the
front of the site along Barron Road to the rear of the site in the direction of the tributary of Lick Creek.
Review of existing floodplain information in the area of the site (Federal Emergency
Management Agency [FEMA]) indicates that no portions of the subject property are located within the
100-year or the 500-year floodplains.
4.2 GEOLOGY
The subject property appears to be located immediately inside the southern border of the major
geologic formation known as the Wellborn Formation (Ewb). The Wellborn Formation is a sequence of
sandstone and clay that was formed during the Eocene period and is approximately 150 ft thick. The
Carlos Sandstone is typically situated at the top of the Wellborn Formation. The sandstone formations
within the Wellborn Formation are typically massive in size and are composed of indurated, medium -
grained, quartz that is locally silica cemented and form ledges. Otherwise, gray sandstone lenses are
common throughout the remainder of the strata within the Wellborn Formation. The clay strata are
chocolate colored, lignitic, and interbedded with fine- to medium -grained sand.
4.3 SOIL TYPES AND PROPERTIES
A map of the soil series present across the site is presented in Figure 5 — Soils Series Map of
Subject Property and Surrounding Area. According to the Soil Survey of Brazos County (USDA, 2003),
the major portion of the subject property is covered by the soils of the Shiro Loamy Fine Sand Series, 1
to 3 percent slopes (indicated by the alphabetical symbols SkB on Figure 5) with a small portion of the
western corner of the site being covered by the soils of the Singleton Fine Sandy Loam Series, 1 to 3
percent slopes (SnB). Each of these soil series is discussed individually in the following subsections of
this report.
10
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
4.0 SITE OBSERVATIONS AND SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY
4.1 SITE SURFACE DESCRIPTION
4.1.1 General
As can be seen from a review of Figure 1, the project site is situated in the southern portion of
College Station, Texas. More specifically, the project area is located on the northern side of Barron Road
approximately 350 ft southwest of the intersection of Barron Road with Alexandria Avenue.
As indicated on Figure 3 — Aerial Photograph (2202) of Site and Surrounding Area, the site of
the proposed relocated fire station occupies an area of approximately 2.36 acres in College Station,
Brazos County, Texas, and is a subsection of a larger "parent" tract owned by Lance and Karen
Leschper. CME understands that the Leschpers have sold the 2.36-acre tract to the City of College
Station but will retain the remaining portion of the property on which their residence is currently located.
As can be seen from Figure 3, the subject property is roughly rectangular in shape with a depth (distance
perpendicular to Barron Road) of approximately 303 ft and a width (distance parallel to Barron Road) of
approximately 340 R.
The subject property is a relatively undeveloped tract of land that appears to have been used
exclusively for agricultural or ranching purposes. The site is covered with tall native grass and some
isolated trees. The site is relatively featureless except for some stock pens for cattle and small
agricultural storage sheds.
The subject property is bordered on the northeast by the larger "parent" tract owned by Lance
and Karen Leschper. The southeast section of the subject property is bordered by Barron Road with
single-family residences of the Shenandoah Subdivision and a single-family homestead located
immediately across Barron Road. The southwestern and northwestern boundaries of the subject property
consist of single-family residences of the Alexandria Subdivision.
4.1.2 Topography
The surface topography at the subject site and surrounding area is depicted on Figure 4 — Site
Topography. The topography illustrated on Figure 4 was developed by the City of College Station from
aerial surveys which were conducted in the mid-1990s.
rn
_ CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
3.0 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM
Samples of subsurface materials recovered from the borings were examined and classified by the
geotechnical engineer and various laboratory tests assigned for selected samples. The laboratory tests
were performed to aid in soil classification and to determine the engineering characteristics of the
foundation materials. The laboratory test results are presented in a summary tabular form in Appendix B
and some of the test results are also presented both numerically and symbolically on the boring logs in
Appendix A.
3.1 CLASSIFICATION TESTS
Tests were performed in order to classify the foundation soils in accordance with the Unified
Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487) and to determine the soil -moisture profile at the boring
locations. The Atterberg limit determinations were performed in general accordance with the procedures
outlined in ASTM D 4318.
In addition to the selected Atterberg limit tests, grain -size distribution tests were also performed.
The distribution of the particle sizes larger than 75 µm (retained on the U.S. Standard No. 200 sieve size)
is determined using various sieve sizes, and the distribution of particle sizes smaller than 75 µm is
determined by a sedimentation process using a hydrometer. The percent of soil particles passing the U.S.
Standard sieve size No. 200 (ASTM D 1140) was the most frequent determination made on the recovered
samples. The soil fractions passing the No. 200 sieve size are the silt- and clay -size particles and are
generally referred to as "fines." The unit dry weight of the samples was also determined in accordance
with the procedures outlined in ASTM D 2166. The natural moisture content of individual samples was
determined in accordance with the procedures outlined in ASTM D 2216.
3.2 STRENGTH TESTS
Emphasis was also directed toward an evaluation of the strength or load -carrying capacity of the
foundation soils. Strength tests were performed to develop an estimate of the undrained cohesion of the
soils. The unconfined compression test (ASTM D 2166) was performed in the laboratory on undisturbed
samples of cohesive soils to determine the compressive strength characteristics. In addition, hand
penetrometer tests were performed both in the field and in the laboratory on undisturbed soil samples to
develop an approximate indication of the undrained cohesive strength.
8
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
blows. The N-values determined for the SPTs are typically presented at appropriate depths on the boring
logs. The types of samples and the corresponding depths at which samples were collected, as well as
results of any field tests, are presented on the individual boring logs in Appendix A.
2.3 GROUNDWATER OBSERVATION
As previously discussed, all of the borings were drilled utilizing dry rotary augering drilling
techniques so that the presence of groundwater could be observed during drilling operations for all of the
borings and on the day following the completion of drilling operations. The groundwater observations are
discussed in Section 4 of this report. Subsequent to the final groundwater observations, all of the
boreholes were filled with soil cutting and covered as a safety precaution for pedestrian traffic that might
traverse the drilling site.
2.4 BORING LOGS
A field geotechnologist was present during the field exploration to describe the subsurface
stratigraphy and to note obvious anomalies in the subsurface stratigraphy which may have been present at
.-specific boring locations. Descriptions of the subsurface conditions encountered at the boring locations
are shown on the individual boring logs presented in Appendix A of this report. The "Key to Symbols
and Soil Classification" sheet explaining the terms and symbols used on the logs are presented
immediately following the logs. The logs represent CMS's interpretation of the subsurface conditions
based upon the field geotechnologist's notes together with engineering observation and classification of
the materials in the laboratory. The lines designating the interfaces between various strata represent
approximate boundaries only, as transitions between formations may be gradual.
2.5 SAMPLE CUSTODY
All samples of subsurface materials obtained in the borings were removed from the samplers and
visually classified in the field. Representative samples were sealed in appropriate packaging and placed
in core boxes for transportation to the laboratory for further analysis. The samples will be stored for at
least 30 days following the date of this report. At the end of the 30-day storage period, the samples will
be discarded unless a written request is received from the owner requesting that the samples be stored for
a longer period.
7
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION PROGRAM
2.1 OUTLINE OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION PROGRAM
Subsurface conditions across the site of the proposed relocated fire station facility were explored
by drilling a total of three (3) sample borings at the approximate locations indicated on Figure 3 - Plan of
Borings in Appendix A. Two (2) of the borings (B-1 and B-2) were drilled in the proposed paving areas
and the remaining boring (13-3) was drilled in the proposed building area.
2.2 DRILLING AND SAMPLING
The boring in the proposed building area was drilled to a depth of approximately 25 ft and the
borings in the proposed parking areas were drilled to depths in the range of 5.5 to 6 ft. The depths are
referenced to the surface grades that existed at the specific boring locations at the time of the field study.
It should be noted that subsequent discussions and recommendations presented in this report are
referenced to the surface grade existing at the time of the field study. If adjustments to the present surface
elevations are made as part of site grading operations prior to construction of the foundation system,
some adjustment in the subsequent discussions and recommendations with respect to foundation depths
may be necessary.
The borings were drilled with a truck -mounted rotary drill rig utilizing dry augering drilling
techniques. Representative soil samples were obtained continuously to a maximum depth of 10 ft, and
thereafter samples were obtained at 5 ft intervals to the depth of maximum exploration. Cohesive soil
samples were obtained by mechanically pushing a 3-inch-diameter, thin -wall sampler in general
accordance with the procedures outlined in ASTM D 1587. Cohesionless or granular soils, cohesive -
granular soils, or clays that were relatively hard and could not be sampled with a Shelby tube or granular
soils were typically sampled by driving a 2-inch, split -barrel sampler and conducting a standard
penetration test (SPT). In the SPT a 2-inch, O.D. standard, split -barrel sampler is driven into the soil for
three successive 6-inch increments with blows from a 140-lb hammer. The vertical travel of the hammer
is 30 inches in accordance with ASTM D 1586. The number of blows required to drive the sampler over
the depth interval from 6 to 18 inches is defined as the standard penetration number (N). However, if a
limiting blow count of 50 blows is reached during any 6-inch interval, the test is terminated and an N-
value of 50 is recorded along with the corresponding penetration in inches. Test termination also occurs
if a total of 100 blows has been applied or if the sampler has not advanced after 10 successive hammer
6
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Section 9 offers a discussion of site development and construction considerations and specific
guidance with respect to subsurface conditions that may impact site development and construction
operations. Recommendations concerning preparation of building pads are also included in Section 9.0.
Finally, Section 10 presents the basis for the recommendations given in the report and the general
limitations for the information presented.
5
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
1.3 REPORT FORMAT
The initial sections of this report present descriptions of work and test procedures employed to
collect the subsurface information for the project. The later sections of the report present analysis of the
information developed from the field and laboratory studies and offer recommendations for foundation
support of the proposed project elements.
More specifically, descriptions of the field exploration program are presented in Section 2. The
descriptions include the drilling and sampling techniques employed as part of the field exploration.
Appendix A contains the plan of borings that illustrates the relative location of the exploratory borings.
The boring logs, which indicate the types of soils encountered at each of the boring locations and present
the results of some field test procedures and observations, are also presented in Appendix A.
Section 3 of the report presents a discussion of the laboratory tests performed for the project that
included references to the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) standard laboratory test
procedures employed. The summary results of the laboratory testing program are presented in tabular
form in Appendix B. Some laboratory test results are also presented numerically and symbolically on the
` -..boring logs in Appendix A.
Section 4 of the report gives a description of our observations of surface conditions at the site at
the time of the field study. A general discussion and interpretation of subsurface conditions based upon
the borings performed as part of the field exploration and based upon limited laboratory test results of
some of the soils recovered as part of that field exploration are also presented in Section 4.
Following the explanation of the procedures used and the results obtained in the field exploration
and laboratory testing phases of the work, the final sections of this report present discussions of the
results obtained and recommendations for design and construction of the various elements of the
proposed project. Section 5 presents a general analysis of the information and a general discussion of
possible alternative foundation systems for the proposed structure. Specific recommendations and design
values for foundation support of the proposed project elements are presented for two types of foundation
systems in Sections 6 and 7.
Section 8 presents CME's evaluation of existing and proposed subgrade soils in the areas
proposed for paving and offers recommendations for the design and construction of the proposed rigid
pavement systems in the drive or collector lanes and in the parking areas. The recommendations also
include a discussion of subgrade soil preparation.
4
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
Consequently, we believe that collectively, the moderate to heavy weight trucks will make an
average of six (6) trips or 6 passes across each lane of the driveway or circulation roadway (6 exits in one
lane and 6 entrances in an adjacent lane) over the collector lane on a daily basis. The medium to heavy
weight trucks are expected to have three axles at most and maximum gross vehicle weights (gvw) in the
range of 46,000 to 70,000 pounds.
Similarly, we anticipate there will be an average of five (5) vehicle trips per day per parking
space for a total of approximately 100 trips per day (20 spaces times 5 trips per parking space per day)
for the light passenger cars and trucks. The passenger vehicles using the parking spaces are expected to
have gvw in the range of 4,000 to 8,000 pounds.
No significant growth of the traffic volume is expected over the life of the parking lot of the
facility.
Proposed Site Grading. Grading plans for the proposed development have not been finalized at
the time of this proposal. However, the elevation difference from the front to the rear portion of the site is
believed to be in the order of 10 to 12 ft and a significant amount of cut and fill will be needed to
:Establish the final grades.
We also understand that agricultural operations were conducted in the past on the project site and
that there are remnants of some previously existing structures associated with those former agricultural
operations. The remnants of the former structures are believed to consist of foundation system elements
that are buried at the site.
1.2 OBJECTIVES AND SCOPE OF THE SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND
GEOTECMS� ICAL STUDY
The specific objectives of the exploration and study were to:
■ Secure information on the general subsurface conditions at the boring locations across the
site.
■ Evaluate the subsurface information developed from the field exploration and laboratory
testing programs.
■ Develop general recommendations (based upon an engineering analysis of the subsurface
information) to guide development of conceptual foundation design plans for the proposed
building and associated paved areas.
i1
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
direction. The second "leg" of the "L" is a 30 ft by 45 ft "wing" extension to the north on the eastern side
of the building. The building has a footprint area of approximately 10,000 square feet (sq ft). We
anticipate that the structural framing system for the building will consist of exterior and interior load
bearing concrete masonry unit (CMU) walls with a steel open -web bar joint roof framing system and a
metal roof. We believe that maximum wall loads will be in the range of 2,000 to 3,000 pounds per linear
foot of wall (plf) and that typical continuous loads will be in the range of 1,000 to 1,200 plf. The exterior
walls of the proposed structure will have stone or brick and Hardi-plank veneer. The proposed building
will not have a basement, sump, or equipment pit that will require structural excavations at the site.
Preferred Foundation System(s). We anticipate that the preferred method of foundation support
for the proposed fire station structure will be a deep drilled pier foundation system to support the
movement -sensitive CMU wall superstructure. It is our understanding that a structural floor system with
an underlying crawl space is desired for the proposed addition, if such a system can be provided within
the project construction budget. Otherwise, the floor system for the proposed building will be a subgrade-
supported slab.
Paved Circulation Drive and Parking Areas. The second element of the planned project is
—proposed paved collector drive and parking areas around the fire station structure as illustrated on Figure
2. There will be one access point from Barron Road for the main collector drive that will -be routed
around the eastern end of the site to the rear of the building. Head -in parking will be located mainly on
the east side of the proposed structure, but there will also be a small parking area on the front or south
side of the building that faces Barron Road. The proposed parking area is expected to accommodate
approximately 18 to 20 parking spaces. We understand a rigid pavement system with a Portland cement
concrete (PCC) surface course is the only type of pavement being considered for the proposed facility
due to the anticipated use of the paving by the heavy fire trucks. The pavement section is expected to
include curb and gutter edge treatment.
Specific information concerning traffic that may utilize the proposed paved areas, such as
number and size of vehicles, is not known at the time of this report. However, in general, we anticipate
that the paved parking areas will be mostly used by light passenger vehicles (car and light trucks), but the
main collector or circulation roadway will be used by heavy truck traffic associated with the fire trucks,
other emergency vehicles, and solid waste collection trucks. We believe that no portion of the driveway
along Barron Road or the internal circulation drive will have to accommodate both exiting and entering
traffic, but that separate lanes will be used for all exiting and entering traffic.
- 2
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This report documents the results of the subsurface exploration and geotechnical study
performed by CME Testing and Engineering, Inc. (CME) at the site of the proposed relocation of the
City of College Station Fire Station No. 3 located on Barron Road near the intersection with Alexandria
Avenue in College Station, Texas. The work described in this report was conducted in general
accordance with the CME proposal to the project architectural firm, Brown Reynolds Waterford
Architects, Inc. (BRW) dated April 20, 2005. The work described in the proposal was accepted by Mr.
Thomas W. Parker, AIA, of BRW on April 21, 2005. Due to legal access issues associated with the site,
authorization to proceed with the geotechnical study was not given to BRW by the City of College
Station until June 2, 2005.
A summary of our understanding of the project, the results of the field investigation and
laboratory testing phases of the project, a discussion of suggested foundation options for the proposed
building, and recommended foundation design values are presented in the following sections for your
review and consideration. Following the report are appendices including figures, laboratory data,
sampling and testing methods, and general construction recommendations.
1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Information concerning the project was provided by Ms. Diana Smith of Brown Reynolds
Waterford Architects, Inc. (BRW).
The site of the proposed relocated fire station will be on the northern side of Barron Road,
several hundred feet south of the intersection of Barron Road and Alexandria Avenue as illustrated in
Figure 1 — Project Site Vicinity Map. The development plan for the site is illustrated on Figure 2 —
Project Site Plan and Plan of Borings. As can be seen from a review of Figure 2, the proposed project
will consist of two basic elements: (1) a one-story concrete masonry unit structure; and (2) paved
roadway circulation areas with parking areas. Each of these project elements, as well as other features of
the planned project, is discussed separately in the following paragraphs.
Proposed Structure. The proposed fire station building will be a one-story structure. As can be
seen on Figure 2, the building has a rough "L-shape." The main "leg" of the "L" has plan dimensions of
approximately 65 ft by 120 ft with the long direction of the building oriented in a roughly east -west
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
Report of Geotechnical Study Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3
6.2.6 Design of Drilled Piers — Construction Consideration ............................................
6.3 STRUCTURAL FLOOR SLAB SYSTEM..........................................................................
7.0 SPECIFIC FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS - DRILLED PIER, SUPPORT OF
GRADE BEAMS AND COLUMNS, WITH SUBGRADE-SUPPORTED FLOOR SLAB
(TYPE II FOUNDATION SYSTEM)............................................................................................
7.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................................
7.2 PIER AND STRUCTURAL GRADE BEAM DESIGN VALUES .....................................
7.3 SUBGRADE-SUPPORTED FLOOR SLAB SYSTEM .......................................................
8.0 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS.........................................................................................
8.1 GENERAL DISCUSSION OF PROJECT PAVED AREAS ...............................................
8.2 ANTICIPATED PROJECT PAVEMENT USE AND VEHICLE TRAFFIC
CHARACTERISTICS..........................................................................................................
8.3 SUBGRADE CLASSIFICATION........................................................................................
8.4 PAVEMENT THICKNESS REQUIREMENTS..................................................................
8.5 PAVEMENT SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.........................................................................
8.5.1 Pavement Drainage..................................................................................................
8.5.2 Pavement Maintenance............................................................................................
9.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS......................................................................................
9.1 SITE PREPARATION.........................................................................................................
9.2 GENERAL BUILDING PAD CONSTRUCTION AND SITE DEVELOPMENT .............
9.3 STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL SELECTION AND PLACEMENT
PROCEDURES....................................................................................................................
9.4 PAVEMENT SUBGRADE STABILIZATION REQUIREMENTS ...................................
9.5 DRILLED -FOOTING EXCAVATIONS.............................................................................
9.6 FOUNDATION AND PAVING CONCRETE.....................................................................
9.7 UTLITY INSTALLATION AND TRENCHES...................................................................
10.0 BASIS OF RECOMMENDATIONS.............................................................................................
LIST OF APPENDICES
Appendix A — Figures, Boring Logs, and Key Sheet to Terms and Symbols Used on the Boring Logs
Figure 1 — Project Site Vicinity Map
Figure 2 — Project Site Plan and Plan of Borings
Figure 3 — Aerial Photograph (2002) of Site and Surrounding Area
Figure 4 — Site Topography
Figure 5 — Soil Series Map of Project Site and Surrounding Area
Boring Logs B-1 through B-3
Key Sheet to Terms and Symbols Used on the Boring Logs
Appendix B — Summary of Laboratory Test Results
28
29
31
31
31
32
33
33
33
34
36
38
38
38
40
40
40
41
42
43
44
44
It
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.0 INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................................
1
1
1.1
PROJECT DESCRIPTION...................................................................................................
1.2
OBJECTIVES AND SCOPE OF THE SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND
GEOTECHNICAL STUDY ..........................................................................................
3
1.3
REPORT FORMAT .............................................................................................................
4
2.0 FIELD
EXPLORATION PROGRAM...........................................................................................
6
6
2.1
OUTLINE OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION PROGRAM ...........................................
2.2
DRILLING AND SAMPLING.............................................................................................
6
2.3
GROUNDWATER OBSERVATION..................................................................................
7
2.4
BORING LOGS....................................................................................................................
7
7
2.5
SAMPLE CUSTODY...........................................................................................................
3.0 LABORATORY
TESTING PROGRAM......................................................................................
8
3.1
CLASSIFICATION TESTS.................................................................................................
8
8
3.2
STRENGTH TESTS.............................................................................................................
4.0 SITE OBSERVATIONS AND SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY.............................................
9
4.1
SITE SURFACE DESCRIPTION........................................................................................
9
9
4.1.1 General
4.1.2 Topography..............................................................................................................
10
4.2
GEOLOGY...........................................................................................................................
10
4.3
SOIL TYPES AND PROPERTIES......................................................................................
13
4.4
SITE SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS..................................................................................
13
4.4.1 Classification System..............................................................................................
14
4.4.2 General Description of Strati a h
4.4.3 Water Level Observations.......................................................................................
16
5.0 GENERAL FOUNDATION ANALYSIS......................................................................................
17
5.1
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS — POTENTIALLY VOLUMETRICALLY
ACTIVE FOUNDATION SOILS AND TYPES OF FOUNDATION SYSTEMS ..............
17
5.2
MAGNITUDES OF POTENTIAL SHRINK -SWELL MOVEMENTS ..............................
18
5.2.1 Calculation of Magnitudes of Potential Total Shrink -Swell Movements for
ExistingSoils Stratigraphy......................................................................................
18
5.2.2 Reduction in Magnitudes of Potential Shrink -Swell Movements through the
"Excavation and Replacement" Technique.............................................................
19
20
5.2.3 General Building Pad Design and Construction Techniques ..................................
5.2.4 Potential Differential Shrink -Swell Movements.....................................................
22
5.3
TYPES OF FOUNDATION SYSTEMS CONSIDERED....................................................
22
5.3.1 Advantages and Disadvantages of the Various Foundation Systems ......................
24
5.4
RECOMMENDED TYPES OF FOUNDATION.................................................................
24
6.0 SPECIFIC FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS - DRILLED PIER AND
STRUCTURAL FLOOR FOUNDATION SYSTEM (TYPE I FOUNDATION SYSTEM)........
26
6.1
GENERAL...........................................................................................................................
DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS
26
26
6.2
......................................................................................
6.2.1 Design of Drilled Piers — Founding Depth and Founding Formation .....................
26
6.2.2 Design of Drilled Piers — Allowable Unit Bearing Pressures .................................
26
6.2.3 Design of Drilled Piers — Positive Skin Friction .....................................................
27
6.2.4 Design of Drilled Piers — Pier Settlement...............................................................
27
28
6.2.5 Design of Drilled Piers — Upward Acting Tensile Forces on Pier ..........................
REPORT OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
AND GEOTECHNICAL STUDY FOR
PROPOSED RELOCATION OF
CITY OF COLLEGE STATION
FIRE STATION NO.3
BARRON ROAD NEAR ALEXANDRIA AVENUE
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS
Prepared for
Brown Reynolds Waterford Architects, Inc.
2700 Earl Rudder Freeway South
Suite 4000
College Station, Texas 77845
Prepared by
CME Testing and Engineering, Inc.
1806 Welsh Avenue, Suite C
College Station, Texas 77840
July 12, 2005
M. Frederick Conlin, Jr., P.E. v
Senior Project Engineer
SECTION 00300 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION (SOIL REPORT)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
A. Geotechnical Investigation (Sub -surface Soils Tests) for the project site has been
performed and a report of that investigation has been completed. A copy of the
investigation report (Soils Report) is bound herein.
1.02 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION
A. Log of borings indicates materials penetrated at specific locations. Owner and/or
Architect assume no responsibility for any conclusions of interpretations made by
Contractor related to information included in the Report. Should contractor require
additional information concerning subsurface conditions, he may without cost to
Owner, make additional investigations. Should additional investigations produce
information different from that in Soil Report, notify Owner in writing.
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor read and otherwise become completely familiar with contents of Soil
Report, including but not limited to its recommendations for preparation of subsoil,
bases, sub -bases and fill and construction of building foundations and parking
surfaces in compliance with recommendations in Report. Should discrepancy be
found between the requirements of Soil Report and the drawings and/or
specifications, notify Owner in writing prior to beginning work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT APPLICABLE
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 00300-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION (SOIL REPORT)
P L V PLUMBING SUPPLY AND SANITARY DRAINAGE PLANS
P 1.2 GAS PLAN
E 1.1 POWER/SYSTEM PLAN
E1.2 SPEAKER COMMUNICATIONS PLAN
E2.1 LIGHTING PLAN
E3.1 ELECTRICAL NOTES AND DETAILS
END OF SECTION 00015
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
00015-2
LIST OF DRAWINGS
SECTION 00015 - LIST OF DRAWINGS
T 1.1 TITLE PAGE
CIVIL
C1.0
BOUNDARY AND TOPOGRAPHIC STUDY
C1.1
SITE PLAN AND DETAILS
C 1.2
GRADING PLAN AND DETAILS
C 1.3
SITE DETAILS
CIA
LANDSCAPE PLAN AND DETAILS
C 1.5
IRRIGATION PLAN AND DETAILS
C2.1
SITE LAYOUT
C2.2
WATER & SANITARY SEWER
C2.3
STORM DRAINAGE PLAN
C2.4
STANDARD CITY DETAILS
C2.6
STANDARD WATER DETAILS
C2.7
SPECIFICATIONS & NOTES
STRUCTURAL
S 1.1 FOUNDATION PLAN AND DETAILS
S 1.2 STEEL FRAMING AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS AND DETAILS
S 1.3 STRUCTURAL NOTES AND DETAILS
S l A STRUCTURAL NOTES AND DETAILS
ARCHITECTURAL
A1.1 FLOOR PLAN AND ENLARGED PLANS
A1.2 DIMENSIONAL FLOOR PLAN
A1.3 ROOF PLAN AND DETAILS
A2.1 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A2.2 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS, BUILDNG SECTIONS AND DETAILS
A2.3 WALL SECTIONS
A2.4 WALL SECTIONS AND PLAN DETAILS
A2.5 WALL SECTIONS AND MILLWORK DETAILS
All DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS
A3.2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A3.3 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A3.4 FINISH PLAN AND ENLARGED FINISH PLANS
A3.5 FURNITURE LAYOUT PLAN
A3.6 SOFFIT PLAN
MEP
FP 1.1 FIRE SPRINKLER AND FIRE DETECTION PLANS
MEP L I SITE UTILITY PLAN
M 1.1 MECHANICAL PLAN
M1.2 MECHANICAL NOTES AND DETAILS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
00015-1
LIST OF DRAWINGS
END -OF SECTION 00010
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 00010-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TABLE OF CONTENTS
10810 - Toilet Accessories 01 - 03
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11133 - Television Accessories 01 - 02
11452 - Appliances 01 - 03
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12490C - Window Treatments 01 — 03
DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14460 — Material Handling Lift 01 - 05
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL
15010 — General Mechanical Provisions
15300 - Fire Protection System 01 - 11
15400 - Plumbing 01 - 14
15800 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 01 - 18
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16002 - Electrical General Provisions
01 - 19
16004 - Electrical Scope of Work
01 - 03
16100 - Basic Materials and Methods
01 - 10
.16110 - Electrical Raceways and Fittings
01 - 11
16112 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings
01 - 07
16115 - Electrical Gutters and Wireways
01 - 04
16120 - 300/600 Volt Cable, Wire Connectors
01 - 09
16140 - Wiring Devices
01 - 10
16145 - Contactors, Relays, Photocells and Time Switches
01 - 05
16160 - Panel Boards and Enclosures
01 - 05
16170 - Safety and Disconnect Switches
01 - 04
16190 - Electrical Connections for Equipment
01 - 07
16195 - Miscellaneous Electrical Controls and Control Wiring
01 - 03
16401 - Eletrical Service Entrance
01 - 03
16501 - Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Poles
01 - 14
16625 - Automatic Transfer Switch
01 - 15
16635 - Generator Set
01 - 09
16721 - Fire Alarm System
01 - 06
16741 - Voice System Provisions
01 - 02
DIVISION 17 —COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATES
Envelope Compliance Certificate 01 - 02
Mechanical Compliance Certificate 01 - 07
Lighting and Power Compliance Certificate 01 - 03
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 00010-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 - Structural Steel 01 - 08
05500 - Metal Fabrications 01 - 05
05580 - Formed -Metal Fabrication Finishing 01 - 03
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 - Rough Carpentry 01 - 05
06110 - Wood Framing 01 - 07
06175 - Prefabricated Wood Trusses 01 - 04
06400 - Architectural Woodwork 01 - 06
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07100 - Damp -proofing & Waterproofing
01 - 02
07160 - Bituminous Damp -proofing
01 - 06
07210 - Building Insulation
01 - 03
07260 - Vapor Barrier Membrane
01 - 02
07315 - Shingle Roofing & Flashing
01 - 04
07460 — Siding and Soffit
01 - 03
07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal
01 - 05
07840 - Firestopping
01 - 03
07900 - Joint Sealers
01 - 04
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 - Steel Doors and Frames
01 - 03
08210 - Wood Doors
01 - 04
08305 - Special Doors
01 - 02
08362 - Upward Acting Sectional Door
01 - 03
08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefront
01 - 04
08505 - Metal Windows
01 - 05
08710 - Door Hardware
01 - 07
08800 - Glazing
01 - 03
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09250 - Gypsum Board
01 - 04
09310 - Ceramic Tile
01 - 04
09510 - Acoustical Ceilings
01 - 02
09650 - Resilient Flooring
01 - 03
09680 - Carpet
01 - 05
09825 - Sound Insulation
01 - 02
09910 - Painting
01 - 07
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10100 - Markerboards
01 - 02
10200 - Louvers & Vents
01 - 03
10260 - Wall and Corner Guards
01 - 02
10350 - Flagpoles
01 - 02
10440 - Signage
01 - 04
10520 - Fire Extinguishers & Accessories
01 - 02
10551 - Bunker Gear Storage
01 - 02
10670 - Storage Shelving
01 - 02
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 00010-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00010 - Table of Contents
01 - 03
00015
- List of Drawings
01 - 02
00300
- Subsurface Investigation (soil report)
01-01
00700
— General Conditions of the Contract
01-01
00820
- Special Conditions
01 - 03
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100 - Summary
01 - 04
01230 - Alternates
01 - 03
01250 - Contract Modification Procedures
01 - 02
01270 - Unit Prices
01 - 02
01290 - Payment Procedures
01 - 04
01310 - Project Management and Coordination
01 - 06
01320 - Construction Progress Documentation
01 - 08
01330 - Submittal Procedures
01 - 08
01400 - Quality Requirements
01 - 06
01420 - References
01 - 15
01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 - 12
01700 - Execution Requirements
01 - 08
01731 - Cutting and Patching
01 - 04
01770 - Closeout Procedures
01 - 08
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02230 - Site Clearing
01 - 04
02300 - Earthwork
01 - 06
02360 - Soil Treatment
01 - 02
02370 - Soil Erosion and Sediment Control
01 - 08
02466 - Drilled Piers
01 - 04
02500 - Utility Services
01 - 10
02751 - Concrete Paving
01 - 05
02760 - Pavement Specialties
01 - 04
02810 - Irrigation System
01 - 11
02874 - Bicycle Racks
01 - 03
02901 - Landscaping
01 - 07
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03100 - Concrete Formwork
01 - 03
03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
01 - 05
03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete
01 - 16
03368 - Special Concrete Floor Finishes
01 - 06
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04210 - Brick Masonry Units 01 - 08
04220 - Concrete Masonry Unit 01 - 09
04720 - Cast Stone Ornaments 01 - 04
04750 - Quartz Countertops 01 - 04
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 00010-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TABLE OF CONTENTS
rk t d
Y� + � 2 x^ J•' +' '1Fa'ylx p
WI
* t Y N
VF
Ah04,
VVV
K 1Y. ��`v 'V)�4 +tip - � i f`• a;� .Po.. �- r K.
M t j. L 1' F Y e'� a�i� •AM1
11�1 � -�♦ .5sf �.j F, 14i �, :, 1 �` * ' 1.�.'` 'f � if •
ie
E "+ F ♦' 'II ' f" ` ow'
.`
#�K, ka at a iw it ?,i' .c fq w ♦j 4 f
'aaftj}iL3�
.. i '�: k �"' �< awe ,
► �*•3, y�t'&Sg(Yx*. L, �t4`41 a;' .k., 1�� `�,��' �: d '�r r;�. f i_z's. �'''i''
v � '..�\ E� � 4r �t - �t « .tu•_ ,mot 1 p•V
Y • . f $ ipp .' d 1 /1W W 6 Ls, • WI . y' � ? �,'$,h,T�.. ;•q��., r' � � y �4R • �
re
► vim, �i' � � +i �
► �. kq -- frs��i ' ,� a �'-, t +�'�.1+� * S"$ r. '�iy v& hl i �� F. Y �y'f�.��` � "' , � ' ' - a2 F p ''` ",1 i..�' ,�
• L ii "�% h ,. wJ1� d t 401f era, Y +•"d +• y; a a" .M-
Il
- • 4 ,;•'��y[�'`a' y�. 'y"p°��'t E Y '�*V vy"' �� c, _4 � :.+ ;..' 'VV y Yd*� �,�% ka.. . �.; � `_�1
1 •. y A 'q y5 i t - t��'h'9+ �1.. �,j�yf !°e6.q.
• 6
1,
► p .f '•• v ' 1yM '1 Lip f.` -
► a
rkeyxa` w ^.• 11'r'_e r
44
Ae
•),bb y. y by '. \ - / , i :.
r+" a M
� w t
Rr
a r�
h law
rt
1V�r id'
y.
3a:
� �kFtr
1
• t�Y R � ,fie "`9 �'�'�7 • n Fri,$ '.ti "e,� � ` a i'.g .:
r�' . •
l t�
• • N�Y'_ +' - �iw � x.�:� + +� u,. � ��� � �•�'1,
M' � ,f
3 {,y \\ f 5 5. r' ,. r 4 s • •I y A l di Y
IL
• is y 1 .:�� �{� *T?`' I t � t'�"}+:9 �' "' a
r
1
J , 4
r
1 i ,
A
l �
• ay � �: �- � ;�- � f�� }rip iwl a?� - ? ��,d �'� � ;c
ALEXAN RlA
SUB ION
CITY OF COLLEGE�i STATION
FiRE STATION NO.13 RELOCATION
(2.36-ACRES OF LESCHPER
PROO/ERTY)
i \
\ j\
CME TESTIN D, E GINEERING, INC.
'141y
\ 30 .0 \
'"
i'
/ \ BOUNDARY OF �
\ /
SUBJEC OPERTY
\ / EXISTING RURAL
RESIDENCE /
/ KEY/
/ -30 EXISTING CONTOURS
0 \ELEVATION
RYPs SHENANDOAH
\ SUBDIYISI , N \
SHED
00
\ 9
LOG n7 PARTIALLY BURIED, S ���� \ \
SHED FOUNDATION FOR % ' S \ /
SMALL STRUCTURE
\ / ix
100: 0 i 100 FEET
SITE TOPOGRAPHY
CITY OF COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION
N0.3 RELOCATION
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS
PROJECT: C of CS FIRE STATION NO. 3 I
LOCATION: COLLEGE STATION TEXAS
APPR: MFC REV. DATE:
DRAWN BY: AEA MDK SCALE: AS
DATE: 08 19 2004 FIGURE NO.:
-Ott-.,. :: .1.r.[Z"' f •7';-.`�i�' j/11,
\ ,j,•`-;•.�\ _ \`\ t•'O.(+:'�4�5
•y •- .+S„�a` �.. `:•^ ."v t: rf3. �� •� •�~ ^</✓ Alt='� •:.• �,~ �` 's%' .>. '•.. ;¢ L Usk
hl
Nq
Ii• Q� '3•`',,C' < •+-r •••,� •'t* w ;�= R f �,-°.1 .�., tea r\�' 7. �• - rS�/•V"\ .r .F' '•� 't''
if yi.A'•. +n. :^ _
r� .• �v�. PLC; e-'j •TC �yc •y\ \
e �•SkB'- =<5 tR,Q LOAyIY FIN i�4 : �x '•rr • h� �' r�`.�: .'.�'.•
nB. --,LE --LETON tFI SA�DY__ f- r Cf 7 0= : -_~ ';•"
ra,, - ice' •'`"'-i j� f :i. 4 �.Y�+'• r r!'t- 1�N#�. `�:�� +�,,. s ,
'�• 1-'i' �iti �• ''-'� � '• - r• f- r a �r, r• t''i� .'� M1 Z
••'`\`l i/ •'��. ~T;.:. ,ZUO' fi �a;.4`i:Fi rr' ^l• • r f- ry' �l� 't ``` 1`" '~r - +
•�1-;/"jlt'j s. Vi'Y '� a �•�~ '� `: } 1;" +`� + r�<._{,1 ;r..^r. 1 r; �1t
` -. o-. �. .r� .f-1 • tf. �M r � .K .:}. .1.: t 1.fr `�" 1 _ • �i'' . � • a1- il.%i � I .
:•� ♦ _ .`` i4• \ ,r �. . �Jri •-'ri•• ��..C' Yyti r .7jo' ,w �-J " , r,; f7.,� i �Y ! r _ r i�
.� _ - •!}� �OPOSE -ARE-
�,`J >�,�.,��rl �.' w��'��•>�r�. •._ �;,;�As'L .:<. ,.'' ��/f,r ��� �_i;
' TAATf /'NO.- ` _ �: ' w �/� f, _ r: •- f r, f
;.l ! /,�7t �' „ f c nn, J..+i• _1 •;,r, tea, •j'!�• it 0.
_ AA r\` Q�rA,kf��- ate:•' ^� ; � �rn • ,� - r! r i`�/• tv, �,` ✓, ,;� `'. �y 1�� _ r � 'v•
,' �' rd ,'S.t � ��_ ,Gr O :: � i l�• � n^�sr 7` • t ., .mil ` ,2.�. �.. wa.`r.• ,�f/ a
J � .� �% - �t t'•7'; : �s,.,,w = .� K . h ,n n � !�- �a �� (,f+ j. . .e• r' `l'
i' " r• ,r*• '� �.. le, rF %y trti •�� .!/
•;�.'�.�. `,S .,�� :_ ,-i�jr�(••' .• spg-
-,f � -a ,. +9_�•�J � n� n ��. !J-'r , 'x',r-r ��" a . �'}Q��._.�
4 a a�p..is
.A,: `'►'-'•3�•,:-: ��R;`' - it �.7r'ti• .••' M, ,.}_ ,�• / ^., vd �: � Cx.,c� :::
e: �;}:' - •..., •, a,.:.:: `T : %� �� R,., ' .."'...\; ` :: , s;•,. x � �sr :. ` • .�,% ��8V1!�_:'.�-'s
�����-i+y<-',.��y 2°�-'pT;�±ii • / � ?y.ta�y;! F+�••My "' �,tt�i,•x V ['e"�h,,�Q,,-\
_ -' n.�'P•.�.i ,+?: i. •F ....�:•��:. (f • r.' - - �17i,•t, W -;y • �,. •:;'}�.•,i,`���`.�e�},1
�C � ✓�,.s'^ ; � �l �. ��•f ' > �'.� - �: - - ` "`.�,aiti� • �{'•'� +� .� •n-: d''`!!i*i sr . eeGr2GiFFft,.-•��' ttr
-a�l�g2,• ��' i• ,''i..+��,!%�- ;rd. .}: z,,'�\.- .. _ s�Ra.���.a��-S'''` .]�' :l+•.i' i l'i4;-�A •��.=L,..]Lt.
tr ,�}• ,;r"<'J• �ti'., .a Ss - `K� -r, ;� ♦ •_ •, _ - 4.*:,,� �'����\'• '�"+i�`F`.''�;�,. �r'i''
F ��� Q '— ` .}� .L- � �,�ti " • •i " �A ' - •, �. - - - . a' .��� ��' �" �f �.1Ci: �,,F,_YS•r •� r `-�%•, �p
r _L111n .',•, .aR; ••�-i t'�•':`� i�y1� r\ "�•''1`' lw.•+. •� -. .:':`rt�i7t _ _ :. .�,�.�c�t��` �. .�� � n�..ZiY[�:: �:: rt"'ry S�i�`*
r�C'C �� • .i� ti + • re ' {;�•i•�� \, •- "•Y �-,"ti �1,�_ _ .a'' ,:'•''r. ^+.+i'�,a r; r. <e K..`,::d,:ai 7' L?+
:�' +,R• ._'Y�:- :,.i: �r, i'�,1 rr'Y r..tS's' �.•, ..a: i. `;:;•'..'`, k„s �,.;%/ .} �•�i .eF_: .�h� . ' `� f'��;'..�x=::,,.r�+
?.. •.'',.#•" .��,!' .!-v. .,'yF '' �•��i[ t'• •`'�S'•`� .��17{�'C`'.1 a`'T7.7.'�"•rein. �[p(
• 2! ; ',r-�^_ tad .°^ �.,.s /•• :'`.���'�, !--• S.` �7^r'� ` •� ` L, `\ ...� . ►+ `'r '- `{TP'
•► •, +t _ �ti�•:' •:. �.. .(nc ;�ti-, •.".���- :��. _ :.tom..• _ �r K E.
,Fa•4 _
• ���.�a-"fir"-., ti 's `� � '. F.:.•f.,L.�:�L�1'k �^i�.�, -�q yl. -' �`' �;' "•� ��. - ,r•_,�_ , �'��
y�r�?,+L•�� ;;�� �': .c:��•+ a[d.::Fr .,!'t .ac.'. .'r at `. ? Sfi3� `L�`",ti� !� ^...""" h,�;�ys. !•
i�,•:'\�',��� 1 ��.rt/�;'=i'?. C,w`a. �r Ae•V�y��a a` +� .�1�'aR`t�• �•'te��•
��., - •• /l .,� �. -c}y Y a '���0 :ice` • i` .i :+•' Y
2a•'-1��� r':.`:r`�1 '_'F"`>, ti rt': -•t f. .:.�G �w • i \t,� ��i '�` � • ty'- • •' t •�\
' �,�,�.?'ri. �- -*� ��re��r,.-{Z •� :•_N� �r `-X•"a�r+��:=i;,ar �..�y::5 f :,'jj1' - � - c� n!j#•`i •i •t^�� ., �: � i.r ts- -y �'� - .•'6 �1
•!k•�°y`a�� r% t �•� _ - • a%a A. : -^_'id ,ry; t, �'•{• ��',; e�",• L kY o�•" ,r, i.'r^
SOIL SERIES MAP OF PROJECT SITE
CMETESTING -ANDE INEERING,INC. AND SURROUNDING AREA
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS
repare or. PROJECT: C of CS FIRE STATION NO. 3 RELOCATION
LOCATION: COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS
APPR: MFC REV. DATE:
DRAWN BY: AEA, MDK SCALE -AS SHOWN
DATE: 07/20/2004 FIGURE NO.: 5
LOG OF BORING NO. B-1
PROPOSED RELOCATION OF CITY OF COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
BARRON ROAD NEAR ALEXANDRIA AVENUE
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS
TYPE: 4' 0 DIAMETER DRY AUGER DRILLER: CROWDER/CCI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings
o
p°
DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL
SURFACE ELEVATION: NOT KNOWN
..
o
w
00
e
® -- POCKET PENETROMETER
O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST
p -- TRIAIXIAL SHEAR TEST
COHESION, TON/SQ. FT.
0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75
Plastic linter Liquid
Limit Content, R Limit
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
-`'
Medium dense, brown, clayey SAND, dry
12
22.9
% Flies
to very stiff, dark grayish -tan, sandy,
fat CLAY, with occasional orangish-red
ferrous streaks, dry
18
44
C IF
1
—Stiff
+
5
nse a owls - an siltv SAND
10
15
20
25
30
COMPLETION
DATE:
06/13/05
DEPTH: 5.5'
DEPTH
DATE:
TO
drilling
WATER
or
IN BORING:
24 hrs.
after
No water
drilling
in
borehole
during
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC.
LOG OF BORING NO. B-2
PROPOSED RELOCATION OF CITY OF COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
BARRON ROAD NEAR ALEXANDRIA AVENUE
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS
TYPE: 4' b DIAMETER DRY AUGER DRILLER: CROWDER/CCI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings
Z
a
p
p
`
In
.2
a
DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL
SURFACE ELEVATION: NOT KNOWN
.�.
O
a'
w
a
00
19
5
A \
]
® -- POCKET PENETROMETER
O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST
A -- TR4UXIAL SHEAR TEST
COI�SION, TON/SQ. FT.
0.25 0.50 0.75 1.DO 1.25 1.50 1.75
Plastic Water Liquid
Limit Content, X Limit
10 20 30 440 50 60 �70
Loose to medium dense, brown, silty, fine
SAND, dry
Non —Plastic
16.
9: lines
0
Stiff to very stiff, brown and dark tan, with
pockets of red, sandy, fat CLAY, dry
—becoming grayish —tan, with
reddish —orange ferrous streaks, slightly more
sandy below 4'
18
1
1
+
+
5
LO
15
20
25
30
COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: No water in borehole during
DATE: 06/13/05 DATE: drilling or 24 hm. after drilling
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
LOG OF BOMG
NO. B-3
PROPOSED RELOCATION OF CITY OF COLLEGE
STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
BARRON ROAD NEAR ALEXANDRIA
AVENUE
COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS
TYPE:
4' 0 DIAMETER DRY AUGER DRILLER: CROWDER/CCI
LOCATION: See Plan of Borings
® -- POCKET PENETROMETER
O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST
A — TRWXIAL SHEAR TEST
DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL
to
a
COHESION, TON/SQ. Ff.
0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75
Plastic linter Liquid
limit Content, X Limit
�70
o
a'
a
�
a
�
�
�
50 60
a
SURFACE ELEVATION: NOT KNOWN
oo
10� 20 30 4•0
_ __
76.4
_
7. F
es
_ 1.5
Stiff to very stiff, dark ten, fat CLAY, with
sand, and with slightly shaley structure, dry
27
+—
--
6.5
%
1._
es
8B
+
"
Stiff to very stiff, ten, sandy, fat CLAY, with
seams of tan sand, dry
27
—
--
--
1.5
5
—becoming less sandy, dry to slightly moist
below 5'
19
68.0
---
y
--
es
—
1.5
`
72.9
y
es
Dense, tan, very clayey SAND, with
—brown ferrous stains, dry to slightly
43
— —
—
49.9
R
es
reddish
moist
10
Dense, light grayish —ten, clayey SAND, thinly
interbedded, with seems of brown or tan,
fat clay, slightly moist
31
43.2
_
y
es.
15
Stiff to very stiff, tan, fat CLAY, with
reddish —brown, ferrous stains, and with
seams of tan send of several inches
— -- -- --- �►
thickness, slightly moist to moist
97.2 7 es BO
20
1.5+
Very stiff to hard, dark grey, shaley, fat
87.7
2. O
25
CLAY to htl moist
30
EEILJ I
COMPLETION DEPTH: 25'
DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: No water In borehole during
DATE 06/13/05
DATE: drilling or 24 hrs. after drilling
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
- KEY TO SYMBOLS AND SOIL CLASSIFICATION
_-
Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487)
SAMPLE TYPES
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTS
AND LABORATORY TEST DATA
aa
® + 0 A
Thin -wall
Tube
Split -Barrel Rode Core
w/Testable
Cone Disturbed Cuttings No Hand Torvane Unconfined Compression U-U
Penetrometer Recovery Penetrometer Recovery Trioxial
Sample
30% Finer - Peru Finer than No. 200 Seive
Major Divisions Group
Symbols Typical Names
Relative Density of Coarse Strained Soils
Penetration Resistance
0
z
2 o
Gw
'. Well -Graded Gravels, Gravel -Sand
N Value Descriptive
N
o
c ?
Mixtures, Little or No Fines
(Blows/Ft•) Term
oo~
€ N
c « [
Poorly Graded Gravels. Gravel -Sand
0-4 Very Loose
4-10 Loose
Fin
Joz-
LaJ�,�tn
off.
�.. GP
Mixtures, Little or No Fines
A
10-30 Medium Dense
$
w
> o
Q
g rn
a S
i
Silty Gravels, Grovel -Sand -Slit
30-50 Dense
Over 50 Very Dense
d
O z
In
c
0 ° w .r
IS
o
c GM
$�_
Mixtures
11
• Based on driving a lit -barrel
9 split -barrel
o
•
; o
sampler with a 140 lb weight
0 o
< c
GC
Clayey Gravels, Gravel -Sand -Cloy
dropped 30 inches
Z
o--�
Mixtures
U .
d
c�
e o
.:.
�.: Well -Graded Sands, Gravelly Sands,
Soil Modifiers
z
e c
v z Sw
c `
;.
Little or No Fines
°
rnom
o
o =
CLAYEY
,$
" M
o � SP
Poorly Graded Sands, Gravelly
Oo
in
0
Sands, Little or No Fines
U =
Z��n
Q' y N
E
SILTY
S
(n
12 o SM
tir
Silty Sands, Sand -Silt Mixtures
SE
o
w
!! c
�.2
5 u o
siT. Y .ri
r "
°
<'o
Cla Sands, Sand-Cla Mixtures
SANDY
t�
N
o
ML
Inorganic Silts with Slight Plasticity
Consistency Terms of Fine —Grained Soils
z
J
Compressive
(n
" "
Inorganic Clays of Low to Medium
Strength, qu Descriptive
ft) Term
J
(n
E c CL
Plasticity, Gravelly Clays, Lean Clays
(ton/sq
O
>_
0 to 0.25 Very Soft
fin <
s N
in to
Q
J
U
g
J
CL
r r m
i m Organic Slits and Organic Silty
0.25 to 0.50 Soft
0.50 to 1.00 Firm
W
i Clays of Low Plasticity
1.00 to 2.00 Stiff
Q rn
e
p
o
Inorganic Slits. Micaceous or
2.00 to 4.00 Very Stiff
Over 4.00 Hard
Ix c
$
o
MH
Diatomaceous Fine Sand or Silty
U
�
F-
c c
Soils, Elastic Silts`o
W
J
v a
W
inorganic Clays of High Plasticity,
Groundwater Levels
Z
to
" t CH
Fat Clays
L` `o
=
Q - STATIC WATER LEVEL
In
2
J o CH
\\ Organic Clays of Medium to High
\\ Plasticity, Organic Silts
-HYDROSTATIC WATER LEVEL
\\\
Rock Classification
HARDNESS CLASSIFICATION
OF INTACT ROCK
APPROX. RANGE OF UNIAXIAL COMPRESSION STRENGTH
HARDNESS (P.S.I.)
_ °I'lil li
SHALE lilil l:l SILTSTONE
EXTREMELY HARD
>73,900
6.940 - 13,900
LIMESTONE // CLAYSTONE
VERY HARD
3,470 - 6,940
HARD
SOFT
VERY SOFT
1,740 - 3.470
70 - 1.740
SANDSTONE COAL
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
APPENDIX B
Summary of Laboratory Test Results
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3; Barron Road near Alexandria Avenue; College Station, Texas
Moisture Dry Liquid Plastic Plasticity Compression Lateral Type Percent N-Value
Boring Sample Depth Content Density Limit Limit Index Strength Strain Pressure of Fines from
No. No. (ft) (%) (pcf) (%) (%) (%) (tsf) (%) (psi) Failure (41200 sirr Comments
Sieve)
B-1 S-1 0-1.5 6.1 26 15 11 - - - - 22.9 12 PP' Not Applicable
S-2 2-3.5 - - - - - - - - - - 18 PP' = 4.5+ tsf
S-3 4-5.5 - - - - - - - _ - 44 PP' = 4.5+ tsf
B-2 S-1 0-2 3.3 - NP NP NP - - - - 18.7 - PP'=0.5tsf
S-2 2-3.5 - - - - - - - - - - 20 PP' = 4.5+ tsf
S-3 4-6 - - - - - - - - - - - PP' = 4.5+ tsf
Notes
a. PP = Pocket or hand penetrometer reading of unconfined compression strength in tons per square foot (tso (Typical).
b. NP = Non -plastic (i.e., the Liquid Limit — Plastic Limit = 0).
CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC.
SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
Proposed Relocation of City of College Station Fire Station No. 3; Barron Road near Alexandria Avenue; College Station, Texas
Moisture Dry Liquid Plastic Plasticity Compression Lateral Type Percent N-Value
Boring Sample Depth Content Density Limit Limit Index Strength Strain Pressure of Fines from
No. No. (ft) (%) (pcf) (%) (%) (%) (tsf) (%) (psi) Failure (4200 SPT Comments
Sieve)
B-3 S-1
0-2
23.3
- 88
25
63
- - - - 76.4
-
PP' = 4.5+ tsf
S-2
2-3.5
31.6
- 75
23
52
- - - - 86.5
27
PP' = 4.5+ tsf
S-3
4-5.5
25.0
- 59
21
38
- - - - 68.0
27
PP' = 4.5+ tsf
S-4
6-7.5
28.6
- 59
20
39
- - - - 72.9
19
PP' = 4.5+ tsf
S-5
8-9.5
21.1
- 40
18
22
- - - - 49.9
43
1111' Not Applicable
S-6
13-14.5
27.8
- 54
20
34
- - - - 43.2
31
PI'' = 1.5 tsf
S-7
18-20
36.4
- 80
23
57
- - - - 97.2
-
PP' = 2.5 tsf
S-8
23-25
34.7
87.7 -
-
-
5.4 2.6% 0 Shear -
PP' = 4.5+ tsf
Notes
a. PP = Pocket or hand penetrometer reading of unconfined compression strength in tons per square foot (tsf) (Typical)
1 __
SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201,
1997 edition, hereinafter referred to as the "General Conditions" is hereby made a
part of this Specification, to the same extent as if reproduced in full except as
modified, revised,or rescinded by the Supplementary Conditions. Copies of the
General Conditions may be obtained from the American Institute of Architects, or
may be examined at the office of the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION 00700
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 00700-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
SECTION 00820 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 GENERAL
A. Construct and complete the designated project including certain site improvements
and appurtenance indicated, excepting only those items specifically noted as not in
contract (N.I.C.) or by Owner's Contractor.
B. All major work including utilities will be let under a single prime contract.
C. Confirm operations at site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, or
Contract Documents.
1. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment.
2. Do not load structures with weights that will endanger structure.
3. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored
on premises.
4. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or areas needed for operations.
D. All colored concrete shall be an intergral coloring system.
1.03 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION FORMAT
A. Description:
1. Extent of work required includes, but is not limited to, the scope indicated.
2. Provide all items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed,
mentioned, or scheduled on the Drawings or in the Specifications and related
Construction Documents, including all labor, materials, equipment, and
incidents necessary and required for their completion, as reasonably implied.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. All contractual and related documents, and applicable portions of Division 1
General Requirements, are part of all Specification Trade Sections.
2. Refer to applicable sections for other related work.
C. References:
1. Obtain and conform to manufacturer's directions for installation, connection
and/or erection of all manufactured articles, materials and equipment.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 00820-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1.04
2. Conform to applicable portion of listed reference standards as minimum
requirements.
3. References to standard specifications shall mean to the latest edition of such
specifications, including all revisions thereto.
4. The applicable issues of the publications listed, but referred to thereafter by
basic designation only, form a part of the specifications to the extent indicated
by reference thereto.
CORRELATION OF DOCUMENTS
A. Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical Drawings are supplementary to the
Architectural Drawings.
B. Architectural Drawings are supplementary to Architectural Specifications.
C. Refer to Architectural Drawings for verification of locations, sizes and dimensions.
D. Arrange any necessary changes, furnishing fittings, and accessories as required to
meet architectural conditions.
E. Notify Architect immediately of any discrepancy, error or doubtful instructions as
provided in the General Conditions.
1.05 - COORDINATION WITH OWNER -FURNISHED ITEMS
A. It is understood that operations necessary to perform the Work required may cause
damage to items not directly related to the specific Work.
B. The Contractor is advised to take any action necessary to avoid such damage where
possible.
C. Damaged items are to be replaced or repaired to the original existing condition prior
to commencement of this Work.
1.06 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTS
A. Provide photographs to document the existing conditions of the proposed work
areas prior to beginning work.
B. Maintain copies of all photographs at the site during the Work and deliver to the
Owner at completion of the Work.
C. Label photographs describing location and "before" or "after".
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 00820-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1.07 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. The Owner will occupy the existing facilities during entire period of construction
for the conduct of normal operations.
B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations.
C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement.
D. Coordinate all activities with the Fire Chief to ensure absolute minimum disruption
of normal operation.
1. Contractor is cautioned that the Owner will provide access to the required
work areas, as described in the Special Conditions, however limitations will
be imposed by the Fire Department as necessary to maintain normal operation.
E. Some specification selections require specific scheduling to avoid damage to in -
place items.
F. Allow sufficient time for special coordination required to avoid replacing items
unnecessarily damaged and to avoid unnecessarily disrupting normal School
operations.
1.08 NOTICE REGARDING ASBESTOS
A. It is the intent of these Contract Documents that all materials to be incorporated into
the work be free of asbestos in any form. The Contractor is to notify Architect
immediately when he becomes aware or suspects that any material contains
asbestos. The Owner will require that the Contractor certify that asbestos has not
been incorporated into the project.
END OF SECTION****************************************
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 00820-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 01100 —SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Project consists of all labor, supervision, materials, services
and equipment required in conjunction with all work to construct a new fire station
of approximately 9,400 square feet. The station will house eight (8) firefighters.
Living quarters include sleeping areas, kitchen, dining, dayroom, training room,
offices, weight room, restrooms. There will be a two -bay pull through apparatus
room. Additional support areas for the apparatus room will have support for
storage, decon, and repair/maintenance. The exterior will be stone veneer and siding
on wood framing. The truck bays will be stone veneer with CMU backup. The
foundation will be a structural slab on void forms. Site work includes clearing,
grubbing, grading, utilities to building, underground storm drainage, concrete
paving and landscaping.
1. Project Location: 1900 Barron Rd., College Station, Texas 77845
2. Owner: City of College Station, Texas
B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated January, 2006, were
prepared for Project by Brown Reynolds Watford Architects, Inc., 2700 Earl
Rudder South, Suite 4000, College Station, Texas 77845.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES
A. Furnish & Provide
1. Labor, materials and equipment.
2. Tools, construction equipment and machinery.
3. Water, heat and utilities required for construction.
4. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of
the work.
B. Secure and pay for proper execution and completion of work as necessary, and as
applicable at the time of receipt of bids:
1. Permits
2. Government fees
3. Licenses
C. Give required notices.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
01100-1
SUMMARY
D. Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders and other legal
requirements of public authorities which bear on performance of work.
E. Promptly submit written notice to Architect of observed variance of Contract
Documents from legal requirements. It is not Contractor's responsibility to make
certain that drawings and specifications comply with codes and regulations.
F. Contractor shall verify all conditions at the site and dimensions in the field prior to
starting work. Architect shall be notified in writing of any discrepancies found.
G. The Drawing and Specifications represent the work to be completed not the method
of construction. However, the Contractor shall perform all demolition and remedial
work in a sequence to where any interruption of the operation of the facilities or
utility service occurs at an absolute minimum.
H. A work schedule shall be submitted to and approved by Owner and Architect prior
to commencing work. This schedule shall be updated monthly and submitted in
conjunction with the Application for Payment.
I. Contractor shall use every precaution to prevent damage to roads, landscape,
adjacent property, building and utilities above and below ground that are adjacent to
or included in the area under contract. The Contractor shall repair and replace, at
his expense, any material or building affected, damaged or destroyed because of his
operations or work.
1.04 CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under the Standard Form of Agreement Between the
City and the Contractor.
1.05 WORK SEQUENCE
A. All new work may begin following the Notice to Proceed.
1.06 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have use of premises for construction operations,
including use of Project site, during construction period.
1.07 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Owner will furnish furnishing for installation by Contractor. The Work includes
providing support systems to receive Owner's furnished products.
1. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner -furnished items.
2. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor
shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01100-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUMMARY
3. If Owner -furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will
arrange for replacement or repair.
4. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner -
furnished products. Using Owner -furnished earliest possible delivery dates,
Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner -furnished items in
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
5. Contractor shall review product and note discrepancies or anticipated
problems in use of product.
6. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner -
furnished items at Project site.
7. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner -furnished items from damage
during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
8. If Owner -furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations,
Contractor shall repair or replace them.
1.08 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections
using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to
help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project
Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete.
Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to
determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used
in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other
Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted
as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense
requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall
be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract
Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language may be used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by
Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in
the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled
indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the
context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or
phrase.
C. Description:
1. Extent of work required includes, but is not limited to, the scope indicated.
2. Provide all items, articles and materials listed, mentioned, or scheduled on the
Drawings or in the Specifications and related Construction Documents,
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01100-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUMMARY
including all labor, materials, equipment, and incidents necessary and required
for their completion, as reasonably implied.
D. References:
1. Obtain and conform to manufacturer's directions for installation, connection
and/or erection of all manufactured articles, materials and equipment.
2. Conform to applicable portion of listed reference standards as minimum
requirements.
3. References to standard specifications shall mean to the latest edition of such
specifications, including all revisions thereto.
4. The applicable issues of the publications listed, but referred to thereafter by
basic designation only, form a part of the specifications to the extent indicated
by reference thereto.
5. Maintain copies of all references at job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION 01100
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01100-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUMMARY
SECTION 01230 — ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain
work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from
the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in
the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials,
equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from
the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other
adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
2. Alternate Bids shall include all overhead and profit applicable to that portion
of the work.
3. The description below for each Alternate Bid is recognized to be incomplete
and abbreviated, but implies that each change must be complete for the scope
of work affected. The descriptions are primarily scope definitions, and do not
necessarily detail the full range of materials and processes needed to complete
the work as required. Refer to applicable Specification Sections, and to
applicable drawings, for the specific requirements of the work, regardless of
whether references are so noted in the description of each Alternate.
Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly
integrate with the work of each Alternate. Any change of details,
construction, etc., as required to accommodate the Alternate shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in his Alternate Bid
Price.
4. Where methods of construction, materials, finishes, or details of installation,
required by the various Alternate Bids, differ from the requirements shown on
drawings or specified for corresponding items, the Alternate construction,
materials, etc., will be subject to approval by the Architect.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01230-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ALTERNATES
5. Approval of the Alternate makes all requirements of scope, performance,
submissions, service and guarantee binding as any other material name
appearing in the Specifications for the Base Bid. All necessary changes in
building design or construction to accommodate the alternate materials shall
be the sole responsibility of the Contractor without extra cost to the Owner.
1.04 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely
integrate work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects,
and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether
or not indicated as part of alternate.
2. Prior to installation of the Alternate items, verify that all surfaces have been
modified as necessary to accept the installation and that the item or items may
be installed in complete accordance with their manufacturer's current
recommendations. Notify the Architect of any discrepancies before
proceeding.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party
involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been
accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete
description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the
Contract.
D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section and on the
bid sheet. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for
materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: Add landscaping in buffer around perimeter of site that is in
addition to the minimum requirements of the City of College Station.
B. Alternate No. 2: Add sealed, hardened, and polished finish lieu of sealed concrete
finish.
C. Alternate No. 3: Add custom shading devices.
D. Alternate No. 4: Add emergency generator.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01230-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ALTERNATES
END OF SECTION 01230
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01230-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ALTERNATES
SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and
processing Contract modifications.
B. Related Section include the following:
1. Division 1, Section "Unit Prices"
1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the
Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA
Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
1.04 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of
proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or
the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or
revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not
consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the
proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request,
submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the
Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit
costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If
requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and
amounts of trade discounts.
C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the
effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity
duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available
total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01250-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require
modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a
request for a change.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the
change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change.
Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the
Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,
with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish
survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the
effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration,
start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float
before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if
the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for
product or system specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 or any form acceptable to the
Owner for Proposal Requests.
1.05 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order
for signatures of Owner and Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION 01250
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01250-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
SECI<'ION 01270 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures"
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per
unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the
Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required
by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.04 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation,
insurance, overhead, and profit. Taxes are excluded from all pricing.
B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work
that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment
for unit prices are specified in those Sections.
C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work -in -place that
involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's
expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01270-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UNIT PRICES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Pier Casing (Temporary) to be provided by Contractor if water and/or pier shaft
collapse problems are encountered.
END OF SECTION 01270
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01270-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UNIT PRICES
SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to
prepare and process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices"
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the
Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing
Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation
of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required
administrative forms and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
b. Submittals Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no
later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial
Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately
phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each
phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to
establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for
each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of
Values:
a. Project name and location.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01290-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1.05
b. Name of Architect.
C. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to
indicate the following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
C. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent,
adjusted to total 100 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate
continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports.
Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line
items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the
Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment
purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site.
Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of
materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed
value of that part of the Work.
7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be
complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and
profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of
actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the
Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at
Contractor's option.
8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the
next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change
Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and
payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of
Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional
requirements.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01290-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the
Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work
covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703
Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a
person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will
return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's
Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives
issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for
Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall
include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording
appropriate information about application.
F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application (except initial submittal) for
Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub -
subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous
application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction
for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full
waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work
must submit waivers.
4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's
waiver of mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application.
a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers
from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the
application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner
acceptable to Owner.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must
precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the
following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Products list.
5. Schedule of unit prices.
6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01290-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
9. Copies of building permits.
10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
11. Initial progress report.
12. Report of preconstruction conference.
13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent
completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially
complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract
Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion
issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases
and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including,
but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required
and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and
Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar
data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of
and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION 01290
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01290-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction
operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General project coordination procedures.
2. Conservation.
3. Coordination Drawings.
4. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
5. Project meetings.
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of
responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and
submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of
the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the
Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that
depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with
those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of
each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with
operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best
results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of
other components, before or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to
ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01310-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later
installation.
C. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining
special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required
notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if
coordination of their Work is required.
D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required
administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other
contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such
administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are
carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work.
1.04 CORRELATION OF DOCUMENTS
A. Any discrepancy in the documents shall be interpreted to include the most
restrictive or costly solution. In case of discrepancy either in figures or Drawings or
Specifications, the matter must be promptly submitted by the Contractor to the
Architect, who will promptly make a determination in writing. Any adjustment by
the Contractor without such a determination by the Architect will be at the
Contractor's own risk and expense. The Architect will furnish, as necessary,
additional detailed Drawings and information for clarification.
B. If a document discrepancy is identified prior to bidding, the Architect is to be
notified so a written clarification may be issued.
C. Any survey drawing documents included herein are for convenience of the
Contractor and Owner. The Architect assumes no responsibility as to their
completeness or accuracy.
D. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or
shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, is of like effect as
if shown or mentioned in both.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01310-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
E. On any of the Drawings in which a portion of the work is detailed or drawn out and
the remainder is shown in outline, the parts detailed or drawn out will apply also to
all other like portions of the work.
F. When the word "similar" appears on Drawings, it has a general meaning and must
not be interpreted as meaning identical. All details must be worked out in relation
to their location and connection with other parts of the work.
G. Refer to Architectural Drawings for verification of locations, sizes and dimensions.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space
availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of
different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and
materials fabricated by separate entities.
1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning" and
Division 16 Section "Basic Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination
Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
B. Staff Names: Submit a list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent
and other personnel in attendance at Project site with the bid proposal. Within 15
days of starting construction operations, identify individuals and their duties and
responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office
telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by
each temporary telephone.
1.06 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and
supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other
contractors.
1.07 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless
otherwise indicated. In addition to contractors specific coordination meetings for
each element of work, and other regular project meetings for other purposes, hold
general progress meeting each month. Require each entity then involved in
planning, coordination or performance of work to be properly represented at each
meeting. Review each entity's present and future needs, including interface
requirements, time, sequences, deliveries, access, site utilization, temporary
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01310-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
facilities and services, hours of work, hazards and risks, housekeeping, and
documentation of information for payment requests. Discuss whether each element
of current work is ahead of schedule, on time, or behind time in relation with
updated progress schedule. Determine how behind -time work will be expedited,
and secure commitments from entities involved in doing so. Discuss whether
schedule revisions are required to ensure that current work and subsequent work
will be completed within Contract Time. Review everything of significance which
could affect progress of the work.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose
presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and
Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited
attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute
the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect,
within 3 days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days
after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another
convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel
assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their
consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;
manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the
conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project
and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including
the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
C. Critical work sequencing.
d. Designation of responsible personnel.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
g. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
h. Submittal procedures.
i. Preparation of Record Documents.
j. Use of the premises.
k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
1. Parking availability.
in. Office, work, and storage areas.
n. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
0. First aid.
p. Security.
q. Progress cleaning.
r. Working hours.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01310-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site
before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators
involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration
with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall
attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for
the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the
following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
C. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Submittals.
g. Review of mockups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility problems.
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
1. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
m. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
p. Temporary facilities and controls.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
S. Testing and inspecting requirements.
t. Required performance results.
U. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to
performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible
date.
�j D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. Coordinate
dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each
contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current
progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future
activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters
relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress
meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress.
Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule,
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01310-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities
will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the
following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off -site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Change Orders.
14) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to
parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative
form, of progress since the previous meeting and report.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after
each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made
or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of
each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION 01310
A
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01310-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting
the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the
following:
1. Preliminary Construction Schedule.
2. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Submittals Schedule.
4. Daily construction reports.
5. Material location reports.
6. Field condition reports.
7. Special reports.
8. Construction photographs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of
Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting
and distributing meeting and conference minutes.
3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and
reports.
4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests
and inspections.
5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic
negatives as Project Record Documents at Project closeout.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,
and other information specified.
B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following
information in a tabular format:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01320-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies; one a single sheet
of reproducible media, and one a print.
D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule,
one on reproducible media and one a print, large enough to show entire schedule for
entire construction period.
E. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view with
Application for Payment.
1. Format: 4 x 6 smooth -surface glossy prints on single -weight commercial -
grade stock, enclosed in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-
ring binder.
2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-
stamped impression with the following information:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and address of photographer.
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass
point), and elevation or story of construction.
3. Negatives: Submit a complete set of photographic negatives in protective
envelopes as a Project Record Document. Identify date photographs were
taken.
4. The photos shall be taken at the same time on the same day of each week.
F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.
G. Material Location Reports: Submit two copies at monthly intervals.
H. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing
conditions.
I. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM
scheduling and reporting.
B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01320-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule
and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.
2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update
schedule.
3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim
milestones, and partial Owner occupancy.
4. Review delivery dates for Owner -furnished products.
5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.
6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and
inspecting agencies.
8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures.
9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
10. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
11. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance
of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other
required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from
parties involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and
schedule them in proper sequence.
C. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services
requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including
temporary lighting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by
dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review,
resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing
dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of
Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar -chart schedule.
Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01320-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early
- because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction
Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2.02 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning
& Scheduling."
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to
date of Final Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule
that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change
Order.
C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for
each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days,
unless specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead
items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate
activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not
limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal
review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established
for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative
procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract
Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is
affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work
performed by Owner.
3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product.
Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery
dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
4. Owner -Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product.
Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery
dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01320-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
C. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion
of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
C. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
i. Tests and inspections.
j . Adjusting.
k. Curing.
1. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
7. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major
portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major
area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to
provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
b. Permanent space enclosure.
C. Completion of mechanical installation.
d. Completion of electrical installation.
e. Substantial Completion.
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule,
including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and
Final Completion.
F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line,
indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work
performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests.
1. Refer to Division 1 Section 01290 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting
and payment procedures.
G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent
with its submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate
the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using one of the following programs:
Primavara or Microsoft Project. The contractor shall provide a digital copy of the
approved construction schedule to the architect.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01320-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
2.03 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar -chart -type construction
schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first
workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant
construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram
for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated
activities.
2.04 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -
chart -type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established
for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule
and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first
workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete,
indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within
time bar.
2.05 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the
following information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
3. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
4. Accidents.
5. Meetings and significant decisions.
6. Unusual events (refer to special reports).
7. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
8. Meter readings and similar recordings.
9. Emergency procedures.
10. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
11. Change Orders received and implemented.
12. Construction Change Directives received.
13. Services connected and disconnected.
14. Equipment or system tests and startups.
15. Partial Completions and occupancies.
16. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing
materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01320-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment
fabricated or stored away from Project site.
C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field
conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a
request for information on CSI Form 13.2A or form approved by Architect..
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.06 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence.
Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature
occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and
submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by
Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent
information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or
predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
j.01 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update
schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one
week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where
revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently
with the report of each such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including,
but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and
activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each
activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate
contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by
Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and
post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have
completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in
performance of construction activities.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01320-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
3.02 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Format: 35 mm, color print film, 4 x 6 prints.
B. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it
is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph.
C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take twelve color
photographs of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage
points, as directed by Architect. Show existing conditions adjacent to property.
D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take twelve color photographs monthly,
coinciding with cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment.
Photographer shall select vantage points to best show status of construction and
progress since last photographs were taken.
1. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of periodic photographs in field
office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs
the same as for those submitted to Architect.
2. Provide two (2) sets of photographs to Architect with each Application for
Payment.
E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take twelve color photographs after
date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents.
Architect will direct photographer for desired vantage points.
END OF SECTION 01320
I
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01320-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for
Payment.
2. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection
reports and Delegated -Design Submittals and for erecting mockups.
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project
Record Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's
responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's
approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Organization: All required submittals for a specification section must be
transmitted together complete as one submittal transmittal. Partial transmittals will
not be accepted for review.
B. Use of CAD backgrounds: CAD files of any type including structural, mechanical,
electrical, plumbing, or architectural drawings will not be made available for the
Contractor's use.
C. Contractor's responsibilities:
1. Contractor shall thoroughly check shop drawings, project data and samples for
compliance with Contract Documents and list variances prior to submission.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01330-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
2. Contractor represents by approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product
Data and samples that he has or will coordinate and verify dimensions, all
materials, field measurements, field construction criteria, catalog numbers and
similar data with requirements of work and of Contract Documents prior to
submitting.
3. Submittals shall bear Contractor's stamp certifying that they have been
checked.
4. Contractor's responsibility for deviations or errors and omissions in submittals
is not relieved by Architect/ Engineer review of submittals, unless Architect/
Engineer gives specific written acceptance of specific deviations.
5. Do not proceed with purchasing, fabrication or delivery of work which
requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect/Engineer stamp
and initials or signature evidencing final review and approval of submittals.
6. Contractor is responsible for dimensions at job site, quantities, coordinating
component parts and trades to effect unified construction and implement
construction techniques, safety of incremental units, and satisfactory
performance of work in accordance with Contract Documents.
7. Delays caused by failure of Contractor to check shop drawings and to stamp
with this approval shall be Contractor's responsibility.
8. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
work to avoid delays.
9. No extension of time shall be allowed because of failure to properly
coordinate and sequence submittals.
D. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with
performance of construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the
Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
E. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements
for scheduled performance of related construction activities.
F. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for
resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of
submittal.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 working days for initial review of each submittal.
Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination
with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's
consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 21 working days for
initial review of each submittal. Items requiring 21 days will be indicated
on the submittal log.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01330-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
w
3. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial
submittal.
4. Allow 15 working days for processing each resubmittal.
5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to
transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
G. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for
identification.
I. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title
block.
2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to
record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by
Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action
taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Revise first subparagraph below to suit Project and office practice. See
Evaluations.
i. Unique identifier, including revision number, using Architect's submittal
logging system.
j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
1. Other necessary identification.
H. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
I. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal
and handling. Transmit each submittal using CSI Form 12.1A or other transmittal
form approved by Architect. Architect will return submittals, without review,
received from sources other than Contractor.
1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record
relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by
Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the
Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the
same label information as the related submittal.
2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies
with requirements of the Contract Documents.
3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Destination (To:).
d. Source (From:).
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01330-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
- f. Category and type of submittal.
g. Submittal purpose and description.
h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
i. Remarks.
j. Signature of transmitter.
J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,
suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as
necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on
transmittal forms.
K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken ,
by Architect in connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual
Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal (five copies of
structural, mechanical, electrical or plumbing submittals), unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return three copies. Mark up and retain one returned
copy as a Project Record Document.
B. Product Data: Collect all information required into a single submittal for each
element of construction and type of product or equipment. One submittal maximum
per specification section.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard
printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product
Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Standard color charts.
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring.
g. Printed performance curves.
h. Operational range diagrams.
i. Mill reports.
j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
1. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
m. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01330-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
n. Notation of coordination requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale.
Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or
standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
C. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal,
and control wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Design calculations.
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements.
1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -
installed wiring.
3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings,
submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than
30 by 40 inches.
4. Number of Copies: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print
and two blue- or black -line prints of each submittal. Architect will return the
reproducible print and one marked up print for Project Records.
5. Retain the one returned print as a Project Record Drawing.
D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for
mockups.
2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting
of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and
patterns available.
3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,
prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished
in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for
use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected.
Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of
manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials;
complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture,
and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to
facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's
sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the
following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01330-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
b. Product name or name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
5. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on
Contractor's letterhead, provide the following:
a. Size limitations.
b. Compliance with recognized standards.
C. Availability.
d. Delivery time.
6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final
check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of
these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as
delivered and installed.
a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired
units that show approximate limits of the variations.
b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly,
connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics.
7. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit two full sets of available
choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to
be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return one set of
submittal with options selected.
8. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect
will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain
one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample.
a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship,
fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar
characteristics are to be demonstrated.
9. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for
quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity.
Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction
associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in
individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an
undamaged condition at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as
Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products
required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following
information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
2. Number and name of room or space.
3. Location within room or space.
F. Delegated -Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01330-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
I
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.
H. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
I. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Payment Procedures."
J. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
K. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms
proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products
or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in
tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or
supplying products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
2.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other
Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes
signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and
certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to
sign documents on behalf of that entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1
"Quality Requirements."
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1
"Construction Progress Documentation."
C. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents.
Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before
submitting to Architect.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
01330-7
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include
Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and
number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying
that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the
Contract Documents.
3.02 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval
stamp and will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each
submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action
taken, as follows:
1. No exceptions taken.
2. Make corrections as noted.
3. Revise and resubmit.
4. Rejected.
5. Other.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return
it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will
forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may
be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01330-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality
assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality -control requirements for individual construction activities are
specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those
Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's
quality -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by
Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
provisions of this Section.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a
schedule of required tests and inspections.
2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of
construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
3. Divisions 2-16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before
and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and
ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements.
B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during
and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies
with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities
performed by Architect.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01400-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and
materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and
execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are
not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.
Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or
certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the
Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific
performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification
required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at
Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need:
1. Texas Accessibility Standards.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the
form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized
authority.
B. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible
design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor
to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and
systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include
list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the
following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Description of test and inspection.
3. Identification of applicable standards.
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.
5. Number of tests and inspections required.
6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01400-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality -control service.
D. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work
complies with the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and re -inspecting.
E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements,
notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar
documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on
performance of the Work.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized
representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to
inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design,
and extent to those indicated for this Project.
C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or
assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-
service performance.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or
systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally
qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced
in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01400-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products
that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction
activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those
operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall
be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar
regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade -union
jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to
conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that
specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed.
1. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each
test, inspection, and similar quality -assurance service to Architect with copy
to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract
Documents.
H. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build
mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or
construction.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
1.08 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Costs for retesting and re -inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by
work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to
Contractor.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control
services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified
testing agency to perform these quality -control services.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that
requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility,
submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01400-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the
Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having
jurisdiction, when they so direct.
C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner may engage a testing agency to conduct
special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the
responsibility of Owner.
1. Testing agency will notify Architect, and Contractor promptly of irregularities
and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality -control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to
authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at
Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report
whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the
Contract Documents.
5. Testing agency will retest and re -inspect corrected work.
D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized
service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment
installation, including service connections. Report results in writing.
E. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were
Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and
re -inspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply
with requirements established by the Contract Documents.
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in
performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies
observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and
similar quality -control service through Contractor.
4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract
Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests,
inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary
services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit
assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01400-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing
and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field -curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require
control by testing agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment
at Project site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -
assurance and quality -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid
necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and
inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and
similar quality -control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit
schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and
each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and
inspections are required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services,
repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section
"Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment
of responsibility for quality -control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01400-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01420 — REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": The term "approved," when used to convey Architect's action on
Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties
and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected,"
"approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by Architect, requested by
Architect, and similar phrases.
D. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or
schedules on Drawings or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and
similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted,"
"scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference.
E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and
lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions,
and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the
Work.
F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for
unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at Project site including
unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing,
anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning,
and similar operations.
H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for
the intended use.
I. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor
as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular
construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar
operations.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01420-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 REFERENCES
J. The term "experienced," when used with an entity, means having successfully
completed a minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this
Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied
with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction
activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a
corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that
requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding
generic name.
K. "Project site" is the space available for performing construction activities. The
extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with
the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and
effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent
referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by
reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract
Documents, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified
and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum
quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer
uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect
for a decision before proceeding.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or
specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation
may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may
exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these
requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect
for a decision before proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be
familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of
applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction
activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them
available on request.
E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean
the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of
Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01420-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 REFERENCES
of the U.S." or the recognized name of the entities as found on the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA
Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)
(202) 862-5100
www.aluminum.org
AAADM
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
(216) 241-7333
www.taol.com/aaadm
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
(202) 737-0202
www.aabchq.com
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
(847) 303-5664
www.aamanet.org
AAN
American Association of Nurserymen
(See ANLA)
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and
(202) 624-5800
Transportation Officials
www.aashto.org
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
(919) 549-8141
(The)
www.aatcc.org
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
(202) 429-5155
www.abma-dc.org
ACI
American Concrete Institute/ACI International
(248) 848-3700
www.aci-int.org
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
(972) 506-7216
www.concrete-pipe.org
ADC
Air Diffusion Council
(312) 201-0101
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
(205) 257-2530
www.aeic.org
AFPA
American Forest & Paper Association
(See AF&PA)
AF&PA
American Forest & Paper Association
(800) 878-8878
www.afandpa.org
(202) 463-2700
AGA
American Gas Association
(202) 824-7000
www.aga.org
AHA
American Hardboard Association
(847) 934-8800
www.ahardbd.org
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
(202) 872-5955
www.aham.org
' AI
Asphalt Institute
(606) 288-4960
www.asphaltinstitute.org
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
01420-3
OCTOBER 20,
2006
REFERENCES
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
(202) 626-7300
www.aiaonline.org
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
(800) 644-2400
www.aisc.org
(312) 670-2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
(202) 452-7100
www.steel.org
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
(303) 792-9559
ALA
American Laminators Association
(See LMA)
ALCA
Associated Landscape Contractors of America
(800) 395-2522
www.alca.org
(703) 736-9666
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee
(301) 972-1700
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
(847) 394-0150
www.amca.org
ANLA
American Nursery & Landscape Association
(202) 789-2900
(Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen)
www.anla.org
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
(212) 642-4900
www.ansi.org
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts
(402) 476-3852
www.zianet.com/AOSA
APA
APA-The Engineered Wood Association
(253) 565-6600
www.apawood.org
APA
Architectural Precast Association
(941) 454-6989
www.archprecast.org
API
American Petroleum Institute
(202) 682-8000
www.api.org
ARI
Air -Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
(703) 524-8800
www.ari.org
ASCA
Architectural Spray Coaters Association
(856) 848-6120
www.ascassoc.com
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
(800) 548-2723
www.asce.org
(703) 295-6300
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
(800) 527-4723
Air -Conditioning Engineers
www.ashrae.org
(404) 636-8400
ASME
ASME International
(800) 843-2763
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
International)
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
01420-4
OCTOBER 20,
2006
REFERENCES
www.asme.org
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
(440) 835-3040
www.asse-plumbing.org
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
(610) 832-9585
www.astm.org
AWCI
AWCI International
(703) 534-8300
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries
Intemational)
www.awci.org
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(See WCMA)
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
(800) 449-8811
www.awinet.org
(703) 733-0600
AWPA
American Wood -Preservers' Association
(817) 326-6300
www.awpa.com
AWS
American Welding Society
(800) 443-9353
www.aws.org
(305) 443-9353
AWWA
American Water Works Association
(800) 926-7337
www.awwa.org
(303) 794-7711
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
(212) 661-4261
www.buildershardware.com
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The)
(703) 620-0010
www.bia.org
BIFMA
BIFMA International
(616) 285-3963
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association International)
www.bifina.com
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council
(203) 637-1312
www.carpetcushion.org
CUSS
Center for Cold -Formed Steel Structures
(573) 3414471
www.umr.edu/—ccfss
CDA
Copper Development Association Inc.
(800) 232-3282
www.copper.org
(212) 251-7200
CEA
Canadian Electricity Association (The)
(613) 230-9263
www.canelect.ca
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
(216) 241-7333
www.taol.com/cffa
CGA
Compressed Gas Association
(703) 412-0900
www.cganet.com
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
01420-5
REFERENCES
CGSB
Canadian General Standards Board
(819) 956-0425
_
www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
(888) 881-2462
www.cellulose.org
(937) 222-2462
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
(630) 584-1919
www.cisca.org
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
(423) 892-0137
www.cispi.org
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
(301) 596-2584
www.chainlinkinfo.com (under construction)
CPA
Composite Panel Association
(301) 670-0604
(Formerly: National Particleboard Association)
www.pbmdf.com
CPPA
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
(800) 510-2772
Division of Plastics Pipe Institute
(419) 241-2221
www.cppa-info.org
CRI
Carpet and Rug Institute (The)
(800) 882-8846
www.carpet-rug.com
(706) 278-3176
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
(847) 517-1200
www.crsi.org
CSA
CSA International
(216) 5244990
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
Division of Canadian Standards Association
www.iasapprovals.org
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute (The)
(800) 689-2900
www.csinet.org
(703) 684-0300
CSSB
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
(604) 462-8961
www.cedarbureau.org
CTI
Cooling Tower Institute
(281) 583-4087
www.cti.org
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
(703) 222-2010
www.dhi.org
EIA/TIA
Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry
(703) 907-7500
Association
www.eia.org
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
(800) 294-3462
www.eifsfacts.com
(770) 968-7945
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
(914) 332-0040
www.ejma.org
FCI
Fluid Controls Institute
(216) 241-7333
www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
01420-6
OCTOBER 20,
2006
REFERENCES
];GMA
Flat Glass Marketing Association
(See GANA)
FM
Factory Mutual System
(See FMG)
FMG
FM Global
(401) 275-3000
(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
www.fmglobal.com
GA
Gypsum Association
(202) 289-5440
www.gypsum.org
GANA
Glass Association of North America
(785) 271-0208
(Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association)
www.glasswebsite.com/gana
GRI
Geosynthetic Research Institute
(610) 522-8440
www.drexel.edu/gri
GTA
Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North
America
(See GANA)
HI
Hydraulic Institute
(888) 786-7744
(973)267-9700
HI
Hydronics Institute
(908) 464-8200
Division of Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association
www.gamanet.org
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
Division of National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers
(See NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
(703) 435-2900
www.hpva.org
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
(410) 838-6550
IAS
International Approval Services
(See CSA International)
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
(508) 394-4424
www.icea.net
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute
(703) 450-0116
www.icri.org
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
4122 919 02 11
www.iec.ch
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
(212) 419-7900
www.ieee.org
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (The)
(212) 248-5000
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
01420-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006
REFERENCES
www.iesna.org
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification Council
(315) 938-7444
www.igcc.org
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
(812) 2754426
www.iliai.com
IRI
HSB Industrial Risk Insurers
(800) 520-7300
www.industriah-isk.com
(860) 520-7300
ITS
Intertek Testing Services
(800) 345-3851
www.itsglobal.com
(607) 753-6711
IWS
Insect Screening Weavers Association
(Now defunct)
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
(703) 264-1690
www.kcma.org
LGSI
Light Gage Structural Institute
(972) 625-4560
www.loseke.com
LMA
Laminating Materials Association
(201) 664-2700
(Formerly: ALA - American Laminators Association)
www.Ima.org
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute
(800) 488-6864
www.lightning.org
(847) 577-7200
LSGA
Laminated Safety Glass Association
(See GANA)
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
(216) 241-7333
www.mbma.com
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
(847) 480-9138
www.maplefloor.org
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
(312) 644-6610
MHIA
Material Handling Industry of America
(800) 345-1815
www.mhia.org
(704) 676-1190
MIA
Marble Institute of America
(614) 228-6194
www.marble-institute.com
MUSFA
Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
(See SSMA)
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and
(703) 281-6613
Fittings Industry, Inc.
www.mss-hq.com
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
(312) 332-0405
www.naamm.org
NAAMM
North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
01420-8
OCTOBER 20,
2006
REFERENCES
(See GANA)
NACE
NACE International
(281) 228-6200
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
www.nace.org
NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
(703) 684-0084
(The)
www.naima.org
NAMI
National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc.
(304) 258-5100
NAPM
National Association of Photographic Manufacturers
(See PIMA)
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
(800) 557-2848
www.nbgqa.com
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
(703) 713-1900
www.ncma.org
NCPI
National Clay Pipe Institute
(414) 248-9094
www.ncpi.org
NCTA
National Cable Television Association
(202) 775-3669
www.ncta.com
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
(301) 977-3698
www.nebb.org
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association
(301) 657-3110
www.necanet.org
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
(207) 829-6901
www.nelma.org
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(703) 841-3200
www.nema.org
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
(303) 697-8441
www.electricnet.com/neta
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
(800) 344-3555
www.nfpa.org
(617) 770-3000
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
(301) 589-6372
www.nfrc.org
NGA
National Glass Association
(703) 442-4890
www.glass.org
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
(901) 377-1818
www.natlhardwood.org
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
(604) 524-2393
www.nlga.org
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
01420-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006
REFERENCES
NOFMA
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
(901) 526-5016
-
www.nofma.org
NPA
National Particleboard Association
(See CPA)
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
(800) 323-9545
www.nrca.net
(847) 299-9070
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
(301) 587-1400
www.nrmca.org
NSA
National Stone Association
(800) 342-1415
www.aggregates.org
(202) 342-1100
NSF
NSF International
(800) 673-6275
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
(734) 769-8010
www.nsf.org
NTMA
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association (The)
(800) 323-9736
www.ntma.com
(703) 779-1022
NWWDA
National Wood Window and Door Association
(See WDMA)
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
(312) 786-0300
www.pci.org
PDCA
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America
(800) 332-7322
www.pdca.com
(703) 359-0826
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
(800) 589-8956
www.pdionline.org
(508) 230-3516
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute/Technology Program
(217) 333-3929
University of Illinois -Urbana Champaign
//pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu
PIMA
Photographic & Imaging Manufacturers Association
(914) 698-7603
(Formerly: NAPM - National Association of Photographic
Manufacturers)
www.pima.net
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections
c/o AISC
www.boltcouncil.org
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
(Contact by mail only)
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service
(888) 225-7339
Division of the California Redwood Association
(415) 382-0662
www.calredwood.org
RMA
Rubber Manufacturers Association
(800) 220-7620
www.rma.org
(202) 682-4800
SAE
SAE International
(724) 776-4841
www.sae.org
(724) 776-4960
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
01420-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006
REFERENCES
(publications)
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
(847) 462-1930
www.sdi.org
SDI
Steel Door Institute
(440) 899-0010
www.steeldoot.org
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
(843) 689-6878
www.sefalabfum.com
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
(315) 938-7444
www.sgpc.org
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
(312) 644-6610
www.sigmaonline.org/sigma
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
(843) 626-1995
www.steeljoist.org
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
(561) 533-0991
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
(703) 803-2980
www.smacna.org
SPI
The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.
(202) 974-5200
www.plasticsindustry.org
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
(850) 434-2611
www.spib.org
SPI/SPFD
The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.
Spray Polyurethane Foam Division
(See SPI)
SPRI
SPRI
(781) 444-0242
(Single Ply Roofing Institute)
www.spri.org
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America
(800) 982-0355
www.ssina.com
(202) 342-8630
SSMA
Steel Stud Manufacturers Association
(312) 456-5590
(Formerly: ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association)
www.ssma.com
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
(800) 837-8303
www.sspc.org
(412) 281-2331
STI
Steel Tank Institute
(847) 438-8265
www.steeltank.com
SWI
Steel Window Institute
(216) 241-7333
www.steelwindows.com
SWRI
Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute
(816) 472-7974
www.sw-rionline.org
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01420-11
OCTOBER 20, 2006 REFERENCES
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc.
(864) 646-8453
-
www.tileusa.com
TPI
Truss Plate Institute
(608) 833-5900
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International
(800) 405-8873
www.turfgrasssod.org
(847) 705-9898
UFAC
Upholstered Furniture Action Council
(336) 885-5065
www.ufac.org
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(800) 704-4050
www.ul.com
(847) 272-8800
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
(972) 243-3902
//members. aol.com/unibell
USG
United States Gypsum Company
(800) 874-4968
A Subsidiary of USG Corporation
(312) 606-4000
www.usg.com
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
(800) 938-7488
www.culturenet.ca/usitt
(315) 463-6463
USP
U.S. Pharmacopeia
(800) 822-8772
www.usp.org
(301) 881-0666
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association
(800) 424-2869
www.wastec.org
(202) 244-4700
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
(800) 283-1486
www.wclib.org
(503) 639-0651
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(212) 661-4261
(Formerly: AWCMA - American Window Covering Manufacturers
Association)
www.windowcoverings.org
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association
(800) 223-2301
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door
(847) 299-5200
Association)
www.wdma.com
WIC
Woodwork Institute of California
(916) 372-9943
www.wicnet.org
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
(800) 550-7889
www.wmmpa.com
(530) 661-9591
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
(503) 224-3930
www.wwpa.org
F. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean
the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone
numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01420-12
OCTOBER 20, 2006 REFERENCES
-IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (The) (909) 595-8449
www.iapmo.org
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (800) 284-4406
www.icbo.org (562) 699-0541
ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533
(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials)
www.inticode.org
G.
Abbreviations and Acronyms for Federal
Government Agencies: Where
abbreviations and acronyms are used in
Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site
addresses are subject to change and
are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of
the date of the Contract Documents.
CE
Army Corps of Engineers
(601) 634-2355
CRD Standards
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
(202) 512-1800
www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
(800) 638-2772
www.cpsc.gov
(301) 504-0990
DOC
Department of Commerce
(202) 482-2000
www.doc.gov
DOD
Department of Defense
(215) 697-6257
DOD Specifications and Standards
Hastimage.daps.dla.mil/online
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
(202) 260-2090
www.epa.gov
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
(202) 366-4000
Department of Transportation
www.faa.gov
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
(202) 418-0190
www.fcc.gov
FDA
Food and Drug Administration
(888) 463-6332
www.fda.gov
FED -STD
Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS
Federal Specification
(Available from DOD, GSA, and NIBS)
FTMS
Federal Test Method Standard
(See FS)
GSA
General Services Administration
(202) 708-5082
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
01420-13
OCTOBER 20,
2006
REFERENCES
www.gsa.gov
HUD
Department of Housing and Urban Development
www.hud.gov
LBL
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
(See LBNL)
LBNL
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
www.lbl.gov
MILSPEC
Military Specification and Standards
(See DOD)
NCHRP
National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(See TRB)
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology
www.nist.gov
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
(See CFR 29)
www.osha.gov
RUS
Rural Utilities Service
(See USDA)
TRB
Transportation Research Board
www.nas.edu/trb
USDA
Department of Agriculture
www.usda.gov
USPS
Postal Service
www.usps.gov
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
(202)619-8925
(Federal
Specifications)
(202)401-0388
(510) 486-5605
(301) 975-2000
(202) 219-5000
(202) 720-9540
(202)334-2933
(202)720-8732
(202)268-2000
01420-14
REFERENCES
H. Abbreviations and Acronyms for State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations
and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall
mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone
numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CAPUC State of California, Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782
www.cpuc.ca.gov
CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs (916) 574-2041
Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation
www.dca.ca.gov/r—r/homefum.htm
TFS Texas Forest Service (409) 639-8180
Forest Products Laboratory
//txforestservice. tamu. edu
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used
END OF SECTION 01420
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01420-15
OCTOBER 20, 2006 REFERENCES
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including
temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Sewers and drainage.
2. Water service and distribution.
3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water
facilities.
4. Heating and cooling facilities.
5. Ventilation.
6. Electric power service.
7. Lighting.
8. Telephone service.
C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Temporary roads and paving.
2. Dewatering facilities and drains.
3. Project identification and temporary signs.
4. Waste disposal facilities.
5. Field offices.
6. Storage and fabrication sheds.
7. Lifts and hoists.
8. Temporary elevator usage.
9. Temporary stairs.
10. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Environmental protection.
2. Stormwater control.
3. Tree and plant protection.
4. Pest control.
5. Site enclosure fence.
6. Security enclosure and lockup.
7. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
8. Covered walkways.
9. Temporary enclosures.
10. Temporary partitions.
11. Fire protection.
E. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"
2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity
requirements for products in those Sections.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing
is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and
weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial
temporary closures.
1.04 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner
or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use
temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Owner's maintenance personnel.
2. Occupants of Project.
3. Architect.
4. Testing agencies.
5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage, by all parties
engaged in construction, at Project site.
C. Water Service: Provide water from City's existing water system in accordance with
local governing authority.
D. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power from City's existing system in
accordance with local governing requirements.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings,
and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities,"
and NFPA 241.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of
temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and
union jurisdictions.
2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and
regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with
NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and
inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and
permits.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change
over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.
1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service
shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each
permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's
acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services
and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in
serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials
suitable for use intended.
B. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm) 9-gage, galvanized steel,
chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe
posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD
corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide
concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section
"Carpentry."
D. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide
by maximum available lengths; regular -type panels with tapered edges. Comply
with ASTM C 36.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or
rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indices of 25 and 50,
respectively.
F. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting."
G. Tarpaulins: Fire -resistive labeled with flame -spread rating of 15 or less.
H. Water: Potable.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Field Offices: Prefabricated Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable
windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations
adequate for normal loading.
C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and
extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-
recommended classes for exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent,
and size required by location and class of fire exposure.
D. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated
recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -
reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
E. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap -dispenser, bottled -water drinking -
water units, including paper cup supply.
1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain
dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7.2 to 12.7 deg C).
F. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system,
provide vented, self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with
individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -
type heating units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel
being consumed.
G. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent
insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher -voltage outlets; equipped with ground -
fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light.
H. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed
for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting
circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum
interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as
required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and
modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are
replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or
connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the
service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment.
Comply with utility company recommendations.
1. Arrange with utility company, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary
utility is available, provide trucked -in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's
easements cannot be used for that purpose.
B. Water Service: Provide City with service facilities. At Substantial Completion,
restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
2. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage,
provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain
accumulated water promptly from pans.
C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water
fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Existing sanitary facilities and
new sanitary facilities shall not be used by contractor personnel.
1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and
similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply.
Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material.
2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.
Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel.
3. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at
convenient locations for personnel who handle materials that require wash up.
Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for
each type of material handled.
a. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for
convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel.
4. Drinking -Water Facilities: Provide bottled -water, drinking -water units.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
a. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain
- dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7.2 to 12.7 deg Q.
D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for
protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high
humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect
on completed installations or elements being installed.
1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently
enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F
(18.3 deg C) for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been
installed.
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for
protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select
equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed
installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F. Electric Power Service: Provide City Power.
G. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power
tools and equipment.
1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power
cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in
progress. Do not exceed safe length -voltage ratio.
2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V.
3. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible
damage. Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors,
decks, or other traffic areas.
4. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices.
5. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot (30-m) extension cord can reach
each area for power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac,
20-A circuit for each outlet.
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate
illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection
requirements without operating entire system.
2. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per 500 sq. ft. (45 sq. m), uniformly
distributed, for general lighting, or equivalent illumination.
3. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp every 50 feet (15 m) in traffic areas.
4. Install exterior -yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for
construction operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the
Work is being performed.
5. Install lighting for Project identification sign.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction
period for common -use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction
activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office and first -aid station.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each
additional occupant or pair of occupants.
b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and
computer with Internet connection in the field office..
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
C. Contractor's home office.
d. Architect's office.
e. Engineers' offices.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide an answering machine, voice -mail service, or messaging service on
superintendent's telephone.
4. Furnish superintendent with electronic paging device for use when away from
field office.
5. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and
receiving telephone calls when away from field office.
3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary
construction and support facilities for easy access.
2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located
within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply
with NFPA 241.
3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before
Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion
will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
B. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads
with public roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for
entrance onto public roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable
Division 2 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations
not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections.
Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and
construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project
or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system,
provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck
construction is completed.
3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and
other signs in sizes indicated or as required by local authorities. Install signs where
indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit
installation of unauthorized signs.
1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification
signs. Comply with details indicated.
2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction
personnel and visitors.
3. Construct signs of exterior -type Grade B-B high -density concrete form
overlay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or
framing of preservative -treated wood or steel.
4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior -grade alkyd gloss enamel
over exterior primer.
E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to
handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label
hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Comply with Division 1 for progress cleaning requirements.
1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers,
clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited.
2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate
types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each
type. Provide detailed information for on -site waste storage and separation of
recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste
material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials.
F. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary
offices, first -aid stations, toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas.
G. Common -Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned
field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction
activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings
of 10 persons at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly.
1. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
a. Desk and four chairs, four -drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack,
and bookcase.
b. Water cooler and private toilet complete with water closet, lavatory, and
medicine cabinet with mirror.
C. Provide a room of not less than 240 sq. ft. (22.5 sq. m) for Project
meetings. Furnish room with conference table, 12 folding chairs, and 4-
foot- (1.2-m-) square tack board.
2. Provide an electric heater with thermostat capable of maintaining a uniform
indoor temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg Q. Provide an air-conditioning unit
capable of maintaining an indoor temperature of 72 deg F (23 deg Q.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
3. Provide fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination
of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height. Provide 110- to 120-V duplex outlets spaced
at not more than 12-foot (4-m) intervals, 1 per wall in each room.
H. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility
services. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or
elsewhere on -site.
1. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire -retardant -treated lumber
and plywood.
2. Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior -grade acrylic -latex emulsion
over exterior primer.
I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck
cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and
conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental
regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or
pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that
produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours
that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site.
B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and
around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by
runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside
the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree
root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
D. Pest Control: Before foundation work has been completed, retain a local
exterminator or pest -control company to recommend practices to minimize
attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest -
control service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals
so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain
extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using
environmentally safe materials.
E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, install chain -link
enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose
entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction
operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals
from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1. Set fence posts or post with bases to support the fence for the duration of the
project.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
2. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery
vehicles and other construction operations.
F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around
partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent
unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code
requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate
colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible
hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or
amber lights.
H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of
construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other
construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight
enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete,
provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with
ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous
conditions and effects.
2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with
plywood or similar materials.
3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal
surfaces with load -bearing, wood -framed construction.
4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire -retardant -treated wood framing and other
materials.
5. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. (9.2 sq. m)
in area, use fire -retardant -treated material for framing and main sheathing.
I. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent
facilities, install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to
protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.
1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible
and accessible from space being.served, with sign mounted above.
a. Field Offices: Class A stored -pressure water -type extinguishers.
b. Other Locations: Class ABC dry -chemical extinguishers or a
combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for
exposures.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary
fire -protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting.
Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire -exposure areas.
4. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and
similar sources of fire ignition.
5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project,
complete installation of permanent fire -protection facility, including
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel
on use of facilities.
6. Develop and supervise an overall fire -prevention and first -aid fire -protection
program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire
department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in
methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
7. Provide hoses for fire protection of sufficient length to reach construction
areas. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire -
protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with
outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize
waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended
uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity
control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to
achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
2. Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground
lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.
C. Operate Project -identification -sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.
D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as
soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection
facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its
service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent
facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore
permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with
temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace
construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of
Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification
signs.
2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into
permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development,
remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or
subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other
petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of
plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks
at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-11
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used
during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01500-12
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Coordination of Owner -installed products.
5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
7. Protection of installed construction.
8. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"
2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching"
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer to demonstrate their capabilities and
experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects a-.d owners, and other information specified.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that
location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally
qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing land -surveying services of the kind indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01700-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and
other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work,
investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical
systems and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility
services.
2. In the event of any inconsistency or conflict, between existing conditions and
the bidding documents, immediate notice of such inconsistency or conflict
shall be given to the Architect. Do not undertake any phase of the work
affected by such inconsistency or conflict, pending the issuance of instructions
by the Architect.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other
construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of
connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping; and
underground electrical services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by
public utilities serving Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer
or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record
observations.
1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a. Description of the Work.
b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
d. Recommended corrections.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility
with existing finishes or primers.
3. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual
locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and
systems are to be installed.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and
conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01700-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or
other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied
by others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than five days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.
Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work
are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by
field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of
the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for
information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered,
together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit
requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation" or form approved by
Architect.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information
shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If
discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying
practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to
obtain required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work
progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed
allowable tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard
established by authorities having jurisdiction.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01700-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,
grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D. The Architect assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information on
existing drawings. It is the intent of the Contract Drawings to integrate new work
with existing improvements and for the Contractor to verify actual conditions.
E. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for
structures, building, foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those
required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and
elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from
two or more locations. Follow Drawings as closely as possible for layout of the
Work, however, Contractor under the direction of Architect, shall make any minor
adjustments necessary to meet special conditions, at no additional cost to the
Owner. Where a major digression from the drawings is suggested, the Contractor
shall submit shop drawings to the Architect indicating desirability for change.
F. Where equipment involving more than one subcontractor is installed at a common
location and no specific location has been determined, it is the Contractor's
responsibility to check with the Architect for the actual rough -in dimensions for
such equipment. If for some reason the rough -in has not been checked and a
subcontractor has installed his equipment, remaining subcontractors shall align their
equipment as closely as possible to the installed equipment. Alignment shall mean
centered vertically, equally space and centered horizontally. This alignment applies
to bells, alarms, thermostats, switches, handles, access panels, etc. Any items not
installed in alignment shall be relocated by the Contractor at his own expense with
damaged surfaces properly repaired.
G. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from
required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys,
weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of
instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.
3.04 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Identification: Surveyor will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and
property corners.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and
similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect
permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.
I . Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior
written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent
benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate
permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly.
Base replacements on the original survey control points.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01700-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of (two) permanent benchmarks
on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply
with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project
Record Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked,
provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct
alignment and elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for
maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) or as indicated on
drawings in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for
installing products in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible
results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial
Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging
operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of
occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise
levels.
F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each
component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of
the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount
components at heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are
not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections
together to form hairline joints.
H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not
considered hazardous.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01700-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
3.06 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work
performed by Owner's construction forces.
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction
schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule
based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to
schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at
preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive
Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's
construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.
3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has
worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste
materials and debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other
waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to
regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness
necessary for proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or
vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to
written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only
cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not
recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property
and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the
space.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01700-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are
performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint
or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original
condition.
H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on -site will not be permitted.
Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and
adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to
ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as
necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate
operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging,
or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.08 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust
equipment for proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls
and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory -authorized service representative is
required to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, comply
with qualification requirements in Division 1 "Quality Requirements."
3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative
humidity.
3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01700-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates
and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01731 "Cutting and
Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces,
touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating
equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot
be repaired without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating
components that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01700
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01700-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching of new
construction after installation.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations
applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical
installations. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other
requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching
mechanical and electrical installations.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or
performance of other Work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions
after installation of other Work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10
days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to
proceed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and
indicate why they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include
changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes
in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the
Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01731-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CUTTING AND PATCHING
5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or
affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily
out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding
reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering
calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal
before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require
removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that
could change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and
related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as
intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased, operational life or
safety.
1. Primary operational systems and equipment.
2. Air or smoke barriers.
3. Fire -protection systems.
4. Control systems.
5. Communication systems.
6. Electrical wiring systems.
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related
components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results
in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
2. Membranes and flashings.
3. Exterior curtain -wall construction.
4. Equipment supports.
5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
6. Noise- and vibration -control elements and systems.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed
on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion,
reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has
been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut
or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials
so as not to void warranties.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01731-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and
patching are to be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of
substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent
damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project
that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of
free passage to adjoining areas.
3.03 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with
cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to
restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding,
and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage
elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed
procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written
recommendations.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01731-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CUTTING AND PATCHING
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding,
not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly
to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces.
Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into
concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw
or a diamond -core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable
Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or
partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of
pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after
cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are
complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and
similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams
that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation
requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend
finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will
eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one
finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new
space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and
appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new
materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and
intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over
entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats
until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an
even -plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores
enclosure to a weathertight condition.
END OF SECTION 01731
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 017314
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CUTTING AND PATCHING
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract
closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Warranties.
5. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
6. Final cleaning.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures".
2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements".
3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning
requirements for products of those Sections.
1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of
Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are
incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of
items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service
agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work
and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating
certificates, and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance
manuals, Final Completion construction photographs and photographic
negatives, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final
record information.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01770-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location
designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number
where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.
Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with
mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,
and maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to
eliminate visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor
of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on
Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed
or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.04 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of
Final Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section 01290
"Payment Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of
items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by
Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt
of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after
inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01770-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
f
M
I. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.05 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each
space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items
needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are
outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories
for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect
Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project
Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
Maintain and submit one copy of all transmittal letters for all Project Record
Documents.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black -line white prints
of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record
data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity,
to prepare the marked -up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the
markup before enclosing concealed installations.
d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable
of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately.
Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract
Drawings.
2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to
distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same
location.
3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or
omitted from original Drawings.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
01770-3
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers,
alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT
RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable
sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on
cover sheets.
C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including
addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product
installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda,
and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and
installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products,
materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product
options selected.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where
applicable.
D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one
set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially
from that indicated in Product Data.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and
installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and
changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications,
where applicable.
E. Record Samples: Submit one sample or set of samples if applicable of each Product
sample submittal.
1. Record on transmittal manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, color and
supplier.
F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by
other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in
connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous
records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation
and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a
system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual
Specification Sections and as follows:
1. Operation Data:
a. Emergency instructions and procedures.
b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating
standards.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01770-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and
weekend operations.
d. Description of controls and sequence of operations.
e. Servicing and lubrication schedule, including list of lubricants required.
f. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
g. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
h. Original manufacturer's parts list, price lists, illustrations, assembly
drawings and diagrams required for maintenance, predicted life of parts
subject to wear and items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
i. Control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
j. Coordination drawings and color coded piping diagrams.
k. Charts of valve tag numbers with location and function of each valve.
1. Water treatment procedures and tests.
m. Final balancing reports for mechanical systems.
n. Circuit directories of panel boards: Electrical service; controls and
communications.
o. Color coded wiring diagrams.
2. Maintenance Data:
a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
C. Maintenance procedures.
d. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and
methods.
e. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to
product.
f. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and cleaning.
g. Maintenance record forms.
h. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
i. Copies of maintenance service agreements.
j. Copies of warranties and bonds.
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size.
Bind and index data according to sequence of project specifications in heavy-duty,
3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate
contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify
each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
1.08 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated
portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Final
Completion is indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of
contents of the Project Manual.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01770-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf
binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive
8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate
warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed
description of the product or installation, including the name of the product
and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
D. Table of Contents: Neatly type in orderly sequence. Furnish complete instruction
for each item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number.
3. Scope.
4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract.
6. - Furnish information for Owner's personnel: Proper procedure in case of
failure and instances which might affect validity of warranty or bond.
7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by
manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents
that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished
surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems,
subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
3. Schedule training with Owner through Architect with at least seven days
advance notice.
4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length
of instruction, and course content.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01770-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual
training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by
individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning
objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following:
1. System design and operational philosophy.
2. Review of documentation.
3. Operations.
4. Adjustments.
5. Troubleshooting.
6. Maintenance.
7. Repair.
3.02 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations
to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and
antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building
cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for
certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of
Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction
activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste
material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains,
and other foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -
textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material
from Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid
disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective
surfaces to their original condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including
roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and
similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess
nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -
obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01770-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not
to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and
surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or
restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical
and electrical nameplates.
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar
equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including
stains resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean
exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters
during construction.
r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full
efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by
hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury
vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final
inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not
bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile,
harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials
from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 01770-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide all operations required in connection with the general
clearing of the site, including the following:
I. Stripping of top soil.
2. Clearing and grubbing of site areas at all new paving.
3. Preservation of existing utilities.
4. Demolition of existing above and below grade improvements as required by
the Work of the Contract.
5. Removal of all existing and generated trash and during clearing and grubbing.
6. Location and protection of bench marks.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearing work with the work of other related trades so as not to delay
progress of any section of the work.
B. Notify and coordinate with any and all utility companies or agencies as required for
capping, removal, by-passing or protections of existing utility lines.
1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all applicable federal, state and local codes and ordinances and with
the requirements of insurance carriers providing coverage for this work.
B. Procure and pay for all permits or certificates required for the work involved.
1.05 EXAMINATION OF SITE
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02230-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SITE CLEARING
A. Contractor shall visit and examine the site to ascertain the actual nature and scope
of any demolition work. Later claims for additional compensation covering
difficulties encountered in demolition work will not be recognized.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STOCK PILING
A. Store t4soil, stripped from site improvement areas, in areas designated or approved
by Architect for distribution or removal later. Handle topsoil carefully to prevent
contamination with undesirable materials. Topsoil so stored shall be reasonably
free from debris.
B. Salvageable materials, if any, resulting from clearing work shall become the
property of the Contractor, unless identified to be retained by the Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Consult Owner prior to removal of existing trees and shrubs. Tag all plant material
identified to remain.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Before and during site clearing operations, Contractor shall ascertain where existing
utilities are located. Any damage that may occur to existing services shall be
promptly corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Prior to beginning stripping and clearing, coordinate with Architect on methods and
markings of areas not to be disturbed.
C. Erect necessary barricades, and protective measures as required.
D. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as final landscaping.
Barricades shall be placed around the drip line of trees indicated to remain that are
within the construction area. Vehicle traffic shall not be allowed under any trees.
3.03 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
A. Scrape and remove all brush, weeds, grass, roots and other material from areas
which are to be stripped of topsoil.
B. Strip to a depth of 6" from the areas within lines 5'-0" outside of foundation walls of
buildings and from under all walk and paving areas.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02230-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SITE CLEARING
C. Pile topsoil in designated locations, where it will not interfere with construction or
utility operations, for use in planting areas. Remove excess and/or unacceptable top
soil from the site.
3.04 CLEARING
A. Clear the area within the limits to remove all subterranean or surface material,
growth or other obstructions.
B. Remove all stones, stumps, roots, old concrete masses or other similar items larger
than 3/4" diameter, to a minimum depth of 24" below natural grade in landscape
bed areas and 6" below proposed grades in areas to be covered by building or
paving.
C. Remove trees and stumps from area of improvements as shown on drawings. Do
not remove other trees without approval from the Owner. Use methods of removal
which will prevent damage to remaining plant materials and property.
D. Fill any holes left by removal of large stones or stumps per requirements of
applicable articles of Section 02300. Compact backfill to the density of surrounding
soils.
E. Following each day of grubbing activity, grade surface to remove open holes and
ruts and allow unrestrained runoff of storm water. Ponding will not be permitted.
3.05 DEMOLITION
A. Remove all obstructions located within or outside the property lines that would
interfere with installation of new work such as paving, walks, curbs, slabs, walls
and other items. No high impact vibrations permitted. Execute all clearing work by
methods which will prevent damage to other work or adjoining properties and
which will prevent settlement or erosion to adjoining areas.
B. Unless otherwise noted to remain, clear the site of all existing pavements, concrete
walks, concrete steps, fences, structures and the like to a depth of 24" below
proposed grades.
C. Refer to Topographic Survey Drawing for location of existing items and structures
which are affected by demolition and clearing/grubbing requirements.
3.06 DISPOSAL
A. Except as otherwise provided, all items cleared from the site, including all asphalt,
concrete, building materials, rubbish, brush, stumps, debris, etc., resulting from the
work of this section shall be removed and disposed of off -site. No burning of
removed trees and bushes.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02230-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SITE CLEARING
END OF SECTION 02230
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02230-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SITE CLEARING
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Earthwork related to building structures.
2. Earthwork related to site improvements
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 0 Section "Subsurface Investigation."
2.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.
Division 2 Section "Site Clearing."
4.
Division 2 Section "Utility Services."
5.
Division 2 Section "Concrete Paving."
6.
Division 7 Section "Vapor Barrier Membrane".
1.03 SCOPE
A. Provide required earthwork relating to building structures and site improvements
including excavation, fill, backfill and grading as shown on drawings and as herein
specified.
1.04 SOIL REPORT
A. A copy of the soil report and test boring results is included as part of these
specifications. This report is for information only and is not guaranteed for accuracy
of existing conditions by Owner or Architect. Should this section conflict with
requirements stated in the soils report, the soils report shall be governing. Notify
the Structural Engineer as to those conflicts.
1.05 SAMPLES
A. Division 1: Section — "Submittal Procedures"
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02300-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EARTHWORK
B. Submit samples of materials requiring laboratory testing in sufficient quantity
necessary to adequately investigate soil.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Maintain all existing and newly established bench marks. Report discrepancies
found to the Architect, who reserves the right to make minor adjustments necessary
to accomplish the intent of the Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the
Owner. Contractor solely responsible for all elevations, dimensions, and
verifications of conditions.
1.07 PROTECTION
A. Provide for surface drainage during the period of construction in a manner to avoid
creating a nuisance to adjacent areas and to prevent water runoff into excavation.
Provide pumping as required to keep excavated areas free of water during
construction. Ponding of water during construction shall be prevented at all times.
B. Provide adequate sheeting, shoring and bracing for excavations to prevent caving
and to protect personnel.
C. Protect all building walls, curbs, and slabs against discoloration or damage from
work under this Section.
D. Protection of existing landscape features indicated to remain as a portion of final
landscaping.
E. Protect above and below grade utilities to remain.
1.08 OBSTRUCTIONS
A. Should utilities be encountered which interfere with the work, it is the Contractor's
responsibility to notify the Owner and Architect. The Owner shall direct the
Contractor to remove, relocate or cap off same.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STOCK PILING
A. Fill material required to be hauled in may be stockpiled at site until used, provided
it is properly handled to prevent contamination with undesirable materials. Stock
pile topsoil separate from excavated subsoil.
2.02 SURPLUS MATERIALS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02300-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EARTHWORK
A. Remove excavated materials not suitable for use in fills and backfills on this project
from site. Materials containing rubbish, debris or rocks shall be removed.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Fill: (at pavement) on site, inorganic soil free from vegetable matter, debris, and
other deleterious matter capable of being compacted to 95% maximum density at
optimum moisture content; ASTM D-698, or select fill.
B. Topsoil: Clean, natural topsoil free of vegetation, debris, and other deleterious
matter. Upper 6" of topsoil stripped from site may be used.
C. Vapor Barrier: Re: Division 7 Section "Vapor Barrier Membrane"
D. Lime: Hydrated lime conforming to applicable sections of ASTM C-207, Type N.
E. Filter Fabric: Prefabricated drainage composite geotextile shall be Mirafi 140
Fabric at under -building drainage, or approved equal by JDR or Monsanto.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Strip objectionable materials from areas to be graded before grading operation
begins. Excavate subsoil required for building foundation construction operations
and other work. Excavations and rough grading shall be made to lines and grades
shown and "feathered" into adjoining grades to insure a smooth transition. Maintain
excavations so they drain and are kept free of excess water. Provide pumping as
required. Fill over -excavated areas under structure -bearing surfaces in accord with
directions of Architect.
B. Any materials resulting from operations that are unsuitable for use or disposal at the
site shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site.
C. Trenching for underground piping, electrical conduits, etc., shall be done by the
trade installing the pipes, conduits, etc. Backfilling of trenches shall conform to the
requirements for compacted fill.
D. Abandoned Utility Lines and Sewers: Plug in accordance with utility company
and/or local requirements any abandoned lines or pipes encountered during
excavation using concrete plugs at least 6" thick and at a minimum distance of 3'
outside improved areas.
E. Finish excavations within a tolerance of .05 foot above or 0.1 foot below required
grades.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02300-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EARTHWORK
3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND FILLING
A. Lay out work to insure that all finish grades of all paving have the proper slope to
insure proper drainage.
B. Establish new grades as necessary and verify all measurements and grades. Set all
stakes, etc., to insure an engineering degree of accuracy.
C. Establish all grades and curbs of adjacent streets.
D. Scarify exposed subgrade to a depth of 6" and re -compact to a minimum of 98% of
standard proctor density (ASTM D-698) at its optimum moisture content to 4%
above its optimum moisture content.
E. Additional fill may be clean, on -site clays free of debris, vegetation, and organic
material. Clay fill shall be placed in 8" maximum loose lifts at +5% to -3% of
optimum moisture and compacted to 95% of the standard proctor dry density
(ASTM D-698). Moisture content shall be maintained until pavement or additional
fill is placed.
F. The cross-section of the finished subgrade shall be free from ridges or valleys and
be within 0.05 of a foot above or below the theoretical section at any point on the
cross-section.
G. Finished subgrade that does not conform to the above requirement shall be bladed
and thoroughly re -compacted to conform to the requirements.
H. Clean surface or subgrade of all loose materials by brooming or other approved
methods.
3.03 SOIL STABILIZATION
A. Subgrade of all paving shall be lime stabilized.
B. Insure that surfaces have been brought to approximate rough grades.
C. Loosen and pulverize soil to a compacted depth of 8" beneath designated paving
areas including a distance of 2 feet outside perimeter of paving.
D. Mix soil and lime thoroughly by approved road mixer or other equipment until a
homogeneous, friable mixture of soil and lime is obtained; free from all clods or
lumps.
E. Begin compaction of the mixture immediately after final mixing. Aerate or sprinkler
material as necessary to provide optimum moisture. Begin compaction at the bottom
and continue until entire depth of the mixture is uniformly compacted.
F. A minimum of 6% hydrated lime (THD Item 264) (COG Item 4.6) should be used.
Lime should be thoroughly mixed and blended with the top 8" of the subgrade
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02300-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EARTHWORK
(THD Item 260) and the mixture compacted to a minimum of 95% of ASTM D-698
at its optimum moisture content to 4% above its optimum moisture content.
G. Rework at necessary to obtain the specified density if any portion fails to meet the
density specified.
H. Shape surface after mixture has been compacted to the required lines, grades and
cross -sections and thoroughly roll with pneumatic or other suitable roller sufficient
light to prevent hair cracking.
I. Prepare only sufficient amount of subgrade in advance of placing, paving, walks,
curbs, etc., to enable the work to proceed smoothly and effectively.
3.04 BACKFILLING
A. Do not backfill against grade beams until after form work has been removed and
concrete has set up. Backfill against grade beams so as to provide positive drainage
away from the structure.
B. Finished subgrade surfaces generally not more than 0.5 inches above or below
established grades. Tolerance for areas within 10 feet of building and all areas to be
paved not more than .25 inches above or below established grades. Provide
roundings at top and bottom of banks and at other breaks in grade. Unless
otherwise noted, subgrade evenly sloped to provide drainage away from building
walls, slope 1/4 inch per foot.
C. Compact backfill to 95% of maximum density at 2% below and 3% above optimum
moisture content as determined by standard proctor test (ASTM D-698).
D. Backfill over filter fabric in tot lots with washed river gravel of 1/4 to 3/4" size and
overlay with additional layer of filter fabric prior to installation of wood mulch.
3.05 VAPOR BARRIER
A. Place under all floor slabs on grade. Lap all joints 6" minimum and seal with
compound recommended by manufacturer; seal around all openings through vapor
barrier.
3.06 GRADING
A. After site has been cleared of construction debris, grade the site to the contours and
spot elevation.
B. Ponding of water on the site will not be permitted. Finished grades shall not be
more than 0.10 foot above or below established grade elevations.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02300-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EARTHWORK
3.07 PROTECTION, CLEAN-UP AND EXCESS MATERIAL
A. Protect grades from construction and weather damage, washing, erosion and rutting,
and repair such damage that occurs.
B. Correct any settlement below established grades to prevent ponding of water.
C. Remove excess stock pile materials, debris, waste and other materials from site and
leave work in clean, finished condition for final acceptance. Contractor is
responsible for disposal of debris and excess materials.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor will employ and pay for services of an independent testing
laboratory to perform inspection and testing services specified in this section.
B. Excavation: Observe the excavation process on a periodic basis, noting the
exposed faces of the excavation. Immediately report any observed unsafe
conditions.
C. Filling and Backfilling:
1. The Contractor shall make available to the laboratory, adequate samples of
each fill and backfill material from the proposed sources of supply not less
than 10 days prior to the start of the work.
2. The Laboratory shall analyze the samples as required to provide a soil
description and to determine compliance with the quality requirements.
a. Test for liquid limit in accordance with ASTM D423.
b. Test for plastic limit of soils and plasticity index of soils in accordance
with ASTM D424.
C. Test for moisture density relations of soil in accordance with ASTM
D698.
3. Furnish a report for each individual test and state whether sample conforms to
the specified requirements or reasons for nonconformance.
4. Inspect and approve subgrade prior to placement of fill material.
5. Make in -place compaction tests for moisture content, moisture -density
relationship, and density of fill materials.
6. Perform not less than two compaction tests for each 3,000 SF of surface for
each layer of fill under the building and not less than two compaction tests for
each 5,000 SF of surface for each layer of fill or undisturbed earth on areas of
site to be covered by paving walks or traffic approaches.
D. Footing Excavations: Inspect footing excavations to that excavations are properly
clean and dry before concrete is placed.
END OF SECTION 02300
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02300-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 EARTHWORK
SECTION 02360 - SOIL TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I. Chemical barrier under structural slab.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2, Section "Earthwork"
1.03 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install a chemical barrier to afford the structure protection from
termites and other common ground insects.
' B. Comply with all applicable regulatory and environmental requirements.
i
1.04 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall provide a five (5) year guarantee to the Owner for all work
done under this Section against re -infestation.
B. At the end of the five year period, the Owner shall be offered a renewable contract
(guarantee) on a year-to-year basis, at the Owner's option, at an agreed upon annual
fee.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Chemicals and Concentrations: Apply to soil areas to be treated.
Chemical Concentration
Dragnet SFR 0.5% applied in water emulsion
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02360-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOIL TREATMENT
B. Materials shall be used, provided:
- 1. They are determined to meet five (5) year test conducted by the U.S. Forest
Service, or the U.S. Department of Agriculture.
2. Evidence is provided indicating any toxic effects to humans, plants or animal
life.
3. Allowed by governing laws and/or ordinances.
C. Any chemicals toxic to animals and plant life should be applied with caution by an
experienced person who is licensed in accordance with the regulatory agency of the
State.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Apply toxicant to soil in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. The
quantities described in the paragraph are minimums and shall be adjusted as deemed
necessary by the treatment agency to provide the required protection.
B. Under all building slabs apply treatment at a ratio of one and a half (1-1/2) gallons
per 10 sq. ft., prior to placing of vapor barrier.
C. Apply to a depth of 1 ft. and to a width of one foot along each side of the foundation
walls and around piers where applicable around utility openings for pipes, conduits
or other slab penetrations at a rate of 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet. Chemical shall be
mixed with soil as it is being placed in the trench.
1. The guarantee shall state that the application was made at the concentration,
ratio, and methods which comply with these Specifications.
2. Re -treatment upon evidence of subterranean termite activity, shall be at no
charge to the Owner and in accordance with accepted trade practice.
3.02 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion, remove debris related to this work from the site.
END OF SECTION 02360
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02360-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOIL TREATMENT
SECTION 02370 - SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: This section specifies soil erosion and sediment controwork
during construction, as shown. The work includes, but is not limited to, furnishing
and installing straw bales or silt fence to form dikes or to form ditch, basin, and
drop inlet erosion check; constructing earth perimeter dikes and overflow outlets;
constructing crushed stone sediment traps and earth embankments; constructing
sediment basins; constructing silt fences; placing riprap; and, furnishing and
installing seed or sod for erosion control.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2, Section "Earthwork"
C. The work performed under this section shall comply with the Storm Water Pollution
Plan for this Project and with the requirements and intent of the NPDES Storm
Water Discharge Permit program.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The following Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards, and Specifications apply to work
included in this section:
A. Codes and regulation of the jurisdictional authorities, including the NPDES general
permit for storm water discharges associates with the construction activity.
B. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS":
1. AASHTO: M-43 M182.
2. ASTM: A112, Al16, A584, C90, C140, C145, D4397.
3. USDA: Soil Conservation Service Publication: Standards and Specifications
for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control in Developing Areas.
4. Sampling and testing concrete masonry units shall be in accordance with
ASTM C140.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02370-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for approval in accordance with "SUBMITTALS", and with the
additional requirements as specified for each:
A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention - Contractor Certification:
1. Prior to the commencement of any construction activities, the Contractor and
all subcontractors shall submit to the CITY a signed copy of the following
certification, statement, which will be filed with the Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan:
2. "I certify under penalty of the law that I understand the terms and conditions
of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)
permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial
activity from the construction site identified as part of this certification".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STRAW BALES
Provide straw or hay bales approximately 36 inches long by 24 inches wide by 18 inches high;
minimum 60 pounds, maximum 120 pounds each; bound with galvanized wire or nylon rope
tied across stem lengths.
2.02 STAKES
A. Provide nominal 2 inches by 2 inches wooden stakes with sharpened ends or
minimum 1/2-inch diameter steel picket rebar. Stakes: approximately 3 feet in
length.
2.03 CRUSHED STONE
A. AASHTO M43: Size No. 2 or 24.
2.04 SEED AND SOD
A. As specified in Division 2: Section - Landscaping
2.05 APPROVED FILL
A. Fill material for embankments, dikes, and erosion checks: as specified in Division
2 Section "Earthwork".
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02370-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL
2.06 SILT FENCE MATERIALS
A. Silt Fence Fabric:
1. One of the following:
a. Burlap: AASHTO M182.
b. Polypropylene fabric: ASTM D4397.
C. Nylon netting reinforced fabric.
2. Minimum bursting strength: 150 lbs.
3. Edges treated to prevent unraveling.
4. Furnished with 0-rings or clips to facilitate attachment to woven wire fabric.
B. Woven Wire Fabric: ASTM A116, Class 3 Coating; or ASTM A584, Class H
Coating.
C. Posts:
1. Steel, T-section, minimum 4 feet 6 inches long, minimum of 1.3 lbs. per foot
without anchor plate.
2. Anchor plate attached before coating.
3. Fabricated with lugs or other approved means to prevent vertical movement of
the woven wire fabric.
D. Coatings for Posts:
1. Factory Painted:
a. Prime coat: As specified in "STRUCTURAL STEEL".
b. Final Coat: Aluminum paint.
E. Tie Wire: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A112.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONDITION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which soil erosion and sediment control
work is to be completed.
r
i B. Stabilize fill and grade of areas to receive soil erosion and sediment control.
Maintain positive drainage to sediment and erosion control devices during and after
grading operations.
3.02 STRAW BALE DIKE INSTALLATION
Place bales in a row with ends abutting one another. Embed each bale in soil a minimum of 4
inches. Place anchor bales with two stakes driven through bales and sunk a minimum 1-1/2
feet into stabilized earth. Angle the initial stake toward previously laid bale to force bales
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02370-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL
together. Drive stakes flush with top bales. Remove bale dikes when no longer useful for
-controlling drainage and water flow.
3.03 STRAW BALE EROSION CHECK INSTALLATION
A. Ditch Erosion Checks:
1. Where ditches are cut into existing ground and side slopes, place ditch erosion
checks, onsisting of bales, across the ditch slope invert. Install at least two
bales across the ditch invert. Install additional bales on the ditch slopes, as
shown, or when directed. Stake two overlapping bales staked up each ditch
side slope. Set overlaps tight to eliminate openings in the ditch erosion check.
B. Basin and Drop Inlet Erosion Check:
1. Where basins and drop inlets are located in the ditch line and off the paved
areas, install baled straw erosion checks as shown. Protect entrance structures
with straw bales staked upstream around drainage structure to ensure
elimination add soil and silt from entering the underground drainage system.
Stake one bale perpendicular to the flowline directly upstream from the inlet.
Set two additional bales parallel to the flowline at each end of the bale. Stake
all bales tightly against each other to eliminate any possible openings. Where
shown, or when directed, embed the bales 4 inches into the ground around
structures.
C. When the buildup of soil and silt behind the baled soil erosion checks reaches a
height of 12 inches or when the checks are no longer functioning efficiently, remove
the accumulated material. Bales shall be replaced every three months to maintain
effectiveness of the sediment control measure.
D. Remove baled straw used for erosion checks when approved, or when the project is
completed.
E. In no cases shall bales be left in ditches and around drainage structures after all
construction is finished.
F. Curb Inlet Erosion Checks:
1. Protect entrance structure with straw bales paralleled with the gutter flowline
to ensure elimination of soil and silt from entering the underground drainage
system.
G. Shoulder Drain Erosion Check:
1. Where ballast drains are installed before placement of ballast, the following
shall be installed. Install straw bale erosion checks as shown. Protect
entrance structure with straw bales staked around ballast drain to ensure
elimination of soil and silt from entering the underground drainage system.
All bales shall be tightly staked against each other to eliminate any possible
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02370-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL
openings. All straw bales around ballast drains shall be removed just prior to
installation of ballast.
3.04 PERIMETER EARTH DIKE AND OVERFLOW OUTLET INSTALLATIONS
A. Construct dikes with suitable backfill material, machine compacted, with positive
drainage to outlets. Divert runoff from protected and stabilized upland areas to
outlets with stabilized soil or grade stabilization behind outlets. Divert runoff from
disturbed and exposed upland area to sediment traps or basins. Level to grad both
earth dikes and overflow outlets once the sod area has stabilized. Remove stones,
roots, and other extraneous materials larger than 2 inches any dimension.
B. Construct overflow outlets in perimeter earth dikes of compacted crushed stone
embedded a minimum of 4 inches into the earth dikes. Construct the crest of outlets
approximately 6 to 8 inches below height of adjoining earth dike.
C. Remove overflow outlets from the site once the soil area has properly stabilized.
3.05 SEDIMENT TRAP AND EMBANKMENT INSTALLATIONS
A. Construct sediment traps as shown on the drawings using crushed stone at outlets,
existing backfill and soil materials for embankments, with stabilizing cores
consisting of straw bales, concrete blocks, or timber.
1. Clear, grub, and grade areas under embankments and trap outlets prior to
placing embankments. Clear pool areas.
2. Where used as core material for outlets and embankments, anchor straw bales
in place with two stakes per bale. Drive stakes through bales and into
stabilized soil a minimum of 1-1/2 feet.
3. Place and compact embankment material.
4. Place and compact crushed stone solidly over core at outlets. Crest of outlets
shall be approximately 10 to 12 inches below height of adjoining
embankment.
5. Unless otherwise shown, construct cut and fill slopes at 3:1, or flatter.
6. Place jute matting (mesh) over embankments as shown. Securely anchor
matting with stakes or stays.
7. When sediment has accumulated to 1/2 the design depth of the trap or 1 foot,
whichever is less, remove sediment and deposit such material in a previously
approved area which is free of erosion.
8. Remove sediment traps and embankments once the soil area has been properly
stabilized as determined by the Contracting Office.
B. Construct sediment basins in compliance with the "Standard and Specifications for
Sediment Basin" as published by the U.S. Department of Agriculture Soil
Conservation service in its volume "Standards and Specification for Soil Erosion
and Sediment Control in Developing Area".
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02370-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL
3.06 SODDING
A. Perform sodding work when temperatures are 40 deg. F or higher. Do not place sod
when ground surface is frozen or during extended drought.
B. Loosen subgrade of areas to be sodded and apply topsoil mixture over the area.
C. Lay sod within 20 hours from time of stripping.
D. Peg sod on slopes as required to prevent slippage. Use 1 inch by 1 inch by 6 inch
wooden pegs with one end sharpened.
E. Provide fertilizer and soil amendments as required to maintain healthy sodded areas.
F. Sod areas to the limits indicated on drawings.
G. Stabilize channel flow areas disturbed by the Contractor's operations with specified
sod. Sod invert of ditches to 2 feet above invert.
3.07 SEEDING
A. Place and prepare topsoil as specified in Division 2: Section "Landscaping".
B. Place seed and fertilize as specified in Division 2: Section "Landscaping".
3.08 SILT FENCE
A. Install steel posts on a minimum of 8 foot centers. Minimum embedment of 1 foot
6 inches.
B. Minimum height of the silt fence to be 2 feet 6 inches with a 6 inch clearance
between the top of the silt fence and the top of the posts.
C. Install the steel posts on a slight angle towards the anticipated runoff surface.
D. Trench in the toe of the silt fence so that the downslope faces of the trench is flat
and perpendicular to the lie of flow.
E. Minimum trench depth: 6 inches.
F. Trench width: 3 to 4 inches.
G. Attach welded wire fabric to the posts.
H. Attach the silt fence fabric to the welded wire fabric and secure with a minimum of
two wraps.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02370-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL
I. Backfill over the silt fence fabric.
J. When build up of soil, silt, or any other material behind the silt fence reaches a
height of 6 inches or when the fence is no longer functioning efficiently, remove all
accumulated material. The accumulated material shall be disposed of as set forth in
"Environmental Protection".
3.09 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL, TRASH, DEBRIS, AND
EFFLUENT
A. Pick-up trash and place in containers. Empty containers on a regular schedule.
Conduct handling and disposal to prevent contamination of the site and others areas.
Do not dispose of in wetlands and do not burn on the Right -of Way (ROW). On
completion, leave the disposal areas clean.
B. Dispose of rubbish and debris as follows:
1. Transport all waste off the site and dispose of in a manner that complies with
State, and local requirements. Secure a permit or license prior to transporting
any material off the site. Submit copies of approval documents from
appropriate Authorities to the Architect prior to use of the disposal sites. Do
not burn waste materials on site.
C. Effluent:
I. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to assure compliance with
the requirements and intern of the NPDES and with the Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan developed for this Project.
3.10 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
A. Protect erosion and sediment control devices from damage. Repair and replace
dikes, erosion checks, sediment traps, silt fences, overflow outlets, and other
measures when damaged by construction, natural, and other physical causes. All
soil erosion and sediment control device shall be repaired or replaced at the expense
of the contractor and shall function as originally intended.
B. Periodically (at least once every 7 days and after each rainfall event) inspect and
maintain erosion and sediment control structures, until final stabilization is
achieved.
C. Maintain sod by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, and trimming. Replace
sod which has been eroded, damaged by construction activities, deteriorated, or
diseased.
D. All stock piled soil shall be surrounded by a straw bale dike or silt fence to properly
control sediment runoff. all material and labor required to install and maintain the
erosion control at soil stock piles shall be subsidiary to the Contract.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02370-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL
E. Inspection services provided by the City do not relieve the Contractor's
responsibility for inspection and maintenance of the erosion control measures or his
duty to comply with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and the intent
conditions of the NPDES.
3.11 ACCEPTANCE
A. Soil erosion and sediment control devices will be acceptable, provided that they are
in good condition and functioning as intended.
B. Sodded areas will be acceptable, provided that all requirements, including
maintenance, have been complied with, and a healthy, well -rooted, even -colored,
viable sod is established.
3.12 STAGING AREAS
A. At such time when the specific location of the staging areas are determined, silt
fences, straw bale dikes, or equivalent sediment controls are required for all
sideslope and downslope boundaries of the staging area or a detention basin
providing storage for runoff from the staging area from a 10 year., 24-hour storm
shall be provided. This erosion control plan shall be approved by the Local
Authorities and shall be in place prior to occupation of the staging areas. All
relative material and labor to construct and maintain the staging area erosion control
plan shall be subsidiary to the other items of work. Plan, schedule, and undertake
work in a manner that will ensure protection and preservation of existing wetlands
and water courses identified by the Corps of Engineers and the U.S. Fish and
Wildlife Service
3.13 VEGETATIVE PRACTICES
A. Temporary seeding, permanent seeding, mulching, or sod stabilization procedures,
or their equivalent, must be initiated on all disturbed areas within 14 calendar days
of last activity in that area. Temporary seeding, or sod and/or soil stabilization
procedures will not be paid for directly, but will be considered subsidiary to the
Contract. All permanent soil stabilization procedures shall be installed, measured,
and paid for in accordance with Division 2: Section "Landscaping".
END OF SECTION 02370
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02370-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL
SECTION 02466 - DRILLED PIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: In this section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as
follows:
1. Drilling and cleaning pier holes
2. Pumping water if required and removing spoil.
3. Casing pier holes.
4. Placing concrete and reinforcing steel.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
2. Division 3 Section "Concrete Reinforcment."
3. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
1.03 BASIS FOR PAYMENT
A. Contract price shall be based on the number of piers, and with a base length as
shown on the drawings. In addition, the Contractor shall quote unit prices for the
following:
1. Unit price per lineal foot for piers longer or shorter than base lengths.
2. Unit prices per lineal foot for casing longer or shorter than base lengths.
Measurement for payment shall be from top of pier to top of bearing stratum.
3. Unit prices shall include all labor, materials, equipment, overhead and fee for
drilled piers and casing complete including removal of soil.
B. Adjustments to the Contract shall be based on total linear feet greater than or less
than the sum of the base lengths of each pier size. Additional penetration in the
bearing stratum greater than the specified penetration shall not be included in
determination of increases or decreases of pier lengths related to adjustments of the
Contract.
C. The cost of providing temporary casings is to be included in the base bid for drilled
piers.
1. If casings are not required, the cost will be deducted from the contract based
on the unit price.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02466-1
SEPTEMBER 1, 2006 DRILLED PIERS
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pier drilling, reinforcing and concreting shall be performed in accordance with the
Specifications of the Association of Drilled Shaft Contractors.
B. Work shall be accomplished by companies and personnel experienced in drilled
shaft work with a minumum of three projects in similar soil and rock conditions and
with similar shaft sizes, depths and quantities.
C. Protection of concrete in extreme weather:
1. Cold weather - comply with ACI306.
2. Hot weather - comply with ACI305.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Work: Refer to Division 3: Section - Cast -In -Place Concrete.
B. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Division 3: Section - Cast -In -Place Concrete.
1. Support and alignment accessories to facilitate alignment of steel reinforcing
in predrilled pier foundations and protect steel from contact with earth as
manufactured by Pieresearch, 1602 Industrial Court, Arlington, TX 76011; 1-
800-342-2409.
a. Material to be installed per manufacturer's specifications and as shown
on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DRILLING
A. Drill pier holes of specified diameters to the bearing strata shown on the drawings
and as confirmed by the laboratory representative at the site. Penetrate the bearing
strata and found footings as specified on the Drawings.
B. No payment will be made for extra length when pier shafts are excavated to a
greater depth than required or authorized by Engineer, due to over -drilling.
C. Locate piers within 1" maximum lateral variation to the centerlines dimensioned on
the drawings.
D. Drill holes vertical. Pier holes out of plumb more than 1" in ten feet or 2"
maximum will be rejected.
E. Excavate holes for closely spaced piers and those occurring in fragile stratas only
after adjacent shafts are filled with concrete.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02466-2
SEPTEMBER 1, 2006 DRILLED PIERS
F. If tolerances given are exceeded, provide corrective construction as acceptable to
Architect.
G. Remove excess concrete at the top of the piers beyond the limits of the pier shaft
diameter.
3.02 DRAINAGE AND PUMPING
A. Furnish necessary pumps, power and attendance required to keep the holes free
from standing water at all times, whether from surface water or from underground at
no extra cost to the Owner.
B. Do not pour directly into any excavations where water is standing. If the place of
deposit cannot be successfully pumped dry, pour through a tremie with its outlet end
near the bottom of the place of deposit.
C. Place reinforcing steel cages accurately in place and hold in position during
placement of concrete.
3.03 STEEL AND CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Fabricate and erect reinforcing as one continuous unit. Place reinforcing steel cages
accurately and symmetrically about axis of shaft and hold securely in position
during placement of concrete.
B. Install bolsters and alignment sleds in minimum number specified to support and
align reinforcing steel cage in shaft. Assure that tie wires are properly installed to
prevent displacement during concrete operations. Reposition units not in proper
locations.
C. Place dowels and/or anchor bolts as detailed accurately in position and provide
holding devices to maintain in exact location with templates.
D. Concrete placed in pier holes shall be directed through a tremie, hopper, or
equivalent. Placement of concrete shall be vertical through the center of the shaft
without hitting the sides of the pier or reinforcement to reduce the posssibility of
segregation of aggregates. Place concrete in each pier hole as soon as possible on
the same day after drilling and immediately following inspection and acceptance.
Place concrete continuously without interruption. Vibrate the upper 5'-0" (min.).
E. Maintain a sufficient head of concrete to prevent reduction of shaft diameter by
earth pressure and to prevent extraneous material from mixing with fresh concrete.
F. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain a
head of concrete at least 5' above casing bottom.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02466-3
SEPTEMBER 1, 2006 DRILLED PIERS
G. Stop concrete at cut off elevation shown, screed and leave surface level. If cut off
level is above grade elevation, provide formwork and extend shaft to required
elevation.
H. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes.
I . In cold weather, comply with ACI 306.
2. In hot weather, comply with ACI 305.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
A. Soil and rock from pier excavations shall be disposed of off -site by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 02466
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02466-4
SEPTEMBER 1, 2006 DRILLED PIERS
SECTION 02500 - UTILITY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in
conjunction with or properly incidental to the furnishing and installation of
site drainage system complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified
herein, including:
a. Layout of drainage and utility lines
b. Excavation for trenching, de -watering and backfilling
C. Water distribution system
d. Sanitary sewer system
e. Gas distribution system
f. Removal of excess excavated material off -site
g. Provide trench safety design as required for fire hydrant work.
2. Systems shall start at a point approximately 5 feet beyond the exterior walls of
the building and extend to termination unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 0 Section "Subsurface Investigation."
2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. Division 15 Section "Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning."
1.03 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of the Standards
listed.
1. Applicable publications of local governing authority
2. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM.
3. Texas Highway Department Standard Specifications for Construction of
Highways, Streets, and Bridges, 1972, THD.
4. Texas Trench Excavation Law.
5. North Control Texas Council of Governments (NCTOG)
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02500-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UTILITY SERVICES
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - "Submittal Procedures": Procedures for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's literature showing details of
fabrication and installation of valves, vaults, clean -out boots, fire hydrants, flush
hydrants, concrete pipe, joint materials, covers, grates and frames.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's data showing details of precast concrete
structures related with site drainage.
D. Certification: Furnish Owner a certification from pipe manufacturer stating that
pipe conforms to Specification requirements.
1.05 TESTING
A. Listed herein a minimum testing requirements. Cost for making these tests will be
paid for by the Contractor.
B. Backfill: One laboratory test, TEX 114-E, for soil density shall be made for each
type of soil used as backfill material. When a test has been made previously on
similar soil, a duplicate test will not be necessary.
C. Reinforcing Steel: Furnish the Architect a certification from the steel fabricator or
manufacturer stating that reinforcing steel conforms to Specification requirements.
D. Portland Cement Concrete: Contractor may use mix design currently being used
which meets Specification requirements. In lieu of this, provide samples of
materials proposed for use in Portland Cement concrete. Testing laboratory will
determine that cement and aggregates meet requirements of these Specifications.
Laboratory shall then prepare mix design which conforms to Specifications. New
mix design will be required if materials are changed or if concrete does not meet
strength or workability requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
A. Portland Cement: Shall be of a standard brand and shall conform to the latest
ASTM designation C 150, Type 1.
B. Aggregates for concrete: Fine or coarse aggregate and shall meet the requirements
of THD, Item 421.
C. Concrete: Composed of Portland Cement, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, water,
mineral filler and/or admixtures, if permitted by the Architect. Concrete shall have
a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of not less than 3000 psi and shall have
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02500-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UTILITY SERVICES
a maximum water -cement ratio of 7.0 gallons per sack, minimum cement content of
5.0 sacks per cubic yard, and a slump from two (2) to three (3) inches. Measuring
materials, batching, and mixing shall conform to ASTM Designation C94.
D. Reinforcing Steel: Conforming to ASTM Designation A615 of grade 40 or 60.
E. Cast Iron Rings, Covers, and Grates: Shall be true to pattern in form and
dimensions, free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other
defects in positions affecting their strength and value for the service intended.
Angles shall be filleted and arises shall be sharp and true. Surfaces shall be
machined where indicated or where otherwise necessary to secure true, flat surfaces.
Covers and grates shall fit properly into frames, and seat uniformly and solidly.
1. Castings: Conforming to the following ASTM Designation:
Gray -Iron Castings A48 Class 50
Malleable Castings A47 35018
Ductile Iron Castings A395 6045-15
2. Trench Drain: Neenah Foundry Co. Type R-4990-C (Type A, B, or C Grate
openings) with Type L Frame, or approved equal.
F. Inlets: Precast concrete inlets as indicated on the Drawings or approved equal.
2.02 STEEL PIPE
A. Standard line pipe with plain ends, beveled for welding in random lengths, with
welded fittings such as tube turns of same thickness as the pipe, unless otherwise
required.
1. Flanges for connecting to valves - Forges steel welding neck designed for 150
PSI pressure, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Gaskets - 1/16" thick
a. American Standard
b. Rainbow
C. or approved equal.
3. Tees for connecting service lines to main:
a. For new empty mains: Mueller Brass Co., H-17701 and 17500 or
approved equal butt -welded type.
b. For existing mains in use: Mueller Brass Co., H-17570 or approved
equal.
2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Conforming to AWWA Standard C 502-54 dry barrel type traffic mode with 5"
minimum diameter valve opening. Mueller Brass Co. - A-24123, or approved
equal.
2.04 TAPPING SLEEVE AND VALVE
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02500-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Suitable for tapping cast iron water main under pressure and having a mechanical
end joint. Kennedy Valve Company - 950X, or approved equal.
2.05 GATE VALVES
A. Water distribution - Designed for 150 pounds per square inch minimum working
pressure. End design to conform to piping design. Clear waterway through valve
shall equal nominal diameter of the valve. Valve shall have a 2" square operating
nut turning counter clockwise to open with direction indicated by an arrow cast in
the metal.
1. Sizes less than 2" - Of brass conforming to Dereal Specifications WW-V-54,
Type 1, Class B.
2. Sizes 2" to 4" - Having cast iron body, brass -mounted, conforming to Fed
Spec WW-X-58, Class A or AWWA standard C500, double disk type, non -
rising stem.
3. Sizes 4" and larger for fire protection - Nonrising Stem, UL 262, FM
approved, iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating
material, inside screw, 175-psig (1200 kPa) working pressure, mechanical
joint ends. Provide with flanged ends for pit installation.
B. Gas system - Cast iron wading type with cover marked "G" or "GAS"
C. Gas Distribution - Double disc type with parallel seat, non -rising stem, bronze
mounted, with flanged end, designed for 176 pounds per square inch minimum
working pressure. Mueller Brass Co. - A-2483-6, or approved equal.
2.06 STOP COCKS
A. Cast iron body, designed for 125 pounds per square inch working pressure. Mueller
Lub O SEAL H-11170 and H-11175, or approved equal.
2.07 VALVE BOXES
A. Water system - Of cast iron complete with lock -type cover operated by a special
wrench and having the word "WATER" cast in the cover. Boxes shall be of the
extension type with screw or slide -type adjustment and with flared base. Metal
shall be 3/16" minimum thickness.
2.08 CLEAN OUT BOOTS
A. Cast -iron ferrule and countersunk brass cleanout plug, with round cast iron access
frome and heavy duty, secured, scoriated cast iron cover shall be Trinity Valley
1684, or approved equal.
2.09 BACKFILL MATERIAL:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02500-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Borrow: Reused excavated or equal borrow material; low expansiveness, uniform
in grade, free from organic materials, capable of being compacted to 95 percent
maximum density at optimum moisture content; ASTM D-698.
1. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble
materials, and organic matter; graded in accord with ASTM C136.
B. Bedding:
1. Washed gravel, 1 /4" to 1-1 /2" in size.
2. Screened pit run gravel passing 1-1/2" sieve and retained on 1/4" sieve.
3. Pea gravel passing 5/8" sieve and retained.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, materials and incidentals required to
complete the work.
B. The Contractor shall lay out all work included herein and shall determine the
elevations of existing piping at all tap locations and furnish that data to the Owner
for review of flow capacity.
3.02 EXCAVATION:
A. The Contractor shall excavate all materials encountered regardless of the difficulties
encountered. The ditch shall be no greater in width or depth than is necessary to
permit construction in accordance with the plans and specifications. The maximum
width of trench at top of pipe without sheeting, shoring and bracing shall be the
external diameter of the pipe plus eight inches.
B. The Contractor shall determine the need for sheeting and bracing to safeguard the
workmen. When sheeting and bracing are necessary the trench or excavation shall be
dug to such width that proper allowance is made for the space occupied by the sheeting.
All sheeting, shoring and bracing shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand
the pressure exerted and protect all persons or property from injury or damage.
Sheeting, shoring and bracing shall not be left in place, but shall be removed in such a
manner as not to endanger or damage new or existing structures. All holes or voids left
by the removal of sheeting shall be backfilled.
C. Soft, Spongy or otherwise unstable material which will not provide a firm foundation
for the pipe shall be removed and replaced with suitable material from the excavation or
other sources approved by the Architect and shall be compacted as provided for in the
Specifications. When unstable conditions are not corrected by the above means, the
Contractor will be required to use rock, gravel, concrete or timber foundations. The
type of foundation shall be determined by the Architect. There will be no extra
compensation for this work.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02500-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UTILITY SERVICES
3.03 BEDDING:
A. Trenches for pipe shall be excavated to a minimum depth of three inches below the
grade of the outside of the pipe. Trenches shall then be filled up to and around the pipe
exterior for at least 15 percent of its overall height with one of the following materials:
B. Other type of bedding shall be provided when designated on the Drawings.
3.04 BACKFILL:
A. After the pipe has been installed, selected material from the excavation at a moisture
content with which the required density can be obtained shall be placed equally along
both sides of the pipe in layers not exceeding six inches loose depth. Care shall be
taken to insure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Each
layer shall be thoroughly compacted by hand or pneumatic tampers until the fill has
reached an elevation 12" above the top of the pipe. The remainder of the backfill shall
be placed in layers not exceeding 10" loose depth and shall be compacted by an
approved method which will obtain the density of the adjacent undisturbed soil.
Backfill for utilities under pavements and curbs and gutters shall be compacted in 6"
layers to a density not less than 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture
content of Standard Proctor Density. Water jetting will not be permitted.
1. Structures: Place backfill, as far as possible, as the work progresses, evenly
on all sides of the structure. Remove forms, shoring, sheeting, bracing, etc.,
before starting to backfill and do not backfill against concrete until directed,
which in general shall be at least 7 days after placement. Take care to prevent
any wedging action of backfill against structure.
3.05 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
A. Pipe: As required per City specification.
B. Location: Where specific dimension is not shown, sewer shall be located at least 10'
horizontally from any water supply or service line. Crossing above water lines:
Construct gravity sewers which pass over water lines of Cast Iron Pipe for a
distance of 9' each side of the crossing. No joint shall occur within 3' each side of
the crossing.
C. Laying Pipe: Shape the bottom of the trench to give substantial uniform
circumferential support to the lower fourth of the pipe. Lay pipe proceeding
upgrade with the spigot ends of the bell and spigot pipe and the tongue ends of
tongue and groove pipe pointing in the direction of flow. Lay each section true to
line and grade in such a manner as to form a close concentric joint with the
adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets of the flow lines. As the work
progresses, clear the interior of the pipe of all dirt and superfluous material. Where
cleaning after laying is difficult due to small pipe size, keep a suitable swab or drag
in the pipe and pull it forward past each joint immediately after the jointing is
complete. When work is not in progress, plug the ends closing them by another
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02500-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UTILITY SERVICES
approved method. If maximum width of the trench at the top of the pipe exceeds
the specified dimension for any reason other than by direction, provide at no
additional cost such concrete cradling, pipe encasement or other bedding as may be
required to satisfactorily support the added load of backfill.
D. Infiltration: Leakage into the sewer shall not exceed 500 gallons per inch of
nominal diameter per day per mile of pipe for any section between successive
manholes. If the infiltration rate does not appear to be acceptable, measure the
amount of leakage with a suitable weir or other device as directed. If the measured
rate of infiltration exceeds the acceptable maximum, make correction in the system
until it becomes acceptable.
E. Manholes: Construct manholes of precast concrete sections or of brick. Covers and
frames shall be of cast iron. Invert channels shall be smooth and semi -circular in
shape, conforming to the inside of the adjacent sewer section. Make changes in
direction of flow with a smooth curve of as large a radius as the manhole size will
permit. Changes in size and grade of the channels shall be made gradually and
evenly. Form the invert channels directly in the concrete of the manhole base or by
use of a half tile laid in concrete, or by laying full -section sewer pipe through the
manhole and breaking out the top half after surrounding concrete has hardened. The
floor of the manhole outside the channels shall be smooth and shall slope toward the
channels not less than 1" per foot nor more than 2" per foot. Free drop inside the
manhole shall not exceed 2'-6" measured from the invert of the inlet pipe to the top
of the floor of the manhole outside the channels. Construct drop manholes
whenever the free drop would otherwise be greater than 2'-6". In all manholes,
provide steps of cast iron. Width of steps shall not be less than 10", set them
approximately 15" apart and with alternate steps off -set 6". Rungs of 7/8" diameter
wrought iron, galvanized after fabrication, may be substituted for steps and may be
installed without offset if the crossbar is not less than 14" long. Rungs shall be
formed so that crossbar is sufficiently below plane of side bar to prevent foot from
slipping off. Provide not less than 6-1/2" of toe room at each rung, measured from
inside face of the crossbar.
F. Clean -outs and Stacks: Use pipe of the same material as the mainline and of 6"
diameter unless shown otherwise. Provide removable standard pipe plugs.
G. Testing: Sewer mains will be checked to determine any displacement of the pipe
after trench has been backfilled 2' above the pipe and compacted. Testing shall be
with a light flashed between manholes or manhole location. If poor alignment or
displacement or other defects are discovered, they shall be corrected as directed.
3.06 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A. Pipe Material and Preparation: Before lowering pipe into trench, clean the interior
of all foreign matter, inspect the pipe for defects. Defective, damaged or unsound
pipe must be removed from the site.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02500-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UTILITY SERVICES
B. Laying Pipe: The full length of each pipe section shall rest solidly upon the pipe
bed with recesses excavated to accommodate bells and joints. Keep pipe interior
clean and dry during laying operations. When work is not in progress, plug the ends
or close them by another approved method. Do not lay pipe with bells facing in
direction of laying. Do not lay pipe closer than 10' to a sewer. At cross-overs with
sewers, no joint in the water line shall be closer than 9' from the cross -over point.
Where possible, lay water lines 6' above sewers at cross-overs. Provide valves,
plugs or caps, as required, where pipe ends are left for future connections.
Deflections from a straight line or grade as required by vertical or horizontal curves
of off -sets shall not exceed 6/D inches per lineal foot of pipe, between the center
lines, extended, of any 2 connecting pipes. D represents the nominal pipe diameter
in inches. If alignment requires deflection in excess of this limitation, use special
bends or a sufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe to provide angular
deflections within the limits.
C. Cutting Pipe: Use an approved type of mechanical cutter.
D. Pipe Joints: Install Joints according to joint manufacturer's recommendations.
Center the spigot in the bell, push the pipe in position and bring it into required
alignment.
E. Valves: Where feasible, locate valves outside the area of roads and streets. Set
valves plumb. Unless shown otherwise, provide a valve box over each outside gate
valve. Box shall be of such length as will be adapted, without full extension, to the
depth of cover required over the pipe at its location. Center the box on the valve.
Carefully tamp earth fill around the box to a distance of 4' on all sides or to the
undisturbed trench face if less than 4'.
F. Fire Hydrants: Set the hydrant plumb and at such elevation that the connecting pipe
will not have less cover than the distributing mains. Provide a concrete slab for the
hydrant as required. Secure the hydrant to prevent it from blowing off the line with
a concrete thrust block set between the back of the hydrant, opposite the pipe
connections, and the vertical face of the trench. If the character of the soil is such
that the hydrant cannot be wedged in this manner, provide bridle rods and rod
collars of not less than 3/4" stock and protect them with a coating of acid resisting
paint. Place at least 5 cubic feet of broken stone around the hydrant base to insure
drainage. Thoroughly compact the backfill around hydrants to grade.
G. Flush Hydrants: Install where required so as to be flush with finished edge.
H. Meter and Meter Vault: Valves and fittings in meter vault shall be bolted flange
type with ring gaskets.
I. Meter Vault: Per City Specifications.
J. Anchorage of Fittings: Anchor tees, bends and plugs in mains with thrust blocks
formed of 2,500 p.s.i. 28 day strength concrete.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02500-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UTILITY SERVICES
K. Sterilization: Sterilize each unit of completed distribution system, using chlorine,
before it is accepted for domestic operation. If possible, flush the lines thoroughly
before introduction of chlorinating material. The amount of chlorine shall be such
as to provide a dosage of at least 50 parts per million. The chlorinating material
shall be introduced into the system by an approved method. It shall remain in the
system for a contact period of at least 24 hours and until the pressure test required
below is complete. During this time valves in the system shall be opened and
closed several times. After the contact period, flush the system with clean water
until the residual chlorine content is depleted or not greater than 0.5 part million.
Then take Bacteria samples as directed and submit them to the State Health
Department Laboratory for analysis. Final results of the test shall indicate no
chlorine bacteria present in the samples. Water mains shall meet State Health
Department requirements before acceptance.
L. Testing: During sterilization contact period, test the system. Piping shall have been
laid, joints completed and trench partially backfilled but leaving the joints exposed
for examination. Unless otherwise required, expel air in the line and subject it to a
hydrostatic pressure test of 50 pounds per square inch in excess of the anticipated
static pressure at the points of reading when the system is pit in operation. Maintain
the pressure for one hour. Exposed pipe, joints, fittings, valves and accessories
shall be inspected. Tighten or remake defective joints. Replace defective material
and repeat the test until results are satisfactory. Conduct open trench tests for 2
hours and covered trench tests for 24 hours. Provide all plugs, valves, pumps,
equipment and labor necessary for conducting the tests. Assume responsibility for
damage and/or contamination to existing connecting supply mains.
M. Special Requirements: Where conditions prevent the actual visible inspection of
each joint or when the joints are made of a material other than lead such that
leakage diminishes as the material in the joints ages, provide a calibrated gauge and
meter to determine the quantity of water lost by leakage under normal operating
pressure. To be accepted, any leakage (evaluated on a pressure basis of 150 pounds
per square inch) must be less than 100 U.S. gallons per 24 hours per mile of pipe,
per inch nominal diameter or pipe for pipe in 12 foot lengths, 75 gallons for pipe in
16 foot lengths, and varies proportionately for other pipe lengths. In calculating
leakage, make allowance for added joints in the pipeline above the normal for unit
lengths of pipe. Should any test of combined sections of pipeline disclose leakage
greater than the acceptable limit, make repairs until the leakage is reduced to, at
most, the acceptable limits.
3.07 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work covered by this Section, the Contractor shall clean up
all work areas by removing all debris, surplus materials, and equipment from the
site. The ground surface shall be restored to its original condition as nearly as
possible.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02500-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UTILITY SERVICES
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Properly protect existing utility lines shown on the Drawings from damage due to
these operations. If damage occurs, satisfactorily repair it at no additional cost. If
damage occurs to an unknown line, give immediate notification.
END OF SECTION 02500
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02500-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UTILITY SERVICES
SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I. Provide concrete paving including broom finished paving and walks, curbs
and gutters. Restore paved areas opened or damaged in performance of the
work required by the Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
2.
Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.
Division 3 Section "Concrete Formwork."
4.
Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
5.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1: Section - Submittal Procedures
B. Concrete Design: Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay for design of
concrete mixes. An independent testing laboratory shall determine design mixes of
each type concrete based on specified strengths and materials in accordance with
ACI 318-89. Submit 4 copies of each design mix for approval.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Notify responsible trades of schedules of concrete pours so as to allow adequate
time for installation of their work.
1.05 STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02751-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE PAVING
B. American Concrete Institute ACI-617 "Standard Specifications for Concrete
Pavement and Bases". ACI-396 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150-78a, Type I or III.
B. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand, ASTM C-33-78.
C. Coarse Aggregate: Hard, durable natural gravel or crushed rock meeting
requirements of ASTM C-33-78. Maximum size and gradation in accordance with
Size No. 67 or 467 in Table II of ASTM C-33.
D. Grading: ASTM C-136.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, grade 60 or as noted on drawings.
G. Dowels and Sleeves: 3/4" plain round bars, with plastic sleeve at one end, with cap
24 inches long, allowing one inch of movement. Refer to drawings.
H. Forms: Nominal 2" thickness dimension fir, or steel paving forms.
I. Premolded Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D-1782, non -asphaltic.
J. Dispersing Admixture: Cement -dispersing, water reducing compound complying
with ASTM C-494 such as Pozzolith 100 series, as made by Master Builders.
K. Curing Compound at Standard Paving: ASTM C-309, No. 40W by A. C. Horn Co.,
Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn or Clear Bond by Guardian Chemical.
L. Air Entraining: ASTM C-0260 by Master Builders or equal.
M. No fly ash will be permitted.
2.02 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING
A. Proportions and Design: Concrete shall produce a mixture of adequate workability,
free from segregation, honeycombing and bleeding, and shall be of following types:
1. Schedule of Types of Concrete:
Type Min. All. Comp. Max. Size of
Type Strength (28 days) Cement % Air Aggregates
I 4000 psi Gray P 5% 1-1/2"
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02751-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE PAVING
2. Locations of Types of Concrete: Broom finish all paving. Sidewalks shall be
4" thick or as noted on drawings and paving shall be as noted on drawings.
3. Admixture: Add specified cement -dispersing agent, color admix (where
specified) and air -entraining agent to concrete mixes.
B. Mixing: Ready mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C-94-67.
C. Slump: Shall not exceed 5" or less than 3" per ASTM C-143.
D. Air Entrainment: Air content by volume as per ASTM C231 shall be 5% to 7%
based on measurements made in concrete mixtures at point of discharge at job site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Inspect subgrade and report any discrepancies to Architect before proceeding.
3.02 FORMWORK
A. Build forms to lines and grades detailed, of sufficient strength and rigidity so they
will not deflect under pressure of wet concrete. Exercise extreme care in layout,
bracing, and aligning forms. Formwork shall be straight, with no bulges in
completed work greater than 1/8" in 10 feet.
3.03 REINFORCING
A. Place reinforcing steel as detailed and in accordance with ACI 318-89. Lap bars 36
bar Diameters. Metal chairs shall be used to hold reinforcing steel in the proper
plane. Place dowels and sleeves at expansion joints at 24" O.C. maximum. Refer
to drawings.
3.04 PLACING
A. Concrete: Convey and place concrete so there is no separation of ingredients in
accordance with applicable requirements of Chapter 10 ACI Standard Specifications
for Concrete Pavements and Concrete Bases (ACI 617-Current Edition). Do not
place concrete when temperature is below 40 degrees F. No calcium chloride shall
be added to the concrete. Do not place concrete which exceeds 95 degrees F., and
add a retarder, if required, to all concrete which is between 90 and 95 degrees F. Ice
shall be used to control the maximum temperature.
B. Construction Joints: Stoppage of concrete placing shall occur at expansion joint or
other detailed contraction joints. Construct bulkheads to permit continuation of
reinforcing steel.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02751-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE PAVING
C. Expansion Joints: Place 1/2" non -asphaltic wide expansion joint fillers where
paving abuts existing paving, structure, walls or fixed objects. Place at every 30
feet each way in paving, every 30 LF in curbs and walks and at other locations
detailed. Provide 1/2" wide expansion joint filler between curbs and concrete
paving. Provide removable tacked -on strips to provide a recess for joint sealing
compound. 3/4" Dowels, 24" long shall be placed at 24" O.C. through expansion
joints, sleeved one side, at all expansion joints except where joint abuts building,
unless noted otherwise.
D. Saw -Cut Contraction Joints: Saw -cut joints when concrete is hard enough not to be
torn, raveled, or damaged by saw cutting equipment and no later than 10 hours after
concrete placement. Trial cuts shall be made prior to execution. Use a power drive
concrete saw. Saw blades shall make a clean, smooth cut, producing a groove 1/8"
to 1/4" wide to depth required (1/4 slab depth). Locate contraction joints at 12'-0"
O.C., with normal locaton being equal spaces between expansion joints, unless
specified otherwise on Drawings. All joints shall receive sealant.
3.05 FINISHING
A. Materials exposed to view free of surface defects such as poor joints, ridges, cracks,
honeycombing, excessive laitance, stone pockets or other defects. Materials that are
defective and cannot be satisfactorily repaired, removed and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
B. Concrete cured by use of curing compound applied after surfaces take initial set
after finishing. Use color matched curing system as recommended by manufactrer
of integral color at colored concrete.
C. General Paving and standard Sidewalks: Finish surface to gritty texture with stiff
bristle push broom using straight continuous strokes. Finish all edges smooth with
1/8" to 1/4" radius.
D. Ramps: Sawcut tactile warning surface to pattern indicated on drawings. Grooved
shall be arranged so as to not hold water.
E. Vibrate, screed and float concrete to level and test the surface, which shall not vary
over 1/4" in 10' when tested with a ten foot straight edge.
F. Finish all vertical surfaces in a manner that leaves the exposed surfaces free of
honeycombing and form marks. Any damaged surfaces shall be repaired and stone
rubbed to match adjacent finished surfaces.
3.06 CURING
A. Apply a white -pigmented type curing compound at a uniform rate of approximately
200 SF/Gallon, or as recommended by curing compound manufacturer as soon as
the finishing operation has been completed and the concrete has lost its water sheen.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02751-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE PAVING
The curing procedure must protect the concrete, including all exposed surfaces
against loss of moisture and rapid temperature change for a period of not less than
four days from the beginning of the curing operations and without damage to, or
marking of the finished concrete surface. Traffic shall not be allowed on finished
concrete of a minimum period of seven days.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Concrete approaches, sidewalks, and related work shall be hosed down with water,
scrubbed with fiber brushes, allowed to dry and be left broom clean and in condition
acceptable to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 02751
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02751-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE PAVING
SECTION 02760 - PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pavement Markings
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2, Section "Concrete Paving"
2. Divison 9, Section "Painting"
1.03 GENERAL
A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required for pavement
marking work indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Condition of pavement: Clean, dry and cured minimum amount of time as
recommended by striping paint manufacturer.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Division 1: Section - Submittal Procedures
B. Submit manufacturer's literature to the Architect for approval. Literature shall show
compatibility of product proposed for use with paving surface to which product is to be
applied.
1.06 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Contractor and subcontractor for work of this section shall be jointly responsible for the
coordination of the work specified herein, including but not limited to:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02760-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES
1. Fire Lanes: Coordinate with all governing authorities to determine exact
requirements (whether or not shown on the drawings). Fire lane marking, if
required, is part of the work of the base contract.
2. Handicapped Parking Spaces: Coordinate with all governing authorities to
determine exact requirements (whether or not shown on the drawings). Special
marking, if required, is part of the work of the base contract.
3. Colors: Coordinate color requirements with all governing authorities, use only
acceptable colors. Colors specified herein shall be used, if acceptable.
4. Notification: Notify the Architect of any required variation from the drawings
resulting from coordination.
1.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect newly painted surfaces from damage by vehicles during the time required for
paint to harden sufficiently to withstand traffic. Any damage to newly painted markings
due to the paint subcontractor's failure to provide adequate protection shall be repaired
by him at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.08 GUARANTEE
A. Any work found to be defective because of either poor workmanship or defective
materials which may be evident within a period of 60 days from acceptance for use will
be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Indications of defective work for the purpose of this guarantee include poor adhesion to
the pavement surfaces, checking, cracking, peeling and discoloration. This shall not be
construed to include wear, damage or discoloration caused by traffic, erosion or from
normal exposure to the elements.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Striping & Directional Marking Paint: Acrylic parking lot and/or street marking paint,
recommended by manufacturer for type of surface.
1. Paint type: Acrylic, water -borne pavement marking paint conforming to Texas
Dept. of Highways Special Specification Traffic paint.
2. Color:
a. General Use Striping, Directional Marking, & H.C. Marking:
Manufacturer's standard flat white.
b. Fire Lane Striping: Manufacturer's standard red or as per city code. Fire
lane striping shall have lettering stenciled in white at 15' intervals:
"FIRE LANE" a fifteen foot interval "NO PARKING" a fifteen foot
interval "TOW AWAY ZONE".
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02760-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. New concrete surfaces will be allowed to cure for a period of not less than 11 days
before application of marking materials. Dust, clay, silt and excess sand will be
removed (by sweeping) from the pavement to be marked before application of paint.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Equipment: Spray mechanism capable of applying paint at the rate specified at an even
and uniform thickness, with clear cut edges. Mechanism shall be operated by means of
quick opening and closing valves conveniently located.
B. Striping & Marking:
1. Where pavement is trowel or wood float finish concrete, lightly sandblast
immediate area to receive striping prior to application of paint.
a. Rough broom finish areas will not require sand -blasting.
2. Apply paint in accord with manufacturer's written instructions. Apply at a rate of
one gallon spread evenly over an area of 105 SFf five square feet and a wet film
thickness of 0.015 inch (15 mils.).
3. Paint 4" wide lines in patterns and spacing as shown on drawings. Width of the
lines shall be within a tolerance of one-half inch. The centerline of marking shall
not deviate more than one-half inch laterally from a straight line at any point.
4. Parking Striping:
a. Painted lines: 4" wide, generally 20' long, and spaced approximately 9' O.C.
except where noted or local authorities require otherwise.
b. If the overall space divides equally into slightly larger spacing than 9',
individual spaces should be increased equally, but should not in any case be
less than 9' O.C., unless noted otherwise on drawings.
5. Stained concrete:
a. Admix at Exposed Sidewalk: Pigmented water -reducing, set -controlling
admixture for integral coloring concrete shall be L. M. Scofield Co.'s
Chromix Color Admixture in custom color color to be selected by the
architect from standard colors.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Any spilled paints shall be cleaned from the paved areas to the satisfaction of the
Owner. Keep the premises clean at all times.
B. Paint, empty containers, and other materials or equipment shall not be stored or allowed
to accumulate on, or near the paved areas.
C. Upon completion of work of this section remove related debris from premises.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02760-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES
END OF SECTION 02760
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02760-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES
SECTION 02810 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe and fittings.
2. Sprinkler heads.
3. Control system and connection to electrical supply.
4. Trenching, installation of system and connection to water source; testing and
backfilling.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1: Section "General Requirements ".
2. Division 2: Section "Landscaping ".
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Areas receiving underground sprinkler system is shown on drawings.
B. Design shall be completed by licensed Irrigation Designer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide underground sprinkler system as a complete
unit produced by a single acceptable manufacturer, including heads, valves, piping
circuits, controls, and accessories.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials
1. D2241: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
2. D2287: Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC).
3. D2464: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Threaded,
Schedule 80.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
4. D2466: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Socket Type,
Schedule 40.
5. D2564: Solvent Cement for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings.
6. D2855: Making Solvent - Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Pipe and Fittings.
1.06 DEFINITIONS
A. Irrigation Mains: That portion of piping from water source to remote control
valves. This portion of piping is subject to surges, being a closed portion of
irrigation system. Hydrant lines (QCV) are considered part of main line piping
system.
B. Lateral Piping: That portion of piping from remote control valve to sprinkler heads.
1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Coverage indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Layout portions of
irrigation system not indicated on Drawings to meet specified coverage in
compliance with local codes and regulations.
2. Complete irrigation system including trenching and back filling for all pipes,
values and drain pits, providing mains, laterals, risers, fittings, sprinkler heads,
values, controllers, electric wiring, and necessary specialties and accessories.
3. Sleeves beneath parking areas, walkways, roads, and driveways where
required.
4. Regulate and adjust sprinkler heads, timed sequence control devices, sectional
valves and rain overrider.
5. Each zone to be comprised of approximately equal water demand. Pressure
not to exceed 6 feet per second.
6. Sprinkler heads in a zone shall have the same precipitation rate.
7. Provide 100 percent coverage by locating heads as recommended by the
manufacturer. Proper overlap shall prevent "scalloping". No throw is
permitted over walks, drives or buildings.
8. Turf and unlike plant materials shall be zoned separately based on water
needs.
9. Located heads discretely using risers only in shrub beds.
10. Heads adjacent to pavement shall be installed on swing joints.
11. Consider all plant heights and grade changes in design and installation of the
irrigation system.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1: Section - Submittal Procedures
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data with installation and storage instructions
for each product specified.
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Indicate location of irrigation heads to match specified water coverage.
Indicate valves, piping and accessories, show design pressure, valve size,
pipe size, GMP requirements, drain valves, and sleeves.
b. Show location and size of city/county main, size of tap to be made, water
meter location, and backflow prevention size and location.
C. Division 1: Section — Closeout Procedures
1. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Provide two copies of instructions
for operation and maintenance of system and controls, seasonal activation and
shutdown, and manufacturer's parts catalog.
a. Include winterization procedures.
b. Indicate length of time each valve is to be open to produce a given
amount of water delivery.
2. Record drawings:
a. Indicate locations, sizes and kinds of equipment installed.
b. Dimension from 2 permanent points of reference (building corners,
sidewalk, or road intersections, etc.— the location of the following items:
1) Connection to water lines.
2) Connection to electrical power.
3) Gate valves.
4) Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension max. 100' along
routing).
5) Significant changes in routing of lateral lines form those indicated
on Drawings.
6) Sprinkler control valve.
7) Routing of control wiring.
8) Yard hydrants and quick coupling valves.
3. Controller Charts:
a. Record Drawings shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before
controller charts are prepared.
b. Submit 2 controller charts for each controller.
C. Show the area controlled by the automatic controller, It shall be the
maximum size which the controller enclosure door will allow.
d. The chart shall be a reduced drawing of the actual as -built system If
controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, enlarge
to size that will be readable when reduced.
e. Chart shall be a blackline or blueline ozalid print. Use a different color
to indicate the area of coverage for each station.
f. When approved, hermetically seal chart between 2 pieces of plastic and
securely mount to controller enclosure door.
1.09 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Existing Utilities: Be responsible for locating and identifying existing utilities.
Notify Architect of any conflicts which affect the approved irrigation layout.
B. Obstructions Below Grade: If obstructions such as rock or underground construction
work are encountered in any irrigation excavation work, alternate locations will be
selected. Where locations cannot be changed, removed obstruction. The obstruction
shall be removed to a depth of not less than 3 feet below grade.
C. Damage by Leaks: Be responsible for damage to the grounds, plants, walks, roads,
building pipings system, electrical systems, and their equipment and contents cause
by leaks in piping systems being installed or having been installed. Repair damages
so cause at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Staking: Be responsible for location staking. Irrigation head locations shall be
determined by calculating dimensions from approved shop drawings. Adjustments
may be necessary to avoid interference with underground obstructions.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Repair any settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during the warranty
period
B. Restore all damaged plantings, paving, or improvement within the warranty period.
C. Materials and equipment shall be warranted in writing against defects in materials
and workmanship by the respective manufacturers. All installation work shall be
guaranteed for two years after final acceptance.
D. No claims under warranty shall be considered for materials damaged or destroyed
by vandals or damages caused by unauthorized operations of the system.
1.11 MAINTENANCE TOOLS
A. Provide 2 sets of tools for removing, disassembling and adjusting each type of
sprinkler head and valve supplied.
B. Provide three quick coupling keys and three 3/4 inch hose swivels as part of this
contract.
C. Provide 2 five foot keys for operation of gate valves.
D. Provide 2 keys for each automatic controller.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
2.01 _ MATERIALS
A. Heads, valves, controllers, backflow preventers, yard hydrants and other
components as scheduled on shop drawings.
B. Pressure Mainlines and Non -Pressure Lateral Lines: All pipe, in sizes indicated on
the shop drawings shall be marked continuously and permanently with the following
information: Manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, class or schedule, and NSF
approval, and type of pipe.
2.02 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Irrigation Mains:
1. Pipe: ASTM D-1784, PVC Class-200, SDR-21, 260 psi maximum.
2. Joint: ASTM D 2241 bell end type
3. Fittings: Schedule 40, ASTM D 2466 solvent cement type.
B. Zone Lateral Lines:
1. Pipe: ASTM D 1784, PVC Class-200, SDR-21.
2. Joints: ASTM D 2241 bell end.
3. Fittings: ASTM D2 466 Socket type.
C. Gate Valves:
1. 3" and larger: Iron body, non -rising stem, threaded ends.
2. 2-1/2" and smaller: Type 1, class 150 psi, threaded ends.
D. Station Control Valves:
1. Station Control Valves: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work
include the following.
a. "PEB Series" — Rain Bird Sales, Inc., Glendora, CA (818) 963-9311.
2. Valve Type: Remote control valves. Substitutions: Permitted.
3. Primers and Solvents: As recommended by PVC pipe manufacturer.
2.03 SPRINKLERS HEADS
A. Small Area Heads (for use in small lawn/shrub areas):
1. Small Aread Heads: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the
following:
a. Cycolac (plastic) "1800 Series" — Rain Bird Sales, Inc., Glendora, CA
(818) 963-9311.
2. Each head shall have an interchangeable nozzle (available in different patterns
and distances of throw). Substitutions: Permitted.
3. Each head shall have a basket screen.
4. Provide pressure compensating screens (P.C.S) as indicated on Drawings.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
B. Large Area Heads (for use in large lawn areas)
1. Large Area Heads: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the
following.
a. 3500 Series — Rain Bird Sales, Inc., Glendora, CA (818) 963-9311.
2. Use adjustable arc (ADJ) unless Drawings show full circle (360)
Substitutions: Permitted.
3. If water pressure is excessively high, provide pressure reducing feature on
zone valves.
2.04 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Automatic Controllers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the
following.
1. Manufacturer: ESP-20 — MC Plus — Rain Bird Sales, Inc., Glendora, CA (818)
963-9311.
a. LPP-K Primary Surge Protector
b. LK-712 (Lock) Provide Owner with two keys.
B. Division 1: Section — Product Requirements.
C. Substitutions: Permitted.
D. Stations: Control stations as shown on shop drawings.
E. Station Timing: Independent for each station with each infinitely adjustable from 0
to 60 minutes.
F. Day Programming: Programming dials encompassing 14-day cycle.
G. Operation: Capable of automatic or manual function as selected by operator.
H. Power Requirements:
1. Input: 115 volt AC
2. Output to Valves: 24 Volts AC.
I. Provide reset circuit breaker for overcurrent protection.
J. Provide master manual on -off switch.
K. Rain Detector:
1. Rain Detector: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the
following.
a. "Mini-Clik" by Glen -Hilton Products, Inc., Bethesda, MD, (301) 441-
8673.
2. Division 1: Section — Product Requirements.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
3. Substitutions: Permitted.
J 4. Mount on rear of Landscape Maintenance Building as per Manufacturer's
recommendations.
2.05 VALVE BOX
A. Valve Boxes: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the following.
1. Ametek, Plymouth Products Division, Sheboygan, WI (414) 457-9435,
Superflexon Valve Box "No.10-170-001" with cover No. "10-173-004", with
pentagon (1) locking device.
B. Division 1: Section — Product Requirements. Substitutions permitted.
C. Paint box covers matte black with paint specified in Section 09900 — Painting.
2.06 SWING JOINTS
A. Swing joints are to be made of Schedule 40 pipe with insert to male thread
combination elbows. The swing joint will allow for precise adjustments of each
head to grade as well as protecting both the head and the pipe from damage if struck
by unusual force.
2.07 CONTROL WIRE
A. Control Wire: All wire shall be #14 AWG solid copper, single conductor, rated U.F.
with U.L listing, with 600 volt PVC insulation. All splices shall be made with wire
nuts and totally encased in DBY direct burial splice kits.
2.08 QUICK COUPLING VALVES
A. Quick Coupling Valves: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the
following:
1. Rain Bird "3RC"
B. Mount quick coupling valves on '/a inch galvanized triple swing joints. All swing
joints are to be assembled using two to three wraps of Teflon tape.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Division 1: Section — Execution Requirements
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-7
'� OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and
conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.
C. Report in writing to Contracting Officer prevailing conditions that will adversely
affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been convected.
D. By beginning work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for
correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate work which is embedded in concrete or masonry and route under paved
areas.
B. Provide timely delivery and installation at job site.
C. Protect adjacent structures, surfaces, and finishes. Do not move equipment over
structures without written approval from Architect. Provide necessary protection
such as board roading, drop clothes, etc., as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Sequencing:
1. Install sleeves under roads and pavement prior to commencement of paving.
2. Install sprinkler system after completion of site grading.
B. Minimum Cover Below Finished Grade:
1. Zone Lateral Pipe: Not less than 12 inches.
2. Mains: Not less than 24 inced.
C. Clearance Horizontally Between Lines:
1. Pipe 2 inches and smaller: 4 inches.
2. Pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger: 12 inches.
3. Other services: 12 inches.
D. Maintain a minimum 1 inch vertical clearance between lines crossing at an angle
greater than 45 degrees.
E. Trench Width: Not less than 6 inches.
F. Install underground piping so that it is not in contact with concrete, existing piping
or other hard objects. Provide a minimum clearance of 2 inches between piping and
hard object.
G. Thrust blocks: Concrete thrust blocks shall be provided on the thrust side of mains.
H. Backfill: Division 1: Section — Earthwork
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM roll
1. Material shall not contain brick, rock lumber or organic materials subject to
decomposing.
2. Trenches, after backfilling, shall be water filled and settled to prevent
aftersettling.
3. Level with finished grade.
4. After backfilling and water settling, soil, around pop-up heads shall be tamped
and heads left level with grade and plumb.
I. Piping Installation:
l . Install plastic pipe in a manner to provide for expansion and contraction.
2. Cut plastic pipe with a hand saw. Ensure a square cut. Remove burrs at cut
ends prior to installation.
3. Plastic to plastic joints shall be solvent -welded. Solvent compatible with pipe
and able to withstand specified pressure requirements.
4. Solvent Welded Joints:
a. Thoroughly clean pipe and fitting with all purpose primer/cleaner and
clean dry cloth.
b. Apply a uniform coat of solvent to the outside of the pipe.
C. Apply solvent to the fitting.
d. Re -apply a light coat of solvent to the pipe and quickly insert into the
fitting.
e. Re -apply a light coat of solvent to the pipe and quickly insert into the
fitting.
f. Give the pipe or fitting a quarter turn to ensure even distribution of the
solvent and make sure the pipe is inserted to the full depth of the fitting
socket.
g. Hold in position for 15 seconds.
h. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the
system
J. Valves:
1. Manual Valves: Install manual valves in a valve box extending from grade to
valve body, with minimum of 4 inch cover measured from grade to top of
valve stem.
2. Automatic Valves:
a. Install automatic valves plumb to within 1/16 inch, in a valve box
extending from grad to valve body, with minimum of 4 inch cover
measure from grad to top of valve stem.
b. Automatic valves installed under sprinkler heads may be installed
without valve box,
C. Automatic drains valves: Locate downstream of each control valve at the
low point.
K. Sprinklers and Quick Coupler:
1. Install plumb to within l/16 inch.
2. Heads at Walks and Curbs: Set flush to within 1/8 inch.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
3. Lower sprinkler heads to finished grade after lawn has become established and
has settled.
L. Control Wire:
1. Bury wires taped to side of pipe in same trench.
2. Bundle multiple wires and tape together maximum 10 feet on center.
3. Provide a 10 inch loop in wire at each valve where controls are connected.
4. Provide 10 inch loop in wires at not over 100 foot intervals.
5. Make electrical splices waterproof.
3.04 CONSTRUCTION
A. Interface with Other work:
1. Locate and coordinate irrigated system work with underground utilities.
2. Coordinate irrigation system work with landscaping work.
3. Coordinate irrigation system sleeve installation with curbing and pavement
work.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1
A. Division 1: Section — Quality Control
B. Inspection:
1. Trenching.
2. Pressure supply line installation and testing.
3. Lateral line and electrical valves.
4. Coverage tests.
C. Testing and Flushing
1. Flushing:
a. After all piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior
to installation of sprinkler heads, yard hydrant assemblies, and hose
valves, thoroughly flush piping system under a full head of water.
b. Maintain flushing for 3 minutes through furthermost valve.
C. After flushing, cap all risers.
2. Adjusting:
a. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to
prevent over -spray onto walks, roadways, and building.
b. If it is determined that adjustments in the irrigation equipment will
provide proper and more adequate coverage, make such adjustments
prior to planting. Adjustments may include changes in nozzle size and
degrees of arc as required.
C. Lower raised sprinkler heads within 10 days after notification by
Architect.
d. Sprinkler heads shall be performed at no cost to Owner.
3. Testing:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
a. Test all pressure lines under hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per
square inch. Prove water tightness.
b. Testing of pressure main lines shall occur prior to installation of electric
control valves.
C. Sustain pressure in lines for not less than 2 hours. If leaks develop,
replace joints and repeat test until entire system has been accepted.
d. Furnish force pump and accessory test equipment.
e. When the irrigation system is completed, perform a coverage test in the
presence of the Owner or Owner's reprensentive to determine if the
water coverage for planting areas is complete and adequate. Correct
inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from Drawings. Complete
test before ground cover is planted.
3.06 SYSTEM OPERATION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Operation:
1. Operate the completed system for the inspection at chi time each sprinkler
head shall be visually checked for coverage, adjustment, installation and
performance; valves shall be inspected for adjustment, installation and proper
automatic manual control; "record documents" will be checked for accuracy;
cleanup of site will be checked; and general items such as manual drain
valves, controller and quick couple valves will be inspected for the
maintenance period.
B. Instruction:
1. Instruct Owner in complete operation and maintenance of the irrigation system
including but not limited to the controller operation, maintenance of the
system's filters, adjustment of heads and winterization of system.
END OF SECTION 02810
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02810-11
OCTOBER 20, 2006 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
SECTION 02874 — BICYCLE RACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. This section includes specifications for the Bike Hitch.
2. Extent of work is indicated by drawings and by provisions of this section.
3. Bikes parked per unit: 2.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of
bicycle racks similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project
and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing bicycle racks
similar to those required for this project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each color, finish, shape and type of bicycle rack from a
single source with resources to provide components of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.
B. Product Data: Include physical characteristics such as shape, dimensions, bicycle
parking capacity and finish for each bicycle rack.
C. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for each bicycle rack.
D. Samples for Verification: Submit finish samples for review and selection by
architect.
E. Maintenance Data: For each bicycle rack.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02874-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BICYCLE RACKS
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Upon delivery, before signing for shipment, inspect for any damages and notate on
the B.O.L.
B. Store bicycle racks in original undamaged packages and containers until ready for
installation.
C. Handle bicycle racks with sufficient care to prevent any scratches or damage to the
finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide "Bike Hitch" (foot mounted) manufactured by DERO BIKE RACK CO.,
2657 32"d Avenue S., Minneapolis, MN 55406, 1-888-337-6729. Fax: 612-331-
2731 Website: www.dero.com
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Center beam: 2" schedule 40 pipe.
B. Ring: 1.5" OD 11 gauge tube.
C. Mounting bracket: 5.5" x 5.25" mounting bracket welded to the end of the center
beam
D. Anchors: 4 concrete spikes.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Bike Hitch is prepared for painting with hard sandblasting. An epoxy primer is
electrostatically applied. A final TGIC, UV resistant polyester powder coat is
applied. Final Coating thickness shall be no less than 6 mils. Color: black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install bicycle racks in location shown on drawings.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface mount installation
using concrete spikes.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02874-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BICYCLE RACKS
C. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that all base materials into which the
j rack will be installed can support the rack and will not be damaged by any required
installation procedures.
3.02 ORDERING INFORMATION
A. When ordering or specifying this rack, make sure the product type, finish and
fastener type are included. Contact your Dero Rack representative for a current
price list or to place an order.
B. Included in the price is either a hot -dipped galvanized finish, a TGIC powder coat
finish, or a stainless steel finish.
C. The foot mounted Bike Hitch includes 4 wedge anchors or concrete spikes.
END OF SECTION 02874 — BICYCLE RACKS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02874-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BICYCLE RACKS
SECTION 02901 - LANDSCAPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plants.
2. Soil Preparation Materials.
3. Miscellaneous Materials.
4. Tree Planting.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 : Section - Irrigation System
1.03 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide complete landscaping shown on Drawings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide plant materials in compliance with applicable State and Federal laws
relating to inspection for diseases and insect infestation at growing site.
B. Observation at growing site does not preclude right of rejection at job site. Plants
damaged in transit or at job site may be rejected.
C. Off -site sandy loam testing (paid by Landscape Contractor):
1. Provide source of sandy loam soil to Architect for purpose of soil
investigation.
2. Test soil samples from both sources of pH, alkalinity, total soluble salts,
porosity, sodium content, and organic matter.
1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Standard for Nursery Stock, approved October 27, 1980 by American
National Standards Institute, Inc.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02901-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 LANDSCAPING
B. Hortus Third, 1976 - Cornell University
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1: Section - Submittal Procedures
B. Samples: Submit for approval sufficient representative quantities of sandy loam,
sharp sand, bark chips, peat moss, filter fabric and gravel. Samples shall be
approved by Architect before use on project.
C. Submit three representative samples of each of the specified ornamental trees,
shrubs, and ground cover plants for Architect's approval. When approved, tag,
install and maintain as representative samples for final installed plant materials.
D. File Certificates of Inspection of plant material by State and Federal authorities with
Architect, if required by State.
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Delivery:
1. Balled and Burlapped (B&B) Plants: Dig and prepare shipment in a manner
that will not damage roots, branches, shape, and future development.
2. Container Grown Plants: Container shall be sufficiently rigid to hold ball
shape and protect root mass during shipping.
B. Delivery:
1. Packaged materials delivered in containers showing weight, analysis and name
of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and
while stored at site.
2. Do not deliver more plant materials than can be planted in one day unless
adequate storage and watering facilities are available on job site.
3. If balled plants cannot be planted within 24 hours after delivery to site, protect
root balls by heeling in with saw dust or other approved material.
4. Protect during delivery to prevent damage to root ball or desiccation of leaves.
5. Notify Architect of delivery schedule 48 hours in advance so plant material
may be observed upon arrival at job site.
6. Remove rejected plant material immediately from site.
7. Do not lift, move, adjust to plumb, or otherwise manipulate plants by trunk or
stems.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Planting Restrictions: Perform actual planting only when weather and soil
conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted practice.
B. Protections:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02901-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 LANDSCAPING
1. Do not move any equipment over existing or newly placed structures without
approval of Architect and General Contractor. Provide necessary protections
such as board-roading as required.
2. Protect other improvements from damage, with protection boards, ramps and
protective sheeting as required.
C. Utilities:
1. Determine locations of underground utilities and perform work in a manner
which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, if required, to minimize
possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by
others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Warranty plants and trees for one year after substantial completion. Following
Warranty Period Inspection, replace dead materials and materials not in vigorous,
thriving condition as soon as weather permits and on notification by Architect.
Replace plants, including trees, which in the opinion of the Architect, have partially
died, thereby damaging shape, size or symmetry.
B. Contractor shall replace plants and trees with same kind and size as originally
planted and dispose of dead material at no cost to Owner. Provide one-year
guarantee on replacement plants. Trees should be replaced at start of next planting
or digging season. In such cases, remove dead trees immediately. Protect irrigation
system and other piping conduit or other work during replacement. Repair any
damage immediately.
C. Guarantee excludes replacement of plants because of injury by storm, freeze or
neglect by Owner.
D. Provide explicit maintenance and care instructions of all plant material.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANTS
A. General: Plants shall be equal to well -formed No. 1 grade or better nursery stock in
accordance with requirements of applicable standards and as noted herein subject to
Architect's approval. Listed plant heights are from tops of root balls to nominal tops
of plants.
B. Ground Covers: Nursery grown, healthy, vigorous, of normal habit of growth for
species, free from disease, insect eggs and larvae.
C. Ornamental Trees and Shade Trees: Healthy, vigorous, full -branched, well -shaped,
trunk diameter and height requirements as specified. Balls shall be firm, neat,
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02901-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 LANDSCAPING
slightly tapered and well burlapped. Trees with loose or broken balls at time of
planting shall be rejected. Trees will be individually approved by Architect.
D. Hydro -mulch
1. Grass: Bermuda Seed: Shall be extra hulled and treated lawn type seed,
delivered to the site in its original unopened container, and shall meet Texas
State Law requirements.
2. Fiber: Shall be one hundred (100%) percent Wood Cellulose Fiber, delivered
to the site in its original unopened container, Conweb or equal.
3. Fiber Tack: Shall be delivered to the site in its original unopened container,
and shall be Terra -Tack One, as manufactured by Grass Growers, Inc., or
equal.
E. Grass Sod : ASPA Nursery growth cultivated Bermuda sod with strong fibrous root
system, free of stones, burned spots and minimal weeds.
2.02 SOIL PREPARATION MATERIALS
A. Sandy Loam:
1. Friable, fertile, dark, loamy soil, free of clay lumps, subsoil, stones, and other
extraneous material. Reasonably free of weeds and foreign grasses. Soil
containing Dallis grass or Nutgrass shall be rejected.
2. Physical properties as follows:
Clay - between 7-27 percent Silt - between 28-50 percent Sand - less than 52
percent
B. Sharp Sand: Clean, washed sand, fine to coarse sizes.
C. Peat Moss: Commercial sphagnum moss or hyphum peat, or decomposed gin trash
with pH between 5 and 7. The gin trash shall be sterilized to eliminate all active
residues, i.e., insecticides, pesticides, herbicides, fungus, virus, and defoliant
chemicals.
D. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer with an
organic base. It shall be uniform in composition, dry, and free -flowing. Fertilizer
shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened containers, each bearing the
manufacturer's guaranteed statements of analysis, and shall meet the following
requirements, or equal, for approval.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Steel Edging: 1/8" x 4" DuraEdge". Color Green.
B. Wrapping Material: Waterproofed, asphalt based paint with antiseptic properties,
manufactured for use on tree wounds.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 029014
OCTOBER 20, 2006 LANDSCAPING
C. Tree Paint: Waterproofed, asphalt based paint with antiseptic properties,
- manufactured for use on tree wounds.
D. Mulch: cypress decorative bark mulch rated 2 inch to 3 inches. Color to be selected
by Architect.
E. Pea Gravel: Washed 3/4 inch native pea gravel.
F. Guying Materials:
1. Tie Wire: 12 gauge galvanized wire.
2. Black Hose: 2 ply, fiber reinforced hose, minimum 1/2 inch inside diameter.
3. Eye Bolts: Galvanized steel, 3/8 inch eye, 6 inches long.
4. Turnbuckles: Galvanized steel, 3/8 inch eye, 6 inch opening.
5. Wood Stakes: 2 inches by 2 inches x 24 inches pine stakes.
6. Colored flag attached to tie wire
G. Transite Edging: 3/8 Inch thick by 24 inches deep by 42 inches long corrugated
transite edging.
H. Weed Stopper: 'Processional Landscape Fabric", 3 oz Spunbond by Fabriscape,
Chicago, IL
I. Erosion Control Netting: "Fabrijute", Photo/Bio-degradable netting by Fabriscape,
Chicago, IL
J. Perforated PVC pipe 4"
K. Perforated PVC pipe with cap 3"
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine subgrade upon which work is to be performed, verify grade elevations,
that bed areas are left four inches low, observe conditions under which work is to be
performed, and notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Contractor. Notify Architect before proceeding.
3.02 BED PREPARATION
A. Provide addition four inches of excavation for shrub beds and backfill eight inches
deep; four inches deep for ground cover.
1 part sandy loam
1 part peat moss
1 part sharp sand
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02901-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 LANDSCAPING
Add four pounds commercial fertilizer, as determined by testing, per 100 SF of bed
area and mix thoroughly.
3.03 GRASS AREAS
A. Lawn areas as indicated on plan, or existing lawn areas disturbed by construction
activity shall be hydro -mulched. Hydro -mulch with Bermuda at the rate of two
pounds per 1,000 SF. Fertilizer component of hydro -mulch shall be 20 pounds per
1,000 SF (16-20-0 Fertilizer). Mulch component of hydro -mulch shall be wood
cellulose fiber at the rate of 50 pounds for 1,000 square feet.
B. Areas to receive sod as indicated on plan shall be laid on prepared moistened
surface within 48 hours of harvesting and immediately upon delivery to site. Lay
sod tight with no open joints visible, and no stretching or overlapping: stagger end
joints by 12" minimum. Lay smooth with top elevation''/z" below adjoining paving.
Water immediately after installation.
3.04 SPACING
A. Place plants in position on bed areas before containers have been removed. Obtain
approval from Architect. Do not remove burlap from BB plants. Plant where
located, setting plants with tops of balls even with tops of beds, and compact soil
carefully around each plant ball. Water each plant thoroughly with hoses to
eliminate air pockets. Carefully prune plants to remove dead or broken branches
and hand -rake bed areas to smooth even surfaces. Architect reserves right to
interchange or shift locations of plants prior to planting.
3.05 TREE PLANTING
A. Ornamental Trees: Plant trees in pits 12 inches larger than tree ball, backfill with
prepared soil as defined above.
B. Shade Trees:
1. Plant in tree pits 2'-0" greater in diameter than root balls or to edge of tree
leave -outs in paved areas. Remove excavated soil from site.
2. Coordinate with electrical contractor in cases where tree uplights are to be
installed.
3. For those trees indicated on plans, slope bottom of tree well excavation to
drain to sump. Install six inches of pea gravel in bottom of tree well. Provide
single layer of filter fabric over gravel. Center tree in well.
4. Backfill pits with five parts sandy loam to one part peat moss and carefully
settle by watering to prevent air pockets.
3.06 TREE GUYING
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02901-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 LANDSCAPING
A. Complete guying as detailed immediately after trees are planted.
3.07 MULCHING
A. After planting has been completed and approved by Architect, mulch bed areas with
bark mulch, two inches deep.
3.08 EDGING
A. Install metal edging to separate grass areas from ground cover and bed areas.
3.09 TREE WRAPPING
A. Wrap nursery grown trees. Extend wrapping from ground to a point immediately
below lowest branch of each tree or as directed. Securely fasten in place with tacks
or staples, so wrapping will remain in place two years.
3.10 PRUNING OF NEW PLANT MATERIAL
A. Trees are to be pruned to preserve natural character of plant and in a manner
appropriate to its particular requirements in landscape design as determined by
Architect. In general, remove at least one-third of wood by thinning branches. Do
not cut leaders. Pruning in general shall be heavier on collected than on nursery
grown plants. Remove soft wood or sucker growth and broken or badly bruised
branches with a clean cut.
3.11 MAINTENANCE BY CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor is responsible for maintenance of all trees, shrubs, ground cover and
turf, including all necessary watering, cultivating, weeding and spraying until
substantial completion of the entire project. Plant materials shall be kept in a
healthy and vigorous condition with all bed areas kept neat.
B. Water will be available on site at no expense to the Contractor. Hose and other
watering equipment required for maintenance by Contractor shall be furnished by
Contractor at his expense. Additional water will be available as sprinkler system
becomes operational, but this in no way relieves the Contractor of maintenance of
plant material until acceptance by the Owner.
C. Grass areas shall be mowed at regular intervals to maintain a maximum height of
two inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing. Remove
clippings after mowing.
END OF SECTION 02901
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 02901-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 LANDSCAPING
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Forming all flatwork
2. Forming building pad.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 "Concrete Reinforcement."
2. Division 3 "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit diagrams of proposed construction joints not shown on the drawings for
approval by the Engineer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. American Concrete Institute Standard ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for
Concrete Formwork".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Forms:
1. Wood forms for unexposed concrete surfaces shall be built of sufficient
thickness to sustain the loads to be imposed thereon, dressed to uniformly
smooth contact surfaces, and so constructed as to be readily removable.
2. Wood forms for exposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed of commercial
standard Douglas Fir, moisture -resistant, concrete form plywood not less than
5-ply, and at least 9/16" thick, with one smooth face, or shall be forms with
linings of one of the following types:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
03100-1
CONCRETE FORMWORK
a. Plywood: Commercial standard Douglas Fir, concrete form, exterior 3-
ply, not less than 1/4" thick, having one smooth face or,
b. Fiberboard: Treated, hard-pressed box forms, in size indicated on
drawings and as manufactured by National Container Corporation or
approved equal, and rated to sustain a load exceeding the total weight of
fresh concrete placed over the voids.
B. Carton Forms
1. Formed Voids Under Beams and Slabs: Corrugated fiberboard box forms, in
size indicated on drawings and as manufactured by Surevoid or approved
equal, and rated to sustain a load exceeding the total weight of fresh concrete
placed over the voids.
2. Soil retainers: pre -cast concrete panels or sureretainer by Motzblock.
3. Provide 11/4" tempered masonite protection board and 10 mill vapor retarder
over carton forms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Adequately shore all concrete members to safely
support all loads and lateral pressures outlined in "Recommended Practice for
Concrete Formwork" (ACI 347) without distortion, excessive deflection or other
damage. Build all necessary forms centering, shores and moulds to conform to the
shapes, lines and dimensions of the various members of concrete construction lines,
and dimensions of the various members of the concrete construction as shown or
scheduled on the drawings. Construct sufficiently tight and so substantially
assembled as to prevent bulging or leakage of mortar. Assemble forms to be readily
removable without impact, shock or damage to the concrete. Provide temporary
openings as required to facilitate cleaning, drainage and inspection. Clean all
contact surfaces of lumber once used as forms thoroughly before reuse.
B. Install form ties at proper intervals to securely hold the forms in position during the
placing of concrete, and to withstand the weight and pressure of the wet concrete.
Coat ties of a type intended to be entirely removed with an approved lubricant to
safeguard against damaging the concrete during removal. The use of wire ties will
not be permitted.
C. Place and anchor in the forms wood strips, blocking, mouldings, nailers, etc.,
required to produce the finished profiles and surfaces shown on the drawings and to
provide nailing for wood members or other features required to be attached to
concrete surfaces in such manner. Coat wood strips, blocking and mouldings with
form sealer.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03100-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE FORMWORK
D. Special care shall be given to formwork, ties, bracing, etc. for any concrete surface
r to be left exposed to permanent view. Waves, bulges, form marks, staining, joint
marks or irregularities will not be tolerated and shall be considered unacceptable.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Should construction joints prove to be absolutely unavoidable, locate such joints
within the middle third of spans or as detailed on the drawings. Make no additional
construction joints under any circumstances without the written approval of the
Architect.
B. Provide appropriate keys in all construction joints, whether horizontal or vertical.
3.03 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Construction forms shall be provided for any and all items of concrete work
required for or in connection with the satisfactory completion of the project,
whether each such item is specifically shown or referred to or not.
3.04 SLABS
A. Form all openings in concrete slabs as required for the vertical passage of ducts,
pipes, conduits, etc..
3.05 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Do not remove forms until concrete is adequately hardened and set. Clamps or tie
rods may be loosened 24 hours after concrete is placed; ties, except for a sufficient
number to hold the forms in place, may be removed at that time.
B. Form removal shall be accomplished as a hand operation, with due care to avoid
damage to any finished concrete work or any reinforcing passing through forms
being removed.
C. Proper cold weather curing procedures shall be observed if concrete forms are
removed when the temperature is below 40 degrees F. Refer to recommendations
that are set forth in "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting" (ACI
306).
3.06 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of work of this section, remove related debris from job site.
END OF SECTION 03100
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03100-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE FORMWORK
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Includes furnishing all materials, equipment, transportation and facilities and
performing all labor necessary for the following:
1. Prepare shop drawings of reinforcing steel.
2. Furnish and place reinforcing steel.
3. Fabrication and installation of embedded metal assemblies.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 1 "Quality Requirements."
2.
Division 2 "Drilled Piers."
3.
Division 3 "Concrete Formwork."
4.
Division 3 "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1: Section - Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and installation drawings of reinforcement and
embedded metal assemblies for review by the Engineer. Reproduce the bar
bending diagram, the beam, slab and joist notes and cast -in -place concrete notes that
concern the proper placing of reinforcing and submit it with each set of shop
drawings for field use. Use same bar marks on bar bending diagrams as used on the
beam, and slab schedule. Use same beam, and wall marks as Contract Documents.
C. Mill Test Reports: Deliver certified copies, evidencing compliance with all
requirements of these specifications to the Engineer with all deliveries of
reinforcing steel.
D. Submit copies of laboratory inspection reports as follows:
Steel Supplier - 1 Copy
General Contractor - 1 Copy
Owner - 1 Copy
Architect - 1 Copy
Structural Engineer - 1 Copy
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03200-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
1.04 LABORATORY TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Inspect welding of deformed bar anchors at the beginning of each period of
production for size, length and quality. Re -inspect corrected welds.
B. Reinforcing: inspect all reinforcing steel prior to placement of concrete for
compliance with the Contract Documents and the approved shop drawings. All
instances of noncompliance shall be immediately brought to the attention of the
Contractor. If uncorrected by the contractor, they shall be listed in the report.
1. Observe and report the following: number and size of bars; bending; splicing;
clearance to forms; clearance between bars; rust, form oil or other
contamination; fabrication and installation of embedded metal assemblies,
including visual inspection of all welds.
C. Inspector shall have a minimum of three years experience inspecting reinforcing
steel in projects of similar size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing: All of domestic manufacturers.
1. Bars: New deformed billet steel, ASTM A-615, grade 60.
2. Reinforcing bars to be welded: ASTM A706; Bars shall have a carbon
content not exceeding 0.30% and a manganese content not exceeding 0.60%.
Provide certified copies of the ladle analysis for each lot of bars to be welded.
3. Welded Wire Fabric: Not Used
4. Epoxy coated reinforcing bars: ASTM A775.
B. Fiber reinforcing:Not Used
C. Concrete accessories including bar supports, chairs, spacers, etc.: Cold -drawn wire
and fabricated in accordance with the requirements of Chapter Seven of the ACI
Standard 315 with heights as required.
D. Bar supports for concrete resting on earth: Precast concrete briquettes having tie
wires embedded therein, or individual high chairs No. HCP with welded plates on
bottom as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Provide bar supports, hot -
dipped galvanized after fabrication, where concrete will be exposed including
ceilings of flat slabs.
E. Bar supports for reinforcing placed over carton forms to be of type to prevent
puncturing the carton form.
2.02 METAL ANCHORAGE & CONFINEMENT ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Shapes and Plates and Rods: Conform to ASTM A572 Grade 50.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03200-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
B. Welded Deformed Bar Anchors: welded by full -fusion process; "Nelson" Anchors
Type D2L or approved equal.
C. Headed Stud Anchors: Headed Studs welded by full fusion process as furnished by
Nelson Stud Welding Company or approved equal.
D. Bolts: Conform to ASTM A307 with regular hexagon nuts and carbon steel
washers.
E. Straps: Conform to ASTM A245 or A284.
F. Welding Electrodes: ASTM Designation A233, Series E70 - AWS 5.5.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate reinforcing steel in compliance with the CRSI "Manual of Standard
Practice".
B. All bar splices shall be a minimum of Class "A" lap specified otherwise on
drawings.
C. Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions,
with fabrication tolerances complying with ACI 315. In case of fabricating errors,
do not re -bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken
the material.
D. Deliver all reinforcement to the project site bundled, tagged and marked. Use metal
tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings
shown on placement diagrams.
E. Reinforcing with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the work:
Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding the specified fabrication tolerances, bends
or kinks not indicated on drawings or final shop drawings, bars with reduced cross-
section due to excessive rusting or other cause.
2.04 COATING
A. Rust inhibitor for field application to metal accessories shall be Hi -Build Epoxoline
manufactured by the TNEMEC Co., Kansas City, Missouri or approved equal.
B. Hot dip galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A123.
C. Cold Galvanizing Compound for field repair of galvanizing shall be "ZRC Cold
Galvanizing Compound" by ZRC Chemical Products Company, Quincy,
Massachusetts, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03200-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
3.01 MATERIAL STORAGE
A. Stack reinforcing steel in tiers. Exercise care to maintain all reinforcement free of
dirt, mud, paint, rust, etc.
3.02 GENERAL
A. Place reinforcing steel of the sizes, shapes, lengths, spacing and other dimensions
where shown on the drawings. Details of reinforcing shall conform to the ACI
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-99).
3.03 MARKING
A. Mark bars plainly. Limit bundles to 1 size and 1 length and tag each bundle with
metal tags.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean reinforcement thoroughly of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil or other coatings which
might tend to reduce the bonding to the concrete.
3.05 BENDING
A. Bend bars cold. Heating of reinforcement, or handling by makeshift methods, will
not be permitted and bars having kinks or bends not required will be rejected.
3.06 PLACING
A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and the Concrete Reinforcing Steel
Institute recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and
methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified.
B. Place reinforcement accurately, securely saddle tie at every other intersection with
No. 18 gauge black annealed wire, and rigidly hold in place during the placing of
the concrete by means of metal chairs or spacers.
C. Hold bars in position and to proper clearance of concrete surface by spacers, chairs,
or other necessary supports with the following tolerances:
1. Top bars in slabs and beams:
a. Members 8" deep or less: + 3/8"
b. Members more than 8" but not over 2' deep: + 1/2"
C. Members more than 2': + 3/4"
2. Lengthwise of members: + 2"
3. Concrete cover to formed surfaces: + 1 /4"
4. Minimum spacing between bars: + 1/4"
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03200-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
3.07 CONCRETE PROTECTION
A. Minimum protection for reinforcing steel shall be as follows:
1. Grade beams and exterior face of walls and columns exposed to the weather or
in contact with the ground: 2".
2. Reinforcing in structural elements deposited against soil: 3"
3. Beam formed with fiberboard void boxes: 2"
4. Slabs: I".
3.08 EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES
A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel items in the shop. Shearing, flame cutting,
and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately. Holes shall be cut, drilled, or
punched at right angles to the surface of the metal and shall not be made or enlarged
by burning.. Welded construction shall conform to the AISC Specifications for the
Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings and AWS D1.1.
Welding shall be done by AWS certified welders.
B. Welding of deformed bar anchors and headed stud anchors shall be done by full -
fusion process equal to that of Nelson Stud Welding Company.
END OF SECTION 03200
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03200-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete for building slab and grade beams.
2. Concrete for flat work.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Divisionl "Quality Requirements."
2.
Division 2 "Concrete Paving."
3.
Division 2 " Drilled Piers."
4.
Division 3 "Concrete formwork."
5.
Division 3 "Concrete Reinforcment."
6.
Division 7 "Vapor Barrier Membrane."
7.
Division 9 "Painting."
1.03 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Furnish all materials, equipment, transportation and facilities, and
perform all labor necessary for the following:
1. Furnish and place cast -in -place concrete.
2. Grouting structural steel.
3. Finishing and curing of concrete.
4. Concrete Mix Designs.
5. Laboratory testing of concrete.
B. All concrete shall be ready -mixed or transit -mixed, obtained from a plant, the
operations of which shall conform to requirements of ASTM C94. Job -mixed
concrete shall not be used, except where particularly authorized by the Owner in
small quantities such as may be needed to affect patching and repairs.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this specification section
shall apply, unless noted otherwise.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposed mix designs prepared in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 3.9.
Each proposed mix design shall be accompanied by a complete standard deviation
analysis based on at least 30 consecutive strength tests, or by three laboratory trial
mixtures with the confirmation tests.
B. Failure by the contractor to submit the shop drawings, test reports and/or mix
designs required above shall release the architect and the engineer from any
liabilities due to the negligence on the part of the contractor to comply with the
construction documents.
1.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS
A. Selection of proportions: Proportions of ingredients for concrete mixes shall be
determined and/or certified by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with
the requirements of Chapter 5 of the ACI Standard "BUILDING CODE
REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE: (ACI 318-99), to provide
characteristics listed on the drawings for each class of concrete.
1. General: Concrete shall be composed of Portland Cement, fine aggregate,
coarse ggregate, water, and as specified, an air -entraining admixture.
Proportions of ingredients shall produce a mixture which will work readily
into corners and angles of forms, bond to reinforcement, without segregation
or excessive bleed water forming on the surface. Water -reducing admixture or
high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer). May be used at
contractor's option if properly designed into concrete mix. Use air -entraining
admixture in all concrete except piers. Add air -entraining admixture at
manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement
having air content within 2% to 4%. Slump Limits: Proportion and design
mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:
a. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3".
b. Reinforced Foundations Systems: 4" plus or minus 1 ".
C. Piers: 5" min and 7" max.
d. Other Concrete: 4" plus or minus 1".
2. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and
as herein specified.
Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted.
During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of
concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be
required.
When air temperature is between 85' F. (30' C.) and 90' F. (32' C.), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air
temperature is above 90' F. (32' C.), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60
minutes.
3. Required Average Strength Above Specified Strength: Determinations of
required average strength above specified strength shall be based on the
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
1.07
standard deviation record of the production facility in accordance with ACI
301. Calculation of standard deviation of compressive strength results shall be
in accordance with ACI 214, 'Recommended Practice for Evaluation of
Comprehensive Test Results of Field Concrete."
4. If a suitable record of past performance is not available, proportions shall be
selected on the basis of laboratory trial batches to produce an average strength
greater than the specified strength f c by the amount defined in ACI 301,
Table 3.9.2.2.
5. All concrete mix designs shall include the following information:
a. Proportions of cement, fine and course aggregates and water.
b. Water -cement ratio, design strength, slump and air content.
C. Type of cement and aggregates.
d. Type and dosage of all admixtures.
e. Special requirements for pumping.
f. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which the design is
valid.
6. If a testing laboratory provides concrete mix designs, it shall be selected by
the Contractor, approved by the Architect and paid for by the Contractor.
LABORATORY TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as work progresses. Failure
to detect defective work shall not prevent rejection when defect is discovered, nor
shall it obligate the Architect for final acceptance.
B. Testing agencies shall meet the requirements of 'Recommended Practice for
Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel in Construction" ASTM E
329.
C. The following testing services shall be performed by the testing laboratory:
1. Secure concrete samples in accordance with "Method of Sampling Fresh
Concrete" ASTM C172-.
2. Mold and cure four specimens from each sample in accordance with "Method
of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexural Specimens in the
Field" ASTM C31-. The cylinders shall be stored in the field for 24 hours and
then transported to the laboratory to be cured.
3. Test specimens in accordance with "Method for Test for Compressive
Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders" ASTM C39-. Two specimens shall
be tested at 28 days for acceptance and one shall be tested at 7 days for
information. One specimen shall be held for future testing, if required.
4. Make one strength test (four cylinders) for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof,
of each mix design of concrete placed in any one day.
5. Determine total air content of air entrained normal weight concrete for each
strength test in accordance with ACI 231.
6. Report test results in writing to the Architect and Structural Engineer on the
same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall
contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
placement, name of contractor, name of concrete type and class, location of
concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and
type of break for both 7-day test and 28-day tests, air content.
7. Determine slump for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete
appears to vary, using "Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement
Concrete" ASTM C 143.
8. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test.
D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete
when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have
not been attained. Test to determine adequacy of concrete will be by cored
cylinders complying with ASTM C42. Contractor shall pay for such test conducted,
and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is
verified.
E. Monitor the addition of water at the jobsite and the length of time concrete is
allowed to remain in the truck before placement.
F. Testing non -shrink grout: Make one strength test for every 10 baseplates grouted.
G. The Contractor shall provide and pay for the necessary testing services of the
following:
1. Qualification of proposed materials and the establishment of mix designs in
accordance with 'Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete" ACI
318.
2. Other testing services needed or required by the Contractor.
H. To facilitate testing and inspection, the contractor shall:
1. Furnish necessary labor to assist testing agency in obtaining and handling
samples at the job site.
2. Advise the testing agency in advance of operations to allow for the assignment
of testing personnel and testing.
3. Provide and maintain for the use of the testing agency adequate facilities for
proper curing of concrete test specimens on the project site in accordance with
"Methods of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexural
Specimens in the Field" ASTM C31.
I. Evaluation and acceptance:
1. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the
averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed
specified strength and no individual test result (average of two cylinders) is
below specified strength by more than 500 psi.
2. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the requirements of
"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" ACI 301, Chapter 18
have been complied with.
3. In any case, where the average strength of the laboratory control cylinders, as
shown by the tests for any portion of the structure, falls below the minimum
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
03300-4
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
specified ultimate compressive strength, the Architect shall have the right to
require the Contractor to provide improved curing conditions of temperature
and moisture to secure the required strength. Also, if the average strength of
the laboratory control cylinder should fall so low as to cause the portions of
the structure to which the respective unsatisfactory test reports apply to be in
question by the Architect, the Contractor shall follow the core procedure set
forth in the current edition of ASTM C42. If the results of the core tests
indicate, in the opinion of the Architects, that the strength of the structure is
inadequate, such replacement, load testing, or strengthening as may be ordered
by the Architects shall be provided by the Contractor without cost to the
Owner.
J. Reports: The testing laboratory shall make reports to the following:
Concrete supplier - 1 copy
Contractor- 1 copy
Owner - 1 copy
Architect - 1 copy
Structural Engineer - 1 copy
1. Reports shall be made and distributed immediately after the respective tests or
inspections are made.
2. Where reports indicate deviations from the Contract Documents, they shall
also include a determination of the probable cause of the deviation and where
applicable, a recommendation for corrective action.
3. Wherever the testing laboratory recognizes a trend of decreasing quality in the
concrete due to changing reasons, conditions of curing or other cause; this
shall be brought to the attention of the Architect, along with a
recommendation for corrective action to be taken before the materials fall
below the requirements of these Specifications.
K. Authority & Responsibilities of the Testing Laboratory
1. The laboratory representative shall immediately notify the Architect and the
Contractor of any deviance from Specifications and approved design mixes
observed at the mixing plant or the job site.
2. If, in the opinion of the laboratory representative, the deviance observed will
be probable cause for subsequent rejection of the material, he shall so inform
the Contractor and Architect so that a timely decision as to whether or not to
continue operations can be made.
3. Subsequent to on -the -spot verbal notification, the laboratory shall file a
written report of any deficiencies or deviance noted including a summary of
conversations and decisions made and action taken at the time in accordance
with Paragraph 1.
4. The testing laboratory shall control field adjustments made to concrete mixes
to compensate for field conditions and report same in accordance with
Paragraph H.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
A. Materials and work shall conform to the requirements of all standards, code, and
recommended practices required in Contract Documents. In conflicts between a
standard and the contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern. In the
case of a conflict between the Contract Documents and the local building code, the
more stringent requirement shall govern.
1. Applicable Standards:
a. "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" ACI 301-84.
b. "Building Code Requirement for Structural Concrete" ACI 318-89.
C. "Standard Specifications for Ready -Mixed Concrete" ASTM C94.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
A. Portland Cement shall conform to ASTM C150-, Type I, domestic manufacturer.
Only one (1) brand of cement shall be used throughout the work.
B. Fine aggregate shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition of
ASTM C33, and shall be natural bank or river sand, washed and screened,
consisting of hard, durable, uncoated particles free of deleterious matter, and shall
be so graded from coarse to fine as to produce a minimum percentage of voids.
C. Coarse aggregate shall conform to the current edition of ASTM C33, shall be gravel
or crushed stone suitably processed, washed and screened, and shall consist of hard,
durable particles without adherent coatings. Maximum aggregate size shal be size
no. 467 for piers, size no. 67 for all other concrete.
D. Concrete Admixtures: Provide admixtures produced and serviced by established,
reputable manufacturer and used in compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
1. Color Admix at Exposed Sidewalk: Pigmented water -reducing, set -
controlling admixture for integral coloring concrete shall be L. M. Scofield
Co.'s Chromix Admixture in custom color to be selected by the architect.
2. Air -entraining agent, conforming to ASTM C260, and CRD C-13, "NO-VR"
by Master Builders or approved equal.
a. When requested, certification attesting to the percentage of effective
solids and compliance with ASTM C260- shall be furnished.
3. Water -reducing, set -controlling admixture, conforming to ASTM C494-, Type
A (water -reducing).
a. Field Service: When requested, a qualified concrete technician
employed by the manufacturer shall be available to assist in
proportioning concrete materials for optimum use, to advise on proper
use of the admixture and adjustment of concrete mix proportions to meet
job -site and climatic conditions.
b. Obtain approval of the Architect, in writing, before using set -controlling
admixtures.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
4. Calcium chloride and admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride
ions will not be permitted in the concrete mixtures.
5. Fly Ash will be allowed for up to 20% by volume as a partial substitute for
cement.
E. Water shall be city water.
F. Fibrous Reinforcement: Not Used
2.02 CURING MATERIALS
A. Waterproof paper, for curing exposed finish concrete floors, shall be non -staining
two (2) ply, reinforced in both directions with fibers completely embedded in
asphalt, and conforming to the requirements of the current edition of ASTM C171.
B. Curing compound shall be Master Builders' "Masterseal", or "Sealtight" CS-309,
clear (transparent) non -yellowing compound as manufactured by W.R.
MEADOWS, INC., Elgin, IL. Curing compound shall not be used on concrete that
will be permanently exposed. Curing compound to be used on concrete surfaces to
receive vinyl composition or vinyl tile shall be Master Builders MB-429. Test
compatibility with adhesives/grouts prior to applying compound. Compound shall
conform to ASTM C309.
C. Bonding Compound: Two component, moisture insensitive, extended pot life epoxy
bonding agent equal to "Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod LPL," by the Sika Corporation or
equal.
2.03 FINISHING MATERIALS
A. Cement Floor Leveling Compound: Camp's "Latex Mix" (Liquid Felt up to 1/8"
over 1/8" mix with Portland Cement and Sand), as distributed by the Tichenor
Company, Dallas, Texas or approved equal. Floor leveling compound may only be
used where floor will not be exposed.
B. Abrasive Aggregate for Non -slip Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits, or
crushed emery, as abrasive aggregate for non -slip finish with emery aggregate
containing not less than 40% aluminum oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide.
Use material that is factory graded, packaged, rust -proof and non -glazing, and is
unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials.
C. Floor Sealing Compound: "Master Seal 330" by Master Builders, Cleveland, Ohio
or approved equal.
D. Evaporation retarder: "Confilm" by Master Builders; spray applied liquid film for
hot weather finishing.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
03300-7
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
A. Expansion Joint Material: Preformed expansion joint material conforming to
ASTM D-1751.
B. Drilled Anchor Bolts: Shall be "Wej-It" bolts as manufactured by the WEJ-IT
Corp., Broomfield, Colorado; "Kwik Bolt II", by Hilti Fastening Systems; "Trubolt"
as manufactured by Ramset Fastening Systems; or approved equal.
C. Rust Inhibitor: For field application to metal accessories shall be Hi -Build
Epoxoline manufactured by the Tnemec Co., Inc., Kansas City, Missouri or
approved equal.
D. Accessories: AC315 Galvanized chairs, stools, spacers, etc. shall be by Superior
Manufacturing Co., or equal.
2.05 NON -SHRINK GROUT
A. Shall be pre -mixed, non -shrinking, non-metallic, high strength grout. Compressive
strength in 7 days shall be 5000 psi minimum, and 7000 psi minimum at 28 days.
Manufacturer shall provide evidence that the material meets the criteria of the Corps
of Engineers Specification No. CRD-C 621-82B and ASTM C1107. Grout shall be
non -oxidizing.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Master Builders Co. Masterflow 713
b. Euclid Chemical Company: Euco NS
2.06 EPDXY (FOR PATCHING)
A. Shall be a two -component polymer modified cementitious system equal to Sikatop
series as manufactured by Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, New Jersey or approved
equal. Sikatop product selected shall be appropriate for intended repair and shall be
approved by Architect.
2.07 ANCHORING CEMENT (FOR GROUTING ANCHOR BOLTS AND DOWELS)
A. "Super Por-Rok" Exterior Anchoring Cement by Minwax Construction Products
division of Minwax Corporation, or approved equal, distributed by Bacrac Supply,
(214) 638-2504, 3434 Easy Street, Dallas.
2.08 SAND -CEMENT GROUT
A. Shall be a mixture of one part Type I Portland Cement and 2 1/2 parts clean, natural
sand conforming to ASTM C33. Water content shall be 5-1/2 gallon per sack of
cement, maximum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
3.01 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
A. Concrete shall not be mixed for placing in the work until mix designs and
corresponding strength tests have been submitted and accepted by the architect.
B. Mixing: Transit -mixed concrete conforming to the requirements of ASTM C94
shall be used in lieu of concrete mixed at the job site. Concrete shall not be
transported or used in any case after a period in excess of 90 minutes has elapsed
after the introduction of water into the mixer. The transit -mixed concrete supplier
shall have a plant of sufficient capacity, and adequate transportation facilities, to
assure continuous delivery at the rate required. The frequency of deliveries to the
site of the work must be such as to provide for placing the concrete continuously
throughout any one pour.
C. When approved by the laboratory inspector, water may be added to the truck at the
jobsite to adjust the slump, but the water content shall not exceed the maximum
specified water/cement ratio for the mix.
3.02 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Preparation:
1. Equipment for chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete shall
be of such size and design as to assure a practically continuous flow of
concrete at the delivery end without separation of the materials, and all of the
details thereof shall be submitted to the Architect for approval in advance of
the use of such equipment. The use of aluminum chutes or conveyors for
transporting concrete horizontally will not be permitted.
2. Inserts: Give the various trades and subcontractors ample notification and
opportunity to install anchors, nailers, pipes, conduits, boxes, inserts,
thimbles, sleeves, frames, vents, wires, supports, or other items required to be
built into the concrete by the provisions of the Drawings or of the
Specifications governing the work of such trades and subcontractors, or as
may be necessary for the proper execution of their work.
3. Contractor shall provide access for delivery and provide sufficient equipment
and manpower to rapidly place all concrete.
a. All work shall be in accordance with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice
for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete."
b. Formwork shall have been completed; snow, ice, water and debris
removed from within forms.
C. Expansion joint material, anchors and all embedded items shall have
been positioned.
d. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground or metal deck.
4. Anchor Bolts: Use templates to set anchor bolts and secure into position
before placing the concrete. Do not stab anchor bolts into the concrete.
5. Pump priming grout shall be discarded and not used in the structure.
B. Conveying Concrete:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
1. Convey concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods
which will prevent the separation or loss of the ingredients. Concrete to be
conveyed by pumping will require acceptance by the Engineer for each class
of concrete specified before being used.
C. Depositing Concrete:
1. General: Place concrete in reasonably uniform layers, approximately
horizontal, and not more than twelve inches (12") deep, exercising care to
avoid vertical joints or inclined planes. The piling up of concrete in the forms,
in such manner as to cause the separation or loss of any of its ingredients, will
not be permitted. Concrete which has partially set or hardened shall not, under
any circumstances be deposited in the work. Place concrete in the forms as
nearly in its final position as is practical to avoid re -handling.
a. Exercise special care to prevent splashing the forms or reinforcement
with concrete. Remove any hardened or partially hardened concrete
which has accumulated on the forms or reinforcement before the work
proceeds.
b. Do not place concrete on previously deposited concrete which has
hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of
weakness within the respective member or section, except as hereinafter
specified.
C. Do not permit concrete to drop freely any distance greater than three feet
(3'). Where longer drops are necessary, use a chute or tremie to assist
the concrete into place without separation.
d. Do not place concrete into any excavations where water is standing.
2. Slump: Concrete shall not be placed when its plasticity, as measured by
slump tests, is outside the limits indicated in these specifications.
3. Vibration: As soon as concrete is deposited, vibrate concrete by means of
mechanical vibrators, so manipulated as to work the mixture into all parts and
corners of the forms, and around the reinforcement and inserts. Mechanical
vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 6000 impulses per minute and
shall be operated by competent workmen. Over vibrating and use of vibrators
to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible
effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of
vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing
segregation of the mix. A spare vibrator shall be kept on the job site during all
concrete placing operations.
4. Bonding: Before depositing any new concrete on or against previously
deposited concrete which has partially or entirely set, the surfaces of the latter
shall be thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all foreign matter, scum, etc..
The forms shall be tightened and the surface of the previously deposited
concrete shall be slushed with grout, of materials and mix identical to those of
the concrete to be placed, except the coarse aggregate shall be omitted. From
one inch (1") to two inches (2") of grout shall be applied, as directed by the
Architects, depending upon conditions of the respective case. The new
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
concrete shall be deposited before the grout attains its initial set, and the work
r shall be performed in such a manner as to assure complete bonding of the
newly poured concrete to that previously placed.
5. Construction Joints: Except as otherwise specifically indicated on the
Drawings, each pier, beam, and slab shall be considered as a single unit, and
all concrete shall be placed continuously in order that such unit will be
monolithic in construction. Should construction joints prove to be absolutely
unavoidable, they shall be located at or near the midpoints of spans. Joints
shall be prepared and primed per the manufacturer's recommendation.
Additional construction joints shall not be made under any circumstances
without the written approval of the Architects.
6. Slabs:
a. Pour the slabs with proper offsets, slopes to drains, etc., as shown or
noted, and finish as specified in Article 3.05.
b. Grade and properly recompact the surface of the subgrade under all
concrete slabs shown to be placed on fill. All work required to be
installed under the slabs on fill shall be completed and approved before
any concrete is poured.
D. Weather Conditions:
1. Cold Weather: Temperature of concrete delivered at the job -site shall
conform to the following minimum:
Air Temperature Concrete Temperature
30' to 45' F. 55' F. to 90' F.
0° to 30' F. 600 F. to 900 F.
Below 0° F. 650 F. to 900 F.
a. Water heated to above 100' F. shall be combined with the aggregates
before cement is added. Cement shall not be added to water or
aggregates having a temperature greater than 100' F.
b. All work shall be in accordance with ACI 306, "Recommended Practice
for Cold Weather Concreting."
C. When the outdoor temperature is less than 400 F. temperature of the
concrete shall be maintained at not less than 50' F. for the required
curing time.
d. Arrangements shall be made before placement to maintain required
temperature without injury from excessive heat.
e. Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 48 hours without
precautions to prevent exposure of concrete and workmen to exhaust
gases containing carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide.
2. Hot Weather; Temperature of concrete delivered at the job -site shall not
exceed 90' F. Ingredients shall be cooled before mixing to prevent concrete
temperature in excess of 90' F.
a. All work shall be in accordance with ACI 305, "Recommended Practice
for Hot Weather Concreting."
b. Provisions shall be made for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying,
sprinkling or wet cover when necessary.
C. Use the specified evaporation retarder to prevent rapid drying of the
surface during finishing.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-11
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
3.03 INSTALLATION OF NON -SHRINK GROUT (UNDER BASE PLATES)
A. Preparatory Work: Clean slab or foundation with liberal amounts of water.
Remove all oil, grease and paint from areas of base plates or foundations to be
grouted. Remove all waste materials, dirt, chips, oil and excess water from anchor
bolts, slabs or foundations. Have all necessary tools and materials as near area to be
grouted as possible to permit rapid and continuous work with grout. Anchor all
forms securely to prevent movement during placing or curing if grout is to be used
in flowable state.
B. Mixing: A mechanical mixer should be used. Add only enough water to make
placeable. Avoid an excess of water. Do not mix more grout than can be placed
within 20 minutes. Under no circumstances should grout be retempered.
C. Grout Temperatures: Grout temperatures should be maintained at 45' - 75' F.
When conditions dictate, these temperatures can be achieved by the use of cool
mixing water or heated mixing water. Care should be exercised so that extremes of
hot or cold are not used. Maintain temperature for 24 hours. Thereafter, maintain
temperature above 40' F (4° C) until grout has achieved a 5000 psi strength.
D. Placing: As grouting procedure begins, placement and compaction should be
continuous until completed. Lengths of chain (up to 1" link) placed in forms before
placing grout will assist in compacting the grout and eliminating air pockets.
Chains or straps should be worked in quick, short strokes and removed before initial
set occurs. Grout should be placed from one end or side only to avoid excessive air
entrapment and assure good compaction. Do not overwork grout as this causes
segregation, bleeding and breakdown of initial set. If machines or equipment are
being used nearby, consider shutting them down until grout takes final set. Grout
may be fluid.
3.04 FINISHING CONCRETE SLAB SURFACES
A. General: Concrete slabs shall be finished as hereinafter described. The dusting of
wearing surfaces with dry materials will NOT be permitted.
B. Highway straightedges are recommended for use in lieu of bullfloats for all slab
placement and finishing operations.
C. Screeding: slab shall be struck off true by double screeding to the required level at
or below the elevation or grade of the finished slabs as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Floating: Immediately after screeding, before any excess bleed water is present on
the surface, float the surface using long -handled bull floats or darbies.
E. Float Finish:
1. Locations: All concrete surfaces under mud -set tile or pavers.
2. Finishing: After concrete has stiffened sufficiently and bleed water has
evaporated, the surface shall be wood floated to produce a uniform texture
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-12
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
with no coarse aggregate visible. Apply sufficient pressure to bring the
r moisture to the surface.
F. Trowel Finish:
1. Locations: All concrete surfaces under:
a. Thin set tile
b. Carpets
C. Vinyl floor tile
d. Exposed concrete
e. Typical unless noted otherwise
2. Trowelling: Steel trowel not less than two passes. Begin troweling with
power trowel as soon as little or no cement sticks to the blades. Dusting with
dry cement or aggregate to stiffen mix or absorb moisture is not allowed. The
concrete shall then be hand troweled or machine troweled to produce a smooth
impervious surface for the purpose of burnishing.
G. Broom Finish:
1. Locations: Exterior stairs, ramps, walks and other locations where noted on
the drawings.
2. Finishing: Same method as specified for trowel finish, except after initial
troweling brush concrete surfaces with a soft brush or broom to texture as
specified by the architect.
H. Power Machine Finishing: In place of hand finishing, the Contractor may use a
power machine approved by the Architect for finishing the concrete surfaces for
finishing the concrete surfaces. However, the preparation of concrete surfaces for
finishing by machine shall be, in general, as hereinbefore required for hand
finishing.
I. Non -slip Finish: Apply abrasive aggregate at the rate of 25 lbs. per 100 SF per
manufacturer's instructions in areas specified.
3.05 FINISHING EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES (OTHER THAN SLABS)
A. General: It is the intent of these Specifications to provide for exposed concrete
surfaces of such quality as to require a minimum of pointing. Such care shall be
exercised in the forming, mixing and place of the concrete as to assure reasonable
uniform dense surfaces, free from blemishes or defects. However, in the event of
unsightly voids, honeycombs, etc., they shall be repaired as soon as possible. Loose
particles shall be removed from honeycombed spots, and fins and other projections
shall be neatly dressed off. Holes shall be drenched with clean water and properly
patched with Portland Cement and sand mortar. Large surface swirls or heavily
textured surfaces are not acceptable.
B. Exposed Vertical Surfaces: Following removal of forms, fill bolt and tie rod holes
with concrete made with same mix as poured concrete, except large aggregate shall
be removed. Fill holes passing through concrete members from inside face. Stone
rub to unifornl sand finish.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-13
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
C. Patching and Repairs: Remove honeycomb voids, cracks, and irregularities. Where
repair is required, cut back defects not less than 1/2" with square edges, brush out,
drench with water and fill with concrete of same mix from which coarse aggregate
is removed. When cut-outs have been filled, trowel surface smooth, remove excess
grout and after set, grind slightly to uniform color and appearance using neat
Portland Cement applied with a power grinder wheel.
3.06 FILLING TIE ROD AND BOLT HOLES
A. Holes resulting from the removal of bolts or tie rods shall be solidly filled with
cement grout. All excess mortar at the faces of filled holes shall be struck off flush,
with a canvas sack.
3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all freshly placed concrete from washing by rain, flowing water, etc. Do not
allow concrete to dry out from the time it is deposited in the forms until the
expiration of the curing period hereinafter specified. The methods of curing shall be
as specified in the following paragraphs, unless otherwise authorized by the
Architects.
B. Concrete surfaces, not otherwise specified, shall be cured by being kept wet with
clean water for a period of not less than seven (7) days after placing. Each day the
forms are left in place, and kept wet enough to prevent the opening of joints in the
forms and the drying out of the concrete, will be counted as one (1) day of curing.
C. In lieu of the wetting specified above, the Contractor may, , use a non -bituminous
liquid sealing and curing compound to seal the moisture in the concrete. Such
material shall not, however, be applied to surfaces which are to receive further
concrete, mortar, resilient tile or liquid vinyl coating. Curing liquid, if used, shall be
applied in conformity with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material
approved for use, and to sufficient extent to effectively hold the moisture in the
concrete. The use of such material shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility of protecting all floor slabs, platforms, and steps whenever any
scaffolding, shoring, form work, masonry, concrete or other work is being done
over or above finished concrete slabs.
D. Permanently exposed concrete floors shall be cured by covering the entire surface,
as soon as practical after finishing, with waterproof paper, laid with four -inch (4")
lapped joints. The joints shall be covered with gummed tape or be glued with
waterproof glue. Such covering shall remain in place until completion of the
building, except on surfaces where ceramic tile is to be applied, in which cases the
covering shall be removed after a period of seven (7) days has elapsed after the
placing and finishing of the concrete. Tears in paper shall be repaired.
E. Imperfect or damaged work, or any material damaged or determined to be defective
before final completion and acceptance of the entire job, shall be satisfactorily
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-14
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
replaced at the Contractor's expense, and in conformity with all of the requirements
of the Drawings and Specifications. Removal and replacement of concrete work
shall be done in such manner as not to impair the appearance or strength of the
structure in any way.
F. Cleaning: Upon completion of the work, all forms, equipment, protective coverings
and any rubbish resulting therefrom shall be removed from the premises. Finished
concrete surfaces shall be left in a clean condition, satisfactory to the Owner. After
sweeping with an ordinary broom and removing all mortar, concrete droppings,
loose dirt, mud, etc., wash all concrete floors and platforms with soapsuds and scrub
with a stiff fiber brush. Mop up the suds and flush the surfaces with clean water.
Provide adequate measures during scrubbing, mopping, and flushing operations to
keep excessive or injurious amounts of water off resilient tile floors. Any damage
to such floors shall be promptly, effectively and satisfactorily repaired.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF SEALER
A. Apply liquid sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions on all floor
surfaces to remain exposed but that will not receive architectural finishes. Apply
hardener at the rate of one gallon per 300 square feet of floor area. Do not apply
sealer on surfaces where curing compound has been used. Sealer shall not be
applied until concrete has been cured for 28 days.
END OF SECTION 03300
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03300-15
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 03368 — SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Special
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Applying Sealer and Hardener, and polishing concrete to specified finish level.
B. Related sections include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete".
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM — C779 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal
Concrete Surfaces
2. ASTM — G23-81, Ultraviolet Light & Water Spray
3. ASTM — C805, Impact Strength
B. American Concrete Institute
1. ACI 302, 1R-89, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
C. Products shall comply with the United States Clean Air Act for maximum Volatile
Organic Compound (VOC) content.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01330, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Product data
1. Submit special concrete finishes manufacture's specifications and test data.
2. Submit special concrete finishes product data describing product to be
provided, giving manufacture's names and product name for the specified
material proposed to be provided under this section including sealers, stains
and grout.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03368-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
3. Submit special concrete finishes manufacture's recommended installation
procedures; which when approved by the Architect will become the basis for
accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work.
4. Submit special concrete finishes technical data sheet giving descriptive data,
curing time and application requirements.
5. Submit special concrete finishes manufacture's Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) and other safety requirements.
6. Follow all special concrete finishes published manufacture's installation
instructions.
C. Test Reports:
1. Provide certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory,
confirming compliance with specified performance criteria.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications
1. Use an experienced installer and adequate number of skilled workman who
are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary craft and who can
provide written evidence and references of such prior direct experience in
installations of a similar scope and nature as this project.
2. The special concrete finish manufacturer shall certify applicator.
3. Applicator shall be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods
needed for proper performance of work of this section.
B. Manufacture's Certification:
1. Provide letter of certification from concrete finish manufacture stating that
installer is certified applicator of special concrete finishes, and is familiar with
proper procedures and installation requirements by the manufacturer.
C. Success Factors
1. No satisfactory chemical or cleaning procedure is available to remove
petroleum stains form the concrete surface. Protection is therefore essential.
a. a. All hydraulic powered equipment must be diapered to avoid
staining of the concrete.
b. No trade will park vehicles on the inside slab. If necessary to complete
their scope -of -work, drop clothes will be placed under vehicles at all
times.
C. No pipe cutting machine will be used on the inside floor slab.
d. To avoid rust staining, steel will not be placed directly on the inside
floor slab.
e. Provide covers and protections as approved by manufacturer as required
to protect flooring from operations of other trades.
2. Concrete must have a minimum Floor Flatness rating of 50.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03368-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR H IISHES
3. Disclosure of any type of cure agent, sealer, bond breaker, admixture,
accelerator or other chemical mixture that is added to or applied to the
concrete is essential.
4. Moisture vapor emission and any related chemical transmission and/or change
must be controlled by the concrete design and placement process.
5. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the
manufacturer before the application of the Retro Plate System.
6. Retro plate requires 45 days to fully cure. Stain prevention during the cure
period is essential.
7. Pre -Installation Conference:
a. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination," including
Owner's Representative, Project Manager, Architect, General
Contractor, Installer, Manufacturer's Representatives for sealing and
stain products, and other trades affected by the work.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer
labels indicating brand name and directions for storage.
B. Dispense special concrete finish material from factory numbered and sealed
containers. Maintain record of container numbers
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIIONS
A. Environmental limitations:
1. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and
moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other
conditions affecting topping performance.
a. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the
manufacturer before application of Retro Plate can begin.
b. Application of Retro Plate shall take place 10 days prior to installation of
equipment and substantial completion, thus providing a complete,
uninhibited concrete slab for application.
B. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03368-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, MANUFACTURERS AND AUTORIZED APPLICATORS
A. HARDENING/SEALING AGENT
1. Retro Plate 99', manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc., P.O. box
50533, Provo, Utah 84605, 801 812-3420.
a. Performance Criteria.
1) Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779-Up to 400% increase in
abrasion resistance.
2) Impact Strength ASTM C805-Up to 21% increase impact strength.
3) Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81 — No adverse
effect to ultra violet and water spray.
4) Reflectivity: Up to 30% increase in reflectivity.
2. Certified Applicators.
3. Manufactures Regional Representative.
B. AUTHORIZED APPLICATOR
1. CONTACT: MARBLELIFE
7700 Renwick, Suite A-4
Houston, Texas 77081
Office: 713 528-7787
Fax: 713 524-6446
Marb1e1ifehoutx(&ao1.com
2.02 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Grout: Stainless colorfast epoxy. ASNI Al 18.3, TCE Service rating: extra heavy in
multiple custom colors and as indicated. Acceptable products include LATAPDXY
SP-100 Stainless epoxy Grout (Series 700); LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL INC.
B. Neutralizing Agent:
1. Tri-sodium Phosphate
C. Water:
1. Potable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITION:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03368-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
A. Examine substrate with installer present for conditions affecting performance of
finish. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Verify that base slab meets finish and surface profile requirements in Division 3
Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete," and Project Conditions above.
C. Prior to application, verify that floor surfaces are free of construction latents.
D. Liquid solvent -based curing materials shall not be used for curing structural slab.
E. Inspect floor prior to cleaning for spot problems and repair areas. Provide special
measures to remove paint, oil, wax, grease and other foreign stains and materials.
Use hand mechanical techniques if needed. Floor patching shall only be done with
materials approved by the stain flooring installer. Review repair and spot cleaning
methods with architect before proceeding.
F. Saw -cuts for grout joints shall be made with new diamond blades to minimize
chipping and spalling.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Start any of the floor finish applications in presence of manufacturer's technical
representative.
B. Sealing, Hardening and Polishing of Concrete Surface
1. Concrete must be in place a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the
manufacturer before application can begin.
2. Application is to take place at least 10 days prior to racking and other in-store
accessory installation, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for
application.
3. Only a certified applicator shall apply Retro-Plate 99. Applicable procedures
must be followed as recommended by the product manufacturer and as
required to match approved test sample.
4. Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust -proofing, and abrasion resistance of
the surface without changing the natural appearance of the concrete, except for
the sheen.
5. Polish to required sheen level 1 (matte finish).
3.03 OVERVIEW PROCESS STEPS:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03368-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
A. Steps
1. Chemically or mechanically strip and neutralize any existing sealer or finish.
2. Repair any surface cracks or holes.
3. Course -hone the floor surface.
4. Fine -hone the floor surface.
5. Apply chemical reactive concrete stabilizer to density, harden and
permanently seal the floor surface.
6. Agitate, keep wet and allow to dwell per manufacture specifications.
7. Remove excess per manufacturer specification.
B. Continuation of Process:
1. Apply a spiff coat of the chemical reactive concrete stabilizer to the floor
surface at rate of approximately 1000 square feet per gallon.
2. Protect the floor surface from all types of traffic; dust and contamination.
1
3. Allow the spiff coat to dry for a minimum period of 12-24 hours.
4. Polish the floor surface to the level of shine consistent with mock-up.
5. Test and record slip coefficient of friction (slip resistance).
6. Test and record gloss level.
7. Moisture repellant test after floor surface has had time to dry but not to exceed
45-day complete cure time for chemical reactive concrete stabilizer.
3.04 WORKMANSHIP AND CLEANING:
A. This premises shall be kept clean and free of debris at all times.
B. Remove spatter from adjoing surfaces, as necessary.
C. Repair damages to surface caused by cleaning operations.
D. Remove debris from job site.
1. Dispose of materials in separate, closed containers in accordance with local
regulations.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished work until fully cured in accordance with - manufactures
recommendations.
END OF SECTION 03368
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 03368-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
SECTION 04210 - BRICK MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide unit masonry construction including brick and concrete masonry as
shown on the Drawings and as herein specified:
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
4. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Masonry construction to meet requirements of Building Code Requirements for
Engineering Brick Masonry, Brick Institute of America, latest edition.
B. Flashing to meet requirements of SMACNA.
C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Store mortar materials on dunnage in a dry place. Masonry units stores above
ground on level platforms. Cover and protect units and accessories as necessary
from elements.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Masonry work shall not be placed when there is any possibility of the water freezing
before it has attained its initial set. In weather below freezing, all masonry units and
mortar shall be heated. Walls which have frozen after making their initial set shall
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04210-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
not be built upon until they have had sufficient time to make a proper set at
temperatures above freezing.
B. All newly placed masonry shall be protected against damage from action of the
elements and under no condition shall rain be allowed to fall on, drive against or
flow down masonry surfaces until mortar has set a minimum of 12 hours. Tops of
all walls shall be covered with a waterproof material at the end of each day.
C. During warm, dry weather, masonry shall be protected from drying too rapidly.
Masonry surfaces shall be kept moist with water gently spraying the surface,
covering work with burlap which is kept wet, or by other approved means. Such
protection shall be continued until mortar has set for three days or until lowering
temperatures or increased humidity in the air make such protection unnecessary.
1.06 SUBMITTALS & MOCK-UP PANEL
A. Division 1 - "Submittal Procedures".
B. Submit sample board of each brick color and/or type, and mortar batch showing full
range of color.
C. Submit product literature on mortar color and waterproofing admixtures.
D. Construct 6'-0" x 6-0" mock-up panel of typical masonry wall at window,
incorporating face brick, rowlock brick, window, and CMU in manner as used on
proj ect.
E. Provide range of 32 mortar colors for selection of one color by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Face Brick: "Modular -Size" as manufactured by Endicott Brick. Provide 3/8"
tooled concave -joints. No cores visible in completed work, provide solids. Colors
shall be as follows:
l . Field Color: Endicott Brick, color Coppertone, modular velour texture.
2. Accent Color: Endicott Brick, color Golden Buff, modular velour texture.
B. Brick Pavers: Handicap detectable warning pavers size(2 '/4" x 7 5/8" x 3 5/8"), as
manufactured by Endicott. Color to be selected by architect from manufactuer's
standard colors.
C. Through -wall, door and window sill and head flashings: 3 oz. Cop-r-Tex Duplex by
York, or approved equal as recommended by manufacturer.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04210-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
D. Masonry Wall Tab Anchors at concrete block: A 4" rectangular hot -dip galvanized
adjustable ladder tab for cavity installation equal to Wire Bond Series 600.
E. Adjustable Veneer Anchors at metal stud backup: Hot dip galvanized wire anchors
at 16" vertically, 16" horizontally equal to Wire Bond No. 1001, Type II secured
with stainless steel screws. Hot -dip galvanized triangular ties equal to Wire Bond
No. 1100 - 5" (typical) at brick areas more than 8" below finish floor. Provide
galvanized dovetail slots and veneer anchors at 16" o.c.e.w.
F. Tie Straps: 22 Gauge hot dip galvanized steel corrugated masonry straps at 16"
vertically, 24" horizontally on substrate equal to Wire Bond No. 2400.
G. Cell Vent Weep Baffle: Extruded polypropylene copolymer weeps equal to
Durowall "Cell Vent" ED/A 1006.
H. Horizontal Reinforcing: Hot -dipped, galvanized wire reinforcement, truss type with
width as required to suit wall construction. Side rods (longitudinal) 3/16" wire
conforming to ASTM A82. Materials equivalent to Wire Bond Series 300, 3-Wire
Cavity System or as made by Block-Lok, Dur-O-Wall, or Ty -Wall.
I. Expansion Joint Filler: Closed cell foam similar to Redo foam by Electrovert.
J. Extruded Plastic Joint Filler; Elastic, abrasive and chemical resistant vinyl PVI in
shapes as indicated on drawings of all brick masonry control joints.
K. Control Joints: Regular Rapid Control Joint pre -formed gasket by Dur-O-Wal or
equal.
L. Soft/Expansion Joints: 1/4" at soft joints x 3/8" at expansion joints closed cell
Neoprene conforming to ASTM D2056 Class RE41.
M. CMU Anchors at Structure: Hot dip galvanized weld -on anchor equal to Wire bond
Type 1, No. 1000, and 7" x 9" x 3/16" triangular tie equal to Wire Bond No. 1100.
' N. Mortar Barrier: Rigid, high strength, woven plastic mesh mortar barrier as
manufactured by Mortar Maze or approved equal.
O. Cast Stone: White precast concrete as indicated on the drawings.
2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
B. Sand: ASTM C144, graduation as required by mortar additive manufacturer.
C. Water: Clean and free of deleterious materials.
D. Mortar Color: Inorganic or mineral pigments equal to SGS Mortar Colors.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04210-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
E. Water Repellent Admixture: Rheomix 235 by Master Builders Technologies.
F. Workability Additive (Face Brick only): "A" Marble Dust by Armco Steel Corp.,
90/200 Mineral Filler by Limestone Products.
G. Weather and Shock Resistant Admixture (Pavers only): Laticrete #4237 Latex thin
set mortar additive.
H. Grout Cleaner (Pavers only): Laticrete #TC-500 tile, grout, and masonry cleaner.
I. Lime: Hydrated lime to comply with ASTM C207 for Type "S".
2.03 PORTLAND CEMENT AND LIME MORTAR MIX
A. White Portland Cement and Lime Mortar Mix for Brick: ASTM C270, Type S.
Incorporate water repellent admixture in mortar for exterior walls. Incorporate
color pigment in mortar and workability additive for brick masonry.
B. Mortar shall have a flow after suction (water retention) of at least 75% of that
immediately after mixing. Add water to hydrated lime at least 24 hours before
mixing with other ingredients.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect foundations to assure surfaces to support masonry are to proper grades and
elevations, free of dirt or uneven surfaces. Defective surfaces properly repaired
prior to installation. Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate.
3.02 BRICK WORK
A. All exposed brickwork joints shall be concave except as otherwise noted. Joints of
brickwork spaced 3 brick courses to 8 inches. Face brick laid up in running bond
unless otherwise noted. Stop off horizontal run by racking back in each course,
toothing not permitted. All work shall be level and plumb with true vertical bond
and fully bedded joints and cross joints. Joints shall be of uniform thickness.
B. Adjust shelf angles to keep work level and at proper elevation. Provide pressure
relieving joints by placing a continuous 1/8" foam neoprene pad under shelf.
C. Brick Pavers (thin bed installation): the latex additive mortar shall be applied with a
notched trowel using a scraping motion to work the material into good contact with
the surface to be covered. A trowel having notches approximately '/4" x 3/8" is
recommended for pavers. Only as much mortar shall be applied as can be covered
within 20-30 minutes, or while surface is still tacky. When installing pavers, a
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04210-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
small quantity of the mortar shall be toweled onto the back of each piece. Pavers
shall then be set in place and rapped or beaten with a small beating block to insure
100% full bedding and a true surface. Pavers shall be aligned to show uniform
joints and then allowed to set until firm. Excess mortar shall be cleared from the
surface of the pavers with a wet cloth or sponge while the mortar is fresh.
D. Prior to beginning brick work, provide and install continuous temporary closed cell
foam backer rod horizontally in the masonry wall cavity, flush with the top of the
precast concrete panels, to prevent mortar from dropping onto the through -wall
flashing. Lay up brick on precast concrete or where brick is laid directly over
through -wall flashing by omitting every cavity through the openings as the brick
wall is being constructed. Do not allow mortar to completely harden in cavity prior
to brushing. After wall is complete and all mortar removed from the cavity, remove
the backer rod through the openings above the precast panels, install louver weeps
at 30" o.c. above the through -wall flashing and mortar in the brick in the openings
to complete the masonry wall.
3.03 FACE BRICK MASONRY
A. Install grout in cavity below thru-wall flashing.
B. Cavity to be maintained free of excess mortar. Mortar shall not bridge air space in
cavity.
3.04 REINFORCED MASONRY
A. Furnish and install steel reinforcement, maintaining minimum required clear
distances.
B. Install grout in cavity below thru-wall flashing.
C. Where detailed, install grout fully around steel reinforcement. Grouting done in
lifts of 24" (for spaces less than 2" wide) and 48" (more than 2" wide). Agitate and
puddle grout during and after placement. Exercise care to prevent grout from
staining face of masonry. Immediately remove grout spillage on face and top of
masonry.
3.05 BRICK VENEER BACKUP
A. Brick veneer secured to stud backup by the use of specified wall ties spaces 16"
vertically and 16" horizontally. Wall ties secured to studs through sheathing.
3.06 FLASHINGS AND WEEP HOLES
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04210-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
A. Through -wall flashing provided and worked by this subcontractor, all flashings
} installed in accordance with herein specified requirements and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations so that all flashing work properly drains water to
the outside.
B. Provide smooth mortar beds, slightly pitched to the outside face of the wall at all
points where flashings are to be installed over horizontal surfaces.
i
C. Flashing shall extend beyond outside face of wall as detailed on drawings. Do not
trim fleshings until Architect has observed installation.
D. Flashing over door and window heads, carried 10" minimum beyond both sides of
opening.
E. Heads and sill flashings shall not have joints and have sides turned up to form a
pan. All corners folded, not cut.
F. Flashing to be installed with top edge extending behind sheathing as detailed on
drawings. 1
G. Joints in thru-wall flashings shall be lapped 4" minimum with laps embedded in
sealant.
H. Install cell vent weeps in vertical joint of first course above flashings at 24" o.c.
3.07 CONTROL & SOFT JOINTS
A. Make adequate provisions throughout the masonry work for expansion and
contraction. Install preformed control joint gasket, extending from top of bearing
surface to top of wall, reinforcing shall not run through.
B. Install soft joint material at top of brick masonry.
3.08 SEALED JOINTS
A. Outside joints at the perimeter of exterior door and window frames shall not be less
than 1/4" nor more than 3/8" wide and shall be cleaned out to a uniform depth of at
least 3/4" for sealant, provided under Section 07900.
3.09 BUILT-IN WORK ,
A. Contractor shall carefully examine architectural and mechanical drawings providing
all slots, chases, recesses in masonry work as required. No pipes shall be enclosed
unless tested.
3.10 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04210-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
A. Maximum variation from plumb:
1. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and rises: 1/4" in 10 feet; 3/8" in 20
feet; 1 /2" in 40 feet.
2. External corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: 1/4" in 20 feet;
3/8" in 40 feet.
B. Maximum variation from level:
1. Exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous
lines: 1/4" in 20 feet; 3/4" in 40 feet.
3.11 POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Finish work shall be carefully examined and any holes or defective mortar joints
shall be repointed. Dry brush surfaces after mortar has set at end of each day's work
and after final pointing. All exposed finished surfaces of masonry work shall be
cleaned down with a non -staining or discoloring chemical cleaner and stiff fiber
brushes.
B. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned of any soil, efflorescence, excess mortar, etc. If
wet cleaning is used, allow adequate time for drying to allow for uniform
penetration. All cracks shall be pointed or caulked. All voids in masonry joints
shall be filled. Neutralize acid washed surfaces. Moisture content of surface shall
not exceed 15% in order to apply sealer. Allow new surfaces to age four weeks
prior to application off protective coating.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory
to perform the inspection and testing services specified in this section.
B. Provide a qualified inspector to inspect all structural masonry work on a periodic
basis. Inspect the work in progress at least once for every 5,000 square feet of wall
laid, but not less than once per day.
C. Inspect the following:
1.Preparation of masonry prisms for testing.
2.Placement of reinforcing.
3.Cavities to be grouted.
4.Mortar mixing operation.
5.Grouting operation.
6.Condition of units before laying for excessive absorption.
D. Compressive Test for Mortar:
1.Secure composite samples of mortar at the job site in accordance with ASTM
C780.
2.Mold and cure three cube specimens in accordance with ASTM C 109 and C780.
Supervise the curing protection provided by the contractor for test specimens
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04210-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
in the field and the transportation from the field to the laboratory. The
y specimens shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then be moved to the
laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C780.
3.Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C780. Two specimens shall be tested at
28 days for acceptance and one shall be tested at seven days for information.
4.Make one strength test (three cubes) for each 5,000 square feet of wall area.
E. Test for Grout:
1.Secure composite samples of grout at the job site in accordance with ASTM
C172.
2.Mold and cure three, 3" diameter by 6" tall cylinders form each sample in
accordance with ASTM C31. Supervise the curing protection provided by the
contractor for the test specimens in the field and transportation to the
laboratory. The test cylinders shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then
moved to the laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C31.
3.Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Two test specimens shall be
tested at 28 days for acceptance and one shall be tested at seven days for
information.
4.Make one strength test (three cylinders) for each five cubic yards of grout placed,
but not less than one strength test for each 5000 square feet of wall area.
F. Prism Tests:
1.Build prisms at the job site using the same materials and methods as being used
for the wall construction. Store prisms in a place where they will be
undisturbed for two days and have approximately the same curing conditions
as the masonry construction. After 48 hours, move prisms to the laboratory
and test in accordance with ASTM E447.
2.Bricks: Build brick prisms one brick width and length in plan and five bricks high,
using full bed joints as specified. Compute ultimate compressive strength by
dividing ultimate load by gross area of bricks.
G. The prisms shall be tested after 28 days, but may be tested at seven days provided
the relationship between seven and 28 day strengths has been established for the
materials used prior to the start of construction.
END OF SECTION 04210
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04210-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide concrete masonry unit construction as shown on the Drawings and as
herein specified:
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
2.
Division 3 Section "Concrete Reinforcement"
3.
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
4.
Division 7 Section "Dampproofing and Waterproofing."
5.
Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal."
6.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
7.
Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): ASTM Standards and test methods as
referenced herein and/or noted on the drawings. The latest adopted edition of all
standards referenced in this Section shall apply unless noted otherwise.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store mortar materials on dunnage in a dry place. Masonry units stores above ground
on level platforms. Cover and protect units and accessories as necessary from elements.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"
B. Perform masonry prism test for each type of mortar specified.
C. Submit shop drawings of bar reinforcement placement for review by the Engineer.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04220-1
OCTOBER 20., 2006 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
1.06 JOB MOCK-UP
A. Contractor shall lay up at site, one 6'x6' long sample block wall incorporating each type
of block.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Masonry work shall not be placed when there is any possibility of the water freezing
before it has attained its initial set. In weather below freezing, all masonry units and
mortar shall be heated. Walls which have frozen after making their initial set shall not
be built upon until they have had sufficient time to make a proper set at temperatures
above freezing.
B. All newly placed masonry shall be protected against damage from action of the elements
and under no condition shall rain be allowed to fall on, drive against or flow down
masonry surfaces until mortar has set a minimum of 12 hours. Tops of all walls shall be
covered with a waterproof material at the end of each day.
C. During warm, dry weather, masonry shall be protected from drying too rapidly.
Masonry surfaces shall be kept moist with water gently spraying the surface, covering
work with burlap which is kept wet, or by other approved means. Such protection shall
be continued until mortar has set for 3 days or until lowering temperatures or increased
humidity in the air make such protection unnecessary.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Block: Hollow load bearing block, nominal size detailed height x 16" x
detailed thickness, conforming to ASTM C90, Type N-I, normal light weight, Grades
standard aggregate and U.B.C. Standard 24-3, with a minimum compressive strength of
1900 psi. Units of same manufacturer throughout. Furnish sizes, shapes, and
miscellaneous items shown or required to complete work. Standard smooth face "grey"
concrete block exposed to exterior as veneer shall be sealed and shall have consistent,
unmottled appearance.
B. Thru-wall, door and opening sill head flashings: 3 oz. "Cop-R-Tex Duplex" by York,
or approved equal with compatible mastic as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Interior Masonry Reinforcement: Mill galvanized wire reinforcement, ladder -type with
width as required to suit cavity wall conditions. Side rods (longitudinal) 3/16", cross
rods 3/16" wire conforming to ASTM A82. Single wythe wall reinforcing.
D. Masonry Wall Reinforcement at 8" CMU: Hot -dipped, galvanized, adjustable ladder -
type with 9-gauge side and cross rods. Materials shall be Durowall # D/A 320 "Ladur"
or equivalent products made by Block-Lok, Wire Bond Series 200, or Ty -Wall Products.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04220-2
OCTOBER 20., 2006 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Deformed bar reinforcement shall conform to requirements of Section "Concrete
Reinforcement."
E. Anchors and Bolts: ASTM A307 fasteners in sizes and configurations indicated,
galvanized.
F. Adjustable Veneer Anchors: Hot -dip galvanized wire anchors at 16 inches vertically
and 16 inches horizontally at studs equal to Wire Bond No. 1001, Type H, secured with
steel screws. Triangular ties equal to Wire Bond No. 1100-3, typical.
G. Expansion Joint Backer Rod: Closed cell foam similar to Rodofoam by Electrovert, or
Denver Foam.
H. Granular Insulating Fill: Equal to Zonolite by W. R. Grace.
I. Control Joints: Regular "Rapid Control Joint" pre -formed rubber gasket by Dur-O-Wal
or equal.
J. Weep Baffle: Extruded polypropylene copolymer weeps equal to Durowall "Cell Vent"
Model ED/A 1006.
2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
B. Sand: ASTM C144, graduation as required by mortar additive manufacturer.
C. Lime: Quick lime to comply with ASTM C5 or hydrated lime to comply with ASTM
C207 for Type "S".
D. Water: Clean and free of deleterious materials.
E. Water Repellent Admixture: Rheomix 235 by Master Builders or approved equal.
F. Workability Additive: "A" Marble Dust by Armco Steel Corp., 90/200 Mineral Filler
by Limestone Products.
G. Mortar Color Additive: Light Buff color equal to Solomon Grid -Chem Services Inc.
2.03 MORTAR MIX
A. Mortar mix for masonry units: ASTM C270, Type S with minimum compressive
strength of 1800 psi at 28 days. Incorporate water repellent admixture in mortar for
exterior walls as per manufacturer's instructions. Masonry cement is not acceptable.
B. Mortar shall have a flow after suction (water retention) of at least 75% of that
immediately after mixing. Add water to hydrated lime at least 24 hours before mixing
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04220-3
OCTOBER 20., 2006 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
with other ingredients. Mortar and grout used within 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing with
no mortar used once it has begun to set.
2.04 GROUT MIX
A. Grout Mix for reinforced masonry: ASTM C476 with minimum compressive strength
of 3000 psi at 28 days. Provide coarse aggregate conforming to ASTM C404 (max.
size 3/8") for coarse grout mix. Grout shall have slump of 10-1/2 to 11 inches at the
time of placement.
2.05 FORMWORK AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Design and engineering of formwork and scaffolding as well as its construction shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor. Adequately shore all block soffits, beams, girders
and similar members to safely support all loads and lateral pressures liable to come on
the construction. Provide clean -out openings at each vertical bar at bottom course or in
foundation wall when wall is erected in more than 5 foot lifts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect foundations to assure surfaces to support masonry are to proper grades and
elevations, free of dirt or uneven surfaces. Defective surfaces properly repaired prior to
installation. Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate.
3.02 REINFORCED MASONRY
A. Furnish and install steel reinforcement, maintaining minimum required clear distances.
B. Where detailed, install grout fully around steel reinforcement. Grouting done in lifts of
24" (for spaces less than 2" wide) and 48" (more than 2" wide). Agitate and puddle
grout during and after placement. Exercise care to prevent grout from staining face of
masonry. Immediately remove grout spillage on face and top of masonry.
C. Minimum compressive prism strength of the masonry (fm) shall be 1500 psi when
tested at 28 days.
3.03 CONCRETE BLOCK AND MORTAR WORK
A. Concrete masonry units shall be set plumb and true in lines with regular bond and
properly jointed to other work with fully bedded joints and cross joints. Vertical joints
on exposed masonry units shall be concave tooled, mortar joints 3/8" thick unless
otherwise noted. Units set in running bond pattern, vertical joints staggered on center of
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04220-4
OCTOBER 20., 2006 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
block below. Where indicated, align vertical cells to be filled with grout to provide a
continuous unobstructed opening of dimensions. Provide mortar pointing of all scored
concrete masonry to match adjacent joints.
B. When a block must be reduced in size or is shown on the drawings to be of a smaller
size, use an approved masonry saw to cut the block and properly dress the roughened
edges. Chipped, cracked, broken or otherwise defective blocks will not be acceptable.
C. All interior non -bearing partitions shall be carried to within 1/4 inch of the deck leaving
a gap to be caulked, unless shown otherwise on drawings.
D. Use standard plain grey mortar at standard gray blocks.
3.04 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be installed in the cells of all exterior concrete masonry walls.
B. All holes and openings in the wall through which insulation can escape shall be
permanently sealed.
C. Insulation shall be poured directly into the block cells at maximum 3'-4" intervals. Wall
sections below openings shall be filled before sills are placed.
.3.05 REINFORCEMENT
A. All CMU veneer/CMU backup walls shall be reinforced horizontally with reinforcing
spaced 16" o.c. vertically, maximum. Lay reinforcing on wall and cover with mortar,
then bed unit as herein specified. At corners, reinforcing is to be provided in every
horizontal course, with inside rod cut and bent to form comer. Provide reinforcing one
course above and below all openings. Reinforcement placed as to assure a 5/8" mortar
cover measured from the outside face of the joint. Side rods shall be lapped at least 14"
at splices.
B. Intersecting and butting walls and partitions shall be bonded together by metal anchors
spaced 2' - 0" o.c. vertically. Interlocking of units not permitted.
3.06 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Make adequate provisions throughout the masonry work for expansion and contraction.
Install control joint filler as required, extending from top of bearing surface to top of
wall, reinforcing shall not run through. Control joints shall be watertight at exterior
joints.
3.07 FLASHINGS AND WEEP HOLES
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04220-5
OCTOBER 20., 2006 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Provide smooth mortar beds, slightly pitched to the outside face of the wall at all points
where flashings are to be installed over horizontal surfaces. Flashing shall start 3/8"
from outside face of wall, be carried through to inner face of masonry a minimum of 8".
Flashing over door and window heads, carried 6" beyond both ends of steel lintel. Both
head and sill flashings turned up at sides to form a pan, all corners folded, not cut.
Thru-wall flashings provided and set by this subcontractor, all flashings installed in
accordance with herein specified requirements and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations so that all flashings work properly, drains water to the outside.
B. Install cell vent weeps in vertical joint of first course immediately above all flashings,
weep spaces 24" O.C.
3.08 SEALANT JOINTS
A. Outside joints at the perimeter of exterior doors shall not be less than 1/4" nor more than
3/8" wide and shall be cleaned out to a uniform depth of at least 3/4" for sealant,
provided under Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers".
3.09 BUILT-IN WORK
A. Contractor shall carefully examine architectural and mechanical drawings providing all
slots, chases, recesses in masonry work as required. No pipes shall be enclosed unless
tested. Build -in all wood grounds, inserts, anchor bolts, iron frames, brackets or other
items furnished by others and cooperate with other contractors in placing of such items.
Consult other trades and make provisions for introduction of their work.
B. Where bolts are required for attaching steel plates, fill cores of units solid with grout.
Set bolts and inserts vertically in top of walls, pilasters, beams or columns 3" minimum
from any face in masonry 7 inches or more in thickness, and at center line of thinner
masonry sections. Hold all metal accessories to masonry by firmly embedding
anchorage into grout 3" minimum.
3.10 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from plumb:
1. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and rises: 1/4" in 10 feet; 3/8" in 20 feet;
1/2" in 40 feet.
2. External corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: 1/4" in 20 feet;
3/8" in 40 feet.
3. Wall thickness: Multiple wythes 1/4".
B. Maximum variation from level:
1. Exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines:
1/4" in 20 feet; 3/4" in 40 feet.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04220-6
OCTOBER 20., 2006 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
3.11, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Finish work shall be carefully examined and any holes or defective mortar joints shall
be repointed. Dry brush surfaces after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after
final pointing. All exposed finished surfaces of masonry work shall be cleaned down
with a non -staining or discoloring chemical cleaner and stiff fiber brushes.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to
perform the inspection and testing services specified in this section.
B. Provide a qualified inspector to inspect all structural masonry work on a periodic basis.
Inspect the work in progress at least once for every 5000 square feet of wall laid, but not
less than once per day.
C. Inspect the following:
1. Preparation of masonry prisms for testing.
2. Placement of reinforcing.
3. Cavities to be grouted.
4. Mortar mixing operation.
5. Grouting operation.
6. Condition of units before laying for excessive absorption.
D. Compressive Test for Mortar:
1. Secure composite samples of mortar at the job site in accordance with ASTM
C780.
2. Mold and cure three cube specimens in accordance with ASTM C 109 and C780.
Supervise the curing protection provided by the contractor for test specimens in
the field and the transportation from the field to the laboratory. The specimens
shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then be moved to the laboratory and cured
in accordance with ASTM C780.
3. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C780. Two specimens shall be tested
at 28 days for acceptance and one shall be tested at seven days for information.
4. Make one strength test (three cubes) for each 5000 square feet of wall area.
E. Test for Grout:
1. Secure composite samples of grout at the job site in accordance with ASTM
C172.
2. Mold and cure three, 3" diameter by 6" tall cylinders form each sample in
accordance with ASTM C31. Supervise the curing protection provided by the
contractor for the test specimens in the field and transportation to the laboratory.
The test cylinders shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then moved to the
laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C31.
3. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Two test specimens shall be
tested at 28 days for acceptance and one shall be tested at seven days for
information.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20., 2006
04220-7
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
4. Make one strength test (three cylinders) for each five cubic yards of grout placed,
but not less than one strength test for each 5000 square feet of wall area.
F. Prism Tests:
1. Build prisms at the job site using the same materials and methods as being used
for the wall construction. Store prisms in a place where they will be undisturbed
for two days and have approximately the same curing conditions as the masonry
construction. After 48 hours, move prisms to the laboratory and test in
accordance with ASTM E447.
2. Concrete Masonry Units: Build prisms of hollow masonry units the same width as
the unit by 16" long by 16" high. Apply mortar to the face shells only. Do not fill
hollow core with grout. Compute value of ultimate net compressive strength, by
dividing the ultimate load by the net face shell area of the masonry units.
3. Bricks: Build brick prisms one brick width and length in plan and five bricks
high, using full bed joints as specified. Compute ultimate compressive strength
by dividing ultimate load by gross area of bricks.
4. The prisms shall be tested after 28 days, but may be tested at seven days provided
the relationship between seven and 28 day strengths has been established for the
materials used prior to the start of construction.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide a qualified inspector to inspect all structural masonry work on a perodic basis.
Inspect the work in progress at least once for every 5000 square feet of wall laid, but not
less than once per day.
B. Inspect the following:
1.
Preparation of masonry prisms for testing.
2.
Placement of reinforcing.
3.
Cavities to be grouted.
4.
Mortar mixing operation.
5.
Grouting operation.
6.
Condition of units before laying for excessive absorption.
C. Compressive Test for Mortar:
1. Secure composite samples of mortar at the job site in accordance with ASTM
C780.
2. Mold and cure three cube specimens in accordance with ATMC C109 and C780.
Supervise the curing protection provided by the contractor for test specimens in
the field and the transportation from the field to the laboratory. The specimens
shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then be moved to the laboratory and cured
in accordance with ASTM C780.
3. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C780. Two specimens shall be tested at
28 days for acceptance and one shall be tested at seven days for information.
4. Make one strength test (three cubes) for each 5000 square feet of wall area.
D. Test for Grout:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04220-8
OCTOBER 20., 2006 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
I. Secure composite samples of grout at the job site in accordance with ASTM
C 172.
2. Mold and cure three, 3" diameter by 6" tall cylinders form each sample in
accordance with ASTM C31. Supervise the curing protection provided by the
contractor for the test specimens in the field and transportation to the laboratory.
The test cylinders shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then moved to the
laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C31.
3. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Two test specimens shall be
tested at 28 days for acceptance and one shall be tested at seven days for
information.
4. Make one strength test (three cylinders) for each five cubic yards of grout placed,
but not less than one strength test for each 5000 square feet of wall area.
E. Prism Tests:
1. Build prisms at the job site using the same materials and methods as being used
for the wall construction. Store prisms in a place where they will be undisturbed
for two days and have approximately the same curing conditions as the masonry
construction. After 48 hours, move prisms to the laboratory and test in accordance
with ASTM E447.
2. Concrete Masonry Units: Build prisms of hollow masonry units the same width as
the unit by 16" long by 16" high. Apply mortar to the face shells only. Do not fill
hollow core with grout. Compute value of ultimate net compressive strength, by
dividing the ultimate load by the net face shell area of the masonry units.
3. The prisms shall be tested after 28 days, but may be tested at seven days provided
the relationship between seven and 28 days strengths has been established for the
materials used prior to the start of construction.
END OF SECTION 04220
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04220-9
OCTOBER 20., 2006 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
SECTION 04720 — CAST STONE ORNAMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers all material, labor, accessories and appliances necessary for the
complete installation of ScupptStone cast stone ornaments as indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.
1.03 MANUFACTURER
A. All SculpStone cast stone ornaments used in this work shall be manufactured by
Pineapple Grove Designs, Palm Beach County, FL 33425, (800) 771-4595, and
shall meet the specifications as indicated in the manufacturer's Tech Data sheets.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 1, "Submittal Procedures".
Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, locations, connections and installation
details.
B. Custom Work: Furnish dimensioned camera-ready line art of proposed custom
designs to manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation
instructions.
D. Samples: Submit samples of SculptStone material to architect for approval of color,
shade, finish and material.
1.05 ORDERING
A. All SculptStone cast stone ornaments used in this work will be manufactured
specifically for this project. Material order shall be placed with Pineapple Grove
Designs immediately to prevent delays.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04720-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST STONE ORNAMENTS
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPOSITION
A. All SculptStone cast stone ornaments shall be a matrix of proprietary ingredients
including cement, crushed and graded stone, virgin polypropylene fiber, iron oxide
pigment, and admixtures necessary to achieve required physical properties.
Ingredients include:
1. Cement: Portland Type I White meeting ASTM C150.
2. Aggregate: Graded and washed natural sands and crushed graded stone
meeting ASTM C33, except that gradation may vary to achieve desired finish
and texture.
3. Fiber: Virgin homopolymer polypropylene non -fibrillated fibers.
4. Coloring: Inorganic synthetic iron oxide pigments meeting ASTM C979
dispersed integrally throughout the mix.
5. Admixtures: Proprietary list of ingredients necessary to achieve required air
entrainment, low permeability, accelerated cure, increased flexural and
compressive strength and freeze -thaw resistance.
2.02 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Mechanical Fasteners (Lugs): '/4" x 20" female stainless steel threaded imbed
anchors shall be cast in the rear of each medallion by manufacturer. Manufacturer
shall provide '/4" x 20" stainless steel studs to be threaded into anchors at job site.
Studs shall project from rear of medallion a minimum of 1" into hole drilled in the
structural substrate of the mounting wall.
B. Adhesive: Solvent based construction adhesive or cement thinset mortar
manufactured specifically for vertical tile or masonry bonding and incorporating
bonding agent in cement mix.
C. Joint Finishing: Caulked joints and perimeter shall be caulking sealant type and
color recommended by caulking manufacturer and approved by architect. Grouting
or pointing mortar shall be composed of one part non -staining cement (ASTM C91),
one part hydrate lime (ASTM C207 Type S) and four parts clean, washed sand
(ASTM C144). Coloring pigments may be added as required. The architect shall
approve color of mortar before proceeding with grouting or pointing.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. SculptStone cast stone ornaments shall be manufactured in accordance with
manufacturer's strict guidelines for ingredient ratios, material mixing and
consolidation, mold surface integrity, color and finish uniformity and curing
methods for maximum strength achievement.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04720-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST STONE ORNAMENTS
2.04 SHIPPING
A. All SculptStone cast stone ornaments shall be carefully loaded and packed for
transportation exercising customary and reasonable precaution against damage
while in transit. All product shall be released to freight carver in a sound,
unblemished and unbroken condition.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect adjacent construction for conditions that would prevent proper installation
of SculptStone cast stone ornaments. Inspect substrate for soundness and surface
adhesion quality.
B. Inspect product from crates for any damage from shipping. Notify freight carrier of
any hidden damage. Inspect product for any variations in color, finish, tolerance or
design as shown on manufacturer's shop drawings or construction documents.
Report any discrepancy to manufacturer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install SculptStone cast stone ornaments true, plumb and level in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions (see below) and Tech Data sheet. All pieces
shall be set by experienced and qualified stone masons or tile setters in accordance
with the shop drawings.
B. All substrate to receive SculptStone pieces shall be prepared as indicated in
manufacturer's Tech Data sheet. Substrate shall be clean of any oil, paint, dust or
debris. Surface shall be smooth, level, sound and capable of a successful and
permanent adhesion to the setting material.
C. When setting with mortar all pieces not thoroughly wet shall be drenched with clear
potable water and excess water removed just prior to setting.
D. Unless otherwise noted, every piece shall be set in a full bed of mortar with all
vertical joints flushed full. All anchors shall be firmly in place and all anchor holes
and similar holes filled completely with mortar.
E. After setting, if required, each piece shall be braced with a diagonal support to the
face and rest on a previously installed temporary horizontal ledger to be removed
after full cure of setting material. The face of each piece shall then be sponged off
to remove any splashed mortar or mortar smears.
F. All pieces shall be protected from splashing mortar or damage by other trades. Any
foreign matter splashed or rubbed on the pieces shall be removed immediately.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04720-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST STONE ORNAMENTS
G. A foam or wood "plug" %2" larger than the intended piece shall be temporarily
installed on the substrate in applications where SculptStone cast stone ornaments
are not immediately available or construction conditions prohibit a timely
installation. This plug shall be removed and typical installation shall proceed
according to this section.
H. ''/2" minimum tolerance required in surrounding opening dimensions (i.e. 24" square
medallion requires a 24 ''/2" x 24 %2" opening).
3.03 PATCHING
A. The repair of chipped or damaged SculptStone shall be done only by mechanics
skilled in his work with materials furnished by the manufacturer and according to
his direction.
B. SculptStone shall show no obvious repairs or imperfections other than the minimal
color variations when viewed with the unaided eye under good typical lighting.
3.04 CLEANING
A. The face of all SculptStone cast stone ornaments shall be cleaned where necessary
by scrubbing with a bristle fiber brush, using soap powder and water and shall be
rinsed thoroughly with clean running water. No acid or prepared cleaners shall be
used without the approval of the SculptStone manufacturer.
3.05 SEALING
A. After cleaning and drying and full cure of any cememtitious grouts (approximately
30 days), SculptStone cast stone ornaments may be sealed with a silicone stearate
solution. Follow sealer manufacturer's instructions and apply to inconspicuous test
area to determine job specific results.
PART 4 - HANDLING AND STORAGE
4.01 HANDLING
A. All SculptStone cast stone ornaments shall be received and unloaded at the project
site by competent workmen with the necessary care and handling to avoid damage
and soiling.
4.02 STORAGE
A. The pieces shall be stored on the job site in the same crating and packaging used for
shipment. The packages and/or crates shall be stored on a level area clear of the
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04720-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST STONE ORNAMENTS
ground and protected from the weather and other trades. If pieces are to be stored
after uncrating, they should be placed carefully on edge and secured on non -staining
supports. Pieces shall be stacked a maximum of one row high and protected from
the weather and damage.
END OF SECTION - 04720
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04720-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CAST STONE ORNAMENTS
SECTION 04750 - QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Quartz countertops.
2. Setting materials and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"
2. Division 7 Section "Joint sealers."
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex
Portland Cement Mortar.
2. Al 18.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar.
B. ASTM International (ASTM:
1. C97 - Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension
Stone.
2. C99 - Standard Test Method for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone.
3. C170 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone.
4. C241 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot
Traffic.
5. C482 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement.
6. C484 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Shock Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile.
7. C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion of Chemical -Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and
Polymer Concretes.
8. C648 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile.
9. C650 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Chemical Substances.
10. C672/C672M - Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces
Exposed to Deicing Chemicals.
11. C880 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04750-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS
12. C 1026 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Resistance of Ceramic Tile to
Freeze -Thaw Cycling.
13. C1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of
Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull -Meter
Method.
14. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Minimum [2] years [documented] experience in
work of this Section.
B. Warranty
1. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty against defects in materials and
workmanship.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include countertop layout, dimensions, materials, finishes, cutouts, and
attachments.
B. Samples:
1. 6" x 6" quartz samples in specified color.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Contract Documents are based on products by Cosentino USA, Inc.
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Quartz Sheet:
1. Product: Silestone®.
2. Composition: Quartz aggregate, resin, and color pigments formed into flat slabs.
3. Anti -microbial protection: Microban® by Microbari International, Inc., integral to
sheet.
7. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range.
8. Thickness:3/4"
9. Physical characteristics:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04750-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS
a. Static coefficient of friction: 1.02 dry, 0.51 wet, tested to ASTM C1028.
b. Water absorption: Maximum 0.03 percent, tested to ASTM C97.
C. Compressive strength: Minimum 29,000 psi, tested to ASTM C 170.
d. Bond strength: Minimum 210 psi, tested to ASTM C482.
e. Modulus of rupture: Minimum 6300 psi, tested to ASTM C99.
f. Flexural strength: Minimum 5800 psi, tested to ASTM C880.
g. Breaking strength: Minimum 480 lbf, tested to ASTM C648.
h. Stain resistance: Not affected by 10 percent hydrochloric acid or 10 percent
KOH, tested to ASTM C650.
i. Thermal shock resistance: Pass 5 cycles, tested to ASTM C484.
j. Abrasive index: 65-Ha = 25, tested to ASTM C241.
k. Thermal expansion: 1.670 x 10"5 in/in/deg F, tested to ASTM C531.
1. Deicing resistance: Rating of 0, tested to ASTM C672/C672M.
m. Freeze/thaw resistance: 0 tiles at 15 cycles, tested to ASTM C1026.
n. Flame spread rating: Class 1, tested to ASTM E84.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by quartz manufacturer.
B. Joint Sealer:
1. Latisil Tile and Stone Sealant by Laticrete International, Inc.
2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Cut quartz panels accurately to required shapes and dimensions.
B. Radius exposed edges.
C. Fabricate with hairline joints.
D. Cut holes for sinks faucets.
E. Edge Style: bullnose.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive countertops; remove loose and foreign matter than could interfere
with adhesion.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04750-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS
3.02 0.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install countertops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop
Drawings.
B. Adhere countertops to supports with continuous beads of adhesive.
C. Set plumb and level. Align adjacent pieces in same plane.
D. Install with hairline joints.
E. Fill joints between countertops and adjacent construction with joint sealer; finish smooth
and flush.
3.03 NSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from level and plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non -cumulative.
B. Maximum variation in plane between adjacent pieces at joint: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean countertops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed countertops with non -staining sheet coverings.
END OF SECTION - 04750
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 04750-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: This section covers furnishing all labor, materials, equipment,
and services in connection with the furnishing, fabrication and erection of all
structural steel work complete including:
1. Steel Columns
2. Steel Beams
3. Shelf Angles
4. Bolts
5. Angle Frames Around Openings
6. Laboratory Control
7. Leveling Plates and anchor plates not cast in concrete or masonry.
8. Shop Painting
B. Include all supplementary parts and members necessary to complete the structural
steel frame, regardless of whether all such parts are definitely shown or specified,
and furnish all such bolts, gussets, plates, etc. as may be required for proper
assembly of all items.
C. Related Sections:
I. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
1.03 DESIGN
A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections not specifically
detailed by the Contract Documents to withstand design loadings indicated. Beam
connections shall be standard AISC double angle unless shown otherwise.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified
professional engineer to prepare calculations, supervise Shop Drawings, and select
other structural data for structural steel connections.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally
authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05120-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 STRUCTURAL STEEL
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with
structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
C. Substitutions: Substitutions of sections or modifications of details, or both, and the
reasons therefore, shall be submitted with the shop drawings for approval.
Approved substitutions, modifications, and necessary changes in related portions of
the work shall be coordinated by the fabricator and shall be accomplished at no
additional cost to the Owner.
D. Responsibility for Errors: The fabricator shall be responsible for all errors of
detailing, fabrications, and for the correct fitting of the structural members.
E. Templates: Templates shall be furnished by the fabricator with instructions for the
setting of anchor bolts.
1.04 CODES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction:
1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings with commentary (AISC Manual
of Steel Constuct 9th Edition).
2. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, September 1,
1986.
However, the following sentence in paragraph 4.2.1 shall not apply: "This
approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the
design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the
fabricator as part of his preparation of these shop drawings.
3. Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325X Bolts or A490X Bolts,
November 13, 1985.
B. American Welding Society:
1. Structural Welding Code -Steel. AWS D1.1.
C. Industrial Fasteners Institute:
1. Handbook on Bolt, Nut and Rivet Standards.
D. Steel Structure Painting Council:
1. Painting Manual, Volume 1, Good Painting Practice.
2. Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1: Section "Submittal Procedures".
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05120-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 STRUCTURAL STEEL
B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop and installation drawings, including design
calculations for connections of the structural steel, to the Engineer for review. Steel
for which such drawings have not yet been reviewed shall not be fabricated. Such
review will cover the general conformance of design. The omissions from the shop
and installation drawings of any materials shown on the Specifications shall not
relieve the contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing such
materials, even though such drawings may have been returned and reviewed.
C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components:
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent
data.
2. Indicate details of cuts, connections, splices, cambers, holes, and other
pertinent data.
3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field
bolts. Identify high -strength bolted slip -critical, direct -tension, or tensioned
shear/bearing connections.
4. Shop drawings shall be drawn at 1/8" = 1'-0" minimum for plans and'/4" = 1'-
0" minimum for sections. Contract drawings shall not be reproduced in whole
or in part. Contract drawings modified into shop drawings will be returned
without review.
5. Each sheet of the shop drawings shall bear the review stamp of the Contractor
indicating the drawings have been reviewed and is approved. Shop drawings
not bearing the Contractor's stamp will be returned without review.
D. Certified mill test reports, evidencing conformity with the requirements of the
A.S.T.M. and A.I.S.C. Specifications, shall be submitted to the Architect,
Structural Engineer, and Contractor for their respective records. Mill test reports
will not be returned or approved.
E. Failure by the contractor to submit the shop drawings, test reports required above
shall release the architect and the engineer from any liabilities due to the negligence
on the part of the contractor to comply with the construction documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL GRADES
A. All structural steel except steel tubes: ASTM A572 Grade 50. Steel Tubes: ASTM
A500, Grade B.
B. Structural Steel: Framing steel shall maximize the use of recycled steel. 30%
recycled steel. 60% represents the average recycled content for the U.S. steel
industry. Use of U. S. manufactured steel will meet this requirement.
2.02 BOLTS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05120-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Bolts: Anchor bolts and erection bolts shall have minimum conformance to ASTM
A307 and to the requirements for regular hexagon bolts and nuts of ASA Standards
B 18.2.1 and B 18.2.2.
B. High Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A325X with the thread excluded from the
shear plane. Bethlehem "Load Indicator Bolts" or LeJeune "Tension Control
Fasteners" complete with mating nut and washer and J&M Turner load -indicator
washers may be used.
C. Washers: Circular washers shall be flat and smooth, and shall conform to
requirements of Type A washers in ASA Standard B27.2. Beveled washers for
American standard beams and channels shall be square or rectangular, shall taper in
thickness, and shall be smooth. Washers for use with high strength bolts shall be
hardened.
D. Adhesive Anchors: Injectable adhesive for the installation of threaded anchors rods
into concrete. Rods shall be ASTM A36. Adhesive shall be Hilti HY 150 or
Simpson Acrylic -tie or approved equal.
2.03 WELDING ELECTRODES
A. Shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications of the American Institute of
Steel Construction. Use E70 electrodes.
2.04 COATINGS
A. Paint: Shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification TT-P-86 Type I
of II, SSPC Paint 4-64T or Federal Specification TT-P-636C primer coating,
synthetic, rust inhibiting primer. Tnemic series "10-99" gray primer, or approved
equal. Tnemec Paint Company, North Kansas City, Missouri.
B. Zinc -Coating: When galvanizing steel is required, the zinc -coating shall conform to
ASTM A123 . Zinc -coating for threaded products shall conform to ASTM A153.
C. Cold galvanizing compound shall be "ZRC" cold galvanizing compound as
manufactured by ZRC Chemical Products, Quincy, Massachusetts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION
A. General: Except as modified herein, fabrication shall be in accordance with the
applicable Specifications and Standards of the American Institute of Steel
Construction. Workmanship shall be equal to standard commercial practice in
modern structural shops. Portions of the work exposed to view shall be finished
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05120-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 STRUCTURAL STEEL
neatly. Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the
ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Material shall be kept free from dirt,
grease, and other foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practical from
corrosion. All material shall be clean and straight. If straightening or flattening is
necessary, it shall be done by a process in a manner that will not damage the
material. Finished members shall be free from undue twists, bends, warping
distortion, and other irregularities. Holes shall not be made or enlarged by burning.
Shearing, flame cutting, and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately.
Splicing structural steel members shall not be permitted.
1. Compression joints, depending upon contact bearing, shall have the bearing
surfaces machined to a common plane after the members are completed.
2. Protective Painting: One (1) coat of approved primer shall be applied to all
exposed surfaces of all structural steel members except those surfaces
requiring field welding, to be encased in concrete, to be galvanized, to be
spray fireproofed and the top flanges of beams to support metal deck.
All metal surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned of all loose mill scale, dirt,
rust, etc. by the use of steel scrapers, wire brushes, sandblast or other means
approved by the Architect. Oil and grease shall be removed with naphtha and
the metal surfaces shall be dry when paint is applied.
Paint shall not be applied during damp weather, or when the temperature is at
or below freezing. Any damage to the shop coat of paint and welded areas
where shop paint was omitted shall be field painted with shop paint to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
Steel work specified to have no shop paint shall, after fabrication, be cleaned
of oil or grease by solvent cleaners and be cleaned of dirt, and other foreign
material by thorough sweeping with a fiber brush. Apply shop paint to
provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
3. Bolted Construction: Holes for bolted construction shall be fabricated as
specified for bolted construction. Bolt holes shall be at right angles to the
member. The slope of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head shall not
exceed 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Where the surface
of a bolted part has a slope of more than 1:20, a beveled washer shall be used
to compensate for the lack of parallelism. Bolt holes shall have a nominal
diameter not greater than one -sixteenth (1/16) inch in excess of the nominal,
bolt diameter.
4. Common Bolts: The bolts shall be of such length that they will extend
entirely through the nuts, with the beveled end outside the nut. Bolt heads and
nuts shall be drawn tight against the work with a suitable wrench not less than
fifteen (15) inches long. Threads shall be excluded from shear plane
5. Baseplates: Oversize anchor bolt holes in baseplates to facilitate erection as
follows:
Bolts 3/4" to 1" in diameter: 5/16" oversize
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05120-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 STRUCTURAL STEEL
Bolts 1" to 2" in diameter: 1/2" oversize
Use oversize nut or plate washers under nut at all oversized holes in
baseplates. Washers must be large enough to cover hole. Washer thickness
shall be at least 1/8 of bolt diameter.
6. Camber: Provide camber in members indicated on the drawings. Specified
camber applies at the jobsite, just prior to erection, lying flat so that the
member weight has no effect. Take necessary precautions to prevent or
compensate for camber loss during shipment. Measured camber in members
up to 50'-0" long shall be within a tolerance of minus 1/2" to plus zero from
the specified camber. Members with field measure camber outside the
specified camber shall be returned to the shop.
7. Galvanizing: the following members shall be hot dip galvanized: masonry
shelf angles, and any steel members exposed to weather, and where noted on
drawings.
3.02 ERECTION
A. General: Except as modified herein, erection shall be in accordance with the
applicable Specifications and Standards of the A.I.S.C. Manual of Steel
Construction. Where parts cannot be assembled or fitted properly as a result of
errors in fabrication or of deformation due to handling or transportation, such
condition shall be reported immediately to the testing laboratory for approval of the
method of correction obtained. The straightening of plates and angles or other
shapes shall be done by approved methods. Bent or damaged heat -treated parts will
be rejected. Steel work shall be drained properly; pockets in structures exposed to
the weather shall be filled with an approved waterproof material. The erector will
be responsible for shrinkage and distortion of all butt welds. Loose joints will be
corrected by cutting with a hand guided torch if necessary.
B. Assembly:
1. Temporary bracing shall be used wherever necessary to support all loads to
which the structure may be subjected, including equipment and operation
thereof and piles of materials. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as
required for safety. The various members forming parts of a completed frame
or structure after being assembled shall be aligned and adjusted accurately
before being fastened. Splicing of compression members shall be done after
the abutting surfaces have been brought into contact.
2. Bearing surfaces and surfaces which will be in permanent contact shall be
cleaned before the members are assembled. Bearing plates shall be set in
exact position and shall have a full and even bearing upon the concrete. As
erection progresses, the work shall be bolted or welded sufficiently to take
care of all dead load, wind, and erection stresses. Splices will be permitted
only where indicated. All erection bolts used in welded construction may be
tightened securely and left in place; if removed, the holes shall be filled with
plug welds.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05120-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 STRUCTURAL STEEL
C. Field bolting shall be in accordance with the requirements specified for shop
fabrication. Unfair holes shall be corrected by reaming. Where the surface of a
bolted part has a slope of more than 1:20, a beveled washer shall be used to
compensate for the lack of parallelism. Bolt heads and nuts shall be drawn tight
against the work with a suitable wrench not less than fifteen (15) inches long. Bolt
heads shall be tapped with a hammer while the nut is being tightened.
D. Bolts to be "snug -tight" unless noted otherwise, and shall be tightened a few
impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using a ordinary spud
wrench, bringing the plies into contact.D. Field welding shall be as specified for
shop fabrication of welded construction. Any shop paint on surfaces adjacent to
joints to be field welded shall be wire brushed to reduce the paint film to a
minimum. Slag shall be removed from all completed welds.
E. Field repair of zinc -coatings with cold galvanizing compound per manufacturer's
specifications.
F. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same
material used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry
film thickness of 2.0 mils.
G. Setting baseplates: Set baseplates on shims or other adjustement devices. Tighten
anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Cut off
protruding wedges or shims. Grout under baseplates in accordance with Division 3:
Section Cast -in -place concrete.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing laboratory shall perform inspection and testing services
specified in this section.
B. Shop Inspection
1. Visual inspection of all shop welding.
2. Ultrasonic inspection of all full penetration welds.
3. Examination of galvanizing.
4. Examination of shop painting.
C. Field Inspection
1. Proper erection of all pieces.
2. Proper installation of all bolts, including checking the calibration of impact
wrenches used with high strength bolts.
3. Plumbness of structure and proper bracing.
4. Ultrasonic inspection of all full penetration welds.
5. Record and measure camber of beams upon arrival and before erection with
compliance with the specified camber. Measure beam lying flat with web in
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05120-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 STRUCTURAL STEEL
the horizontal position. Members outside the specified camber tolerance shall
be returned to the shop.
D. Qualification of Welders: Before assigning any welder to work covered by this
section of the Specifications, the fabricator shall provide the Testing Laboratory
with certification that each of the welders to be employed on the project has passed
qualification tests within the last year using procedures covered in the American
Welding Society Standard D1.0-63.
E. The contractor shall be responsible for furnishing fabrication and erection
inspection and testing of all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Chapter 6.
Submit records of inspections and tests to the testing laboratory for their review.
F. Inspection of shop and field welding shall be "verification inspection" in
accordance with Section 6 of AWS D1.1 and as follows:
1. Visually inspect the welding of all shop fabricated members and note the
location of all cover plates, connectors, bearing stiffeners, splices, and fillet
welds for proper return around ends and check for seams, folds, and
delaminations.
2. Ultrasonically test all full penetration welds in accordance with ASTM E164.
3. Root passes shall be thouroughly inspected for cracks. All cracks shall be
gouged out and rewelded to two inches beyond each end of the crack.
4. Mark all welds requiring repairs and make reinspections.
5. The Testing Laboratory inspector shall advise the Owner and Architect of any
shop and/or field conditions which, in his opinion, may require further tests
and examination. Such further tests shall be performed as authorized by the
Owner and Architect.
6. The Owner reserves the right to use ultrasonic or radiographic inspection to
verify the adequacy of all welds. Testing procedures and acceptance criteria
shall be as specified in AWS D1.1.
G. Inspection of bolted construction shall be in accordance with AISC "Specification
for Structural Steel Buildings" and as follows:
1. All bolts shall be visually inspected to ensure that the plies have been brought
into "snug" contact.
2. High strength bolts shall be inspected in accordance with Section 9 of the
AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325X or A490X
Thread Excluded Bolts."
3. For all high strength bolts, unless specifically noted on the Drawings to
require only "snug -tight" installation, the inspector shall observe the required
jobsite testing and calibration, and shall confirm that the procedure to be used
provides the required tension.
END OF SECTION 05120
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05120-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. General: Furnish all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, appliances and
services necessary for the fabrication, delivery and installation of all miscellaneous
metal items. All work shall be as shown or indicated on the drawings and as
specified in this section.
B. Scope of Work:
1. Embedded angles and plates
2. Gratings
3. Miscellaneous metal work and related items.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
2. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
3. Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Handrails or other protective enclosures shall be designed to withstand stresses to
which they would be normally subjected and to withstand a load of 200 lbs. applied
in any direction at any point on the top rail. Connections other than those already
listed shall be designed to safely support design load (dead load plus live load) of
not less than 100 psi without exceeding working stresses permitted for materials.
B. Welding shall conform to American Welding Society's Standard Code for Arc and
Gas Welding in Building Construction. Welding shall be continuous along entire
area of contact, except where tack welding is specifically shown or specified. Grind
all exposed welds.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1: Section "Submittal Procedures."
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05500-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 METAL FABRICATIONS
B. Shop drawings based on the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Architect
for review prior to ordering of materials.
C. Failure by the contractor to submit shop drawings, test reports, etc. required above
shall release the Architect and the Engineer from any liabilities due to the
negligence on the part of the contractor to comply with the construction documents.
D. Approval will cover size and arrangement of members, character of construction,
but not dimensions.
E. Contractor shall verify actual dimensions at the construction site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Comply with the following standards, as pertinent:
1. Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36;
2. Steel plates to be bent or cold -formed: ASTM A283; grade C;
3. Steel tubing (hot -formed, welded, or seamless): ASTM A500; grade B;
4. Steel bars and bar -size shapes: ASTM A306; grade 65, or ASTM A36;
5. Cold -finished steel bars: ASTM A1081
6. Cold -rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336;
7. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in
accordance with ASTM A525;
8. Stainless steel splash guard: AISI type 302 or 304, 20 ga. Finish to be selected
by architect
9. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48, class 10;
10. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47;
11. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, schedule 40, black finish unless otherwise
noted;
12. Concrete inserts:
a. Threaded or wedge -type galvanized ferrous castings of malleable iron
complying with ASTM A27.
b. Provide required bolts, shims, and washers, hot -dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A153.
13. Bolts and nuts: Provide hexagon -head regular type complying with ASTM
A307, grade A.
14. Lag bolts: Provide square -head type complying with Fed Spec FF-B-561;
15. Machine screws: Provide cadmium plated steel type complying with Fed Spec
FF-S-111.
16. Railing Frame —1 1/2" ID schedule 80.
17. Cable assembly equal to Johnson Architectural Hardware 19-308-7F 1/4"
stainless steel wire (800) 874-7455.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05500-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 METAL FABRICATIONS
B. Castings shall be made from the best grade of soft pig iron cast in stove place
molding sand to a uniform thickness. Castings shall be free of defects impairing
strength or appearance.
C. Accessories: Provide all anchors bolts, anchor straps, hangers and other related
fittings, fastener and accessories required for proper and secure installation of all
miscellaneous metal. Fasteners for exterior use shall be zinc coated. Generally, the
sizes, shapes and spacing of items are shown or specified; where not shown or
specified, accessories shall be adequate for the required services, subject to
approval.
2.02 SHOP PAINTING
A. All Iron and Steel Work: Unless otherwise specified, power tool clean all surfaces
to remove mill scale. Work shall receive a shop coat of paint before leaving the
factory or being exposed to the weather. Aluminum work contacting dissimilar
metals shall receive a protective coating preventing galvanic action.
B. Shop Paint: Shop paint shall be Fabricator's standard, fast curing, lead free,
"universal" primer, compatible with finish paint system indicated and for capability
to provide sound foundation for field applied topcoats.
C. Aluminum surfaces to be in direct contact with concrete and masonry shall be shop
coated with zinc chromate primer.
2.03 ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED
A. Pipe Bollard: 6" Diameter steel pipe with concrete fill.
B. Lintel Angles: Galvanized steel in sizes indicated on drawings. Extend loose lintel
angles 8" on each side of opening.
C. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels, angles, plates, tubing, connections and bolts
provided where shown and detailed on drawings. Exterior imbed plates shall be
hot -dip, galvanized.
D. Handrail Bracket on interior stair: 45-3-S by King Architectural Metals or approved
equal.
E. Stair Nosing on interior stair: Type 24H by American Safety Tread Co. or approved
equal.
F. Expansion Joint Covers: Extruded aluminum anchored to wall, floor and ceiling
per manufacturer's instructions. Expansion joint covers shall be as follows, or
approved equal:
1. Interior Ceiling to Wall: Balco/Metaline #AC-15.
2. Interior Wall to Wall: Balco/Metaline #GP-10.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05500-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 METAL FABRICATIONS
3. Interior Floor to Floor: Balco/Metaline #NBS-10.
4. Interior Ceiling to Ceiling: Balco/Metaline #AC-10.
G. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels, angles, plates, tubing, connections and bolts
provided where shown and detailed on drawings. Exterior imbed plates shall be
hot -dip, galvanized.
H. Trench Drain: Design for H2O wheel load
1. Slotted Trench Drains in Apparatus Bay, Type: Zurn Z806-BD 6" (20 feet
long) Flo-Thru pre -sloped trench drainage system with Black Acid Resistant
Coated ductile Iron Grate. Drain channel shall be glass -filled polyester
fiberglass with 0.75% bottom slope. Channel sections shall be modular 10-
foot [3.05 M] lengths with interlocking ends and shall have heavy-duty, Dura-
Coated steel frame with anchor studs at surface. Install two (2) No. 1002
channel sections end -to -end, such that the lowest point is at the center of the
20-foot length. Install 3-inch drain at center point so as to drain cross -wise as
shown on the drawing sheets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION
A. Contractor shall secure and be responsible for all field measurements required for
the proper and accurate fabrication and installation of the items included under this
section; field alterations will not be permitted except upon specific authorization of
the Architect.
B. All work shall be assembled in the most substantial manner and reinforced where
necessary with structural shapes, using concealed screws, bolts or similar fastenings.
Make welds of adequate strength and durability, jointing tight, clean and smooth,
flush and in true plane with base metals.
C. All screws or rivets shall be countersunk, unless otherwise noted. Provide lock
washers for all bolts.
D. All steel to which wood blocking is connected shall be properly punched for
anchoring blocking.
E. Exposed steel shapes with marred surfaces shall be ground or draw -filled to a fine
grain finish, as approved before applying shop coat of paint.
F. Assembled work shall be completely constructed in the shop, accurately finished
and the pieces match -marked for erection. Form exterior joints to exclude water,
grind connections in exposed pieces smooth and polish.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05500-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 METAL FABRICATIONS
G. The Contractor shall do all drilling, cutting, tapping and fitting of work to
accommodate other work coming in contact with it, and shall furnish all taps, bolts
and other fittings in connection therewith.
H. Except where otherwise noted, fastening to concrete, solid masonry or hollow
masonry shall be with expansion bolts or anchors. Fastening to wood plugs will not
be permitted. Toggle may be used only when approved by the Architect.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. All work included in this Contract shall be installed by the Contractor at the proper
time and as rapidly as the progress of the adjacent and connecting work will permit.
B. All work shall be installed plumb, level, square and true to line in all cases.
C. Grind exposed welds smooth and touch-up shop prime coats.
D. Do not cut, weld or abrade surfaces which have been hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication and which are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Loose lintel angles shall bear 8" on each side of opening.
F. Immediately after erection, clean the field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop priming. Paint the exposed areas with same material used for shop
priming.
END OF SECTION 05500
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05500-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 05580 - FORMED -METAL FABRICATION FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Coating tube columns, angle brackets and connections.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5, "Metal Fabrications."
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide heating -cooling unit enclosures capable of
withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design
working stress of materials involved, including anchors and connections, and
without exhibiting permanent deformation in any components making up
enclosures:
1. 100 lbf/sq. ft. or a concentrated load of 300 lbf on an area of 4 sq. in.,
whichever produces the greater stress.
B. Corrosion Control: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by
insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible
materials.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1: Section "Submittal Procedures".
B. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel Angles.
2. Steel Plates.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05580-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FORMED -METAL FABRICATION FINISHING
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing formed -metal
" fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to
produce required units.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain formed -metal fabrications through one source from a
single manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where formed -metal fabrications are indicated to fit to other
construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without
delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating formed -
metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for steel sheet
finishes.
C. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where
possible. After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface
blemishes to match sheet finish.
D. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
E. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.02 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05580-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FORMED -METAL FABRICATION FINISHING
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint
bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with
SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
B. Powder -Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured -film
thickness not less than 1.5 mils. Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Powder Coating shall be equal to Texas Custom Coaters (979) 778-3127.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place formed -metal fabrications level, plumb, and in alignment with
adjacent construction.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where needed to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide
reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to
the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of formed -metal fabrications from damage during construction
period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05580
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 05580-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FORMED -METAL FABRICATION FINISHING
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide rough carpentry and framing, rough hardware, finish
carpentry, and other items normally provided by carpentry trade and install such
items listed herein furnished by other trades.
1. Wood nailers, blocking, plates, etc.
2. Rough hardware, including bolts, nuts, washers, powder actuated fasteners,
nails, screws, spikes, etc.
3. Preservative or non-combustible treatment for all plywood and solid wood
members.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 3 Section "Concrete Formwork."
2.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
3.
Division 6 "Architectural Woodwork."
4.
Division 8 "Steel Doors and Frames."
5.
Division 8 "Wood Doors."
6.
Division 8 "Door Hardware.
7.
Division 9 "Painting."
8.
Division 10 "Toilet Accessories."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grading: Grading rules and species in accordance with Voluntary Product
Standards PS 20-70.
B. Identify lumber and plywood by official grade marks, except where grade mark will
interfere with natural finish.
C. All lumber must be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15% after
treatment.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06100-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ROUGH CARPENTRY
_ A. Division 1: Section "Submittal Procedures".
B. A written certification shall be submitted for all pressure preservative treated wood
evidencing such treatment in conformance with specified standards.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Upon delivery of materials to job site, place materials in an area protected from
weather, materials a minimum of 6" above ground on blocking.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other trades by providing for proper installation of built-in items,
building in supports, nailers, headers, and frames as required by other trades.
1.07 REFERENCES
A. Lumber grading shall be as defined in the latest edition of the "Standard Grading
and Dressing Rules No. 16", published by the West Coast Lumber Inspection
Bureau or in the latest edition of the"Grading Rules", published by the Western
Wood Products Association.
B. Plywood grading shall be as defined by the Douglas Fir Plywood Association or
other related entities as applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber:
1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide
actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of
dressing.
3. Grade: No. 2 KD Grade Southern Yellow Pine or an equivalent strength
grade. Refer to structural lumber properties schedule on drawings for required
strength of substituted lumber.
B. Plywood:
1. Exposed Plywood : Where plywood will be exposed in finished work,
provide A-C/EXT-APA plywood with Grade A face exposed and Grade C
concealed for exterior use; and provide A-D/INT-APA plywood with Grade A
face exposed and Grade D concealed, for interior use.
2. Concealed Interior Plywood: Where plywood will be concealed by other
work, provide C-D Plugged/INT-APA.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06100-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ROUGH CARPENTRY
C. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated
and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable
Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and
anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and
type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommending
nails. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with
hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A153). Fastenings concrete and masonry as per
drawings.
2. Building Paper: 15 lb. (unless noted othewise on drawings) asphalt saturated
felt, non -perforated, ASTM D226.
2.02 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is specified herein or shown on
drawings to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards
C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each
treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark requirements.
1. Pressure -treat above -ground items with waterborne preservatives complying
with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln -dry to a maximum moisture content
of 15%.
2. Treat wood nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. Also
treat wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed
members in contact with masonry, concrete or plaster.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Surfaces to receive new wood members shall be free of all dirt, debris and loose
materials. Remove any projections as necessary.
B. Surfaces shall have no rain, dew, frost, etc. present.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Warped wood members shall not be used, unless they can be fastened adequately to
permanently hold them in required alignment.
B. Lumber or Plywood to Lumber:
1. Nail spacing shall be maximum of 12" on center and staggered across face of
piece. Fastener shall be located within 3" of each end of piece. Maximum
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06100-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ROUGH CARPENTRY
spacing of 6" on center, 8' each way from corners for roof edge blocking,
r unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2. Wood framing and furring materials spaced 16" on center, attached at 8' on
center at each support, unless noted otherwise.
3. Nail heads shall be flush with wood surface and nail shall penetrate adjoining
piece minimum of 1.25 inches.
4. The installed withdrawal resistance shall be a minimum of 100 pounds per
nail.
3.03 ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. Provide cutting, fitting, fabricating, blocking, nailing, and miscellaneous items of
furring, grounds, blocking, screeds and nailers required to accommodate roofing,
equipment, lavatory counter tops, accessories and other items, including NIC items
requiring wood framing, blocking or furring. Materials erected plumb, level and
uniformly true to plan providing all shims as required.
B. Fastenings for Wall Supported Items: Provide and install 2 x 8 (minimum) x 1 stud
space wood blocking, unless specified otherwise at all stud wall areas receiving
grab bars, toilet partitions, wall bumpers and other wall mounted accessories.
3.04 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Provide bolts, screws, anchors, inserts and fastenings required for proper attachment
of carpentry and millwork items. Fastenings to concrete or masonry with expansion
bolts or anchors. Toggle bolts may be used for hollow masonry. Fastening to wood
plugs not permitted. Fastenings spaced 16" o.c. unless otherwise noted.
3.05 FINISH CARPENTRY
A. Hollow Metal Frame Installation: Exercise care in setting of frames with head level
and jambs plumb and square. Secure anchorages to adjacent construction, labeled
frames secured per U.L. requirements. Leave spreader bars in place until frames are
finally secured square and plumb.
B. Specialty Items: Receive specialty items such as toilet accessories and
miscellaneous specialty items and install in accordance with approved shop and
setting drawings, using proper fasteners. Install items plumbs, level and true,
securely fastened with proper bolts or screws.
C. Miscellaneous Metal Items Installation: Receive miscellaneous metal items and
install plumb, level and secure in strict accordance with approved shop drawings.
D. Wood attached to CMU : Secure wood items to CMU with anchors and bolts.
Apply construction adhesive to wood prior to securing bolts.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06100-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ROUGH CARPENTRY
3.06- CLEANUP
A. Cleanup all debris caused by the work of this section, keeping the premises clean
and neat at all times.
END OF SECTION 06100
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06100-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06110 - WOOD FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
L Provide rough carpentry, wood framing, trusses, sheathing, and other items
normally provided by framing trade and install such items listed herein
furnished by other trades.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Concrete Formwork."
2. Division 5 Section "Miscellaneous Metals."
3. Division 6 Section "Carpentry."
4. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Frames."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable rules of the respective
grading and inspecting agencies for species and products used.
B. Plywood Product Standards: Comply with PS 1 (ANSI A 199.1) or, for products
not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with applicable APA Performance
Standard for type of panel specified.
C. Framing Members: Shall comply with recommendations of "Manual for House
Framing" of National Forest Products Association.
D. Anchor and Nail: Shall comply with 'Recommended Nailing Schedule of Manual
for House Framing" and other recommendations of N.F.P.A.
E. Pre -fabricated Wood Members: Comply with design standards for manufactured
products set forth in CABO Report No. NER-200 and NER-126.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06110-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WOOD FRAMING
A. Wood Treatment Data: Submit treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use
of each type of treated material. Include certification by treating plant stating
chemicals and process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance
with applicable standards. Include statement that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to a maximum of 19% prior to shipment.
B. Prefabricated Wood Trusses: Submit calculations and engineering data.
C. Pre -fabricated Wood Joists:
1. Submit shop drawings showing framing system and joist spacing, loads and
joists camber, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing and framed
openings. Include design calculations and engineering data.
2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Material Certificates: Where dimensional lumber is provided to comply with
minimum allowable unit stresses, submit listing of species and grade selected for
each use and submit evidence of compliance with specified requirements.
Compliance may be in form of a signed copy of applicable portion of lumber
producer's grading rules showing design values for selected species and grade.
Design values shall be as approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber
Standards Committee.
1.05 HANDLING, DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact
with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation
within stacks.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to
allow proper attachment of other work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Lumber, General:
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency,
except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or
without finish.
2. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide
actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06110-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WOOD FRAMING
3. Provide seasoned lumber with 15% maximum moisture content at time of
dressing.
B. Framing Lumber & Miscellaneous Lumber (2" through 4" thick and less than 6"
wide):
1. For light framing and miscellaneous lumber (furring, grounds, blocking)
IR provide "Stud" grad lumber for stud framing and "Standard" grade for other
light framing, any species. The Contractor may, at his option, use Standard
Grade throughout.
C. Pre -fabricated Wood Joists: Lightweight roof and floor joists shall be of flange
members, web members and adhesives conforming to CABO Report No. NER-200,
equal to I joists as manufactured by Trus Joist Corporation. Install webs in flanges
with grain running in vertical direction of joist and butt joined to form continuous
web. Pressure form web and fit into groove in center of wide face of flange
members. Each joist shall be identified by a stamp indicating joist type,
manufacturer's name, and conforming report number. Install webs in flanges with
grain running in vertical direction of joist and butt joined to form continuous web.
Pressure form web and fit into a groove in center of wide face of flange members.
D. Plywood:
1. Roof Sheathing: Exterior, APA Rated Sheathing, with span rating to suit joist
or truss spacing; thickness as noted on drawings.
2. Wall Sheathing: Exterior, APA Rated Sheathing with span rating to suit stud
spacing; thickness as noted on drawings.
3. Sub -Flooring: APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1, with span rating to suit
joist spacing; thickness as noted on drawings.
4. Backing Panels at Telephone and Electric Equipment: Provide C-D-INT-APA
plywood with exterior glue, 1/2" thick.
E. Structural Framing (2" through 4" thick and 6" or wider):
1. For structural framing, provide a Grade of any species which meets or exceeds
an "Fb" (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending) of 1200 psi and an "B"
(minimum of elasticity) of 1,200,000.
F. Pressure Treated Wood Sills: Blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed
members in contact with masonry or concrete, wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking,
stripping and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers,
and waterproofing, shall be pressure treated using water -borne preservatives
complying with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln dry to a max. moisture content
of 15%. Coat cut surfaces with same chemical used for treatment. Creosote or oil
borne preservatives are prohibited.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06110-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WOOD FRAMING
A. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated felt, 15 lb. non -perforated, complying with
ASTM D226.
B. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors equal to Teco Ty -Down, Rafter
Anchors, Joist & Beam Hangers and Trip-L-Grip Framing Anchors, or approved
equal.
C. Fasteners: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended qM
by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails,
staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices.
D. Fasteners in Concrete & Masonry: Shall be approved "Wej-It" expansion shields
set in properly drilled holes or "Redhead" self -drilling anchors and machine bolts.
E. Where rough framing work is exposed to weather or in ground contact, provide
fasteners and anchorages with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A153).
PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions where wood frame construction is to be installed
and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions
have been corrected by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and
units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
2. Protect all material from weather and handle with care.
3. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members
plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted.
4. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on
exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
a. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing
nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate
members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting of wood; pre -drill as required.
B. Wood Framing, General:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06110-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WOOD FRAMING
I. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame
openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with recommendations of
"Manual for House Framing" of National Forest Products Association.
2. Do not splice structural members between supports.
C. Stud Framing:
1. General: Provide stud framing where shown. Unless otherwise shown, use
2" x 4" wood studs spaced 16" O.C. with 4" face perpendicular to direction of
wall or partition. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates 2" thick
by width of studs; except single top plate may be used for non -load bearing
partitions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction.
2. Construct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs. Provide
miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of
facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim.
3. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header
members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and
support on jamb studs.
a. For non -bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs and two 2" x 6"
headers with plywood flitch.
b. For load -bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs for openings 6'
and less in width, and triple jamb studs for wider openings. Provide
headers of depth shown, or if not shown, provide as recommended by
N.F.P.A., "Manual for House Framing".
D. Joist Framing:
1.
General: Provide framing of sizes and spacings shown. Install with crown
edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2" of bearing
on wood. Attach to wood bearing members by toe nailing or metal
connectors, or both; frame to wood supporting members with wood ledgers as
shown, or if not shown, with metal connectors. Frame openings with headers
and trimmers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 4'.
Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to 1/6 depth of joist, 1/3 at
ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist or locate closer than 2"
from top or bottom. Provide solid blocking (2" thick by depth of joist) at ends
of joists unless nailed to header or brand member.
2.
Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders or partitions not
less than 4" or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid
blocking (2" thick by depth of joists) over supports.
3.
Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4" x 1-1/4" metal strap anchors
spaced not more than 8' O.C. Extend anchors at least 4" into masonry, turn up
4" and extend over and fasten to 3 joists.
4.
Under jamb studs at openings, provide solid blocking between joist.
5.
Under non -load bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid
blocking equal to depth of studs above. Provide triple joists separated as
above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or
fixtures, unless otherwise shown.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06110-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006
WOOD FRAMING
6. Provide bridging between joists where nominal depth -to -thickness ratio
exceeds 4, at intervals of 8'. use bevel cut 1" x 4" or 2" x 3" wood bracing,
double-crossed and nailed both ends to joists, or use solid wood bridging 2"
thick by depth of joist, end nailed to joist.
E. Rafter and Ceiling Joist Framing:
1. Ceiling Joists: Provide member size and spacing shown, and as previously
specified for joist framing. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.
2. Rafters: Provide member size and spacing shown. Notch to fit exterior wall
plates and toe nail or use special metal framing anchors. Double rafters to
form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing. Where rafters abut at
ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal
ridge hangers. ;
a. At valleys, provide valley rafter of size shown, or if not shown, provide
rafter twice as thick as regular rafters and 2" deeper. Bevel ends of jack
rafters for full bearing against valley rafter.
b. At hips, provide hip rafters of size shown, or if not shown, provide of
same thickness as regular rafters and 2" deeper. Bevel ends of jack
rafters for full bearing against hip rafters.
3. Provide collar beams (ties) as shown, or if not shown, provide 1" x 6" boards
between every third pair of rafters. Locate below ridge member, on -third of
distance to ceiling joists. Cut ends to fit slope and nail to rafters.
4. Provide special framing as shown for eaves, overhangs, dormers and similar
conditions, if any. ,
F. Trussed Rafters:
1. General: Provide trussed rafters where shown. Comply with the applicable
requirements of the NLMA's, "National Design Specifications for Stress
Graded Lumber and Its Fastenings", and the Truss Plate Institute's, "Light
Metal Connected Wood Trusses".
2. Provide pre-engineered and shop -assembled trusses designed for the span,
loading, truss shape and spacing shown. Fabricate in the plant of the
manufacturer or his licensed fabricator.
3. Erect trusses in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide
temporary supports and bracing as required.
G. Plywood Roof Sheathing:
1. Provide plywood roof sheathing as required. Install with long dimension
across supports, using panels continuous over 2 or more spans with end joints
between panels staggered and located over center of supports.
a. Nail 6" O.C. along panel edges and ends and 12" O.C. at intermediate
supports for spans less than 48" using 6d common nails for panels 1/2"
or less, 8d common nails for panels over 1/2", but less than 1" thick, and
8d ring shank or spiral thread nails or 1 Od common nails for panels 1" or
more thick. For spans 48" or greater, space nails 6" O.C. at all supports.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06110-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WOOD FRAMING
1
11
b. Provide support at unsupported long edges with ,plyclips" or wood
blocking.
2. Allow 1/8" open space between end joints and 1/4" open space between edge
joints for expansion and contraction of panels.
H. Plywood Wall Sheathing:
1. Provide plywood wall sheathing. Install horizontally or vertically using panels
continuous over 2 or more spans. Nail edges and ends over supports at 6"
O.C. and at 12" O.C. over intermediate studs, using 6d nails for panels not
more than 1/2" thick and 8d nails for thicker panels or as noted on plans.
Allow 1/8" spacing at panel ends and 1/4" at panel edges.
2. Over all new sheathing apply one layer of building paper as specified herein.
I. Plywood Flooring:
1. Sub -Floor: Install with the long dimension of the panel across supports and
with panel continuous over two or more spans. Panel end joints shall occur
over framing. Allow 1/8" spacing at panel ends and 1/4" at panel edges. Nail
6" O.C. along panel edges and 10" O.C. at intermediate supports with 6d
common nails for 1/2" panels, 8d for greater thicknesses. Where panels are 1-
1/8" or 1-1/4" thick and supports are 48" O.C., nails shall be 8d ring -shank or
l Od common and space 6" O.C. at all supports.
J. Nailing: Where driving of nails causes splitting, holes for nails shall be sub -drilled.
The following is the minimum schedule for common wire nails:
1. Double Top and Sole Plates: Lower member to studs - 2 - 16d; upper member
to lower, staggered - 16d at 12"; at intersection - 3 - 16d.
2. Blocking Between Studs: End nail, each end - 2 - 16d and/or toe nail, each
end - 2- 8d.
3. Ribbons to Studs: 1" - 2 - 8d.
4. Multiple Studs: For widths over 4", stagger - 16d at 12".
5. Studs to Bearings: Toe nails, each side - 2 - 8d.
6. No staples will be permitted as a substitute for nails.
3.03 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of work of this section, remove related debris from premises.
END OF SECTION 06110
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
06110-7
WOOD FRAMING
_R
SECTION 06175 - PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Furnish labor, material, services, equipment and appliances
required for prefabricated wood truss work indicated on the Drawings and specified
herein.
1. Wood trusses
2. Bridging
3. Temporary and permanent bracing
4. Related hardware (as required) and including:
a. Metal hangers
b. Anchors
C. Special metal shapes
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6, Section "Rough Carpentry"
1.03 ENGINEERING DESIGN
A. Trusses shall be custom designed to fit dimensions and loads indicated on the
Drawings. Design shall be in accord with allowable values assigned by the most
restrictive governing code. Complete design calculation showing internal layout
member forces and stress control points are to be submitted to the Architect.
Design shall be under the supervision of a registered professional engineer.
1.04 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Trusses shall be manufactured in a plant approved for fabrication by the Owner.
B. The standards of Automated Building Components, Inc. for quality, engineering and
fabrication shall govern the work of the section.
C. National Forest Products Association (NFPA): "National Design Specifications for
Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings."
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
06175-1
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
D. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC): "Timber Construction
Standards".
E. Truss Plate Institute (TPI): "Design Specifications for Light Metal Plate Connected
Wood Trusses".
F. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings bearing the seal of a professional engineer, licensed in the
Sate of Texas, showing:
1. Pitch, span, camber, dimensions and spacing of truss.
2. Truss bearing sizes and locations.
3. Design loading of truss and allowable stress increase.
4. Axial forces in each truss member.
5. Nominal sizes and location of connector plates at all joints.
6. Size, species and stress of grade of lumber for all truss members.
7. Permanent lateral bracing as required by design to reduce buckling length of
individual truss members only.
8. Handling and erection recommendations.
B. Submit design calculation for each truss sealed by a registerd professional engineer
licensed in the State of Texas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED
A. Prefabricated Wood Truss: Products designed and approved by Automated
Building Components or approved equal.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Components shall be fabricated in a properly equipped manufacturing
facility of a permanent nature. They shall be manufactured by experienced
workmen, using precision cutting and truss fabricating equipment, under the direct
supervision of a qualified foreman. All trusses shall be fabricated under strict rules
of inspection and quality control required by governing authority.
B. Cutting Members: Accurately cut to length, angle and true to line to assure tight
joints for finished truss.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06175-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
C. Connections: Properly place members and connectors in special jigs and tightly
clamp members in place until the connector plates have been pressed into the
lumber simultaneously on both sides of the joints.
D. Camber: As noted on accepted shop drawings by properly positioning the members
} in the fabricating jig.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Lumber (No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine): Conform to the published stress ratings for
the species and grades set out in the official grading rules of the appropriate lumber
association or as listed in the reference specifications. Wherever this Specification,
or notes on the plans or truss engineering design calls for lumber which exceed the
minimum set forth therein, the Specifications, plans and/or truss engineering
designs shall be applicable, and information stated or shown in one shall be
applicable the same as if in all of them. All lumber shall conform to the species and
fully recognized nominal sizes shown on the plans or truss engineering designs. All
members shall be cut from lumber which bear the proper grade mark stamps of a
recognized grading association or licensed lumber inspection agency. No lumber
shall be used which does not appear to conform to the proper dimensions and/or
grades. At the time of fabrication, the moisture content of all lumber shall be within
limits stated in reference specifications.
B. Connectors:
I. General: ASTM A446-72 Grade A prime commercial quality galvanized
sheet steel of no less than 20 gauge thickness which has a minimum yield of
33,000 psi and a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 45,000 psi. Connectors
shall have a series of nail -like projections which are designed to separate the
fibers of the wood into which they are pressed, in accordance with accepted
nailing practices. All connector plated truss joints shall be designed using the
net area plating method as set forth in TIP Standards.
2. Field Connectors: Where field assembly of truss sub -components is
necessary, connections shall be in accord with details shown on accepted shop
drawings.
C. Bracing: As required by accepted shop drawings.
D. Hardware: As required by accepted shop drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 HANDLING
A. Perform in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting or other damage.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06175-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
3.02_ STORAGE
A. Store in a vertical position above ground on suitable supports and braced to prevent
bending and/or tipping over.
3.03 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS
A. Protect from damage when stored at the job site. Finished members shall be free of
bends, twists or open joints. Replace warped, bowed or damaged trusses at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3.04 WORKMANSHIP
A. Use only skilled and experienced personnel.
3.05 ERECTION
1
A. Erect in complete accord with the plans and accepted shop drawings. Provide
erection bracing in addition to specified bridging to keep trusses straight and plumb
and to assure adequate lateral support for the individual trusses and entire system
until decking material has been applied.
3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS
A. Apply no construction loads before trusses and bridging have been anchored. Install
and secure permanent decking before applying full design loads.
3.07 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of work of the Section, remove related debris from premises. "
END OF SECTION 06175
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06175-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I. Provide all architectural casework items including countertops, cabinetry and
other miscellaneous architectural millwork as shown on the drawings and as
herein specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
2. Division 9 Section "Painting."
3. Division 11 Section "Appliances."
4. Division 15 Section "Plumbing."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Material and Fabrication: Premium Grade for transparent (stain) finish and Custom
Grade for painted finish, per AWI standards. Casework and Cabinetry shall be of
reveal overlay design, unless as otherwise specified, or indicated on drawings.
B. Fabricator shall have had at least 5 years experience in projects of similar scope.
C. All dimensions, substrates, etc. shall be verified in the field by the Contractor.
D. Use maximum length material for all trim, base, etc.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1: Section "Submittal Procedures".
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for
hardware, materials and finishes used in fabrication of casework as required to show
compliance with specifications.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06400-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
i
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location and size of each type of
unit, unit assemblies, accessories, wood species, materials, finishes, hardware types
and location fillers, etc. Include fully dimensioned plans and elevations and
indicate details of anchorage to countertops and to walls. Details and sections
shown at not less than 1-1/2" scale.
D. Samples: Submit fully finished samples of the following items required for
casework:
1. Solid Wood With Finish: Two finished samples 3/4" x 6" x 12" for each
species and paint/stain color.
2. Plastic Laminate: Three 12" square samples for each type of finish.
3. Countertop: Three finished samples 6" x 18" of typical edge condition with
laminate and backing sheet applied.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Casework shall be delivered dry and protected at all times from injury or dampness.
It shall not be stored or installed in any part of the building until after concrete and
finishing work in such parts is complete and that part of the building is thoroughly
dry. Relative humidity in storage areas not to exceed 60%.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Contractor responsible for all details and dimensions with actual held dimensions
indicated on shop drawings. Coordinate to establish, verify and maintain field
dimensions and job conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All lumber shall be kiln dried to a moisture content of 4-1/2 percent. Kiln dried
lumber shall be tempered for not less than four weeks before using.
2.02 ITEMS
A. Countertops and Splash:
1. Units fabricated and designed to with -stand a 200 lb. per sq. ft. loading
condition without the use of vertical supports. Fabricator shall indicate on
shop drawings any special locations for stud supports as required for
attachment of countertops.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06400-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
2. Countertops and splash constructed of phenolic 45 lb. high -density particle
board cores conforming to ANSI A208.1 - 1989, 2M-1 (countertops with sinks
shall have Type 2-M-2).
3. Surfacing of countertops and sinks: .050" thick, high-pressure vertical grade
general purpose Nevamar, Wilson Art or approved equal. Countertop
supplied with a .020 Melamine balancing sheet applied to underside.
4. Junction between countertops and splash caulked with clear silicone sealant
providing a tight sanitary joint. Junction between splash, countertop or any
casework and wall shall be caulked with silicone sealant of color to match
wall.
5. Splash of same construction to dimensions indicated on drawings.
B. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure vertical grade .050" general purpose plastic
laminate shall be Nevamar, Wilson Art, Formica or approved equal in colors or
patterns and finishes as selected by Architect and as specified herein.
C. Provide and install all items, as shown or indicated on drawings, complete in all
respects to function as intended.
D. Shelving: 3/4" plywood with 1/4" banding on 3/4" x 3 1/2" solid wood cleats.
E. Laminate -Clad Paneling:
1. Surfacing of panels shall be Nevamar "Matrix Series" with ARP surfaces in
colors selected by Architect. Bond laminate using manufacturer's
recommended adhesives.
2. All exposed edges shall be laminate banded of same laminate as on face of
panel.
3. Core shall be particle board conforming to Commercial Standard CS-236,
Table 1, Density B, Class 2.
F. Laminated Plastic Surfaced Cabinetry Casework:
1. Cabinetry Custom Grade with Flush Overlay design for laminated plastic
surface.
2. Casework doors shall be 3/4 inch thick plywood plastic laminate surface and
edges.
3. Exposed Materials: Exposed portions of cabinets, including all surfaces and
edges visible when doors and drawers are closed and, including visible
surfaces in open cabinets shall have surfaces of plastic laminate.
4. Semi -exposed Materials: Semi -exposed portions of cabinets include all
visible surfaces behind opaque doors and drawer fronts including shelves,
dividers, interior faces of cabinet ends, backs, tops and bottoms, drawer sides,
backs and bottoms and back face doors. Also, included are underside of
bottoms of cabinets over T-0" from floor and tops 5'-9" or more above floor.
Surface shall receive plastic laminate finish.
5. Concealed Members: Solid Lumber. Concealed portions of cabinets include
sleepers, web frames, dust panels and other surfaces not normally visible after
installation.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06400-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
6. Style of Face Construction: Flush overlay style. Provide casework with
drawer front, doors and fixed panels overlaying and concealing face frames of
cabinet body.
7. Plastic Laminate: Exposed materials shall receive .050" thick general purpose
Nevamar, Wilson Art or approved equal. Architect shall select three standard
colors. Semi -exposed materials shall receive .020" thick Melamine.
8. Surfacing of Countertops: .050" thick, high-pressure vertical grade general
purpose Nevamar, Wilson Art or approved equal. Countertop supplied with a
.020" Melamine balancing sheet applied to underside.
G. Cabinet Hardware
1. Side Mounted Drawer Roller Brackets: K&V No. 1300 medium duty ball
bearing slide (75 lb. per pair capacity), K&V No. 1429 full extension slide
(100 lb. capacity) for shallow drawers.
2. Hinges: Self -closing, concealed hinge with opening angle of 115 degrees
minimum with appropriate mounting plate as manufactured by Stanley, Blum,
or Mepla.
3. Pulls: Drawer fronts and doors provided with Stanley No. 4484-US26D 3"
wire pulls.
4. Shelf Supports: One surface -mounted and four Flush -mounted 12 gauge steel,
zinc finish pilaster standards with 1/2" increments. Provide 5 shelf supports
for each 12" of cabinets. Supports not used for shelving shall be stored in
manufacturer's original unopened packages.
5. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: Storage shelving shall have satin aluminum
surface mounted standards equal to Stanley No. 6783 with 12" shelf brackets
equal to Stanley No. 6785. Standards shall be one piece, full length.
6. Disc Tumbler Locks: Each room of cabinets shall be keyed separately and
with grandmaster into building system. Lock equivalent to National Lock Co.,
68-054-US26D where noted and on all tall cabinet doors.
H. Coat Rod: 1-1/4" round, chrome finish, metal rod with similar finish and material
escutcheons at each end with countersunk holes for attachment to inside of cabinet.
I. Coat Hooks: Aluminum ceiling hook with 2-1/4" projection equal to Ives No. 580
570 installed with 1-1/4" long wood screws.
J. Adjustable Shelving Hardware: Double slotted standards and brackets with
anochrome finish shall be Knape and Vogt No. E85 and E183, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CABINET CONSTRUCTION
A. General: Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication.
B. Drawer Construction
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06400-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1. Drawer Body: Not less than 7/16" thick plywood sub -front, back and sides,
fully dovetailed and glued at all four corners with fronts fastened to sub -front
with mounting screws from interior of body.
2. Drawer Bottoms: Not less than 1/4" thick 5-ply veneer core fully supported
by grooves in all four sides of drawer body.
C. Plastic Laminate Surfaces: All exposed and semi -exposed surfaces inside and
outside shall have plastic laminate surface.
D. Hardware:
1. All hardware furnished and installed by casework fabricator.
3.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate casework cabinets to dimensions and profiles and details indicated.
Verify dimensions in field prior to fabrication.
B. Assemble units in shop in as large components as practical to minimize field cutting
and jointing.
C. Plastic laminate applied to all exposed surfaces inside and out using manufacturer's
recommended adhesives, applied under bonding pressures and at atmospheric
1 conditions recommended by laminate manufacturer.
D. Countertops and splashes constructed from one continuous sheet of laminated
plastic without intermediate joints. Provide cut-outs for sinks and other accessories,
cut-out radiuses at least for 1/8 inch with edges filed smooth and free of crazes.
Provide splash at edge of countertops abutting vertical surfaces.
E. Work shall be scribed and fit to other finished surfaces in a careful manner.
F. All wood surfaces to be set against masonry and/or concealed after erection shall be
given a heavy coat of sealer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using
concealed shims. Where casework cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut
for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners.
B. Anchor cabinet securely in place with concealed (when doors and drawers are
closed) fasteners, anchored into structural support members of wall construction.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for support of units.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06400-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
C. Any existing or new convenience outlet, cable connection, phone jacks, etc. located
} in a position that will be concealed by installation of a new cabinet shall be
extended through cabinet unless indicated to be abandoned.
D. Attach countertops securely to base units. Spline and glue joints in countertops;
provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint. Provide cutouts for fixtures as
indicated; smooth cut edges and coat with waterproof coating or adhesive.
E. Complete hardware installation and adjust doors and drawers for proper operation.
3.04 CLEANING & PROTECTION
A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of
installation.
B. Clean exposed and semi -exposed surfaces, touch-up as required and remove and
refinish damaged or soiled areas.
C. Protection: Installer shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintenance
conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at
time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 06400
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 06400-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
SECTION 07100 - DAMPPROOFING & WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide waterproofing and damp -proofing as shown on the
drawings and as herein specified including but not limited to:
1. Damp -proofing applied at concrete masonry inside cavity.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 4, Section "Concrete Masonry Units"
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's literature recommended instructions for installation of damp -
proofing.
B. Submit manufacturer's literature and samples of waterproofing system.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Surface of coating substrate must be fully dry.
B. Temperature shall not be below 40 degrees F.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Damp -proofing at concrete masonry units inside cavity: Heavy -bonded, non sag
coating with short fibers for spray application equal to Sonnebonne's "Hydrocide
700B Semi -Mastic" and in compliance with ASTM 0-1227-82 Type IV.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
07100-1
DAMPPROOFING & WATERPROOFING
3 91- INSPECTION
A. Surfaces to receive damp -proofing shall be inspected by Contractor for any
conditions that would impair installation.
B. Remove high ridges on concrete, fill cracked areas and correct other similar defects.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. All materials installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and
recommendations.
B. Materials upon completion are to be resistant to water and/or moisture migration.
C. Damp -proofing at Concrete Masonry Unit: Apply one coat approximately 1/8"
thick. Coverage shall be 30 s.f./gal. And installed per manufacturer's instructions
for watertight installation. Damp -proofing shall completely cover exterior cavity
wall face of all CMU walls.
3.03 CLEANING:
A. Remove from premises, all rubbish and accumulated materials of any nature not
caused by others and leave area clean, orderly, and in acceptable condition at end of
each work period.
3.04 PROTECTION:
A. Completed Work:
1. Contractor shall be held responsible for leaks that occur below or behind his
work. All construction must be left in a watertight condition at end of each
working period.
B. Safety:
1. Secondary dampproofing materials such as primers, mastics and liquid
membranes may be flammable. Do not use near open flames.
2. Contractor shall familiarize himself with available information from
manufacturer pertaining to safe handling, storage, personal protection, health
and environmental considerations.
3. Protect air intakes and other possible entry points from fumes.
C. Adjacent Surfaces: Contractor shall be held responsible for protecting all adjacent
construction from damage. Existing structures or installations that are destroyed or
damaged by operations connected with this work shall be replaced or repaired by
Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner at no additional expense.
END OF SECTION 07100
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07100-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 DAMPPROOFING & WATERPROOFING
SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I. Surface preparation, primer, preformed sheet dampproofing, and accessories
for new damproofing system.
2. Work includes a single -ply of dampproofing membrane at all backup wall for
new brick veneer and underlayment at expansion joints adjacent to walls.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section 07600 "Flashing and Sheet Metal."
2. Division 7 Section 07900 "Joint Sealers."
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's product specifications, recommendations and
installation instructions for membrane and flashing materials.
2. Submit three copies of a written list of all materials proposed for use at this
project.
B. Shop Drawings: If required, provide supplementary dampproofing details as
required for this project with appropriate manufacturer's approval.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: If required, arrange for manufacturer's technical
representative to be on project site to advise installer of proper procedures and
precautions for the use of materials.
B. Contractor Qualifications: Work performed under this Section shall be by a single
installer with minimum three years successful experience in installation of similar
systems.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07160-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
C. Pre -installation Conference: Prior to beginning construction, meet with Architect
and related trades to discuss existing dampproofing conditions and new membrane
sequencing and installation procedures.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Provide materials from products of one manufacturer.
B. Deliver materials to jobsite with packages intact and with labels identifying
manufacturer, product name and lot numbers when appropriate.
C. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral
oil, animal fat) or direct steam venting to come in contact with primary or secondary
dampproofing materials.
E. Do not double -stack pallets of membrane on jobsite. Provide cover on top and all
sides, allowing for adequate ventilation.
F. Store primer, mastic and liquid membrane in a dry area away from high heat, flames
or sparks.
G. Store only as much material at point of use as required for each day's work.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Work may be continued in cold, dry weather providing that all provisions of these
specifications can be observed. Comply with manufacturer's recommended
minimum and maximum installation temperatures.
B. Conduct no work on damp, wet or snowy surfaces. Be prepared to immediately
protect incomplete installations from damage by inclement weather that may occur
unexpectedly.
C. Contractor shall be held responsible for protecting the existing backup wall system
from damage as a result of his operations. Existing construction must be
maintained in watertight condition until new membranes can be installed in its
place.
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:
A. Contractor shall coordinate each portion of this work with work of other trades to
ensure that all construction can be completed once it is begun and to provide
appropriate inter -discipline interfacing.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07160-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
1.08 WARRANTY:
11
A. Provide five-year manufacturer's warranty against defective materials.
B. Provide two-year Contractor's warranty against leakage. Contractor shall remove
and replace all materials in order to provide a complete correction of leaks if they
occur. Contractor shall bear all costs associated with such work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Acceptable Dampproofing Membrane Manufacturer: Polyguard Products, Inc.,
Ennis, Texas or W. R. Grace & Company, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
B. Substitutions: Manufacturers listed above are provided within this Specification as
a standard. If Contractor desires to use materials other than those listed, he shall
submit a written request listing the proposed products prior to bidding. System and
accessory components shall be equal products.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Dampproofing Membrane:
1. Type: Cold -applied, self -adhering, preformed composite membrane
consisting of 26 mils of non -reinforced rubberized asphalt with a 4 mil cross -
laminated high density polyethylene film top surface.
2. Thickness: 30 mils.
3. Acceptable Product: "Polyguard 300 Air Barrier Membrane" by Polyguard
Products, Inc.
B. Primer: As recommended by Manufacturer.
C. Liquid Adhesive:
1. Type: A rubber based material in solvent solution used to prepare surfaces in
all applications.
2. Acceptable Product: "Polyguard 650 LT Liquid Adhesive" by Polyguard
Products, Inc.
D. Mastic:
1. Type: A high quality rubberized asphalt based material used to seal top
terminating edges of preformed membrane dampproofing.
2. Acceptable Product: "Polyguard 650 Mastic" by Polyguard Products, Inc.
E. Liquid Membrane:
l . Type: A two -component material used to detail difficult areas.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07160-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
2. Acceptable Product: "Polyguard 95 Liquid Membrane" by Polyguard
' Products, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Prior to application of dampproofing system, inspect and repair substrate as required
to provide proper surfaces to receive dampproofing. All surfaces shall be free of
voids, deteriorated areas, loose materials and sharp protrusions. Remove all
contaminants such as grease, oil, previous membrane, etc., from the exposed
surfaces. Clean surface (broom, vacuum cleaner or compressed air) to remove dust,
dirt, loose materials and debris.
B. Any adverse condition that might affect the performance of this dampproofing must
be reported in writing to the Architect. Absence of such notification shall constitute
Contractor's verification that existing conditions will allow the installation of the
system in accordance with plans and specifications and the manufacturer's warranty.
3.02 PREPARATION:
A. Substrate Condition:
1. Ensure surfaces are reasonably smooth and free from holes or projections that
might cause puncture of membrane.
2. Thoroughly clean surfaces free of mortar splashes, dirt, dust, oil, grease,
previous dampproofing membrane, form release agents, loose particles, or
other foreign substances that might interfere with bonding of membrane.
3. Remove sharp projections, fins and loose material. Fill or finish holes and
cracks flush with liquid membrane.
4. Seal items penetrating dampproofing with liquid membrane. Ensure
penetrations are watertight.
5. Provide fillet at inside junction of vertical and horizontal surfaces using liquid
membrane.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
1. Install dampproofing membrane over entire backup wall and at all through
wall flashing areas.
B. Primer Application:
1. Apply primer to surfaces at rate recommended by manufacturer of primary
dampproofing materials. Prime only area that will be covered by
dampproofing membrane in same working day. Do not apply primer if
precipitation is expected within four hours after application.
2. Apply primer at an average rate of 250 to 300 square feet per gallon or as
required to properly prime the substrate per the material manufacturer's
requirements. On rough surfaces the coverage could be lower.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07160-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
1
3. Allow primer to cure 30 to 60 minutes. Primer will remain tacky. Cure time
may be longer in colder temperatures.
4.
5.
C. Membrane Installation:
1. Install membrane, flashing and other accessory material as indicated in
drawings and these specifications.
2. Starting at the low point, install single ply or two plies, as indicated, of
membrane shingle fashion so laps shed water. Apply succeeding sheets with a
minimum 2-1/2 inch overlap and stagger end laps. Roll entire membrane
firmly and completely as soon as possible. Patch misaligned or inadequately
lapped seams with membrane. Split any fishmouths, overlap the flaps, and
repair with liquid membrane and a patch of membrane and roll in place. Seal
edges of the patch with a troweling of liquid membrane. Seal laps located
within 12-inches of all corners with a troweling of mastic. Seal all T joints
with mastic each day.
3. Apply dampproofing membrane vertically in sections of 8 feet in length or
less. Press all membrane in place with rollers during application.
4. Terminating edge of membrane applied to vertical wall should be completed
to the top of the wall. Seal all edges with a troweling of liquid membrane.
5. Terminate through wall flashing within %2 inch of the exterior face of the
masonry.
6. Outside corners must be free of sharp edges. Inside corners should receive a
fillet formed with liquid membrane. Install an 11-inch wide strip of
membrane centered on the corner. Install membrane over treated inside and
outside corners.
7. Form end dams at ends of flashing. Form dams to direct water out of the wall
through the weep system. End dams should extend up the full height of one
brick course, minimum.
8. Properly flash penetrations and dowels occurring through membrane at
masonry walls and other locations using liquid membrane and sheet
membrane.
9. Apply membrane to within 1-inch of the base of protrusion. Apply liquid
membrane 90 mils thick (3/32-inches) around protrusion. Liquid membrane
should extend over membrane at least 2-inches and up protrusion at least 2-
inches.
10. Provide water cutoffs at end of each work period to ensure dampproofing
integrity.
3.04 CLEANING:
A. Remove from premises, all rubbish and accumulated materials of any nature not
caused by others and leave area clean, orderly, and in acceptable condition at end of
each work period.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07160-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
3.05 PROTECTION:
A. Completed Work:
1. Contractor shall be held responsible for leaks that occur below or behind his
work. All construction must be left in a watertight condition at end of each
working period.
B. Safety:
1. Secondary dampproofing materials such as primers, mastics and liquid
membranes may be flammable. Do not use near open flames.
2. Contractor shall familiarize himself with available information from
manufacturer pertaining to safe handling, storage, personal protection, health
and environmental considerations.
3. Protect air intakes and other possible entry points from fumes.
C. Adjacent Surfaces: Contractor shall be held responsible for protecting all adjacent
construction from damage. Existing structures or installations that are destroyed or
damaged by operations connected with this work shall be replaced or repaired by
Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner at no additional expense.
END OF SECTION 07160
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07160-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide all building insulation as shown on the drawings and as herein
specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Sound Insulation."
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
L03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria:
1. Thermal Resistance: R-Value designations indicated in accordance with
ASTM C-665 is the thermal resistance of the insulation only.
2. Fire Resistance: Material shall have a Class B fire rating less than 75 as tested
by ASTM E-119.
B. Paper and non -rated foil -faced batt insulation shall not be used.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packages, clearly marked with brand
name, type and R-Value.
B. Store materials in area protected from weather, moisture and damage, remove any
damaged materials from the site.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples of materials and complete product literature (with documented R-Values)
submitted for approval to the Architect prior to ordering materials.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07210-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BUILDING INSULATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, Manufacturer's offering Products
which may be incorporated into the work include the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge, PA. (215) 341-7000.
2. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Toledo, OH. (419) 248-8000.
3. Schuller International, Building Insulation Division, Denver, Co. (800) 654-
3103.
4. U.S. Gypsum
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Product options and substitutions
Substitutions: Permitted.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Batt Insulation above Ceiling Noted: batt insulation with an R-Value of 30, FRK —
faced with a flame speed of 25 minutes. Material equivalent to U.S. Gypsum M-S
Blankets. Insulation shall comply with ASTM C 665-84, Type 11, Class C.
B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation at Exterior Wall: Nominal 6-1/4" thick batt insulation
with an R-value of 19, FRK-faced with a flame spread of 25 minutes, in compliance
with ASTM C665, Type III, Class A. Material equivalent to Owens Corning'
"Flame Spread 25 Insulation" or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas receiving insulation work to insure work of preceding trades is
completed. Check surfaces to see that they are uniform in place, free from mortar
droppings, grease, oil or other debris which would affect proper insulation.
Application constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Insulation installed in accordance with current printed recommendations of
insulation manufacturer as specified.
B. Install batt insulation without visible voids, gaps or separations. Staple flanges at 6"
o.c. to side face of framing member, except where local code dictates otherwise.
Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces without laps, bulges or folds. Use batts
free of rips and tears.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07210-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BUILDING INSULATION
C. Fit insulation tight within spaces and tight to and behind mechanical and electrical
wiring.
D. Securely attach and support batt insulation installed below the roof structure with
woven wire netting where shown on drawings to prevent sagging.
E. Rigid insulation at exterior walls shall be adhered to exterior surface of CW with
continuous application of recommended mastic at locations indicated on drawings.
END OF SECTION 07210
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07210-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BUILDING INSULATION
SECTION 07260 - VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Vapor barrier film beneath all building slabs on grade, and above
void forms and protective board for structural slabs.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
2. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -place Concrete."
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation with scheduled concrete pours to avoid delays. Make
provision for installation of work by other trades.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1: Section "Submittal Procedures".
B. Provide product data for material.
C. Provide 12" x 12" samples of vapor barrier material and samples of tape for joints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Membrane Film: A Vapor Barrier having no less than 0.04 perms when tested in
accordance with ASTM E-96; meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM E-
1745, Class C; and wherein the vapor barrier component is no less than 10 mils
thick in accordance with ACI 302.1R-96.
1. Available products include:
a. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (10 mil) by Stego Industries LLC, (281) 367-
0040.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07260-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE
b. Griffolyn T-85 by Reef Industries.
C. Rufco D16WB by Raven Industries.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Do not proceed until fill is level and without voids, and plumbing and electrical
rough -ins are complete.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Vapor Barrier Film: Apply continuously directly over fill or directly under slab on
protective board over void forms. Install with width of sheet parallel with direction
of pour, joints lapped 6". Continuously tape all laps and seal penetrations per
manufacturer's installation instructions using tape compatible with membrane..
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect completed membrane from damage. Prior to pouring concrete, inspect
membrane for punctures or damage and repair as required.
END OF SECTION 07260
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07260-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE
SECTION 07315 - SHINGLE ROOFING & FLASHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I. Provide complete installation of fiber glass shingle roofing on all buildings as
described in this section of the specifications and/or shown on the drawings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Minimum of three years in manufacture of Fiber glass
shingles.
B. Underwriters' Laboratories Label:
I. Fiber Glass Shingles: Class A fire resistance rating.
C. Install shingles to meet requirements of manufacturer's instructions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: Material description and recommended installation
procedures.
B. Samples:
1. Shingles: Two of each style selected indicating full range of colors.
2. Accessories: Two of each item of finish specified.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Deliver materials with manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
B. Deliver materials in sealed packages with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., labels.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07315-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SHINGLE ROOFING & FLASHING
C. Store materials on raised platforms and protect with coverings at outdoor locations.
D. Do not stack bundles of shingles more than 4 ft. high.
E. Store rolled goods on end.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not install underlayment or shingles on wet surfaces.
B. Do not apply shingles when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Shingle Roof: Provide manufacturer's Limited Material Warranty for a minimum
period of 25 years on shingle roof.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SINGLES
A. Singles to be Prestique Grande High Definition with 40 year limited warranty for 90
mph winds by Elk - Ennis, Texas. Color to be Sablewood (Black).
B. Color to be Sablewood (black).
2.02 ASPHALT -SATURATED ROOFING FELT
A. ASTM D226-68. Approx. weight: 15 lbs./square, organic, unperforated, 36" wide.
2.03 NAILS
A. Hot galvanized aluminum 11 or 12 ga. barbed shank, 3/8" head, sharp pointed
conventional, of sufficient length to penetrate through plywood sheathing. Staples
shall not be used.
2.04 BITUMINOUS PLASTIC CEMENT
A. FS SS-C-153B, Type 1.
2.05 ALUMINUM ACCESSORIES
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07315-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SHINGLE ROOFING & FLASHING
A. Provide .020" thick aluminum flashing and drip edge; pre -finish where exposed
with baked on acrylic color coating, color selected by the Architect.
2.06 VENTS
A. Ridge Vent: Plypropylene, baffled vent with 18 square inches/linear foot.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SHINGLE ROOF
A. Felt Underlayment:
1. Lay one layer of felt horizontally over entire roof, lapping each course over
lower course 2" minimum at horizontal joints, and 4" side lap at end joints.
2. Secure underlayment to deck with sufficient fasteners to hold in place until
shingles are applied.
B. Flashings, Vents and Metal Drip Edge:
1. Eaves and Rake Flashing: Nail metal drip edge along the bottom edge (eaves)
before felt is laid and to the sides (rakes) after the felt is laid.
2. Vent Pipes:
a. Apply shingles up to vent pipe and cut hole in next shingle to go over
pipe. Set the shingle in black plastic cement.
b. A flashing flange of mineral surfaced roofing or metal is cut and placed
over shingle and vent pipe, set in black plastic cement.
C. Rest of shingles are then cut around pipe and all are set in black plastic
cement.
3. Ridge Vents: Secure to roof sheathing at ridge continuously and overlay with
shingles as per manufacturer's installation instructions. Vent to match size
and profile of existing.
C. Shingles:
1. Use shingles with tabs cut off as starter strip.
2. Starter strip and shingles shall always overhang the eaves and rake by 1/2".
Nail starter strip using same spacing as for shingles, and locate nails about V
up from the bottom edge. Avoid nailing where cut-outs will occur on the first
course of shingles.
3. Snap chalk lines to guide application. For standard 12" x 36" three tab
shingles, horizontal chalk lines should be snapped every other row 10" apart to
maintain level lines parallel with eaves and ridge.
4. First and succeeding courses: Snap chalk lines parallel to edge (rake) of roof
5-1/2", 11-1/2", 17-1/2", 23-1/2", 29-1/2" and 35-1/2" in from the edge. Use
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07315-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SHINGLE ROOFING & FLASHING
these as the guides to keep the shingle cut-outs in alignment during
application.
a. Start the first "course" (or "row") with a full shingle. Align it to the 35-
1/2" chalk line and with the butt edge flush with the starter course edge.
This will give the required 1/2" overhang on both rake and eaves.
b. Cut 6" off outside edge of next (second) course and align it to the 29-
1 /2" chalk line.
C. Cut 12" off the outside edge of the next (third) course and align it to the
23-1/2" chalk line.
d. A cut-out must never come over a cut-out in the row immediately below.
Repeat this pattern up the roof cutting 6" off each succeeding row.
When the last piece is installed, which is 6" wide, return to eaves and
apply full shingles in each row up the roof. Start the 7th row with a full
shingle at the rake, repeating the above pattern.
e. For best distribution of color blend, each row shall be run at least 4
shingles across the roof before proceeding to the next row.
f. For 2-tab and no cut-out shingles, use a 9" off -set instead of a 6" offset.
g. For laminated overlay, use random offset or repeat sequence of full
shingle, 4-1/2" offset shingle, 7-1/2" offset shingle.
5. Nailing shall be as recommended on bundle wraps and manufacturer's
recommendations. Staples shall not be used.
6. Replace damaged shingles.
7. Remove excess shingles not part of extra stock and debris from project site.
END OF SECTION 07315
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07315-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SHINGLE ROOFING & FLASHING
SECTION 07460 — SIDING AND SOFFIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fiber -cement sidingand accessories.
2. Fiber -cement soffit and accessories.
3. Fiber -cement trim.
B. Related Sections include the following:-
1- Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"
2. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal"
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For soffit and decorative accessories.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Soffit: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of soffit,
including related accessories, through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials in a dry, well -ventilated, weathertight place.
1.06 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure
proper sequencing.
1.07 WARRANTY
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
07460-1
SIDING AND SOFFIT
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within
specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, de-
forming, or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Furnish full lengths of soffit and trim in a quantity equal to 2 percent of
amount installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer's offering Products
which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:
1. James Hardie Building Products, 1-800-9-HARDIE.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Hardiplank lap siding:
1. Non -asbestos fiber -cement siding to comply with ASTM Standard Specifica-
tion C 118 6 Grade II, Type A.
2. Type: Cedarmill 8 %4" W / 7" EXP
B. Hardisoffit:
1. Non -asbestos fiber -cement soffit and accessories to comply with ASTM Stan-
dard Specification C1186 Grade H. Type A, vented where indicated on draw-
ings.
2. Type 1: Cedarmill vented soffit panel 16" x 12'-0" x '/4" (as shown on draw-
ings)
3. Type 2: Cedarmill soffit panel 48" x 8'-0" x '/4" (as shown on drawings)
4. Paint color: to be selected by Architect
C. Harditrim planks:
1. Non -asbestos fiber -cement planks.
2. Type: Cedarmill plank 4" x 12'-0"
3. Type: Cedarmill plank 6" x 12'-0"
4. Type: Cedarmill plank 8" x 12'-0"
D. Siding Accessories: Provide trim and other items as recommended by manufacturer
for building configuration. Sizes are indicated on the drawings.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07460-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SIDING AND SOFFIT
E. Fasteners: Noncorrosive aluminum siding nails, in sufficient length to penetrate a
minimum of 1 inch into substrate. Provide prefinished fasteners in color to match
siding where face nailing is unavoidable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Hardiplank Siding
1. Blind nail to sheathing.
2. Locate splices at least 12 inches away from window and door openings.
Splices shall not align on adjacent members.
3. Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance is required Har-
diplank lap siding is installed to framing members and secured with fasteners
described in Table No. 2 in National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405.
4. Surface nailing at splices may be required by architect.
B. Hardisoffit
1. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. At patio ceiling and front porch ceiling, install with edges covered by batten
(1" x 4" harditrim plank) as shown on drawings.
3. At roof overhangs, install with moderate contact edges as shown on drawings.
3.03 FINISHING
A. Reference Section 09910 "Painting".
END OF SECTION 07460
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07460-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SIDING AND SOFFIT
SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide all metal flashing and sheet metal work as shown on the drawings and
as herein specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 6 Section "Wood Framing."
2.
Division 7 Section "Shingle Roofing and Flashing."
3.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
4.
Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria: Sheet metal work in conformance with latest edition of Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual (SMACNA Manual).
B. Installer: Engage an experienced installer who has completed similar work of
comparable scale with a record of successful performance.
1.04 GUARANTEE
A. Sheet metal applicator and General Contractor shall personally guarantee sheet
metal work for a period of one year after acceptance of the building by the Owner
against any defects or water leaks. Guarantee shall include all labor and materials
necessary to correct any defects or water leaks upon notice from the Owner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 : Section "Submittal Procedures".
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07600-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
B. Submit shop drawings for review and approval prior to ordering of materials and
fabrication of the required shapes and metal flashings.
C. Failure by the contractor to submit shop drawings required above shall release the
Architect from any liabilities due to the negligence on the part of the Contractor to
comply with the construction documents.
D. Samples: Submit samples of sheet metal flashings, trim, accessory items, and
prefinished items of profiles, gauge and finish to be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Sheet metal for, receivers, and counter-flashings: 26 gauge or as noted on drawings
galvanized sheet steel bent to required shapes.
B. Lead: Weight 41bs. per square foot.
C. Solder: ASTM D32, Alloy gauge 58, 50% tin, 50% lead.
D. Gutters, Downspouts: 24 Gauge galvanized steel with Kynar 500 coating. Provide
1" straps at 30" o.c. and bracket hangers at 30" o.c. Gutters to be galvalume.
E. Nails for Sheet Metal Work: 10 Gauge galvanized ring type steel of sufficient
lenght to adequately secure sheet metal work.
F. Precast Concrete Splashblock: 12" x 24"; provide one per downspout.
G. Trim Fasteners: Exposed fasteners shall be of same material as trim or stainless
steel. Unexposed fasteners may be cadmium or zinc plated steel in accordance with
ASTM A164-55 and 165-55. Steel anchors shall be properly insulated from
aluminum.
H. Roof Penetration Flashing: Leadcoated copper 16 oz./SF.Roof Penetration
Flashing: Leadcoated copper 16 oz./SF.
I. Through -Wall, Door/Window Sill and Head Flashings: 3 oz. Cop-r-Tex Duplex by
York or approved equal.
J. Reglets: Equal to Fry original metal reglet.
K. Counter Flashing. "Springlock Flashing" by Fry Reglet.
L. Sheet Metal Fasteners: Galvanized steel with washers where required.
2.02 FABRICATION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07600-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
A. All exposed edges shall be hemmed 1/2" on underside.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION OF SURFACES
A. Applicator responsible for inspecting substrates upon which sheet metal materials
are to be placed for any defects or conditions that would impair finished installation.
Application constitutes acceptance of the substrate.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Details shown are design details, fabrication techniques, and methods as per
SMACNA recommendations.
B. Proper and adequate provisions shall be made in fabrication, installing and fastening
sheet metal work for expansion and contraction of metal and other materials
entering into the work so that pulling, splitting, opening of joints, warpage or other
failure of the work shall be prevented. Expansion joints in sheet metal placed not
farther than 40 feet apart. Dissimilar metal surfaces contacting one another,
protected by bituminous coating to prevent galvanic or corrosive action from
occurring.
C. Counter flashing constructed in lengths not exceeding 10 feet and installed in
receiver so that flashing lays tightly against base flashing and overlaps base
flashings a minimum of 4 inches. Joints between sections shall be tight and lay flat.
Metal at corners continuous. Bent, crimped or warped sections are not permitted.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply
with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely
in place by method indicate, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal
fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weatherproof.
1. All complete work shall be water and weathertight. Joints, cuts, miters,
splices or other installation means made as neat as possible. Fastenings as
inconspicuous as possible.
B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicate, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07600-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
result in waterproof and weather -resistant performance. Verify shapes and
dimensions of surfaces to be cover before fabricating sheet metal.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work.
Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24
inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion
provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and
waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less that 1
inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
D. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter.
Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except where
pretinned surface would show in finished Work.
1. Pretinning is not required for the following metals:
a. Lead -coated copper.
2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow
solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter
from exposed surfaces.
E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and
form metal to completely conceal sealant.
1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat -lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
G. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by
coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red -rosin paper and a
course of polyethylene underlayment.
2. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for
waterproof performance.
H. Roof -Penetration Flashing; Coordinate roof -penetration flashing installation with
roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent
piping with flashing.
2. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on
vent piping.
I. Precast Concrete Splash Blocks: Install where downspouts discharge on grade
unless otherwise shown.
3.04 FLASHING & COUNTERFLASHING REQUIREMENTS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07600-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
i
A. Joints in thru-wall flashings and counterflashings shall be lapped 4" minimum with
laps bedded in sealant.
B. Head and sill flashings shall not have joints and shall have sides turned up (edge
dams) with all corners folded, not cut and shall extend 10" minimum beyond both
sides of opening.
C. Head, sill and thru-wall flashings shall be set in a bead of sealant applied under the
exterior edge of the flashing and on top of the masonry or lintel angle on which the
flashing rests.
D. Penetrations in thru-wall flashing are not permitted. Vents in thru-wall flashing
shall be completely flashed and water tight.
E. Metal reglets shall have a bead of sealant installed to complete system with
counterflashing.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of
metal or deterioration of finishes.
END OF SECTION 07600
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
07600-5
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required for the
complete installation of firestopping at penetrations through rated partitions
and floors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
1.03 STANDARDS
A. All work under this section shall conform to the requirements of the Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc., the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the local building
code. Where requirements specified differ from the requirements of any authorities
having jurisdiction, the more stringent requirements shall apply.
B. Firestopping system shall be a complete system of materials supplied by one
manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installer:
I. Five years experience in performing installation of materials with similar
quantities of fireproofing materials.
B. Requirements of regulatory agencies:
1. Building code requirements of the municipality for fire resistance ratings of
areas to receive fireproofing materials.
2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.: Classification marking.
3. Acceptance by ICBO, BOCA and SBCCI as described by National Evaluation
Service Report, NER-332.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07840-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRESTOPPING
C. Testing:
1. Fire resistant rating of assemblies - ASTM E-814.
2. Compound shall meet all requirements of UL 1479.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports
1. Submit copies of fire test reports of fireproofing installation to substrate
materials required.
2. Submit certified test reports of acceptable testing agencies which perform
testing in accordance with ASTM E-119 and E-84.
B. Manufacturer's Instruction: Furnish manufacturer's printed material specifications
and installation instruction for each type of fireproofing.
C. Certificates:
1. Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed
specification requirements.
2. Furnish applicators certification that material has been completed as specified
to meet fire resistance ratings and application requirements.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages bearing name of manufacturer and
product identification.
B. Reject damaged packages found unsuitable for use and remove from job site.
C. Store materials off ground, under cover, and away from damp surfaces.
D. Keep materials dry at all times.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Safing Insulation: Forming material, minimum 3" unfaced safing insulation with a
nominal density of 4 pcf, and bearing the UL Classification Marking shall be
"Thermafiber" as manufactured by USG Corp.
B. Compound: Pliable, non -toxic, non-combustible, non -asbestos, low density,
lightweight compound shall be "Firecode" as manufactured by USG Corp., "Flame
Stop V" as manufactured by Flame Stop Inc. or "Metacaulk" as manufactured by
Rectorseal.
C. Wood blocking in stud wall as required by the local building codes.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07840-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRESTOPPING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that all substrates to receive firestopping system are constructed according to
the Construction Documents and acceptable to receive fire stop materials.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Safing Insulation: Cut safing insulation slightly wider than the opening. Compress
and tightly fit min. 2 1/2" or 3" thickness of insulation with nominal density of 4 pcf
completely around penetrant.
B. Firestopping Compound: Trowel apply the compound from its container and work
into the penetration opening. Apply compound to minimum 1/2" to 1" thickness on
top of safing insulation. Ensure that compound is in contact with all surfaces and
that entire opening is filled with safing and compound. Utilize appropriately rated
product for specific rated partition application.
END OF SECTION 07840
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07840-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRESTOPPING
■
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide sealant required to close joints that would allow moisture
or air to enter structure between fixed materials as shown on the drawings and as
herein specified including but not limited to:
1. Sealing of interior perimeter joints of window framing, door frames, and other
openings in walls.
2. Setting of thresholds in sealant.
3. Sealing of joints between countertops and wall surfaces for a sanitaryjoint.
4. Sealing of joints of every nature and description that would allow moisture or
air penetration.
5. Sealing of joints indicated to be caulked or sealed whether specifically
mentioned herein or not.
6. Sealing around all pipe, duct and vent penetrations.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 4 Section "Brick Masonry Units."
2. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal."
3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames."
4. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront."
5. Division 8 Section "Metal Windows."
6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
7. Division 9 Section "Painting."
8. Division 15 Section "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning."
1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Sealant work not permitted when air temperature is
below 40 degrees F.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07900-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 JOINT SEALERS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, color range,
handling/installation/curing instructions, and performance tested data sheets for
each elastomeric product or joint backing material.
B. Submit samples of joint backing material.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall submit, in writing, a warrant that all sealant work executed
under this Section shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of two (2) years from date of acceptance of the Project, and he shall remedy
any defects in the sealant work during the warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Primers: Non -staining type as recommended by sealant manufacturer for each
working surface. Material shall not leave residue or stain on adjacent surfaces.
Each joint must be primed prior to sealing.
B. Sealant for Interior and Exterior Masonry Control Joints: 2 part polyurethane sealant
equivalent to "NP-2" by Sonnebom, "Dymeric Plus" by Tremco, or "Dynatrol H" by
Pecora. Color to match adjacent surfaces.
C. Sealant for Re -glazing: Medium modulus silicone sealant shall be Sonnebom's
"Omniseal", Tremco's "Spectrum 2", or approved equal. Color as selected by
Architect.
D. Sealant for Exterior Concrete Paving and Sidewalk Joints: Two part urethane (self
leveling) sealant equal to "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant" by Sonneborn.
"Urexpan NR-200" by Pecora, or "THC-900" Tremco.
E. Caulking for Interior Joints: One part acrylic latex sealant equivalent to "AC-20" by
Pecora, "Acrylic Latex Caulk" by Tremco, "Acrylic Latex" caulk by DAP, or
"Sonolac" by Sonnebom.
F. Caulking for Countertop Joints: One -part clear silicone sealant, 862 by Pecora, or
equal.
G. Joint Backing: Non -staining closed cell polyethylene foam rod oversized 30% to
50%, equal to Sonofoam by Sonnebom.
H. Solvents and Cleaning Agents: Of a type specifically recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07900-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 JOINT SEALERS
I. Precompressed Expanding Foam Sealant: Shall be Gray "Will -Seal" as
manufactured by "Illbruck", Troy, Michigan or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Applicator shall examine surfaces receiving sealant or caulking for any defects or
joint sizes which would not structurally perform or for any unusual conditions
which would interfere with proper installation of sealant or caulking.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean all joints removing all foreign matter such as dust, oil, grease, dirt
or other loose particles. Provide and apply non -staining primer as required by
conditions and sealant manufacturer.
B. When primer is dry, compress backup and insert into joint leaving 1/4" to surface
open or joint sealing or leaving open 1/2 of joint width, but not less that 1/4".
C. Completely cut smooth and remove projection of existing gasket and/or sealant
material at door and window framing to remain to achieve sound substrate for
application.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. It is the intent and purpose and interpretation of this specification that in all areas,
joints sealed shall be rendered structurally sound and impervious to the passage of
water, moisture and dust.
B. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding mixing, surface application,
priming and application procedure.
C. Sealant shall be applied under pressure with a hand or power activated gun having a
nozzle of proper size to entirely fill joint void and shall be forced into joints with
sufficient pressure to expel air and fill the joints solidly. All joint surfaces shall be
neatly tooled to a smooth surface, free of wrinkles and result in a flush joint when
dry.
D. Apply sealants when the ambient temperature is between 40' and 100' F.
E. All junctures between countertops, back splashes and walls shall be caulked with
silicone sealant providing a sanitary tight joint.
F. All junctures between piping and substrate of partitions, floors and ceiling shall be
caulked.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07900-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 JOINT SEALERS
G. Precompressed expanding foam sealant shall be installed per manufacturer's
requirements at all vertical expansion joints as noted on Drawings.
H. Apply sealant bead at least 1/2 inch thick under each edge of threshold. Remove
excess and neatly point. i
I. Caulk perimeter of window frame, door frame or other items penetrating,
intersecting or abutting walls, ceilings, floors, etc.
J. Prime surface as required and apply sealant at all glazing, at metal to metal and
glass to metal joints within the system.
K. Apply bead of sealant at base of wall board.
L. Applay sealant along all hardi-siding, hardi-trim, and hardi soffit. Architect to
select color.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces free of sealant or soiling resulting from this work as work
progresses. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant
manufacturer. All finished work shall be left in a neat, clean condition.
END OF SECTION 07900
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 07900-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 JOINT SEALERS
SECTION 08110 - METAL DOORS, FRAMES & WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide hollow metal doors, frames as shown on the Drawings and as herein
specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 4 Section "Brick Masonry Units."
2.
Division 4 Section "Concrete Masonry Units."
3.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
4.
Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal."
5.
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
6.
Division 8 Section "Glazing."
7.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
8.
Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria: Doors and frames noted to have a specific hourly label, shall be
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. labeled construction shall bear the required UL
label.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures".
B. Manufacturer shall furnish a certificate to the Owner evidencing that materials
delivered meet the labeled and/or fire resistive construction requirements.
C. Shop drawings and details based on the Contract Documents shall be submitted to
the Architect for review prior to fabrication of materials. Shop drawings shall
indicate all hardware mounting heights, reinforcement, opening sizes, etc..
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08110 - 1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 DOORS AND FRAMES
1.05_ PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Material: Individually packaged in cartons, completely protecting
frames.
B. Frames shall be stored under cover on wood sills that will prevent rust and damage.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Coordination
1. The Contractor shall provide door and frame manufacturer with an approved
hardware schedule, templates and hand for all doors. Contractor shall advise
door and frame manufacturer of any changes after information has been
forwarded.
2. Contractor will be completely responsible for coordination of information
between hardware, door and frame manufacturers. Any materials not properly
coordinated shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Exterior and Interior Door Frames : In depth and profiles indicated furnished with
2" faces (4" head at masonry) and 5/8" stops. Strike jambs provided with 3 factory
installed rubber bumpers. Frames fabricated of 16 gauge quality annealed steel.
Provide UL rating as required.
B. Door Frame Anchorage Devices: Provide with minimum of 6 wall anchors and 2
adjustable base anchors, manufacturer's standard design. Provide UL anchors as
required.
C. Flush Doors: 1-3/4" Flush type door with no visible edge seams, constructed of 18
gauge steel faces over polyurethane core or laminated of impregnated honeycomb
cores. Reinforcements provided for all hardware. Exterior doors shall have
minimum R factor of 4 and flush closing channel at top rail. Doors mortised for
hardware. Provide louver and fire rating as required.
D. Lite Door: 16 Gauge, 1-3/4" x 5" tubular top and side stiles and 10" bottom rail
with mitered, face -welded corners. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and
tapped to receive mortise hardware. Door shall be similar to Amweld 300 series,
Ceco "Imperial", or an approved equal. Provide insulated metal panel or 1/4"
tempered glass as shown on drawings.
2.02 FABRICATION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08110 - 2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Frames shall have all joints mitered, continuous full welded and ground smooth.
No putty or filler permitted at joints.
B. All door frames mortised for 1-1/2 pair 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 standard weight hinges.
Frames of 42" width shall have 2 pair butts. (Re: Door Schedule and Hardware
Schedule for Number and Location.) Frames mortised and reinforced for hinges, (7
ga. 1-1/4" x 10" min.), strikes, (12 gauge steel), and surface applied hardware, (12
ga. steel), as required.
C. All door frames shall be prepared for installation of silencers.
2.03 FINISH
A. All material shall be thoroughly cleaned and phosphatized prior to application of
baked -on rust resistant prime coat of paint.
B. Doors and Frames for exterior openings shall be galvanized before primer is applied
using a hot -dip coating of zinc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor ceiling struts to construction above with fasteners to suit conditions. Brace
frames as necessary until built into permanent construction.
B. Extreme care exercised when installing door frames. All door frames which are
installed out of plumb, distorted and not level or in a manner which does not permit
proper installation of doors, must be removed and replaced with new frames in a
manner satisfactory to the Architect.
C. Clearances:
1. Allow maximum of 1/16" clearance at head and jamb.
2. Allow maximum of 1/2" clearance at floors.
3. Allow maximum of 1/4" clearance at thresholds.
D. All exterior door frames to be grouted solid.
END OF SECTION 08110
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08110 - 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood doors as indicated on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames."
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
4. Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Manufacturers qualified to affix each door with NWMA
seal of approval or quality certification stamp. Eggers Hardwood Products Corp.;
Buell Door Co.; Weyerhauser Co.; Algoma Hardwoods; Gram Manufacturing;
Georgia-Pacific are acceptable manufacturers.
B. Design Criteria:
L Fire ratings: Doors noted to have specific hourly label shall be of
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. labeled construction and shall bear the
required U.L. label.
2. Standards: The "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute
shall apply by reference are hereby made a part of this specification.
C. Wood Door Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years
experience in building and installing custom wood doors.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Section Division 1: Submittal Procedures.
B. Manufacturer shall furnish a certificate to the Owner evidencing that materials
produced meet the specifications and label requirements.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08210-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WOOD DOORS
C. Submit shop drawings and details based on the Contract Documents and building
conditions.
D. Indicate door elevations, stile and rail reinforcement, internal blocking for hardware
attachment and cutouts for louvers.
E. Submit 2 samples 12" x 12" in size of door corner typical of veneer and
reinforcement construction.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors to building after wet trades have been completed and building is
within normal occupancy humidity conditions. Doors shall be delivered in
manufacturer's name and identifying symbol on covering. Doors shall be stored flat
with protective coverings provided to protect surfaces. Doors shall not be dragged
over one another.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Coordination:
1. The Contractor shall provide door manufacturer with approved hardware
schedules, templates and hand for all doors. Contractor shall advise door
manufacturer of any changes after information has been forwarded.
Contractor will be completely responsible for coordination between hardware,
door and frame manufacturers. Any materials not properly coordinated shall
be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
2. Door manufacturer shall be responsible for properly coordinating information
received by him so that doors are properly finished, machined and ready to
hang.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Specific Product Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's
standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair
or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) in excess of 1/4"
in T-0" (max. allowable as defined by the National Woodwork Manufacturer
Association Standard Door Guarantee) or which show telegraphing of core
construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of
AWI.
B. The warranty shall also include refinishing and reinstallation which may be required
due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
C. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of substantial
completion.
1. Solid Core Flush Interior Doors: Life of installation.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08210-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WOOD DOORS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Doors noted to have a specific hourly label, fabricated in accordance with
Underwriters' Laboratories requirements for label indicated.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Solid Core Wood Doors
1. Provide Solid Wood Block Core, 1-3/4" thick solid core wood doors with
hardwood edges conforming to AWI Section 1300-G-3 for Type SLC-5
standards, bonded with exterior water-resistant, Type H resin glue,
manufactured by Weyerhaeuser, Graham, Haley, Curtis Corp., Algoma,
Eggers Hardwood Products Corp., or approved equal.
2. Door faces and strike edge shall receive .050" thick plastic laminate by
Wilsonart. Architect shall select colors for use on doors. Plastic laminate
applied using manufacturer's recommended adhesives, applied under bonding
pressures and at atmospheric conditions recommended by manufacturer.
Doors surfaced from one continuous sheet of laminated plastic without
intermediate joints.
3. Where louvers are indicated, provide door manufacturer's standard flush metal
louvers.
4. View Lite:Where indicated provide manufacturer's standard flush frame.
Glazing as indicated on the drawings.
2.03 SHOP PRIMING
A. Transparent Finish: Prime doors with stain as selected by Architect and first coat of
finish as specified in Section 09910 of these specifications.
2.04 PREFITTING & PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE
A. Prefit and pre -machine wood doors at the factory.
B. Comply with the tolerance requirements of NWMA for prefitting. Machine doors
for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final hardware scheduled and
door frame shop drawings, and with hardware templates and other essential
information required to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware.
C. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify
dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in the factory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08210-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WOOD DOORS
3.01- FABRICATION
A. Fabricate all wood doors in strict accordance with the referenced standards for the
grades specified.
3.02 INSTALLATION '
A. Clearances:
1. Allow maximum of 3/16" at jamb and head.
2. Allow maximum of 3/16" over threshold or saddle.
3. Allow maximum of 1/2" over decorative floor coverings.
B. Fire rated doors: Install in accordance with NFPA recommendations. Maximum
clearances:
1. 1/8" between door and frame.
2. 3/8" between door bottoms and decorative floor finish.
3. 1/8" between doors for pairs of doors.
C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frame for uniform clearance at each edge.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Replace or re -hang doors which are hinge bound and do not swing or operate freely.
Replace damaged material.
B. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors will not
be damaged.
END OF SECTION 08210
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08210-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WOOD DOORS
'SECTION 08305 - SPECIAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Special doors as indicated on the drawings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
2. Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Install per manufacturer instructions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturers technical product data and rough -in diagrams and details.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver products in manufacturers original packages, clearly marked with brand
name and model number.
A. Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for a
period of five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08305-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL DOORS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer's offering
products that may be incorporated into work included, but are not limited to the
following:
1. Access Doors: Karp Associates, Inc. KRP-350 FR Ceiling Mounted (1-800-
888-4212)
2. Size: 36" x 36"
3. Frame: 16-guage steel, surrounded by galvanized drywall bead.
4. Door: 20-guage steel pan type with 2" thick fire -rated insulation. (1 hr. rating)
and shall open 175 degrees, self -latching with automatic closer & interior
latch release.
5. Hinge: Continuous piano hinge.
6. Latch: Operated by ring -turn device.
7. Finish: Prime coat of rust -inhibitive electrostatic powder, bake gray enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas to receive door and frame to insure work of preceding trades is
completed. Check surfaces to see that they are plumb in place, free from grease, oil
or other debris which would affect proper installation. Application constitutes
acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Access installed in accordance with current printed recommendations of
manufacturer.
B. Set frames accurately and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. Remove and
preplace doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08305
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08305-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SPECIAL DOORS
' SECTION 08362 - UPWARD ACTING SECTIONAL DOOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide Upward Acting Sectional Door assemblies including brackets, guides,
tracks, hardware, operators and installation accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Available Manufacturers: Overhead Door Corp.; Raynor; Windsor Door; Atlas.
B. Design Criteria: Door installed and supported to withstand a wind loading
condition of 20 lbs. per square foot with a maximum deflection of 1/120 of the
opening width.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and color range.
B. Shop drawings and details based on the Contract Documents shall be submitted to
the Architect for review prior to ordering of materials.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one year against defects in materials
and workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 08362-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UPWARD ACTING SECTIONAL DOOR
_ A. Upward Acting Sectional Door: Aluminum sectional door equal to American
Overhead Door Corp., 521 series.
1. Panel Thickness: 1-3/4"
2. Aluminum Panels:.050 thick, Alloy 6063-T6
3. Stiles and rails secured with '/4" diameter through rods.
B. Right hand five -pin tumbler lock mechanism operational from interior and exterior.
C. 3" galvanized standard lift tracks attached to opening per manufacturer's standard
recommendations. Vertical track to provide weather -tight closing with bracket.
Horizontal tracks reinforced adequately to prevent deflection.
D. Weatherstripping: Flexible PVC on bottom section.
E. Push/Pull handles: For push -up -operation or emergency operated -doors provide
aluminum lifting handles on back side of door.
F. Finish: Anodized finish: clear anodized finish.
G. Counter -balance: Torsion -type springs, low stress, helical -wound spring wire rated
for 10,000 cycles of use. Spring fittings and drums of die cast high strength
aluminum.
H. Locks: Provide slide bolts each side for locking with padlock. No handle
projection to outside.
I. Glazing: 1/4" tinted tempered glass.
J. Windload Design: ANSI/NAGDM 102 standards and as required by code.
K. Manual Operation: Manual chain hoist.
L. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size and type as
recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3
foot nor more than 1 foot per second.
1. Entrapment protection: Photoelectric sensors.
M. Operation Controls: Operated control station with open, close, and stop buttons for
mounting, for interior location.
N. Special Operation: Provide wireless remote control with control devices for each
door to be operated separately from emergency vehicles. Provide all equipment
connections and wiring to fully install wireless remote system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08362-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UPWARD ACTING SECTIONAL DOOR
A. Overhead door shall be mounted to inside face of wall with tracks braced to ceiling
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a track installation. Door,
when installed, shall fit flush, tight and level to floor construction with side jambs
properly plumbed and supported to meet design criteria. Provide all accessory
brackets and shims as may be necessary for a complete installation.
B. Completed door shall have all mechanisms properly adjusted and lubricated. Unit
set tight to wall to properly close off opening.
3.02 ADJUSTING & CLEANING
A. Test sectional doors for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper
operation without bending or distortion.
B. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer's materials or products being cleaned.
END OF SECTION 08362
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 08362-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 UPWARD ACTING SECTIONAL DOOR
SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide storefront (including aluminum doors and hardware), framing
complete with glazing as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
3. Division 8 Section "Glazing."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria:
1. All materials designed, fabricated and installed to withstand a 25 lb. per sq. ft.
uniform wind loading condition or as required by local building codes with
maximum deflection not exceeding L/175 or V whichever is smaller.
2. Aluminum entrance and window wall system must meet or exceed ASTM E-
382 with air infiltration not to exceed 0.06 cfm per sq. ft. of fixed area; water
infiltration, no signs of visible water on any inside surface at a test pressure of
8 psf in accordance with ASTM E-33 L
B. Fabricator and Installer: Shall have a minimum of 5 years experience on projects of
similar size and scope.
1.04 GUARANTEE
A. Installer shall submit a written guarantee to the Owner, guaranteeing storefront
system for a period of 2 years against leaks and defects in the system.
B. Door manufacturer's warranty shall provide for a period of ten years. All hardware
shall be installed at manufacturer and be covered by warranty.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08410-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings and details based on the Contract Documents submitted to the
Architect for review.
B. Submit three samples of each required aluminum finish on 12" long extrusions.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum system fabricated of alloy 6063-T5. Thickness of framework and
configuration of glazing gaskets as determined by manufacturer to suit loading
conditions. Screws, miscellaneous fastening devices and internal components of
non -corrosive materials.
B. Storefront Framing System: EFCO (Exterior) System 402, 2" x 4 1/2" and EFCO
(interior) System 400, 1-3/4" x 4". Provide all accessory shapes, sill members, caps,
and all other trim sections as required and as shown on drawings with minimum
wall thickness of .125". Finish of all exposed framing to be cleaned, caustic -etched,
clear anodized.
C. Storefront Doors: EFCO T300 Medium Stile Doors standard series entrance with
1" tempered glazing. Bottom rail shall be 10" high. Stiles to be 3-1/2" wide.
Mechanical joints using heavy inserted, reinforced plates and concealed tie rods or
fabricated with structurally welded joints. Aluminum door finish to be clear
anodized.
D. Doors provided with hardware set as specified. All exposed metal finishes to match
clear anodized aluminum. All doors include gaskets, sweep, cylinder, snap -on
interior glazing stops, non -removable exterior stops, and push/pull handles. All
locksets master keyed to building system. Provide 3 keys per lockset. Refer to
Section 08710 for hardware sets.
E. Aluminum Trim: Miscellaneous extruded and formed aluminum components shall
match alloy and finish of adjacent framing members, unless noted otherwise on
drawings. Provide in thickness, size and shape detailed.
F. Anchoring Devices: Provide plates, angles, steel frame bracing, wind bracing,
spacers, clips and other devices necessary to support aluminum framing and glass.
Design of connections shall be fabricator's responsibility. Submit shop drawing for
approval.
G. Exposed Fasteners: Phillips flat -head machine screws.
H. Glass: 1/4" or 1" plate or tempered glass as noted on drawings.
I. Glass: At interior framing, 1/4" clear plate glass or as noted.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08410-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT
J. Perimeter Sealant: 2 part polyurethane sealant as made by Pecora, Inc., Sonneborn,
or Tremco Mfg. Co. Color to match aluminum framing.
K. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied mastic complying with SSPC-PS 12
compounded for 30 mil. thickness per coat applied to surfaces in contact with
dissimilar materials.
L. Clear Protective Coating: Complying with AAMA 602.2 for protecting finish
during construction.
M. Weather-stripping: Manufacturer's standard replacement stripping of molded
Neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D-200.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Framing members and aluminum custom fabrications shall be completely fabricated
at the factory for assembly and installation at the job site with provision for thermal
movement for an ambient temperature range of 105°F and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Bracing (Concealed): 1 shop coat of red oxide primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Anchors and Bracing: Properly locate and fasten anchoring devices and structural
framing into structure.
B. Dissimilar Material: Isolate aluminum surfaces contacting or other ferrous metals
using EC-1202 tape or zinc chromate paint. Isolate aluminum surfaces contacting
concrete using asphalt mastic. Apply isolation materials to dissimilar surfaces.
C. Erection: Install framing true to line, plumb, level, square and in proper planes, free
from sags, waves, buckles or other objectionable defects. Connecting joints shall be
even, hairline joints. Securely fasten anchoring devices and structural steel bracing.
Exposed fasteners are prohibited.
D. Glazing: Determine sizes and proper edge clearances by measuring actual opening
sizes. Glazing operations shall be in conformance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Sealant:
1. Contact surfaces shall be dry, sound and free of dirt. Remove oil or grease
with solvents and wipe dry.
2. Prime surfaces in strict accordance with Sealant Manufacturer's
recommendations.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08410-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect aluminum framing and/or doors during construction by masking members
with approved cardboard and paper as recommended by manufacturer. Take
particular care in protecting openings and doors from damage during construction.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Upon completion, remove trimmings and other debris. Replace broken, scratched,
chipped or other damaged glazing. Remove excessive sealant, mastic and other
marks from adjacent surfaces, and wash with clean water. Cleaning of glazing must
be done in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION 08410
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08410-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT
SECTION 08505 - METAL WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Encompasses the furnishing of all materials and equipment and performing of
all labor required to complete the window work and replacement window
work as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, or both.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 4: Section "Brick Masonry Units."
2. Division 4: Section "Concrete Masonry Units."
3. Division 6: Section "Wood Blocking."
4. Division 9: Section "Gypsum Board."
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver windows to project site in undamaged condition.
B. Store windows out of contact with ground.
C. Keep windows under weathertight covering and protect against damage.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Handle to avoid injury to persons and to avoid damage to materials or to work in
place. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace work that has been damaged at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Completely detailed showing, placing and erection plans; all
member sizes, location, anchorage, connections and method of assembly.
Contractor shall carefully check these drawings, then submit to Architect for their
approval, then carefully recheck all prior to fabrication.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08505-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 METAL WINDOWS
B. Samples: Submit one complete single -hung unit of finish specified and one 1'-4" x
2'-8" fixed unit of finish specified for use in sample panel.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for glass and sealant
products.
D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification and test reports that materials and
systems meet specification requirements and design criteria.
1.06 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas that are to receive windows. Report unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Do not start installation of windows until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide Owner a written warranty, signed by an officer of manufacturing company
providing windows, that shall warrant completed system to be free of leaks and
defects in material and workmanship for a period of 5 years after acceptance.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Aluminum windows single hung sizes shown in the plans or as called for
in this specification shall conform with all requirements of the ANSUAAMA, 101-
85 and specification DH-A2-C35.
B. Air Infiltration Test: The window shall be subjected to an air infiltration test in
accordance with ASTM E283. At a test pressure of 1.56 pounds per square foot
(psf) there shall be less than .10 cfm/ft. infiltration.
C. Water Resistant Test: The window shall be subject to a water resistance test in
accordance with ASTM E331-70. There shall be no leakage as defined in the test
method at a static pressure of 6.24 pounds per square foot (psf).
D. Uniform Load Structural Test: The unit shall be subjected to a minimum load
pressure of 30 pounds per square foot (both interior and exterior loads) for a period
of 10 seconds, in accordance with ASTM E 330-70.
E. All windows shall meet or exceed A.A.M.A. standards and A.N.S.I. standards.
F. All glazing and glass shall be in accordance with the local building code or the
federal glazing standards set forth in "Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing
Materials" (16 CFG 1201) whichever is most stringent.
G. Reference Standards:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08505-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 METAL WINDOWS
._%
1. ANSI A134.1 - Specifications for Aluminum Windows
2. FS L-S-125B - Screening, Insect, Non-Metalic.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. EFCO Single hung, Series 3410 with 1" glazing and muttins with top.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Window Frames and Sash Members shall be of commercial quality 6063-T5
extruded aluminum in accordance with AAMA specifications, with commercial
tolerances and shall have a minimum nominal wall thickness of .062" except frame
sill which shall be .094" nominal thickness and fixed meeting rail shall be minimum
.078". The perimeter of sash shall be completely weather-stripped. Balances shall
allow full removal of sash from interior for cleaning and sash replacement.
Balances shall be replaceable. Integral lift rail shall be the length of sash sill. Sizes
of openings and existing conditions will vary. All windows shall be true 1 over 1
lite. Provide extension system for complete installation. The Contractor shall field
verify all conditions and sizes prior to fabrication.
B. Glazing Material: Adequate provision shall be made for use of glazing compound.
The glazing material shall be suited for use with the applicable material. Windows
shall be factory glazed. Window units shall provide for reglazing from the interior
with special tool with -out removal or dismantling of any portion of the window
frame or sash.
C. Refrence Division 8 Section "Glazing."
D. Panning System: Extruded aluminum casing of thickness not less than .078" to full
cover sills. Panning system shall be of same finish as windows fabricated by
window manufacturer.
E. Back Bedding Materials: Bonding -type back bedding compounds shall meet ANSI-
A-134.1 and ANSI-A-134.2. Back bedding compounds or glazing tapes meeting
these specifications may be used singularly or in combination.
F. Glazing Beads: Glazing beads or retainers of any compatible material may be used.
Beads shall be of sufficient strength and fixation to retain the glass.
G. Sash Locks: Manufacturer's sweep locks compatible with applicable material and of
similar finish.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
08505-3
METAL WINDOWS
_ H. Weather-stripping: The operating sash shall be equipped with weather-stripping to
insure a water tight condition when closed. Weather-stripping shall comply with
AAMA 701.2.
I. Sealant: Two part polyurethane equivalent to Dynatrol H by Pecora or Dymeric by
Tremco.
J. Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with aluminum wire mesh and
removable vinyl splines at all operable windows. Finish to match window frame.
2.03 FINISH
A. Exposed surfaces of aluminum members shall be clear anodized, clean and free
from surface blemishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ASSEMBLY
A. All window units shall be furnished completely assembled with glazed panels,
weather-stripping and hardware in place.
B. All joints of frame and sash members shall be neatly fitted, mechanically joined,
and secured. Frame parts and joints shall be made watertight with a trade -accepted
non -hardening compound.
C. All members shall be assembled in workman -like manner to utilize the strength of
the sections and perform according to AAMA and ANSI specifications to assure
neat weather -tight construction. Sash corners shall be keyed and mechanically
screw jointed for squareness and rigidity.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Erection shall be by skilled mechanics. Units shall be installed plumb, level, true to
plane and shall be secured in accordance with detailed shop drawings or printed
instruction. Material and labor for caulking, sealing and cleaning after erection
shall be by this contractor.
B. All windows shall be erected in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the
approved shop or erection drawings. Set windows at the proper elevation and
location, plumb, level and in alignment; properly brace frames to prevent distortion
and misalignment; protect ventilator's and operating parts against accumulation of
other building materials.
C. Apply protective material where aluminum windows contact dissimilar metals,
concrete or mortar.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08505-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 METAL WINDOWS
D. Caulking: Windows shall be caulked and sealed by installer to accomplish weather
tight installation around perimeter of window frame and wall opening. Color shall
match window frame color.
3.03 CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT
A. All glass and metal shall be thoroughly washed. Remove all paint, mortar, labels,
etc. and replace with new any scratched, broken or otherwise defective glass or
metal.
END OF SECTION 08505
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08505-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 METAL WINDOWS
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I. Provide all finish hardware including door locks, lock cylinders, construction
cores and final cores as required to complete all door work and other work
described herein or on the drawings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront."
3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames."
4. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors."
5. Division 10 Section "Signage."
6. Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Material delivered in manufacturer's unbroken containers, bearing on the outside, name,
model number and mark identifying each container's installation location. Materials
stored in dry storage space with no moisture or condensation present.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Contractor responsible for coordination of information between hardware
door and frame manufacturer. Contractor shall advise each party of any changes during
course of construction. Materials not properly coordinated replaced by Contractor at his
expense.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete hardware schedule (identifying each item as to manufacturer and
number), shop drawings and product data to Architect for review prior to ordering of
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08710-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 DOOR HARDWARE
materials. Include manufacturers cut -sheets on each item scheduled. Submit data on
closers indicating compliance with barrier -free codes.
B. Furnish all necessary templates and schedules of hardware specified to door and frame
manufacturers to installer. Submit actual samples of hardware if required for proper
setting of cutouts or reinforcing.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All hardware items shall comply with ANSI Specifications, State of Texas Program for
the Elimination of Architectural Barriers and the Americans with Disabilities Act.
B. All exterior locksets, latchsets and deadbolts shall be mortise style conforming to ANSI
A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1.
C. All interior locksets and latchsets and deadbolts shall be cylinder style conforming to
ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1.
D. All doors required to be rated sahll be installed with UL rated hardware UL label.
E. All hardware shall be installed by a qualified factory representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lever Locksets: Provide Falcon.lock and security products, "T" Series, heavy duty
cylindrical lever lockset having minimum 3/4" throw. Lever type "D" with
interchangable cores and escucheon . Locking function as noted in schedule.
B. Cylinders: 7-Pin standard rim cylinders provided with rings, spindle, clamp plate and
grandmaster keyed cylinder system shall be by Falcon. Cylinders shall be compatible
with cores used for Owner's Grandmaster system.
C. Door Closers: Closer shall be provided with precise control of closing and latching
speeds, fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with cast iron cylinder. Closers shall
be fastened by through -bolting with sex bolts. Door closers and brackets sized
according to manufacturer's recommendation regarding size and weight of door and
draft conditions. Closers installed (unless otherwise noted) so that door is allowed to
swing to its maximum open position. If after installation, a closer does not perform
satisfactorily due to inadequate size, it shall be replaced by the Contractor with a proper
size at no additional cost to the Owner. All closers shall comply with barrier -free codes.
Closers shall be LCN "4110 Smoothie" series with accessibility cylinder or approved
equal.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08710-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 DOOR HARDWARE
D. Wall Stops: 2-1/2" diameter, with hemispherical rubber bumper and toggle or anchor
bolts. Equal to Ives #407. Where wall stop cannot be used, provide hinge stop.
E. Exterior Door Stop: 3-1/8" projection with 2-1/4" base equal to Trimco #1201 ES. All
doors not scheduled to receive wallstop shall be provided with door stop.
F. Push and Pull Plates Listed: 4" x 16" 18 gauge plates, beveled on all four edges, secured
to door with flathead countersunk screws. No exposed fastening of pull handles
permitted. Thru-bolts of pulls countersunk on doors so that plates may be flush applied
over bolt heads. Door pulls, Ives No. 8302-6 or approved equal.
G. Butts: 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" full mortise typical, five knuckle ball bearing at all 3 ft. wide
doors and smaller; equal to Hagar C81191.
H. Butts: 4-1/2" X 4-1/2" Spring hinges equal to Hagar 1250
I. Thresholds: Equal to Pemko extruded aluminum, 171 A, unless noted otherwise.
J. Kick Plate: 10" wide by width of door less 1-1/2" on push side of interior door. 16
Gauge beveled on 3 sides, attached at 8" O.C.
K. Flush Bolts: Equal to Trimco #3917-12.
L. Door Weather-stripping: Cushion weather-strip, bronze 1-1/8" wide by .009" thick
prepunched. Install with No. 4 wafer head drive nails at maximum 2" O.C. on three
sides equal to National Guard Products 43CA.
M. Door Sweep: Extruded aluminum and Neoprene bottom equal to Pemko's #315D.
N. Door Bottom: Extruded aluminum and Neoprene bottom equal to #321 CN.
O. Exit Device: Touchbar, rim -mounted, exit device with concealed mounting equal to
Von Duprin 88 Rim device.
P. Exit Device Trim: Pull handle with thumb latch on rectangular escutcheon equal to Von
Duprin NL
Q. Astragal: Extruded anodized aluminum meeting stile with gasket equal to Pemko
#355CS.
R. Dummy Trim: Single dummy trim equal to Falcon T12
S. Holder: Surface mounted equal to Hagar 270 C
T. Key Cabinets: Furnish and install one key cabinet of size required for number of
locksets plus 10%. Cabinets to be installed at Fire Station No. 5 at location to be
determined by Owner
U. Silencers: GJ63, GJ65 for metal frames, except fire rates and aluminum doors. Three at
each door.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
08710-3
DOOR HARDWARE
V. Push/Pull Latch: Equal to Glenn -Johnson HL6 series.
2.02 KEYING
A. All deadlocks, cylinders, etc. shall be compatible with and keyed to the Owner's Grand
Master keying system. Provide three keys per cylinder.
B. All locks shall be keyed differently.
C. Key side of lock shall be on public side.
D. Keys made of nickel silver only.
E. Construction keying system shall be utilized.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Finish of all finish hardware material to match satin chrome plated 626.
2.04 HARDWARE SETS (TO BE COMPLETED)
A. Set No. 1; Door: 101
1. Lock Set: Von Duprin 88 Rim device
2. Keypad: Von Duprin 7321
3. Electric Strike: Von Duprin 6113
4. Power Supply: Von Duprin PS861(24V)
5. Door Pull: Rockwood RM-523
6. 1-1/2 Pair Ball bearing Butts
7. Closers: Overhead Closer
8. Stops: Exterior Door Stops
9. Threshold: Aluminum Threshold
10. Weather: Weather-stripping
11. Door sweep
B. Set No. 2; Doors: 102, 130, 139, 148, 150
1. Lockset: Falcon T521
2. Hinges: 1-1/2 Pair Butts
3. Stop: Wall Stop
4. Overhead Closure
5. Kick Plate
C. Hardware Set No. 3; Doors: 103, 105, 115, 116, 126, 127, 133
1. Lockset: Falcon T301
2. Hinges: 1-1/2 Pair Butts
3. Stop: Wall Stop
4. Plates: Kick Plate
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08710-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 DOOR HARDWARE
5. Overhead Closure
D. Hardware Set No. 4; Doors 117, 118, 119,120, 122, 123, 124, 125
1. Lockset: Falcon T101
2. Hinges: 1 Pair Spring Butts
3. Hinges: %2 pair Butts
4. Stop: Wall Stop
5. Plates: Kick Plate
E. Hardware Set No. 5; Doors 107, 109, 110, 111, 129, 135, 141, 142, 149
1. Lockset: Falcon T581
2. Hinge: 1 %2 Pair Butts
3. Stop: Wall stops (107,129,135, 141, 142, 149 only)
4. Closer: Overhead closer (at #133, #135 only).
5. Plates: Kick Plate (at #135, 141, 142 only)
F. Hardware Set No. 6; Doors: 108, 151
1.
Lock Set: Von Duprin 88 Rim device
2.
Trim: Exterior Device Trim
3.
Hinges: 1-1/2 Pair butts per door
4.
Door Sweep: 1 door sweep per door
5.
Threshold: 1 aluminum threshold
6.
Weatherstrip: Weatherstripping
7.
Closer: Overhead Closer
G. Hardware Set No. 7; Door: 112
1.
Lock set: Von Duprin 88 Rim device (on active door)
2.
Trim: Exterior Device Trim
3.
Hinges: 1 %2 pair Butts per door.
4.
Door Sweep: 1 door sweep per door.
5.
Treshold: Alumnium Treshold
6.
Flushbolt: Flushbolt on inactive panel top and bottom
7.
Weatherstrip: Weather Stripping
8.
Astragal: Astragal on active door
9.
Dummy Trim: Falcon T 12 (inactive door)
10.
Closer: Overhead Closer on active door
H. Hardware Set No. 8; Doors: 113, 121, 138, 140, 143
1. Lockset: Von Duprin 88 Rim device
2. Trim: Exit Device Trim
3. Keypad: Von Dupurin 7321
4. Electric Strike: Von Duprin 6113
5. Power Supply: Von Duprin PS861(24V)
6. Power Supply: Von Duprin PS861B(24V) (door 113 only)
7. Hinges: 11/2 pair butts per door
8. Door Sweep: 1 door sweep per door
9. Threshold: 1 aluminum threshold
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08710-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 DOOR HARDWARE
10. Flushbolt: Flush Bolt at non -active panel top and bottom (door 113 only)
11. Weatherstrip: Weather-stripping
12. Astragal: Astragal on active door (113 only)
13. Dummy trim: Falcon T12 on inactive door (113 only)
14. Overhead Closure on active door
15. Plates: Kick Plates (at # 140 only)
I. Hardware Set No. 9; Doors 114, 131, 147
1.
Hinges: 1-1/2 Pair Butts
2.
Closer: Overhead Closer
3.
Stops: 1 Wall Stop
4.
Push: Push Plate
5.
Pull: Pull Plate
6.
Door Plate: Kick Plate
J. Hardware Set No. 10; Doors: 106, 128, 134
1.
Lockset: Falcon T101
2.
Hinges: 1-1/2 Pair Butts
3.
Stops: Wall Stop
4.
Plates: Kick Plate
5.
Closer: Overhead Closer
6.
Holder: Floor Stop
K. Hardware Set No. 11; Doors 104
1.
Lockset: Von Duprin 88 Rim device
2.
Trim: Exit Device Trim
3.
Keypad: Von Duprin 7321
4.
Electric Strike: Von Dupurin 6113
5.
Power Supply: Von Duprin PS861(24V)
6.
Closer: Overhead Closer
7.
Holder: Floor Stop
L. Hardware Set No.12: Doors 132,146
1.
Hinges: 1-1/2 Pair Butts
2.
Closer: Overhead Closer
3.
Stops: 1 Wall Stop
4.
Lock: Push/Pull latch
5.
Door Plate: Kick Plate
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Before hardware installation is begun, hardware supplier shall brief installers on proper
hardware installation so that items are installed in accordance with manufacturer's
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08710-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 DOOR HARDWARE
installation instructions. Hardware supplier shall inspect all work for proper hardware
operations and shall give written maintenance and operation instructions to the Owner.
Construction cores installed by Contractor shall be used during construction.
B. Flush bolts shall be installed concealed in inactive leafs.
C. Install rubber door silencers at each door frame.
D. Once the final lock cores have been replaced by the Contractor, The Owner assumes
primary responsibility for security of the building and its contents.
END OF SECTION 08710
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08710-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide all glass and glazing as shown on the drawings and as herein
specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront."
3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria: Glass shall conform to Fed. Spec. DD-G-001403.
B. Installation Criteria: FGJA "Glazing Manual".
C. Security Glazing: Applicable standards
1. Consumer Product Safety Standard 16 CFR 1201, Category H
2. ANSI Z97.1, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
3. ASTM C1036, Flat Glass
4. ASTM C1048, Heat -Treated Flat Glass
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit 6" square samples of all glazing materials to the Architect
for review.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Glazing shall be carefully protected and handled prior to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08800-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GLAZING
2.01- MATERIALS
A. Glass type:
1. 1/4" clear plate glass.
2. 1/4" clear tempered glass.
3. 1" solarscreen tinted Low-E glass insulated units Viracon VE3-2M (used at
exterior storefront system) .
4. 1" solarscreen tinted Low-E insulated units Viracon VE3-2M, both lites
tempered (used at exterior storefront system).
5. 1" solarscreen tinted Low-E glass units Viracon VE3-2M insulated units (used
at aluminum windows).
6. '/4" wire glass.
7. 1/4" translucent glass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Carefully inspect and verify all job site conditions and measurements.
B. Clean all surfaces of all glazing units and materials to which glazing compound
and/or tapes shall be applied and prime as recommended by compound and/or tape
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Field verify all existing conditions and dimensions which receive glazing.
3.02 GLAZING
A. Glazing shall conform to requirements and recommendations of glazing material
manufacturer and Flat Glass Jobbers Association Glazing Manual. This shall
include maintaining proper bite on glazing, properly sized and spaced setting blocks
and spacer shims with proper glazing edge clearances.
B. Glazing to fit line in rabbet with all edges straight and true. Size substantially as
shown on the drawings, however Contractor shall fill sash and openings as actually
constructed whether more or less than sizes given.
C. Material shall be installed in a full bed of sealant, tooling finished surfaces smooth.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Glazing shall be protected from damage during construction. Contractor shall
assume all responsibility for breakage and shall replace cracked, broken, scratched
or otherwise defective glazing.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08800-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GLAZING
B. Glazing shall be cleaned carefully at time of final acceptance, removing all labels,
excess sealant, paint and other foreign substances.
END OF SECTION 08800
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 08800-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GLAZING
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide gypsum drywall as shown on the drawings and as herein specified
including but not limited to: Wood stud framing, ceiling suspension furring,
gypsum drywall and finishing systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Wood Framing."
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
3. Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials with manufacturer's label attached. Protect materials from
dampness or wetting. Remove any damaged materials.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificate: Furnish certificate evidencing that material meets or exceeds
specification and fire rating requirement.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Gypsum Board Standard: GA 216 by Gypsum Association.
B. Tolerances: 1/8" Offsets between planes of board faces and 1/4" in 8'-0" for plumb,
level, warp and bow.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
09250-1
GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Specifications are based on materials made by United States Gypsum Co.
Materials made by Gold Bond, National Gypsum Co. or Flintkote Co. may be
utilized provided they meet design and specification requirements. Materials on
project must be supplied by one manufacturer throughout.
B. Furring Channels: 7/8" x 1-1/4" galvanized steel hat shaped sections.
C. Z Furring Channels: 1-1/2" 24 gauge galvanized steel.
D. Wall Panels:
1. Gypsum Wallboard with tapered edges conforming to ASTM C 36:
a. Interior Walls & Substrate to Gypsum Base: 5/8" gypsum board, Type
"X" unless indicated differently on drawings.
b. Toilet Rooms: 5/8" Water resistant gypsum board.
2. Shower, Toilet Room & Rest Room Ceramic Tile Base: 5/8" Cementitious
tile backer board shall be Durok or Wonderboard. Floor to Ceiling.
E. Joint Treatment: USG Durabond 90 Joint Compound for pre -fill; USG Durabond
Joint Compound Taping; USG Reddy Mixed Joint Topping; and USG Perf-A-Tape
finishing system.
F. Fasteners to Stud: Self -drilling and tapping screws, USG Hi-Lo Screws, Type S.
G. Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant.
H. Door frame Grout: Durabond 90 Joint Compound, Multi -Purpose.
I. Hanger Wire: 9 Gauge galvanized steel wire.
J. Metal Edge Trim: Standard trim of galvanized steel with either knurled and
perforated or expanded flanges and beaded for concealment of flange in joint
compound. Equal to USG 200 of 400 Series. Apply where board abuts or
terminates at another material.
K. Corner Reinforcement: USG Dur-A-Bead.
L. Asphalt Felts: 15 lb. per square organic un-perforated, 36" wide asphalt saturated
felt meeting requirements of ASTM D226.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - FRAMING
A. Fire rated wall partitions installed to provide specified design criteria requirements.
Partitions continuous from floor level to underside of sheathing and completely fire
taped.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09250-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GYPSUM BOARD
B. Fastenings for Wall Supported Items: Provide and install 12 gauge wall reinforcing
plates 6" high (minimum) x 1 stud space wide or 2 x 8 (minimum) x 1 stud space
fire retardant wood blocking, unless specified otherwise at all stud wall areas
receiving grab bars, toilet partitions, and other wall mounted accessories. Plates
nailed or screwed to studs.
3.02 INSTALLATION - PANEL ERECTION
A. General:
1. Use wallboard and sheathing of maximum lengths to minimize joints.
2. Stagger end joints where they occur.
3. Locate end joints as far as possible from center of wall or ceiling.
4. Do not place butt ends against tapered or grooved edges.
5. Support ends and edges of wallboard on framing or furring members.
6. No wallboard installed over piping, ducts, electric boxes or conduits until they
have been installed, run and tested.
7. Attach wallboard and sheathing with screws spaced 12" O.C. in field and 8"
O.C. staggered along vertical abutting edges.
8. Exterior sheathing installed horizontally with tongue up.
9. Partitions indicated sealed to deck shall be continuous except where
interrupted by structure, mechanical or electrical construction.
10. Rated partitions shall have wall board continuous both sides above ceiling to
deck and fire taped.
11. Partitions shown to include sound batt shall have wall board continuous to
deck above ceiling on one side and taped.
12. Wall board held 1/4" to 1/2" above floor substrate to apply bead of sealant.
B. Wall Tile Base:
1. Install tile backer board as base for thin set ceramic tile.
2. Space 1/4" above fixture lips.
3. Seal ends, cut edges and penetrations of each piece with water resistant
compound before installation.
4. Tape & mortar over all joints prior to tile installation.
C. Accessory Installation:
1. Comer Beads: Install on external corners with suitable fasteners spaced 9"
O.C.
2. Metal Trim: Install over face layer with fasteners spaced 9" O.C. where
shown and where gypsum surfaces meet dissimilar materials.
3. Control Joint: Install where detailed, at changes in backup material and in
partitions 30'-0" O.C. unless otherwise noted.
D. Joint Treatment Application:
1. Joint treatment compounds and products, as specified under Materials, shall
be mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's direction to
completely conceal all joints and screw depressions and provide a smooth
surface to receive finishes as scheduled.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09250-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GYPSUM BOARD
3.03, FINISH
A. Apply gypsum board finish in accordance with manufacturer's published
instructions and GA-214 Finish Levels.
1. Level 1: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint
compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and
ridges are acceptable.
a. Application: In plenum areas above ceilings, in attics, in mechanical
rooms, in areas where the assembly is generally concealed, and other
areas not normally open to view. Accessories not required, unless
shown or required by rating. Where a fire resistance rating is required
for the gypsum board assembly, details of construction shall be in
accordance with reports of fire tests of assemblies that have met the fire
rating requirement.
2. Level 4: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint
comound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over interior
angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate
coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool
marks and ridges.
3. Prepared surface shall be coated with a primer/sealer prior to the application
of finish paint. Refer to specification Division 9: Section painting.
a. Application: For use where gloss semi -gloss, enamel, or nontextured
flat paints are specified or where severe lighting conditions occur.
Generally in all areas except where noted otherwise.
3.04 CONSTRUCTION
A. Interface with Other Work:
1. Coordinate installation of firestopping at penetrations through fire -restive
rated gypsum board partitions.
2. Coordinate installation of joint sealers specified in Division 7: Section
Sealants at penetrations of non fire -restive rated partitions.
3.05 PATCHING
A. Contractor shall repair and patch around penetrations in walls where piping,
ductwork, conduit, cables, etc. are required.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Contractor shall completely clean all areas affected by this work and shall leave no
excess or scrap materials or bedding compound on the job site.
END OF SECTION 09250
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09250-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide and install ceramic tile as shown on the drawings and as herein
specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
2. Division 9 Section "Drywall."
3. Division 9 Section "Transitional Moldings."
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all products to job site in manufacturer's original, standard containers with
grade seals unbroken and labels intact.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples for each type of tile, and for each color and texture required, not less than
12" square on plywood backing and grouted.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of installers: For cutting, installing and grouting of ceramic tile, use
only thoroughly trained and experienced journeyman tile setters who are completely
familiar with the requirements of this work, and the recommendations contained in
the referenced standards.
B. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the following:
1. Grout and mortar setting shall comply with, ANSI A108.4 and ANSI A 108.5.
2. Manufacture all ceramic tile in accordance with Standard Grade Requirements
of ANSI 137.1.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09310-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CERAMIC TILE
3. Install all ceramic tile in accordance with the recommendations contained in
Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation of the Tile Council of America, Inc.,
latest edition.
1.06 MATERIALS
A. Wall Ceramic Tile: Glazed ceramic tile. Size & type as indicated on drawings.
B. Floor Tile: Porcelain tile. Size & type as indicated on drawings.
C. Trim & Special Tile: Provide necessary caps, stops, coves, returns, trimmers, and
other shapes as required for a complete installation. Items to be supplied by the
same manufacturer supplying the tile.
D. Cove base: Porcelain tile. Base to match tile color selected for the floor. Size & tpe
as indicated on the drawings.
E. Setting Beds: Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
F. Grout: Portland Cement grout with latex additive by Latricrete, Custom Products,
L&M, or approved equal. Allow for two colors to be selected by Architect.
G. Thin Set Mortar: Laticrete 211 Crete Filler powder additives gauged with Laticrete
4237 to achieve high strength adhesive latex mortar. Portland Cement mix and
latex additive shall be as manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc.
H. Top Sealer: Aqua Mix "Top Seal" or approved equal.
I. Grout Coating: Epoxy grout coating shall be Aqua Mix Inc. "Grout Colorant" in
color selection by Architect or approved equal.
J. Penetrating Sealer: Custom Building Products water based below surface sealer.
K. Waterproofing Membrane: Flexible load -bearing, self -curing liquid rubber polymer
with an integral reinforcing fabric to form a seamless, heavy-duty waterproof
membrane below a protective surface shall be Laticrete 9235.
L. Backer Board: 5/8" Cementitious tile backer board equal to Durok.
M. Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds ASTM C503 with a minimum abrasion
resistance of 12 per ASTM C1353 or ASTM C241 and with honed finish.
1. Description: Uniform, fine -to -medium grained stone. Color to be selected by
architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01 INSPECTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09310-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CERAMIC TILE
A. Examine all surfaces receiving ceramic tile for any defects that would impair
installation and if any are found, make such corrections. Contractor shall apply
leveling coat of dry -set mortar over wall and floor surfaces which vary more than
1/8" in 10 feet. Installation constitutes acceptance of the substrate.
2.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install tile using thinset setting bed. Center fields and patterns of tile on areas so
that no tile is less than half size. Locate cuts in both floors and walls so as to be as
inconspicuous as possible. Align all joints to give straight, uniform lines. Cut and
drill tile accurately without damage, rub exposed edges with abrasive stone. Make
joints in wall tile vertical and horizontal and joints in floor tile perpendicular and
parallel to walls.
B. Grind and fit tile carefully at intersections, against trim finish and at built-in fixtures
and accessories. Fit tile closely around outlets, pipes, fixtures and fittings so that
plates and collars will overlap cuts.
C. Install restroom floor tile using thickset setting bed. Restroom floor tile within 4' of
floor drain shall be installed over waterproofing membrane.
D. Install waterproofing membrane in toilet rooms at shower and at floor drain, over
tile backer board and moisture resistant board at wall base, and over concrete floor
substrate as shown on drawings.
E. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without interruptions except as shown. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
F. Replace or repair areas of visible ceramic tile damaged due to new construction or
demolition work.
2.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Close areas to traffic until tile has firmly set. Do not work on floors without use of
kneeling boards.
B. Before applying any cleaning or sealing agents to material installed in the building,
procedures applied on job sample for acceptability.
C. Tile cleaned in accordance with ANSI specifications and tile manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Exposed surfaces of material sponged and washed down removing all dirt and
debris of every description. Material left thoroughly clean. Use of acid or acid
cleaners prohibited.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09310-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CERAMIC TILE
E. After ceramic tile has been thoroughly cleaned, uniformly apply two thin coats of
specified sealers in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Allow to dry
30 minutes between coats. Dry buff 24 hours after application.
END OF SECTION 09310
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09310-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CERAMIC TILE
SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide acoustical ceilings as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6, Section "Rough Carpentry"
2. Division 9, Section "Gypsum Board"
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread, Class A (less than 25) as tested
in accordance with ASTM E-84 and per Fed. Spec. SS-S-118a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for
each acoustical ceiling material required, and for each suspension system, including
certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with
these specifications.
B. Samples: Set of 6" x 4" square samples for each acoustical unit required, showing
full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acoustical Panels:
1. 24" x 24" x 5/8" mineral fiber tile made far a lay -in grid suspension system.
Panel design is Armstrong Georgen Bevald Tegular, white. Use fire rated
ceiling tile and protected light fixtures in areas noted on plans.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09510-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
B. Lay -in suspension system: By Armstrong, grid to be 24" x 24" pattern with white
finish bevald tegular 9/16" exposed "T" system. Exposed steel members made for
use with lay -in panels. System supplied with all main runner tees, cross tees, wall
angles, clips, connectors, fastening and hangar wires. System Conwed Corp., Donn
Products, Chicago Metal, Flangeclamp Corp. or approved equal in finish as
specified above. Shadow molding #7826 by Armstrong.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling grids and acoustical panels completely installed in all areas indicated.
Ceiling plenum shall be completely enclosed from adjoining conditioned space by
structure, partitions, and/or acoustical panels.
B. Suspension systems installed by direct suspension from structural systems in
accordance with manufacturer's specification. Hanger wire shall support no greater
than 16 square feet. Install additional hangars at ends of each suspension member,
at each end of light fixtures, and 6 inches from vertical surfaces. Do not splay wires
more than 5 inches in a 4 foot drop. Bottom of surfaces shall be flush and level.
Miter corners where wall moldings intersect.
C. The plumbing and heating contractors shall not utilize hangars or framing of
suspension system. The electrical contractor may utilize suspension system for lay -
in fixture installation but shall furnish two supplementary hangars per fixture for
maintaining maximum load deflection. Electrical contractor shall not utilize tile as
sole support for any ceiling -mounted electrical device. All ceiling -mounted
electrical devices shall be supported with brackets attached to tees.
D. Ceilings laid out as shown on the drawings, however, if not specifically shown,
ceilings laid out from center of room in both directions so that cut tiles are equal at
all edges. Place materials to have full bearing on suspension members.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Following installation, soiled or discolored units cleaned to match adjacent perfect
material. Any broken or damaged material which cannot be corrected by cleaning,
removed and replaced with perfect material.
END OF SECTION 09510
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09510-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide acoustical ceilings as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6, Section "Rough Carpentry"
2. Division 9, Section "Gypsum Board"
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread, Class A (less than 25) as tested
in accordance with ASTM E-84 and per Fed. Spec. SS-S-118a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for
each acoustical ceiling material required, and for each suspension system, including
certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with
these specifications.
B. Samples: Set of 6" x 4" square samples for each acoustical unit required, showing
full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acoustical Panels:
1. 24" x 24" x 5/8" mineral fiber tile made far a lay -in grid suspension system.
Panel design is Armstrong Sand Pebble Angled Tegular, white. Use fire rated
ceiling tile and protected light fixtures in areas noted on plans.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09510-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
B. Lay -in suspension system: By Armstrong, grid to be 24" x 24" pattern with white
finish bevald tegular 9/16" exposed "T" system. Exposed steel members made for
use with lay -in panels. System supplied with all main runner tees, cross tees, wall
angles, clips, connectors, fastening and hangar wires. System Conwed Corp., Donn
Products, Chicago Metal, Flangeclamp Corp. or approved equal in finish as
specified above. Shadow molding #7826 by Armstrong.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling grids and acoustical panels completely installed in all areas indicated.
Ceiling plenum shall be completely enclosed from adjoining conditioned space by
structure, partitions, and/or acoustical panels.
B. Suspension systems installed by direct suspension from structural systems in
accordance with manufacturer's specification. Hanger wire shall support no greater
than 16 square feet. Install additional hangars at ends of each suspension member,
at each end of light fixtures, and 6 inches from vertical surfaces. Do not splay wires
more than 5 inches in a 4 foot drop. Bottom of surfaces shall be flush and level.
Miter corners where wall moldings intersect.
C. The plumbing and heating contractors shall not utilize hangars or framing of
suspension system. The electrical contractor may utilize suspension system for lay -
in fixture installation but shall furnish two supplementary hangars per fixture for
maintaining maximum load deflection. Electrical contractor shall not utilize tile as
sole support for any ceiling -mounted electrical device. All ceiling -mounted
electrical devices shall be supported with brackets attached to tees.
D. Ceilings laid out as shown on the drawings, however, if not specifically shown,
ceilings laid out from center of room in both directions so that cut tiles are equal at
all edges. Place materials to have full bearing on suspension members.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Following installation, soiled or discolored units cleaned to match adjacent perfect
material. Any broken or damaged material which cannot be corrected by cleaning,
removed and replaced with perfect material.
END OF SECTION 09510
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09510-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
'SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all resilient flooring materials with accessories as shown on the drawings
and as herein specified.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 9, Section "Carpet"
B. Division 9, Section "Ceramic Tile"
C. Division 9, Section "Gypsum Board"
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials delivered to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with labels
intact. Store materials at minimum temperature of 700 F in all areas for at least 48
hours prior to installation.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature of 70' F in all areas for at least
48 hours before, during and after installation. Maintain a temperature of 600 F after
installation.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following samples of each type, color, and pattern of resilient material
and accessories required, showing full range of color and pattern variations.
1. 2-1/2' long samples of resilient flooring accessories.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09650-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 RESILIENT FLOORING
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tile, Mastic and all other materials shall be asbestos free.
B. Install resilient floor accessories in accordance with the recommended method of
the "Tile Contractors Association of America Handbook".
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Reducer Strips: Tile reducer strips, 1 inch x 5/16 inch tapering. rips
equivalent to Roppe #25 Vinyl Floor. Strip shall match color of rubber base.
B. Rubber Base: Base 4" high x 1/8" thick complying with FS SS-W-40a, Type I with
preformed external and internal corners and stops equal to that manufactured by
Roppe. Cove base at vinyl flooring and straight base at carpeting. Color as shown
on drawings.
C. Adhesive: Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by material manufacturer
for each specific product and for its area of use. Leveling material as specifically
recommended by material manufacturer.
D. Leveling Compound: Latex type as specifically recommended by material
manufacturer.
E. All materials best grade, with no second grade, off goods or remnants allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. All surfaces receiving resilient material shall be examined by the installer for any
defects which in his opinion, he considers detrimental to a proper installation.
Concrete floors dry and free of dust and laitence. Any defects found during
inspection must be corrected prior to installation, this includes any sanding,
brushing or leveling required. Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate
conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Clean all surfaces of grease, dirt, paint and other objectionable matter. Fill and
level any holes, cracks, joints and depressions in substrate with leveling material.
Provide backer material if necessary.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09650-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 RESILIENT FLOORING
B. Flooring and accessories installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
C. At transitions between floor types provide appropriate molding accessory.
Mouldings at corners shall be mitered.
D. Apply wall base to walls, casework/cabinets and other permanent fixtures in rooms
or areas where base is required. Tightly bond continuous base to substrate with
contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.
E. At places where flooring abuts a vertical surface without cove base or at floor
transitions tile shall be cut evenly and without a gap between the tile and adjacent
surface.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect floors with undyed, untreated Kraft paper immediately after placement.
Traffic should be kept off for at least 8 hours. No heavy equipment or scaffolding
should be dragged over the floor.
B. Rubber base shall be cleaned removing all adhesive or other defects.
END OF SECTION 09650
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09650-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 RESILIENT FLOORING
SECTION 09680 - CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SCOPE
A. Perform all work required to complete the Carpeting indicated by the Contract
Documents and all work that can be reasonably inferred to be included. Furnish all
supplementary items necessary for its proper installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 9 Section "Resilient Flooring".
1:04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's complete technical product data for each type of carpet,
cushion and accessory item required.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Furnish plan for each area to receive carpet, showing locations of all seams.
C. Samples:
1. 18" x 18" sample of each type of carpet specified.
2. 6" long sample of each type of exposed edge.
3. 18" long sample of each accessory item.
D. Maintenance Instructions:
1. Carpet manufacturer shall give a written maintenance outline to the Owner for
proper care of the installed material. This shall include type of cleaning
apparatus to use, type of cleaning agent required and material suppliers
address.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09680-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CARPETING
A. Delivery: Deliver all materials to the project properly protected taking care not to
damage any materials.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Temperature of rooms in which carpeting is to be
installed shall be properly maintained at adhesive manufacturer's recommended
levels.
B. Field Measurements: Written dimensions shall take precedence over scaled plan
sizes. All dimensions are approximate and the Contractor shall be responsible for
verifying all dimensions and conditions in the field prior to installation.
1.07 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor shall be experienced in the supervision of carpet installation, with at
least five (5) years experience in this type of work. The actual work shall be done
by qualified and experienced mechanics working under his supervision or under the
supervision of an experienced workroom supervisor who has also been doing this
type of work for five years.
1.08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The following products/manufacturers are acceptable:
Patcraft Commerical Carpets
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Carpet: 28 oz. Textureweave loop pile Dupont Type 6.6 per inch minimum, with a
combination of rows and pitch to achieve 10 stitches per inch minimum, minimum
face weight of 28 oz. per square yard, yarn dyed, with static control below 3.5 K.V.,
Class I, flammability meeting NFPA-253 and ASTM-E648, smoke density meeting
NFPA-258 - 450 or less, 12' wide rolls.
B. Adhesive: Waterproof type recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer to suit
this application and expected service.
C. Edge Strips: Rubber butting gauge shall be Mercer's #EG-XX-B in color to match
base, or approved equal.
2.02 PRODUCTS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09680-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CARPETING
A. Carpet: Patcraft Lineage 10013 Twist and Shout — 13119 Lemontwist.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. The carpet manufacturer's recommended procedures for installation shall be closely
followed. Particular attention is to be paid to recommendations for application of
floor covering adhesive, seam cement and cross joining.
B. Carpet edgings shall be neatly trimmed for tight fit along walls, cut and fit evenly
around all projections and into trim strips. Fit closely and evenly to, in and through
doorways, terminating carpet under doors. Finished installation shall be smooth and
free of ripples and puckers.
C. Carpet binder bar shall be supplied and installed as required at doorways and other
openings adjoining hard surface materials. Secure with nails appropriate for
substrate.
D. All carpet shall be laid in the same direction, unless specifically shown otherwise.
E. Lay carpet with absolute minimum number of seams. Do no use small carpet strips.
F. All cross joins necessary due to layout of areas shall be at the absolute minimum
and shall be indicated on shop drawings.
G. Cross joins necessary due to length of rolls received shall be placed in the cutting to
avoid occurrence at conspicuous locations, near doors or at pivot points, and must
be approved prior to seaming.
H. Adhesive shall be applied to both edges of the carpet at a cross join. These edges
shall be brought together to insure direct contact of the adjoining edges after
application of the adhesive.
I. Spots and smears of floor covering adhesive and seam cement shall be removed
immediately.
J. Perform initial vacuum cleaning of entire carpet installation areas and leave in
perfect condition.
3.02 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall inspect substrate before starting his work. Any objectionable
conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Contractor. Any high ridges,
excessive gaps or other items must be repaired prior to installation. Contractor is
responsible to apply leveling material over uneven or rough surfaces.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09680-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CARPETING
B. Do not proceed with any work until such defects are entirely corrected. The
Contractor shall carefully check all dimensions and other conditions in the facilities
and shall be responsible for proper fitting of carpet in areas designated.
C. Before installation, remove all debris and job soiling with a vacuum cleaner and
damp mop. Install tackless strip in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
D. The application or installation of carpet by the carpet contractor shall be an
indication of his acceptance of the subfloor.
3.03 FLOOR INSTALLATION
A. Install carpet using direct glue method in accordance with carpet manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Carpet shall be installed in the largest possible pieces. The use of small pieces and
scraps will not be accepted.
C. Check carpet before beginning installations and ensure there is no visible variation
between dye lots.
D. Cut and fit neatly around projections through floor and to walls or other vertical
surface, leaving no gaps. Hardware items mounted to the substrate shall be
removed and reinstalled following carpet installation.
E. Seams are to be kept to an absolute minimum. Seams shall receive a coating of
edge sealer applied to base and side of pile yard, securing breadth and end to end.
Seams installed so that they are practically invisible upon completion. Use
adhesives applied in 6" bands at all cross (butt) seams and around perimeter of all
areas. All woven selvages are to be trimmed to insure good side seams.
F. All edges shall be free from fraying. On all finished edges of carpet where it abuts
an adjacent floor at the same or different level, finishing strips must be applied as
specified. Finishing edges shall be mechanically fastened to substrate.
G. Edge mouldings shall be mitered at corners and mechanically fastened to substrate
at 12" O.C. minimum. Do not fasten through carpet. Tap downs shall be installed
without denting.
H. Entire carpet installation shall be unwrinkled, without twist, laid tight and flat to
subfloor, well adhered, and present a uniform appearance. Ensure monolithic color,
pattern and texture match within any one area.
I. Carpet step -off saddle and reducer strips shall be supplied and installed at
doorways, where carpeting abuts dissimilar floor surfaces, and as required.
J. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of
24 hours or until adhesive has set.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09680-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CARPETING
K. Any carpet which wrinkles or loosens at seams within one year from date of
installation shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
A. After carpet installation is completed, remove all remnants, wrapping paper and
debris. Neatly trim all sprouting tufts with sharp scissors. The Owner shall view all
carpet scraps and retain any he chooses for future repairs before they are removed
from the job site.
B. All carpeted areas shall be vacuumed thoroughly and left protected in a manner
ready for occupancy.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09680-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CARPETING
SECTION 09825 - SOUND INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide all building insulation as shown on the drawings and as herein
specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section `Building Insulation."
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
3. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Ceiling."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria:
1. Sound Transmission Class: 5 to 10 decibels.
2. Fire Resistance: Material shall have a Class B fire rating less than 75 as tested
by ASTM E-84.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packages, clearly marked with brand
name, type and R-Value.
B. Store materials in area protected from weather, moisture and damage, remove any
damaged materials from the site.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples of materials and complete product and technical description submitted for
approval to the Architect prior to ordering materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09825-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOUND INSULATION
2.OL MATERIALS
A. Sound Batt Insulation in wood Stud Walls: Nominal 2" thick unfaced batt
insulation complying with ASTM C665, Type 1. Material equivalent to Owens-
Corning, "Firecore 60 Type FB".
B. Sound Insulation Batts above noted Lay -In Ceiling: 3-1/2", unfaced batt insulation
with an R-Value of 11. Sound batts shall be Owens-Corning "Sonobatts", or
approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas receiving insulation work to insure work of preceding trades is
completed. Check surfaces to see that they are uniform in place, free from mortar
droppings, grease, oil or other debris which would affect proper insulation.
Application constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Insulation installed in accordance with current printed recommendations of
insulation manufacturer.
B. Insulation installed in wall cavities exceeding 8' in height, the mat shall be
overlapped at least one inch.
END OF SECTION 09825
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09825-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SOUND INSULATION
SECTION 09910 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide complete preparing, priming, painting, sealing, coating and/or
finishing of all surfaces throughout interior and exterior of building, except as
otherwise specified or scheduled.
2. Touch up surfaces prior to final inspection.
3. Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding
their painting. Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of
specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this section.
4. Copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, aluminum, lead, lead
coating copper shall not be painted or finished except as otherwise specified or
scheduled.
5. Do not paint any code -required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and
Factory Mutual or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or
nomenclature plates.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label
analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use.
B. Samples: Prior to beginning work, use specified colors for preparing samples for
review. Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture. Provide a
listing of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.
1. On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material, with
texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by
Architect until acceptable sheen, color, and texture is achieved. Approved
samples to be kept at job site.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09910-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAINTING
C. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a booklet of actual samples of the
colors used on the project.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water -base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50' F (10' C) and 90° F (320 C), unless
otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45' F (7° C) and 95' F (35' C), unless
otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds
85% or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's
printed instructions.
D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be
painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by material
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
E. Provide adequate ventilation of spaces while applying primer and finish coats.
F. All application of coatings shall be done under adequate illumination.
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials, including coatings, sealers, paints, enamels and paste fillers in
original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact.
B. Store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of building. Job site tinting,
mixing, and thinning required shall be done in this area. Provide adequate means to
protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. Store rags, paint, and
solvents in closed metal containers located in the designated area. Use adequate
means and precautions to prevent fire, explosions, and other damage caused by
paint materials.
C. Temperature of storage area shall be maintained between 50' F and 95° F.
1.06 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION
A. Protect completed finish and painting work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces
from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking
procedures during progress of work.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09910-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAINTING
1.07 _ QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Painter and Applicator of acrylate copolymer shall provide name of previous
comparable type and size installations.
B. Wood Sealer: Shall meet Fed. Spec. TT-W-57213 for water repellence.
C. Materials shall be manufacturer's best grade of respective paint types.
D. Gloss levels for paints required are as per the National Paint and Coatings
Association.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Finish paint materials used on project shall be as specified in Finish Schedule or
Schedule of Painting. Pratt and Lambert, Sherwin Williams, Benjamin Moore or
Pittsburg products shall be used unless specified otherwise.
B. Epoxy: Two component polyamide epoxy coating shall be Sherwin William's "Tile
Clad II epoxy #B62-W-100, or approved equal.
C. Block Filler: Pure acrylic resin equal to Sherwin William's "Heavy Duty Block
Filler" #B42-W-46.
D. Other materials such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be pure and of
highest quality.
E. Concrete Floor Sealer: Concrete floors shall receive transparent, curing and sealing
compound. Sealer shall be Sonneborne's "Lapidolith",or approved equal.
F. Epoxy Coating: Interior concrete block to receive coating shall be filled using a
modified epoxy masonry filler equal to Tnemec's No. 54-660 and receive epoxy-
polyomide coating equal to Tnemec's Series 66 HiBuild Epoxoline.
G. Waterbased Epoxy: Catalyzed epoxy meeting requirements of ASTM D3730, equal
to Sherwin Williams B-70 Series.
2.02 MIXING AND TINTING
A. Thinning of paints shall be done only when specifically allowed by manufacturer
and shall not exceed directions.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09910-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAINTING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Application of paint or finish to surfaces constitutes acceptance of that surface.
Inspect surfaces before application.
B. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted, shall be clean before
painting. Concrete floors to be exposed must be thoroughly vacuumed and tested
for dryness.
C. Tops, bottoms, and edges of doors shall be finished same as balance of doors after
they are fitted.
D. Surfaces shall be free of foreign matter before applying paint or finishes.
E. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under
various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work and
similar items. Shop primer or undercoats shall be touched -up in the field prior to
finish coats.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint
manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate
condition. All loose and deteriorated paint of existing surfaces must be removed
prior to any painting.
B. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil or grease before
applying primer. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sanding cleaning before
painting. Marred shop coats of paint shall be cleaned and touched up with primer,
prior to finish coats.
C. Galvanized metal surfaces shall be given a crystalline zinc phosphate pre-treatment.
Two products for this purpose are Lithoform made by American Chemical Paint
Co., Ambler, Pa., and Galvaprep #5, made by Neilson Chemical Co., Detroit,
Michigan.
D. Coordinate req for galv mtl prep with paint system used — revise above as required
E. Concrete floor surfaces to remain exposed shall be cleaned and properly acid etched
per floor sealer manufacturer's instructions. Fill and patch holes, crevices, cracks,
etc.. Remove any paint, soil, loose material and dust. Remove oil or grease with a
hot TSP solution and rinse thoroughly. Floor to be completely dry prior to etching
with muriatic acid and water solution.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09910-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAINTING
F. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned of any soil, efflorescence, excess mortar, etc. If
wet cleaning is used, allow adequate time for drying to allow for uniform
penetration. All cracks shall be pointed or caulked. All voids in masonry joints
shall be filled. Neutralize acid washed surfaces. Moisture content of surface shall
not exceed 15% in order to apply sealer. Allow new surfaces to age four weeks
prior to application of protective coating.
G. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting
fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish -painted, or provide surface
applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if
necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following
completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items.
H. Scratches, cracks, and abrasions on surfaces to be painted shall be filled with a
spackling compound flush with adjoining surface. When dry, sand smooth and seal
before application of priming coat.
I. Enamel applied to wood or metal shall be sanded with fine sandpaper and then
cleaned between coats to produce an even, smooth finish.
J. Metal door frames shall be made smooth by filling and sanding before finishing.
Touch-up factory prime coat before applying first coat.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply primers, paints, sealers and coatings in strict accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
B. Primers shall be applied in as many coats as necessary to completely cover the
substrate to a uniform appearance.
C. Sand primer over wood and gypsum board with 120 grit sandpaper prior to
application of paint or coating.
D. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform
appearance.
E. Paint shall be evenly spread and smoothly flowed on without runs, sags, curtains, or
other evidences of poor application.
F. Previous coats shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats.
G. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no
overlapping.
H. Each coat of paint shall be applied uniformly to dry film thickness specified in
Schedule below.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09910-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAINTING
I. For painting of partial rooms, paint color shall match adjacent surfaces. Patched or
repaired areas shall not be visible through paint coating.
J. Painting of repaired, altered or renovated area shall be floor to ceiling and
minimally 2' either side of patched area, unless defined break -off is identifiable
within 5', and then painting shall be to that vertical line.
3.04 CLEANING, PROTECTION & MAINTENANCE
A. Upon completion of work, remove paint spots from floor, glass, and other finished
surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave work
in clean, orderly and acceptable condition.
B. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when
touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing.
Otherwise, re -coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point.
C. Copolymer distributor shall instruct Owner's personnel in touch-up of coating.
3.05 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING (COLORS TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT)
A. Exterior Metals: (First coat not required on shop -primed items)
1. 1 st coat - Alkyd Red Primer (3.0 mils DFT)
2. 2nd coat - Alkyd Exterior Enamel (3.0 mils DFT)
3. 3rd coat - Same as above
B. Exterior Galvanized Metals:
1. 1st coat - Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer (2.0 mils DFT)
2. 2nd coat - Alkyd Exterior Semi -Gloss Paint (2.0 mils DFT)
3. 3rd coat - Same as above
a. Gutter, Scuppers, Counterflashing:
C. Interior Metals: Touch up shop primer.
1. 1 st coat - Alkyd Metal Primer (3.0 mils. DFT)
2. 2nd coat - Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel (3.0 mils. DFT)
3. 3rd coat - Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel (3.0 mils. DFT)
a. Hollow Metal Door & Frame:
D. Interior Masonry & Concrete:
1. 1st coat - Acrylic Block Filler (10.0 mils DFT)
2. 2nd coat - Polyamide Epoxy (4.0 mils. DFT)
3. 3rd coat - Same as above
a. CMU Walls:
b. Interior painted concrete and block: Color as selected by Architect.
E. Interior Concrete Floors:
1. 1st coat - Sealer (200-300 S.F./gal.) diluted 4:1 water: Lapidolith
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09910-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAINTING
l
2. 2nd coat - Sealer (200-300 S.F./gal.) diluted 3:1
a. Exposed Concrete Finished Floors:
b. 3rd Coat - Sealer (200-300 S.F./gal.) diluted 2:1
F. Gypsum Board:
1. 1st coat - Vinyl Latex Wall Primer (1.4 mils DFT)
2. 2nd coat - Latex Eggshell Enamel (1.5 mils DFT)
3. 3rd coat - Latex Eggshell Enamel (1.5 mils DFT)
a. Painted Gypsum Board & Plaster: 3 colors selected by Architect.
G. Mechanical and Electrical Items:
1. All conduit, wiremold, electrical panels, piping, piping supports, exhaust fans,
roof vents, clean -outs, access panels, pipe insulation, grilles, registers, and all
other similar mechanical or electrical materials exposed to view in all
occupied and/or finished areas shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces.
2. Surfaces inside mechanical openings to view painted flat black.
3. Factory finished shall have abrasions touched with matching finish coat.
4. Nameplates on equipment not painted, suitably protected during painting
operations.
5. Finish in accordance with specification schedule for galvanized iron and
metals. Provide high temperature enamel as required for specific equipment.
H. Lap Siding:
1. Finish primed siding with minimum one coat high quality; alkali -resistant
primer and one coat of either 100% acrylic or latex or oil based, exterior grade
topcoat or two coats high quality, alkali -resistant, 100% acrylic or latex,
exterior grade topcoat within 90 days of installation. Follow paint
manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application
instructions.
END OF SECTION 09910
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 09910-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PAINTING
SECTION 10110 — MARKERBOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SCOPE
A. Extent of markerboard work is indicated by drawings and by provisions of this
section.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 9, Section "Gypsum Board".
B. Division 6, Section "Rough Carpentry"
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Except as otherwise indicated, major components are to be supplied
by one manufacturer and are herein specified by manufacturers and type to define
overall quality. Substitutions shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specification and installation instructions for
each type of board. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate.
B. Samples: Submit samples of board color and materials of markerboard.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for markerboard. Include full scale sections
of typical installation and complete dimensions. Show details of designs, anchors,
and accessories.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Markerboard - Lifetime of original installation, manufacturer warrants that the
markerboard shall not exhibit fading of color, crazing, cracking or flaking.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10110-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 MARKERBOARD
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Markerboard: Porcelain enamel, single piece panel of 24 gauge galvanized sheet
steel laminated to 7/16" hardboard or 3/8" particle board with .015" aluminum back
sheet laminated to hardboard. Factory assembled, 1/2" thick, square cornered panel
equal to Claridge "Series 4", Type "A". Size as indicated on the drawings.
B. Trim: Satin anodized extruded aluminum.
C. Wall Anchorage: Angle hangers top and bottom.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces and internal wall blocking are ready to receive work, and
opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. Verify with
Architect horizontal dimensions from perpendicular wall surface.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install markerboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide fire -retardant 2x8 x stud spacing wood blocking in drywall partitions.
C. Establish top of tray at 28" above finish floor.
D. Secure units level and plumb.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove protective cover at Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10110
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10110-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 MARKERBOARD
SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS & VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Extent of louvers is indicated on drawing, including sizes and locations.
Coordinate the size and locations with mechanical drawings and
specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7: "Joint Sealers".
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Requirements: Where louvers are indicated to comply with specific
performance requirements, provide units whose performance ratings have been
determined in compliance with Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)
Standard 500.
B. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendation for
fabrication, construction details and installation procedures, except as otherwise
indicated.
C. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of louver units prior to
fabrication, wherever possible.
D. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication
and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and
field assembly of units. pre -assemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and
disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units
for re -assembly and coordination.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for
required products, including finishes.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10200-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 LOUVERS & VENTS
.,
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of louver units
and accessories. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to
adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and other
information to determine compliance with specified requirements. Submit complete
line of premium and standard color samples (12 colors minimum) for selection by
Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Horizontal Blade Louvers: Stationary 6" wide drainable blades, 45 degree slope and
3" vertical spacing. Thickness not less than 0.081" for frames and extruded
aluminum blades (ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T53). Primer shall be thermo-cured,
0.2 mil d.f.t.. Finish shall be factory applied, high performance, fluorocarbon
coating. Color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
B. Louver Screens: Provide frames consisting of U-shaped metal for permanently
securing insect screen mesh and bird screen. Locate screens on inside face of
louvers. Secure screens to louver frames with machine screws, spaced at each
corner and at 12" o.c. between.
C. Foundation Vents: Galvanized, stationary nominal 4"deep by 8" high by 16" long,
45 degrees slope and overlapping blades. Vent construction with insect screen and
water stop. Rear cover shall be closeable with wrench from the outside.
D. Fastenings: Fasteners for exterior applications may be hot -dip galvanized, stainless
steel or aluminum.
E. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and
inserts. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Provide louvers and accessories of design, materials, sizes, depth, arrangement, and
metal thicknesses indicated, or if not indicated, as required for optimum
performance with respect to airflow; water penetration; air leakage, where
applicable (for adjustable units, if any); strength; durability; and uniform
appearance.
B. Fabricate frames including integral sills to suit adjacent construction with tolerances
for installation including application of sealants in joints between louvers and
adjoining work.
C. Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10200-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 LOWERS & VENTS
D. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacing recommended by manufacturer or
72" o.c., whichever is less. No intermediate.
E. Join Frame members to one another and to stationary louver blades by spline
screwed, except where indicated otherwise or where field bolted connections
between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers. Maintain equal
blade spacing including separation between blades and frames at head and sill to
produce uniform appearance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for
installation of anchorage which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent
work.
B. Use concealed anchorage wherever possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide
reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations
require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of
corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in field to shop, make
required alterations, and refinish entire unit, or provide new units, at Contractor's
option.
END OF SECTION 10200
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10200-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 LOWERS & VENTS
SECTION 10260 - WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Work includes all labor, materials and services necessary to furnish and install
all wall and comer guards as shown on drawings and as herein specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9, Section "Gypsum Board".
2. Divison 7, Section "Joint Sealers".
3. Division 9, Section "Painting".
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data and installation instructions.
B. Provide samples of manufacturer's standard color range.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL GUARDS
A. Wall Guards: Shall be VA series as manufactured by C/S Group Inc., or approved
equal.
1. Flame spread shall be 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Accessories: Surface -mounted with manufacturer's standard system.
3. Vinyl acrylic: Color as selected by Architect from standard colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10260-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
A. Install all outside corners at heights, floor_ to ceiling, unless heights are indicated on
the drawings.
B. Install wall and comer guards plumb, level and rigidly secure in place in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION 10260
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10260-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide and erect flagpoles including all standard fittings as specified herein.
Actual location of flagpoles as shown on Drawings or directed by Architect.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of
flagpole required.
B. Submit shop drawings of flagpoles and bases, showing general layout, jointing and
complete anchoring and supporting systems.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit produced by a
single manufacturer, including fittings accessories, bases and anchorage devices.
B. Design Criteria: Provide flagpoles and installations constructed to withstand a 90
mph wind velocity minimum when flying flag of appropriate size. Use heavy pipe
sizes if required for flagpoles type and height shown.
C. Pole Construction: Construct pole and ship to site in one piece if possible. If more
than one piece is necessary, provide snug -fitting, precision joints with self -aligning,
internal splicing sleeve arrangement for weather -tight, hairline field joints.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy Kraft paper or other protective wrapping and
prepare for shipment in hard fiber tube or other protective container.
B. Deliver flagpoles and accessories completely identified for installation procedure.
Handle and store flagpoles to prevent damage or soiling.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10350-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FLAGPOLES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FLAGPOLES
A. Equal to the following specifications for Concord, standards:
1. Commercial ground set, one piece, cone tapered aluminum (C30060156)
flagpole with 30'-0" exposed height.
2. Shaft diameter: Base = 6", Top = 3.5".
3. Maximum wall thickness: 0.188".
4. Maximum unflagged windspeed: 222 mph.
5. Maximum flagged windspeed: 120+ mph.
6. Base: FC-11 spun aluminum flash collar.
7. Flagpole finish: deep luster, highly polished.
8. Cleats: Two 9" aluminum. Tamperproof stainless head bolts.
9. Halyards: Two sets of #10 white water -proof polypropylene, each equipped
with 2 chrome swivel snaps.
10. Foundation sleeve: #16 gauge galvanized steel, with steel base plate and as
detailed on the drawings.
11. Ball: #14 gauge aluminum with a flush seam and gold anodized finish.
12. Truck: Cast aluminum with stainless steel ball bearings and 2 sheaves.
13. Flag: American Flag 6-0" x 10'-0" rip stop nylon with embroidered stars and
sewn stripes furnished with two non -corrosive grommets. Texas flag 6-0 x
9'0".
14. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush seam ball in size to match pole butt
diameter.
15. Flash Collars: Spun aluminum Concord #FC-11.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Prior to installation, verify that pole equipment may all be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendation; notify the Architect of any areas of
discrepancy before proceeding with the installation.
B. Install concrete foundations in accordance with manufacturer's standards.
1. Cleat Cover and Halyard Boxes: Key operated cylinder lock box of finish to
match pole.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10350-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FLAGPOLES
SECTION 10440 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SCOPE
A. Work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and
install all signage as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 9, Section "Gypsum Board"
B. Division 4, Section " Brick Masonry Units"
C. Division 5, Section "Metal Fabrications"
D. Division 3, Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete"
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for all work for review prior to fabrication of materials.
Shop drawings of individual letter signage shall indicate spacing. Shop drawings of
all signage shall be drawn to scale, letter characters in type style specified and
spacing shown exactly as sign is to be fabricated.
B. Submit samples of all colors for selection by Architect and materials proposed for
use prior to fabrication.
C. Submit two product sample signs with pictogram, tactile characters, and Braille.
D. Submit sign schedule location key plan for all signage.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials properly protected and packaged so that no damage occurs during transit.
Materials when delivered, protected by the Contractor against damage or theft.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10440-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SIGNAGE
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Signage shall meet government regulation for raised image signage and criteria of
the Americans with Disabilities Act.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Materials and equipment as well as workmanship shall conform to the highest
commercial standards available. Parts not identified specifically on Drawings shall
be materials appropriate to job site conditions. All color changes made with sharp,
clean even edges providing clear separation of sign copy.
2.02 MATERIALS - SPECIFIC
A. Aluminum letters at exterior sign on building wall: Flat cut aluminum letters,
Optima type style as indicated on drawings, equal to Gemini architectural letters.
Letters shall be primed and painted with two coats of baked enamel, color to be
selected by Architect from standard colors. Letters shall be 8" unless noted
otherwise in drawings, and number "3" shall be 28" cast with a backlit channel.
Letters shall be mounted as per method #P-8 with masonry anchors and project 1"
from wall.
B. Aluminum Letters at interior lobby: Flat cut aluminum letters, Optima type style as
indicated on drawings, equal to Gemeni architectural letters. Letters shall be primed
and painted with two coats of baked enamel, color to be selected by Architect from
standard colors. Letters shall be 4" unless noted otherwise in drawings, and number
"3" shall be 12". Letters shall be mounted to project 1/2" from wall.
C. Interior Room Signage
1. Sign Type: Kroy non -glare "Contemporary ADA Tactile Sign Series", or
approved equal by Best. Allow one sign per interior door unless otherwise
noted.
2. Sign Size: 6"x6"xl/2" multiple line messages, typically or minimum size to
accommodate requirements.
3. Letters:
a. Letter Style: Sans Serif Helvetica Medium; w/letter width to height ratio
between 3:5 and 1:1 and between 1:5 and 1:10.
b. Size of Letters and Numbers: 3/4" High and raised.
C. Letter Type: ALL CAPITALS
d. Letters and Numbers: Accompanied with Grade II Braille.
e. Braille Dimensions: .059" dot diameter, .09" interdot spacing,
horizontal separation between cells of .241" and vertical separation
between cells shall be .395".
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10440-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SIGNAGE
f. Pictograms: Integrate verbal and Braille description below each raised
pictogram.
g. Message Placement: Left justified.
h. Margin Distance: Equal on all sides
i. Interline Spacing for multiple lines of copy: 1/4" minimum.
j. Letter Color: Eggshell white.
k. Background Color: Color to be selected by Architect with matte or non -
glare finish.
1. Mounting: Double back adhesive tape.
4. Messages: Listing of signage messages shall be provided by Architect. Allow
for room name on each sign.
D. Exterior Parking Signage:
1. Sign Type: 16" Gauge galvanized steel with 1" radius corners, shop painted
and screw attached to 2" galvanized pipe post set in concrete footing. Allow
for 1 sign including van accessible.
E. Street Address: Flat cut aluminum numbers, Optima type style as indicated on
drawings, equal to Gemeni architectural letters. Numbers shall be primed and
painted with two coats of baked enamel, color to be selected by architect from
standard colors. Numbers shall be 8". Numbers shall be mounted as per method
#P-8 with masonry anchors and project 1" from wall.
F. Handicap Signage: Refer to site plan and handicap signage detail on drawings.
G. Plaque:
1. One plaque:
a. Material: Cast Metal.
b. Design of plaque is included in the construction documents. Wording of
plaque to be submitted and approved by architect prior to manufacturing
of plaque.
1) Plaque shall be 18" wide by 24" high
2) Font: Optima, bold, raised; sizes as indicated on drawings
3) Margin Distance: as indicated on drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Exterior aluminum letters applied to clean, sound substrate. Letters installed
securely, level, plumb, and true in spacing.
B. Interior signage applied to clean, sound substrate. This signage contractor
responsible to properly clean substrates so that letters may be properly applied.
Materials installed level, plumb, and true in spacing. Coordinate exact location
with Architect.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10440-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SIGNAGE
C. Install monument sign between brick columns. Support sign on metal straps on the
top and sides as per detailed drawings. (REF. C 1.2)
D. Install building plaque 5'6" A.F.F.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10440-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SIGNAGE
SECTION 10520 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER &ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Extent of fire extinguisher and accessories will be determined by the local Fire
Marshall with respect to number, size and type.
B. Definition: "Fire extinguisher" as used in this section refers to units which can be
hand -carried as opposed to those which are equipped with wheels or to fixed fire
extinguishing systems.
C. Types of products required include:
1. Fire extinguisher cabinets
2. Mounting brackets.
3. Fire extinguishers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain products in this section from one
manufacturer.
B. UL-Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are UL-listed
and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher
indicated.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal shall include manufacturer's product literature, both pictorial and written.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PORTABLE TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10520-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRE EXTINGUISHER & ACCESSORIES
A. Fire Extinguishers: Equal to J.L. Industries "Cosmic E" Series Model 10E, 2A-
' ' 1OBC with nozzle. Fire extinguishers shall be a multi -purpose dry chemical type,
enameled metal containers with pressure indicating gauges, for Class A, B, and C
fires. Approved equal fire extinguisher as manufactured by Larsen's Manufacturing
Co., or Muckle Manufacturing Co. will also be acceptable for use on this project.
B. Kitchen Area Fire Extinguishers: Equal to J. L. Industries "Galaxy Series - Model
6" wall -mounted, dry chemical type K U/L rated, 6 lb. capacity fire extinguishers
with pressure gauge.
C. Brackets: Equal to J. L. Industries Mark Brackets, Model No. MB 846 complete
with required anchors, of required size for Model 10E fire extinguisher and "Mark
Brackets", Model MB808 for Model 6 fire extinguisher.
D. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Semi -recessed, full glass, semi recessed, square trim 1-
1/4, one-piece steel cabinet, equal to Larson's #2712-RK. Owner shall provide fire
extinguisher regular dry chemical, Type No. DC5. Provide all glass door panel
without lock. Unit shall be factory primed. Top of rough opening for unit shall be
at 5'-4" A.F.F., unless dictated by governing authority. Color to be white.
E. Anchors: Non -corrosive types as required by wall conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install items included in this section in location and at mounting height indicated, or
if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing
authorities as directed by local fire marshal.
B. Securely fasten mounting brackets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with
manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10520-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRE EXTINGUISHER & ACCESSORIES
SECTION 10551 — BUNKER GEAR STORAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
i Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide and install gear storage units as shown on the drawings and as herein
specified.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 4, Section "Concrete Masonry Units"
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all products to job site in manufacturer's original, standard containers with
seals unbroken and labels intact.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for all products specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide GearGrid storage units manufactured by Mid -Minnesota Wire, 670 SW 15`h
Street, Forest Lake, MN, 55025, 888-643-6694. Fax 651-464-4780 website:
www.geargrid.com
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Provide storage units equal to GearGrid wall mount single sided system.
1. 2 adjustable shelves per unit.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10551-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BUNKER GEAR STORAGE
2. 3 adjustable apparel hooks per unit.
3. 1 nameplate holder per unit.
4. 20" wide x 20" deep x 72" tall
5. Accessories (1 per unit):
a. Gearglove dryng hanger
b. Geardryer coat dryng hanger
C. Helmet Holder
2.03 FINISH
A. Durable powder coat finish, color: red.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine all surfaces receiving gear storage units for any defects that would impair
installation and if any are found, make such corrections.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install units using manufacturer's standard recommended methods. Use
manufacturer's standard hardware where recommended to secure units to the wall.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces.
B. Protection: Installer shall advise contractor of final protection and maintenance
conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage at time of
acceptance.
END OF SECTION 10551
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10551-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 BUNKER GEAR STORAGE
SECTION 10670 - STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide and install mechanically -assisted storage shelving, including shelving,
carriages, deck and track assembly as shown on drawings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9: Section Gypsum Wallboard
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver storage shelving in factory cartons with labels intact, legibly
marked.
B. Storage: Store equipment in such a manner to protect equipment from the weather.
C. Protection: Wrapping and protective covering shall remain on items until
components are ready for installation.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Entire system shall be manufactured by a single company regularly engaged (at least
five years) in the manufacture of steel movable storage systems.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, installation instructions, and
color finish range of laminates and paints.
1.06 WARRANTY
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10670-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 STORAGE SHELVING
A. Provide Owner a written warranty from manufacturer which shall warrant the
shelving system to be free of defects in material and workmanship for five years
from date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Furnish and install in layout shown on drawings:
1. Adjustable post bracket system manufactured by USA Restaurant Equipment
(1-888-594-2239). System shall include (4) Post Kits, 54" long, chrome finish,
model no. PK54; (4) Wire Shelves, 18" W x 42" L, stainless steel finish,
model no. S 1842S; (8) Post Shelf Brackets, 18" W, single model no.
APBI8CS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect flooring, walls, and related adjacent construction that would prevent quality
installation of unit.
B. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.
3.02 FABRICATION
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install shelving plumb and level in accordance with final, approved layout
configurations and in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove crating and packing materials from premises.
B. Clean surfaces free of fingerprints, markings and dust.
END OF SECTION 10670
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10670-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 STORAGE SHELVING
SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide accessories as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6, Section "Rough Carpentry"
2. Division 9, Section "Gypsum Board"
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Model numbers listed for toilet accessories are items manufactured by Bobrick
Corporation. Items as made by the Bradley Corp., American Dispenser Co. Charles
Parker Co. may be used provided materials meet performance and design
requirements herein specified.
B. All bathroom fixtures and accessories shall comply with all ADA federal, state and
local Handicapped standards.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver items in manufacturer's unopened protective cartons. Maintain covers on
units until installation is complete. Remove protective covers at final clean-up of
installation.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for
each toilet accessory.
PART2-PRODUCTS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10810-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TOILET ACCESSORIES
2.OL ITEMS
A. Accessories required for each residential bathroom
1. Surface -mounted hook strip equal to Bobrick No. B-232 in each shower area.
2. Towel bar, 18" and 24" long, locations to be determined by Architect. Towel
bar shall be 1" diameter stainless steel, equal to Bobrick No. B-205.
B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Surface mounted double roll holder, Bobrick No. B-2740.
C. Undersink Pipe Insulation: Vinyl cover pipe insulation, ADA compliant, shall be
Bocar Products "TrapWrap" C50OR Series in standard color, or approved equal.
D. Grab Bars: 1-1/2" diameter satin finish stainless steel grab bar sets with concealed
fastenings. Bobrick Series B-6806. Lengths and mounting configurations shall
comply with all state and local Handicapped code requirements.
E. Mirrors:
1. No. 1: quality 1/4" float plate glass selected for silvering, electro-copper plated
by galvanic process, surface -mounted mirror with stainless steel channel and
filler strip on 1/8" non-abrasive polyethylene padding equal to Bobrick No. B-
165-2436.
F. Shower Curtain: Vinyl shower curtain Opaque matt white vinyl .008" thick nickel -
plated brass grommets 6" O.C. Bottom and sides hemmed. Equal to Bobrick 204-2
showerhooks type 304 S.S. for 1-1/4" rod dqual to Bobrick 201-1.
G. Shower Rod: S.S 1 %4" X 36" equal to Bobrick -
B-6047 x 36
H. Robe Hook: One-piece construction of type 304 stainless steel, surface -mounted,
equal to Bobrick #B-6727.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All handicapped bathroom fixtures and toilet accessories shall comply with all
federal, state and local Handicapped code requirements and comply with TAS
(Texas Accessibility Standards) mounting locations and heights.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Inspect blocking and plate inserts in framing to determine if material is in proper
position for installation of accessories prior to wallboard surfacing being applied.
Units securely attached to framing. Grab bars installed to withstand a 900 lb.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10810-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TOILET ACCESSORIES
loading condition; provide necessary concealed anchorage devices to meet load
requirements.
END OF SECTION 10810
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 10810-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TOILET ACCESSORIES
SECTION 11133 - TELEVISION ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Television accessories as shown on the drawings and as herein specified shall
be installed in each classroom and as indicated on drawings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9, Section "Gypsum Board".
2. Division 6, Section "Rough Carpentry".
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Peerless Industries.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings, manufacturer's standard brochures and details based on the contract
documents submitted to the architect for review and approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ITEMS
A. Television Mounting Bracket: Mechanical mounting bracket of heavy gauge steel
and finished with epoxy in color matte black equal to Peerless Industries "Jumbo
Mount" No. JMC 2650 PA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 11133 - 1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TELEVISION ACCESSORIES
A. Contractor to examine mounting and operation prior to installation. Verify site
conditions prior to installation. Field measurements must be verified.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Materials installed level, plumb, straight and true to line. Operable mechanisms
properly adjusted.
B. Contractor shall install and coordinate locations for mounting brackets with
Architect.
END OF SECTION 11133
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 11133 - 2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 TELEVISION ACCESSORIES
SECTION 11452 - APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I. Furnish and install electric range and hood, dishwasher, refrigerators and
undercounter ice maker in kitchen.
2. Furnish and install extractor, washing machine and dryer.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6, Section "Architectural Woodwork"
2. Electrical Connections: Division 16
3. Venting: Division 15
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide residential equipment which complies with standards and bears certification
labels as follows:
1. Provide residential equipment with U. L. labels.
1.04 PRODUCT STORAGE, DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers
after spaces to receive them have been fully closed.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of
residential equipment, including data indicating compliance with requirements.
Submit operating and maintenance instructions for each item of residential
equipment.
B. Submit schedule of residential equipment, using same unit and building
designations shown on drawings.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 11452 - 1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 APPLIANCES
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty for each item of residential
equipment.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other trades by providing requirements for proper installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED
A. Undercounter Ice Machine: 34.4" H x 18" W x 23.25" D, 35# storage. equal to
KitchenAid #KU 1 S 185JP. Color : Stainless
B. Range : 3 6 " (6) burner gas range with convection oven by WOLF.
1. Finish : stainless steel with red knobs
2. Ignition System: electronic
3. Side panels to be insulated
C. Refrigerator: Provide (3) pullout freezer refrigerator equal to Amana #ABB2527D.
1. Color: White
D. Dishwasher: Provide (2) dishwashers equal to Amana #ADB3500AW.
1. Color: Stainless Steel
E. Heavy Duty Washer: Provide top load washer equal to Amana #NAV5805AW.
1. Color: White
F. Clothes Dryer: Provide front load dryer equal to Amana #NDE2335AY.
1. Color: White
G. Extractor : Provide speed washer extractor 30 lb. capacity, 14" door (minimum)
equal to Speed Queen #SC30.
H. Ice Machine: Provide 1880 lbs. ice machine, w/ half dice cube size equal to
Manitowoc #SY-1894N, with ice storage bin and JC-1395A remote condenser.
1. Color: Stainless Steel.
2.02 FINISH
A. Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 11452 - 2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 APPLIANCES
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Securely anchor units to supporting cabinetry or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough
openings are completely concealed.
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Test each item of residential equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary
adjustments.
B. Verify that accessory items required have been furnished.
C. Remove packing material from residential equipment items and leave units in clean
condition, ready for operation.
END OF SECTION 11452
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 11452 - 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 APPLIANCES
SECTION 12490C - WINDOW TREATMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Types of window treatment work in this section includes horizontal blinds.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6: Section "Rough Carpentry".
2. Division 9: Section "Gypsum Board".
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide window treatment units which are complete assemblies produced by one
manufacturer for each type required, including hardware, accessory items, mounting
brackets, and fastenings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for
each type of window treatment unit required. Include methods of installation for
each type of opening, supporting structure, and shop drawings showing size.
Submit complete range of standard colors for each product for selection by
Architect.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. Blinds and louvers shall be guaranteed against warp, twist, bow, brittleness and
color change. Contractor will provide replacement blinds or louvers for faulty units
for a period of three years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 HORIZONTAL BLINDS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 12490C - 1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WINDOW TREATMENTS
A. General: Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Levelor, Hunter Douglas or approved
~ equal.
B. Headrail: Manufacturer's standard headrail consisting of channel -shaped section
fabricated from minimum 0.025" thick sheet steel with rolled edges at top. Increase
metal thickness as recommended by manufacturer for large blind units. Furnish
complete with tilting mechanism, top and end braces, top cradles, cord lock, and
accessory items required for type of blind and installation indicated.
C. Bottom Rail: Manufacturer's standard tubular steel bottom rail, designed to
withstand twisting or sagging. Contour top surface to match slat curvature, with flat
or slightly curved bottom. Close ends with manufacturer's standard metal or plastic
end caps, or same color as rail. Finish rail in same color as slats, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Slats: Manufacturer's standard, spring -tempered aluminum slats, 0.010" thick,
(louver blade), with rounded corners and forming burrs removed, as follows:
1. Slat width: 1" narrow slats, with other components sized to suit. Slat shall be
continuous across entire opening.
2. Provide slats designed and spaced to achieve maximum overlap and closure of
optimum light exclusion. Notch rear of blade at ladders and offset route holes
at lift cords to enable blades to touch one another when closed.
3. Finish shall be selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors.
E. Ladders: Manufacturer's standard ladder construction designed to support and
maintain slats at proper spacing and alignment in open and closed positions, as
follows:
1. Nylon cord design consisting of vertical components of not less than 0.045"
nor more than 0.066" in diameter and integrally braided ladder rungs of not
less than 4 threads; space ladders not further than 24" apart and 7" from ends
of slats.
F. Tilting Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard assembly including low friction gear
tilter, drum and cradle at each ladder, tilt road, tape clips, and grommet guides to
prevent wear on ladder and cords; designed to hold slats at any angle and prevent
movement of slats due to vibration, operated as follows:
1. Wand Operation: Manufacturer's detachable clear plastic wand, or proper
length to suit blind installation and to provide convenient operation.
G. Lifting Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard including crash -proof cord locks with
cord separators and nylon lift cords with ring at ends. Size cord to suit blind type.
Include cord equalizers of self -aligning type designed to maintain horizontal blind
position.
H. Installation Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets designed to facilitate
removal of head channels. Provide intermediate brackets at spacing recommended
by blind manufacturer. Include hardware necessary for secure attachment of
brackets adjoining construction and to head rails. Design brackets to support safely
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 12490C - 2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WINDOW TREATMENTS
the weight of blind assemblies plus forces applied to operate blinds. Attach to
} ' substrate at Y-0" O.C. minimum or less as required by manufacturer.
2.02 FABRICATION AND OPERATION OF HORIZONTAL BLINDS
A. Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by accurate site
measurements. Adjust dimensions for proper fit at openings. Cooperate with other
trades for securing tracks to substrates and other finished surfaces.
B. Full -tilting operation with slats rotating approximately 180 degrees.
i C. Full-length recalling and/or raising, to manufacturer's minimum stacking dimension.
Horizontal blinds with lifting cord locks for stopping blind at top position only and
pull cords on right hand side of blind units, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install units securely to head in manner to comply with manufacturer's instruction.
Position units level, plumb, secure, at proper height and location relative to
adjoining elements and other related work.
B. Provide adequate clearance between sash and blinds to permit unencumbered
operation of sash hardware.
C. Protect installed units to ensure their being in perfect operating condition, without
damage, blemishes, or indication of use at completion of project. Repair or replace
damaged units as directed by Architect.
3.02 CLEANING
A. All slats, louvers, head rails, etc., shall be properly cleaned prior to final inspection.
END OF SECTION 12490C
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 12490C - 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WINDOW TREATMENTS
SE6TION 14460 - HYDRAULIC LIFT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. This appendix established the minimum performance, design, fabrication,
installation, and test requirements for a vertical reciprocating conveyor (VRC).
1.03 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Concrete"
2. Division 16 Section "Electrical'
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Vertical reciprocating conveyors, as distributed by Autoquip Corporation, is cited
for type, quality, function, operation, capacity, size and construction required.
Provide complete with controls, safety devices and accessories.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The general provision of the contract, including General Requirements,
applies to the work specified in this section.
B. Product Data: Submit 6 copies of manufacturers specifications and
installation instructions for each type of vertical reciprocating conveyor
required. Furnish copy of installation instructions to the installer.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for erection of vertical reciprocating
conveyors. Include plans, elevations and large scale details. Show location of
structure support and any accessory items.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 14460- 1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 MATERIAL HANDLING LIFT
D. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's owner's manual, maintenance and
service data; include address of nearest authorized service representative.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Vertical Reciprocating Conveyor Standard
1. Comply with applicable requirements of OSHA, ANSUASME B20.1b- 1992
and the National Electrical Code (NEC).
B. Inspections
1. The system shall be inspected to verify that it meets all requirements of
sections 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of this appendix and the cover purchase order. These
inspections shall be completed as part of the system checkout test and again as
part of the quality conformance test. Testing and I inspection will be
performed by the manufacturer or approved manufacturer's representative.
C. Tests
1. The tests as listed in Section 7 shall be performed on the system as part of the
system checkout test and again as part of the quality conformance test.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. General specification covers a FreightliftTM vertical reciprocating conveyor, Model
FLHC-6, as designed and manufactured by Autoquip Corporation supplied by
Johnson Equipment.
2.02 REQUIREMENTS
A. System Description: The extent of the vertical reciprocating conveyors is as shown
on the drawings and/or as specified herein.
B. Characteristics
1. Performance Characteristics
a. Capacity: The vertical reciprocating conveyor shall have a minimum
live load capacity of 6000 pounds.
b. Lifting Speed: Depending on model, the standard power unit will cause
the VRC to have a minimum lifting speed of 25 feet per minute when
loaded to capacity. Lowering speed shall not exceed 30 feet per minute
when loaded to capacity.
C. Lift Height: The conveyor platform shall have a maximum lift height of
14'.
2. Physical Characteristics
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 14460- 2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 MATERIAL HANDLING LIFT
r a. Deflection under Load: When fully loaded, no portion of the VRC shall
exhibit plastic (permanent) deformations.
b. Upper Level Stop: Upward level of the carriage shall be limited by
adjustable mechanical stops assuring positive leveling with the upper
level.
C. Lift Platform: The VRC lift platform shall be a minimum of 84 inches
wide by 72 inches long, with a minimum '/4" thick steel deck plate and
48" high welded handrails and kickplates on non -operating ends and
safety chains with snaphooks on operating ends.
d. Support Columns: The VRC shall have a minimum of two 6-inch wide
structural support columns.
e. Actuating Mechanism Raising: And lowering of the carriage shall be
provided by two cylinders suitably mounted on the unit. Transmission
of the lifting force shall be through wire rope attached to the cylinders
and carriage movement to cylinder stroke.
f. Sheaves and Wire Rope Sheave: Diameter shall be at least 24 times the
wire rope diameter and no less than 9" in diameter. Sheaves shall be
arranged so cables pay off true and vertical and apply no fleet loading to
the sheaves. Wire rope shall be a minimum 6 x 37 IWRC. Wire rope
shall be proof -tested and pre -stretched, fitted with swaged eyelet ends.
Wire rope shall be reaved true vertical.
g. Hydraulic System: Hydraulics shall be of sufficient capacity to lift the
carriage at maximum capacity. The system shall provide for smooth
lowering of the load through a pressure compensating flow control with
no engagement of the pump or motor. The system shall incorporate a
velocity sensing check valve to prevent uncontrolled carriage descent in
the event of hydraulic pressure line failure. Redundant overload
protection shall positively prevent raising of the carriage if loaded to
more than 115% of rated capacity. A relief valve shall open when
system pressure exceeds 100% of maximum design pressure. The
system shall be capable of repressurizing to the manufacturer's
suggested pressure switch shut-off point, without platform drift, in a
loaded or unloaded condition.
3. Electrical Characteristics
a. Motors: Motor horsepower shall be sized for the full rated live load. All
motors shall be three phase and shall be designed for continuous duty at
ambient temperatures from 32 to 130 degrees Fahrenheit. All motors
shall operate on electrical characteristics as they exist at the site. Motors
shall not restart automatically when the overload device is reset.
b. Controls: There shall be one set of push-button controls located at each
floor level of the VRC to operate the upward and downward movement.
The VRC shall automatically stop at the lower level and at the upper
floor level. Lift and lower controls shall be the push-button type.
Depressing the button one time shall activate the conveyor to travel to
the other level. An emergency stop button (mushroom type) shall be
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 14460- 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 MATERIAL HANDLING LIFT
located on each panel to cut all power to the VRC. The emergency stop
- button shall be reset before any other operations take place. All control
circuits are 24 or 115 volt. Electrical equipment includes step down
transformer, motor starter, three coil eutectic alloy overload relay, field
wiring terminal block and timer.
C. Power Source: Distribution panels and circuit breakers shall be
furnished and installed by the purchaser. The purchaser shall furnish and
install all necessary wiring and equipment for power distribution to the
system. Power characteristics are 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz.
4. Design and Fabrication
a. Safety Cams: Safety cam shall be mounted on the platform and
connected directly to the lifting cables. The cams shall prevent the
platform from falling more than 6 inches if tension is lost in the cable.
b. Safety Enclosures: Guarding on all sides of the conveyor shall be by
safety enclosures consisting of material which will reject a ball 2" in
diameter. There will be one enclosure at the lower level and a backstop
at the upper level. There will be (2) vertical acting gates at the lower
level and (1) swing gate at the upper level. The VRC shall not operate
until all gates are in the closed position. All gates shall be large enough
to allow a minimum 84" overhead clearance to facilitate the loading and
unloading material.
C. Signs Riding: The VRC is forbidden and clear, visible signs per ANSI
Z535.5 shall be furnished on the unit. Lettering shall be at least 2" high
for visibility. These signs shall be posted at each point of access and
each point of operation.
d. Approach Ramp: A metal approach ramp may be provided at the ground
level (if no pit is specified) of the VRC for ease of loading and
unloading. The gap between the conveyor platform and the second floor
shall be no greater than 1 inch.
2.03 DESCRIPTION OF TESTS
A. Test to ensure the vertical reciprocating conveyor is capable of lifting and lowering
the capacity load.
B. The purchaser will provide a 4000 test load ( If Required). The contractor shall load
the conveyor with the test load. The load shall be conveyed from the floor level to
second level and returned to the floor several times to assure proper operation.
C. If the conveyor cannot lift or lower the load, or if deformation or downward drift is
evident, the vertical reciprocating conveyor shall fail the test.
D. Test to ensure that the vertical reciprocating conveyor is capable of the
required lifting and lowering speeds. This test is to be performed in conjunction
with test 1, above. During the demonstration of the lifting and lowering test, the
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 14460- 4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 MATERIAL HANDLING LIFT
purchaser shall measure the time required to lift and lower the capacity load. The
purchaser will average times for lifting and lowering the load and calculate the
average lifting and lowering speed.
E. If the conveyor cannot lift the load at a minimum speed of 25 feet per
minute or if the lowering speed exceeds 30 feet per minute, the vertical
reciprocating conveyor shall fail the test.
END OF SECTION 14460
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 14460- 5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 MATERIAL HANDLING LIFT
SECTION 15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Referenced Documents: Bidding .Requirements, Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 - General Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section.
2. Work included in Division 15 includes furnishing of all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, drayage, rigging, fees, permits, inspections, etc., necessary for
proper complete installation and operation of all mechanical equipment and
work as shown on the drawings and / or specified herein. All work that may
be called for in the specifications but not shown on the drawings; or, all work
that may be shown on the drawings but not called for in the specifications,
shall be performed by the Contractor as if described in both. Should work be
required for fulfilling of the intent thereof; then, the Contractor shall perform
all such work as fully as if it were specifically set forth in the contract
documents.
3. Mechanical Drawings accompanying the plans are necessarily diagrammatic
and can not show every detail or every line of piping in its exact location.
They are subject to the requirements of ordinances, structural, and
architectural conditions that compose this facility.
4. Investigate site and finish conditions and arrange work accordingly; furnish all
fittings and accessories required to meet the conditions and give satisfactory
operation. Work shall be laid out to be concealed in furred chases and
suspended above ceilings, etc., in finished portions of buildings, unless
specifically noted to be exposed. Work to be installed to avoid any negative
impact or crippling of structural members.
5. The Contractor, by submitting a bid, sets forth that he has the necessary
technical training and ability and that he will install his work in a satisfactory
and good workmanlike manner up to the best standard of the trade, complete
and in good working order. The right to make any reasonable change in the
location of the outlets, apparatus, and equipment up to time of rough -in is
reserved by the owner without involving additional expense to the Owner.
6. The Owner reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the location of
equipment up to time of roughing -in without involving any additional
expense.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01110 -
Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and
information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other
Documents.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Section 01515
Temporary Water
2.
Section 01700
Project Close-out
3.
Section 01720
Project Record Documents
4.
Section 01730
Operating and Maintenance Data
5.
Section 09900
Painting
6.
Section 15050
Testing and Balancing
7.
Section 16010
General Electrical Provisions
8.
Division 2 Site Work
9.
Division 3 Concrete
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Wherever the term "Mechanical Contractor" appears in this Division of the
Specifications, it is to be construed as referring as being both individually and
collectively to the plumping and the air conditioning / heating contractors.
B. Any reference to the Architect/Engineer shall mean Contracting Officer.
C. Any reference to the Owner shall mean U.S. Postal Service.
1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Before submitting a bid, the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the rules of all
governing boards having jurisdiction, and shall notify the owner before submitting a
bid, if in his opinion, any work or material specified is contrary to such rules;
otherwise, the Contractor is responsible for the approval of all work or materials at
no extra cost to the Owner, and in the use of any material specified is not permitted,
a substitute shall be approved by the Owner and shall be provided at no extra cost.
B. Work shall conform to the latest edition of the following:
1. Local Plumbing, Mechanical and Building Codes.
2. Requirements of Water, Sewer. Gas and Electric Utilities Departments having
local jurisdiction.
3. U.L. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
4. I.E.E.E. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
5. A.W.S. American Welding Society
6. A.S.T.M. American Society for Testing and Materials.
7. N.E.M.A. National Electrical Manufacturing Association.
8. A.S.M.E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
9. O.S.H.A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
10. N.F.C. National Fire Code.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
11. A.R.I. American Refrigeration Institute.
12. A.G.A. American Gas Association.
13. N.F.P.A. National Fire Protection Association.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Contractor of Work specified herein is required to have engaged in mechanical
contracting business for a minimum of two (2) years to bid date and be prepared to
show evidence and references if required by Owner.
B. It will be assumed that the Contractor, by submitting a bid, has become familiar
with all regulatory agencies listed above and that the work will be performed
accordingly.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Plans and specifications are based on specific equipment, accessories, processes and
arrangements as indicated therein. Shop drawings approval and/or submittals
indicate only the acceptance of the manufacturer and quality, and assumes that the
specific requirements and arrangements are in compliance with the intent of the
plans and specifications. The Contractor shall, at no additional cost to the Owner,
furnish all accessories, layouts, equipment, etc., and perform all work necessary for
proper functioning and to fit any substitute items to the intent and arrangement
indicated on the plans and specifications.
B. For any item to be installed in or on a finished surface (such as tee bar acoustical
ceiling, drywall, C.M.U., Contractor shall certify by marking the submittal
indicating that he has checked all applicable Contract Documents and that the item
submitted is compatible with the surface finish on which it is to be installed.
C. Submittal shall be made for the following (but not necessarily limited to the
following):
1. Vibration isolation and sound control equipment.
2. Pumps.
3. Insulation.
4. Plumbing fixtures and equipment.
5. Valves and specialties.
6. Controls and instrumentation.
7. Piping (water, gas, Etc.)
8. Air distribution equipment.
9. Fire protection system equipment and accessories.
10. Heat generation equipment.
11. HVAC equipment.
D. Shop Drawings
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 15010-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
1. Shop drawings shall contain sufficient plans, elevation, sections, and
schematics to clearly describe the apparatus. All shop drawings shall be
drawing to at least 1/8" = F-0" scale.
2. Shop drawings shall be done for the following (but are not necessarily limited
to ):
a. All ductwork (horizontal and vertical).
b. HVAC equipment.
C. All plumbing lines (domestic water, sanitary and storm drain).
d. Connection point details of all HVAC equipment, air distribution
equipment, roof drains and other apparatus deemed necessary by the
Engineer.
e. Roof top unit installation.
f. Control diagrams.
1.07 FEES
A. Procure all necessary and usual inspections and certificates for all work installed
including tap fees:
1. Deliver to Owner before final acceptance.
2. Pay all charges for connection to utilities.
3. Pay all inspection fees necessary.
B. Coordinate with local utilities for the furnishings of all water meters (complete with
meter box and cover), gas meters and pressure regulators, and electrical meters.
Contractor shall arrange for and pay all costs, tap fees and deposits for complete
meter system and service entrance.
1.08 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
A. All work shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year for the date of final
acceptance. Purchase and supply an additional manufacturer's warranty on all
components cover by such.
B. Any material failing to give satisfactory service during the guarantee period shall be
replaced with new materials. Guarantee shall include the replacement of materials,
equipment, oil, refrigerant, and labor at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.09 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF WORK
A. A minimum vertical clearance of 6'- 6" shall be maintained throughout the Lookout
Gallery (LOG). No penetration of the LOG by ducts, pipes, or other protrusions
shall be allowed.
1.10 SITE INVESTIGATION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
A. The Contractor is to visit the site and ascertain conditions to be met there in
installing the work and make due provisions for same in the bid.
1. It will be assumed that the Contractor in submitting a bid has visited the site
and that the bid covers all work necessary.
2. Failure to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification
for omission or faulty installation of any work or for payment of extra
compensation of work covered by specifications and plans.
B. Locations and elevations of utilities shown on plan have been obtained from site
utility plans, existing plans, and site inspection. The Contractor shall examine the
site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities, and shall be adequately
informed as to their relationship to the work before entering into a contract.
1.11 SAFETY STANDARDS
A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to initiate, maintain, and supervise all safety
precautions requires by local, state and federal laws, U.S. Postal Service Building
and Site Design Safety Requirements including OSHA and NFPA codes and
standards.
B. All manufacturers named are a basis as a standard of quality and substitutions of
any equal product will be considered for acceptance. The judgment of equality of
product substitution shall be made by the Engineer.
C. Procure all necessary and usual inspections and certificates for all work installed,
including tap fees, and:
1. Deliver to Owner before final acceptance.
2. Pay all charges for connection to utilities.
3. Pay all inspection fees necessary.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trade name and
the UL label in every case where a standard has been established. The equipment to
be furnished under each Section shall be the standard product of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment. Furnish all
accessories, connections and incidental items necessary to fully complete the work
in good working order.
B. Contractor shall site fabricate only those items which cannot be shop fabricated. All
ductwork shall be shop fabricated.
C. The Contractor is responsible for the fabrication and manufacturing of all
equipment which is purchased for installation as a part of this project. The Owner
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
_ shall look solely to the Contractor for remedy of defects and deficiencies in the
fabrication and manufacture of equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LOCAL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING BOARDS
A. After the contract has been signed, the Contractor is responsible for having all work
meet with the requirements of the governing ordinances and appeal boards.
B. No extra to the contract will be granted to correct any discrepancy existing between
the work and the local ordinances.
C. Before submitting a bid, Contractor shall familiarize himself with the rules of all
governing boards having jurisdiction, and he shall notify the Owner before
submitting his bid, if in his opinion, any work or material specified is contrary to
such rules; otherwise, the Mechanical Contractor is responsible for the approval of
all work or materials, and in case the use of any material specified is not permitted,
substitute shall be approved by the Owner and shall be provided at no increase in
cost.
3.02 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS
A. Concrete foundations and pads required for equipment shall be provided under the
Section that includes the equipment (except where otherwise noted) in conformity
with details on drawings. All dimensions shown on the plans are for a specific
manufacturer and the dimensions may require changing if another manufacturer is
used. Where details are not shown, they shall be constructed according to the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the respective equipment and with the
approval of the Architect. All corners of the foundations shall be neatly chamfered.
Foundation bolts shall be placed in the forms when the concrete is poured in
galvanized steel pipe sleeves to allow for adjustment, with a suitable plate at bottom
end of the sleeve to hold the bolt. Allow one inch (1") below the equipment bases
for alignment, leveling and grouting. Grouting shall be done after the equipment is
leveled in place. After the grout has hardened, the foundation bolts shall be pulled
up tight and the equipment shimmied, if necessary. After removal of the forms, the
surface of the foundation shall be rubbed. Unless otherwise noted, foundations
shall be six (6") inches high. Reinforcing shall be #3 bars at six (6") inches on
center each way unless indicated otherwise.
3.03 OPENINGS IN FIRE AND SMOKE -RATED FLOORS AND WALLS
A. All openings in fire and smoke -rated floors and walls, shall be completely sealed
after ducts and piping installation for a completely air -tight fire rated installation.
Seal including fire dampers shall be non-combustible and UL approved and rated.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
3.04 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Excavation
1. The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of
whatever substances encountered, to the depths indicated on the Drawings
and/or required for the installation of piping, utility systems, etc., except
where noted elsewhere in specifications. All exterior lines shall be installed
with a minimum cover of 24", unless otherwise indicated. Generally, more
cover shall be provided if grade will permit. All excavation materials not
required for backfill or fill shall be removed and wasted in accordance with
Division 02. All excavation shall be made only by open cut. The banks of
trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as practicable and where required,
shall be properly sheeted and braced. Trenches shall not be less than 12" wider
nor more than 16" wider than the outside edges of the pipe to be laid therein,
and shall be excavated true to line so that a clear space is neither less than 6"
nor more than 8" in width on each side of the pipe. For sewers, the maximum
width of trench specified applies to the width at and below the level of the top
of the pipe; the width of the trench above that level may be made as side as
necessary for sheeting and bracing, and the proper installation of the work. If
any trench exceeds five feet or more in depth, a trench safety plan shall be
provided as required by local ordinances and OSHA.
2. The bottom of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide proper fall and
uniform bearing and support for each section point along its entire length,
except for portions of the pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for
bell holes and for the proper sealing of pipe joints. Bell holes shall be dug
after the trench bottom has been graded. Where inverts are not shown grading
shall be determined by the National Plumbing Code for the service intended
and the size used. Bell holes for lead pipe joints shall be 12" in depth below
the trench bottom and shall extend from a point 6" back of the face of the bell.
Such bell holes shall be of sufficient width to provide ample room for
caulking. Bell holes for sewer tile and water pipe shall be excavated only to
an extent sufficient to permit accurate work in the making of the joints and to
insure that the pipe, for a maximum of its length, will rest upon the prepared
bottom of the trench. Depressions for joints other than bell -and -spigot shall
be made in accordance with the recommendations of the joint manufacturer
for the particular type of joint used. Special sections of these Specifications.
3. The lower 4" of the pipe trenches measuring from an overhead line parallel to
the grade line of the sewer shall be excavated only a few feet in advance of the
laying the pipe, and to be done by people especially skilled in this type of
work. Where damage is likely to result from withdrawing sheeting, the
sheeting shall be left in place. Except at locations where excavation of rock
from the bottom of trenches is required, care shall be taken not to excavate
below the depths required. Where rock excavation is required, the rock shall
be excavated to a minimum overdepth of 6" below the trench depths specified.
The overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation shall be
backfilled with sand. Whenever wet or otherwise stable soil is incapable of
properly supporting the pipe is encountered in the trench bottom, such soil
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
shall be removed to a depth and for the lengths required, and the trench
backfilled to trench bottom grade, as hereinafter specified, with sand.
4. All grading in the vicinity of excavation shall be controlled to prevent surface
ground water from flowing into the excavations. Any water accumulated in
the excavations shall be removed by pumping or other acceptable method.
During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stacked in an
orderly manner a sufficient distance back from the edges of trenches to avoid
overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins. Material unsuitable for backfilling
shall be wasted or removed from the job site as directed by the Construction
Inspector.
5. All shoring and sheeting required to perform and protect the excavations and
to safeguarded employees and \ or adjacent structures shall be provided.
6. Trenches for cast iron sewer lines inside the building shall be properly
excavated, following in general, the procedures set out for exterior lines.
Where backfilled, tamped and settled with water. Where no flooring is to
cover the lines, they shall be backfilled to form a level grade.
7. All surplus materials, removed in these trenching operations, shall be disposed
of as directed by the Construction Inspector.
B. Backfilling
1. Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until
the piping, utilities systems, etc., as installed are certified by the Owner's
inspector to conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches
shall be carefully backfilled with sand to a depth of 12" inches above the top
of the pipe. The next layer and subsequent layers of backfill may be excavated
materials approved for gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials free
from large clods of earth or stones larger than 1 1/2" in diameter, flooded until
the pipe has cover of not less than one foot. The remainder of the backfill
material shall then be thrown into the trenches, moistened, and tamped or
flooded in one -foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, and
large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Any trenches improperly
backfilled, or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required
for proper compaction, then refilled and mounded over, and smoothed off.
2. Backfill under concrete slabs -on -fill shall be as specified above, shall be
gravel, or shall be such other materials more suitable for the application.
Installation and compaction shall be as required for compatibility with
adjacent materials.
C. Opening and Re -closing Flat Slabs and Lawns: Where excavation requires the
opening of existing walks, streets, drives, other existing pavement, or lawns, such
surfaces shall be cut as required to install new lines and to make new connections to
existing lines. The sizes of the cut shall be held to a minimum, consistent with the
work to be accomplished. After the installation of the new work is completed and
the excavation has been backfilled and flooded, the areas shall be patched, using
materials to match those cut out. The patches shall thoroughly bond with the
original surfaces and shall be level with them, and shall meet all the requirements
established by the authorities having jurisdiction over such areas.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
3.05 SLEEVES
A. Where concealed pipes pass through partitions, walls, and floors, provide
galvanized steel pipe sleeves of sizes to readily accommodate pipe, or pipe plus
insulation.
1. For vertical pipes and conduit through concrete beams, provide sleeves of
galvanized steel pipe.
2. Plumbing risers in chases, or exposed, shall have galvanized steel pipe sleeves
which extend 1 1/2" above floor.
B. Pipe projecting through structure to be made water -tight.
3.06 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Equipment bases for all HVAC equipment shall be provided for by the Contractor
as detailed on the plans. The Contractor shall support all items with necessary
equipment to be directly supported on roof.
3.07 MOTORS
A. Unless noted otherwise on the plans or in other sections of this specification, all
motors shall meet the following requirements:
1.
All motors shall be built in accordance with the current IEEE, ANSI, and
NEMA standards. Each standard motor shall be of a design routine tested in
accordance with IEEE test procedures. Each motor shall be equipped with
NEMA standard nameplates.
2.
Unless noted otherwise motors shall be open drip proof type NEMA design B
squirrel cage induction machines with a service factor of 1.15 and with total
temperature rise of 90 degrees C (resistance measured) in a 40 degree C
ambient. Motors located in a hazardous atmosphere shall be rated explosion
proof. Totally enclosed fan -cooled (TEFL) motors shall be used in areas of
exposure to weather or other environmental contamination except that Type II
weather -protected motors may be used in lieu of TEFC motors on cooling
towers, roof -mounted fan units and similar equipment. TEFC motors may
have a service factor of 1.00 with total temperature rise of 80 degrees C.
Motors located in areas exceeding 40 degrees C ambient shall be nameplate
rated for the ambient temperature of the motor environment. Each motor shall
have the rating, windings, poles and terminals as required for the load,
voltages, speed, running and starting duty of the load application.
3.
Single phase motors shall be NEMA design N split phase induction motors.
Single phase motors connected on loads requiring high starting torque shall be
capacitor -start induction motors. Single phase motors 1/10 HP or less may be
shaded pole induction motors.
4.
Motors 3/4 HP and above in size shall be three phase and motors 1/2 HP and
smaller shall be single phase unless noted otherwise.
5.
Bearings shall be re-greasable or roller type bearings double shields and grease
reliefs. Motors shall be shipped from the factory with charge of grease and
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
shall be job greased immediately after put in operation. Sealed pre -lubricated
bearing shall be provided on motors installed in places of major difficulty of
access for lubrication. Sleeve bearings may be provided on motors of high
speed, large shaft diameters or other specialized applications when approved.
Sleeve bearing motors shall be the super sealed type or shall have definite
lubrication instructions given on the motor nameplate. Motors shall be
equipped with oil reservoirs suitable for the position in which the motor is
mounted. All motor bearing housings shall be large enough to minimize the
need for frequent re -lubrication and shall be provided with inlet and outlet
fittings and extensions as required to allow for "in-service" lubrication.
6. Motor terminal boxes shall be divided rotatable conduit boxes suitable for the
environment in which the motor operates and properly sized for the wiring
connection to the motor. All motor leads shall be permanently identified.
Wire leads shall be insulated stranded wires with installed lugs. Stud
terminals shall be provided with solderless lugs suitable for the specified
feeder connections. Motors shall be equipped with a grounding lug.
7. Electric motors shall comply with the requirements of the Energy Policy Act
of 1992. Motor efficiencies shall be rated in accordance with NEMA Design
A and Design B Standards in accordance with IEEE Test Method B per
NEMA MG1. Motors shall have nominal efficiencies equal to or greater than
the following at both 3/4 and full loads:
Motors: 1 to 2 HP 80%
Motors: 3 to 5 HP 85%
Motors: 7 1/2 to 10 HP 87.5%
Motors: 15 to 40 HP 90%
Motors: 50 to 60 HP 92.4%
Motors: 75 to 100 HP 93%
Motors: Above 100 HP 94%
8. Motors of 3/4 HP and larger shall have actual power factors of 0.85 or greater
at both 3/4 and 4/4 load.
3.08 MOTOR CONTROLS
A. Each motor -shall be provided with a motor control suitable for the protection and
operation of the motor in its intended use. Each motor control shall be as follows
and furnished under the Section of Work applying the motor unless noted otherwise.
1. Motor controls shall be in accordance with NEMA standards for the
application; a product of a member of NEMA; NEMA rated for voltage,
frequency and power of the motors; Housed in a NEMA standard enclosure
suitable for the environment of control location; and equipped with the
necessary auxiliary contacts required for control and/or interlock to operate in
the systems indicated. Each control shall be equipped with an overload
current of the actual motor installed on the job that the device serves.
2. Unless noted otherwise, controllers for three phase and larger single phase
motors shall be magnetic, non -reversing, full voltage, across -the -line type and
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
combination units shall have fused switch disconnects. Manual starters shall
be used for small single phase motors and shall be flush mounted toggle
switch type, trip free and trip indicating with neon pilot lights and stainless
steel plates.
3. Each magnetic starter unit shall be provided with a fused 120 volt control
transformer sized to handle the holding coil, pilots, etc., plus the requirements
for relays EP switches, interlocks, remote pilots and other devices as set forth
for the temperature controls and operation controls. Each magnetic starter unit
shall be equipped as required with a hand "off -automatic" switch and pilot
light or a push button and pilot light, and all necessary interlocks as required
to operate the equipment served by the unit and the auxiliaries and control and
indication devices associated with this equipment. Pilot lights may be omitted
on intermittent operating equipment such as sump pumps and sewage ejectors,
but hand "off -automatic" switches on these types of devices and on all
equipment which could be damaged by being left in the "hand" position shall
be spring -return from the "hand" to the "off'position.
position.
3.09 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES
A. Except as otherwise noted, provide and install chrome -plated sectional floor and
ceiling plates around pipes passing exposed through walls, floors and ceilings.
B. Solid plates with set screws shall be used on any lines where the sectional plates
will not stay in place or are not available in adequate size.
3.10 PATCHING
A. Should any structural difficulties prevent installation of fixtures, equipment, running
of pipes, ducts, etc., at any points shown on plans, then necessary minor deviations
therefrom, as determined by the owner, may be permitted and must be made without
additional cost to the Owner.
B. Any necessary cutting into partitions, walls, floors to be neatly and carefully done.
No cutting into structural parts of building, likely to impair strength of building, to
be done without approval of Owner.
C. Mechanical Contractor to be held responsible for all damage caused by his work or
through the neglect of his workmen. All patching and repairing of damaged work to
be done under direction of the Owner at the expense of the Contractor.
3.11 SCAFFOLDING
A. Furnish and erect at Contractor's expense and risk, any and all appliances,
scaffolding, lights, guards, temporary walks, tools, transportation, etc., required for
the proper construction or protection of this work.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-11
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
3.12 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Immediately upon installation, all H. V. A. C. equipment shall be covered with
tarpaulins or other suitable means to prevent damage, entry of plaster, debris or
insulating materials.
3.13 LOCATIONS OF FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
A. Fixtures and equipment shall be as shown on the Architectural Plans and elevations.
Locations of fixtures or equipment not shown on the Architectural Drawings shall
be established or verified in writing or by shop drawings.
B. Contractor to be responsible for coordination of all equipment, piping, etc., in
regard to proper clearances and safety.
3.14 CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall cooperate with the other Contractors on the job and shall carry on
the Work in such a manner that none of the other Contractors shall be handicapped,
hindered, or delayed. When work is finished, remove from the site all tools,
machines, debris, etc., occasioned by the work, and leave the site free of all
obstructions and hindrances. This shall be done in order that there will be no
interference in installation, or delay in completion of any part or parts of the work.
B. Where mechanical work occurs in masonry walls, the installation shall be
sufficiently complete in advance of construction. Fittings, appurtenances, etc., shall
be installed in such a manner and at such locations as to avoid unnecessary cutting
of masonry units. Work erected in advance of masonry shall be securely supported,
permanently braced and held in position to prevent displacement. Cutting and
fitting of masonry around properly located equipment will be done by masons.
Place work located in partitions or ceilings ahead of the construction, with
equipment wired in place. The subcontractors shall have a representative on the job
during all concrete pours to insure that all of the equipment is adequately supported
and protected and will not be adversely affected by such operations.
C. Cooperate with the local utility companies in such a manner that the installation of
all services proceeds in an orderly manner, and meets all requirements of the
specific companies involved.
3.15 SUPERVISION
A. All work in connection with this Contract will be under the supervision and to the
entire satisfaction of the Owner or an authorized representative who shall determine
all questions as to the satisfactory completion of the work, or any part thereof, and
defects to be remedied.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-12
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
B. The Contractor shall give personal attention to all parts of the Work and shall
} ' employ only skilled and reliable workers in the performance thereof. Contractor
shall accord the Owner the right to decide upon and discontinue the services of any
worker who does not possess satisfactory skill and qualifications, or is otherwise
objectionable.
3.16 PARTS LIST AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. At the close of the job, 30 days prior to final review, four bound copies of the
following shall be submitted by transmittal to the architect and owner for review
and acceptance.
1. Equipment warranties
2. Contractor's warranty
3. Parts list and manuals for all equipment with names and addresses of
manufacturers.
4. Operating Instructions (in writing)
5. Balance and Test readings
6. Written instructions on maintenance and care of the systems.
7. As -built equipment shop drawings, all cuts and capacity information.
B. Brochures shall be bound, indexed and tabbed, referencing items to the plans and
specifications regarding locations of equipment and materials.
3.17 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A. At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a set
of reproducible tracings showing all ductwork, equipment, piping, valves, etc.,
installed by the Contractor. These drawings shall be complete in every detail and
shall incorporate all changes made during the course of the project. These drawings
shall be prepared in such a manner as to enable the Owner to properly maintain,
operate, and repair both concealed and exposed work.
3.18 PAINTING
A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the
finish be marred in transit or during installation, it shall be refinished to present a
neat, workmanlike appearance which the original equipment color.
B. Any painting of equipment, piping, ductwork, grilles, insulation, etc., furnished and
installed under this Section of the Specifications will be under the painting section
of the specification. However, the Contractor shall leave his work clean and free
from any grease, dirt, rust, etc., in suitable condition for painting. Refer to Section
09900.
3.19 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-13
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
A. All items of mechanical equipment shall be identified by approved name plates to
be provided by the Contractor furnishing the equipment. Name plates shall be
securely affixed to each individual piece of equipment and also to each starter,
switch, relay, transformer, etc., which controls that equipment. Name plates shall
bear notations corresponding to the same notations of the framed wiring diagrams
and/or operating instructions.
B. Name plates to be aluminum, 2 1/2" x 3/4", with a black enamel background, with
etched or engraved natural aluminum lettering (unless specifically described
elsewhere in this specifications). Aluminum name plates are furnished by Seton
Name Plate Corp., 06505.
3.20 VALVE CHARTS AND LABELS
A. The Contractor shall prepare and install, in suitable glazed frame, type written
valves charts giving the number, location and function of each line valve installed
under this Contract. He shall also install on each valve stem and stamped 1 1/2"
diameter brass tag plainly numbered corresponding to the number indicated on the
chart below. Tags shall be secured to valves by heavy figure - eight hooks.
Stencil and Valve Tag Schedule:
Service Stencil Designation Tag Designation
Drain Drain --------------------
Domestic Cold Water Domestic Cold Water Dom. Cold Water
Domestic Hot Water Domestic Hot Water Dom. Hot Water
Gas Gas Gas
Roof Drain Roof Drain --------------------
Sanitary Sewer Sanitary Sewer --------------------
Sanitary Vent Sanitary Vent--------------------
B. All service piping which is accessible for maintenance operations (except piping in
finished spaces) will be identified with SETMARK semi -rigid plastic (not pressure
sensitive) identification markers or equal. Direction of flow arrows are to be
included on each marker, unless otherwise specified. In conformance with "Scheme
for the Identification of Piping System" (ANSI A13.1-1975), each marker must
show
1. Approved color -coded background.
2. Proper color of legend in relation to background color.
3. Approved legend letter size.
4. Approved marker length.
C. SETMARK Type SNA markers to be used on diameters 3/4" through 511
.
D. SETMARK Type STR markers to be used on Diameters 6" or larger.
E. For pipes under 3/4" O.D. (too small for color bands and legends), brass
identification tags 1 1/2" in diameter with depressed 1/4" high black -fitted letters
above 1/2" black -filled numbers will be fastened securely at specified locations.
Locations for pipe and electrical markers shall be as follows:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-14
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
1. Adjacent to each valve and fitting (except on plumbing fixtures and
equipment)
2. At each branch and riser take -off.
3. At each pipe passing through wall, floor and ceiling construction.
4. At each pipe passage to underground.
5. On all horizontal pipe runs - marked every 25 feet.
3.21 VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correction of any and all objectionable
vibration transmission associated with any system provided under this division after
completion and shall correct same as directed at his own expense.
3.22 TEMPORARY WATER FAUCETS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to the General Conditions for temporary utilities.
3.23 ACCESSIBILITY
A. All equipment shall be installed in such a way that all components requiring access
(such as drain pans, drains, fire dampers, control dampers, control operators,
motors, drives, etc.) are so located and installed that they may be serviced, rest,
replaced or recalibrated, etc., by service people with normal service tools and
equipment. If any equipment or components are shown in such a position that this
contractor cannot comply with the above, the contractor shall notify the general
contractor and attempt to resolve the problem of access. If this consultation is not
successful, the architect and engineer shall be notified in writing and a decision
requested.
3.24 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TESTING
A. The Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the proper
operation, maintenance, lubrication and general operating requirements of the
system. A certificate stating the date shall be submitted so the Architect prior to
final acceptance of the Work.
B. The Contractor shall conduct start-up and operating test of each major item of
equipment in accordance with Section 15050 - Testing and Balancing. During The
operating text, the Contractor shall operate each item of equipment to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. At least seven days notice shall be given to the
Engineer prior to Equipment start-up and operating test. All test and balance
reports required in Section 15050 shall be presented to the Engineer prior to these
tests. In addition, the "catalog data" called for shall be available prior to the test
being made.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-15
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
3.25 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Openings in floors, walls, and roof shall be furnished by the General Contractor.
The Contractor shall inform the General Contractor of the location and size
required. The Contractor shall furnish all sleeves, frames, including framing
between joists unless shown on the Architectural or Structural drawings, access
doors, prefabricated curbs, and other accessories necessary for a complete
installation. Only those items specifically shown and/or specified in other Sections
are excluded.
B. Flashing of roof for curbs, pipes, stands, etc., shall be by the general contractor
(roofer). (Curbs and counter flashing shall be by the Contractor.)
C. Power wiring, including final connections, is by the electrical contractor. (The
Contractor shall install all motors and furnish the starting equipment to the electrical
contractor for installation. Control wiring, including 115 volt from power source,
conduit, switches, thermostats, interlocks, etc., shall be furnished by the Contractor
unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings. The Contractor shall see that
the electrical equipment does not block access to service areas of equipment, i.e.,
disconnect switched mounted on the compressor or control access doors of
equipment.)
END OF SECTION 15010
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15010-16
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15300 —FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.
Automatic sprinkler system.
2.
Fire alarm control panels.
3.
Manual fire alarm stations.
4.
Automatic smoke and heat detectors.
5.
Fire alarm signaling appliances.
6.
Auxiliary fire alarm equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Electrical: Section 16100.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code.
B. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code.
C. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2002 Ed.
D. NFPA 13R: Sprinkler Systems for Residential Structures.
E. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code.
1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Design criteria for protection area, maximum spacing of sprinkler heads and water
flow rates has been followed in compliance with NFPA 13 (Light Hazard). A
hydraulically designed wet pipe system has been sized for this project. Pipe sizes
shall be used from the drawings and shall not be altered.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION #3 15300 - 1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 2465.00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
B. Verify water and pressure supplies by conducting a flow test with the City of
College Station Fire Marshal's office.
C. Water supply has been sized to accommodate the total sprinkler demand plus total
peak domestic consumption. A 4" water supply line up to the twin Fire Department
connection is required. (See detail on Fire Protection Sheet FP2.1 for combination
service and valve arrangement.
D. It is the responsibility of the Fire Protection Contractor to contact the City of
College Station, Texas to verify wet tap requirements, fees and permits. All such
fees and permits will be paid for by the Fire Protection Contractor.
E. Provide all backflow protection as required by the City of College Station, Texas.
A detector check with 5/8" metered bypass must be provided as a minimum
requirement. Verify with City engineering and water and sewer department.
F. Sprinkler head layout as indicated on Sheet FP2.1 is for general information
purposes. Exact locations with respect to obstacles must be in compliance with
NFPA 13, Section 8.10 (Residential Sprinklers.) All spaces shown with sprinkler
heads shall be sprinkled and served with the pipe sizes shown on the drawings. Run
all pipe in joist spaces above ceilings. Pipe over unheated spaces shall be covered
by 6 inches of fiberglass batt insulation.
G. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72, manual and automatic local fire alarm system.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. A single contractor shall install the entire fire sprinkler system, starting from the 4-
inch branch from the domestic water supply to and including the sprinkler heads,
Siamese connection, test attachments, and alarms switches.
B. The contractor for the Fire Protection installation shall be a duly licensed and
qualified Fire Protection Contractor, licensed by the State of Texas and regularly
engaged in the installation of automatic fire sprinkler systems. Contractor must
have been in business for a minimum of 3 years under the same name and show
evidence of successfully completing 3 projects, similar to that required for this
project.
C. Use NFPA 13, Section 8.10 (Residential Sprinklers) for the locating of sprinkler
heads. Sprinkler heads shall be fast -response type with an RTI (response time
index) of 80 4(m-sec.) Sprinkler heads shall be fully concealed pop -down pendant
type.
D. Labels: Provide fire sprinkler pipe, fittings hangers and devices that are U.L. Listed
for use in fire protection system.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION #3 15300 - 2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 2465.00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
E. Provide Factory Mutual approved equipment for use in fire protection systems. If
F.M. label is not available, U. L. listing only will be acceptable.
F. All local authorities having jurisdiction including but not limited to Fire Marshal's
Office, Engineering Department and Water and Sewer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit 5 copies of Manufacturers data for fire protection system
components including pipe, fittings, hangers, valves, sprinkler, backflow preventer
and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings for Sprinkler System: Submit 5 copies (bluelines) 1 copy (sepia) of
scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not
necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of
horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and
spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment.
C. Shop Drawings for Alarm System: Provide annunciator layout and system wiring
diagram showing each device and wiring connection required.
D. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
E. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections.
F. Certificate of Installation: Submit certification upon completion of fire protection
piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with
ANSIWPA 13 and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of
products.
1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of initiating devices, signaling appliances, and end -of -line
devices. Provide owner this report within 60 days following system acceptance.
1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Operation Data: Operating instructions.
B. Maintenance Data: Maintenance and repair procedures.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION #3 15300 - 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 2465.00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
1.09, QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years experience, and with service facilities.
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years experience, and certified by State of Texas as fire alarm
installer.
1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70, NFPA 72 and NFPA 101.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and
indicated.
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system for one year from Date of
Acceptance by Owner.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide ten manual station break -glass rods.
B. Provide six keys of each type.
C. Provide three of each type of automatic smoke detector and heat detector.
D. Provide ten of each type of sprinkler head in cabinet with compatible wrench.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL:
A. All Fire Protection and signaling equipment shall be compatible with existing City
systems.
2.02 PIPING: Provide piping materials and products of sizes, types, pressure ratings,
temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper
selection as determined by installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide
sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials
which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than 1
type of materials or products are indicated, selection is installer's option. Provide pipe,
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION #3 15300 - 4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 2465.00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
2.03
tube, and fittings complying with NFPA 13R, and in accordance with the following
listing:
Interior Piping:
Black Steel Pipe:
Pipe Weight: Schedule 40 or "Allied XL" Threadable Thinwall 1" through 2";
Schedule 10 wall thickness .120, 2-1/2" through 4".
Fittings: Threaded fittings shall be 125 lb. cast iron or 150 lb. malleable iron for
1" through 2". For black threaded pipe installation only.
Fittings- Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings: roll -groove or
mechanical locking type 2-1/2" and larger.
Synthetic Piping:
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) and polybutylene pipe are acceptable. It
must be noted that the listing of these materials often include restrictions such as
the pipe can not be left "exposed". The user must refer to extensive listing
information with respect to these materials to correctly install system components.
Fittings: Listed Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) and polybutylene fittings
shall be installed if synthetic pipe system is employed.
Exterior Piping:
DR14 Class 200, C-900 PVC.
Wall Thickness: Class 200.
Fittings: Cast iron or compact ductile iron with rubber -gasket push -on joints.
Ductile -Iron Pipe: (5'-0") From building line Class 51 cement lined ductile iron.
Lining: Cement -mortar lining for pipe and fittings.
Wall Thickness: Class 150
Fittings: Cast iron or compact ductile iron with rubber -gasket push -on joints.
NOTE: Verify all materials and methods with local authorities having jurisdiction.
The above specifications for underground materials are a minimum requirement.
Should local authorities have more stringent requirements, they should be adhered
to.
BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. General: Provide piping specialties complying with "Section 15400-Plumbing", in
accordance with the following listing:
• Sleeves
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION #3 15300 - 5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 2465.00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
2.04
• Pipe escutcheons
BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS
A. General: Provide supports, anchors and seals complying with NFPA 13 , in
accordance with the following listing:
• All hangers supporting plastic piping must be supported and braced in strict
accordance with pipe manufactures listing. All pipe will be supported to
insure adequate drainage of pipe. Additional supports shall be installed
where required to resist upward or horizontal thrust.
• Adjustable steel clevis, adjustable steel band hangers, for horizontal piping
hangers and supports.
• Two -bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports.
• Top beam clamps, all thread rod, rod couplings, for steel attachments.
• All hanger for wood construction shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.
2.05 SPRINKLER HEADS AND CABINET
A. Sprinkler heads in all areas shall be fully concealed, pop -down types, equal to Mirage
Concealed Sprinkler from the Viking Corporation.
B. Sprinkler Cabinet and Wrench: Furnish steel, baked red enameled, sprinkler box with
capacity to store 10 sprinklers and a wrench sized to sprinklers.
2.06 BASIC VALVES
A. General: Provide pressure and relief valves and gauges complying with Section 7.1
of NFPA 13, "Wet Pipe Systems", and NFPA 13R Section 2.3, "Water Supply" and in
accordance with the following listing:
B. Interior Valves:
1. Sectional: Flanged OS&Y gate valves with electrical tamper switches.
2. Check: Grooved or flanged swing check valves. Double back -flow preventer
valve.
C. Exterior Valves:
1. Underground: Gate valves with underground keyed roadway box.
2.07 SPECIAL VALVES
A. General: Provide valves, UL listed, in accordance with the following listings.
Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION #3 15300 - 6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 2465.00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
B. Detector Check: with 5/8" metered bypass.
C. Fire Department Connection Valve: Provide a Siamese 4" X 2 ''/z" X 2 %z" wall
mounted fire department connection, 175 psi rated working pressure. Rough brass
finish with red aluminum FDC Nameplate labeled automatic sprinkler system. Verify
thread pattern with City Fire Department. Verify location and accessibility with local
fire department.
2.08 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A. Minimum 16-zone panel equal to Simplex 4005 Series with Simplex 4602-9101
Series 16 LED serial connection annunciator. Install in wall -mounted enclosure in
24-inch stud space. Zoning as indicated on the drawings.
2.09 INITIATING DEVICES
A. Manual Station: Surface mounted, non -coded type, double action manual station
with break -glass rod. Provide manufacturer's standard backbox. Simplex Model
2099-9101 or equal.
B. Ceiling/Wall Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72, ionization type, photoelectric
type with adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, auxiliary relay contact, integral
thermal element rated 135 degrees F and visual indication of detector actuation,
suitable for mounting on 4 inch outlet box. Provide two -wire detector with
common power supply and signal circuits. Simplex TrueAlarm Detector Model
4098-9601 or equal.
C. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72, photoelectric type with key -operated
NORMAL -RESET -TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, and
visual indication of detector actuation, in duct -mounted housing. Provide two -wire
detector with common power supply and signal circuits. Simplex TrueAlarm
Detector Model 4098-9685 or equal.
D. Ceiling Mounted Heat Detector: Hardwire, 120 VAC, heat detector with battery
backup, with test button, LED "Power On" indicator, flashing red LED alarm light,
85dB alarm horn, 5-year warranty. Simplex Model 4098-9401 or equal.
2.10 SIGNALING APPLIANCES
A. Alarm Lights: NFPA 72, strobe lamp and flasher with red lettered "FIRE" on white
lens. Luminance output of 110 Candela. Simplex 4904-9361 or equal.
B. Alarm Horn: NFPA 72, surface type fire alarm horn. Sound Rating: 85 dB at 10
feet. Provide integral strobe lamp and flasher with red lettered "FIRE" on white
lens. Simplex 4903-9455 or equal.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION #3 15300 - 7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 2465.00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
C. Fire Alarm Bell: Provide 10" weatherproof, red enameled finish, electric bell, 90 DB
rating with weatherproof kit. Simplex 2901-9003 Series with the 2905-9953 yard
hood. Bell shall be activated by either the fire water flow switch or a pull alarm. Bell
location is shown on the FP2.1 drawing sheet.
D. Pull Alarms: At the locations shown on the drawing, or located by local Fire
Marshall. Provide a Simplex No. 2099 (Type 4251) non -coded manual pull alarm.
E. Water Flow Indicators: Provide vane type water flow detectors (wiring by electrical
contractor)-
F. Supervisory Switches: Provide tamper switches on all interior OS&Y Gate Valves
(wiring by Electrical Contractor).
2.11 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire.
B. Initiating Device and Indicating Appliance Circuits: Power limited fire -protective
signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor, 300
volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handling ducts, hollow
spaces used as ducts, and plenums.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROLS:
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install manual station with operating handle and audible and visual signal devices
the required distance above the floor in accordance with the NFPA.
C. Use 12 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit
conductors. Install wiring in conduit.
D. Mount end -of -line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last
device in circuit.
E. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72.
3.02 FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEMS:
A. General: Comply with requirements of NFPA 13 and 13R for installation of fire
sprinkler piping materials. Install fire sprinkler piping products where indicated, in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION #3 15300 - 8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 2465.00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
recognized industry practices in ensure that fire sprinkler piping complies with
requirements and serves intended purposes.
B. Coordinate with other work, including plumbing piping, as necessary to interface
components of fire sprinkler piping properly with other work.
C. Install piping in joist spaces above ceilings. Cover sprinkler pipe in unheated areas
with 6" of fiberglass insulation batts.
D. All piping shall fully drain in accordance with NFPA 13. Show all low point drain
valves on as -built drawings and provide signs indicating location of such valves.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN:
A. Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush
water feed mains, lead-in connections, and control portions of sprinkler piping. After
fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in
service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under
pressure as specified in ANSVNFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and
check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically,
for period of 2 hours, at no less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static
pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for
leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone
being tested.
B. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with
ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and re -test as specified to
demonstrate compliance.
C. Test detection and alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire
department requirements.
3.05 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final
connections, and system testing.
3.06 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE
A. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded as follows, or
using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION #3 15300 - 9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 2465.00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
B. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white.
C. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red.
D. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown.
E. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative).
F. Door Release: Gray, gray.
G. Municipal Trip Circuit: Orange, orange.
H. Municipal Fire Alarm Loop: Black, white.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to
each.
END OF SECTION 15300
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION #3 15300 - 10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 2465.00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
a. Domestic water supply.
b. Sanitary sewer.
2. Gas plumbing, including solenoid shut-off valve.
3. Gas -fired water heaters.
4. Plumbing specialties:
a. Floor drains.
b. Trench drains
C. Cleanouts.
d. Oil/sand separator
e. Hydrants.
f. Backflow preventers.
g. Water hammer arrestors.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AGA Z21.22: Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water
Supply Systems.
B. ARI 1010: Drinking Fountains and Self -Contained Mechanically Refrigerated
Drinking Water Coolers.
C. ASME A112.6.1: Supports for Off -the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.
D. ASME A112.21.1: Floor Drains.
E. ASME A112.18.1: Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
F. ASME A112.19.1: Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.
G. ASME A112.19.2: Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 15400-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
H. ASME A112.19.3: Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential
Use).
I. ASME A 112.19.4: Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
J. ASME Al 12.19.5: Trim for Water -Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals.
K. ASME Al 12.26.1: Water Hammer Arrestors.
L. ASME B 16.3: Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
M. ASME B 16.18: Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
N. ASME B 16.22: Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
O. ASME B31.2: Fuel Gas Piping.
P. ASME B31.9: Building Service Piping.
Q. ASME SEC IV: Construction of Heating Boilers.
R. ASME SEC IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
S. ASSE 1011: Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
T. ASSE 1012: Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.
U. ASSE 1019: Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types
V. ASTM A53: Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and
Seamless.
W. ASTM A234/A234M: Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.
X. ASTM B32: Solder Metal.
Y. ASTM B42: Seamless Copper Pipe.
Z. ASTM B88: Seamless Copper Water Tube.
A.A. ANSI A21.51: Ductile Iron Pipe, Class 150 with bell and spigot ends for push -on
joints.
BB. ASTM D1557: Modified Proctor
CC. ASTM D2564: Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15400-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
DD. ASTM D2665: Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe
and Fittings.
EE. ASTM D2855: Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pipe and Fittings.
FF. ASTM E814: Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops.
GG. ASTM F708: Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
HH. AWWA C105: Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and
Other Liquids.
II. AWWA C506: Backflow Preventer Devices - Reduced Pressure Principal and
Double Check Valve Types.
JJ. AWWA C651: Disinfecting Water Mains.
KK. CISPI 301: Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
LL. CISPI 310: Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
MM. MSS SP58: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
NN. MSS SP69: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
00. MSS SP-70: Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
PP. MSS SP-78: Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
QQ. MSS SP-80: Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
RR. MSS SP-85: Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
SS. MSS SP89: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
TT. MSS SP-110: Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends.
UU. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code.
VV. PDI WH-201: Water Hammer Arrestors.
WW. UL 1479: Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.
B. For Review:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 15400-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
1. Submit five (5) sets of manufacturer's catalog data for all equipment and/or
products for approval. Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements,
service sizes, trim, and finishes.
C. For Information:
1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods, procedures, and
support requirements.
D. Project Closeout:
1. Plumbing specialties:
a. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment,
cleanouts, backflow preventers, water hammer arrestors.
b. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists,
exploded assembly views.
2. Fixtures:
a. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement
parts lists.
b. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with all local codes and standards. In case of
conflicting requirements, the most stringent shall apply.
B. Minimum requirements shall be the Standard Plumbing Code as published by the
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. All electrically operated
equipment specified in this section shall conform to UL and shall meet the
requirements of the National Electrical Code.
C. Should it be found that any part of the work shown or specified is not in accordance
with local regulations, the Architect shall be so advised prior to the time of bidding.
All work shall be installed as required to meet the local codes. Drawings are
diagrammatic only and do not show all fittings, offsets, bends, etc. Verify
conditions in field and on site.
D. Each subcontractor shall be responsible for firestopping his penetrations.
E. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
F. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX and applicable state
labor regulations.
G. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX.
H. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification or
specification, and water pressure rating.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15400-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
1.06_ DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,
completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
C. Accept fixtures and specialties on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
D. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory
packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.07 FEES AND PERMITS
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, fees for inspection, tap fees, and
charges of every kind that may be necessary for fully completing the work. He shall
make all necessary tests required by City, County, or State authorities, legal
regulations, and/or the Architect and return to the Architect any certificates of
approval issued in this district for plumbing work, etc., signed by the inspector in
charge of each particular part of the work.
1.08 GUARANTEE
A. Contractor shall put all items installed under this section into operation and shall
instruct the Owner's maintenance personnel in all points requiring service and
maintenance. Further, the Contractor shall make all adjustments and/or service
requirements to said equipment during the first sixty days of actual occupancy.
B. All materials and equipment provided and/or installed under this section of the
specifications shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of
acceptance of the work by the Owner. Should any trouble develop during this
period due to defective materials or faulty workmanship, the Contractor shall
furnish all necessary labor and materials to correct the trouble without any cost to
the Owner. Any defective materials or inferior workmanship noticed at the time of
installation and/or during the guarantee period shall be corrected immediately to the
entire satisfaction of the Owner.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide ten-year factory warranty, guaranteeing against failure due to leaks in "Gas
Water Heater Tank/Heater Element Assembly."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED
A. Schedule 40 PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15400-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
1. Fittings: Schedule 40 PVC.
r 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Schedule 40 PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665.
1. Fittings: Schedule 40 PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.03 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM 1388, Type L, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18 cast copper alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought copper
and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM 1332, solder, Grade 95TA.
2.04 WATER SUPPLY PIPING, BELOW GRADE
A. Ductile Iron: ANSI A21.51, Class 150 with bell and spigot ends for push on joints.
1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness.
2. Joints: ANSUAWWA CIII, rubber gasket with 1/4-inch diameter stainless
steel rods. No AWWA C900 mechanical joints are acceptable.
B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88 type K, hard drawn annealed.
1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B 16.29, wrought copper.
2. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
2.05 PIPING INSULATION
A. Service hot water and exposed cold water pipes in unheated spaces: Glass fiber
insulation, 5-lb. density, ANSI/ASTM C547, minimum R-value R-4 per inch,
minimum thickness %2-inch for pipes 1.5 inches or less, and 1-inch for pipes greater
than 1.5-inch diameter.
2.06 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inch:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on
flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene
gaskets.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15400-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper
solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
2.07 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9, MSS SP58, MSS SP69.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron or Carbon steel,
adjustable swivel, split ring.
3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger
rods.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and
wrought steel clamp.
7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,
and concrete pier or steel support.
9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
B. Plumbing Piping - Water:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron or Carbon steel,
adjustable swivel, split ring.
3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron
pipe roll, double hanger.
6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers
and hanger rods.
7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel
channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and
wrought steel clamp.
10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and
wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll.
11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,
floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
locknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron pipe
roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
15. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15400-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
2.08_ GATE VALVES
A. Up To and Including 2 Inches:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Watts Model GV or GVS
b. Nibco Model S-I I I or T-111 or approved equal
2. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel,
inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder or threaded ends.
2.09 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturer: Nibco Model S or T-585-70.
B. Construction, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600 psi CWP, bronze,
two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, Teflon seats and stuffing box
ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder or threaded
ends.
2.10 PLUG VALVES
A. Manufacturer: DeZurik Series 425
B. Construction 4 Inches (65 mm) and Smaller: MSS SP-78, 175 psi CWP, cast iron
body, bronze plug (for sizes less than 2%"), Nickel plated cast iron plug for
remaining sizes, Hycar or Petroleum Hycar resilient plug seal, Buna N packing,
flanged or screwed ends. Provide lever operator with set screw.
2.11 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (IF REQUIRED)
A. Up to 2 Inches:
1. Manufacturers: Watts Series 25AUBGGDU
2. MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts,
fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded and double union ends.
B. Over 2 Inches:
1. Manufacturers: Watts Series N223F
2. MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat
disc, flanged.
2.12 HOT WATER HEATER
A. Provide and install a 100-gal. gas water heater. Unit to comply with the energy
policy of the City of College Station. Equal to Rheem/Ruud per Equipment
Schedule. Provide drip tray and drain lines beneath hot water heater. Pipe PT relief
valve outlet to building drain. Insulate all hot-water supply and recirculation lines
with R-5 insulation.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 15400-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
2.13 _ FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor Drain: ANSI Al12.21.1; cast iron with flange, integral reversible clamping
collar, seepage openings, ''/z" trap primer tap, and 6" dia. Nickel bronze strainer with
vandal proof screws. See sizes on Equipment Schedule.
2.14 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Slotted Trench Drains in Apparatus Bays: Zurn Z806-1002-BD 6" Flo-Thru pre -
sloped trench drainage system with Black Acid Resistant Coated Ductile Iron Grate.
Drain channel shall be glass -filled polyester fiberglass with 0.75% bottom slope.
Channel sections shall be modular 10-foot [3.05 M] lengths with interlocking ends,
close -off caps and shall have heavy-duty, Dura-Coated steel frame with anchor
studs at surface. Install two(2) No. 1002 channel sections end -to -end, such that the
lowest point is at the center of the 20-foot length. Install 3-inch bottom drain center
point so as to drain cross -wise as shown on the drawing sheets.
2.15 CLEANOUTS
A. Exterior Surface Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
B. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round
epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with
machine screw.
C. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Caulked or threaded type.
2.16 HYDRANTS
A. Wall and Post Hydrants: Meeting ASSE 1019; Freeze -proof automatic self draining
wall hydrant with backflow preventer.
2.17 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS (WHERE REQUIRED)
A. ANSI/ASSE 1012, AWWA C506; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal
parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with
intermediate atmospheric vent.
B. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: pressure type anti -siphon vacuum breaker shall be
installed to prevent the back siphonage of contaminated water. This device is not to
be used where there is a possibility that a back pressure condition may develop.
The device shall be of plain brass or chrome finish and contain a single float and
disc with large atmospheric port. The float shall be of a naturally buoyant (UHMW)
material. Maximum temperature 180 degrees F at 125 Lbs. The unit shall be
furnished with an Emergency Repair Kit. The device shall meet the requirements of
ASSE Standard 1001; ANSI Al 12.1.1; CSA B 64.1.1; FCCCHR of USC; typical to
Watts 288A-ERK series.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15400-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
2.18_ WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. ANSI A112.26.1; stainless steel or copper construction, piston type sized in
accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature
range 34 to 250 degrees F and maximum 250 psi working pressure. See sizes on
Equipment Schedule.
2.19 SAND/OIL TRAP
A. Install sand/oil separator/interceptor by Colorado Precast Concrete, Inc. with 200-
gallon storage capacity. Provide with two cast iron cover plates. Trap and vent per
manufacturer's directions with vent height determined on site to match grade. Size
per Equipment Schedule and locate where shown on the drawings..
2.20 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings.
2.21 SOLENOID SHUT-OFF VALVE
A. Install a solenoid shut-off valve in gas line supplying the gas range and outdoor
BBQ grille. Valve shall be equal to Snap-Tite model 230FV-8NA-AKG1,
120VAC, Normally Closed, 1" NPT or Jefferson YC2030LA08T, 120VAC,
Normally Closed, 1" NPT. Operation shall be as follows: A push button manual
reset switch shall be installed above kitchen counter at location shown on the
drawings. Push button switch shall be equal to KJD17-Series pushbutton style
electromagnetic switch manufactured by Lamb Industries, Inc. Valve shall be
remain closed until manual reset (Green) button is pushed. Valve shall remain open
unless signal is received from dispatch, or, in another emergency, the Red button is
pushed. Upon receipt of signal from dispatch, solenoid valve shall close and remain
closed until manual reset switch button is pushed. Label switch as `Manual Gas
Reset". If power failure occurs, solenoid valve shall close and shall remain closed
until power is restored AND manual reset button is pushed. Push button switch and
electrical wiring shall be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor. Electrical
Contractor shall supply solenoid valve and Mechanical Contractor shall install.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15400-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Plumbing Piping:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar
metals.
3. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and
perpendicular to walls.
4. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use
of space.
5. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
6. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,
joints, or connected equipment.
7. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for
installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
8. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
9. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less
than 42 inches of cover.
10. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof
assembly.
11. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing,
scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
12. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility
companies.
13. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for
finish painting.
14. Cut sides of all trenches for piping as nearly vertical as possible from the
bottom of the trench to a point twelve (12") inches above the top of the pipe
when it is laid to grade. The minimum width of trenches in which the pipe
may be installed shall not be less than eight (8") inches plus the outside
diameter of the pipe, and the maximum width shall not be more than twenty
(20") inches plus the outside diameter of the pipe.
15. Backfill to be mechanically compact in six (6") inch lifts up to one (1') foot
below subgrade to a minimum density of ninety (90%) percent, as determined
by ASTM D1557. Mechanically compact in six (6") inch lifts the top one (P)
foot below subgrade to a minimum density of ninety-five (95%) percent, as
determined by ASTM D1557. Use backfill material consisting of good earth,
sand or gravel and which is free from large rocks or hard lumpy material. Do
not use perishable, spongy or otherwise unsuitable material.
16. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
17. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15400-11
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
18. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in
weather proof hood.
19. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
20. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
B. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASTM B31.9 and MSS SP89.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering
and adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers
for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.
7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or sheet lead
packing between hanger or support and piping.
9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located
in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered
exposed.
10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation.
C. Plumbing Specialties (See equipment schedules):
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded
cleanouts plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at
cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
3. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
4. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
5. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where
contamination of domestic water may occur; janitor rooms, irrigation
systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs.
6. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
7. Install water hammer arrestors on hot and cold water supply piping to each
fixture or group of fixtures (restrooms).
D. Plumbing Fixtures (See equipment schedules):
1. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
2. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver
stops, reducers, and escutcheons.
3. Install components level and plumb.
4. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color code to match
fixture.
5. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not
intended hold fixture in place.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15400-12
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
6. Interface with other products by reviewing drawings; confirm location and
size of fixtures and openings before rough -in and installation.
7. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rotate to fixtures without
splashing, noise, or overflow.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder
adapters to pipe.
C. Install gate valves for shut-off and ball valves to isolate equipment, part of systems,
or vertical risers.
D. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.
3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum or as
shown on the plans or as required by local codes. Maintain gradients.
B. Slope above grade water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low
points.
3.06 TESTING
A. Water supply piping shall be hydrostatically tested for leak tightness with potable
water to a pressure of at least 100 psig. Pressure shall be held for a minimum of 10
minutes without showing any drop in pressure. Pressure test shall be completed
prior to disinfection.
B. Building sewer piping shall be tested for leak tightness with water. The connection
to the public sewer shall be plugged, all openings closed, except the highest
opening, and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. Pressure
shall be held for a minimum of 15 minutes without showing any drop in level.
3.07 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic
soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout
system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 15400-13
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at
minimum 15 percent of outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0
mg/L.
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and
from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.08 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide tie-ins to existing sanitary sewer services per the drawings. Before
commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm
inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and
cover to avoid freezing.
B. Provide tie-ins to existing water service per the drawings.
1. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inch
above floor and 3 feet minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2 inches
of loose batt insulation stuffing.
3.09 SCHEDULES
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Metal Piping:
a. Pipe size: 1/2 to 1-1/4 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches
b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 to 2 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.
C. Pipe size: 2-1/2 to 3 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch.
d. Pipe size: 4 to 6 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch.
e. Pipe size: 8 to 12 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 14 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 7/8 inch.
f. Pipe size: 14 inches and Over:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 20 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 1 inch.
2. Plastic Piping:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15400-14
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
a. All Sizes:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.
END OF SECTION 15400
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 15400-15
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PLUMBING
SECTION 15800 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Split System Air-conditioning Systems with Gas -Fired Furnaces.
2. Indoor Air Handler Units with Cooling Coils.
3. Split System Heat Pump Units.
4. Electric Strip Heater Furnace Coils.
5. Gas -Fired, Power -Vented Unit Heaters.
6. HVAC Zone Control Boxes.
7. Ductwork.
8. Grilles and Diffusers.
9. Air Filters.
10. Smoke Detectors.
11. Controls.
12. Kitchen exhaust hood.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Carpentry: Section 06100.
2. Firestopping: Section 07840.
3. Electrical: Division 16.
1.03 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. The Contractor shall comply with all state, county and municipal laws, ordinances
and regulations affecting the installation and design of the system. The Contractor
shall comply with the energy policy of the City of College Station.
B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required permits, inspections, and
certificates of inspection. Certificates shall be delivered to the Architect.
C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and good condition of all
work and materials connected with his contract until same is accepted or operated
by Owner. He shall use proper precaution to protect his own work and that of
others from injury and shall make good without expense to the Owner any damage
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
caused by himself or his employees to person or property. He shall cooperate with
other contractors and coordinate his work with others.
D. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
for and reasonably incidental to proper completion of all air conditioning, heating
and ventilating as shown and herein specified, excepting only such work or
materials specified or noted as being done by others.
E. Each subcontractor shall be responsible for reviewing and complying with
firestopping his penetrations.
1.04 RESPONSIBILITY OF BIDDERS
A. Before submitting proposals, each bidder shall examine all drawings and
specifications issued by the Architect and shall examine the site of work.
Contractor shall be fully informed as to character of his work and coordination of
his work with that of other trades. No consideration will be given at a later date for
alleged misunderstandings as to requirements of work, materials to be furnished or
conditions required by nature of site. The failure or omission of any bidder to
receive or examine any form, instrument, addendum or other document shall in no
way relieve any bidder from any obligation with respect to his bid or the contract.
The submission of a bid shall be taken as prima facta evidence of compliance with
this paragraph and that he has included in his proposal every item of cost necessary
for a complete installation of air conditioning, heating, and ventilating operations
strictly as planned and specified.
1.05 SUBDIVISIONS OF WORK
A. Each subdivision of work includes furnishing and installing all materials to make
that part of work complete, and shall comprise all auxiliaries, setting of equipment,
sleeves through the building construction where required, all in complete
coordination with General Contractor and in cooperation with other trades. It is
contemplated that all subdivision of work when completed will form heating, air
conditioning, and ventilation system for entire work. All work included in this
section of the specification shall be the responsibility of one mechanical
subcontractor to the General Contractor.
B. The subcontractor shall not cut or alter any structural member of the building
without prior approval from the Architect.
C. All round roof penetrations shall be sealed by each subcontractor using assembly for
metal roofing systems. Penetrations shall be warrantied by the subcontractor for
one year from the date of occupancy.
1.06 DRAWINGS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
A. The drawings for the heating, ventilating and air conditioning are diagrammatic.
The contractor shall make his own measurements at the site and in the building
during construction and install the HVAC systems as the work progresses in such a
manner that the equipment, piping, and ductwork will fit into the space provided,
maintain headroom, and if in finished areas, be as neatly installed in as obscure and
inconspicuous manner as physically possible. If any dispute or doubt arises as to
the meaning of the plans and specifications, the same shall be taken up with the
Architect and his decision procured before proceeding with such parts of the work
as may be affected. Failure to observe the foregoing instructions will make the
Contractor liable for all damages to other work and for removing and repairing his
own work in proper manner.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. It is not the intent of this specification to limit material and/or equipment selections
to one manufacturer; however, the Architect reserves the right to be the final and
sole judge with regard to equals.
B. Approval of equipment shall be based on capacities, quality of workmanship and
components, or general and special construction features. Approval of equipment
does not relieve the Contractor of coordination responsibility with other trades.
Equipment shall fit within the physical space of equipment shown and have the
same general connections as that shown on drawings. Proper clearances shall be
maintained for servicing and maintaining equipment.
C. Contractor shall submit detailed sheet metal and piping shop drawings along with
equipment brochures. Shop drawings shall indicate any and all piping, sheet metal,
electrical and structural changes required to facilitate change and any an all
additional costs incurred by changes shall be borne by this Contractor.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.
B. Submittals: It will be necessary to submit shop drawings for all materials and
equipment furnished for this building. Refrigerant piping diagrams shall be
submitted by the equipment manufacturer.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Shop drawings shall be submitted for all equipment before any
work is installed. Detailed wiring diagrams shall be submitted for all equipment
requiring electrical connection or interlock.
D. Copies: After approval, shop drawings will be returned for Contractor's use and
distribution. Should drawings fail to meet approval, Architect will indicate changes
desired. Contractor shall continue to submit five (5) sets of revised drawings until
final approval is obtained. This approval will not relieve the Contractor of capacity
guarantees, correctly figured dimensions, space requirements, or deviations from
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
contract documents. Any deviations from specifications and drawings shall be
requested by letter outlining deviation and reason therefore and must be approved
by endorsement on request letter.
E. Partial Submittals: This Contractor shall submit all shop drawings at one time.
Partial submissions will not be acceptable since it is impracticable to properly
coordinate work from partial submissions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SPLIT SYSTEM UNITS WITH GAS -FIRED FURNACE
A. OUTDOOR CONDENSER UNITS
1. General: Furnish and install air-cooled outdoor DX units. Units shall be
constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel, painted with a weather -resistant
powder paint and fully charged from the factory for up to 25 feet of piping. In
addition, manufacturer shall test operate unit at the factory before shipment.
The outdoor units shall be standard product of a firm regularly engaged in the
manufacture of heating/cooling equipment and designed to operate at outdoor
ambient temperatures as high as 115 degrees. The manufacturer shall have
parts and service available throughout the United States. Units shall be
shipped completely factory assembled, piped and wired internally ready for
field connections, and shall operate with single-phase, 230V, 60 Hz service.
Manufacturer shall test operate each unit at the factory prior to shipment.
Units shall be of the sizes and capacities as shown in the HVAC Equipment
Schedule on the drawings.
2. Compressor: The compressor shall have a 5-year limited warranty, internal
over temperature and pressure protection, total epoxy dipped hermetic motor
windings and compressor heat. Other features to include roto lock suction and
discharge refrigerant connections, centrifugal oil pump, steel alloy valves in
valve plate assembly, and internal spring mounts to reduce vibration and
noise.
3. Refrigerant System: Refrigeration system controls shall include condenser fan
and compressor contactor. High and low pressure controls are inherent to the
compressor. A factory installed liquid line dryer shall be standard.
4. Condenser Coils: Coils shall be continuously wrapped, corrosion resistant all
aluminum with minimum brazed joints. This coil shall be a continuous
aluminum fin. The coil shall be protected on all four sides by louvered panels
and has a 5-year limited warranty. Coil shall be pressure leak tested. Coil face
area shall be sized so as to keep the crossing air velocity at 350 fpm or less.
5. Casing: Shall be constructed of galvanized steel which has been through a
zinc phosphate metal wash preparation and have a coat of baked -on outdoor
enamel. Access shall be provided to allow complete service at all points. The
base section shall be provided with moisture removal openings. Other
openings shall be provided for refrigerant lines and necessary power
connection entries
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
6. Low Ambient Cooling: The units shall have a cooling capability when applied
with the following indoor refrigerant control: FCCV to 55 degrees, TXV to 45
degrees. The addition of an evaporator defrost control shall permit operation
when applied with the following indoor refrigerant control: FCCV to 40
degrees, TXV to 30 degrees.
7. Electrical Characteristics: All wiring shall be in compliance with NEC. The
unit shall comply with ARI Standard 240 Test Conditions, and shall have UL
listing. Unit shall be 208/230V, 3-phase, 60 Hz. Maximum required circuit
amps shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each unit. (NOTE: the
minimum circuit amps are shown on the equipment schedule on the
drawings.)
8. Code Compliance: All wiring shall be in compliance with the NEC and shall
comply with ARI Standard 210 and 360 test conditions. The supplied
condensing unit shall have U.L. listing.
B. INDOOR AIR HANDLER/FURNACE UNIT:
1.
General: Furnish and install blower -coil -filter units. Units shall be factory
assembled and certified by AGA complete with blower section, vertical flow
furnace section, steel casing, piped, and wired. Units shall be as shown on the
equipment schedule, and shall be matched in size to the outdoor compressor
unit. The units shall be completely factory assembled including coil,
condensate drains pan, fan, motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing
that can be applied in vertical configuration. The units shall be UL-listed.
The manufacturer shall have parts and service available throughout the U.S.
2.
Refrigerant Circuits: The units shall have a single refrigerant circuit. The
refrigerant circuit shall be controlled by a factory -installed thermal expansion
valve.
3.
Cooling Coil: Coil shall be of such a size so as to maintain a coil face air
velocity of 375 fpm or less, and shall be constructed of aluminum plate fins
mechanically bonded to copper tubing with all joints brazed. Each coil unit
shall have factory installed: refrigerant metering device; refrigerant line
fittings which permit mechanical connections; and condensate pan with drain
connections. Coil shall be factory pressure and leak tested.
4.
Casing: The unit casing shall be constructed of at least 22-gauge cold rolled
steel and have finish coat of baked -on enamel. Casing shall be insulated and
knockouts shall be provided for electrical power and control wiring. Unit shall
be fitted with 3/4" primary and secondary condensate drain fittings. Drain
locations shall be coordinated with the Architect prior to installation
5.
Fan: Shall be forward curved, mounted on a direct drive motor shaft,
dynamically and statically balanced. The fan(s) shall deliver the required cfm
with 0.40 in. wg external static pressure operating at medium or high fan
speed. Fan motor shall be factory lubricated, have internal overload protection,
be resiliently mounted and shall not exceed 1/2 hp. Fan/motor assembly shall
slide out for servicefan motor bearing.
6.
Air Filters: Electrostatically charged, 1" thick reuseable filters, microparticle
filtration down to one micron size, shall be furnished in return air registers,
low velocity semi -permanent type or washable type.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
7. Controls: Low voltage terminal board, fan contactor, and plug in module for
accessory electric heat control shall be included. Unit shall have a check
valve.
8. Support Hangers: Air Handler units shall be suspended from roof structure on
four (4) 3/8" steel suspension rods furnished complete with spring suspension
shock absorbers capable of supporting a minimum of 100 lbs weight on each
rod. Air Handler units shall be shock -isolated from both supporting structure
and connected ductwork. Suspend each Air Handler such that it has 3"
vertical clearance above the condensate overflow pan.
C. GAS FURNACE:
1. Gas -fired furnace, as scheduled on the drawings, shall have automatic controls
consisting of:
• 100% cut-off safety pilot.
• Manual gas shut-off valve.
• Operating automatic gas valve.
• Solid state type fan and thermal limit controls.
• 24 volt transformer.
• Electronic or automatic ignition system.
2. Heat exchanger units shall be ceramic or glass coated, stainless steel, or 20
gauge aluminized steel, and have a 20-year minimum limited warranty.
2.02 SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
A. OUTDOOR UNITS (HEAT PUMPS)
1. General: Furnish and install air cooled outdoor condenser units. Units shall
be constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel, painted with a weather -
resistant powder paint and fully charged from the factory for up to 25 feet of
piping. In addition, manufacturer shall test operate unit at the factory before
shipment. The outdoor unit shall be standard product of a firm regularly
engaged in the manufacture of heating/cooling equipment and designed to
operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115 degrees. The
manufacturer shall have parts and service available throughout the United
States.
2. Compressor: The compressor shall have a 5 year limited warranty, internal
over temperature and pressure protection, total epoxy dipped hermetic motor
windings and compressor heat. Other features to include roto lock suction and
discharge refrigerant connections, centrifugal oil pump, steel alloy valves in
valve plate assembly, and internal spring mounts to reduce vibration and
noise.
3. Refrigerant System: Refrigeration system controls shall include condenser fan
and compressor contactor. High and low pressure controls are inherent to the
compressor. A factory installed liquid line dryer shall be standard.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
4. Condenser Coils: Coils shall be continuously wrapped, corrosion resistant all
aluminum with minimum brazed joints. This coil shall be a continuous
aluminum fin. The coil shall be protected on all four sides by louvered panels
and has a 5 year limited warranty.
5. Casing: Shall be constructed of galvanized steel and painted with a weather -
resistant powder paint.
6. Low Ambient Cooling: The units shall have a cooling capability when applied
with the following indoor refrigerant control: FCCV to 55 degrees, TXV to 45
degrees. The addition of an evaporator defrost control shall permit operation
when applied with the following indoor refrigerant control: FCCV to 40
degrees, TXV to 30 degrees.
7. Approvals: All wiring shall be in compliance with NEC. The unit shall
comply with ARI Standard 240 Test Conditions, and shall have UL listing.
B. INDOOR AIR HANDLER UNIT:
1. General: Furnish and install blower -coil -filter units. The units shall be
completely factory assembled including coil, condensate drains pan, fan,
motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in
horizontal configuration. The units shall be UL listed. The manufacturer shall
have parts and service available throughout the United States.
2. Refrigerant Circuits: The units shall have a single refrigerant circuit. The
refrigerant circuit shall be controlled by a factory -installed thermal expansion
valve.
3. Coil: Coils shall be factory pressure and leak tested.
4. Casing: The unit casing shall be constructed of sheet metal and steel frame
and painted with an enamel finish. Casing shall be insulated and knockouts
shall be provided for electrical power and control wiring.
5. Fan: Forward curved, dynamically and statically balanced with 3 speed direct
drive shall be standard, fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated.
6. Air Filters: Provide 2" thick disposable pleated filters (Precisionaire Pre -Pleat
40 or equal) for all return air grilles. Outdoor fresh air intake shall be filtered
at each ERV unit with the same type filter, sized 14" x 20".
7. Controls: Low voltage terminal board, fan contactor, and plug in module for
accessory electric heat control shall be included. Unit shall have a check
valve.
8. Support Hangers: Air Handler units shall be suspended from roof structure on
four (4) 3/8" steel suspension rods furnished complete with spring suspension
shock absorbers capable of supporting a minimum of 100 lbs weight on each
rod. Suspend each Air Handler such that it has 3" vertical clearance above the
condensate overflow pan.
C. ELECTRIC FURNACES:
1. Heat pump refrigerant coils and 5- or 8-kW electric strip heaters. See HVAC
Equipment Schedule on drawings.
2.03 GAS -FIRED, POWER -VENTED UNIT HEATERS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 15800-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
1. General: Provide gas -fired, power vented unit heaters suspended from ceiling in the
apparatus room. Units shall be equal to Reznor ® Model UDAP with 83% high -
efficiency fuel rating. Gas connection shall be external to the cabinet. Size as
scheduled on the drawing.
2. Heat Exchanger: The heater shall be equipped with a multicell, 4 pass serpentine
style steel heat exchanger. Heat exchanger tubes shall be press fabricated of 409
stainless steel. All heat exchangers shall be fabricated with no welding or brazing,
only tool pressed mechanical joints. All heat exchanger cells shall be designed with
an aerodynamic cross section to provide maximum airflow.
3. Burner: The units shall incorporate a single, one piece burner assembly with a single
orifice. The burner shall have a continuous wound close pressed stainless steel
ribbon separating the flame from the burner interior. All units shall have a single
venturi tube and orifice supplying fuel to a one-piece burner housing. Each heat
exchanger cell shall use balanced draft induction to maintain optimum flame control.
4. Controls: Controls shall include a single -stage gas valve; direct spark multi -try
ignition with electronic flame supervision with 100% lockout integrally controlled
via a printed circuit control board. The control board shall also incorporate
diagnostic lights, DIP switches for fan overrun settings, and a relay for fan only
operation. All units shall be equipped with a safety limit switch.All controls shall be
enclosed in the unit housing to protect them from accidental damage that could be
caused by factors in the building that would adversely affect external controls.
5. Combustion Air and Venting: The unit shall have a factory -installed power venter
device to draw combustion air through an inlet in the rear of the cabinet. The
combustion air/venting system shall include a vibration isolated power venter motor
and wheel assembly and a combustion air pressure switch. Unit shall include a flame
rollout switch. The unit shall be equipped with an approved common vent option to
allow venting with another gravity -vented Category I gas appliance.
6. Electrical: Operation shall be controlled by an integrated circuit board that includes
LED diagnostic indicator lights. Supply voltage connections are made at the circuit
board. Twenty-four (24)-volt control connections shall be made on an externally
mounted terminal strip. All internal wiring, both line and control voltages, shall be
terminated by insulated terminal connectors to minimize shock hazard during
service. Each unit shall be equipped for use with 115V, 1-phase power supply.
7. Cabinet: The cabinet shall be low profile with a pre -coat or powder -coat RAl 1001
white paint finish. Finish shall be a minimum 80 gloss on G30 galvanized steel. The
cabinet shall be constructed so that screws are not visible from the bottom, front, or
sides, except for service panel and accessories. Unit construction shall incorporate a
beveled front comer on control side for additional cabinet rigidity. All units shall be
manufactured with a tooled drawn supply air orifice on the rear panel to reduce fan
inlet noise. Unit shall be suspended from ceiling with Hanger Kit available from the
manufactured sized for specified unit. The cabinet shall be equipped with RAl 3005
burgundy painted, roll- formed horizontal louvers. louvers shall be spring held and
adjustable for directing airflow. Downturn nozzles shall be available. The cabinet
shall be equipped with a full safety fan guard with no more than %Z inch grill
spacing. The enclosed motor and fan assembly shall be resiliently mounted to the
cabinet to reduce vibration and noise. The unit shall be designed with a full opening
service access panel complete with screw closure attachment and lifting handle for
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
removal. All components in the gas train, all standard electrical controls, and the
power venter shall be within the service compartment. Minimum top, bottom and
non -service side clearance from combustibles shall be I".
8. Certifications: Units shall be design certified by the Canadian Standards Association
to ANSI Z83.8b and CSA 2.6b. Units shall be manufactured in an ISO 9002
certified facility. Manufacturer must have a minimum of 50 years experience in the
manufacture of gas fired unit heaters.
2.04 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Supplied and installed by the electrical subcontractor.
B. Duct smoke detector housing shall be Simplex Duct Detector Housing 2098-9649.
A matching detector baffle, and a correct length sampling tube. Each of these items
shall be separately ordered for proper compatibility with the specific application.
The remote test station shall have remote red LED status indicator and a remote test
key switch mounted on a single gang stainless steel plate. Turning the test switch to
"TEST" will initiate an alarm and allow the resulting system responses to be
verified.
2.05 POWER VENTILATORS
A. Kanalflakt, Fantech, Greenheck or equal. Wall propeller or inline duct type exhaust
fans, direct driven, install according to manufacturers instructions. See Exhaust Fan
Schedule on drawings. Kitchen exhaust hood fan to be UL-listed for grease
environment.
2.06 DRIVES AND SLIDE RAILS
A. Drives for all motors indicated to be belt driven shall be of the adjustable V-belt
type designed for 150 percent capacity of the listed motor horsepower. Direct drive
motors shall be provided with multiple speed taps.
B. Where motors are furnished with adjustable drives, slide rails shall be provided to
allow belt adjustment. Slide rails shall be complete with locknuts and rods to
secure motors in place at any position on slide rails.
2.07 PAINTING
A. All equipment furnished without factory paint or galvanized finish shall be
thoroughly cleaned and given a prime coat, then a finish coat of paint in a color as
selected by Architect. Any equipment finish that is damaged or chipped shall be
spot painted to match existing surface. Any miscellaneous metals used by this
Contractor (except ductwork) shall be given two coats of red primer and one coat of
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
aluminum. Any rusty or corroded finish shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted as
stated above.
2.08 RETURN AIR PLENUMS
A. The General Contractor shall furnish all special foundations and supports for new
packaged equipment as shown by contract drawings. Coordinate size of plenums
with units actually furnished. Return air grilles shall be as scheduled on the
drawings equipped with 2" thick filters.
2.09 DRAIN CONNECTIONS
A. Provide drain connections with trap seal for all evaporator coils. Drain piping shall
be 3/4" Schedule 40 PVC pipe. Piping shall be insulated with 3/8-inch Armstrong
Armaflex insulation slipped over piping. Seal all joints with an approved mastic
and coat insulation exposed to weather with two coats of acrylic protective paint.
Grade piping at 1/4" per 1'-0". Tie to plumbing line unless indicated otherwise.
Provide traps on drain per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Condensate Drains: Run 1/4" drain pipe to 1-1/2" building sewer as shown on the
drawings.
C. Condensate Overflow Pan and Drain: Locate beneath each air handler with 3"
vertical clearance and extended a minimum of 8" beyond outside edge of air handler
cabinet. Overflow drain line to be 1/4" PVC run down inside the exterior wall and
exit the wall 12" above finished surface. Provide a 90 degree elbow on the end of
the stub out.
2.10 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Piping shall be copper, type ACR, ASTM Spec. B280, and shall be mill cleaned,
dried and capped.
B. Fittings shall be extra heavy wrought copper in accordance with ANSI 139.1 with
joints thoroughly clean prior to soldering using a high content silver alloy solder.
C. Installation shall be in accordance with unit manufacturer's requirements with all
piping secured to walls and suspended from trusses with approved hangers and
clamps. Entire installation shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard #15 for
refrigerant piping.
D. Insulate all refrigerant suction lines with 3/4" wall closed -cell foam rubber
insulation slipped over tubing and all joints thoroughly sealed. Paint insulation with
two coats of acrylic protective paint where insulation is exposed to weather. Protect
insulation with minimum 12" formed metal saddles and shields at all hanger points.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
E. Run refrigerant piping from outdoor condenser units to indoor evaporator coil units.
Conduit below floor shall be PVC, sized to suit tubing with insulation.
F. Refrigerant piping diagrams shall be submitted by unit manufacturer showing pipe
sizes, traps, service valves, etc., required for proper operation of equipment. All
piping shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's shop drawings.
G. Test each refrigerant piping system at 300 psi before charging system prior to
connecting condenser unit to evaporator unit. System is to be thoroughly purged
and evacuated before charging with refrigerant in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
2.11 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT
A. General: Flexible air duct shall be a maximum eight feet in length and be supported
using 12" long sheetmetal saddles to prevent reduction in duct diameter and damage
to the duct. All take -offs shall be made using factory fabricated fittings containing
both dampers and scoops. All connections shall be made using approved
mechanical connections and shall be sealed air tight and a vapor barrier shall be
maintained.
B. Codes: Duct shall be UL listed UL-181, Class I Air Duct Material and shall comply
with NFPA 90A and 90B and all local requirements. Factory applied insulation
shall comply with HUD/FHA standards.
C. Products: Duct shall have an design air pressure of 4" w.g. positive and 3/4" w.g.
negative capacity. The U factor shall not be greater than 0.22 BTU/hr/sq.ft./Degrees
F/at 75 degrees F (except exposed supply ductwork shall not be insulated). The
duct shall be capable of handling velocities up to 2000 fpm. The flexible air duct
shall be Thermaflex M-KC, Wiremold WK or prior approved equal.
2.12 AIR DISTRIBUTION
A. General: Due to the scale of the drawings, the exact location of the supply and
return outlets is impossible to be shown. The contractor shall coordinate the exact
location of each outlet with the Architect with regard to ceiling, centering along
sidewalls, etc. Paint duct interior one coat black paint behind face of return air
grille.
B. Furnish and install where shown on drawings: Diffusers, grilles, and registers of the
type shown on the drawings. Grilles and registers to be manufactured by Titus or
equal.
C. Each unit shall be a standard product of the manufacturer of the highest quality
available and shall be of the same manufacturer. All registers shall be of same
manufacturer.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-11
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
2.13 _ CONTROLS
The HV AC control system shall be based on the Carrier Comfort Zone 11 zoning system.
The system shall consist of zone damper control boxes, individual programmable smart
sensors and a by-pass damper box. Contractor shall interface controls with the HVAC
unit install control devices per recommendations of the manufacturer. The zone control
devices are shown in the following table and in the drawing schedules.
Zone Damper / Thermostat Schedule Based on Carrier Comfort Zone II System)
Plan
Mark
Item Description
Prototype
Product Number
Equipment/Space
Controlled
Controlling Device
AC-1
8-Zone Kit
ZONECC8KIT01-B
8 zones
Z-1
6-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND061NC
Bedroom 118,
CU-1, AC-1
T1
ZONECCOSMS01
Z-2
6-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND061NC
Bedroom 117,
CU-1, AC-1
T2
ZONECCOSMSOI
Z-3
6-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND061NC
Bedroom 119,
CU-1, AC-1
T3
ZONECCOSMS01
Z-4
6-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND061NC
Bedroom 116,
CU-1, AC-1
T4
ZONECCOSMS01
Z-5
6-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND061NC
Bedroom 120,
CU-1, AC-1
T5
ZONECCOSMS01
Z-6
6-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND061NC
Bedroom 115,
CU-1, AC-1
T6
ZONECCOSMS01
Z-7 *
6-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND061NC
Bedroom 121,
CU-1, AC-1
T7
ZONECC8E CO1
-Z-8
6-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND061NC
Bedroom 114,
CU-1, AC-1
T8
ZONECCOSMS01
BPD-1
12"
By -Pass Damper
Carrier
DAMPBAR121NC
AC-1
Pressure Diff.
AC-2
4-Zone Kit
ZONECC4KIT01-B
3 zones
Z-9 *
10-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRNDIOINC
Day Room 109,
CU-2, AC-2
T9
ZONECC4E COI
Z-10
12-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND121NC
Kitchen 106,
CU-2, AC-2
T10
ZONECCOSMS01
Z-11
10-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND10INC
Weight Rm 122,
CU-2, AC-2
T11
ZONECCOSMS01
BPD-2
12"
B -Pass Dam er
Carrier
DAMPBAR121NC
AC-2
Pressure Diff.
AC-4
4-Zone Kit
ZONECC4KIT01-B
3 zones
Z-12 *
6-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND061NC
St.Lt.Off. 130,
HP-4, AC4
T12
ZONECC4E COI
Z-13
8-inch Circular
Zone Damper
Carrier
DAMPRND081NC
Police Off. 132,
HP-4, AC-4
T13
ZONECCOSMS01
Z-14
10-inch Circular
Zone Dam er
Carrier
DAMPRND10INC
Rept Writing 133,
HP-4, AC-4
T14
ZONECCOSMS01
* NOTE: Zones with asterisk contain the equipment controller box.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-12
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
2.14 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Spin -Ins: Shall be used at all take -offs (supply and return), for branch ducts. Spin -
ins shall be galvanized steel complete with damper and locking quadrant. Spin -in
shall be designed specifically for type duct and insulation thickness being used.
B. Turning Vanes: At all turns in direction of 45 degrees or more furnish and install
turning vanes. Turning vanes shall be double thickness type installed in a vane rail.
Hart & Cooley Ductums or equal.
2.15 SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK
A. This part of the specification shall apply to all ductwork used in heating, air
conditioning and ventilating systems. Ductwork shall be constructed of steel sheets,
furnished and installed in sizes as indicated and located where shown on the
drawings. This part of the work shall include all ductwork, manual damper access
panels, louvers, etc., with all accessories to make a complete air distribution system.
Noise, vibration, or drumming of air in ductwork, noises at air outlets or returns,
excessive air leaks, malfunctioning of dampers, etc., will be cause for rejecting
affected parts of the ductwork. Special note for Return Air Ducts: All air duct
sizes shown on plans are inside clear dimensions and must be increased for total
insulation thicknesses as herein specified.
B. Trunk duct shall be fabricated utilizing sheet metal, externally insulated.
C. The weights of materials, types of joints and bracing shall follow SMACNA
standards for sheetmetal ductwork.
D. The following details of duct construction shall be adhered to without deviation:
I. Longitudinal seams for metal shall be Pittsburgh lock.
2. Sweep elbows shall be made with inside radius equal to width of ducts except
as shown on the drawings. Square elbows must be provided with approved
turning vanes to assure good air flow to outlets.
3. Horizontal ducts shall be hung at intervals not exceeding 8'-0" with 18 gauge
galvanized iron hangers extending the full height of the duct.
4. All ductwork shall be fabricated in strict accordance with SMACNA HVAC
Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, For Maximum Velocity of
2000 fpm and Maximum Static Pressure of Plus/Minus 1/2".
5. Flexible Ductwork Connections: All duct connections to AHU's fans, etc.,
shall be made through a 4" wide flexible connection, 30 oz. closely woven UL
approved glass fabric, double coated with neoprene, fire retardant, waterproof,
air -tight, resistant to acids and grease, and withstand constant temperatures of
250°F. Connections shall be equal to Ventglas or DuroDyne.
6. Kitchen exhaust duct to be minimum 18-ga stainless steel, welded or brazed
seams and joints, double -wall, fire -rated for 121 degree F at zero clearance
and shall be fitted with a backflow damper. Joints shall be installed to prevent
ledges that collect grease or cause grease buildup. Vibration isolators,
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-13
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
dampers, flex duct connectors, duct bracings, and duct supports shall be of
noncombustible materials. Duct shall be insulated with FIREMASTER
FastWrap+ by Thermal Ceramics or approved equal. The insulation shall
conform to requirements for grease ducts FastWrap+ and Tremco Fyre-Sill
silicone firestop sealant. The system shall provide a minimum of one (1) hour
protection.
2.16 ACCESS DOORS
A. Air duct access doors shall be steel of the double wall insulated type complete with
hinges and camlock latches. Insulation shall be dense fiberglass with a minimum
R-value of 5 at 50 degrees F. mean temperature. Provide access doors to service all
fire dampers and elsewhere where indicated. Provide the following size access
openings as follows:
DUCT DIAMETER
8" - 13"
14" and over
2.17 DAMPERS
ACCESS OPENING
8" -12"
14" - 20"
A. Manual volume dampers shall be equal to Titus Type AG or Arrow Type SB-28
with %2" shaft and locking quadrant. Install in all supply, return and outside air duct
outlets where shown on the Grille and Diffuser Schedule on the drawings.
2.18 DUCT INSULATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Owens-Corning, Certainteed, Johns Manville. Type A
glass fiber insulation shall be applied on the outside of all supply air ductwork and
fresh air inlet ducts in accordance with SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard;
commercial grade; minimum R-5 per inch; minimum 1-inch thickness; 0.002-inch
foil scrim facing on outside face.
B. Return air duct shall be insulated on the interior with 1" thick dense fiberglass duct
liner equal to Owens-Corning Type 150 Aeroflex Duct Liner. Insulation shall run
for the first 10 feet from the return air grille.
2.19 UNIT GAS HEATERS
A. Furnish and install four (4) Power -vented Unit Gas Heaters where shown on the
contract drawings in the Apparatus Room. Reznor or equal. Sizes are shown on the
equipment schedule.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-14
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
2.20_ KITCHEN EXHAUST HOOD
A. Kitchen exhaust ventilation hood shall be equal to Empire Model ENFR-100 in
configuration as shown on the drawings. Unit shall be fabricated of Type 430
stainless steel with #4 polish on all exposed surfaces. Unit shall have pre -punched
hanging angles on each end of hood. Vertical extension shall be sized to extend
from hood top to ceiling, enclosing pipe and hanging parts.
B. Hood shall be fitted with UL Classified stainless steel high velocity cartridge filters
removable for cleaning.
C. Grease drain system shall be provided with 1/8" per foot minimum slope and with
removable pint cup for easy cleaning.
D. Make-up air shall be supplied through perforated stainless steel panel on the front
face of the hood. One -inch insulation with non -absorbent facing shall line the
make-up air plenum to prevent condensation. Insulation shall be flame spread rated
at less than 25' when tested in accordance with UL Standard 723.
E. Make-up air plenum shall contain perforated metal plates to evenly distribute make-
up air across the length of the hood. Make-up air risers (supply and exhaust) on the
hood's top shall contain a UL-listed fire and volume dampers and shall include an
opposed -blade volume damper adjustable by means of a control mechanism located
on the side of the riser. Fire dampers shall be activated by a UL listed, 212F, 10-lb.
minimum rated fusible link.
F. Unit shall be fitted with UL listed, pre -wired, incandescent light fixtures and
plastic -coated glass globes to hold a standard 100 watt bulb.
G. A built-in wiring chase shall be provided for optimal positioning of electrical
controls and outlets on the front face of the hood without penetrating capture area or
requiring external chaseway.
H. Unit shall be UL listed for 450°F cooking surface, UL listed to Canadian safety
standards, NSF listed and built in accordance with NFPA Standard 96. Recognized
by the ICC.
I. Fire Suppression Utility Cabinet (UL listed) shall be mounted on right side of the
hood and fabricated of same material as hood. Cabinet shall house factory pre -
piped UL listed fire suppression system and UL listed, pre -wired electrical controls
consisting of light switches, lighted fan control switches and internal factory wiring
and components (starters, relays, etc.)
I The Front Perforated Supply Plenum shall provide low velocity make-up air for the
kitchen, discharged in front of the hood, welded, stainless steel, with perforated
diffuser plates for even air distribution.
2.21 KITCHEN GREASE EXHAUST FAN (INLINE CENTRIFUGAL)
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-15
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
A. Inline grease exhaust fans shall be of the tubular centrifugal type with backward
inclined wheels. Fans to include the UL 762 Label for grease removal and shall be
built in accordance to NFPA 96 (Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations).
B. The housings shall be continuously welded heavy gauge steel with integral duct
flanges to prevent grease and moisture leakage. Duct flange bolt holes shall be no
more than 4 inches (100 mm) apart on center to provide a tight duct connection.
Belt tubes shall be continuously welded to ensure belt remains free of grease and
moisture. Bearing covers to be sealed with silicone gasketing rated for 400' F (200'
C) and include a labyrinth shaft seal to protect the bearings from the airstream
contaminants (felt or neoprene shaft seals are not acceptable). Fan housing to
include two threaded and plugged drain connections that are located at 90' from the
motor. Fans are to be universally mountable with motors in either the 3 or 9 o'clock
position.
C. Inline grease fans shall include an oversize access door to allow for duct cleaning
and for removal of the fan wheel, shaft and bearings without lowering the fan from
the duct system. Fastening bolts for the oversized access door shall be no more than
4 inches (100 mm) apart on center. The oversize access door to include silicone
gasketing rated for 4000 F (200°C).
D. The wheel shall be of the non -overloading backward inclined centrifugal type with
aluminum construction. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The
wheel cone and fan inlet cone shall be carefully matched and shall have precise
running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency.
E. Turned precision ground and polished steel shafts shall be sized so the first critical
speed is at least 25% over the maximum operating speed for each level of
construction.
F. Bearings shall be heavy-duty grease lubricated and self -aligning. Bearings shall be
selected for a basic rating fatigue life L(10) of 80,000 hours {equivalent to L(50)
average life of 400,000 hours) at the maximum operating speed.
G. All internal and external steel components shall be painted with Permatector, an
electrostatically baked polyester urethane coating. All coated materials shall
undergo a five stage environmentally friendly wash, followed by a minimum 2 mil
dft finish. Paint must exceed 1,000 hour salt spray under ASTM B117 test method.
H. Inline tubular centrifugal fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seals fur both
sound and air performance.
I. Fans shall be equal to TCB as manufactured by Greenheck Fan Corporation of
Schofield, Wisconsin, USA.
2.22 KITCHEN EXHAUST DUCT.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-16
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
A. Kitchen exhaust shall be minimum 18-ga stainless steel, welded or brazed seams
and joints, fitted with a backflow damper. Joints shall be installed to prevent ledges
that collect grease or cause grease buildup. Vibration isolators, dampers, flex duct
connectors, duct bracings, and duct supports shall be of noncombustible materials.
Duct shall be insulated on the outside with 2" (minimum R-8) foil -encapsulated
FireMaster FastWrap blanket, with 2 hour fire rating. Wrap shall be secured by
stainless steel bands and have all joints sealed with fire -resistive sealant.
2.23 SOLENOID SHUT-OFF VALVE
A. Install a solenoid shut-off valve in gas line supplying the gas range and outdoor
BBQ grille. Valve shall be equal to Snap-Tite model 230FV-BNA-AMGI,
120VAC, Normally Closed, 1-1/2" NPT. Operation shall be as follows: A push
button manual reset switch shall be installed above kitchen counter at location
shown on the drawings. Push button switch shall be equal to KJD17-Series
pushbutton style electromagnetic switch manufactured by Lamb Industries, Inc.
Valve shall be remain closed until manual reset (Green) button is pushed. Valve
shall remain open unless signal is received from dispatch, or, in another emergency,
the Red button is pushed. Upon receipt of signal from dispatch, solenoid valve shall
close and remain closed until manual reset switch button is pushed. Label switch as
`Manual Gas Reset". If power failure occurs, solenoid valve shall close and shall
remain closed until power is restored AND manual reset button is pushed. Push
button switch and electrical wiring shall be furnished and installed by Electrical
Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall supply solenoid valve and Mechanical
Contractor shall install
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee, in writing, the entire system when completed to be
free from any and all defects and shall guarantee the entire system, controls and
other equipment during the guarantee period. The affected part or parts shall be
promptly repaired or replaced with new parts at the expense of the Contractor.
B. Upon receipt of notice from the Architect of the failure of any part of the guaranteed
equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be promptly
repaired or replaced with new parts by and at the expense of the contractor.
3.02 MAINTENANCE DATA
A. For all items of apparatus, etc., requiring maintenance, the Contractor furnishing
same shall furnish and deliver to the Architect on the job, three (3) complete sets of
data as prepared by the manufacturer covering details of project.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-17
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
3.03- INSTALLATION
A. Remove all dust, dirt, paint, etc., from equipment grilles, diffusers and ductwork.
B. Duct system shall be tested and proven substantially air tight. All register bodies
shall be securely attached to ceiling diffusers and return air grilles and registers.
C. A.C. units shall be run tested and thoroughly checked for operation on both heating
and cooling cycles. Temperature readings shall be recorded which indicate that
units are charged properly. All controls shall be thoroughly checked for proper
performance.
3.04 TEST, BALANCE AND ADJUST
A. The Contractor shall obtain the services of an independent T&B firm that is
acceptable to the City of College Station. Include verification of control sequences,
sensor calibration, operation of input/output and final control devices, and HVAC
equipment.
B. Testing and balancing of air flows shall be performed in complete accordance with
AABC National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Form
Number 12173, Volume Two, section applicable to air distribution.
C. Instruments for testing and balancing of air systems shall have been calibrated
within a period of one year. Submit list of instruments to be used for balancing.
D. Set up pressure relationships in all areas including bedrooms, offices, conference
room, toilets, etc.
E. Four copies of the complete test report shall be submitted to the City of College
Station prior to final acceptance of the project.
END OF SECTION 15800
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 15800-18
OCTOBER 20, 2006 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING
SECTION 16002 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items specified herein,
indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper
operation; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically
called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as
indicated by the design and the equipment specific. Elements of the work include,
but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, supplies, equipment,
transportation, storage, utilities and all required permits and licenses. All work
performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications, "provide" and "furnish and install" shall be synonymous.
B. Drawings: Refer to the Electrical Drawings for graphic representations, schedules,
and notations showing electrical work.
C. Specifications: Refer to this Division for the primary technical specifications of
electrical work.
D. Work Included: This Work includes the furnishing of all labor, materials,
equipment, fixtures, apparatus, and appurtenances required for complete installation
of operating electrical systems as specified, in place and ready for service. Refer to
Section 16004, "Electrical Scope of Work", for additional requirements.
E. Work of Other Sections: Requirements given within this Section apply to the Work
of all Sections of this Division. The actual performance of the Work stays within
the Section in which it occurs; but subject to the requirements of this Section to the
Extent applicable.
Finish painting of electrical systems in areas exposed to the view of building
occupants is specified in other Divisions.
2. Installation of electrical control power which is not specified as an integral
part of equipment specified under Division 15 is specified under this Division.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
3. Access doors in finished surfaces are specified under other Divisions.
Locations are shown on the Drawings and as required for proper equipment
access.
4. Concrete housekeeping pads, curbs, ductbank encasement and supporting
structures are specifies under this division. Dimensions and locations of pads
and supports shall be the responsibility of this Division.
5. Owner and General Contractor -furnished equipment is furnished and installed
under other Divisions. Proper electrical provisions, including rough -in and
final equipment connections are included in the Work of this Division.
6. Motors for all equipment shall be furnished and installed with the equipment.
7. Motors and motor starters that are an integral part of the equipment are
furnished with the driven equipment; all other motor starters, electrical wiring
and connections are included in the Work of this Division.
1.03 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES:
A. General: Comply with the most recently revised versions of applicable laws, rules,
regulations, and ordinances of federal, state and local utilities and authorities.
Where alterations to and deviations from the Contract Documents are required by
said authority, report the requirement and secure approval before starting work.
Obtain all applicable permits, licenses and inspections and pay all fees charged by
above authorities.
B. Code Design Basis: The following codes and ordinances were used in the design of
the project and shall be complied with during construction of the project.
1. Building Code — International Building Code, 2000
2. Fire Code — NFPA 101
3. Electrical Code — National Electrical Code, 1999
4. Mechanical Code — International Building Code, 2000
5. Plumbing Code — International Building Code, 2000
6. Energy Code — International Energy Conservation Code, 2000 Edition.
7. Handicapped Code — Texas Accessibility Standards
8. Local building codes.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
C. Precedence: Where Contract Document requirements are in excess of Code
requirements and are permitted under Code, the Contract Documents shall govern.
None of the terms or provisions of the Drawings or Specifications shall be
construed as waiving any of the rules, regulations or requirements of these
authorities. In the event of conflict between the Contract Documents and the local
enforcing authority, the latter shall rule. Any modifications resulting there from
shall be made without additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. This Contractor
shall report any such modifications to the Engineer and secure his approval before
proceeding.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS
A. Materials/Methods: Manufacturers, materials, and methods described in the various
sections of the Specifications, and indicated on the drawings are intended to
establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Engineer to
discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as
indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding.
The fact that a specified manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should
not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers standard products will meet the
requirements of the project design, Specifications and space constraints. The
Engineer shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials
and methods.
B. Alternative Product/Materials/Methods: Products by other reliable manufacturers,
other materials, and other methods may be accepted provided they have equivalent
capacity, construction, and performance. Under no circumstances shall any
substitution be made without the prior written approval of the Engineer. Wherever
a definite product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the
Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be
used without prior approval. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's
produce is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and
equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be provided, it is the
intention of the Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the
only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will
not be considered for substitution without prior written approval.
C. Alternative Equipment: Where substituted or alternative equipment is used on the
project, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor involved to
verify that the equipment will fit in the space available, including all required Code
and maintenance clearances, and to coordinate all equipment requirements and
provisions with the Electrical Design and all other Contractors.
D. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the
electrical work, and with other work requiring interface with the electrical work,
including electrical connections and control devices. For exposed electrical work,
coordinate colors and finishes with other work. Determine in advance of purchase
that equipment and materials proposed for installation will fit into the confines
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
indicated, leaving adequate clearance as required by applicable codes and for
l adjustment, repair, and replacement.
E. Standards:
Refer to Division 1 for general administrative/procedural requirements
related
to compliance
with applicable standards. This Work and all materials shall
meet the standards set forth in the applicable portions of the following recognized
standards.
1.
ACA
American Correctional Association
2.
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies.
3.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
4.
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air -Conditioning
Engineers
5.
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
6.
ASPE
American Society of Plumbing Engineers
7.
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
8.
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
9.
AWS
American Welding Society
10.
CBM
Certified Ballast Manufacturers
11.
CDA
Copper Development Association
12.
CE
Corps of Engineers (U.S. Department of the Army)
13.
EIA
Electronic Industry Association
14.
ETL
Electrical Testing Laboratory
15.
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration (US Department of
Transportation)
16.
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
17.
FM
Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation
18.
FS
Federal Specification (General Services Administration)
19.
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineering Association
20.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
21.
IES
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
22.
IRI
Industrial Risk Insurers
23.
LPI
Lighting Protection Institute
24.
MIL
Military Standardization Documents (US Department of Defense)
25.
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry
26.
NEC
International Electrical Code (by NFPA)
27.
NECA
National Electrical Contractor Association
28.
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
29.
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
30.
OSHA
Occupational Safety Health Administration (US Department of
Labor)
31.
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
1.05 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. General: Become familiar with the Drawings and Specifications, examine the
premises, and understand the conditions under which the Contract shall be
performed, prior to submitting a bid.
B. Site: Be informed of the site conditions, verify locations of new and existing
equipment, and determine exact requirements for connections.
C. Coordination: Submission of a bid for this project infers that the Contractor has
visited the site and has become familiar with the Drawings and site conditions and
has included in his proposal, all work necessary to properly install the systems on
the project.
1.06 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
A. General: The Drawings are schematic in nature and indicate approximate locations
of the electrical systems, equipment, fixtures and devices, except where specific
locations are noted and dimensioned on the Drawings. All items are shown
approximately to scale. The intent is to show how these items shall be integrated
into the building. Locate all items by on the job measurements and in accordance
with the Contract Documents. Cooperate with other trades to ensure project
completion as indicated.
B. Location: Prior to locating electrical devices, light fixtures, and other items, obtain
the Architect/Engineer's approval as to exact location. Locations shall not be
determined by scaling Drawings. Mount lighting fixtures and electrical devices at
the heights directed by the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall be responsible for
cost of redoing work of trades necessitated by failure to comply with this
requirement.
1. All electrical devices, lighting fixtures, and other devices shall be referenced
to coordinated, established data points and shall be located to present
symmetrical arrangements with these points and to facilitate the proper
arrangements of acoustical tile panels and other similar panels with respect to
the mechanical and electrical outlets and devices. Electrical devices, fixtures
and outlets shall be referenced to such features as wall and ceiling f irrings,
balanced border widths, masonry joints, etc. Outlets in acoustical tile shall
occur symmetrically in tile joints or in the centers of whole tiles and the exact
location of each outlet and the arrangements to be followed shall be acceptable
to the Architect/Engineer. Outlets in wall tile or masonry construction shall
occur symmetrically in the centers of whole tiles, bricks, or blocks and the
exact location of each outlet and the arrangement to be followed shall be
acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
2. The Drawings show diagrammatically the location of the various outlets and
apparatus. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined
by reference to the general Drawings and to all detail Drawings, equipment
Drawings, rough -in Drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
cooperation with the other trades. The Owner and Architect/Engineer reserve
the right to make any reasonable change in the location of any outlet or
apparatus before installation, without additional cost to the Owner.
C. Specifications: The specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it is
not in the scope of the specifications to mention any part of the work which the
Drawings are competent to fully explain. Conversely, any part of the work which
the specification are competent to fully explain, may not be mentioned on the
Drawings.
D. Disagreement: Disagreement between the Drawings or Specifications or within the
Drawings or Specifications shall be estimated using the better quality or greater
quality of material or installation, and a request for information shall be made to the
Engineer.
1.07 DISCREPANCIES:
A. Clarification: Clarification shall be obtained before submitting a proposal for the
work under this Division as to discrepancies or omissions from the Contract
Documents or questions as to the intent thereof.
B. Detailed Instructions: Should it appear that the work hereby intended to be done or
any of the materials relative thereto, is not sufficiently detailed or explained in the
Drawings or Specifications, then the Contractor shall apply to the Engineer for such
further Drawings or explanations as may be necessary, allowing a reasonable time
for the Engineer to respond. The Contractor shall conform to this additional
information as a part of the Contract without additional cost to the Owner or
Engineer.
C. Interpretations: Should any doubt or question arise respecting the true meaning of
Drawings or Specifications, reference shall be made to the Engineer, whose written
decision shall be final and conclusive. No alleged statement by the Engineer will be
accepted as an excuse for inferior work.
D. Contractor Agreement: Consideration will not be granted for misunderstanding of
the amount of work to be performed. Submission of a bid conveys full Contractor
agreement of the items and conditions specified, shown, scheduled, or required by
the nature of the project.
1.08 UTILITIES:
A. General: Utility information shown on the Drawings have been shown based upon
data obtained from the site survey and the agencies having jurisdiction and are
accurate to the best of the knowledge of the Engineer.
B. Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for field verification of the actual
location of site and/or building utilities and shall make modifications necessary for
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
connection to or construction around those utilities at no additional cost to the
Owner or Engineer.
1.09 TEMPORARY FACILITIES:
1. General: Refer to Uniform General Conditions and Division 1 for
requirements concerning temporary electrical facilities.
1.10 CHANGE ORDERS
A. General: Refer to Uniform Conditions and Division 1 for requirement concerning
Change Orders.
1.11 EARLY OCCUPANCY
A. General: Refer to Division 1 for information concerning early
completion/occupancy of the Minimum/Medium Security Building.
1.12 ALTERNATIVES
A. General: Refer to Division 1 for information concerning Alternates.
1.13 PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Conference: Upon the award of this Contract and prior to commencing any work,
the Contractor and his designated major subcontractors, shall confer with the
Architect, Engineer and Owner concerning the Work under this Contract. The
conference shall be at a mutually agreeable place and time.
B. SITE OBSERVATION:
C. General: Observation at the site to verify general compliance with Contract
Documents shall be made periodically by the Engineer or his representative.
Written observation comments shall be submitted to the General Contractor for
review and a written response.
1.14 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
A. General: All Contractor Requests for Information (RFI's) shall be submitted to the
Engineer in writing, for response.
B. Format: All RFI's shall be submitted on a form which has a space for the requested
information and the Engineer's response.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
C. Responses: The Engineer will endeavor to provide RFI response time in the
t Engineer's office of five working days after receipt of the RFI by the Engineer.
1.15 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals required for this project shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Shop Drawings and Product Brochure Submittals.
2. Certifications and Test Reports.
3. Operating and Maintenance Manuals
4. Warranties (Guarantees)
B. Refer to Division 1 for additional submittal requirements.
C. Shop Drawing and Product Brochure Submittals: The Contractor shall submit a
minimum of eight complete bound sets of Shop Drawings and complete data
covering each item of equipment or material. The terms "submittal" and "Shop
Drawing" in this Specification are defined as either product literature, samples of
equipment, or actual Shop Drawings. The first submittal of each item requiring a
submittal must be received by the Engineer within 90 days of contract award. The
Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive
Shop Drawings review time where the first submittal is received more than 90 days
after contract award. The Architect, Owner, and Engineer will each retain one copy
of all Shop Drawing submittals for their files. Where full size Drawings are
involved, submit two prints and one reproducible in lieu of eight sets. Shop
drawing submittals are also required in O&M manuals.
1. Contractor shall prepare complete submittals that include all pertinent
information about the product. A single Shop Drawing shall not contain
information from more than one Specific sectio, but a single Specification
section may be subdivided into separate submittals for items or equipment that
are specified in that section. Shop Drawings shall be separately bound by
complete or partial Specification section. Where a single Shop Drawing
contains information from more than one Specification section, it will be
marked "REVISE AND RESUBIT" and returned. Each Shop Drawing shall
include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder, Shop Drawings that
do not comply with the above requirements will be marked "REVISE AND
RESUBMIT" and returned to the Contractor:
a. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect,
M/E/P Engineer, General Contractor, and the Subcontractor making the
submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the Specification section
number applicable to the item or items submitted, the item nomenclature
and description and a submittal number. Electrical submittals shall be
numbered sequentially by Specification section with a sequence suffix
(e.g. 16640-1, 16640-2, 16700-1, etc.). Resubmittals shall be numbered
with the original submittal number plus an "R" in the sequence suffix
(e.g. the resubmittals of submittal 16640-1 would be 16640-1R1, 16650-
1 R2, etc.).
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
b. An index page with a listing of all data included in the submittal.
C. A list of variations. This page shall list all variations, including
unfurnished or additional items or features between the submitted
equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then
this page shall state "No Variations". Where variations affect the work
of other contractors, then the contractor shall certify on this page that
these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected contractors
and that all additional costs to the affected contractors associated with
the variations shall be paid by the submitting contractor.
d. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation,
size, performance and capacity data. All applicable listings, labels,
approvals and standards shall be clearly indicated.
e. Dimensional data and actual sketches as applicable to show that the
submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code
and maintenance clearances
f. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that
indicated on the Drawings.
g. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to
show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any
options or special requirements shall be so indicated. All applicable
information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved
method. Any non -applicable information shall be crossed out.
h. Additional information as required in other sections of this Division.
i. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the
material submitted is in accordance with the Contract Documents, signed
and dated.
j. Reports or information requiring certification shall be certified by an
authorized officer of the manufacturer or testing agency.
k. Certified Shop Drawings showing dimensions, loading details, anchor
bolt locations, and inserts required for each piece of equipment set on
concrete in sufficient time to cause no delay in the work.
1. Equipment and material shall show sufficient data including all
performance data, recommended installation details, and sufficient data
to indicate complete compliance with the Contract Documents, including
proper sizes, clearances, capacities, materials, and finishes.
D. Required Shop Drawing Submittals: Submit Shop Drawings, including, but not
limited to the following items. Refer to individual specification sections for
specific submittal requirements.
1. Basic Materials and Methods Refer to Section 16100
2. Electrical Raceways and Fittings Refer to Section 16110
3. Electrical Boxes and Fittings Refer to Section 16112
4. Electrical Gutters and Wireways Refer to Section 16115
5. 300/600 Volt Cable, Wire and Connectors Refer to Section 16120
6. Wiring Devices Refer to Section 16140
7. Contractors, Relays, Photocells, and Time Switches Refer to Section 16145
8. Panelboards and Enclosures Refer to Section 16160
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
16002-9
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
9. Safety and Disconnect Switches
10. 250/600 Volt Fuses
11. 5/15 kV Fuses
12. Electrical Connections for Equipment
13. Miscellaneous Electrical Controls and Control Wiring
14. Electrical Service Entrance
15. Electrical rounding
16. 600/240 Volt Switchboards
17. Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Poles
18. Voice/Data System Provisions
19. Cable Television System Provisions
Refer to Section 16170
Refer to Section 16181
Refer to Section 16182
Refer to Section 16190
Refer to Section 16196
Refer to Section 16401
Refer to Section 16450
Refer to Section 16475
Refer to Section 16500
Refer to Section 16741
Refer to Section 16782
E. Samples: Submit two samples, upon request, of electrical devices and materials for
review by the Architect/Engineer. Samples will be returned upon written request of
the Contractor.
F. Shop Drawing Submittal Review: Shop Drawings will be reviewed for general
conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the
information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown in review
comments is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. The
submitting contractor is responsible for: dimensions which shall be confirmed at the
job site; fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordination of his
work with that of all other trades; and the satisfactory performance of his work.
1. The Engineer will endeavor to provide a Shop Drawing in the Engineer's
office of two weeks per review, exclusive of transmittal time, and this review
time shall be considered by the Contractor when scheduling his work on the
project.
2. The Architect's review or approval and the Engineer's review of Shop
Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for errors,
omissions or deviations that may be contained in the submittals. If the
Contractor proceeds on the basis of undetected errors, omissions or deviations
in reviewed Shop Drawings, it shall be at his sole responsibility and the
review does not allow deviations from the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Noting some errors, omissions, and deviations but overlooking
other errors, omissions, and deviations does not grant the Contractor
permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the
Shop Drawing or the engineer's review thereof, the Contract Documents shall
govern the Work and are neither waived or superseded by the Shop Drawing
review.
3. It shall be the responsibility of the submitting Contractor to check all
equipment and materials for conformance with the Contract Documents and
"REVIEWED WITH NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE
CORRECTIONS NOTED" submittal at the time such equipment and
materials are delivered to the job site, and to notify the Engineer of any
deviations.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
I
4.
W
0
7
A
Inadequate or incomplete Shop Drawings will not be reviewed by the
Architect or the Engineer and will be returned to the Contractor marked
"REVISE AND RESUBMIT" for completion and resubmittal.
Shop Drawings will be marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN", "MAKE
CORRECTIONS AS NOTED", "REVISE AND RESUBMIT" or
"REJECTED" when reviewed by the Engineer. The definitions of these terms
for review purposes is as follows:
a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN — The Shop Drawing was reviewed and no
exceptions from the general conformance with the design concept and
general compliance with the information given in the Contract
Documents were noted.
b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED — The Shop Drawing was reviewed
and found to have minor deviations from the requirements of the
Contract Documents, as noted. A Shop Drawing resubmittal is not
required, however, the furnished material/system shall comply with the
corrections.
C. REVISE AND RESUBMIT — The Shop Drawing was reviewed and
major deviations from general conformance with the design concept and
general compliance with the information given in the Contract
Documents were observed, as noted. The Shop Drawings shall be
revised to eliminate the deviations noted and resubmited.
d. REJECTED — The Shop Drawing was reviewed and is not in general
conformance with the design concept or in compliance with the
information given in the Contract Documents, as noted. A revised Shop
Drawing submittal for the specific equipment or materials shall be
resubmitted.
Division 1 and General Conditions requirements concerning Shop Drawings
submittal review are not applicable to this Division.
Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without a
"REVIEWED WITH NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE
CORRECTIONS AS NOTED" Shop Drawing review shall be at the risk of
the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and
equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the
Architect/Engineer for any reason, shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
Shop Drawings shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the
Engineer for review. Incomplete submittals will be returned to the Contractor
unchecked.
G. Certifications and Test Reports: The Engineer may, at their option, witness any or
all on and off -site acceptance and operational testing. Submit a detailed listing of
certification and testing for each system indicating estimated dates for completion
of system installation. This listing of certification and testing shall be submitted at
least 30 days before any testing is conducted.
1. Test procedures and test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review
no later than the date of the certification and testing listing submittal.
2. Notify the Engineer to schedule witnessing of testing, where elected by the
Engineer.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-11
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
3. Submit four copies of all certifications and test reports to the Engineer for
review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for
remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment
and systems.
H. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit two copies of Operating and
Maintenance Manuals to the Engineer for approval prior to the beginning of
operator training. Provide four approved Operating and Maintenance Manuals for
use in operator training. Manuals shall be bound in rigid cover, 3-ring binders with
spine and cover labels and shall provide operating and maintenance information for
every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be
typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference. Bulletins containing
information about equipment which is not installed on the project shall be properly
marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the
Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 16
shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda which shall, likewise, be bound
with bulletins. As a minimum, the following information shall be provided as
applicable:
1. Complete description of each system, item of equipment, and apparatus
provided under this Division, including ratings, capacities, performances, data
and curves, characteristics identifying name and number, locations, and wiring
diagrams, including sources of all parts.
2. Fully detailed parts lists, including all numbered parts and recommended spare
parts, of each item of equipment and apparatus provided under this Division.
3. Manufacturer's printed instructions describing operation, service,
maintenance, and repair of each item of equipment and apparatus.
4. Typewritten record of tests made of materials, equipment, and systems
included under this Division. Such records shall state the dates the tests were
conducted, name(s) of person(s) making and witnessing the tests, and citing
any unusual conditions relevant to the test.
5. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment.
6. Equipment and motor nameplate data.
7. Copies of all approved Shop Drawings submittals.
8. Fabrication drawings.
9. Equipment and device bulletins and cutsheets clearly highlighted to show
equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data
as applicable.
10. Equipment and device bulletins and cutsheets clearly highlighted to show
equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data
as applicable.
11. Maintenance instructions clearly highlighted to show all required periodic
maintenance and lubrication.
12. Wiring diagrams.
13. Operating instructions -clearly highlighted to show proper operating procedures
for all equipment.
14. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices.
15. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16002-12
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
16. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to
the Owner.
I. Tools: Provide the deliver to the Owner's authorized representative any special
tools required for maintenance of systems, equipment, and apparatus installed under
this Division prior to requesting final acceptance of the installation.
1.16 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Site Prints: Maintain a set of clearly marked black line prints of the Contract
Drawings at the job site which shall be used for recording the work details, final
size, location, interrelation, and similar items of all work under this Division. This
set of Drawings shall be corrected daily as the work progresses and shall clearly
indicate all changes to suit field conditions, changes made by "field Order" or
"Change Order", accurate dimensions of all buried or concealed work, precise
locations of all concealed work, locations of all concealed boxes, controls and
devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents
which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall be to at least two
permanent structure points.
B. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the site
prints to a set of reproducible record "as -built" Drawings using red pencil. The
reproducible record "as -built" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal
removed or blacked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as
follows:
CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS
DATE:
(NAME of GENERAL CONTRACTOR)
BY: (SIGNATURE)
(NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR)
BY: (SIGNATURE)
C. Approval: Prior to final acceptance of the Work of this Division, the Contractor
shall submit one reproducible and two black line prints of properly certified Record
Drawings to the Engineer for review and shall make changes, corrections, or
additions as the Engineer may require to the Record Drawings.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
16002-13
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.17_ COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK
A. General: Refer to Division 1 for general coordination requirements applicable to the
entire work. It is recognized that the Contract Documents are diagrammatic in
showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the
electrical work, and in its interface with other work including utilities and
mechanical work and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor. The Drawings show diagrammatically the sizes and locations of the
various conduit and raceway systems and equipment items and the sizes of the
major interconnecting distribution, without showing exact details as to elevations,
offsets, control lines, and installation details
1. Arrange electrical work in a neat, well organized manner with services
running parallel with primary lines of the building construction and with a
minimum of 7' overhead clearance where possible.
2. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the
architectural and structural conditions, to avoid obstructions and to provide
proper grading of lines. Exact locations of outlets, apparatus and connections
thereto shall be determined by reference to detail Drawings, equipment
Drawings, roughing -in Drawings, etc., by measurements at the building and in
cooperation with other Contractors and in all cases shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Relocations necessitated by the conditions at the
site or directed by the Engineer shall be made without any additional cost to
the Owner or Engineer.
3. All conduit and boxes except those in the various equipment rooms, in
unfinished spaces or where specifically designated herein or on the Drawings
shall be run concealed in furrings, plenums and chases. Wherever conditions
exist which would cause any of these items to be exposed in finished spaces,
the Contractor whose work is involved shall immediately call the situation to
the attention of the Engineer and shall stop work in those areas until the
Owner's Representative or General Contractor directs the resumption of the
work. Submit for approval a Shop Drawing or any change in equipment
placement, etc.
4. Equipment has been chosen to fit within the available space with all required
Code and maintenance clearances and shall be installed as shown. Every
effort has been made to also accommodate equipment of other approved
manufacturers, however since equipment and access space requirements vary,
the final responsibility for installation access and proper fit of substituted
equipment rests with the Contractor.
5. System interference shall be handled by giving precedence to pipe lines which
require a stated grade for proper operation. Where space requirements
conflict, the following order of precedence shall, in general, be observed:
a. Building li nes
b. Structural members
C. Soil and drain piping
d. Lighting fixtures
e. Sprinkler piping
f. Vent piping
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-14
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
g. Supply ductwork
h. Exhaust ductwork
i. Domestic water piping
j. Electrical conduit.
6.
Locate electrical equipment properly to provide easy access. Arrange entire
electrical work and adequate code access for operation and maintenance.
7.
Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent
move in of large units of electrical work (equipment).
8.
Coordinate all items which will affect the installation of the work of this
Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage,
capacity, capacity, electrical connections, space requirements, sequence of
construction, building requirements and special conditions.
9.
When submitting Shop Drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating
that all necessary coordination has been completed and that they systems,
products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will
operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other
Contractors and Subcontractors.
B. Coordination Drawings
1.
Coordinate the work of all Subcontractors for this Division with the
Contractors responsible for this and other Divisions. Provide, in writing (with
i
copies to the Engineer, Architect and Owner) all information necessary for
coordination to permit the work of the project, including all Divisions, to be
installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
1.18 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. General: Materials and equipment shall be new, of best grade and quality, and
standard products of reputable manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of
such materials and equipment.
B. Workmanship: work shall be executed and materials installed in accordance with
the best practice of the trades and a thorough, substantial, workmanlike manner by
competent workmen, presenting a neat appearance when completed.
C. Manufacturer's Recommendations: with exceptions as specified or indicated on the
Drawings or in the Specifications, apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean, and
condition manufactured articles, materials, and equipment per manufacturer's
current printed recommendations. Copies of such printed recommendations shall be
kept at the job site and made available as required.
1.19 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Determine in advance of purchase that the equipment and materials
proposed for installation will fit into the confines indicated, leaving adequate code
clearances for adjustments, repair, or replacement.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-15
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
B. Clearance: Allow adequate space for clearance in accordance with requirements of
} the Code and local inspection department.
C. Scheduled Equipment: The design shown on the Drawings is based on the
equipment scheduled.
D. Responsibility: Since space requirements and equipment arrangement vary for each
manufacturer, the responsibility for initial access and proper fit rests with the
Contractor.
E. Review: Final arrangements of equipment to be installed shall be subject to the
Architect's review.
1.20 SAFETY REGULATIONS
A. All electrical work shall be performed in compliance with all applicable and
governing safety regulations. All safety lights, guards, signs, and other safety
materials and provisions required for the performance of the electrical work shall be
provided by and operated by the Electrical contractor.
1.21 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
A. General: Protect all materials and equipment to be installed under this Division
from physical and weather damage.
B. Scope: Work under this Division shall include, but not limited to:
1. Shipping from point of manufacturer to job site.
2. Unloading, moving, and storage on site with proper protection as required to
properly protect equipment from rust, drip, humidity, dust, or physical
damage.
3. Hoisting and scaffolding of materials and equipment included in this Division.
4. Ensuring safety of employees, materials, and equipment using such hoisting
equipment and scaffolding.
C. Coordination: All large pieces of apparatus which are to be installed in the building
and which are too large to permit access through doorways, stairways or shafts shall
be brought to the job by the Contractor and shall be placed in the spaces before
enclosing partitions and structure are completed. All apparatus shall be cribbed up
from the floor by Contractor and shall be covered with tarpaulins or other protective
covering where required for protection.
1.22 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. General: Warrant the electrical systems, and their component parts to operate
without objectionable noise or vibration. Noise from systems or equipment which
results in noise within occupied spaces above the recommended NC curves (refer to
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-16
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
ASHRAE Standards) shall be considered objectionable. Vibration shall not be
apparent to the senses in occupied areas of the building. Objectionable noise,
vibration, or transmission thereof to the building shall be corrected.
1.23 CLEANING, ADJUSTING, AND START-UP
A. Start-up Services: Where specified for any individual item of electrical equipment,
provide a factory -authorized representative for testing, start-up of equipment, and
instruction of Owner's operating personnel. Certify that these services have been
performed by including a properly executed invoice for these services or a letter
from the manufacturer.
B. Lubrication: Provide means for lubricating all bearings and other machine parts.
Extend a lubrication tube with suitable fitting to an accessible location and suitably
identify it where lubrication fittings are concealed or inaccessible. Lubricate all
parts requiring lubrication and keep them adequately lubricated until final
acceptance by the Owner.
C. Clean-up: Each Contractor shall clean away from the job site all debris, surplus
material, and similar items, resulting from his work or operations, leaving the job
and equipment in a clean condition. Each Contractor shall thoroughly clean all
pieces of equipment, conduit, boxes, fixtures, and similar items, leaving the
installation in a first class condition.
D. Operation Prior to Completion: When any piece of electrical equipment is operable
and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so,
providing that he properly supervises the operation, and has the Engineer's written
permission to do so. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such
time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of
substantial completion, whichever occurs first. Regardless of whether or not the
equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly cleah the
equipment, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final
acceptance by the Owner. The date of final acceptance and the start of the warranty
may not be the same date.
1.24 FINAL REVIEW
A. General: Upon completion of the Work, perform a final test of the entire system.
1. The system shall be operating properly.
2. After the final test, any changes or corrections noted as necessary for the Work
to Comply with these Specifications or the Drawings, shall be accomplished
without delay in order to secure final acceptance of the Work.
3. The date for the final test shall be sufficiently in advance of the Contract
completion date to permit execution, before expiration of the Contract, of any
adjustments or alterations which the final acceptance tests indicate as
necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment. Any such modifications
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-17
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
shall be completed within the time allotted for completion of the Contract.
Retests shall be conducted as directed and shall be of such time duration as
necessary to ensure proper functioning of adjusted and altered items. Retests
shall not relieve the Contractor of completion date responsibility.
4. Certificates, including certificates of occupancy from local authorities and
documents required herein, shall be completely in order and presented to the
Engineer at least one week prior to the review.
B. Qualified Person: Individuals knowledgeable of the systems and persons approved
by the Engineers, shall be present at this final inspection to demonstrate the system
and prove the performance of the equipment.
1.25 OWNER INSTRUCTION
A. General: This Contractor and appropriate factory -trained representatives shall
instruct the Owner's representative in the proper operation and maintenance of all
systems and equipment and shall explain all warranties.
B. Outline: Prior to instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline, listing the
subjects that will be included in this instruction, and submit the outline for review
by the Engineer.
C. Certification: At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of
each person being instructed on each copy of the approved outline to signify that he
has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and
resubmit the signed outlines.
D. Owner Requirements: Refer to other Division 16 Sections for additional Operator
Training requirements.
1.26 CONTRACTOR WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
A. General: Contractor shall guarantee all material and equipment installed by him
against defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months after final
acceptance of the work by the Owner and he shall repair or replace any materials or
equipment developing such defects within that time, promptly on due notice given
him by the Owner and at Contractor's sole cost and expense.
B. Equipment: All equipment bearing a manufacturer's guarantee, such as electrical
equipment, devices, components, and similar items, shall be construed to have an
extended guarantee to the Owner by the manufacturer. Any such equipment that
proves defective in materials or workmanship within the guarantee period is to be
replaced by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's guarantee.
C. Start-up: The Electrical Contractor shall provide instructions and equipment starting
service on new equipment for one complete year after date of final acceptance of the
work by the Owner, at Contractor's sole cost and expense.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16002-18
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
J'
PART2-PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION 16002
s COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16002-19
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 16004 — ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. General: Provide labor, materials, tools, machinery, equipment, appliances, fixtures,
devices, and services necessary to complete the specified electrical work of this
Division. Coordinate Work with other trades to prevent conflicts without impeding
job progress.
B. Utility Charges: The Contractor shall pay fees, service charges, tap charges, meter
charges, and special fees assessed by the local utilities or local authorities.
C. Work Included: The Work includes, but is not limited to, the following systems,
equipment, and services:
1. A complete power distribution system including, but not limited to:
a.
Service entrance.
b.
Generator.
C.
Distribution panels.
d.
Automatic transfer switch.
e.
Panelboards.
f.
Transformers.
g.
Safety and disconnect switches.
h.
Overcurrent devices.
i.
Feeders and raceways.
j.
All other components shown on the Drawings, specified or required for a
fully operational system.
2. A complete
lighting system including, but not limited to:
a.
Lighting fixtures.
b.
Battery powered egress and exit lighting.
C.
Lamps.
d.
Switches.
e.
Controls.
f.
Branch circuit wiring.
g.
Raceways.
h.
All other components shown on the Drawings, specifies or required for a
fully operational system.
3. A complete branch circuit distribution system including, but not limited to:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16004-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006
ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORK
a. Branch circuit wiring.
b. Raceways.
C. Wiring devices.
d. Multi -outlet assemblies.
e. Safety and disconnect switches.
f. Controls.
g. Connections to motors and equipment.
h. All other components shown on the Drawings, specified or required for a
fully operational system.
4.
A complete grounding system including, but not limited to:
a. Ground rods.
b. Bonding.
C. Ground conductors.
d. Raceways.
e. All other components shown on the Drawings, specified or required for a
fully operational system.
5.
A complete system of miscellaneous electric controls and control wiring as
shown on the Drawings and specified.
6.
A complete fire alarm system including, but not limited to:
a. Fire detection.
b. Tone and visual alarm.
C. Security access control interface.
d. Modifications to the existing fire alarm system.
e. All other components shown on the Drawings, specified or required for a
fully operational system.
7.
A complete system of voice/data provisions including, but not limited to:
a. A Voice/Data service entrance provisions.
b. Voice/Data outlet provisions.
C. Raceways and riser facilities.
d. Terminal facilities.
e. All other components shown on the Drawings, specified or required for a
fully operational system.
8.
Electrical provisions for the HVAC controls specified in Division 15
including, but not limited to:
a. Provided control power to all HVAC control panel and equipment
locations as shown on the Electrical Drawings. All HVAC control
wiring and raceways and other required control power shall be included
in the work of Division 15.
b. Fire alarm interface relays and addressable input devices shall be
provided by Division 16. Control wiring to these relays shall be by
Division 15.
9.
CATV television system provisions as shown on the Drawings.
10.
Electrical testing and certification as required.
11.
Housekeeping pads, concrete ductbank encasement and other supports as
required for electrical equipment and components.
12.
Connections to equipment furnished by the General Contractor or other
Divisions.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16004-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006
ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORK
13. Connections for Owner -furnished equipment where shown on the Drawings or
specified.
14. Additional items as shown on the Drawings or specified.
15. Structural Openings:
a. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all
required openings in new construction with the General Contractor and
furnishing and locating forms where appropriate.
b. The Electrical Contractor shall provide the Structural Engineer with
locations, dimensions, and weights of his equipment to be supported by
the floor and roof structural systems immediately following the awarding
on the Contract. The final locations of this equipment shall be subject to
the approval of the Structural Engineer. The Electrical Contractor shall
provide accessories necessary to hang his equipment from structure at
locations and in a manner approved by the Structural Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Refer to specific Sections of the Specifications for equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the Specification section pertaining to the
individual equipment.
END OF SECTION 16004
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
16004-3
ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORK
StiCTION 16100 - ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. The electrical work to be provided shall cover the furnishing of all equipment
and materials, the performance of all labor with supervision, the bearing of all
expense, all as necessary for the satisfactory completion of all work ready for
V operation, as described herein and/or as shown on the drawings, and in
general, shall include, but not be limited to the following:
2. Complete system of wiring for lighting, power, and auxiliary services,
including fixtures and lamps.
3. All wiring for motors, starters and installation of equipment described herein,
and in other sections of these specifications, shall be performed to meet all
requirements of the NEC.
4. The specifications and drawings are complementary one to the other and what
is called for or shown by one shall be as binding as if called for or shown by
both.
5. Each subcontractor shall be responsible for reviewing and complying with
firestopping his penetrations.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Carpentry: Section 06100.
2. Firestopping: Section 07840.
3. Division 15 - Mechanical: coordination of systems installation.
1.03 DRAWINGS
A. The drawings show the general arrangement of equipment and appurtenances and
shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other
trades will permit. The work shall conform to the requirements shown on all of the
drawings. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate
all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall
investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and shall arrange
his work accordingly, providing such fittings and accessories as required to meet
such conditions and comply with all applicable codes.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16100-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL
1.04_ CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes and industry
standards including, but not limited to, the National Electric Code (NFPA70), the
Life Safety Code (NFPA101), and the requirements of the City of College Station,
Texas.
B. In case of difference between building codes, specifications, State law and local
ordinances, regulations and the contract documents, the most stringent shall govern.
The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of such differences.
C. Non-compliance: Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply '
with the requirements of the applicable building codes, State laws, local ordinances,
industry standards and utility company regulations, he shall bear all costs arising in
correcting the deficiencies.
1.05 VISIT TO THE SITE
A. The Contractor shall visit the site prior to making his bid and determine all existing
conditions prior to making his bid.
1.06 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall compare the electrical drawings and specifications with the
drawings and specifications for other trades, and shall report any discrepancies
between them to the Architect and obtain from him written instructions for changes
necessary in the mechanical, electrical and site utility work. The electrical work
shall be installed in cooperation with all other trades. Before installation, the
Contractor shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner
approved by the Architect. All changes required in the work of the Contractor due
to his negligence shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense.
B. Locations of electrical raceways, switches, panels, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be
adjusted to accommodate the work to interferences anticipated and encountered.
The Contractor shall determine the exact route and location of each pipe, duct and
electrical raceway prior to fabrication.
C. Right -Of -Way: Graded utility services shall have the right-of-way over those which
are not graded. For example: steam, condensate and plumbing drains shall normally
have the right-of-way over services whose elevations can be changed.
D. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction of electrical raceways shall be made
where required to maintain proper headroom and allow proper grading whether or
not indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall fumish and install all fittings,
pull boxes, etc., as required to provide offsets, transitions and changes in direction.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16100-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL
E. Installation and Arrangement: The Contractor shall install all materials and
equipment to allow access and clearances for equipment operation, maintenance and
in compliance with Code.
1.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This Contractor shall be responsible for all required excavation, cutting, etc.,
` incidental to the work under that Section, and shall make all required repairs
thereafter to the satisfaction of the Architect, but in no case shall the Contractor cut
into any major structural element, beam or column without the written approval of
the Architect.
1.08 FEES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A. All required fees, permits and inspections for electrical work shall be obtained and
paid for by the electrical contractor.
1.09 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Wherever equipment requiring electrical connection to Line Voltage is specified, all
wiring shall be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications.
B. Coordination: The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications to assure
the proper location and electrical service characteristics to the individual outlets
serving equipment and shall advise the Architect of any required modifications to
suit the actual equipment to be furnished.
1.10 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Maintain one set of blueline electrical prints on site marked to show as -built
conditions and installations. Prepare sepia copies of these prints at job completion.
B. The as -built electrical drawings and the electrical sepias shall be submitted to the
Engineer of Record for his approval. The Contractor shall make all corrections
necessary. The final as -built drawings and sepias shall be marked "This drawing
accurately reflects the as -built condition." and be signed and dated by the Master
Electrician for the project.
1.11 GUARANTEE
A. Contractor shall leave the entire system in proper order and shall replace without
additional charge all work or material which may develop defects within one year of
final inspection and acceptance by the Architect.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16100-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL
1.12_ IDENTIFICATION
A. Devices: Each panelboard cabinet, safety switch, individual circuit breakers in the
main distribution panel, time clock, motor starter, and the like shall have an
identifying nameplate, such as "PANEL L", "EF-V. Nameplates: Laminated plastic
with 1/4 inch high white engraved letters on black background. Fasten nameplates
by 2 rustproof screws.
B. Conductors: Label each branch circuit in every panel, box, and wireway to indicate
the circuit number corresponding with the panel directory. Labels: Self -stick
adhesive baked vinyl cloth wire markers. Write on type markers, lettered with
indelible ink will be acceptable where stock numbers will not suffice. All labels
shall be clearly legible.
C. Directories: Each panel shall have a typewritten directory mounted on the inside of
panel door.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I�
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trade name and
the UL label where specified or a standard has been established for the particular
material. The equipment to be furnished shall be essentially the standard product of
a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of
equipment, and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design.
B. Delivery and Storage: Equipment and materials shall be delivered to the site and
stored in original containers, suitably sheltered from the elements. All items subject
to moisture or heat damage shall be properly stored in dry and/or heated spaces.
C. Equipment and materials of the same general type shall be of the same make
throughout the work to provide uniform appearance, operation and maintenance.
D. Protection: Equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and
chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of the work, fixtures, equipment
and materials shall be cleaned thoroughly and turned over to the Owner in a
condition satisfactory to the Architect. Damage or defects developing before
acceptance of the work shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
E. Dimensions: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that items to
be furnished can be properly installed within the space provided which will allow
adequate space for operation and maintenance. The Contractor shall make
necessary field measurements to determine actual space requirements.
F. Manufacturer's printed instructions shall be followed completely in the delivery,
storage, protection and installation of all equipment and materials. The Contractor
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16100-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL
shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between any
requirement of the contract documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall
obtain the Architect's written instruction before proceeding with the work. Should
the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the manufacturer's
directions or such written instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs
arising in correcting the deficiencies.
G. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections and
incidental items necessary to fully complete the individual systems in such a manner
that each system can be operated, maintained, and serviced by the Owner.
H. Supports: The Contractor shall support plumb, rigid and true to line, all work and
equipment. The Contractor shall study thoroughly all general, structural,
mechanical and electrical drawings, shop drawings, and catalog data to determine
how equipment, fixtures, etc., are to be supported, mounted or suspended and shall
provide extra steel bolts, inserts, pipe stands, brackets and accessories for proper
support whether or not shown on the drawings.
I. All current -carrying components of electrical equipment and conductors shall be
constructed of copper.
2.02 SUBMITTED DATA AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.
B. Materials and equipment schedules shall be submitted as per the general
construction submittal log, but before commencement of installation of any
materials or equipment. A complete schedule of the material and equipment
proposed for installation shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer of Record.
The schedule shall include catalogs, cuts, diagrams, drawings, specifications and
such other descriptive data as may be required by the Engineer of Record.
C. If the Contractor requests the use of equivalent or approved equal products in
accordance with this document, he shall first certify that the product is equal. The
Contractor shall submit documentation to the Engineer of Record that the product is
equal. If substitution is allowed by the Engineer of Record, the Contractor shall be
responsible to coordinate any changes with all trades affected.
D. The following equipment and material shall be submitted for approval:
1. Panelboards.
2. Safety switches.
3. Wiring devices.
4. Lighting fixtures.
5. Wire.
2.03 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16100-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL
A. Rigid steel conduit (zinc coated) shall comply with ANSI Standard C80.1.
B. Flexible metal conduit shall comply with UL Standard No.1 zinc coated steel only.
C. All ferrous fittings shall be cadmium or zinc coated.
2.04 OUTLETS, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall comply with UL Standard No. 514 cadmium or zinc
coated if of ferrous metal. Boxes with volume greater than 100 cubic inches shall
comply with UL Standard No. 50 hot dip zinc coated if of sheet steel.
2.05 CONDUCTORS
A. All conductors shall be copper with type THWN and/or THHN insulation.
Minimum branch circuit conductor size shall be #12. 120/140 V branch circuits
with lengths greater than 75 feet shall be #10 AWG.
B. All conductors shall be color -coded. Wire sizes through #10 shall have a factory
applied colored insulation. Wires #8 and larger shall be marked as required by the
National Electric Code (NEC).
C. Use Scotchlok or Ideal wire connectors for #14 through #8 conductors. Use Burndy
or equivalent by T & B compression connectors with Crimpit Cover type CC for #6-
600 MCM conductors.
D. Color -coding shall follow the NEC.
2.06 WIRING DEVICES
A. Lighting switches shall be toggle switches and rated 20 amp, 120 volt
B. Duplex receptacles shall be rated 20 amp, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding type
Hubbell Fashion Series or equal.
C. Device colors shall be as directed by the Architect.
D. Device plates shall be brushed aluminum, Fashion Series 9000 by Hubbell. I
2.07 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished and installed for all outlets and locations shown
on the drawings and in accordance with fixture schedule and details.
B. All fixtures shall be complete with ballasts, auxiliaries, accessories, hangers,
supports, lamps, etc., as required for a complete installation ready for operation.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16100-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL
C. Lighting fixtures shall be structurally supported. Lighting fixtures mounted in
suspended ceiling shall be supported by and attached to the ceiling suspension
system as required by NEC 410-16 (C) and have plastic or glass diffusers contained
in a rigid, metal frame. Surface mounted fixtures shall be supported from the
building structural system by rods, or rods and clamps, or by the fixture outlet box,
which in turn shall be supported by rods. Provide fixture studs as required. Wall
mounted fixtures shall be secured to masonry walls with bolts and lead anchors, and
to metal stud, dry wall partitions by sheetmetal screws driven into studs, or with
"candy bars".
D. Fluorescent ballasts shall be Class "P", General Electric Watt Miser H Series or
equal. Maximum wattage per 2-lamp ballast (utilizing 32 watt lamps) shall be 75
watts.
2.08 LAMPS
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install lamps as shown on the fixture schedule as
required for fixture types and for a complete installation ready for operation.
B. Four -foot fluorescent lamps shall be G.E. Watt Miser or equal by Sylvania or
Phillips. Lamps shall be 32 watt T8 (3500K).
2.09 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Safety switches shall be NEMA heavy-duty type HD U.L. listed. All switches shall
have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position when the door is
open. Switches shall have removable arc suppressors where necessary to permit
easy access to line side lugs. Lugs shall be U.L. listed for aluminum and/or copper
cables and front removable. All current carrying parts shall be plated.
B. Switches shall have a quick -make and quick -break operating handle and mechanism
which shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Switches shall have a dual
cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door in the ON or
OFF position.
2.10 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELS
A. Panels for 120/240-volt service shall be QO load centers circuit breaker type with
mains as indicated. All two -pole breakers shall be of the single handle, common
trip type (no tie handles).
B. The cabinets shall be constructed of code thickness sheet steel and galvanized. The
trim shall be finished with standard prime finish coat. Hardware shall be nickel
finished with combination latch and cylinder lock.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16100-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL
C. Panels shall have a glass or plastic covered directory card holder provided on the
inside of the door which shall contain a neatly typed description of the service
supplied by each breaker switch. Engraved nameplates shall be provided for
distribution panels.
D. Circuit numbers shall be mechanically secured to panel interiors. No glued -on or
similar method of securing circuit breaker numbers will be accepted.
E. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by Square D.
F. All panels shall be keyed alike.
2.11 ELECTRICAL SERVICE
A. Supply new equipment for incoming electrical service in accordance with the
construction documents and local code requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All electrical installations shall, as a minimum, meet code requirements including,
but not limited to, the National Electric Code (NFPA70), the Life Safety Code
(NFPA101), the requirements of the City of College Station, Texas, and shall meet
the requirements specified herein.
B. All electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master
Electrician licensed by the City of College Station, Texas.
3.02 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring methods shall be insulated copper conductors installed in rigid galvanized
steel conduit, EMT, and other approved conduit specified on the construction
drawings.
3.03 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. In bending conduit, no flattened or kinked places will be allowed. Exposed conduit
runs where specified shall be parallel and at right angles to building walls and/or
partitions, installed in a neat and workman like manner, and securely fastened to
walls or ceilings with pipe straps or suspended by means of approved ring hangers.
B. All conduit runs except where buried in concrete or underground shall be securely
held in place with pipe straps or hangers.
C. Conduit shall be securely fastened to all outlet boxes or cabinets with double
locknuts and bushings of approved make. Insulated bushings shall be used for all
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16100-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL
conduits 1-1/4" or larger, OZ type "B" or approved equal. Myers type rain -tight
hubs shall be used on the top of all boxes in areas exposed to water..
D. Offsets in conduit shall be furnished as required.
E. Expansion fittings complete with interior bonding straps shall be installed where
conduits cross expansion joints.
F. Use short pieces of flexible metallic conduit to connect all motors, transformers and
similar equipment subject to vibration. Connections to air compressors shall be
flexible metallic sealtite conduits.
G. General Contractor to supply and install all boxes and conduit with pull wires for
the communication and data outlets. The owner shall supply and install the wiring
to complete the communication and data systems.
3.04 OUTLETS, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Outlets shall be installed as shown on the drawings and properly centered and
spaced. Ceiling outlet boxes unless otherwise indicated in the drawings shall be 4"
octagon, galvanized, not less than 1-5/8" deep, and with bar hangers and 3/8" fixture
studs where required, or 4"x 4" boxes with round tile ring.
B. Outlet boxes located in walls shall be 4" square, galvanized for single and two
ganged installation, and 4-1/2" wide and lengths as required for three or more
ganged installation. Plaster rings as required shall be provided. Tile covers shall be
provided for all outlets located in masonry or brick walls. Floor outlets in the slab
shall have a brass cover plate.
C. Connection to all fixtures in areas with removable ceiling panels shall be from
outlet boxes located above the ceiling with flexible conduit connection to the
fixtures. Symbols on drawings and mounting heights as indicated on drawings and
in specifications are approximate only. The exact locations and mounting heights
must be determined in the job and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
coordinate with all trades the architectural drawings, to secure the correct
installation, i.e., over counters, in or above backsplashes, in block walls and other
specific construction features.
D. Symbols on drawings indicate approximate locations only. The exact locations
must be determined on the job and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
coordinate with all trades.
E. Provide junction boxes as shown on drawings and otherwise where required, sized
according to number of conductors in box of type of service to be provided.
Minimum junction box size 4" square and 2-1/8" deep. Provide screw covers for
junction boxes.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16100-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL
F. Use minimum 16 gauge steel for pull boxes and provide with screw cover. Size
pull boxes according to intended use.
G. Provide pull box in approximately each 100 feet of conduit run and where excessive
number of bends necessitates a box for ease of wire installation.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Grounding shall be in accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code
and all local codes.
3.06 TESTS
A. General: The Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that all circuits and
devices are in operating conditions. Tests shall be such that each item of control
equipment will function not less than five times.
END OF SECTION 16100
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
16100-10
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16110 — ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide electrical raceway and fitting work as shown, scheduled,
indicated, and specified.
B. Conduit Systems: All electrical conductors shall be installed in conduit or surface
metallic raceways. Conduit shall be as specified herein. The phone/Data shall be
installed and home run to the Phone Board location. Tag all termination ends.
Allow maximum length for connection to the phone board. City to connect tagged
termination ends to phone board. In addition, surface metallic raceways shall be
installed for other systems as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications.
C. Types: The types of electrical raceways and fittings required for the project include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Rigid steel (RGS) and intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
3. Flexible metal conduit.
4. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
5. Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.03 STANDARDS
A. Products and installation shall comply with applicable sections of the following
standards:
1. ANCI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc -Coated.
2. ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
3. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
4. NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced
by one of the following:
1. Rigid Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
a. Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation
b. Republic Steel Corporation
C. Triangle PWC, Inc.
d. Youngstown Sheet & Tube
e. Wheatland
2. PVC — Coated Rigid Steel:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation
b. Flexi-Guard, Inc.
C. Occidental Coating Company.
d. Perma-Cote.
e. Republic Steel Corporation.
f. Robroy.
g. Triangle PWC, Inc.
h. Youngstown Sheet & Tube.
i. Wheatland.
3. Electrical Metallic Tubing:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation. .
b. Republic Steel Corporation.
C. Triangle PWC, Inc.
d. Youngstown Sheet & Tube.
e. Wheatland.
4. Flexible Metal and Liquidtight Flexible Metal:
a. AFC.
b. Anaconda Metal Hose.
C. Electri-Flex Company.
d. Flexi-Guard, Inc.
e. Triangle PWC, Inc.
f. Wheatland.
5. Raceway Fittings:
a. Appleton Electric Company.
b. Cantex (PVC).
C. Carion (PVC).
d. Crouse Hinds.
e. Efcor Division.
f. 0. Z. Gedney Company.
g. Raco, Inc.
h. Republic Steel Corporation.
i. Steel City.
j. Thomas and Betts.
6. Ductbank Spacers:
a. Formex.
b. Carlon.
7. Precast Manholes, Pull Boxes and Accessories:
a. Brooks.
b. A.B. Chance.
8. UL Label: All electrical raceways and fittings shall be UL-listed and labeled.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
9. NEMA Compliance: All electrical raceways and fittings shall comply with
NEMA standards applicable to raceway construction.
10. NEC Compliance: All electrical raceways and fittings shall comply with NEC
requirements applicable to construction and installation.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, a list of the proposed
manufacturers of electrical raceways and fittings selected from the
manufacturers listed herein. The Contractor may install conduit and fittings
furnished by any manufacturer listed on the approved submittal.
2. Cut sheets of electrical raceways and fittings.
3. Manufacturers data on manholes, pull boxes and accessories.
4. Additional information as required in Section 16002.
1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Handle raceways and fittings carefully to avoid damage, breaking, denting and
scoring. Damaged materials shall not be installed.
B. Store raceways and fittings in a clean dry space and protect from the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
A. General:
I. Provide metal conduit, tubing, and fittings of the type, grade, size, and weight
(wall thickness) as shown and required for each service. Where type and grade
are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by this Section to fulfill
the wiring requirements and complying with the NEC for electrical raceways.
2. For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide a complete assembly of
conduit, tubing, or duct with fittings, including, but not necessarily limited to,
connectors, nipples, couplings, expansion fittings, bushings, locknuts, other
components and accessories as needed to form a complete system of the type
indicated.
3. Conduit fittings shall be designed and approved for the specific use intended.
Conduit fittings, including flexible, shall have insulated throats or bushings.
Rigid conduits shall have insulated bushings, except insulated throat
grounding bushings shall be used on all conduits without ground conductors
and where required by N.E.C. Article 250.
B. Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit: Shall be FS WW-C-0581 and ANSI
C80.1, hot -dipped galvanized steel. Both ends of conduit shall be threaded with
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
factory- installed thread protectors. Fittings shall be threaded Type "FS" W-F-408
and ANSI C80.4, hot -dipped galvanized steel. Expansion fittings shall be OZ Type
"DX", Appleton Type "XJ", Crouse -Hinds Type "XC" or an approved equal and
shall have bonding jumpers.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Shall be ANSI C80.3 galvanized steel with plain ends.
Fittings, couplings and connectors shall be FS W-F-408 and ANSI C80.4
galvanized steel type. Fittings, couplings and connectors shall be set screw type
with pressure cast body. Compression type fittings, couplings and connectors shall
be used where EMT conduit is cast in concrete. All EMT connectors shall have
insulated throats or bushings.
D. Flexible Conduit:
1. Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-556, zinc -coated steel
2. Flexible Metal -Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, zinc -coated steel, insulated
throat.
3. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit
comprised of single strip, continuous, flexible, interlocked, double -wrapped
steel, galvanized inside and outside; forming smooth internal wiring channel;
with liquidtight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or neoprene.
E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, liquidtight, zinc -coated
steel, neoprene gaskets and 0-rings, insulated throat.
F. Nonmetallic Conduit and Fittings:
1. Schedule 40 Rigid PVC Conduit: Per FS WC- 1094A, UL 651, and NEMA TC
2, 90'C conductor temperature rating.
2. Schedule 80 Rigid PVC Conduit: Per UL 651 and NEMA TC 2, 903C
conductor temperature rating.
3. Quaduct PVC Conduit: Composite duct consisting of four nominal 1-1/2"
Schedule 40 PVC conduits with an integral spacer, as manufactured by
Teleduct Corporation, Logan, Ohio, (800)433-6931.
4. PVC Conduit Fittings: Per NEMA TC 3 and compatible with PVC conduit
system.
5. Ductbank Spacers: Spacers shall be interlocking plastic designed for the
conduit sizes and nominal 3" spacing being used.
G. Conduit Tubing Accessories: Provide ANSI/NEMA FB I conduit and tubing
accessories including straps, hangers and expansion joints as recommended by the
conduit and tubing manufacturer and as specified in this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install electrical raceways and fittings as shown, in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of the NEC, and in
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the
intended function. Complete electrical raceway installation before starting the
installation of wire and cable.
B. Conduit Size: Minimum conduit size for power wiring shall be 1/2" except that all
home runs shall be minimum 3/4", except that 3/8" flexible metallic conduit may be
used for fixture whips and conduit cast in concrete walls or slabs or installed under
concrete slabs shall be minimum 3/4". Maximum conduit size for EMT shall be 4".
Minimum conduit size for control wiring shall be 1/2". Minimum conduit size for
voice/data and security wiring shall be 3/4".
C. Rigid Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit: Use rigid steel or intermediate metal
conduit to run all electrical raceway systems, where exposed to weather; in damp or
wet locations; where subject to physical damage; and where cast in concrete walls
or floor slabs which have waterproof membranes and where cast in masonry walls.
Use rigid steel or IMC conduit for all exposed conduit. IMC conduit shall not be
used in sizes larger than 4". Use threaded type couplings and fittings. Split type
couplings and fittings are not acceptable.
D. PVC -Coated Rigid Steel: Use polyvinyl chloride (PVC) externally -coated rigid steel
conduit and fittings for electrical raceway systems for branch circuits to wet areas;
where exposed outdoors; and elsewhere, as shown. Conduit and fittings shall be
installed such that the PVC -coating is continuous and watertight such that no
portion of the metal conduit or fittings is exposed to moisture.
E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Use EMT for branch circuit electrical raceway
systems where concealed in furred ceilings or in walls. EMT conduit shall not be
installed where exposed to weather or in wet locations. Use steel set screw type
fittings, couplings and connectors made-up tight for all conduit sizes. Use watertight
fittings, couplings and connectors where required. Crimp type fittings, couplings
and connectors are not acceptable.
F. Flexible Metal: Use flexible metal conduit (with internal ground wire) and fittings
for lay -in lighting fixture connections and for other electrical equipment
connections where subject to movement and vibration, but where liquidtight
flexible metal conduit is not specified. Use flexible metal conduit in such lengths as
required, 6-0" maximum length and Y-O" minimum length. 3/8" diameter conduit
may be used for lighting fixture pigtails".
G. Liquidtight Flexible Metal: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings for all
motor connections, all connections in kitchens and laundries and for other electrical
equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration and when subject
to one or more of the following conditions: exterior location; moist or humid
atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate; corrosive
atmosphere; subject to water spray; subject to dripping oil, grease or water. Install
internal ground wire in flexible conduit with grounding bushings. Maximum length
shall be 6-0" and minimum length shall be Y-O".
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16110-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
H. Rigid Nonmetallic: Use PVC conduit directly buried in earth, concrete encased, cast
in concrete slabs, and where subject to corrosive environment. PVC conduit shall
only be used where shown on the Drawings. Use Schedule 40 where direct buried
and Schedule 80 where exposed, with size adjusted to have same fill area as if
Schedule 40 were used. Type "EB" encased burial duct shall be used in concrete
encased applications where shown on the Drawings. Turnouts through the slab shall
be RGS protected as specified herein.
3.02 INTERIOR CONDUIT SYSTEM:
A. Ground all metallic conduit in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition
of the NEC.
B. Install all conduit as a complete system without conductors, continuous from outlet
to outlet and from fitting to fitting. Make up threaded joints of conduit carefully in
such a manner as to ensure a tight joint. Field -cut threads shall be cold -galvanized
after cutting. The entire conduit system shall be secured at all joints and boxes in
such a manner that each system shall be electrically continuous throughout. Fasten
the entire conduit system securely into position. A run of conduit between outlet and
outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting shall not contain
more than the equivalent of four quarter bends, including those bends located
immediately at the outlet or fitting. Install approved expansion fittings in all conduit
runs as specified in paragraph 3.2/P.
C. Ream all ends of conduit properly to remove rough edges. Whenever a rigid steel or
IMC conduit enters a switchboard, panelboard, enclosure, or box, it shall be
securely fastened by the use of a locknut inside and outside and an approved
insulating bushing shall be installed. Insulated grounding bushings shall be installed
on all conduits without ground conductors and where required by NEC Article 250.
Whenever an EMT conduit enters a switchboard, panelboard, enclosure, or box, it
shall be securely fastened by use of an insulated throat connector or a connector
with an insulating bushing. Lay out and install all conduit systems as to avoid all
other services or systems, the proximity of which may prove injurious to the conduit
or the wires or conductors which the conduit confines.
D. Conceal conduit systems in finished areas, (all areas). Concealed metallic conduits
shall be run in a direct manner, basically parallel to, and at right angles with the
lines of the building, and with as long a bend as possible. Conduit may be exposed
in mechanical/electrical rooms only. On exposed systems, run the conduit parallel
or perpendicular to the structural features of the building and rigidly support with
malleable iron conduit clamps at intervals as required by NEC or on conduit racks,
neatly racked and bent in a smooth radius at corners insofar as practicable. All
bends shall be field -made using an approved bending machine designed for the
purpose, or using standard elis having a radius not less than that shown in Table
346-10 of the National Electrical Code, and with approved fittings or connectors.
All bends shall be free from dents or flattening.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
E. All conduit shall be run without traps. Where traps are unavoidable, a junction or
pull box shall be placed at the low point. Metallic conduit systems which are
exposed to the weather or water shall be made watertight. As soon as conduit has
been permanently installed in place, conduit shall be capped or plugged with
standard accessories. All metallic conduit shall be swabbed after plaster and dry
wall is finished and dry.
F. Support exposed raceway or grouped concealed raceways on galvanized channel
using compatible galvanized fittings (bolts, beam clamps and similar items) and
galvanized threaded rod pendants to secure raceway to channel and channel to
structure. Support single conduit runs using a properly sized galvanized conduit
hanger with galvanized closure bolt/nut and threaded rod. Support -spacing shall not
exceed 1 O' apart for all EMTIIMC conduit and rigid conduit 2" and smaller and 15'
apart for rigid conduit 2-1/2" and larger and within 3' from boxes and changes in
direction. Support flexible conduit on maximum 4-1/2' centers and within one foot
(P) of boxes. All raceway support system materials shall be galvanized and
manufactured by Kindorf, Unistrut, Superstrut, Caddy, or Spring Steel Fasteners,
Inc. Provide chrome or nickel -plated escutcheon plates on all conduit passing
through walls and ceilings in finished areas.
G. Support 3/4" and smaller EMT conduit concealed in ceiling cavities with No. 13
AWG galvanized iron wire pendants, spaced not to exceed 10' apart and 3' from
boxes and changes in direction, secured to conduit with clips and properly secured
to structure. Perforated strap shall not be used for conduit supports. Branch circuit
EMT conduit 3/4" trade size and smaller may be suspended using "caddy clips"
attached to the ceiling support system in a manner acceptable to the ceiling
contractor. Support conduit size one inch (1") and larger as described in Paragraph
F.
H. Make all joints and connections to ensure mechanical strength and electrical
continuity. PVC conduit shall be joined, or have fittings attached, by using a fusing
(solvent) compound recommended by and applied as instructed by, the conduit
manufacturer.
I. Run conduit to avoid proximity to heat producing equipment, piping and flues,
keeping a minimum of 8" clear. 'Whenever possible, install horizontal raceway runs
above water piping. Unless shown otherwise, do not install conduit horizontally in
concrete slabs without written approval. All roof penetrations shall be made in
adequate time to allow the roofer to make proper flashings.
J. Carefully review architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical
Drawings and place boxes and conduit to avoid conflicts with structural members or
other general construction.
K. Conduit shall not be embedded in structural slabs without prior written permission
from the Structural Engineer. Conduits embedded in structural slabs shall be
installed in the middle of the slab below the top and above the bottom reinforcing
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
steel. Maintain a minimum concrete coverage of one inch (1") except where
penetration is made.
L. Furnish sleeves for timely placing in construction for all conduit passing through
concrete walls, partitions, beams, floors, and roofs while same are under
construction.
M. All conduit passing through the housing on connected equipment, shall pass through
a cleanly cut hole protected with an approved grommet.
N. Metallic conduit installed below grade shall have its entire length painted with two
coats of protective finish unless encased in concrete. Each coat shall consist of 5
mils of PPG "Coat Cat Epoxy Coating" applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. The entire length of metallic conduit, including
fittings, shall be protected to a point 6" above finished grade (or concrete slab).
O. Coordinate locations of raceways in fire rated partitions so as not to affect the fire
rating of the partition. Notify the Architect in writing where additional construction
is required to maintain the partition fire rating.
P. Install expansion fittings in all conduit as follows: 4L
1. All conduits crossing building expansion joints; unless some other form of
thermal expansion compensation is approved in writing by the Engineer.
2. All conduit straight runs in excess of 200'and on 400' centers in all longer
conduit runs.
3. Conduits entering environmental rooms.
4. Locations subject to thermal expansion and as required by NEC.
5. Unless expansion fitting has an integral bonding braid an external braid,
approved for the purpose, shall be installed around the fitting.
3.03 EXTERIOR CONDUIT SYSTEMS:
A. Exterior conduit systems shall meet all of the general installation requirements for
interior conduit systems.
B. All exterior conduit systems shall be completely watertight. All hangers, fasteners,
and supports used with exterior conduit systems shall be hot dip galvanized.
C. Conduit routed across roofs shall be attached to 4" x 4" redwood or penta-treated
pine sleepers spaced on maximum 5'-0" intervals, unless otherwise detailed on the
Drawings. Sleepers shall be installed in pitch pans or as otherwise detailed on the
Drawings.
D. Install underground conduits with sealing glands equal to OZ Type "FSK" or
approved equal exterior to conduits and OZ Type "CSB" or approved equal interior
to conduit at points where conduits enter the building, to prevent water seepage.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
E. Install conduits outside the building lines a minimum of 36" below grade, unless
noted otherwise on the Drawings. Maintain 12" of earth or 2" of concrete separation
between electrical conduits and other services or utilities below grade. Maintain I 0'-
O" separation between parallel underground power and voice/data conduits. Where
power and voice/data conduits cross below grade, crossing shall be at right (90
degree) angles with a minimum 2'-0" vertical separation.
3.04 POWER DUCTBANK SYSTEMS:
A. Power ductbanks shall be of individual rigid PVC Schedule 40 conduit protected
with a 3" thick concrete cover which extends 12" past the covered conduits encased
in reinforced concrete. Rigid steel conduit shall be used for the final 1 O' at the
beginning and end of each ductbank and for all 90 degree elbows. The reinforced
concrete encasement surrounding the ductbank shall be rectangular in cross section,
having a minimum concrete thickness of 3". Conduit shall be separated by a
minimum concrete thickness of 2", except that light and power conduit shall be
separated from control and signal conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 3".
Encasement and protective concrete shall be red in color.
B. The power ductbank shall be routed underground and the top of the concrete
envelope shall be not less than 36" below grade for 277/48V or 1201208V and 60"
below grade for 4160v or 1320OV.
C. Changes in direction of ductbank runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either
vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a
minimum radius of curvature of 5'. All bends in a run shall be separated by a
minimum of 10' of straight conduit, where possible.
D. During construction, partially completed ductbanks shall be protected from the
entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs.
As each section of the ductbank is completed, a testing mandrel shall be drawn
through each conduit. A brush with stiff bristles shall be drawn through until each
conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be
immediately installed.
E. Ducts in concrete encased ductbanks shall be independently supported by
interlocking module spacers by Formex or equal. Spacers shall provide separation
between adjacent ducts as specified hereinabove. Spacers shall be installed at 6'
maximum intervals.
F. Ducts in concrete encased ductbanks shall be terminated in pull boxes with
interlocking terminators by Formex or equal. A watertight tapered plug shall be
furnished and installed in unused duct openings. Where terminators are installed in
new work, they shall be poured -in -place.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
G. Install underground conduits with sealing glands equal to OZ Type "FSK" exterior
to the conduit and OZ Type "CSB", or equal internally at the point where conduits
enter the building to prevent water seepage into the building.
H. Furnish the exact dimensions and location of power ductbank to be encased in time
to prevent delay in the concrete work.
I. Power Company service ductbank/conduits shall be installed in accordance with
Power Company requirements and standards.
3.05 VOICE/DATA DUCTBANK SYSTEMS:
A. Exterior voice/data ductbanks shall be of individual PVC conduit and direct buried
without concrete encasement under landscaping grassy areas and sidewalks and
concrete -encased below driveways, streets and roadways. Conduit shall be rigid
PVC Schedule 40. Interior ductbanks shall be of individual conduit and conduit
shall be EMT. Unless shown otherwise, the type of conduit used shall not be mixed
in any one ductbank and shall not be smaller than 4" in diameter. Install innerducts
and pulistrings in conduit and ductbank where noted.
B. Where the voice/data ductbank is routed underground, the top of the ductbank shall
be not less than 36" below grade and detectable marker tape shall be installed above
the ductbank.
C. Changes in direction of voice/ata ductbank runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees,
either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a
minimum radius of curvature of 5'. All turn ups to above grade shall be long radius
RGS elbows, coated as specified in paragraph 3.02N. All bends in a run shall be
separated by a minimum of 10'where possible. There shall be no more than two 90
degree bends in any run of voice/data ductbank.
D. During construction, partially completed ductbanks shall be protected from the
entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs.
As each section of the ductbank is completed, a testing mandrel with diameter 1/4"
smaller than the conduit shall be drawn through each conduit. A brush with stiff
bristles shall be drawn through until each conduit is clear of all particles of earth,
sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be immediately installed.
E. Sleeves for voice/data ductbank passing through basement walls shall be rigid steel
conduit and shall extend a minimum of 24" outside basement wall.
F. Ducts in concrete encased ductbanks shall be independently supported by
interlocking modular spacers. Spacers shall provide separation between adjacent
ducts as shown on the Drawings. Spacers shall be installed at 6' maximum intervals.
G. Ducts in concrete encased ductbanks shall be terminated in pull boxes with
interlocking terminators. A watertight tapered plug shall be furnished and installed
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
in unused duct openings. Where terminators are installed in new work, they shall be
poured -in -place.
H. Voice/data ductbank shall be installed per Telephone Company standards.
3.06 DUCTBANK MANHOLES AND PULL BOXES:
A. Install pull boxes in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
B. Seal all joints and openings to prevent the entry of water.
3.07 VOICE/DATA AND SIGNAL SYSTEM RACEWAYS:
A. General: Conduit shall be installed in accordance with the previous specified
requirements for conduit and tubing and with the additional requirements that no
length of run shall exceed 100' for 1/2" and 3/4" trade sizes, and 150' for one inch
(1 ") or larger trade sizes, and shall not contain more than two 90 degree bends or the
equivalent thereof. Pull or junction boxes shall be installed to comply with these
requirements. Voice/data and signal system raceways shall be installed and homerun
to the phone board location. Tag ends terminating at phone board. Allow
maximum length for city to make connections to the phone board.
3.08 IDENTIFICATION:
A. General: Refer to Section 161 00, "Basic Materials and Methods", for requirements
concerning painting and marking of raceways and fittings.
END OF SECTION 16110
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-11
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
SECTION 16110 — ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide electrical raceway and fitting work as shown, scheduled,
indicated, and specified.
B. Conduit Systems: All electrical conductors shall be installed in conduit or surface
metallic raceways. Conduit shall be as specified herein. The phone/Data shall be
installed and home run to the Phone Board location. Tag all termination ends.
Allow maximum length for connection to the phone board. City to connect tagged
termination ends to phone board. In addition, surface metallic raceways shall be
installed for other systems as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications.
C. Types: The types of electrical raceways and fittings required for the project include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Rigid steel (RGS) and intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
3. Flexible metal conduit.
4. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
5. Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.03 STANDARDS
A. Products and installation shall comply with applicable sections of the following
standards:
1. ANCI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc -Coated.
2. ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
3. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
4. NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced
by one of the following:
l . Rigid Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
a.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation
b.
Republic Steel Corporation
C.
Triangle PWC, Inc.
d.
Youngstown Sheet & Tube
e.
Wheatland
2.
PVC
— Coated Rigid Steel:
a.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation
b.
Flexi-Guard, Inc.
C.
Occidental Coating Company.
d.
Penma-Cote.
e.
Republic Steel Corporation.
f.
Robroy.
g.
Triangle PWC, Inc.
h.
Youngstown Sheet & Tube.
i.
Wheatland.
3.
Electrical
Metallic Tubing:
a.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation. .
b.
Republic Steel Corporation.
C.
Triangle PWC, Inc.
d.
Youngstown Sheet & Tube.
e.
Wheatland.
4.
Flexible Metal and Liquidtight Flexible Metal:
a.
AFC.
b.
Anaconda Metal Hose.
C.
Electri-Flex Company.
d.
Flexi-Guard, Inc.
e.
Triangle PWC, Inc.
f.
Wheatland.
5.
Raceway Fittings:
a.
Appleton Electric Company.
b.
Cantex (PVC).
C.
Carion (PVC).
d.
Crouse Hinds.
e.
Efcor Division.
f.
0. Z. Gedney Company.
g.
Raco, Inc.
h.
Republic Steel Corporation.
i.
Steel City.
j.
Thomas and Betts.
6.
Ductbank Spacers:
a.
Formex.
b.
Carlon.
7.
Precast Manholes, Pull Boxes and Accessories:
a.
Brooks.
b.
A.B. Chance.
8.
UL Label:
All electrical raceways and fittings shall be UL-listed and labeled.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
9. NEMA Compliance: All electrical raceways and fittings shall comply with
NEMA standards applicable to raceway construction.
10. NEC Compliance: All electrical raceways and fittings shall comply with NEC
requirements applicable to construction and installation.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, a list of the proposed
manufacturers of electrical raceways and fittings selected from the
manufacturers listed herein. The Contractor may install conduit and fittings
furnished by any manufacturer listed on the approved submittal.
2. Cut sheets of electrical raceways and fittings.
3. Manufacturers data on manholes, pull boxes and accessories.
4. Additional information as required in Section 16002.
1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Handle raceways and fittings carefully to avoid damage, breaking, denting and
scoring. Damaged materials shall not be installed.
B. Store raceways and fittings in a clean dry space and protect from the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
A. General:
1. Provide metal conduit, tubing, and fittings of the type, grade, size, and weight
(wall thickness) as shown and required for each service. Where type and grade
are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by this Section to fulfill
the wiring requirements and complying with the NEC for electrical raceways.
2. For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide a complete assembly of
conduit, tubing, or duct with fittings, including, but not necessarily limited to,
connectors, nipples, couplings, expansion fittings, bushings, locknuts, other
components and accessories as needed to form a complete system of the type
indicated.
3. Conduit fittings shall be designed and approved for the specific use intended.
Conduit fittings, including flexible, shall have insulated throats or bushings.
Rigid conduits shall have insulated bushings, except insulated throat
grounding bushings shall be used on all conduits without ground conductors
and where required by N.E.C. Article 250.
B. Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit: Shall be FS WW-C-0581 and ANSI
C80.1, hot -dipped galvanized steel. Both ends of conduit shall be threaded with
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
factory- installed thread protectors. Fittings shall be threaded Type "FS" W-F-408
and ANSI C80.4, hot -dipped galvanized steel. Expansion fittings shall be OZ Type
"DX", Appleton Type "XJ", Crouse -Hinds Type "XC" or an approved equal and
shall have bonding jumpers.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Shall be ANSI C80.3 galvanized steel with plain ends.
Fittings, couplings and connectors shall be FS W-F-408 and ANSI C80.4
galvanized steel type. Fittings, couplings and connectors shall be set screw type
with pressure cast body. Compression type fittings, couplings and connectors shall
be used where EMT conduit is cast in concrete. All EMT connectors shall have
insulated throats or bushings.
D. Flexible Conduit:
1. Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-556, zinc -coated steel
2. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, zinc -coated steel, insulated
throat.
3. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit
comprised of single strip, continuous, flexible, interlocked, double -wrapped
steel, galvanized inside and outside; forming smooth internal wiring channel;
with liquidtight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or neoprene.
E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, liquidtight, zinc -coated
steel, neoprene gaskets and 0-rings, insulated throat.
F. Nonmetallic Conduit and Fittings:
1. Schedule 40 Rigid PVC Conduit: Per FS WC- 1094A, UL 651, and NEMA TC
2, 90'C conductor temperature rating.
2. Schedule 80 Rigid PVC Conduit: Per UL 651 and NEMA TC 2, 903C
conductor temperature rating.
3. Quaduct PVC Conduit: Composite duct consisting of four nominal 1-1/2"
Schedule 40 PVC conduits with an integral spacer, as manufactured by
Teleduct Corporation, Logan, Ohio, (800)433-6931.
4. PVC Conduit Fittings: Per NEMA TC 3 and compatible with PVC conduit
system.
5. Ductbank Spacers: Spacers shall be interlocking plastic designed for the
conduit sizes and nominal 3" spacing being used.
G. Conduit Tubing Accessories: Provide ANSI/NEMA FB I conduit and tubing
accessories including straps, hangers and expansion joints as recommended by the
conduit and tubing manufacturer and as specified in this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install electrical raceways and fittings as shown, in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of the NEC, and in
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the
intended function. Complete electrical raceway installation before starting the
installation of wire and cable.
B. Conduit Size: Minimum conduit size for power wiring shall be 1/2" except that all
home runs shall be minimum 3/4", except that 3/8" flexible metallic conduit may be
used for fixture whips and conduit cast in concrete walls or slabs or installed under
concrete slabs shall be minimum 3/4". Maximum conduit size for EMT shall be 4".
Minimum conduit size for control wiring shall be 1/2". Minimum conduit size for
voice/data and security wiring shall be 3/4".
C. Rigid Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit: Use rigid steel or intermediate metal
conduit to run all electrical raceway systems, where exposed to weather; in damp or
wet locations; where subject to physical damage; and where cast in concrete walls
or floor slabs which have waterproof membranes and where cast in masonry walls.
Use rigid steel or IMC conduit for all exposed conduit. IMC conduit shall not be
used in sizes larger than 4". Use threaded type couplings and fittings. Split type
couplings and fittings are not acceptable.
D. PVC -Coated Rigid Steel: Use polyvinyl chloride (PVC) externally -coated rigid steel
conduit and fittings for electrical raceway systems for branch circuits to wet areas;
where exposed outdoors; and elsewhere, as shown. Conduit and fittings shall be
installed such that the PVC -coating is continuous and watertight such that no
portion of the metal conduit or fittings is exposed to moisture.
E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Use EMT for branch circuit electrical raceway
systems where concealed in furred ceilings or in walls. EMT conduit shall not be
installed where exposed to weather or in wet locations. Use steel set screw type
fittings, couplings and connectors made-up tight for all conduit sizes. Use watertight
fittings, couplings and connectors where required. Crimp type fittings, couplings
and connectors are not acceptable.
F. Flexible Metal: Use flexible metal conduit (with internal ground wire) and fittings
for lay -in lighting fixture connections and for other electrical equipment
connections where subject to movement and vibration, but where liquidtight
flexible metal conduit is not specified. Use flexible metal conduit in such lengths as
required, 6-0" maximum length and Y-O" minimum length. 3/8" diameter conduit
may be used for lighting fixture pigtails".
G. Liquidtight Flexible Metal: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings for all
motor connections, all connections in kitchens and laundries and for other electrical
equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration and when subject
to one or more of the following conditions: exterior location; moist or humid
atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate; corrosive
atmosphere; subject to water spray; subject to dripping oil, grease or water. Install
internal ground wire in flexible conduit with grounding bushings. Maximum length
shall be 6-0" and minimum length shall be T-O".
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16110-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
H. Rigid Nonmetallic: Use PVC conduit directly buried in earth, concrete encased, cast
in concrete slabs, and where subject to corrosive environment. PVC conduit shall
only be used where shown on the Drawings. Use Schedule 40 where direct buried
and Schedule 80 where exposed, with size adjusted to have same fill area as if
Schedule 40 were used. Type "EB" encased burial duct shall be used in concrete
encased applications where shown on the Drawings. Turnouts through the slab shall
be RGS protected as specified herein.
3.02 INTERIOR CONDUIT SYSTEM:
A. Ground all metallic conduit in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition
of the NEC.
B. Install all conduit as a complete system without conductors, continuous from outlet
to outlet and from fitting to fitting. Make up threaded joints of conduit carefully in
such a manner as to ensure a tight joint. Field -cut threads shall be cold -galvanized
after cutting. The entire conduit system shall be secured at all joints and boxes in
such a manner that each system shall be electrically continuous throughout. Fasten
the entire conduit system securely into position. A run of conduit between outlet and
outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting shall not contain
more than the equivalent of four quarter bends, including those bends located
immediately at the outlet or fitting. Install approved expansion fittings in all conduit
runs as specified in paragraph 3.2/P.
C. Ream all ends of conduit properly to remove rough edges. Whenever a rigid steel or
IMC conduit enters a switchboard, panelboard, enclosure, or box, it shall be
securely fastened by the use of a locknut inside and outside and an approved
insulating bushing shall be installed. Insulated grounding bushings shall be installed
on all conduits without ground conductors and where required by NEC Article 250.
Whenever an EMT conduit enters a switchboard, panelboard, enclosure, or box, it
shall be securely fastened by use of an insulated throat connector or a connector
with an insulating bushing. Lay out and install all conduit systems as to avoid all
other services or systems, the proximity of which may prove injurious to the conduit
or the wires or conductors which the conduit confines.
D. Conceal conduit systems in finished areas, (all areas). Concealed metallic conduits
shall be run in a direct manner, basically parallel to, and at right angles with the
lines of the building, and with as long a bend as possible. Conduit may be exposed
in mechanical/electrical rooms only. On exposed systems, run the conduit parallel
or perpendicular to the structural features of the building and rigidly support with
malleable iron conduit clamps at intervals as required by NEC or on conduit racks,
neatly racked and bent in a smooth radius at corners insofar as practicable. All
bends shall be field -made using an approved bending machine designed for the
purpose, or using standard elis having a radius not less than that shown in Table
346-10 of the National Electrical Code, and with approved fittings or connectors.
All bends shall be free from dents or flattening.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
E. All conduit shall be run without traps. Where traps are unavoidable, a junction or
pull box shall be placed at the low point. Metallic conduit systems which are
exposed to the weather or water shall be made watertight. As soon as conduit has
been permanently installed in place, conduit shall be capped or plugged with
standard accessories. All metallic conduit shall be swabbed after plaster and dry
wall is finished and dry.
F. Support exposed raceway or grouped concealed raceways on galvanized channel
using compatible galvanized fittings (bolts, beam clamps and similar items) and
galvanized threaded rod pendants to secure raceway to channel and channel to
structure. Support single conduit runs using a properly sized galvanized conduit
hanger with galvanized closure bolt/nut and threaded rod. Support -spacing shall not
exceed 1 O' apart for all EMTBMC conduit and rigid conduit 2" and smaller and 15'
apart for rigid conduit 2-1/2" and larger and within 3' from boxes and changes in
direction. Support flexible conduit on maximum 4-1/2' centers and within one foot
(F) of boxes. All raceway support system materials shall be galvanized and
manufactured by Kindorf, Unistrut, Superstrut, Caddy, or Spring Steel Fasteners,
Inc. Provide chrome or nickel -plated escutcheon plates on all conduit passing
through walls and ceilings in finished areas.
G. Support 3/4" and smaller EMT conduit concealed in ceiling cavities with No. 13
AWG galvanized iron wire pendants, spaced not to exceed 10' apart and 3' from
boxes and changes in direction, secured to conduit with clips and properly secured
to structure. Perforated strap shall not be used for conduit supports. Branch circuit
EMT conduit 3/4" trade size and smaller may be suspended using "caddy clips"
attached to the ceiling support system in a manner acceptable to the ceiling
contractor. Support conduit size one inch (1") and larger as described in Paragraph
F.
H. Make all joints and connections to ensure mechanical strength and electrical
continuity. PVC conduit shall be joined, or have fittings attached, by using a fusing
(solvent) compound recommended by and applied as instructed by, the conduit
manufacturer.
I. Run conduit to avoid proximity to heat producing equipment, piping and flues,
keeping a minimum of 8" clear. 'Whenever possible, install horizontal raceway runs
above water piping. Unless shown otherwise, do not install conduit horizontally in
concrete slabs without written approval. All roof penetrations shall be made in
adequate time to allow the roofer to make proper flashings.
J. Carefully review architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical
Drawings and place boxes and conduit to avoid conflicts with structural members or
other general construction.
K. Conduit shall not be embedded in structural slabs without prior written permission
from the Structural Engineer. Conduits embedded in structural slabs shall be
installed in the middle of the slab below the top and above the bottom reinforcing
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
steel. Maintain a minimum concrete coverage of one inch (1") except where
penetration is made.
L. Furnish sleeves for timely placing in construction for all conduit passing through
concrete walls, partitions, beams, floors, and roofs while same are under
construction.
M. All conduit passing through the housing on connected equipment, shall pass through
a cleanly cut hole protected with an approved grommet.
N. Metallic conduit installed below grade shall have its entire length painted with two
coats of protective finish unless encased in concrete. Each coat shall consist of 5
mils of PPG "Coat Cat Epoxy Coating" applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. The entire length of metallic conduit, including
fittings, shall be protected to a point 6" above finished grade (or concrete slab).
O. Coordinate locations of raceways in fire rated partitions so as not to affect the fire
rating of the partition. Notify the Architect in writing where additional construction
is required to maintain the partition fire rating.
P. Install expansion fittings in all conduit as follows: 4L
1. All conduits crossing building expansion joints; unless some other form of
thermal expansion compensation is approved in writing by the Engineer.
2. All conduit straight runs in excess of 200'and on 400' centers in all longer
conduit runs.
3. Conduits entering environmental rooms.
4. Locations subject to thermal expansion and as required by NEC.
5. Unless expansion fitting has an integral bonding braid an external braid,
approved for the purpose, shall be installed around the fitting.
3.03 EXTERIOR CONDUIT SYSTEMS:
A. Exterior conduit systems shall meet all of the general installation requirements for
interior conduit systems.
B. All exterior conduit systems shall be completely watertight. All hangers, fasteners,
and supports used with exterior conduit systems shall be hot dip galvanized.
C. Conduit routed across roofs shall be attached to 4" x 4" redwood or penta-treated
pine sleepers spaced on maximum 5'-0" intervals, unless otherwise detailed on the
Drawings. Sleepers shall be installed in pitch pans or as otherwise detailed on the
Drawings.
D. Install underground conduits with sealing glands equal to OZ Type "FSK" or
approved equal exterior to conduits and OZ Type "CSB" or approved equal interior
to conduit at points where conduits enter the building, to prevent water seepage.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
E. Install conduits outside the building lines a minimum of 36" below grade, unless
noted otherwise on the Drawings. Maintain 12" of earth or 2" of concrete separation
between electrical conduits and other services or utilities below grade. Maintain I 0'-
O" separation between parallel underground power and voice/data conduits. Where
power and voice/data conduits cross below grade, crossing shall be at right (90
degree) angles with a minimum 2'-0" vertical separation.
3.04 POWER DUCTBANK SYSTEMS:
A. Power ductbanks shall be of individual rigid PVC Schedule 40 conduit protected
with a 3" thick concrete cover which extends 12" past the covered conduits encased
in reinforced concrete. Rigid steel conduit shall be used for the final 1 O' at the
beginning and end of each ductbank and for all 90 degree elbows. The reinforced
concrete encasement surrounding the ductbank shall be rectangular in cross section,
having a minimum concrete thickness of 3". Conduit shall be separated by a
minimum concrete thickness of 2", except that light and power conduit shall be
separated from control and signal conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 3".
Encasement and protective concrete shall be red in color.
B. The power ductbank shall be routed underground and the top of the concrete
envelope shall be not less than 36" below grade for 277/48V or 1201208V and 60"
below grade for 4160v or 1320OV.
C. Changes in direction of ductbank runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either
vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a
minimum radius of curvature of 5'. All bends in a run shall be separated by a
minimum of 10' of straight conduit, where possible.
D. During construction, partially completed ductbanks shall be protected from the
entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs.
As each section of the ductbank is completed, a testing mandrel shall be drawn
through each conduit. A brush with stiff bristles shall be drawn through until each
conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be
immediately installed.
E. Ducts in concrete encased ductbanks shall be independently supported by
interlocking module spacers by Formex or equal. Spacers shall provide separation
between adjacent ducts as specified hereinabove. Spacers shall be installed at 6'
maximum intervals.
F. Ducts in concrete encased ductbanks shall be terminated in pull boxes with
interlocking terminators by Formex or equal. A watertight tapered plug shall be
furnished and installed in unused duct openings. Where terminators are installed in
new work, they shall be poured -in -place.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
G. Install underground conduits with sealing glands equal to OZ Type "FSK" exterior
to the conduit and OZ Type "CSB", or equal internally at the point where conduits
enter the building to prevent water seepage into the building.
H. Furnish the exact dimensions and location of power ductbank to be encased in time
to prevent delay in the concrete work.
I. Power Company service ductbank/conduits shall be installed in accordance with
Power Company requirements and standards.
3.05 VOICE/DATA DUCTBANK SYSTEMS:
A. Exterior voice/data ductbanks shall be of individual PVC conduit and direct buried
without concrete encasement under landscaping grassy areas and sidewalks and
concrete -encased below driveways, streets and roadways. Conduit shall be rigid
PVC Schedule 40. Interior ductbanks shall be of individual conduit and conduit
shall be EMT. Unless shown otherwise, the type of conduit used shall not be mixed
in any one ductbank and shall not be smaller than 4" in diameter. Install innerducts
and pulistrings in conduit and ductbank where noted.
B. Where the voice/data ductbank is routed underground, the top of the ductbank shall
be not less than 36" below grade and detectable marker tape shall be installed above
the ductbank.
C. Changes in direction of voice/ata ductbank runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees,
either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a
minimum radius of curvature of 5'. All turn ups to above grade shall be long radius
RGS elbows, coated as specified in paragraph 3.02N. All bends in a run shall be
separated by a minimum of 10'where possible. There shall be no more than two 90
degree bends in any run of voice/data ductbank.
D. During construction, partially completed ductbanks shall be protected from the
entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs.
As each section of the ductbank is completed, a testing mandrel with diameter 1/4"
smaller than the conduit shall be drawn through each conduit. A brush with stiff
bristles shall be drawn through until each conduit is clear of all particles of earth,
sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be immediately installed.
E. Sleeves for voice/data ductbank passing through basement walls shall be rigid steel
conduit and shall extend a minimum of 24" outside basement wall.
F. Ducts in concrete encased ductbanks shall be independently supported by
interlocking modular spacers. Spacers shall provide separation between adjacent
ducts as shown on the Drawings. Spacers shall be installed at 6' maximum intervals.
G. Ducts in concrete encased ductbanks shall be terminated in pull boxes with
interlocking terminators. A watertight tapered plug shall be furnished and installed
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
in unused duct openings. Where terminators are installed in new work, they shall be
poured -in -place.
H. Voice/data ductbank shall be installed per Telephone Company standards.
3.06 DUCTBANK MANHOLES AND PULL BOXES:
A. Install pull boxes in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
B. Seal all joints and openings to prevent the entry of water.
3.07 VOICE/DATA AND SIGNAL SYSTEM RACEWAYS:
A. General: Conduit shall be installed in accordance with the previous specified
requirements for conduit and tubing and with the additional requirements that no
length of run shall exceed 100' for 1/2" and 3/4" trade sizes, and 150' for one inch
(I") or larger trade sizes, and shall not contain more than two 90 degree bends or the
equivalent thereof. Pull or junction boxes shall be installed to comply with these
requirements. Voice/data and signal system raceways shall be installed and homerun
to the phone board location. Tag ends terminating at phone board. Allow
maximum length for city to make connections to the phone board.
3.08 IDENTIFICATION:
A. General: Refer to Section 161 00, "Basic Materials and Methods", for requirements
concerning painting and marking of raceways and fittings.
END OF SECTION 16110
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16110-11
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
SECTION 16112 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: Provide electrical box and fitting work as shown, scheduled,
indicated, and as specified.
B. Types: The types of electrical boxes and fittings required for the project include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1. Outlet boxes.
2. Junction boxes.
3. Pull boxes.
4. Cabinets.
5. Conduit bodies.
6. Bushings.
7. Locknuts.
1.03 STANDARDS
A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with
the following standards:
1. ANSIINEMA OS 1 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers
and Box Supports.
2. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (I 000 Volts
Maximum).
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced
by one of the following:
1. Interior Outlet Boxes:
a. Appleton Electric Company.
b. Arrow Conduit and Fittings Corporation.
C. Bowers.
d. 0. Z. Gedney Company.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16112-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
e.
National Electric Products Company.
f.
Star Sheet Metal.
g.
Steel City, Midland -Ross Corporation.
2.
Weatherproof Outlet Boxes:
a.
Appleton Electric Company.
b.
Crouse -Hinds Company.
C.
Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
d.
Pyle -National Company.
e.
Red Dot.
3.
Junction and Pull Boxes:
a.
Appleton Electric Company.
b.
Arrow -Hart, Inc.
C.
0. Z. Gedney Company.
d.
General Electric Company.
e.
Hoffman Engineering Company.
f.
Keystone Columbia, Inc.
g.
Square D Company.
h.
Unity.
4.
Cabinets:
a.
General Electric Company.
b.
Square D Company.
C.
Cuttler Hammer.
5.
Conduit Bodies:
a.
Appleton Electric Company.
b.
Crouse -Hinds Company.
C.
Killark Electric Manufacturing Company.
d.
Pyle -National Company.
6.
Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts:
a.
Allen -Stevens Conduit Fittings Corporation. b. Allied Metal Stamping,
Inc.
b.
Appleton Electric Company.
C.
Carr Company.
d.
Raco, Inc.
e.
Steel City, Midland -Ross Corporation.
f.
Thomas and Betts Company, Inc.
B. UL Label: All electrical boxes and fittings shall be UL-labeled.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, a list of proposed
manufacturers of electrical boxes and fittings selected from the manufacturers
listed herein. The Contractor may install electrical boxes and fittings furnished
by any manufacturer listed on the approved submittal.
2. Cut sheets of electrical boxes and fittings.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16112-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
3. Cut sheets on cabinets.
4. Drawings of any special boxes which must be fabricated, including
construction details.
5. Additional information as required in Section 16002.
1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Handle electrical boxes and fittings carefully to avoid damage, breaking, denting,
and scoring. Damaged equipment or materials shall not be installed.
B. Store electrical boxes and fittings in a clean dry space and protect from weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS:
A. Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the
type, shape, and size, including depth of box, to suit each respective location and
installation; constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with
threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices. Provide
"gang" boxes where devices are shown to be grouped.
1. Type for Various Locations:
a. Ceilings: 4" square, 2-1/8" deep.
b. Standard Partitions, Where 1/2" and 3/4" Conduits are Employed: 4"
square by 2-1/8" deep boxes with one -gang or two -gang plaster covers
shall be used.
C. Thin Partitions Measuring 3-1/2" or Less: 4" square by 1-1/2" deep
boxes with one- gang or two -gang covers shall be used.
d. Standard Partitions, Where Conduits of a Size Greater than 3/4" are
Employed: 4-11116" square by 2-1/8" deep boxes with one -gang or two -
gang plaster covers shall be used.
e. Masonry Walls: Galvanized switch boxes made especially for masonry
installations; depths of boxes must be properly coordinated for each
specific installation.
f. Surface: Type "FS" or Type "FD" box with surface cover.
g. Special: Where above types are not suitable, furnish boxes to suit the use
taking into account space available, appearance, and Code requirements.
2. Switch Boxes:
a. One-gang/Two-gang Switch Boxes in Standard Walls or Partitions: Shall
be 3" x 2" square corner boxes by 2-1/2" deep with appropriate mounting
bracket for attachment to studs.
b. One-gang/Two-gang Switch Boxes in Thin Walls or Partitions: Shall be
3" x 2" square corner boxes by 1-1/2" deep with appropriate mounting
bracket for attachment to studs.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16112-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
C. Three -gang and Up Switch Boxes in Standard Walls or Partitions: Shall
be 4-1/2" wide solid gang boxes, with appropriate "gang" plaster covers
as required.
3. Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for
each installation, including proper covers or wall device plates, mounting
brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, plaster rings for all boxes in
plaster construction, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for
supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used, and meeting
requirements of individual wiring situations.
B. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide hot -dipped galvanized cast iron weatherproof
outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape, and size, including depth of box, with
threaded conduit ends, cast metal coverplate with spring -hinged waterproof caps
suitably configured for each application, including face plate gasket and corrosion
resistant fasteners.
C. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes,
with screw -on covers and welded seams with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and
washers, of the type, shape, and size, to suit each respective location and
installation.
1. Type for Various Locations:
a. 100 Cubic Inches in Volume or Smaller: Standard outlet boxes with
stamped knockouts.
b. 150 Cubic Inches in Volume or Larger: Code gauge steel with sides
formed and welded, screw covers unless shown to have hinged doors.
Hinged doors with locking device same as furnished on panelboards.
Knockouts factory -stamped or formed in field with a cutting tool to
provide a clean symmetrically -cut hole.
C. Exterior or Wet Areas: Weatherproof galvanized steel construction with
proper gaskets and corrosion resistant fasteners. A parking garage is
considered a wet area.
D. Cabinets: Provide cabinets of size and style noted on the Drawings.
1. Cabinet fronts shall be steel. Other sheet metal for boxes shall be galvanized
steel. Details of construction and methods of assembly shall meet the
requirements of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
2. The panel doors of cabinets shall be provided with locks. Single panel doors
of cabinets shall have a lock with ring pull. Single doors 48" or longer and
pairs of doors shall have a lock with vertical bolt operation, 3-point locking.
Locks shall be keyed alike. Two keys shall be supplied for each cabinet.
3. Cabinets shall have concealed hinges.
4. Flush -mounted trim shall be fastened to cabinet with adjustable trim clamps.
Fasteners for cabinets in concealed areas shall be concealed.
5. Each voice/data cabinet shall be equipped with 3/4" plywood backboard
covering entire inside rear surface and painted matte white.
6. Trims and doors shall have a suitable primer coat and a finish coat of the
manufacturer's standard color.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16112-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
E. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast metal conduit bodies, of the type, shape
and size, to suit each respective location and installation, constructed with threaded
conduit ends, removable cover, and corrosion resistant screws.
F. Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion resistant punched -
steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts, gasketed locknuts, insulated conduit
bushings and insulated grounding conduit bushings of the type and size to suit each
respective use and installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS:
A. Install electrical boxes and fittings as shown, in compliance with NEC
requirements, or in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with
recognized industry practices to ensure that the boxes and fittings serve the intended
purposes. Where boxes are concealed in exterior walls, the continuity of the vapor
barrier shall be maintained behind the box.
B. Use outlet and switch boxes for junctions on concealed conduit systems
C. Determine from the Drawings and by actual determination on the site, the exact
location of each outlet. The outlet locations shall be modified from those shown to
accommodate changes in door swings or to clear other interferences that may arise
from job construction details, as well as modification to center them within room
spaces. These modifications shall be made with no change in contract price and
shall be a matter of job coordination. Check these conditions throughout the entire
job and notify the Architect of discrepancies, as they may occur, to verify the
modifications, if any, before proceeding with the installation of the work. Set wall
boxes in advance of wall construction, blocked in place and secured. Set all wall
boxes flush with the finish and install extension rings as required to extend boxes to
the finished surfaces of special furring or wall finishes.
D. Install outlet boxes at heights as specified in Section 16100, "Basic Materials and
Methods".
E. On exposed conduit systems provide pull boxes, junction boxes, wiring troughs, and
cabinets wherever necessary for proper installation of various electrical systems.
F. Provide weatherproof boxes for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather
or moisture.
G. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been
removed.
H. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16112-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
I. Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted, or solidly
imbed boxes in concrete or masonry. Boxes shall not be permitted to move laterally.
Boxes shall be secured between two studs. Two gang (single or double device)
boxes may be connected to one stud using an approved bracket, except where
specific dimensioned locations must be met. Box recessing depths shall comply
with Article370-10 of the National Electrical Code.
J. Boxes for any conduit system shall not be secured to the ceiling system, HVAC
ductwork, or mechanical piping.
K. Provide junction and pull boxes for feeders and branch circuits where shown and
where required by the NEC, regardless of whether boxes are shown or not.
L. Coordinate locations of boxes in fire rated partitions and slabs so as to not affect the
fire rating of the partition or slab. Notify the Architect in writing where
modifications or additional construction are required to maintain the partition or
slab fire rating.
M. All junction boxes in accessible locations shall be marked with a permanent marker
to identify the circuit(s) within the box.
N. Junction boxes utilized for emergency circuits shall be painted red in color.
O. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6" separation. Provide
minimum 24" separation in acoustic -rated walls. If boxes are connected together,
install flexible connection between the boxes and pack openings with fiberglass.
P. The following requirements shall apply to exposed as well as concealed conduit
systems when "gang" boxes shall be used. These "gang" boxes shall have
dimensions which are not smaller than those shown in the following table:
Q
IN GANG
3
4
5
6
R. Switch boxes shall not be used as junction boxes.
S. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.
i Tli '7
4-1/2" x 8-5/8"
4-1 /2" x 10-1 /2"
4-1/2" x 10-1/2"
4-1 /2" x 14"
T. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,
benches, and backsplashes.
U. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6" of
recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16112-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
1
V. Outlet boxes supporting fixtures shall be securely anchored in place in an approved
manner. Support outlet boxes and fixtures in acoustic ceiling areas from building
structures, not from acoustic ceilings. Light fixture outlets shall be coordinated with
mechanical and architectural equipment and elements to eliminate conflicts and
provide a workable neat installation.
W. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished
areas.
X. Where outlet or switch boxes are not supported from studs or joists directly, they
shall be supported by expandable clip type bar hangers, Appleton Catalog No. SX-1
8 or SX-26. In no case shall conduit be used to support switch or outlet boxes.
Y. Outlet boxes in plaster partitions shall be "shallow -type" set flush in wall so there is
at least 5/8" plaster covering back of box.
Z. Refer to Section 16100 for applicable painting and marking of electrical boxes.
END OF SECTION 16112
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16112-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
SECTION 16115 - ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included: Provide electrical gutter and wireway work as shown, scheduled,
indicated, and as specified.
B. Types: The types of electrical gutters and wireways required for the project include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Electrical wiring gutters and wireways.
b. Power, security and voice/data surface metal raceways.
1.03 STANDARDS:
A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with
the following standards:
1. NEC Article 362 Wireways.
2. NEC Article 374 Auxiliary Gutters.
3. NEC Article 374 Multioutiet Assembly.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced
by one of the following:
1. Gutters and Wireways:
a. General Electric Company.
b. Hoffman Manufacturing Company.
C. Square D Company.
d. Cuttler Hammer.
2. Surface Raceways:
a. AT Power System, A Division of Airey-Thompsen Co.
b. Wiremold.
B. UL Label: All gutters, wireways, and raceways used for power wiring shall be UL-
labeled.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16115-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Cut sheets of surface -mounted and over floor raceways, gutters, wireways,
fittings, connectors, associated accessories and mounting hardware.
2. Additional information as required in Section 16002.
1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Handle gutters, wireways and surface raceways carefully to avoid damage, breaking,
denting, and scoring. Damaged equipment or materials shall not be installed.
B. Store gutters, wireways, and surface raceways in a clean dry space and protect from
the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS:
A. General: Provide galvanized steel electrical gutters and wireways in the types and
sizes indicated, minimum 16 gauge thickness, with rounded edges and smooth
surfaces and knock -outs; constructed in compliance with applicable standards; and
with additional features as indicated or required. Provide hinged or removable cover
on raceway where noted on drawings. All power wiring raceways shall have a
cover.
B. Size: Provide size as indicated, where size is not indicated, construct in accordance
with the NEC and other applicable standards.
C. Accessories: Provide gutter and wireway accessories where indicated or required,
constructed of same metal and finish as gutters or wireways.
D. Supports: Provide gutter and wireway supports where indicated or required,
conforming to the NEC, as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Fittings: Fittings shall be so constructed to continue the "lay -in" feature through the
entire installation.
F. Finish: Provide all sheet metal parts with a rust inhibiting phosphatizing primer
coating and finished in gray enamel. All hardware shall be cadmium plated to
prevent corrosion.
2.02 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY:
A. General: Surface metal raceway shall be two piece galvanized steel with removable
cover equal to Wiremold series indicated on the Drawings.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16115-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
B. Finish: All raceway system components shall be finished with the manufacturer's
standard gray painted finish.
C. Accessories: Provide couplings, elbows, connectors, boxes, extension rings, end
caps, outlet covers, and other required accessories specifically designed for use with
each surface raceway system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install gutters, wireways and surface raceways where shown, in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions, NEC, NECA's "Standard of
Installation", and with recognized industry practices to ensure that the gutters,
wireways and surface raceways comply with the specified requirements and serve
the intended purposes. Comply with requirements of NEMA and the NEC
pertaining to installation of electrical gutters.
B. Finishing: Remove burrs and sharp edges of gutters and wireways wherever these
could possibly be injurious to wiring insulation or jacket.
C. Grounding: Electrically ground gutters and wireways to ensure continuous electrical
conductivity.
D. Cables:
1. Complete gutter and wireway installation before starting the installation of
cables.
2. Provide sufficient space to permit access for installing, splicing, and
maintaining the cables.
E. Mounting: Mount surface raceways in accordance with the manufacturer's UL-listed
installation instructions and the requirements of the local Electrical Inspection
Department.
3.02 TESTING:
A. General,- Prior to energization, check for continuity of circuits, for short circuits
and check grounding connections. Verify that each individual raceway outlet is
energized and that hot, neutral and ground conductors are properly connected.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION:
A. A. Refer to Section 161 00, "Basic Materials and Methods", for applicable
painting and nameplates for gutters and wireways.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16115-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
END OF SECTION 16115
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16115-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
SECTION 16120 — 300/600 VOLT CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included: Provide 300 and 600 volt electrical cable, wire, and connector work
as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as specified.
B. Types: The types of 300 and 600 volt cables, wire, and connectors required for the
project include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. 600 volt building wire and cable.
2. 600 volt building wire and cable connectors.
3. 300 volt control/signal wire and cable.
4. 300 volt control/signal wire and cable connectors.
C. Application: The applications for cable, wire, and connectors required on the project
are as follows:
l . Power distribution circuitry.
2. Lighting branch circuitry.
3. Appliance, receptacle and equipment branch circuitry.
4. Motor branch circuitry.
5. Control wiring.
1.03 STANDARDS:
A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with
the following standards:
1. NEMA WC 3 Rubber -insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
2. NEMA WC 5 Thermoplastic -insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission
and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
3. ASTM B3 Standard for Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for
Electrical Purposes.
B. Where application of applicable codes, Trade Association standards, or publications
appears to be in conflict with the requirements of this Section, an interpretation
shall be obtained from the Architect/ Engineer.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16120-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 300/600 VOLT CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced
by one of the following:
1. 600 Volt Building Wire and Cable:
a. Alcan.
b. American Insulated Wire Corporation.
C. Cerro Wire and Cable Company.
d. Cyprus Wire and Cable Company.
e. Electrical Cable Division, USS Corporation.
f. Essex Group, Inc.
g. General Cable Corporation.
h. Hi -Tech Cable Corporation.
i. ITT Royal Electric.
j. Kaiser.
k. Okonite Company.
1. Senator Wire & Cable.
m. Southwire Company.
n. Triangle PWC, Inc.
o. Viakon.
2. 600 Volt Mineral Insulated Cable:
a. Pyrotenax Cable.
3. Type MC Cable:
a. AFC.
4. 300 Volt Wire and Cable:
a. Alpha.
b. Belden.
C. West Penn.
5. Connectors:
a. AMP, Inc.
b. Buchannan.
C. Burndy Corporation.
d. 0. Z. Gedney Company.
e. General Electric Company.
f. Ideal Industries, Inc.
g. ITT Blackburn.
h. Mac Products, Inc.
i. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company.
j. Teledyne Penn -Union.
k. Thomas & Betts Company.
B. UL Label: All cable, wire, and connectors shall be UL-labeled.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16120-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 300/600 VOLT CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, a list of the proposed
manufacturers of wire and cable, cable lugs, cable connectors and termination
fittings listed herein. The Contractor may install wire and cable, cable lugs,
cable connectors and termination fittings furnished by any manufacturer listed
on the approved submittal.
2. Cut sheets on all 300 and 600 volt conductors with manufacturers name,
ratings and capacities, insulation characteristics, and available colors, clearly
listed.
3. Cut sheets indicating all cable lugs, termination fittings and cable connectors.
4. Cut sheets indicating types of conductor identification bands.
5. Additional information as required in Section 16002.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Provide factory -wrapped waterproof flexible barrier material for covering wire and
cable wood reels, where applicable; and weather resistant fiberboard containers for
factory -packaging of cable, wire and connectors, to protect against physical damage
in transit. Damaged cable, wire, or connectors shall be removed from project site.
B. Store cable, wire, and connectors in their factory -furnished coverings, and in a
clean, dry indoor space which provides protection against the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 600 VOLT BUILDING CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide cable, wire, and connectors of
manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by his published product
information, designed and constructed as instructed by the manufacturer, and as
required for the installation.
B. Wire and Cable: Provide factory -fabricated wire and cable of the size, rating,
material, and type as indicated for each service. Where not indicated, provide proper
selection as required to comply with installation requirements and with NEC
standards. The minimum size wire to be used for power or lighting circuits shall be
No. 12 copper (No. 14 for light fixture pigtails) with insulation as noted below.
Minimum size for control wiring shall be No. 14 copper.
C. Conductors: Provide soft or annealed copper wires meeting, before stranding, the
requirements of ASTM B3, "Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper
Wire for Electrical Purposes", latest edition.
1. Conductors for power wiring sized No. IO AWG and smaller shall be
stranded. Stranded conductors shall be terminated on back wired wiring
devices where wiring is mechanically secured via a side screw. Conductors for
control wiring sized No. IO AWG and smaller shall be stranded, except that
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16120-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 300/600 VOLT CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS
solid conductors or stranded conductors with UL Listed crimp on connectors
shall be provided where conductors are terminated under terminal screws.
2. Conductors sized No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Stranding shall be
Class B meeting the requirements of ASTM B8, "Standard Specification for
Concentric -Lay -Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, or Soft".
D. Insulation: Insulation shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL 83, "Standard for
Thermoplastic Insulated Wires".
1. Insulation for conductors sized No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be UL Type
"THHN/THWN" (rated at 90"C in dry locations and 75'C in wet locations).
2. insulation for conductors sized No. 8 AWG and larger shall be UL Type
"THHN/THWN" (rated at 90'C in dry locations and 750C in wet locations).
3. All wiring inside lighting fixtures shall be temperature rated per the NEC.
4. Branch circuit wiring within 3" of fluorescent ballasts shall be temperature y�
rated for 90'C.
E. Connectors for Building Wire and Cable: Provide factory -fabricated, metal
connectors of the size, rating, material, type, and class required for each use.
2.02 300 VOLT CONTROL/SIGNAL CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide cable, wire, and connectors of
manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by his published product
information, designed and constructed as instructed by the manufacturer, and as
required for the installation.
B. Wire and Cable: Provide factory -fabricated wire and cable of the size, rating,
material, and type as indicated for each use.
C. Conductors: Provide soft or annealed copper wires as individual conductors, twisted
together or shielded, where required, and meeting, before stranding, the
requirements of ASTM B3, "Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper
Wire for Electrical Purposes", latest edition.
D. Conductor Gauge: Provide conductor gauge as required for the application with a
minimum of 24 AWG. Conductors shall be stranded or solid as required by the
application or manufacturer.
E. Insulation: Insulation shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL 83, "Standard for
Thermoplastic Insulated Wires", and the requirements of NEC Article 725 for Class
2 wiring.
1. Insulation shall be rated for a maximum working voltage of 300 volts; PVC
jacket; UL-listed.
2. Insulation of cables used in environmental air spaces shall be nonmetallic
jacket UL-listed for use in air plenums.
F. Connectors: Provide factory -fabricated, metal connectors of the size, rating,
material, type, and class required for the application.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16120-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 300/600 VOLT CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS
PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install electrical cable, wire and connectors as shown, in accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC, the
NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that
products serve the intended functions.
B. Coordination:
1. 1 Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and
equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface.
2. 2. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which cable, wire
and connectors are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Inspect wire and cable for physical damage. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. 600 Volt Building Wire and Cable:
L Pull all conductors together when more than one conductor is being installed
in a raceway. Where more than ten power conductors are installed in a single
conduit, a minimum 50% derating factor shall be applied.
2. Mains and feeders are to be run their entire length in continuous pieces
without joints or splices.
3. Conductors may be run in multiple on sizes No. 110 AWG through 600 MCM
inclusive, provided all multiple conductors are the same size, length, and type
of insulation, and are so arranged and terminated as to ensure equal division of
the total current between all conductors involved.
4. Before any wire is pulled into any conduit, the conduit shall be thoroughly
swabbed in such a manner as to remove all foreign material and to permit the
wire itself to be pulled into a clean, dry conduit.
5. Cables shall be selected on the basis of their purpose and UL-listing.
Generally, use Types "THWN" and "THHN" in building interiors and other
dry locations. Outdoors and underground in raceways, use Type "THWN".
Conductors subject to abrasion, such as in lighting poles, shall be Type
W THN or THHNI.
6. Powdered soapstone, Ideal Yellow 77, or Polywater may be used as a lubricant
where necessary. Wire pulling lubricant shall not be used when installing
branch circuit conductors from panelboards with "isolation" transformers.
7. No conductor smaller than No. 12 AWG shall be used for power or lighting
purposes (except light fixture tails). Switch legs shall be No. 12 AWG.
Control circuit wiring may be No. 14 AWG minimum, and shall not be run in
same conduit with power wiring.
8. For 120 volt, 20 amp branch circuits with a length of 75' or more to the
homerun junction box or first outlet, provide minimum No. IO AWG
conductors to the homerun junction box or first outlet. Where the additional
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16120-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 300/600 VOLT CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS
circuit length from the homerun junction box or first outlet to the last outlet
l
exceeds 75', provide minimum No. 10 AWG conductors to the last outlet.
9.
For 208 volt, 20 amp branch circuits with a length of 100'or more, provide
No. 10 AWG conductors for the entire branch circuit.
10.
For 208 volt, 30 amp branch circuits with a length of 100'or more, provide No.
8 AWG conductors for the entire branch circuit.
11.
Conductors for lighting and power branch circuits shall be of such a size that
the drop in potential from the panelboards to the farthest point on the circuits
shall not exceed 2% at maximum load and 70% power factor, at 120/208
volts.
12.
Lighting fixtures shall not be used for raceways for circuits other than parallel
wiring of fixtures.
13.
Conductors for connection to individual light fixtures in grid type ceilings
from their associated junction boxes, shall be 3 No. 14 AWG THHN copper
600 volt, solid conductors in 72" long 3/8" flexible metal conduit fixture -tails,
or by Type MC cable fixture tails where permitted by the local authority
having jurisdiction, in lengths not to exceed 8'.
14.
All conductors in vertical conduits or raceways shall be supported in the
manner set forth in the latest edition of the National Electrical Code.
15.
Do not use a pulling means, including fish tape, cable, or rope which can -
damage the raceway.
16.
Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected
from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been
completed.
17.
Install exposed wire and cable, parallel and perpendicular to surface or
exposed structural members and follow the surface contours, where possible.
18.
All wire on this project shall be new, unused, in good condition, and shall be
delivered in standard coils, package, or rolls. Samples of all wire shall be
submitted by the Contractor when requested by the Engineer for the purpose
of determining acceptability of the wire.
19.
Wire which has been rejected by the Engineer shall not be used again.
Decisions as to the quality of the wire furnished and the acceptance of such
wire shall be made by the Owner's duly authorized representative.
20.
Do not permit conductors entering or leaving a junction or pull box to deflect
so as to cause pressure on the conductor insulation.
21.
Splices and taps on branch circuits shall occur only when such circuits divide as
shown on the drawings and shall consist of one "through" circuit to which the circuit
shall be spliced or tapped.
22.
No splices or taps shall be made in any conductor except in outlet boxes, junction
boxes, splice boxes, or other devices and equipment in exposed and accessible
locations approved for the purpose by the latest edition of the NEC.
23.
All wire connections or splices on conductors No. 1 8 AWG through No. 8 AWG
shall be made with pre -insulated spring type connectors. No other type of mechanical
connector shall be used for No. 8 AWG and smaller conductors.
24.
All No. 6 AWG and larger copper conductors terminated on the "load" side
lugs of all switchboard circuit devices, and the "line" and "load" side lugs of
all other devices shall be terminated with set -screw type pressure connectors
approved for the purpose.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16120-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006
300/600 VOLT CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS
25. All No. 6 AWG and larger copper conductors which are to be spliced or
tapped in wireways, gutters, or junction boxes shall be spliced or tapped using
hydraulically applied, high conductivity compression connectors, or with set-
screw type pressure connectors approved for the purpose, using 3-M electrical
tape or manufactured connector covers approved for the purpose.
26. The manufacturer's recommended installing tool shall be used for the
installation of all hydraulically applied compression type lugs or connectors.
27. Connections to devices (receptacles, switches, etc.) shall be made with
individual conductors. The devices shall not be used for "feed-thru" purposes.
Where "feed-thru" conditions exist, use "pig -tail" splices as described above.
Color coding of "pig -tail" splices shall conform to Section 16100, "Basic
Materials and Methods".
28. Support cables above accessible ceilings; do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use
spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Include
bridle rings or drive rings.
29. Multiple circuit wires in bundles or harnesses terminating in control panels,
switchboards, panelboards, etc., shall be loosely bundled, trained, and laced to
achieve a neat and workmanlike appearance.
30. Surplus wire shall be trimmed to proper length. Do not fold and stuff surplus
wires into wiring gutters.
31. Wires exiting harness shall be trained at 90 degree angles to termination point.
32. Refer to Section 1 61 00 for color coding and identification of conductors.
Type MC Cable:
33. may be used for lay -in fixture pigtails (10'maximum length) only.
D. 300 Volt Control/Signal Cable and Wire:
1. Install all low voltage wiring in a suitable raceway except in areas with
accessible (lay -in) ceilings unless otherwise noted on Drawings or other
Division 16 sections. Where cable is routed without a raceway, bundle all
cables and suspend to one foot above ceiling using loop rings on 5'centers. Do
not run cable loose on top of suspended ceilings. Do not attach cables to
suspended ceiling supports or any mechanical, plumbing, or sprinkler piping.
Conceal conduit except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit
and piping are exposed. Fasten flexible conductors, which bridge cabinets and
doors, neatly along hinge side and protect against abrasion. Tie and support
the conductors neatly.
2. Remote control wires shall be no smaller than No. 14 AWG. Control wires
shall be run in separate conduits. Departures from the sizes so determined
shall be made only in those cases in which the National Electrical Code
required the use of larger conductors. The sizes as determined from these
tables shall be regarded as the acceptable minimum under all other
circumstances. In no case, however, shall there be a voltage drop greater than
that specified in any feeder or branch circuit. This voltage drop shall be based
on the full load, 70% power factor, the total impedance drop of 60 Hz
alternating current and with the reactance drop in the respective metal conduits
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16120-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 300/600 VOLT CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS
duly considered. The Contractor may, if he deems it necessary or advisable,
use larger sized conductors than those shown. Under no circumstances,
however, shall the Contractor use any conductors sized in a manner which
does not conform to the above mentioned tables without having first secured
the written approval of the Owner's duly authorized representative.
3. Number code or color code conductors appropriately for future identification
and servicing of the system. Refer to Section 161 00 for additional
requirements.
4. Make all splices and connections in stranded conductors using UL-approved
solderiess crimp connectors.
3.02 TESTING:
A. Pre-energization Check: Prior to energization, check all new cable and wire for
continuity of circuitry and for short circuits. Correct malfunction when detected. No
submittal is required for this test.
B. Feeder Insulation Resistance Test: Each new 600 volt feeder conductor shall have
its insulation resistance tested after the installation is complete except for
connection at its source and point of termination.
1. Tests shall be made using a Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at a
voltage of not less than 1000 volt dc. Resistance shall be measured from
conductor to conductor and from conductor to ground. Readings shall be taken
after 30 seconds and 60 seconds of Megger operation at slip speed and
insulation resistance shall not be less than the following:
Wire Size (AWG)
No. 12
No. 10 through No. 8.
No. 6 through No. 2
No. 1 through No. 4/0
Larger than No. 4/0
Insulation
Resistance (Ohms)
1,000 K
250 K
100 K
50 K
25 K
2. New conductors which do not meet or exceed the insulation resistance values
listed above shall be removed, replaced, and retested.
3. Neutral Testing:
a. The resistance of the system's neutral shall be greater than 1 00,000
ohms to ground with the grounding conductor and supply system
disconnect.
b. Repeat neutral ground test for neutrals of separately derived systems.
C. Voltage and Current Values: The voltage and current in each main feeder conductor
shall be measured and recorded after all connections have been made and the feeder
is under load.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16120-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 300/600 VOLT CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS
D. Submittals: Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests.
Submit four copies of certified test results to Architect for review. Test reports shall
include conductor tested, date and time of test, test results, relative humidity,
temperature, and weather conditions.
3.03 AS BUILT DRAWINGS:
A. Refer to Section 16002 for applicable requirements.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION:
A. Refer to Section 16100 for color -coding and markings for all conductors.
END OF SECTION 16120
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16120-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 300/600 VOLT CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included: Provide wiring device work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and as
specified.
B. Types: The types of wiring devices required for the project include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
Receptacles.
2.
Switches.
3.
Wallbox dimmers
4.
Pushbuttons.
5.
Wall plates.
1.03 STANDARDS:
A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with
the following standards:
1. 1. NEMA WE 1 General-purpose wiring devices.
2. 2. NEMA WI) 5 Specific -purpose wiring devices.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced
by one of the following:
1. Bryant.
2. Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
3. Intermatic.
4. Leviton.
5. Lightolier, Inc.
6. Lutron, Inc.
7. Pass and Seymour, Inc.
8. Prescolite.
9. Raco.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16140-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WIRING DEVICES
10. Slater Electric, Inc.
11. Taymac Corporation.
12. Walker.
13. Wiremold Company.
B. UL Label: All wiring devices shall be UL-labeled.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Cut sheets of the receptacles, switches and pushbuttons.
2. Cut sheets of wall plates.
3. Additional information as required in Section 16002.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver wiring devices individually wrapped in factory -fabricated containers.
B. Handle wiring devices carefully to avoid damage, breaking, and scoring.
C. Store in a clean dry space and protect from the weather.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING DEVICES:
A. General: Provide factory -fabricated wiring devices in the type, color, and electrical
rating for the service indicated. Where type and grade are not indicated, provide
proper selection to correspond with branch circuit wiring and overcurrent
protection. Attachment of wires to devices shall be by screw pressure under the
head of binding screws. Arrangements depending on spring pressure or tension are
not acceptable. All binding screws shall be brass or bronze.
B. Receptacles: Comply with NEMA Standard WD1 and as follows:
1. General Duty Decorator: Provide simplex or duplex specification grade
decorator type receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal
equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to
mounting yoke, with metal mounting straps, back and side wired with screw
type terminals, molded high impact thermoplastic compound, NEMA
configuration as indicated.
a. 20 amp, 125 volt grounded simplex Pass & Seymour #26361-*. #5-20R
NEMA Leviton
#16251-*.
b. 15 amp, 125 volt grounded duplex Pass & Seymour #26252-*. #5-15R
NEMA Leviton #16252-*.
C. 20 amp, 125 volt grounded duplex Pass & Seymour #26352-*. #5-20R
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16140-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WIRING DEVICES
NEMA Leviton #16352-*.
d. 20 amp, 125 volt, Class A, GFCI Pass & Seymour #2091-S*.
duplex receptacle with integral Leviton #6899-*. Current interrupter,
ground fault interrupter slide wire only
* Color designation, refer to Paragraph 2.3.
Wiring devices connected to energy power circuits shall be as specified
hereinabove except that wiring devices shall be red in color with
coverplates color -matching other devices in the room.
2. General Duty Standard: Provide simplex or duplex specification grade
standard type receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal
equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to
mounting yoke, with metal mounting straps, back and side wired with screw
type terminals, molded high impact thermoplastic compound, NEMA
configuration as indicated.
a. 20 amp, 125 volt grounded simples Pass & Seymour #5361-*. #5-20R
NEMA Leviton#5088-*.
b. 15 amp, 125 volt grounded duplex Pass & Seymour #5252-*. #5-15R
NEMA Leviton #5096-*.
C. 20 amp, 125 volt grounded duplex Pass & Seymour #5352-*. #520R
NEMA Leviton #5891-*.
d. 20 amp, 125 volt, Class A, GFCI Pass & Seymour #2091-S*.
duplex receptacle with integral Leviton #5896-*.
ground fault current interrupter,
slide wire only.
* Color designation, refer to Paragraph 2.3.
Wiring devices connected to emergency power circuits shall be as
specified hereinabove except that wiring devices shall be red in color with
coverplates color -matching other devices in the room.
3. Heavy-duty Simplex: Provide single heavy-duty type receptacles, with green
hexagonal equipment ground screw, with metal mounting straps, back wiring,
black molded phenolic compound, NEMA configuration as indicated.
a. 30 amp, 125 volt grounded single NEMA Hubbell #9308 with
#9363 stainless
#5-30R steel plate.
b. 30 amp, 250 volt, grounded, 3-wire, 2-pole Hubbell #9330 with
#9353 stainless
NEMA #6-30R steel coverplate.
C. c. 20 amp, 125/250 volt, grounded, 4-wire, Hubbell #8410 with
#93091 stainless
3-pole NEMA #1 4-20R steel coverplate
d. 30 amp, 1251250 volt, grounded, 4-wire, Hubbell #9430 with
#93091 stainless
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16140-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WIRING DEVICES
3-pole NEMA #1 4-30R steel coverplate.
e. 30 amp, 125/250 volt, grounded, locking,
with #7420 cast
Hubbell #2710-G
4 wire, 3-pole NEMA #LI4-30R (window aluminum weatherproof
coverplate washing receptacle)
4. Data Receptacles Decorator : Provide simplex or duplex specification grade
decorator type receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal
equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to
mounting yoke, with metal mounting straps, back and side wired with screw
type terminals, molded high impact thermoplastic compound, NEMA
configuration as indicated.
a. 15 amp, 125 volt, grounded duplex receptacle
Pass & Seymour #26252-*
NEMA #5-15R
Leviton # 16252-*.
b. 20 amp, 125 volt, grounded duplex receptacle
Pass & Seymour #26352-*
NEMA #5-20R
Leviton # 16352-*.
c. 15 amp, 125 volt, isolated grounded
Pass & Seymour #IG 26262-*.
duplex receptacle NEMA # 5-15R
Leviton #16262-IG*.
d. 20 amp, 125 volt, isolated grounded
Pass & Seymour # IG 26362-*.
duplex receptacle NEMA #5-20R
Leviton #16362-IG*.
e. 20 amp, 125 volt, grounded twist lock, simplex
Pass & Seymour #L520-R.
receptacle NEMA #L5-20R
Leviton #2310
f. 30 amp, 125 volt, grounded twist lock, simplex
Pass & Seymour #L530-R.
receptacle NEMA #L5-30R
Leviton #2610.
g. 15 amp, 250 volt, grounded twist lock, simplex
Pass & Seymour #4560.
receptacle NEMA #L6-15R
Leviton #4550-FR.
h. 20 amp, 250 volt, isolated ground twist lock,
Pass & Seymour #L620-R.
simplex receptacle NEMA #L6-20R
Leviton #2320.
i. 30 amp, 250 volt, isolated ground twist lock,
Pass & Seymour #L630-R.
simplex receptacle NEMA #L6-30R
Leviton #2620.
* Color designation, refer to Paragraph 2.3
Wiring devices connected to emergency power circuits shall be as specified
hereinabove except that wiring devices shall be red in color with coverplates
color -matching other devices in the room.
5. Data Receptacles Standard: Provide simplex or duplex specification grade
standard type receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal
equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to
mounting yoke, with metal mounting straps, back and side wired with screw
type terminals, molded high impact thermoplastic compound, NEMA
configuration as indicated.
a. 15 amp, 125 volt, grounded duplex receptacle Pass & Seymour #5252-*.
NEMA #5-15R Leviton #5096-*.
b. 20 amp, 125 volt, grounded duplex receptacle Pass & Seymour # 5253-*.
NEMA #5-20R Leviton # 5891-*.
* Color designation, refer to Paragraph 2.3.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16140-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WIRING DEVICES
Wiring devices connected to emergency power circuits shall be as specified
r hereinabove except that wiring devices shall be red in color with coverplates
color -matching other devices in the room.
6. Housekeeping Receptacles: Provide specification grade twist -lock receptacles,
2-pole, 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw,
NEMA configuration as indicated.
a. 20 amp, 125 volt grounded simplex NEMA Leviton #2310*. #L5-20R
* Color designation, refer to Paragraph 2.3.
7. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Receptacles: Provide duplex
specification grade decorator type receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding, with
integral surge suppression, green hexagonal equipment ground screw, back
and side wired with screw type terminals, NEMA configuration as indicated.
Surge suppressor shall provide an equal surge protection of not less than 80
joules in all three modes (hot to neutral, hot to ground, and neutral to ground),
minimum 7:1 RFI and EMI noise suppression and a front face LED indicator
for positive indication of surge protection. Surge suppression receptacles shall
comply with LIL 1449 (Category A&B) and ANSMEEE 62.41-1991.
a. 15 amp, 125 volt, surge suppression duplex, Pass & Seymour #6262-*-SP
NEMA #5-15R Leviton #8280-*.
b. 20 amp, 125 volt, surge suppression duplex, Pass & Seymour # 6262-*-SP
NEMA #5-20R Leviton #8380-*.
C. 15 amp, 125 volt, isolated ground surge Pass & Seymour #IG 6261-*-SP
suppression duplex, NEMA #5-15R Leviton #8280-IG*.
d. 20 amp, 125 volt, isolated ground surge Pass & Seymour #IG 6362-*-SP
suppression duplex, NEMA #5-20R Leviton #8380-IG*.
* Color designation, refer to Paragraph 2.3.
8. General Duty Clock Simplex: Provide single specification grade type
receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, recessed to contain male plug and
permit clock to cover outlet, with metal hook for supporting clock, ivory
molded phenolic compound, side wired with screw type terminals, NEMA
configuration as indicated.
a. 15 amp, 125 volt, grounded single NEMA Pass & Seymour #S3713-I.
#5-15R Leviton #628-I
9. Specific -use receptacles shall have volts, amps, poles, and NEMA
configuration as noted on Drawings.
C. Switches: Comply with NEMA Standard WD 1 and as follows:
1. Rocker: Provide specification grade flush rocker switches, with mounting
yoke insulated from mechanism, equipped with plaster ears, white switch
rocker and side -wired screw terminals.
a. Single pole, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch Pass & Seymour # 26021-*.
Leviton #5621-2*.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16140-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WIRING DEVICES
b. Three-way, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch
Pass & Seymour #26023-*.
'
Leviton #5623-2*.
C. Four-way, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch
Pass & Seymour #26024-*.
Leviton #5624-2*.
d. Single Pole, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch,
Pass & Seymour # 26029-*
Illuminated when on
Leviton #5828-2*.
e. Single pole, double throw, momentary
Leviton #5657-2*.
center off, 120/277 volt, 15 amp switch
* Color designation, refer to Paragraph 2.3.
Wiring devices connected to emergency power circuits shall be as
specified hereinabove except that wiring devices shall be red in color
with coverplates color -matching other devices in the room.
2. Toggle: Provide specification grade flush toggle switches, with mounting yoke
insulated from mechanism, equipped with plaster
ears, white switch handle,
side -wired terminals, horsepower rated.
a. Single pole, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch,
Pass & Seymour #20AC1-L.
key -operated
Leviton #1221-2*L.
b. Single pole, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch
Pass & Seymour #20AC1-*.
Leviton #1221-2*.
C. Three-way, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch
Pass & Seymour #20AC3-*.
Leviton #1223-2*.
d. Single pole, 120/277 volt, 20 amp switch,
Pass & Seymour #20AC1-RPL.
red pilot light
Leviton #1221-PLR.
e. Single pole, double throw, momentary Pass & Seymour #1091-*
contact center off, 120/277 volt, 20 amp Leviton #1285-I.
switch
* Color designation, refer to Paragraph 2.3.
Wiring devices connected to emergency power circuits shall be as specified
hereinabove except that wiring devices shall be red in color with coverplates
color -matching other devices in the room.
D. Decorator Wall Box Dimmers: Provide specification grade linear slide dimmers
with separate positive on/off button and LED indicator, voltage compensation
circuitry for constant light output and toroidal filters for suppression of RFI and
lamp sing. Dimmers shall be "decorator face" size and shall gang with standard
decorator rocker switches. Wall box dimmers shall be as follows:
1. Single pole, 120 volt, 600 watt dimmer Lightolier #ZP600-*.
2. Single pole, 120 volt, 1,000 watt dimmer Lightolier #ZP1000-*.
3. Single pole, 120 volt, 600 watt inductive Lightolier #ZP600VA-*.
load dimmer
4. Single pole, 120 volt, 1,000 watt inductive Lightolier #ZP1000VA-*.
load dimmer
5. Single pole, 120 volt, 260 watt electronicLightolier #ZP260QE-*.
Transformer low voltage dimmer
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16140-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WIRING DEVICES
6. Single pole, 120 volt, 425 watt electronicLightolier #ZP425QE-*.
Transformer low voltage dimmer
7. Multiple location remote on -off switch Lightolier #ZPR-3-*
* Color designation, refer to Paragraph 2.3.
E. Custom Wall Box Dimmers: Provide specification grade linear slide dimmers with
separate positive on -off switch with LED indicator, voltage compensation circuitry
for constant light output and toroidal filters for suppression of RF and lamp sing.
Matching switches shall be available for ganging with dimmers. Ganged dimmers
and/or switches shall be provided with a single coverplate to match the installed
configuration. Wall box dimmers shall be as follows:
1. Single pole, 120 volt, 600 watt dimmer Lightolier #MP600-*.
2. Single pole, 120 volt, 1000 watt dimmer Lightolier #MP1000-*.
3. Single pole, 120 volt, 1500 watt dimmer Lightolier #MP1500-*.
4. Single pole, 120 volt, 1500 watt dimmer Lightolier #MP2000-*.
5. Single pole, 120 volt, 600 watt inductive load Lightolier #MP600VA-*.
dimmer
6. Single pole, 120 volt, 1000 watt inductive load Lightolier #MP1000VA-*.
dimmer
7. Single pole, 120 volt, 1500 watt inductive load Lightolier #MP1500VA-*.
dimmer
8. Single pole, 120 volt, 2000 watt inductive load Lightolier #MP2000VA-*.
dimmer
9. Single pole, 120 volt, 525 watt electronic Lightolier #MP525QE-*.
Transformer low voltage dimmer
10. Single pole, 120 volt, 625 watt electronicLightolier #MP625QE-*.
transformer low voltage dimmer
11. Multiple location remote on -off remote Lightolier #MRP-3-*.
12. Matching single pole switch Lightolier #MP-1P-*.
13. Matching 3-way switch Lightolier #MP-3P-*.
14. Matching 4-way switch Lightolier #MP-4P-*.
15. Dimmer ganging faceplates Lightolier FB/NFB/
Custom as required-*.
* Color designation, refer to Paragraph 2.3.
F. Pushbutton: Emergency power off, single pole, 120 volt ac, 20 amp, momentary
contact nonilluminated push button, red color cap and guard: Square D Company,
Class 9001, KR2RH5 pushbutton, K25 flush stainless steel plate, KN805 legend
plate, and K60 cover.
2.02 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:
A. Wall Plates: Provide switch, duplex outlet and telephone wall plates, with single or
multigang cutouts as indicated, complete with metal screws for securing plates to
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16140-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WIRING DEVICES
devices. Screw heads shall be colored to match finish of plate. Wall plates shall
possess the following additional construction features:
1. Material and Finish:
a. Specification grade, smooth, high impact thermoplastic and Lexan for
general duty receptacles, data receptacles, and switches. Pass & Seymour
#RP series or approved equal. Jumbo plates are not acceptable.
b. Specification grade, Type 302, satin -finished stainless steel, 0.1" thick
for heavy duty receptacles and kitchen receptacles.
C. Specification grade, weatherproof, coverplate, gasketed UV stabilized
polycarbonate with hinged gasketed device cover, for exterior and wet
area receptacles. Coverplates shall be NEMA 3R rated and shall be
watertight when in use. Coverplates shall be as manufactured by Taymac
Corporation, RACO, Intermatic or an approved equal.
d. Specification grade, Type 302 or Type 430, satin -finished stainless steel,
0.030" thick for general duty receptacles and switches for elevator
lobbies, entrance lobbies, restrooms, and public areas.
e. Specification grade, smooth, high impact thermoplastic or Lexan for
emergency power receptacles and switches.
2.03 WIRING DEVICE/COVERPLATE COLORS:
A. General: Provide general duty wiring devices and coverplates in colors as follows:
1. Painted Drywall: Provide white general use receptacles and switches and gray
data receptacles with matching white thermoplastic coverplates in occupied
areas and white Lexan coverplates in mechanical/electrical and maintenance
areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which wiring devices and
floor boxes are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Inspect devices for
physical damage. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES:
A. General:
1. Install wiring devices where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
Delay installation of devices until wall construction and wiring is completed.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16140-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WIRING DEVICES
2. Special purpose switches and/or outlets not covered by the specifications, but
noted on the Drawings shall be of the amperage, voltage rating, and NEMA
configuration indicated. The switches and/or outlets shall be specification
grade of the same quality as those specified.
3. When "EQUIPMENT ONLY" or "JUNCTION BOX ONLY" is indicated
for equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor to
obtain from the supplier, the complete data as related to the electrical portion
of the equipment, including rough -ins, mounting height, type of outlet, items
furnished by the supplier, etc. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be
responsible for furnishing and installing all materials which are usually the
Electrical Subcontractor's responsibility with the installation of the
equipment.
4. The approximate location of switches, power outlets, floor boxers, etc., is
indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings, however, may not give complete
and accurate information in regard to locations of such items. Determine exact
locations by reference to the general building Drawings and by actual
measurements during construction of the building before rough -in, subject to
the approval of the Construction Inspector.
B. Box Condition: Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are
clean, free from excess building materials, debris, and similar matter.
C. Alignment: Install all wiring devices plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall,
floor, or ceiling in which they are installed.
D. Switches and Dimmers: Install switches and wall box dimmers at a height as
specified in Section 16100, "Basic Materials and Methods", to switch center line,
unless otherwise noted on Drawings, on the strike side of doors as hung and in a
uniform position so that the same direction will open and close the circuit
throughout the project. Where shown near doors, install switches and dimmers not
less than 2" and not more than 12" from door trim. Where more than one switch is
in the same location, install switches in a multigang box with a single coverplate.
Use toggle switches for motor disconnect switches only when installed in a ceiling
plenum or in a mechanical, electrical, or telephone room.
E. Receptacles: Install receptacles vertically at a height as specified in Section 16100,
to receptacle center line above finished floor and horizontally at a height as
specified in Section 16100 to receptacle center line above counter tops unless
shown or specified otherwise. Where splash backs occur above counters, mount
devices horizontally at a height as specified in Section 16100 to receptacle center
line above splash backs. Receptacles shall be installed with ground pin receiver
down. All devices shall be installed complete with coverplates. Use 20 ampere
receptacle when only one receptacle is installed on a branch circuit.
F. Coverplates:
1. Install stainless steel coverplates on all heavy-duty receptacles and wiring
devices located in kitchen areas. Coffee bars shall not be considered kitchen
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16140-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WIRING DEVICES
areas. Install weatherproof coverplates on all exterior and wet area receptacles.
Refer to Paragraph 2.03 for additional requirements.
2. Multigang wall plates shall be used for each group of ganged devices.
Mounting screws shall be installed for each device covered by the wall plate.
3. Wall plates for concealed work shall be flush against the finished wall, and
shall completely cover the wall opening. Wall plates shall not be installed
until all painting has been completed. Devices shall be protected by masking
tape or other coverage until painting is complete. Any device with paint on it
shall be replaced at no expense to the Owner. Jumbo plates are not acceptable.
4. Engrave and black paint fill text descriptions and branch circuit numbers on
switch and receptacle coverplates where shown on the Drawings or specified
herein.
G. Mounting Heights: Refer to Section 16100 for wiring device mounting heights.
3.03 PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES:
A. General: Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise Contractor
regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial
Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned
and scored by faulty plugs.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION:
A. Refer to Section 16100 for wiring device identification requirements.
3.05 TESTING:
A. General: Prior to energization, check for continuity of circuits, for short circuits and
check grounding connections. After energization, check wiring devices to
demonstrate proper operation and receptacle polarization.
END OF SECTION 16140
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16140-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 16145 - CONTACTORS RELAYS PHOTOCELLS AND TIME SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included: The extent of electrical control device work is as shown and
scheduled, as indicated by the requirements of this Section, and as specified
elsewhere in these Specifications.
B. Types: The types of electrical control devices required for the project include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1. Contactors.
2. Relays.
3. Photocells.
4. Time switches.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced
by one of the following:
1. Contactors and Relays:
a. Allen-Bradley-
b. Automatic Switch Company.
C. General Electric.
d. Russelectric, Inc.
C. Square D Company.
2. Photocells and Time Switches:
a. Intermatic Time Controls.
b. Paragon Electric Company, Inc.
C. Precision Multiple Controls, Inc.
d. Tork, Inc.
B. UL Standards: Products shall conform to all applicable UL standards and shall be
LL-labeled.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16145-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONTRACTORS, RELAYS, PHOTOCELLS AND TIME
SWITCHES
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Cut sheets on contactors, relays, photocells, and time switches.
2. Component wiring diagrams, where applicable.
3. Additional information as required in Section 16002.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver components in factory -fabricated water resistant packaging.
B. Handle components carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and
finish. Store components in a clean, dry space and protect from weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONTACTORS AND RELAYS:
A. General: Provide contactors and relays as shown and specified herein. The number
of poles, ampere ratings, and pole arrangements shall be as shown. All contactors
and relays shall conform to the following:
1. Be rated for continuous duty at full -rated current in an unventilated enclosure.
Eight hour duty ratings will not be acceptable.
2. Contacts shall be readily replaceable, self -aligning, silver, or silver tungsten
alloy.
3. Control voltage shall be 120 volt, 60 Hz, unless otherwise specified.
4. All auxiliary contacts shall be rated for not less than 10 amperes.
5. Contactors rated for lighting and mixed loads shall have an interrupting
capacity of 150% of their continuous duty rating.
6. Be capable of successfully handling inrush currents at 20 times rating.
B. Enclosures: Contactors shall be furnished with a NEMA I enclosure where installed
indoors and a NEMA 3R enclosure where installed outdoors, unless noted
otherwise.
C. Mechanically -Held Devices- Mechanically -held devices shall conform to the
following:
1. Be single solenoid operated.
2. Be positive locking without the use of latches, hooks, or magnets.
3. Control stations shall be momentary action, unless otherwise shown, and
make -but- not break coil current.
4. Permit manual operation in either direction and provide visual indication of
contact position.
5. Control circuits shall be 3-wire with separate open and close circuits, unless
otherwise shown.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16145-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONTRACTORS, RELAYS, PHOTOCELLS AND TIME
SWITCHES
6. Maintained contact, 2-wire control interface modules, shall be provided when
noted on the Drawings.
7. Contactors rated at 225 amperes or less shall operate satisfactorily in any
mounting position.
D. Magnetically -Held Devices: Magnetically -held devices shall conform to the
following:
1. AC operated units shall have laminated low loss electrical steel core pieces
with machine ground pole faces and shading coils.
2. Units rated at 300 amperes and above shall have do operating coils and
include the necessary rectifier for the ac/dc operation.
3. Normally open contactors shall be spring -loaded open and magnetically
closed.
2.02 PHOTOCELLS:
A. General: Provide self-contained, adjustable, weatherproof photoelectric controls
designed for mounting on a %Z" conduit fitting. Photoelectric control shall switch on
at dusk and off at dawn and be adjustable in a range of 2 to 50 fc.
1. Photoelectric control shall have 2000 watt contacts suitable for the voltage
shown and shall include an inherent 5 second delay in operation to prevent
false switching.
2. Photocells shall be Tork 2100 Series, Paragon CW Series or an approved
equal.
2.03 TIME SWITCHES:
A. General: Provide time switches as shown and specified herein. The number of
channels, contact type, dial type, voltage, enclosure, and arrangement shall be as
shown. All time switches shall conform to the following:
1. Time switches shall be an all electronic design with a minimum of 72 hours of
quartz clockibattery power outage carry over.
2. Time switches shall be 7 day, 1 or 2 channel type with a minimum of three
on/off cycles per day and shall be 356 day programmable for Daylight Savings
Time and holidays. Where noted, time switches shall also feature an
Astronomic dial feature.
3. Electronic time switches shall have a built-in bypass switch for each channel
which shall override the current program status but not future programming.
4. Output contacts shall be maintained or momentary contact, as noted. Time
switches shall have independent output channels, as noted.
5. Time switches shall have NEMA I surface, NEMA I flush, or NEMA 3R
enclosures, as noted.
6. Time switches shall be Paragon EC Series, Tork DZS Series or an approved
equal.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16145-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONTRACTORS, RELAYS, PHOTOCELLS AND TIME
SWITCHES
2.04_ WIRING AND RACEWAYS:
A. Line Voltage Control Wiring: This wiring shall be as specified in Section 16120,
"3001600 Volt Cable, Wire and Connectors".
B. Low Voltage Control Wiring: This wiring shall be as specified in Section 16120
except that conductors shall consist of a multi -conductor jacketed cable whenever
possible.
C. Raceways: Raceways for line voltage and low voltage control wiring shall be as
specified in Section 161 1 0, "Electrical Raceways and Fittings", and Section
16112, "Electrical Boxes and Fittings".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS:
A. General: Install miscellaneous electrical control devices as shown, in accordance
with applicable portions of the NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized
industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions.
B. Conductors: Connect electrical conductors to miscellaneous electrical control
devices in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and
wiring diagrams. Wherever possible, match conductors of the electrical connection
for proper interface between the electrical supply and the installed equipment.
C. Contactors and Relays: Install contactors and relays mounted in panelboards or
individual enclosures as shown and be complete, including all control wiring and
devices.
D. Photocells and Time Switches: Install lighting controls as shown. Photocell and
time switch settings shall be as directed by the Architect.
E. Line and Low Voltage Control Wiring: Line and low voltage control wiring shall be
installed in a suitable raceway.
F. Connections: Refer to Section 16190, "Electrical Connections for Equipment", for
connections to equipment.
3.02 TESTING:
A. Test contactors, relays, photocells, time switches, and related controls to verify that
they function as designed and specified.
B. Repair or replace any devices or installation which does not function as designed
and specified.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16145-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONTRACTORS, RELAYS, PHOTOCELLS AND TIME
SWITCHES
3.03 ADJUSTMENT:
A. Set or program time switches to criteria provided by the Owner. Train Owner's
personnel in proper programming and adjustment of time switches.
B. Adjust photocells to properly sense dusk and dawn conditions.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION:
A. General: Refer to Section 161 00, "Basic Materials and Methods", for nameplates
and identification.
END OF SECTION 16145
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16145-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 CONTRACTORS, RELAYS, PHOTOCELLS AND TIME
SWITCHES
SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included: Provide panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets, as shown,
scheduled, indicated, and as specified.
B. Types: The types of panelboards and enclosures required for the project include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1 . Power distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance panelboards.
1.03 STANDARDS:
A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with the
following standards:
1 . NEMAAB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
2. NEMA KS 1 Enclosed Switches.
3. NEMA PB 1 Panelboards.
4. NEMA PB 1.1 Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced by
one of the following:
1. Cutler Hammer Corporation.
2. General Electric Company.
3. Square D Company.
4. Siemens.
B. UL Standards: Panelboards and enclosures shall conform to all applicable UL standards
and shall be UL-labeled.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16160-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
A,. Shop Drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Cut sheets of the circuit breaker distribution panels and panelboards with
construction, circuit breaker amperage, poles, interrupting ratings and quantities
clearly listed, and with bus amperage, voltage, phase and wires, integrated
equipment ratings and all associated accessories clearly indicated.
2. Include dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures. Submit, if
requested, transparencies of circuit breaker characteristics with unlatch times.
3. Additional information as required in Section 16002.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver distribution panels and panelboards in factory -fabricated water-resistant
wrapping.
B. Handle panelboards carefully to avoid damage to material component, enclosure and
finish.
C. Store distribution panels and panelboards in a clean, dry space and protect from the
weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
A. General: Lighting and appliance panelboards shall be dead front safety type equipped
with molded case circuit breakers as shown and scheduled. Power distribution
panelboards shall be dead front type equipped with circuit breakers as shown and
scheduled.
B. Busing Assembly: Flanelboard and power distribution panel board busing shall be tin or
silver-plated copper. Bus structure and mains shall have ratings as shown and scheduled
and shall be phase sequence construction. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise
tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or busbar not to exceed
65'C rise above 400C ambient. Heat rise test shall be conducted in accordance with UL
67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted instead of actual heat tests.
All bus joints shall be bolted with medium carbon steel, zinc or cadmium plated
hardware equipped with lock washers and torqued to the manufacturer's recommended
settings (usually ASTM standards). All bolted connections shall have Belleville
washers. Furnish a bare uninsulated or an isolated, where noted, ground bus inside each
208Y/120 volt panelboard enclosure and elsewhere where noted on the Drawings.
Furnish an isolated full size neutral bus, insulated where noted, in all panels where the
neutral is present. All multi -section panelboards shall be connected with copper cable,
with an ampacity meeting or exceeding the main bus ampacity. All distribution and
120/208 volt panels shall have a ground bus.
C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16160-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
1 . Circuit breakers shall be of the molded case, thermal magnetic type equipped with
individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front faces of all
circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Tripped indication shall be clearly
shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF".
Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will
be required to add breakers. Circuit breakers shall bolt in to the main (except
Square D I -line panels which shall have plug-in breakers) and bolt on to the main
bus for 208/120 volt panels. All 2 and 3-pole breakers shall have common trips.
2. All single -pole circuit breakers shall be either ambient or case -compensated
(calibrated 40°C) thermal -magnetic type breakers, with inverse time delay on
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip on short circuits. (Twin, tandem and
half-size single -pole breakers and breaker tie handles are not acceptable.) All
multiple breakers shall be common trip, thermal -magnetic type, calibrated 40°C.
3. The breakers shall employ quick -make, toggle mechanism for manual operation,
as well as automatic operation. The breakers shall have provisions for manually
testing the tripping mechanism with the breaker removed from the panel.
Automatic tripping shall be indicated by the breaker handle assuming a clearly
distinctive position from the manual "on" and "off positions.
4. Circuit breakers used as switches in 120 volt fluorescent lighting circuits, the
circuit breakers shall be approved for such switching duty and shall be marked
"S'WD„
5. Provide panelboard circuit breakers with conventional interrupting capacity unless
otherwise shown, but in no case less than the following symmetrical amperes
RMS:
Voltage (volts) Interrupting Capacity
1201208 10,000 AIC
6. Ground fault interrupter (GFI) circuit breakers, where shown, shall be 5 ma
ground fault trip and shall include a TEST button.
7. Provide distribution panel circuit breakers with conventional interrupting
capacity, high interrupting capacity, integral current limiters or current limiting as
shown. Circuit breakers shall be conventional interrupting capacity unless
otherwise shown, but in no case less than the following symmetrical amperes
RMS:
A
FRAME SIZE/
VOLTAGE
1 OOAF/240V
225AF/240V
400AF/240V
600AF/240V
CONVENTIONAL
INTERRUPTING
CAPACITY
10,000 AIC
10,000 AIC
42,000 AIC
42,000 AIC
9. Breakers 600 ampere frame and above shall be equipped with solid-state trip
complete with built-in current transformers, solid-state trip unit and flux transfer
shunt trip.
D. Neutral: Provide 200% neutrals for all panel connected to k rated transformers.
E. Lugs: Panelboards and distribution panels shall be provide, main overcurrent devices,
and feed-thru lugs as noted on the Drawings. Lugs shall be suitable for use with the
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16160-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
cable size and material installed. Panel wireways shall provide adequate space for
wiring to all lugs.
F. Spaces: Where space for future breakers is shown, panelboard enclosure shall include
removable blank panels or knockouts to allow installation of future breakers and
panelboard busing shall be complete, including all required connectors.
G. Integrated Equipment Rating: Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short-
circuit rating equal to the interrupting rating of the weakest overcurrent device installed
in the panelboard. This rating shall equal or exceed the rating shown on the Drawings,
where applicable. Such ratings shall have been established by tests on similar
panelboards with the circuit breakers installed.
H. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized steel enclosures, NEMA Type 1 for indoor
locations, NEMA 3R for outdoor locations, minimum 16 gauge thickness, minimum
20" width, with multiple knockouts, unless shown otherwise. Provide doors with
concealed hinges, spring -loaded door pulls, flush lock and key, all panelboard
enclosures keyed alike, equipped with interior circuit directory frame, card and clear
plastic covering for all lighting and appliance panelboards. Door and trim shall be
painted with manufacturers standard gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor. Trim on
flush mounted panels shall have concealed fasteners. Trims for panelboards installed in
kitchens shall be stainless steel. Enclosure shall be for recessed or surface mounting as
shown. Enclosures shall be fabricated by the same manufacturer as panelboards to be
enclosed. Multi -section panelboards shall have separate covers and trims.
I. Distribution Panel Enclosures: Panel cabinets shall be code gauge galvanized steel,
NEMA 1 for indoor locations and NEMA 3R for outdoor locations. A door covering the
breaker operating handles shall be provided on all flush mounted breaker panels.
Cabinets shall be of sufficient size to allow a width of gutter to conform with
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Standards. Panel trim shall be full finish sheet steel
finished with two coats of paint, the first being a prime coat and the second a finish coat
of light gray lacquer. The panel interior assembly shall be dead front with panel front
removed. Main circuit breakers shall have barriers on five sides. The barrier in front of
the main breaker shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus
structure opposite the mains shall have barriers. Trim on flush mounted panels shall
have concealed fasteners. Enclosure shall be for recessed or surface mounting as shown.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES:
A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures as shown, including electrical connections,
in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements
of NEC, the NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to
ensure that products serve the intended function.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16160-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and
raceways installation work. Verify that wall thickness is adequate where recessed panels
are shown.
C. Anchoring: Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces ensuring that they
are permanently and mechanically secured.
D. Concrete Pads: Install each floor -mounted power distribution panelboard on a
reinforced concrete housekeeping pad. The housekeeping pad shall extend 3" beyond
the housing of the distribution panel, unless otherwise shown. Furnish the exact position
of any block outs, dimensions, and location of the housekeeping pads in time to prevent
delay of the concrete work. Refer to Section 161 00, "Basic Materials and Methods",
for additional requirements.
E. Directory Card: Type the enclosure's circuit directory card upon completion of work.
Refer to Section 16100 for additional requirements.
F. Circuit Arrangement: Branch circuit connections to 3-phase lighting and appliance
panelboards shall be arranged such that when two or three circuits are run with a
common neutral, each circuit shall be connected to a different phase unless otherwise
shown. At the completion of the electrical system this Contractor shall check each phase
of all panels under full load and arrange so that all phases shall carry the same load as
near as possible.
3.02 TESTING:
General: Prior to energization, check for continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION:
A. Refer to Section 16100 for applicable painting, nameplates, and labeling requirements.
END OF SECTION 16160
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16160-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
SECTION 16170 - SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included: Provide safety and disconnect switch work as shown, scheduled,
indicated and as specified.
B. Types: The types of safety and disconnect switches required for the project include,
but are not limited to, equipment disconnects and motor -circuit disconnects.
1.03 STANDARDS:
A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with
the following standards:
1. 1. Federal Spec. W-S-865 Switch, Box (Enclosed), Surface -Mounted.
2. 2. NEMA KS I Enclosed Switches.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced
by one of the following:
1. Square D Company.
2. General Electric Company.
3. Cutler Hammer Corporation.
4. Siemens.
B. UL-approved: Safety and disconnect switches must have Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc., approval and bear the UL label.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Cut sheets of the safety and disconnect switches with ratings, voltage, poles,
capacity, horsepower, short circuit rating, and all associated accessories
clearly indicated.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16170-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
2. Include dimensioned drawings of electrical safety and disconnect switches
which have a rating of 100 amperes or larger, showing the accurately scaled
switches, their layout, and relation to associated equipment.
3. Additional information as required in Section 16002.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver switches individually wrapped in factory -fabricated water-resistant type
containers.
B. Handle switches carefully to avoid damage to material components, enclosure and
finish. Damaged switches shall not be installed on project.
C. Store switches in a clean and dry space and protect from weather.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
A. General: Provide heavy-duty type, dead front, sheet steel -enclosed, surface -mounted
safety switches of the type and size indicated. Safety switches shall be rated for the
voltage of the circuit in which they are installed. Safety switches used as motor
disconnects shall be horsepower rated for the motor served.
B. Switch Mechanism:
1. 1. Safety switches shall be quick -make quick -break type with permanently
attached arc suppressors and constructed such that switch blades are visible in
the "OFF" position with the door open. The operating handle shall be an
integral part of the box, not of the cover. Switch shall have provision to
padlock in the "OFF" position. Safety switches shall have a cover interlock to
prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door when the switch mechanism
is in the "ON" position or closing of the switch mechanism when the switch
door is open.
2. 2. Cover interlock shall have an override mechanism to permit switch
inspection by authorized personnel. All current -carrying parts shall be
constructed of high conductivity copper with silver-plated switch contacts.
Lugs shall be copper -plated or aluminum, suitable for copper or aluminum
cable and front removable. Switch blades shall be copper.
C. Fusing: Provide fusible safety switches where indicated. Fuse clips shall be positive
pressure rejection type fuse clips suitable for use with UL Class R fuses.
D. Neutral: Provide safety switches with number of switched poles as indicated. Where
a neutral is present in the circuit, provide a solid neutral with the safety switch.
E. Enclosures:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16170-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
1. All safety switches installed in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 general
- purpose enclosures unless otherwise shown.
2. Safety switches installed in exterior locations or where exposed to outdoor
conditions shall be NEMA 3R (water resistant) unless otherwise shown or
specified.
3. Safety switches installed in wet areas and in kitchens shall be NEMA 4
(stainless steel), unless otherwise shown.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which safety and disconnect
switches are to be installed and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A. General: Install safety and disconnect switches where shown, in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of the NEC, the
NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that
products serve the intended function.
B. Location: Provide safety switches where shown and at each motor which is out -of -
sight -of or greater than 50' from the switch or panel from which the motor circuit is
fed, unless another NEC complying disconnecting method is utilized.
C. Supports: Provide all safety and disconnect switches with galvanized angle or other
suitable supports where mounting on wall or other rigid surface is impractical.
Switches shall not be supported by conduit alone. Where safety and disconnect
switches are mounted on equipment served, the switch shall not inhibit removal of
any service panels or interfere with any required access areas.
D. Disconnect Switches: Install disconnect switches used with motor -driven
appliances, motors, and controllers within sight of the controller position unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Coordination: Coordinate safety and disconnect switch installation work with
electrical raceway and cable work as necessary for proper interface.
3.03 TESTING:
A. General: Prior to energization, check for continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16170-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
3.04 IDENTIFICATION:
A. Refer to Section 16100, 'Basic Materials and Methods", for applicable painting,
B. nameplates, and labeling requirements.
END OF SECTION 16170
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16170-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
SECTION 16190 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
1 ; PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included: The extent of electrical connections for equipment is as shown and
scheduled, as indicated by the requirements of this Section, and as specified
elsewhere in these Specifications.
B. Types: The types of electrical connections required for the project include, but are
not limited to, the following:
I. Motors and equipment power connections.
2. Kitchen equipment power connections.
3. Contractor and Owner -furnished equipment power connections.
4. Miscellaneous control power connections.
5. Other equipment requiring power connections.
C. Work of Other Sections:
1. Refer to Section 16195, "Miscellaneous Electrical Controls and Control
Wiring", for miscellaneous electrical controls and control wiring.
2. Refer to other Divisions of these Specifications for specific individual
equipment electrical requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced
by one of the following:
1. AMP, Inc.
2. Burndy Corporation.
3. Cadweld.
4. 0. Z. Gedney Company.
5. General Electric Company.
6. Ideal Industries, Inc.
7. Mac Products, Inc.
8. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company.
9. Thomas & Betts Company.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16190-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
11 B. UL Label: All products shall be UL-labeled to the maximum extent possible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide a complete assembly of
materials, including, but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals
(lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat -shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties,
solderiess wire nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices
and terminations.
B. Raceways: Refer to Section 161 1 0, "Electrical Raceways and Fittings", and
Section 16112, "Electrical Boxes and Fittings".
C. Cable, Wire, and Connectors: Refer to Section 16120, "300/600 Volt Cable, Wire,
and Connectors".
D. Motor Starters and Safety Switches: Refer to Section 16155, "Motor Starters", and
Section 16170, "Safety and Disconnect Switches".
E. Terminals: Provide electrical terminals as instructed by the terminal manufacturer
for the intended application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT POWER CONNECTIONS:
A. All power connections to motors and equipment furnished by other Divisions shall
be made by this Division unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. This Division
shall provide and install all power wiring and shall make all final connections.
B. Refer to the Drawings, approved Shop Drawings and Division 14, Division 15, and
other applicable Divisions for required power connections to equipment and motors.
C. All motorized or electrically operated equipment will be set in place by the
furnishing Division with all integrally mounted starters, controls and disconnect
switches installed. The furnishing Division will furnish for installation and
connection to this Division all starters, controllers and disconnect switches which
are furnished with their equipment but not integrally mounted.
D. This Division shall furnish, install, and connect all required starters and disconnect
switches which are not provided with the served equipment. Where disconnect
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16190-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
switches are not provided with served equipment and are required by the NEC or
the local inspection department, then they shall be provided by the Electrical
Contractor.
E. This Division shall furnish and install all interconnecting power wiring and make all
connections ready for operation between motors, starters and control devices, as
required by wiring diagrams (on approved Shop Drawings) provided by the
Division furnishing the Equipment.
F. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, motors 112 hp and smaller shall be 120 or
277 volt, single phase, and shall be furnished with integral thermal overload
protection. Provide manual disconnect switches as required. Where motors are not
furnished with integral thermal overload protection, provide manual or magnetic
starters as required.
G. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, motors 3/4 hp size and larger shall be 3-
phase.
H. Motors 3/4 hp through 50 hp shall be furnished with "across -the -line", full -voltage
nonreversing (FVNR) magnetic starters, unless otherwise indicated or specified.
I. Motors 60 hp and larger shall be furnished with reduced voltage nonreversing
(RVNR) magnetic starters of the type indicated.
J. Where starters require disconnect switches in the immediate vicinity, combination
motor starters shall be used. Where starters are mounted on equipment served, the
switch shall not inhibit removal of any service panels or interfere with any required
access areas.
3.02 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT POWER CONNECTIONS:
A. All power connections to kitchen equipment furnished by under Division I I shall be
made by this Division unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. This Division shall
provide and install all power wiring and shall make all final connections.
B. Refer to the Drawings, approved Shop Drawings and Division I 1, for required
power connections to equipment and motors.
C. All kitchen equipment will be set in place by the furnishing Division with all
integrally mounted starters, controls and disconnect switches installed. The
furnishing Division will furnish for installation and connection to this Division all
starters, controllers and disconnect switches which are furnished with their
equipment but not integrally mounted.
D. This Division shall furnish, install and connect all required starters and disconnect
switches which are not provided with the served equipment. Where disconnect
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16190-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
switches are not provided with served equipment and are required by the NEC or
the local inspection department, then they shall be provided by the Electrical
Contractor.
E. This Division shall furnish and install all interconnecting power wiring and make all
connections ready for operation between equipment, starters and control devices, as
required by wiring diagrams (on approved Shop Drawings) provided by the
Division 11.
F. All connections to kitchen equipment shall be weatherproof. All flexible
connections shall be made using liquidtight flexible conduit. All boxes for
hardwired connections shall be gasketed FS type. All starters and safety switches
installed in the kitchen area shall have NEMA 4 stainless steel enclosures.
G. Where starters, disconnect switches, conduit boxes or other items are mounted
directly on the equipment served, the mounting location shall not inhibit removal of
any required service panels or interfere with any required access areas.
H. All receptacles mounted below counter height or in wet areas shall have
weatherproof coverplates.
I. Plug types on cord connected equipment shall be coordinated with the receptacle to
provide compatibility. Where the installed plug and receptacle are not compatible,
then this contractor shall be responsible for changing either the plug or receptacle as
required for compatibility.
J. All conduits shall terminate in conduit boxes on equipment where possible. A piece
of liquidtight flexible conduit not less than 12" long, shall be connected between the
conduit and the equipment. Where equipment is not provided with conduit boxes,
terminate the conduit in a suitable manner at the equipment.
K. Outlets of various types have been shown at equipment locations, but no indications
of exact locations or scope of work is intended on the accompanying Drawings. The
Contractor shall determine the exact location of all items:
1. From the applicable Drawings and Specifications and Shop Drawings of other
Divisions.
2. From the Contractors responsible for the equipment involved.
3. By actual measurements at the site.
4. From Division 11.
5. By direction from the Owner.
L. Prior to installation, coordinate power and control provisions for kitchen equipment
with approved kitchen equipment shop drawings. Where power and control
provisions are significantly different than those shown, notify the Engineer in
writing of the requirements. Where minor modifications to provisions are required,
they shall be made at no cost as a matter of job coordination.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16190-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
3.03 CONTRACTOR AND OWNER -FURNISHED EQUIPMENT POWER
CONNECTIONS:
A. All power connections to motors and equipment furnished by other Divisions or by
Owner shall be made by this Division unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. This
Division shall provide and install all power wiring and shall make all final
connections.
B. Refer to the Drawings, approved Shop Drawings, other applicable Divisions and
Owner- fumished equipment drawings for required power connections to equipment
and motors.
C. All motorized or electrically operated equipment will be set in place by the
furnishing Division with all integrally mounted starters, controls, and disconnect
switches installed. The furnishing Division will furnish for installation and
connection to this Division all starters, controllers, and disconnect switches which
are furnished with their equipment but not integrally mounted.
D. This Division shall furnish, install, and connect all required starters and disconnect
switches which are not provided with the served equipment. Where disconnect
switches are not provided with served equipment and are required by the NEC or
the local inspection department, then they shall be provided by the Electrical
Contractor.
E. This Division shall furnish and install all interconnecting power wiring and make all
connections ready for operation between equipment, starters and control devices, as
required by wiring diagrams (on approved Shop Drawings) provided by the
Division furnishing the Equipment.
F. All connections to Contractor and Owner -furnished equipment shall be made in a
suitable manner.
G. Plug types on cord connected equipment shall be coordinated with the receptacle to
provide compatibility. Where the installed plug and receptacle are not compatible,
then this contractor shall be responsible for changing either the plug or receptacle as
required for compatibility.
H. Where starters, disconnect switches, conduit boxes, or other items are mounted
directly on the equipment served, the mounting location shall not inhibit removal of
any required service panels or interfere with any required access areas.
I. All conduits shall terminate in conduit boxes on equipment where possible. A piece
of flexible or liquidtight flexible conduit (Refer to Section 161 1 0) not less than 12"
long nor more than 24" long, shall be connected between the conduit and the
equipment. Where equipment is not provided with conduit boxes, terminate the
conduit in a suitable manner at the equipment.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16190-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
J. Outlets of various types have been shown at equipment locations, but no indications
of exact locations or scope of work is intended on the accompanying Drawings. The
Contractor shall determine the exact location of all items:
1. From the applicable Drawings and Specifications and Shop Drawings of the
Divisions furnishing the equipment.
2. From the Contractors responsible for the equipment involved.
3. By actual measurements at the site.
4. By direction from the Owner.
K. Prior to installation, coordinate power, rough -in and control provisions shown on
the drawings for radiology equipment with the provisions shown on approved Shop
Drawings for the furnished radiology equipment. Where the power, rough -in and
control requirements are less than or equal to those shown, then modifications to
power, rough -in and control provisions shown shall be made at no cost as a matter
of job coordination. Where power and control requirements are in excess of those
shown, notify the Engineer in writing of the requirements.
L. Prior to installation, coordinate power and control provisions for Contractor and
Owner- furnished equipment with approved equipment shop drawings. Where
power and control provisions are significantly different than those shown, notify the
Engineer in writing of the requirements. Where minor modifications to provisions
are required, they shall be made at no cost as a matter of job coordination.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS:
A. General: Install electrical connections as shown, in accordance with applicable
portions of the NECA's "Stand and of Installation", and recognized industry
practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions.
B. Conductors: Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors
in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring
diagrams. Wherever possible, match conductors of the electrical connection for
proper interface between the electrical supply and the installed equipment.
C. Splice Insulation: Cover splices with electrical insulation equivalent to, or of a
higher rating than, insulation on the conductors being spliced.
D. Appearance: Prepare cables and wires by properly cutting and stripping covering,
jacket and insulation to ensure a uniform and neat appearance where cables and
wires are terminated.
E. Routing: Trim cables and wires to be as short as practicable and arrange routing to
facilitate inspection, testing, and maintenance.
F. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Conduit: Provide PVC -coated rigid steel conduit
and fittings where required for highly -corrosive atmospheres.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16190-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
G. Flexible Conduit: Provide flexible conduit, minimum 18" for connection of lighting
fixtures and other electrical equipment connections, where subject to movement and
vibration.
H. Liquidtight Conduit: Provide liquidtight flexible conduit, minimum 18" for
connection of all motors and for other electrical equipment where subject to
movement and vibration, and also where subjected to one or more of the following
conditions:
1. Exterior location.
2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
3. Corrosive atmosphere.
4. Subjected to water spray.
5. Subjected to dripping oil, grease, or water.
6. Kitchens.
I. Conduit Location: All horizontal runs of conduit (not strapped to walls) shall be
above Thigh, with a vertical drop to equipment. Conduit blocking walk and service
space will not be acceptable and will require relocation. Conduit on and adjacent to
equipment shall be located to allow free access to all removable panels for
equipment service.
J. Motor Connections: Where possible, terminate conduit in conduit boxes at motors.
Where motors are not provided with conduit boxes, terminate the conduit in a
suitable condulet, and make motor connections. All conduit passing through the
housing on connected equipment shall pass through a cleanly cut hole protected
with an approved grommet.
K. Coordination: Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with
equipment installation work.
L. Identification: Refer to Section 1 61 00, 'Basic Materials and Methods", for
identification of electrical power supply conductor terminations with markers
approved as to type, color, letter, and marker size by the Architect. Affix markers at
each point of termination, as close as possible to each point of connection.
END OF SECTION 16190
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16190-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
SECTION 16195 - MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND CONTROL
WIRING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included:
1. This Division shall furnish miscellaneous 120 volt control power circuits and
control wiring as required for systems and equipment furnished by this and
other Divisions. This control power and control wiring shall be furnished by
this Division for all systems and equipment and where shown on the Drawings
or approved Shop Drawings by the Division furnishing the system or
equipment.
2. In general, all starters and controllers for non 120 volt equipment and motors
shall be furnished with control power transformers, and control power circuits
will not be required. Where control power transformers are not furnished, then
120 volt control power circuits shall be furnished by this Division.
3. Miscellaneous Control Power and Control Wiring: Systems and devices
requiring control power circuits and control wiring include, but are not limited
to:
a. Automatic temperature control systems control power.
b. Domestic hot water circulating pumps.
C. Sprinkler alarms.
d. Contractor -furnished equipment controls.
e. Owner -furnished equipment.
f. Landscape sprinkler systems.
g. Lighting and power control relays.
h. Remote annunciator, alarm panels, alarms and signaling
devices/systems.
i. Start/Stop stations where required for remote motor controllers.
j. Additional control power, control wiring and safety devices as shown,
specified, or required.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16195-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND
CONTROL WIRING
A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with these specifications and produced
by one of the following:
1. Relays:
a. Automatic Switch Company.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING AND RACEWAYS:
A. Line Voltage Control Wiring: This wiring shall be as specified in Section 16120,
"300/600 Volt Cable, Wire and Connectors".
B. Low Voltage Control Wiring: This wiring shall be as specified in Section 16120
except that conductors shall consist of a multi -conductor jacketed cable whenever
possible.
C. Raceways: Raceways for line voltage and low voltage control wiring shall be as
specified in Section 161 10, "Electrical Raceways and Fittings", and Section 16112,
"Electrical Boxes and Fittings".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND
CONTROL WIRING:
A. General: Install miscellaneous electrical control devices as shown, in accordance
with applicable portions of the NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized
industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions.
B. Requirements:
1. Miscellaneous control power circuits shall be obtained from spare breakers in
building normal power panels. Where emergency system control power is
required, or control power circuit requirements are large or significantly
greater than normal, notify the Engineer in writing,of the requirements.
2. All control devices which are part of the Security and Life Safety Systems and
for equipment and devices served with emergency power shall have their
control power derived from an emergency source.
3. Control wiring shown on the Drawings or specified in other Division 16
sections is not an inclusive listing of all control wiring required on the project.
All required control wiring, unless noted otherwise herein, shall be furnished
and installed by the Division 16 Contractor.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16195-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND
CONTROL WIRING
_ 4. HVAC temperature control wiring is specified and provided under Division 15
and is included in the Work of that Division. The only HVAC temperature
control wiring and work included in the Work of this Division is providing
120 volt control power circuits for temperature controls , smoke control etc
(see Miscellaneous Control Power hereinabove).
C. Conductors: Connect electrical conductors to miscellaneous electrical control
devices in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and
wiring diagrams. Wherever possible, match conductors of the electrical connection
for proper interface between the electrical supply and the installed equipment.
D. Contactors and Relays: Install contactors and relays mounted in panelboards or
individual enclosures as shown and be complete, including all control wiring and
devices.
E. Lighting Controls: Install lighting controls as shown. Time program settings shall be
as directed by the Architect.
F. Line and Low Voltage Control Wiring: Line and low voltage control wiring shall be
installed in a suitable raceway.
G. Connections: Refer to Section 16190, "Electrical Connections for Equipment", for
connections to equipment.
H. Number Code/Color Code: Code all control power and control power conductors
appropriately for future identification and servicing.
END OF SECTION 16195
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16195-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND
CONTROL WIRING
SECTION 16401 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. General: The electrical service shall be at 208/120 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz,
and shall be obtained from Entergy hereafter called "The Power Company".
B. Power Company Data: Obtain from The Power Company all required information
and installation standards to furnish a complete electrical service installation and
make all arrangements required to obtain electrical service.
C. Responsibilities: Division 16 shall be responsible for determining which equipment
and labor is by The Power Company, which is by Division 16, and shall be
responsible for any charges by The Power Company for service installation. Make
all arrangements necessary to obtain electrical service from The Power Company.
Obtain all necessary standards and detail drawings from The Power Company
before construction of service equipment is commenced. The Power Company
service data as shown is accurate as determined on the date of Specification issue
and shall be verified as specified hereinabove. All materials, construction, and
methods of installation of service equipment shall comply with The Power
Company requirements, including, but not limited to: Metering conduit, grounding
system, and instrument transformer cabinets. Service equipment shall be grounded
per the National Electrical Code (NEC) and as indicated on the Drawings and in the
Specifications.
D. Utility Service Equipment: Service for the building will be available from a pad
mounted transformer by The Power Company. Service metering and CT Can shall
be provided by local power company.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
Shop Drawings submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Dimensioned drawing showing exact provisions for service.
2. Additional information as specified in Section 16002.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16401-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
2.OL GENERAL:
A. Service Data: The Power Company service data is accurate as determined on the
date of Specification issue and shall be verified as described in Paragraph 1.02,
hereinabove.
2.02 PRIMARY SERVICE:
A. Power Company: The Power Company shall provide primary overhead service
lines, section of underground primary conduit, transformer, cables, splices,
terminations, CT Can, and meter.
B. Approval: The Power Company shall approve the underground primary conduit
installation prior to concrete encasement.
2.03 TRANSFORMERS:
A. General: Division 16 shall provide all necessary provisions for service as required
by The Power Company, including, but not limited to, pad for transformer,
grounding rods, grounding conductors, conduits per power company standards.
B. Power Company: The Power Company shall provide pad mounted transformer, Ct
Can, meter, protective relaying and connections to the wire and conduit that
continue to the MDP.
2.04 SECONDARY SERVICE CABLE:
A. General: Division 16 shall provide secondary underground cable and conduit to the
main service panel main breaker.
2.05 METERING EQUIPMENT AND PROVISIONS:
A. General: Division 16 shall provide metering conduits, CT Can, with metering
provisions as directed by The Power Company.
B. Power Company: The Power Company shall provide metering conduits, metering
equipment, CT Can, and interconnecting wiring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16401-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
A. Standards: The complete installation of the service entrance provisions shall comply
with the standards and requirements of The Power Company and with requirements
of other Sections of this Division.
B. Correction: Any failure to meet these standards and requirements shall be corrected
to the satisfaction of The Power Company without any additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 16401
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16401-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
ISECTION 16501 - LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included: The extent of lighting fixture work is as shown and scheduled, as
indicated by the requirements of this Section, and as specified elsewhere in these
Specifications. All materials, accessories, and any other equipment necessary for
the complete and proper installation of all lighting fixtures included in this Contract
shall be furnished by the Contractor.
B. Types: The types of lighting fixtures required for the project may include, but are
not limited to:
1. Fluorescent fixtures.
2. High -intensity -discharge (HID) fixtures.
3. Exit signs.
4. Fluorescent emergency battery pack units.
C. The applications of lighting fixtures required for the project include, but are not
limited to:
1. General lighting'.
2. Emergency, egress and exit lighting.
3. Outdoor area lighting.
D. Specifications and scale drawings are intended to convey the salient features,
function and character of the fixtures only, and do not undertake to illustrate or set
forth every item or detail necessary for the work.
E. Minor details, not usually indicated on the drawings nor specified, but that are
necessary for the proper execution and completion of the fixtures, shall be included,
the same as if they were herein specified or indicated on the Drawings.
F. The Owner shall not be held responsible for the omission or absence of any detail,
construction feature, etc. which may be required in the production of the fixtures.
The responsibility of accurately fabricating the fixtures to the fulfillment of this
specification rests with the Contractor.
1.03 STANDARDS:
16501-1
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with
the following standards:
1. 1. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and
Structures.
2. NEMA WD1 General -Purpose Wiring Devices.
3. ANSI C82.1 Specification for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts.
4. NEMA LEHID Lighting System Noise Criterion (LS-NC) Ratings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Provide products produced by manufacturers as shown or scheduled
for each type of lighting fixture. Identification in the fixture schedule by means of
manufacturers' names and catalog numbers is to facilitate establishment of basic
features, construction and performance standards. Any substitutions must, in the
opinion of the Engineer, meet or exceed these standards. Provide products
complying with these specifications and produced by one of the following for
ballasts, lamps, and battery back-up units:
1. Ballast Manufacturers:
a. Advance Transformer Company.
b. MagnaTek Triad Industries.
2. Lamps:
a. General Electric Company.
b. GTE Sylvania.
C. North American Phillips Lighting Corporation.
3. Emergency Battery Back-up Units:
a. Bodine.
b. Chloride.
C. Lithonia.
B. CBM Label: Provide fluorescent ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast
Manufacturers' Association (CBM) standards and carry the CBM mark on the label.
C. Conformance: Fixtures shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications.
D. Codes: Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revision of
the National Electrical Code and any applicable federal, state, and local codes and
regulations.
E. UL-listing: All fixtures shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the
appropriate and current requirements of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
"Standards for Safety," and others as they may be applicable. A UL-listing shall be
provided for each fixture type, and the appropriate label or labels shall be affixed to
each fixture in a position concealing it from normal view.
F. Warranty: All ballasts shall be provided with a two (2) year parts and labor
warranty from the date of project acceptance.
16501-2
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following-.
1. Submit manufacturer's data on interior and exterior lighting fixtures in booklet
form, with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled by luminaire "type" in
alphabetical order, with the proposed fixture and accessories clearly labeled.
Ballast and lamp product data shall accompany fixture submittals.
2. Submit dimensioned drawings and performance data including coefficients of
utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height ratio, efficiency
and visual comfort probability.
3. Submit details of fixture mounting including frames, trims, canopies, support
requirements, and other data pertinent to fixture installation.
4. Submit complete photometric data for each fixture, including optical
performance and efficiency rendered by independent testing laboratory
developed according to methods of U.S.A. Illuminating Engineering Society
as follows:
a. For down and semi -down lights used for general illumination: (1)
Coefficients of utilization; (2) Visual Comfort Probability data
(fluorescent only) for 100 footcandles, in a 20' by 20' room with 10'
ceiling and luminaires lengthwise with reflectances of 80% (ceiling),
50% (walls), and 20% (floor); (3) Candlepower data, presented
graphically and numerically, in 5 degree increments (O degrees, 5
degrees, 10 degrees, etc.). If light output is only bilaterally symmetric,
data also developed for up and down quadrants normal, parallel, and at
22-1/2 degrees, 45 degrees, and 67-1/2 degrees to lamps; and (4) Zonal
lumens stated numerically in 10 degree increments and at angles to
lamps as described above.
b. Supply photometric data as described above for any fixture offered in
substitution for a specified fixture.
5. Additional information as required in Section 16002.
B. In the event that the lighting luminaire(s) specified are substituted, the Engineer has
the final decision with determining if the luminaire(s) are equal or better than what
was specified.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver lighting fixtures individually wrapped in factory -fabricated fiberboard type
containers.
B. Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent breakage, denting and scoring the
fixture finish. Do not install damaged lighting fixtures.
C. Store lighting fixtures in a clean, dry space and protect from the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
16501-3
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
A. General- Provide lighting fixtures, of the size, type and rating indicated on the
Lighting Fixture Schedule, complete with, but not necessarily limited to, lamps,
lampholders, reflectors, diffusers, louvers, wire guards, tube guards, ballasts, fuses,
starters, and wiring. Fixtures shall be furnished with all required accessories and
trim, including hold-down clips, as required for a complete installation in the
ceiling -type shown on the Architectural Drawings.
1. Lighting equipment shall be complete, wired, and including supporting means,
such as plaster frames, supports, hangers, canopies, sockets, holders; current
or voltage modifiers, such as ballasts, starters; light control materials;
specifically diffusers, louvers, lenses, reflectors and refractors; and lamps.
2. Lighting fixtures shall be designed for highest relative efficiency and service.
Maintenance to be simple and relamping possible without use of special tools.
3. Lighting fixtures shall be constructed and installed in accordance with local
building codes and shall bear label of approved testing agent. Materials shall
be new and of best grade of approved manufacturing standards. Workmanship
shall be of highest order.
4. Recessed fixtures shall be provided with frames appropriate construction
encountered.
5. Ferrous fixture components shall receive treating to assure corrosion
resistance and paint adherence. Aluminum parts, unless made of alloys having
inherent corrosion resistance, shall be anodized or coated with oxidation -
preventing treatment. Finish shall be baked enamel where color is indicated.
6. Plastic shall be acrylic.
B. General Fixture Construction:
1. All materials, accessories, and other related fixture parts shall be new and free
from defects which in any manner may impair their character, appearance,
strength, durability and function, and effectively protected from any damage
or injury from the time of fabrication to the time of delivery and until final
acceptance of the work.
2. Fabricate fixture enclosures with a minimum of No. 22 gauge cold rolled
sheet steel. Enclosures may be constructed of other metals, provided they are
equivalent in mechanical strength, and acceptable to the Engineer.
3. All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks and dents, and shall have
accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required
metal. All intersections and joints shall be formed true of adequate strength
and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion during shipping, installation,
and while in normal use.
4. Housings shall be so constructed that all electrical components are easily
accessible and replaceable without removing fixtures from their mountings, or
disassembly of adjacent construction.
5. All custom light fixtures shall be thoroughly tested in Manufacturer's shop
prior to shipment to ensure mechanical and electrical integrity.
6. All fixtures shall be completely wired at the factory.
7. If ceiling system requires, each recessed and semi -recessed fixture shall be
furnished with a mounting frame or ring compatible with the ceiling in which
16501-4
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
they are to be installed. The frames and rings shall be one piece or constructed
'
with electrically -welded butt joints, and of sufficient size and strength to
sustain the weight of the fixture.
8.
Fixture to be sealed against light leaks between ceiling trims of recessed and
semi -recessed lighting equipment and the ceilings. If fixture is used in
partially transparent ceiling, fixtures to be sealed against light leaks above the
ceiling line.
9.
Yokes, brackets and supplementary supporting members needed to mount
lighting fixtures to carrier channels or other suitable ceiling members shall be
provided as required.
10.
Fixtures for use outdoors or in areas designated as wet locations shall be
suitably gasketed to prevent the entrance of moisture. Provide approved wire
mesh screens for ventilation openings. Damp location fixtures to be of
corrosion resistant parts and hardware.
�. 11.
In the application and mounting condition specified, fixtures and ballasts must
operate within the temperature limits of their design and as specified by
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
12.
Each lighting fixture which has a beam angle adjustment shall have reliable
angle locking device capable of long and continuous use.
13.
Each light fixture which has a spread lens shall contain lens orientation
locking device which will insure that lens orientation is not disturbed during
lamp replacement and fixture cleaning.
14.
All lamp sockets in lighting fixtures shall be suitable for the specified lamps
and shall be set so that lamps are positioned in optically correct relation to all
lighting fixture components. If adjustable socket positions are provided,
socket should be preset in factory for the specified lamp . If different socket
positions are specified for various types of the same fixture, sockets shall be
preset for each type, and cartons marked accordingly.
C. Reflectors and Trims:
1. Reflectors, reflector cones and visible trim of all lighting fixtures shall not be
installed until completion of plastering, ceiling tile work, painting and general
clean-up. They shall be carefully handled to avoid scratching or finger-
printing and shall be, at the time of acceptance by the Owner, completely
clean.
2. All Alzak parabolic cones shall be guaranteed against discoloration for a
minimum of 10 years, and, in the event of premature discoloration, shall be
replaced at the expense of the manufacturer for both materials and the cost of
labor.
3. Aluminum reflectors shall be finished specular, semispecular, or diffuse as
specified and shall meet or exceed Alzak specifications. Minimum
requirements for reflector finishes for interior and exterior service shall be as
follows:
D. Lenses:
1. Glass used for lenses, refractors, and diffusers in HID lighting fixtures shall be
tempered for impact and heat resistance; the glass shall be crystal clear with a
transmittance of not less than 88%. For exterior fixtures use tempered
16501-5
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
Borosilicate glass Corning #7740. For fixtures with a radiant energy of 4.16
watts per square inch or greater, directly exposed to the elements and aimed
above the horizontal, use Vycor glass.
2. Where optical lenses are used, they shall be free from spherical and chromatic
aberrations and other imperfections which may hinder the functional
performance of the lenses.
3. All lenses, louvers, or other light diffusing elements shall be removable, but
positively held so that hinging or other normal motion will not cause them to
drop out.
4. All lenses shall be clean and free of dust at the time of substantial completion.
E. Lamp Holders:
1. Fluorescent:
a. Body: White urea plastic.
b. Contacts: Phosphor bronze.
2. High Intensity Discharge:
a. Body: Porcelain.
b. Screw Shell: Nickel -plated brass, prelubricated with silicone compound.
C. Contacts: Spring -loaded nickel -plated phosphor bronze.
3. Lamp holders in lighting fixtures shall be suitable for indicated lamps and
shall be positioned to place lamps in optically correct locations in relation to
fixture components. If adjustable socket positions are provided, socket should
be present in factory for lamp specified. If different socket positions are
specified for same fixture, sockets shall be preset for each type, and cartons
marked accordingly.
4. Furnish lamp holders which are UL-listed and designed for proper lamp
operation and life. Outdoor lamp -holders shall be neoprene-gasketed and
compression type. Lamp holders to be appropriate to the specified lamp.
F. Finishes:
1. Painted Surfaces: Synthetic enamel, with acrylic, alkyd, epoxy, polyester, or
polyurethane base, light stabilized, baked on at 350" F minimum, catalytically
or photochemically polymerized after application.
2. White Finishes: Minimum of 85% reflectance.
3. Frames: Ceiling opening frames shall either be manufactured of nonferrous
metal, or be suitably rustproofed after fabrication.
4. Selection: Unless otherwise noted, finishes shall be as selected by the
Architect.
5. Undercoat: Except for stainless steel, provide ferrous metal surfaces with a
five stage phosphate treatment or other acceptable base bonding treatment
before final painting.
6. Unpainted Surfaces- Unpainted nonreflecting surfaces shall be satin -finished
and coated with a baked -on clear lacquer to preserve the surface. Where
aluminum surfaces are treated with an anodic process, the clear lacquer
coating may be omitted.
7. Unpainted Aluminum Surfaces: Finish interior aluminum trims with an
anodized coating of not less than 7 mg per square inch, of a color and surface
finish as selected by the Architect. Finish exterior aluminum and aluminum
16501-6
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
trims with an anodized coating of not less than 35 mg per square inch, of a
color and surface finish as selected by the Architect.
8. Porcelain Enamel Surfaces: Apply porcelain finishes smoothly. Finish shall be
not less than 7.5 mils thick of nonyellowing, white, vitreous porcelain enamel
with a reluctance of not less than 85%.
G. Fixture Fabrication:
1. General: Design components to allow for expansion and contraction for a
minimum ambient temperature range of 150'F (37.80C) without causing
buckling, excessive opening of joints or over -stressing of welds and fasteners.
2. Sheet Metal Work: Form metalwork to required shapes and sizes with true
curves, lines, and angles. All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks
and dents, and shall have accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the
gauges of required metal. Form intersections and joints true with adequate
strength and structural rigidity to prevent distortion after assembly. Provide
necessary rebates, lugs and brackets for assembly of units. Use concealed
fasteners wherever possible.
3. Welding: Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding.
Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of
exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of all welded flux and dress on all
exposed and contact surfaces.
4. Assembly: Accurately fit all parts of fixture. All joints in metal, not checked,
shall be brazed and not soldered. Joints shall be invisible. Where screws are
necessary for adjustment of applied ornament, they shall be concealed, as far
as possible, and finished to match other metalwork. Mill joints to a tight,
hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to
exclude water penetration. Assembled fixtures shall be well braced, and of
adequate strength to resist sagging or deforming.
H. Wiring:
1. Generally use SF-2 insulated wire for rewiring existing or new wire at
replicated light fixture. SF -I may be substituted in those locations where space
will not permit the installation of SF-2 and where the load is 6 amps or less.
insulation. Provide 600 volt insulation.
2. Factory -wire all fixtures. Provide leads no shorter than 1'-0" or as required to
suit the project application.
I. Connections:
1. Fasteners: Furnish fasteners of basic metal and alloy, matching finished color
and texture as metal being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. For steel and
aluminum fixtures, all screws, bolts, nuts, and other fastening and latching
hardware shall be cadmium or equivalent plated. For stainless steel fixtures,
all hardware shall be stainless steel. For bronze fixtures, all hardware shall be
bronze.
2. Welding Materials: Type and alloy of filler metal and electrolodes as
recommended by producer of metal to be welded, and as required for color
match, strength and compatibility in the fabricated units.
16501-7
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
J. Fixture Types:
1. Fluorescent Fixtures: Provide fluorescent fixtures of the type scheduled on the
Lighting Fixture Schedule, complete with ballasts and lamps of the type,
color, wattage and size scheduled.
a. Provide fluorescent fixtures with heavy white lampholders with definite
locking -in feature and contacts for proper lamp operation and life.
Outdoor lampholders shall be neoprene gasketed and compression type.
Sockets with open -circuit voltage over 300 volts to be safety type and
designed to open the supply circuit on lamp removal.
b. Fixture body parts, comprising fixture housing, reflectors, wire channels,
end plates, ballast housings, and similar body parts, shall be made of
extruded aluminum, galvanized Stampings, or bonderized steel, as
indicated. Housing end plates, socket bridges, reflectors, wiring channels
and ballast covers shall be die formed of not less than No. 22 gauge cold
rolled steel unless specified otherwise. Mount lamps on rapid -start
circuits within one inch (1") of grounded metal, one inch (1 ") wide
minimum and as long as the lamp. Wireways shall have adequate wiring
space, accessible after fixture installation. Construct fixtures so that
ballast may be serviced or replaced without removal of fixture housing
from adjacent construction. Housing shall be adequately ventilated
where required. Hardware shall have rustproof finish. Fixture bodies
shall be painted.
C. Temperatures around ballast and in fixture housing shall not exceed 90'C
with ambient room temperature at 270C.
d. Lighting fixtures shall have continuous light -seal gaskets seated in such
manner as to prevent any light leaking through any portion or around
any edge of the trim frame. Other sealing methods shall be individually
reviewed.
e. Diffusers shall be framed in hinged continuous assembly, except where
frameless units are indicated. Frameless units shall be removable
without tools and opened or closed by hand pressure. Diffuser frame
latches shall be spring- loaded or cam -operated.
f. Fluorescent fixture lenses, where required, shall be 1 00% extruded
virgin acrylic, prismatic -type, nominal 0. 1 25" thick, unless specified
otherwise.
g. Fluorescent troffers shall be shipped prelamped, unless noted otherwise.
h. Lay -in fixtures shall be provided with hold-down clips per the NEC,
minimum two clips per fixture. .
2. HID Fixtures: Provide HID fixtures as scheduled on the Lighting Fixture
Schedule, complete with fused ballast, lamps of the type, color, wattage, and
size scheduled, or as specified by the lighting fixture manufacturer.
a. On open metal halide fixtures, provide a shield below the lamp to
provide protection from lamp breakage at the end of lamp life.
b. Size and type of fuse shall be as recommended by the ballast
manufacturer. Holders shall be mounted inside the fixture junction box
for recessed fixtures, inside enclosed fixtures and inside pole base
handholes of pole -mounted fixtures. Holders installed in damp or wet
16501-8
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
locations shall be waterproof. Holders installed in bollards and pole
bases shall be of a breakaway disconnect design.
3. Exit Signs: Provide exit signs as scheduled on the Lighting Fixture Schedule.
Exit lighting fixtures shall meet the requirements of all applicable federal,
state, and local codes.
a. Exit signs shall have provisions for flashing upon loss of power or
flashing upon a signal from the building fire alarm system, where
specified, scheduled, or noted on the Drawings.
b. Exit sign battery packs shall meet all specified requirements for
Fluorescent Emergency Battery Backup Units as specified in Paragraph
2.01/N.
K. Ballasts:
1. Energy Saving Electronic Ballasts - Indoor Fluorescent: Provide UL-listed,
low noise, high power factor, rapid start, Class P, thermally protected, encased
solid state energy saving ballasts for all indoor lighting fixtures. Ballasts shall
operate at a frequency between 20 and 35 kHz and shall produce no visible
lamp flicker. Ballasts shall operate lamps on parallel or series circuits and
shall deliver normal lamp life. Lamp failure shall not affect ballast life.
Ballasts shall comply with all applicable FCC and NEMA standards
concerning EMI and RFI emissions and shall meet applicable ANSI standards
related to harmonic distortion and surge suppression. Provide ballasts with a
maximum power input wattage of 60 watts when installed in a surface -
mounted, 2-lamp, strip fixture with standard F34 lamps. Ballast power factor
shall be 90% or greater and input current harmonic content shall not exceed 1
0%. Electronic ballasts shall be Advance Mark V Electronic Integrated Circuit
Ballasts or an approved equal by Valmont, MagnaTek, Motorola or Universal.
Ballasts shall be mounted in fixtures so as to provide maximum sound
attenuation.
2. Ballasts - Outdoor Fluorescent- Provide low noise, high power factor, rapid
start, Class P, thermally protected, encased and potted, CBM-certified and
ETL-approved standard ballasts for all outdoor lighting fixtures and for all
indoor lighting fixtures in nonconditioned spaces where temperatures below-
60'F could occur, unless noted otherwise. Ballast shall have an "B" sound
rating, a 07 temperature rating.
3. Ballasts - HID: Provide UL-listed or CSA-approved high power factor,
constant wattage, regulated output/high reactance autotransfon-ner ballasts
with a -207 temperature rating.
a. Fabricate core laminations of precision welded diecut high quality steel.
Coils shall be of high temperature enameled magnetic wire and precision
wound. Coils shall be constructed using materials suitable for operation
at 180"C.
b. Capacitors shall be highest quality dry film or oil -filled type appropriate
to the service intended. Outdoor ballasts shall use capacitors with 900C
temperature rating.
C. Ballasts shall be mounted in or on lighting fixtures so as to provide
maximum sound attenuation. Provide optional reduced noise ballast
packaging where scheduled or shown on the Drawings.
16501-9
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
d. High pressure sodium vapor ballasts shall be the voltage stabilized
autotransformer type with not less than 90% power factor. Regulation:
10% variation in line voltage will vary lamp watts not more than -3%.
Ballast shall sustain line voltage drop of 20% without extinguishing
lamp.
e. Where ballasts are remote mounted from lamps, ballast packs provided
shall be capable of starting and operating lamps under the lamp/ballast
separation and temperature conditions encountered in the installation
proposed for the project.
L. Lamps:
1. General: Provide lamps of the wattage, type, color, and reflector lamps with
type of beams indicated, as shown, and as scheduled. Provide extended
service lamps that are inside frosted. Provide energy saving lamps for all
fluorescent fixtures installed in indoor conditioned locations, unless otherwise
noted. Incandescent and tungsten halogen lamps shall not be operated, other
than for initial testing, prior to final inspection, or shall be replaced
immediately prior to final inspection.
2. Maintenance Stock: Furnish a stock of replacement lamps in the original
cartons or packing sleeves, amounting to 10% (but not less than two lamps in
each case) of each type and size lamp used in each fixture type. Deliver
replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space.
M. Fluorescent Emergency Battery Backup Unit:
1. General: Provide fluorescent lighting fixtures with emergency battery backup
and integral emergency (self -powered) fluorescent power system for each
fixture as shown or scheduled on the Drawings. The integral fluorescent
emergency power system shall consist of a charger, high frequency inverter,
voltage disconnect and a sealed nickel cadmium battery designed for high
temperature operation.
2. Operation: During normal operation, when switched ac is present, the fixture
will be fully illuminated by means of the regular ballast. At the same time, the
emergency ballast is supplied with nonswitched ac, which transforms and
rectifies into a low do voltage to recharge the battery and maintain it in a fully
charged condition. When the nonswitched ac fails, a solid state voltage sensor
instantly turns on a high frequency inverter which illuminates one lamp in the
fixture at reduced light output for a minimum of 90 minutes. At the end of the
rated time a low voltage sensor disconnects the battery to prevent over j
discharging. When the ac nonswitched returns, the inverter switches off and
the battery starts recharging.
3. Battery: (internal) Sealed Nickel Cadmium - specially constructed to
withstand the high temperatures of ballast compartments. 15 year life
expectancy; 5 year unconditional and additional 5 year pro rata warranty.
Batteries shall not require periodic cycling or full discharge upon use to
maintain full battery capacity.
4. Power Requirements: 120 or 277 volts, 60 Hz, for the specified lighting
fixtures as indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedule.
16501-10
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
5. Output: Suitable for one F40 fluorescent tube, rapid or instant start, operating
at approximately 20% of its nominal light output.
6. Transfer: Solid state -type, automatically and instantly energizes lamp load
upon failure of the ac supply. Battery protection circuit automatically shuts
down lamp load when battery reaches full discharge.
7. Charger: All solid state, recharges battery in 12 to 24 hours, current limited
and short circuit proof.
8. Inverter: All solid state, 87% minimum efficiency uses a fully isolated and
protected electronic oscillator to produce an inaudible high frequency output.
Inverter will ignite lamp which has burned out under normal conditions.
9. Enclosure: 20 gauge steel painted black baked enamel. Mounts inside the
fixture adjacent to normal ballast. Flying leads provided for connections to
external test switch and pilot light which is supplied with the unit. Test switch
and pilot light shall be furnished to the lighting fixture manufacturer for
installation and connection into the fixture by the lighting fixture
manufacturer.
10. Warranty: All electronics shall carry a 3 year unconditional warranty. The
manufacturer of the unit shall provide three full cycles of discharge and
recharge before shipment and shall certify that the testing has been done.
PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
I. Install lighting fixtures of the types indicated, where shown, and at the
indicated heights in accordance with the fixture manufacturer's written
instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that the fixtures
comply with the requirements and serve the intended purposes. Do not scale
drawings for exact location of the lighting fixtures. In general, refer to the
architectural reflected ceiling plans for proper locations of lighting fixtures.
Fixtures shall exactly fit the type of ceiling system scheduled for the space.
2. Fixtures shown on the fixture schedule to be recessed shall be complete with
plaster frames, mounting yokes, rod hangers, etc., and/or any other accessories
required to fit the fixture to the ceiling construction. However, where ceiling
system cannot maintain said support, fixture supports shall be provided and
rigidly attached to the structural members of the building capable of carrying
the weight of the fixture plus 200 pounds at each support without sagging.
Provide the necessary supports for hangers located between structural
members.
B. Standards: Comply with NEMA standards, applicable requirements of the NEC
pertaining to installation of interior lighting fixtures, and with applicable portions of
the NECA's Standard of Installation".
C. Mounting: Fasten fixtures securely to the indicated structural support members of
the building. Provide separate supports or mounting clips for all recessed cP;l;no-
16501-11
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
mounted lighting fixtures in accordance with the NEC. Check to ensure that solid
pendant fixtures are plumb.
D. Appurtenances: Install each fixture properly and safely. Furnish and erect hangers,
rods, mounting brackets, supports, frames, and other equipment required.
E. Coordination: Furnish lighting fixtures complete with appurtenances required for
the proper, safe and distortion -free installation in the various surfaces in which they
appear. Determine surface types from the Architectural drawings.
F. Instructions: Each lighting fixture shall be packaged with complete instructions and
illustrations showing how to install. Install lighting fixtures in strict conformance
with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
G. Continuous Row Fixtures: Rigidly align all continuous rows of lighting fixtures for
true in -line appearance.
H. Pendant Fixtures: Install pendant lighting fixture plumb and at a height above the
finished floor as specified in the drawings. In cases where conditions make this
impractical, refer to the Architect for a decision. Use ball aligners and canopies on
pendant fixtures unless noted otherwise.
I. Suspended Fixtures:
1. Fixture studs shall be provided in all outlet boxes from which fixtures are
suspended. Fixtures shall not be suspended by means of cover or canopy
screws. Canopies shall completely cover the ceiling opening of all ceiling
fixtures except lay -in fixtures in T-bar construction, and trimless fixtures.
2. Surface -mounted lighting fixtures (i.e. exit lights, etc.) are installed on lay -in
panels in T-bar ceiling construction, the outlet boxes shall be rigidly supported
to the ceiling system using metal channels spanning perpendicular across the
T-bars and securely attached to each side of the outlet box.
J. Outlet Boxes: The locations indicated for outlet boxes of lighting fixtures are
diagrammatic. Outlets shall be located as required to coincide with suspension
hangers where they occur and with structural and architectural elements of the
building and shall be located in accordance with the Architectural Reflected Ceiling
Plan.
K. Fixture Designations: If a fixture -type designation is omitted, furnish fixture of the
same type as shown for rooms of similar usage. Verify with Engineer before
purchase and installation.
L. Concealment: Whenever a fixture or its hanger canopy is applied to a surface
mounted outlet box, a finishing ring shall be utilized as necessary to conceal the
outlet box.
M. Fusing: Refer to Section 16181, "250/600 Volt Fuses", for fusing for HID ballasts.
16501-12
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
3.02 CLEANUP:
A. At the time of final acceptance by the Owner, all lighting fixtures shall have been
thoroughly cleaned with materials and methods recommended by the
manufacturers, all broken parts shall have been replaced, and all lamps shall be
operative. Replace blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory fixtures as directed by
Architect.
3.03 MAINTENANCE:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining from his supplying lighting
manufacturers, for each type of lighting fixture, a recommended maintenance
information which shall be included in the Project Operating and Maintenance
Manuals. Minimum information shall include:
1. Tools required.
2. Types of cleaners to be used.
3. Replacement parts identification list.
4. Final as -built shop drawings.
3.04 WARRANTY:
A. The Contractor shall warrant all fixtures, their finishes, and all of their component
parts, except ballasts, to be free from defects for a period of one year from date of
acceptance, if operated within rated voltage range. Ballasts shall be warranted for 2
years. Fixture installation shall be warranted for one year from the date of
acceptance of the installation. During the warrantee period, repair or replacement of
defective materials and/or repair of faulty workmanship or installation shall be
provided at no cost to the Owner within IO days of written notice of the defects as
recorded and submitted by the Owner and/or Architect.
3.05 TESTING:
A. General: Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures and after building
circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate proper
operation of lighting fixtures and controls. When possible, correct malfunctioning
units at the site, then retest to demonstrate proper operation; otherwise, remove and
replace with new units and proceed with retesting.
B. Lamps: Install all new incandescent lamps just prior to final inspection. Fluorescent
and HID lamps may be utilized in the final finishing of the building. Replace
gaseous discharge lamps that are defective, show discolorations, or have exceeded
more than 1/3 of their rated life, as per Engineer/Owner's records, with new lamps
for final inspection.
C. Pre -inspection Tasks: Immediately before final inspection, thoroughly clean all
fixtures inside and out, including plastics and glassware, adjust all trim to properly
16501-13
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
fit adjacent surfaces, replace broken or damaged parts and lamp, and test all fixtures
for electrical and mechanical operation. Any fixtures or parts of fixtures, which
have begun to show signs of rust or corrosion at the time of completion of the job,
shall be removed and replaced with properly protected metal parts.
END OF SECTION 16501
16501-14
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS AND POLE
OCTOBER 20, 2006
SECTION 16625 - GENERATOR SET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SCOPE
A. Provide complete factory assembled generator set equipment with digital
(microprocessor -based) electronic generator set controls, digital governor, and
digital voltage regulator.
B. Provide factory test, startup by a supplier authorized by the equipment
manufacturer(s), and on -site testing of the system.
C. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant all equipment provided under this
section, whether or not is manufactured by the generator set manufacturer, so that
there is one source for warranty and product service. Technicians specifically
trained and certified by the manufacturer to support the product and employed by
the generator set supplier shall service the generator sets.
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The generator set installation and on -site testing shall conform to the requirements
of the following codes and standards, as applicable. The generator set shall include
necessary features to meet the requirements of these standards.
1. CSA 282, 1989 Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings
2. IEEE446 — Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power
Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications
3. NFPA37 —
4. NFPA70 — National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in
systems in compliance to Article 700, 701, and 702.
5. NFPA99 — Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities
6. NFPA110 —Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The generator set shall
meet all requirements for Level 1 systems. Level Iprototype tests required by
this standard shall have been performed on a complete and functional unit,
component level type tests will not substitute for this requirement.
B. The generator set and supplied accessories shall meet the requirements of the
following standards:
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
1. NEMA MG1-1998 part 32. Alternator shall comply with the requirements of
this standard.
2. UL142 — Sub -base Tanks
3. UL1236 — Battery Chargers
4. UL2200. The generator set shall be listed to UL2200 or submit to an
independent third party certification process to verify compliance as installed..
C. The control system for the generator set shall comply with the following
requirements.
1. CSA C22.2, No. 14 — M91 Industrial Control Equipment.
2. EN50082-2, Electromagnetic Compatibility — Generic Immunity
Requirements, Part 2: Industrial.
3. EN55011, Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference
Characteristics of Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment.
4. FCC Part 15, Subpart B.
5. IEC8528 part 4. Control Systems for Generator Sets
6. IEC Std 801.2, 801.3, and 801.5 for susceptibility, conducted, and radiated
electromagnetic emissions.
7. UL508. The entire control system of the generator set shall be UL508 listed
and labeled.
8. UL1236 —Battery Chargers. :+
D. The generator set manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality
Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in
design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO
9001.
1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Only approved bidders shall supply equipment provided under this contract.
Equipment specifications for this project are based on generator sets manufactured
by Cummins Power Generation with microprocessor -based controls. Equipment by
other suppliers that meets the requirement of this specification are acceptable, if
approved not less than 2 weeks before scheduled bid date. Proposals must include a
line by line compliance statement based on this specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERATOR SET
A. Ratings
1. The generator set shall operate at 1800 rpm and at a voltage of. 120/208Volts
AC, Three phase, 4wire, 60 hertz.
2. The generator set shall be rated at 50kW, 62.5 kVA at 0.8 PF, Standby rating,
based on site conditions of: Altitude 500ft. 120 degrees F (50 degrees C).
3. The generator set rating shall be based on emergency/standby service.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
B. Performance
- 1.
Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 0.5 percent for any constant load
between no load and rated load. Random voltage variation with any steady
load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5 percent.
2.
Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady
state rated load. Random frequency variation with any steady load from no
load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5%.
j 3.
The diesel engine -generator set shall accept a single step load of 100%
nameplate kW and power factor, less applicable derating factors, with the
engine -generator set at operating temperature.
4.
Motor starting capability shall be a minimum of 188 kVA. The generator set
shall be capable of recovering to a minimum of 90% of rated no load voltage
following the application of the specified kVA load at near zero power factor
applied to the generator set. Maximum voltage dip on application of this load,
considering both alternator performance and engine speed changes shall not
exceed 25%.
5.
The alternator shall produce a clean AC voltage waveform, with not more
than 5% total harmonic distortion at full linear load, when measured from line
to neutral, and with not more than 3% in any single harmonic, and no 3d order
harmonics or their multiples. Telephone influence factor shall be less than 40.
6.
The generator set shall be certified by the engine manufacturer to be suitable
+
for use at the installed location and rating, and shall meet all applicable
exhaust emission requirements at the time of commissioning.
1
C. Construction
1.
The engine -generator set shall be mounted on a heavy-duty steel base to
maintain alignment between components. The base shall incorporate a battery
tray with hold-down clamps within the rails.
2.
All switches, lamps, and meters in the control system shall be oil -tight and
dust -tight. All active control components shall be installed within a
UL/NEMA 3R enclosure. There shall be no exposed points in the control
(with the door open) that operate in excess of 50 volts.
D. Connections
1.
The generator set load connections shall be composed of silver or tin plated
copper bus bars, drilled to accept mechanical or compression terminations of
the number and type as shown on the drawings. Sufficient lug space shall be
provided for use with cables of the number and size as shown on the
drawings.
I` 2.
Power connections to auxiliary devices shall be made at the devices, with
required protection located at a wall -mounted common distribution panel.
3.
Generator set control interfaces to other system components shall be made on
a permanently labeled terminal block assembly. Labels describing connection
point functions shall be provided.
2.02 ENGINE AND ENGINE EQUIPMENT
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
16625-3
GENERATOR SET
The engine shall be diesel, 4 cycle, radiator and fan cooled. Minimum displacement shall be 199
cubic inches, with 4 cylinders. The horsepower rating of the engine at its minimum tolerance
level shall be sufficient to drive the alternator and all connected accessories. Two cycle engines
are not acceptable. Engine accessories and features shall include:
A. An electronic governor system shall provide automatic isochronous frequency
regulation. The governing system dynamic capabilities shall be controlled as a
function of engine coolant temperature to provide fast, stable operation at varying
engine operating temperature conditions. The control system shall actively control
the fuel rate and excitation as appropriate to the state of the generator set. Fuel rate
shall be regulated as a function of starting, accelerating to start disconnect speed,
accelerating to rated speed. The governing system shall include a programmable
warm up at idle and cooldown at idle function. While operating in idle state, the
control system shall disable the alternator excitation system.
B. Skid -mounted radiator and cooling system rated for full load operation in 122
degrees F (50 degrees C) ambient as measured at the alternator air inlet. Radiator
fan shall be suitable for use in a system with 0.5 in HZO restriction. Radiator shall
be sized based on a core temperature that is 20F higher than the rated operation
temperature, or prototype tested to verify cooling performance of the -
engine/radiator/fan operation in a controlled environment. Radiator shall be
provided with a duct adapter flange. The equipment manufacturer shall fill the
cooling system with a 50/50-ethylene glycol/water mixture prior to shipping.
Rotating parts shall be guarded against accidental contact.
C. Electric starter(s) capable of three complete cranking cycles without overheating.
D. Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure, lubrication oil pump.
E. Full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable spin -on canister elements and
dipstick oil level indicator.
F. An engine driven, mechanical, positive displacement fuel pump. Fuel filter with
replaceable spin -on canister element. Fuel cooler, suitable for operation of the
generator set at full rated load in the ambient temperature specified shall be
provided if required for operation due to the design of the engine and the
installation.
G. Replaceable dry element air cleaner with restriction indicator.
H. Flexible supply and return fuel lines.
I. Engine mounted battery charging alternator, 40-ampere minimum, and solid-state
voltage regulator.
J. Coolant heater
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
1. Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, coolant heater(s) for each
engine. Heater voltage shall be as shown on the project drawings. The coolant
heater shall be UL499 listed and labeled.
2. The coolant heater shall be installed on the engine with silicone hose
connections. Steel tubing shall be used for connections into the engine
coolant system wherever the length of pipe run exceeds 12 inches. The
coolant heater installation shall be specifically designed to provide proper
venting of the system. The coolant heaters shall provisions to isolate the
heater for replacement of the heater element without draining the coolant from
the generator set. The quick disconnect/automatic sealing couplers shall allow
the heater element to be replaced without draining the engine cooling system
or significant coolant loss.
3. The coolant heater shall be provided with a DC thermostat, installed at the
engine thermostat housing. An AC power connection box shall be provided
for a single AC power connection to the coolant heater system.
4. The coolant heater(s) shall be sized as recommended by the engine
manufacturer to warm the engine to a minimum of 104F (40C) in a 40F (4C)
ambient, in compliance with NFPA110 requirements, or the temperature
required for starting and load pickup requirements of this specification.
K. Provide vibration isolators, spring/pad type, quantity as recommended by the
generator set manufacturer. Isolators shall include seismic restraints if required by
site location.
L. Starting and Control Batteries shall be calcium/lead antimony type, 24 volt DC,
sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer, complete with battery cables
and connectors. The batteries shall be capable of a minimum of three complete 15-
second cranking cycles at 40F ambient temperature when fully charged.
M. Provide exhaust silencer(s) for each engine of size and type as recommended by the
generator set manufacturer and approved by the engine manufacturer. The mufflers
shall be critical grade. Exhaust system shall be installed according to the engine
manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes and standards.
N. A UL listed/CSA certified 10 amp voltage regulated battery charger shall be
provided for each engine -generator set. Charger shall include an Analog DC
voltmeter and ammeter, 12 hour equalize charge timer, and AC and DC fuses. The
charger may be located in an automatic transfer switch, or may be wall mounted, at
the discretion of the installer. Input AC voltage and DC output voltage shall be as
required. Chargers shall be equipped with float, taper and equalize charge settings.
Operational monitors shall provide visual output along with individual form C
contacts rated at 4 amps, 120 VAC, 30VDC for remote indication of-
1 . Loss of AC power - red light
2. Low battery voltage - red light
3. High battery voltage - red light
4. Power ON - green light (no relay contact)
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
16625-5
GENERATORSET
O. Provide a dual wall sub -base fuel storage tank with 188 gallons capacity. The tank
shall be constructed of corrosion resistant steel and shall be UL listed. The
equipment, as installed, shall meet all local and regional requirements for above
ground tanks.
2.03 AC GENERATOR
A. The AC generator shall be; synchronous, four pole, 2/3 pitch, revolving field, drip -
proof construction, single prelubricated sealed bearing, air cooled by a direct drive
centrifugal blower fan, and directly connected to the engine with flexible drive disc.
All insulation system components shall meet NEMA MG1 temperature limits for
Class H insulation system and shall be UL1446 listed. Actual temperature rise
measured by resistance method at full load shall not exceed 105 degrees Centigrade.
B. The generator shall be capable of delivering rated output (kVA) at rated frequency
and power factor, at any voltage not more than 5 percent above or below rated
voltage.
C. A permanent magnet generator (PMG) shall be included to provide a reliable source
of excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. The
PMG and controls shall be capable of sustaining and regulating current supplied to
a single phase or three phase fault at approximately 300% of rated current for not
more than 10 seconds.
D. The subtransient reactance of the alternator shall not exceed 13 percent, based on
the standby rating of the generator set.
E. The AC alternator shall be; synchronous, four pole, 2/3 pitch, revolving field, drip -
proof construction, single pre -lubricated re-greasable bearing, air cooled by a direct
drive centrifugal blower fan, and directly connected to the engine with flexible
drive disc. All insulation system components shall meet NEMA MG1 temperature
limits for Class F insulation system. Actual temperature rise measured by
resistance method at full load shall not exceed 105 degrees Centigrade.
F. The alternator shall be capable of delivering rated output (kVA) at rated frequency
and power factor, at any voltage not more than 5 percent above or below rated
voltage.
G. Provide two embedded resistance temperature detectors per phase and temperature
indication equipment. The control system shall annunciate high alternator
temperature as a fault condition. y
H. The subtransient reactance of the alternator shall not exceed 13 percent, based on
the standby rating of the generator set.
2.04 GENERATOR SET CONTROL. THE GENERATOR SET SHALL BE
PROVIDED WITH A MICROPROCESSOR -BASED CONTROL SYSTEM THAT
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
IS DESIGNED TO PROVIDE AUTOMATIC STARTING, MONITORING, AND
CONTROL FUNCTIONS FOR THE GENERATOR SET. THE CONTROL
SYSTEM SHALL ALSO BE DESIGNED TO ALLOW LOCAL MONITORING
AND CONTROL OF THE GENERATOR SET, AND REMOTE MONITORING
AND CONTROL AS DESCRIBED IN THIS SPECIFICATION. THE CONTROL
SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE GENERATOR SET, OR MAY BE MOUNTED
IN A FREE-STANDING PANEL NEXT TO THE GENERATOR SET IF
ADEQUATE SPACE AND ACCESSIBILITY IS AVAILABLE. THE CONTROL
SHALL BE VIBRATION ISOLATED AND PROTOTYPE TESTED TO VERIFY
THE DURABILITY OF ALL COMPONENTS IN THE SYSTEM UNDER THE
VIBRATION CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED. THE GENERATOR SET
MOUNTED CONTROL SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING FEATURES
AND FUNCTIONS:
A. Control Switches
1. Mode Select Switch. The mode select switch shall initiate the following
control modes. When in the RUN or MANUAL position the generator set
shall start, and accelerate to rated speed and voltage as directed by the
operator. A separate push-button to initiate starting is acceptable. In the OFF
position the generator set shall immediately stop, bypassing all time delays.
In the AUTO position the generator set shall be ready to accept a signal from
a remote device to start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage.
2. EMERGENCY STOP switch. Switch shall be Red "mushroom -head"
push-button. Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the generator
set to immediately shut down, and be locked out from automatic restarting.
3. RESET switch. The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and allow
restarting the generator set after it has shut down for any fault condition.
4. PANEL LAMP switch. Depressing the panel lamp switch shall cause the
entire panel to be lighted with DC control power. The panel lamps shall
automatically be switched off 10 minutes after the switch is depressed, or after
the switch is depressed a second time.
B. Generator Set AC Output Metering. The generator set shall be provided with a
metering set including the following features and functions:
1. Digital metering set, 1 % accuracy, to indicate generator RMS voltage and
current, frequency, output current, output KW, KW -hours, and power factor.
Generator output voltage shall be available in line -to -line and line -to -neutral
voltages, and shall display all three-phase voltages (line to neutral or line to
line) simultaneously.
2. Analog voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, power factor meter, and
kilowatt (KW) meter. Voltmeter and ammeter shall display all three phases.
Meter scales shall be color coded in the following fashion: green shall indicate
normal operating condition, amber shall indicate operation in ranges that
indicate potential failure, and red shall indicate failure impending. Metering
accuracy shall be within 1 % at rated output. Both analog and digital metering
are required.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
3. The control system shall monitor the total load on the generator set, and
maintain data logs of total operating hours at specific load levels ranging from
0 to 110% of rated load, in 10% increments. The control shall display hours
of operation at less than 30% load and total hours of operation at more than
90% of rated load.
4. The control system shall log total number of operating hours, total kWH, and
total control on hours, as well as total values since reset.
C. Generator Set Alarm and Status Display.
1. The generator set control shall include LED alarm and status indication lamps.
The lamps shall be high -intensity LED type. The lamp condition shall be
clearly apparent under bright room lighting conditions. Functions indicated
by the lamps shall include:
a. The control shall include five configurable alarm -indicating lamps. The
lamps shall be field adjustable for any status, warning, or shutdown
function monitored by the genset. They shall also be configurable for
color, and control action (status, warning, or shutdown).
b. The control shall include green lamps to indicate that the generator set is
running at rated frequency and voltage, and that a remote start signal has
been received at the generator set. The running signal shall be based on
actual sensed voltage and frequency on the output terminals of the
generator set.
C. The control shall include a flashing red lamp to indicate that the control
is not in automatic state, and red common shutdown lamp.
d. The control shall include an amber common warning indication lamp.
2. The generator set control shall indicate the existence of the warning and
shutdown conditions on the control panel. All conditions indicated below for
warning shall be field -configurable for shutdown. Conditions required to be
annunciated shall include:
a.
low oil pressure (warning)
b.
low oil pressure (shutdown)
C.
oil pressure sender failure (warning)
d.
low coolant temperature (warning)
e.
high coolant temperature (warning)
f.
high coolant temperature (shutdown)
g.
high oil temperature (warning)
h.
engine temperature sender failure (warning)
i.
low coolant level (warning)
j.
fail to crank (shutdown)
k.
fail to start/overcrank (shutdown)
1.
overspeed (shutdown)
M.
low DC voltage (warning)
n.
high DC voltage (warning)
o.
weak battery (warning)
P.
low fuel-daytank (warning)
q.
high AC voltage (shutdown)
r.
low AC voltage (shutdown)
S.
under frequency (shutdown)
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION
NO. 3 16625-8
OCTOBER 20, 2006
GENERATOR SET �-
l
t. over current (warning)
" U. over current (shutdown)
V. short circuit (shutdown)
W. over load (warning)
X. emergency stop (shutdown)
Y. (4) configurable conditions
3. Provisions shall be made for indication of four customer -specified alarm or
shutdown conditions. Labeling of the customer -specified alarm or shutdown
conditions shall be of the same type and quality as the above -specified
conditions. The non -automatic indicating lamp shall be red, and shall flash to
indicate that the generator set is not able to automatically respond to a
command to start from a remote location.
D. Engine Status,Monitoring.
1. The following information shall be available from a digital status panel on the
generator set control :
a. engine oil pressure (psi or kPA)
b. engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C)
C. engine oil temperature (degrees F or C)
d. engine speed (rpm)
e. number of hours of operation (hours)
f. number of start attempts
g. battery voltage (DC volts)
2. The control system shall also incorporate a data logging and display provision
to allow logging of the last 10 warning or shutdown indications on the
generator set, as well as total time of operation at various loads, as a percent
of the standby rating of the generator set.
E. Engine Control Functions.
1. The control system provided shall include a cycle cranking system, which
allows for user selected crank time, rest time, and # of cycles. Initial settings
shall be for 3 cranking periods of 15 seconds each, with 15-second rest period
between cranking periods.
2. The control system shall include an idle mode control, which allows the
engine to run in idle mode in the RUN position only. In this mode, the
alternator excitation system shall be disabled.
3. The control system shall include an engine governor control, which functions
to provide steady state frequency regulation as noted elsewhere in this
specification. The governor control shall include adjustments for gain,
damping, and a ramping function to control engine speed and limit exhaust
smoke while the unit is starting.
4. The control system shall include time delay start (adjustable 0-300 seconds)
and time delay stop (adjustable 0-600 seconds) functions.
5. The control system shall include sender failure monitoring logic for speed
sensing, oil pressure, and engine temperature which is capable of
discriminating between failed sender or wiring components, and an actual
failure conditions.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
16625-9
GENERATOR SET
F. Alternator Control Functions:
1. The generator set shall include a full wave rectified automatic digital voltage
regulation system that is matched and prototype tested by the engine
manufacturer with the governing system provided. It shall be immune from
misoperation due to load -induced voltage waveform distortion and provide a
pulse width modulated output to the alternator exciter. The voltage regulation
system shall be equipped with three-phase line to neutral RMS sensing and
shall control buildup of AC generator voltage to provide a linear rise and limit
overshoot. The system shall include a torque -matching characteristic, which
shall reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency below an adjustable
frequency threshold. Torque matching characteristic shall be adjustable for
roll -off frequency and rate, and be capable of being curve -matched to the
engine torque curve with adjustments in the field. The voltage regulator shall
include adjustments for gain, damping, and frequency roll -off. Adjustments
shall be broad range, and made via digital raise -lower switches, with an
alphanumeric LED readout to indicate setting level. Rotary potentiometers
for system adjustments are not acceptable.
2. Controls shall be provided to monitor the output current of the generator set
and initiate an alarm (over current warning) when load current exceeds 110%
of the rated current of the generator set on any phase for more than 60
seconds. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when
output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator
(over current shutdown). The protective functions provided shall be in
compliance to the requirements of NFPA70 article 445.
3. Controls shall be provided to individually monitor all three phases of the
output current for short circuit conditions. The controVprotection system shall
monitor the current level and voltage. The controls shall shut down and lock
out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal
damage point of the alternator (short circuit shutdown). The protective
functions provided shall be in compliance to the requirements of NFPA70
article 445.
4. Controls shall be provided to monitor the KW load on the generator set, and
initiate an alarm condition (over load) when total load on the generator set
exceeds the generator set rating for in excess of 5 seconds. Controls shall
include a load shed control, to operate a set of dry contacts (for use in
shedding customer load devices) when the generator set is overloaded.
5. An AC over/under voltage monitoring system that responds only to true RMS
voltage conditions shall be provided. The system shall initiate shutdown of
the generator set when alternator output voltage exceeds 110% of the
operator -set voltage level for more than 10 seconds, or with no intentional
delay when voltage exceeds 130%. Under voltage shutdown shall occur when
the output voltage of the alternator is less than 85% for more than 10 seconds.
6. When required by National Electrical Code or indicated on project drawings,
the control System shall include a ground fault monitoring relay. The relay
shall be adjustable from 3.8-1200 amps, and include adjustable time delay of
0-10.0 seconds. The relay shall be for indication only, and not trip or shut
down the generator set. Note bonding and grounding requirements for the
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-10
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
11
I
generator set, and provide relay that will function correctly in system as
installed.
G. Other Control Functions
1. The generator set shall be provided with a network communication module to
allow LonMark compliant communication with the generator set control by
remote devices. The control shall communicate all engine and alternator data,
and allow starting and stopping of the generator set via the network in both
test and emergency modes.
2. A battery monitoring system shall be provided which initiates alarms when
the DC control and starting voltage is less than 25VDC or more than 32 VDC.
During engine cranking (starter engaged), the low voltage limit shall be
disabled, and DC voltage shall be monitored as load is applied to the battery,
to detect impending battery failure or deteriorated battery condition.
H. Control Interfaces for Remote Monitoring:
1. The control system shall provide four programmable output relays. These
relay outputs shall be configurable for any alarm, shutdown, or status
condition monitored by the control. The relays shall be configured to
indicate: (1) generator set operating at rated voltage and frequency, (2)
common warning, (3) common shutdown, (4) load shed command.
2. A fused 10 amp switched 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for
customer use. DC power shall be available from this circuit whenever the
generator set is running.
3. A fused 10 amp 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer
use. DC power shall be available from this circuit at all times from the engine
starting/control batteries.
4. The control shall be provided with a direct serial communication link for the
LonWorks communication network interface as described elsewhere in this
specification and shown on the drawings.
2.05 OTHER EQUIPMENT TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE GENERATOR SET
A. Provide and install a 20-light LED type remote alarm annunciator with horn,
located as shown on the drawings or in a location that can be conveniently
monitored by facility personnel. The remote annunciator shall provide all the
audible and visual alarms called for by NFPA Standard 110 for level 1 systems for
the local generator control panel. Spare lamps shall be provided to allow future
addition of other alarm and status functions to the annunciator. Provisions for
labeling of the annunciator in a fashion consistent with the specified functions shall
be provided. Alarm silence and lamp test switch(es) shall be provided. LED lamps
shall be replaceable, and indicating lamp color shall be capable of changes needed
for specific application requirements. Alarm horn shall be switchable for all
annunciation points. Alarm horn (when switched on) shall sound for first fault, and
all subsequent faults, regardless of whether first fault has been cleared, in
compliance with NFPA110 3-5.6.2. The interconnecting wiring between the
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
16625-11
GENERATOR SET
annunciator and other system
components shall be monitored and failure of the
- interconnection between components shall be displayed
on the annunciator panel.
B. The annunciator shall include
the following alarm
labels, audible annunciation
features, and lamp colors:
Condition
Lamp Color Audible Alarm
Normal Power (to Loads)
Green
No
Genset Supplying Load
Amber
No
Genset Running
Green
No
Not in Auto
Red (Flashing)
Yes
High Battery Voltage
Red
Yes
Low Battery Voltage
Red
Yes
Charger AC Failure
Red
Yes
Fail to Start
Red
Yes
Low Engine Temperature
Amber
Yes
Pre -High Engine Temperature
Amber
Yes
High Engine Temperature
Red
Yes
Pre -Low Oil Pressure
Amber
Yes
Low Oil Pressure
Red
Yes
Overspeed
Red
Yes
Low Coolant Level
Amber
Yes
Low Fuel Level
Amber
Yes
Network OK
Green
Yes
(4) Spares
Configurable
Configurable
Low battery voltage lamp shall also be lighted for low cranking
voltage or weak battery alarm
C. The generator set shall be provided with a mounted main line circuit breaker, sized
to carry the rated output current of the generator set. The circuit breaker shall
incorporate an electronic trip unit that operates to protect the alternator under all
overcurrent conditions, or a thermal -magnetic trip with other overcurrent protection
devices that positively protect the alternator under overcurrent conditions. The
supplier shall submit time overcurrent characteristic curves and thermal damage
curve for the alternator, demonstrating the effectiveness of the protection provided.
D. Outdoor Weather -Protective Enclosure
1. The generator set shall be provided with an outdoor enclosure, with the entire
package listed under UL2200. The package shall comply with the
requirements of the National Electrical Code for all wiring materials and
component spacing. The total assembly of generator set, enclosure, and sub-
base fuel tank (when used) shall be designed to be lifted into place using
spreader bars. Housing shall provide ample airflow for generator set operation
at rated load in an ambient temperature of 100F. The housing shall have
hinged access doors as required to maintain easy access for all operating and
service functions. All doors shall be lockable, and include retainers to hold
the door open during service. Enclosure roof shall be cambered to prevent
rainwater accumulation. Openings shall be screened to limit access of rodents
into the enclosure. All electrical power and control interconnections shall be
made within the perimeter of the enclosure.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16625-12
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
U
C�
2.
All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted
-
with the manufacturers standard color using a two step electrocoating paint
process, or equal meeting the performance requirements specified below. All
surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. The painting process
shall result in a coating that meets the following requirements:
a. Primer thickness, 0.5-2.0 mils. Top coat thickness, 0.8-1.2 mils.
b. Gloss, per ASTM D523-89, 80% plus or minus 5%. Gloss retention
after one year shall exceed 50%.
C. Crosshatch adhesion, per ASTM D3359-93, 4B-5B.
d. Impact resistance, per ASTM D2794-93, 120-160 inch -pounds.
e. Salt Spray, per ASTM B 117-90, 1000+ hours.
f. Humidity, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours.
g. Water Soak, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours.
3.
Painting of hoses, clamps, wiring harnesses, and other non-metallic service
parts shall not be acceptable. Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant, and
designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for
normal installation or service work.
4.
Enclosure shall be constructed of minimum 12 gauge steel for framework and
14 gauge steel for panels. All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel.
5.
A factory -mounted exhaust silencer shall be installed inside the enclosure.
The exhaust shall exit the enclosure through a rain collar and terminate with a
rain cap. Exhaust connections to the generator set shall be through seamless
flexible connections.
6.
The enclosure shall include the following maintenance provisions:
a. Flexible coolant and lubricating oil drain lines, that extend to the
exterior of the enclosure, with internal drain valves
b. External radiator fill provision.
E. Provide a sub -base fuel tank for the generator set, sized to allow for full load
operation of the generator set for 48 hours. The sub -base fuel tank shall be UL142
listed and labeled. Installation shall be in compliance to NFPA37. The fuel tank
shall be a double -walled, steel construction and include the following features:
1. Emergency tank and basin vents.
2. Mechanical level gauge.
3. Fuel supply and return lines, connected to generator set with flexible fuel lines
as recommended by the engine manufacturer and in compliance to UL2200
and NFPA 37 requirements.
4. Leak detection provisions, wired to the generator set control for local and
remote alarm indication.
5. High and low level float switches to indicate fuel level. Wire switches to
generator control for local and remote indication of fuel level
6. Basin drain.
7. Integral lifting provisions.
PART 3 - OPERATION
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-13
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
3.01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Generator set shall start on receipt of a start signal from remote equipment. The
start signal shall be via hardwired connection to the generator set control and a
redundant signal over the required network connection.
B. The generator set shall complete a time delay start period as programmed into the
control.
C. The generator set control shall initiate the starting sequence for the generator set.
The starting sequence shall include the following functions:
D. The control system shall verify that the engine is rotating when the starter is
signaled to operate. If the engine does not rotate after two attempts, the control
system shall shut down and lock out the generator set, and indicate "fail to crank"
shutdown.
E. The engine shall fire and accelerate as quickly as practical to start disconnect speed.
If the engine does not start, it shall complete a cycle cranking process as described
elsewhere in this specification. If the engine has not started by the completion of
the cycle cranking sequence, it shall be shut down and locked out, and the control
system shall indicate "fail to start".
F. The engine shall accelerate to rated speed and the alternator to rated voltage.
Excitation shall be disabled until the engine has exceeded programmed idle speed,
and regulated to prevent over voltage conditions and oscillation as the engine
accelerates and the alternator builds to rated voltage.
G. On reaching rated speed and voltage, the generator set shall operate as dictated by
the control system in isochronous state.
H. When all start signals have been removed from the generator set, it shall complete a
time delay stop sequence. The duration of the time delay stop period shall be
adjustable by the operator.
I. On completion of the time delay stop period, the generator set control shall switch
off the excitation system and shall shut down.
J. Any start signal received after the time stop sequence has begun shall immediately
terminate the stopping sequence and return the generator set to isochronous
operation.
PART 4 - OTHER REQUIREMENTS
4.01 SUBMITTALS.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-14
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
A. Within 10 days after award of contract, provide six sets of the following
information for review:
1. Manufacturer's product literature and performance data, sufficient to verify
compliance to specification requirements.
2. A paragraph by paragraph specification compliance statement, describing the
differences between the specified and the proposed equipment.
3. Manufacturer's certification of prototype testing.
4. Manufacturer's published warranty documents.
5. Shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with certified overall
dimensions, as well as wiring interconnection details.
6. Interconnection wiring diagrams showing all external connections required;
with field wiring terminals marked in a consistent point-to-point manner.
7. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
4.02 FACTORY TESTING.
A. The generator set manufacturer shall perform a complete operational test on the
generator set prior to shipping from the factory. A certified test report shall be
provided. Equipment supplied shall be fully tested at the factory for function and
performance.
B. Factory testing may be witnessed by the owner and consulting engineer. Costs for
travel expenses will be the responsibility of the owner and consulting engineer.
Supplier is responsible to provide two weeks notice for testing.
C. Generator set factory tests on the equipment shall be performed at rated load and
rated power factor. Generator sets that have not been factory tested at rated power
factor will not be acceptable. Tests shall include: run at full load, maximum power,
voltage regulation, transient and steady-state governing, single step load pickup,
and function of safety shutdowns.
4.03 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment shall be installed by the contractor in accordance with final submittals
and contract documents. Installation shall comply with applicable state and local
codes as required by the authority having jurisdiction. Install equipment in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and instructions included in the listing
or labeling of UL listed products.
B. Installation of equipment shall include furnishing and installing all interconnecting
wiring between all major equipment provided for the on -site power system. The
contractor shall also perform interconnecting wiring between equipment sections
(when required), under the supervision of the equipment supplier.
C. Equipment shall be installed on concrete housekeeping pads. Equipment shall be
permanently fastened to the pad in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
seismic requirements of the site.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-15
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
D. Equipment shall be initially started and operated by representatives of the
manufacturer.
E. All equipment shall be physically inspected for damage. Scratches and other
installation damage shall be repaired prior to final system testing. Equipment shall
be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt and construction debris prior to initial
operation and final testing of the system.
4.04 ON -SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST:
A. The complete installation shall be tested for compliance with the specification
following completion of all site work. Testing shall be conducted by
representatives of the manufacturer, with required fuel supplied by Contractor. The
Engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the tests.
B. Installation acceptance tests to be conducted on -site shall include a "cold start" test,
a two hour full load test, and a one step rated load pickup test in accordance with
NFPA 110. Provide a resistive load bank and make temporary connections for full
load test, if necessary.
C. Perform a power failure test on the entire installed system. This test shall be
conducted by opening the power supply from the utility service, and observing
proper operation of the system for at least 2 hours. Coordinate timing and obtain
approval for start of test with site personnel.
4.05 TRAINING
A. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel
covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training
program shall be not less than 4 hours in duration and the class size shall be limited
to 5 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner.
4.06 SERVICE AND SUPPORT
A. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain service parts inventory at a
central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365
days per year.
B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and
factory certified in generator set service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory
of critical replacement parts at the local service organization, and in service
vehicles. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per
year.
C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator
set provided for at least 20 years.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-16
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
4.07 WARRANTY
A. The generator set and associated equipment shall be warranted for a period of not
less than 5 years from the date of commissioning against defects in materials and
workmanship.
B. The warranty shall be comprehensive. No deductibles shall be allowed for travel
time, service hours, repair parts cost, etc.
END OF SECTION 16625
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16625-17
OCTOBER 20, 2006 GENERATOR SET
SECTION 16635 — AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SCOPE
A. Provide complete factory assembled power transfer equipment with field
programmable digital electronic controls designed for fully automatic operation and
including: surge voltage isolation, voltage sensors on all phases of both sources,
linear operator, permanently attached manual handles, positive mechanical and
electrical interlocking, and mechanically held contacts for both sources.
B. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant transfer switches to provide a single
source of responsibility for all the products provided. Technicians specifically
trained to support the product and employed by the generator set supplier shall
service the transfer switches.
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The automatic transfer switch installation and application shall conform to the
requirements of the following codes and standards:
1. CSA 282, Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings
2. NFPA70 — National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in
systems in compliance to Article 700, 701, and 702.
3. NFPA99 — Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities
4. NFPA110 — Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The transfer switch
shall meet all requirements for Level 1 systems.
5. IEEE446 — Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power
Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
6. NEMA ICS10-1993 — AC Automatic Transfer Switches.
B. The transfer switch assembly shall comply with the following standards:
1. CSA C22.2, No. 14 — M91 Industrial Control Equipment.
2. EN55011, Class B Radiated Emissions
3. EN55011, Class B Conducted Emissions
4. IEC 1000-4-5 (EN 61000-4-5); AC Surge Immunity.
5. IEC 1000-4-4 (EN 61000-4-4) Fast Transients Immunity
6. IEC 1000-4-2 (EN 61000-4-2) Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
7. IEC 1000-4-3 (EN 61000-4-3) Radiated Field Immunity
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16635-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITC
8. IEC 1000-4-6 Conducted Field Immunity
9. IEC 1000-4-11 Voltage Dip Immunity.
10. IEEE 62.41, AC Voltage Surge Immunity.
11. IEEE 62.45, AC Voltage Surge.
12. UL1008 — Transfer Switches. Transfer switches shall be UL1008 listed.
UL1008 transfer switches may be supplied in UL891 enclosures if necessary
to meet the physical requirements of the project.
C. The transfer switch manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International
Quality Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance
in design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with
ISO 9001.
1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Only approved bidders shall supply equipment provided under this contract.
Equipment specifications for this project are based on microprocessor -based
transfer switches manufactured by Cummins Onan (Cummins/Onan Model OTPC).
Equipment by other suppliers that meets the requirement of this specification are
acceptable, if approved not less than 2 weeks before scheduled bid date. Proposals
must include a line by line compliance statement based on this specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 POWER TRANSFER SWITCH
A. Ratings
1. Refer to the project drawings for specifications on the sizes and types of
transfer switch equipment, withstand and closing ratings, number of poles,
voltage and ampere ratings, enclosure type, and accessories.
2. Main contacts shall be rated for 600 Volts AC minimum.
3. Transfer switches shall be rated to carry 100 percent of rated current
continuously in the enclosure supplied, in ambient temperatures of -40 to +60
degrees C, relative humidity up to 95% (non -condensing), and altitudes up to
10,000 feet (3000M).
4. Transfer switch equipment shall have withstand and closing ratings (WCR) in
RMS symmetrical amperes greater than the available fault currents shown on
the drawings and at the specified voltage. The transfer switch and its
upstream protection shall be coordinated. The transfer switch shall be third
party listed and labeled for use with the specific protective device(s) installed
in the application.
B. Construction
1. Transfer switches shall be double -throw, electrically and mechanically
interlocked, and mechanically held in the source 1 and source 2 positions.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16635--
OCTOBER 20, 2006 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITC
The transfer switch shall be specifically designed to transfer to the best
available source if it inadvertently stops in a neutral position.
2. Transfer switches rated through 1000 amperes shall be equipped with
permanently attached manual operating handles and quick -break, quick -make
over -center contact mechanisms. Transfer switches over 1000 amperes shall
be equipped with manual operators for service use only under de -energized
conditions.
3. Main switch contacts shall be high-pressure silver alloy. Contact assemblies
shall have arc chutes for positive arc extinguishing. Arc chutes shall have
insulating covers to prevent inter -phase flashover.
4. Transfer switch internal wiring shall be composed of pre -manufactured
harnesses that are permanently marked for source and destination. Harnesses
shall be connected to the control system by means of locking disconnect
plug(s), to allow the control system to be easily disconnected and serviced
without disconnecting power from the transfer switch mechanism.
5. Power transfer switch shall be provided with flame retardant transparent
covers to allow viewing of switch contact operation but prevent direct contact
with components that could be operating at line voltage levels.
6. Transfer switches designated on the drawings as 4-pole shall be provided with
a switched neutral pole. The neutral pole shall be of the same construction and
have the same ratings as the phase poles. All poles shall be switched
simultaneously using a common crossbar. Substitute equipment using
overlapping neutral contacts is not acceptable.
7. Transfer switches that are designated on the drawings as 3-pole shall be
provided with a neutral bus and lugs. The neutral bus shall be sized to carry
100% of the current designated on the switch rating.
C. Connections
1. Field control connections shall be made on a common terminal block that is
clearly and permanently labeled.
2. Transfer switch shall be provided with AL/CU mechanical lugs sized to
accept the full output rating of the switch. Lugs shall be suitable for the
number and size of conductors shown on the drawings.
2.02 TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROL
A. Operator Panel. Each transfer switch shall be provided with a control panel to
allow the operator to view the status and control operation of the transfer switch.
The operator panel shall be a sealed membrane panel rated NEMA 3R/IP53 or
better (regardless of enclosure rating) that is permanently labeled for switch and
control functions. The operator panel shall be provided with the following features
and capabilities.
1. High intensity LED lamps to indicate the source that the load is connected to
(source 1 or source 2); and which source(s) are available. Source available
LED indicators shall operate from the control microprocessor to indicate the
true condition of the sources as sensed by the control.
2. High intensity LED lamps to indicate that the transfer switch is "not in auto"
(due to control being disabled or due to bypass switch (when used) enabled or
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16635-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITC
in operation) and "Test/Exercise Active" to indicate that the control system is
testing or exercising the generator set.
3. "OVERRIDE" pushbutton to cause the transfer switch to bypass any active
time delays for start, transfer, and retransfer and immediately proceed with its
next logical operation.
4. "TEST" pushbutton to initiate a preprogrammed test sequence for the
generator set and transfer switch. The transfer switch shall be programmable
for test with load or test without load.
5. "RESET/LAMP TEST" pushbutton that will clear any faults present in the
control, or simultaneously test all lamps on the panel by lighting them.
6. The control system shall continuously log information on the number of hours
each source has been connected to the load, the number of times transferred,
and the total number of times each source has failed. This information shall
be available via a PC -based service tool and an operator display panel.
7. Security Key Switch to allow the user to inhibit adjustments, manual
operation or testing of the transfer switch unless key is in place and operated.
8. Vacuum fluorescent alphanumeric display panel with push-button navigation
switches. The display shall be clearly visible in both bright (sunlight) and no
light conditions. It shall be visible over an angle of at least 120 degrees. The
Alphanumeric display panel shall be capable of providing the following
functions and capabilities:
a. Display source condition information, including AC voltage for each
phase of normal and emergency source, frequency of each source.
Voltage for all three phases shall be displayed on a single screen for easy
viewing of voltage balance. Line to neutral voltages shall be displayed
for 4-wire systems.
b. Display source status, to indicate source is connected or not connected.
C. Display load data, including 3-phase AC voltage, 3-phase AC current,
frequency, KW, KVA, and power factor. Voltage and current data for
all phases shall be displayed on a single screen.
d. The display panel shall allow the operator to view and make the
following adjustments in the control system, after entering an access
code:
e. Set nominal voltage and frequency for the transfer switch.
f. Adjust voltage and frequency sensor operation set points.
g. Set up time clock functions.
h. Set up load sequence functions.
i. Enable or disable control functions in the transfer switch, including
program transition.
j. Set up exercise and load test operation conditions, as well as normal
system time delays for transfer time, time delay start, stop, transfer,
and retransfer.
k. Display Real time Clock data, including date, and time in hours,
minutes, and seconds. The real time clock shall incorporate provisions
for automatic daylight savings time and leap year adjustments. The
control shall also log total operating hours for the control system.
1. Display service history for the transfer switch. Display source connected
hours, to indicate the total number of hours connected to each source.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16635
OCTOBER 20, 2006 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITC
J
Display number of times transferred, and total number of times each
source has failed.
in. Display information for other transfer switches in the system, including
transfer switch name, real time load in KW on the transfer switch,
current source condition, and current operating mode.
n. Display fault history on the transfer switch, including condition, and
date and time of fault. Faults to include controller checksum error, low
controller DC voltage, ATS fail to close on transfer, ATS fail to close on
retransfer, battery charger malfunction, network battery voltage low,
network communications error.
B. Internal Controls
1. The transfer switch control system shall be configurable in the field for any
operating voltage level up to 600VAC. Provide RMS voltage sensing and
metering that is accurate to within plus or minus 1% of nominal voltage level.
Frequency sensing shall be accurate to within plus or minus 0.2%. Voltage
sensing shall be monitored based on the normal voltage at the site. Systems
that utilize voltage monitoring based on standard voltage conditions that are
not field configurable are not acceptable.
2. Transfer switch voltage sensors shall be close differential type, providing
source availability information to the control system based on the following
functions:
a. Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) for under voltage
conditions (adjustable for pickup in a range of 85 to 98% of the normal
voltage level and dropout in a range of 75 to 98% of normal voltage
level).
b. Monitoring all phases of the emergency service (source 2) for under
voltage conditions (adjustable for pickup in a range of 85 to 98% of the
normal voltage level and dropout in a range of 75 to 98% of pickup
voltage level).
C. Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) and emergency
service (source 2) for voltage imbalance.
d. Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) and emergency
service (source 2) for loss of a single phase.
e. Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) and emergency
service (source 2) for phase rotation.
f. Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) and emergency
service (source 2) for over voltage conditions (adjustable for dropout
over a range of 105 to 135% of normal voltage, and pickup at 95-99% of
dropout voltage level).
g. Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) and emergency
service (source 2) for over or under frequency conditions.
h. Monitoring the neutral current flow in the load side of the transfer
switch. The control shall initiate an alarm when the neutral current
exceeds a preset adjustable value in the range of 100-150% of rated
phase current for more than an adjustable time period of 10 to 60
seconds.
3. All transfer switch sensing shall be configurable from a Windows 95, 98, or
NT PC -based service tool, to allow setting of levels, and enabling or disabling
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3
OCTOBER 20, 2006
16635-5
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITC
of features and functions. Selected functions including voltage sensing levels
and time delays shall be configurable using the operator panel. Designs
utilizing DIP switches or other electromechanical devices are not acceptable.
The transfer control shall incorporate a series of diagnostic LED lamps.
4. The transfer switch shall be configurable to control the operation time from
source to source (program transition operation). The control system shall be
capable of enabling or disabling this feature, and adjusting the time period to a
specific value. A phase band monitor or similar device is not an acceptable
alternate for this feature.
5. The transfer switch shall incorporate adjustable time delays for generator set
start (adjustable in a range from 0-15 seconds); transfer (adjustable in a range
from 0-120 seconds); retransfer (adjustable in a range from 0-30 minutes); and
generator stop (cooldown) (adjustable in a range of 0-30 minutes).
6. The transfer switch shall be configurable to accept a relay contact signal and a
network signal from an external device to prevent transfer to the generator
service.
7. The transfer switch shall provide a relay contact signal prior to transfer or
retransfer. The time period before and after transfer shall be adjustable in a
range of 0 to 50 seconds.
8. The control system shall be designed and prototype tested for operation in
ambient temperatures from -40C to +70C. It shall be designed and tested to
comply with the requirements of the noted voltage and RFI/EMI standards.
9. The control shall have optically isolated logic inputs, high isolation
transformers for AC inputs, and relays on all outputs, to provide optimum
protection from line voltage surges, RFI and EMI.
10. The transfer switch network monitoring equipment, when supplied, shall be
provided with a battery based auxiliary power supply to allow monitoring of
the transfer switch when both AC power sources are non -operational. The
battery power supply shall be monitored for proper condition, and the transfer
switch shall include an alarm condition to indicate low battery condition.
11. The transfer switch shall be provided with a battery charger for the generator
set starting batteries. The battery charger shall be a float type charger rated 2
amps. The battery charger shall include an ammeter for display of charging
current and shall have fused AC inputs and DC outputs.
C. Control Interface
1. The transfer switch will provide an isolated relay contact for starting of a
generator set. The relay shall be normally held open, and close to start the
generator set. Output contacts shall be form C, for compatibility with any
generator set.
2. Provide one set Form C auxiliary contacts on both sides, operated by transfer
switch position, rated 10 amps 250 VAC.
3. The transfer switch shall provide relay contacts to indicate the following
conditions: source 1 available, load connected to source 1, source 2 available,
source 2 connected to load.
4. The transfer switch shall be provided with a network communication card, and
configured to allow LonMark compliant communication with the transfer
switch and other network system components. The network shall provide a
redundant start signal to the generator set(s) in the system.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16635
OCTOBER 20, 2006 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITC
D. Non -Automatic Switches
1. Transfer switches designated on the drawings as Non -Automatic shall be
provided with a control capable of operating the transfer switch either by a
remote contact opening or closing or by a front panel mounted selector switch.
The selector switch shall be a three -position switch. In the center Auto
position the transfer switch shall transfer and retransfer in response to input
signals as shown. The key shall be removable with the selector switch in the
Auto position only. Turning the selector switch to the Emergency position
shall transfer load to an energized emergency power source. Turning the
selector switch to the Normal position shall transfer load to an energized
normal power source.
2.03 ENCLOSURE
A. Enclosures shall be UL listed. The enclosure shall provide wire bend space in
compliance to the latest version of NFPA70. The cabinet door shall include
permanently mounted key type latches.
B. Transfer switch equipment shall be provided in a NEMA 1 or better enclosure.
C. Enclosures shall be the NEMA type specified. The cabinet shall provide code -
required wire bend space at point of entry as shown on the drawings. Manual
operating handles and all control switches (other than key -operated switches) shall
be accessible to authorized personnel only by opening the key -locking cabinet door.
Transfer switches with manual operating handles and/or non key -operated control
switches located on outside of cabinet do not meet this specification and are not
acceptable.
PART 3 - OPERATION
3.01 OPEN TRANSITION SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Transfer switch normally connects an energized utility power source (source 1) to
loads and a generator set (source 2) to the loads when normal source fails. The
normal position of the transfer switch is source 1 (connected to the utility), and no
start signal is supplied to the genset.
B. Generator Set Exercise (Test) With Load Mode. The control system shall be
configurable to test the generator set under load. In this mode, the transfer switch
shall control the generator set in the following sequence:
1. Transfer switch shall initiate the exercise sequence at a time indicated in the
exercise timer program, or when manually initiated by the operator.
2. The transfer switch shall issue a compatible start command to the generator
set, and cause the generator set to start and run at idle until it has reached
normal operating temperature.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.3 16635-7
OCTOBER 20, 2006 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITC
3. When the generator set has reached normal operating temperature or after an
adjustable time period (whichever is shorter), the control system shall
accelerate the generator set to rated voltage and frequency.
4. When the control systems senses the generator set at rated voltage and
frequency, it shall operate to connect the loads to the generator set by opening
the normal source contacts, and closing the alternate source contacts a
predetermined time period later. The timing sequence for the contact
operation shall be programmable in the controller.
5. The generator set shall operate connected to the load for the duration of the
exercise period. If the generator set fails during this period, the transfer
switch shall automatically reconnect the generator set to the normal service.
6. On completion of the exercise period, the transfer switch shall operate to
connect the loads to the normal source by opening the alternate source
contacts, and closing the normal source contacts a predetermined time period
later. The timing sequence for the contact operation shall be programmable in
the controller.
7. The transfer switch shall operate the generator set unloaded for a cooldown
period, and then remove the start signal from the generator set. If the normal
power fails at any time when the generator set is running, the transfer switch
shall immediately connect the system loads to the generator set.
C. Generator Set Exercise (Test) Without Load Mode. The control system shall be
configurable to test the generator set without transfer switch load connected. In this
mode, the transfer switch shall control the generator set in the following sequence:
1. Transfer switch shall initiate the exercise sequence at a time indicated in the
exercise timer program, or when manually initiated by the operator.
2. The transfer switch shall issue a compatible start command to the generator
set, and cause the generator set to start and run at idle until it has reached
normal operating temperature.
3. When the generator set has reached normal operating temperature or after an
adjustable time period (whichever is shorter), the control system shall
accelerate the generator set to rated voltage and frequency.
4. When the control systems senses the generator set at rated voltage and
frequency, it shall operate the generator set unloaded for the duration of the
exercise period.
5. At the completion of the exercise period, the transfer switch shall remove the
start signal from the generator set. If the normal power fails at any time when
the generator set is running, the transfer switch shall immediately connect the
system loads to the generator set.
PART 4 - OTHER REQUIREMENTS
4.01 FACTORY TESTING. THE TRANSFER SWITCH MANUFACTURER SHALL
PERFORM A COMPLETE OPERATIONAL TEST ON THE TRANSFER
SWITCH PRIOR TO SHIPPING FROM THE FACTORY. A CERTIFIED TEST
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16635-
OCTOBER 20, 2006 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITC
REPORT SHALL BE AVAILABLE ON REQUEST. TEST PROCESS SHALL
INCLUDE CALIBRATION OF VOLTAGE SENSORS.
4.02 SERVICE AND SUPPORT
A. The manufacturer of the transfer switch shall maintain service parts inventory at a
central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365
days per year.
B. The transfer switch shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained
and factory certified in both generator set and transfer switch service. The supplier
shall maintain an inventory of critical replacement parts at the local service
organization, and in service vehicles. The service organization shall be on call 24
hours per day, 365 days per year.
C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each transfer
switch provided for at least 20 years.
D. After generator set installation, the generator set supplier shall conduct a complete
operation, basic maintenance, and emergency service seminar for up to 10 persons
employed by the facility owner. The seminar shall include instruction on operation
of the transfer equipment, normal testing and exercise, adjustments to the control
system, use of the PC based service and maintenance tools provided under this
contract, and emergency operation procedures. The class duration shall be at least 8
hours in length, and include practical operation with the installed equipment.
END OF SECTION 16635
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16635-9
OCTOBER 20, 2006 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITC
SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.
Fire alarm control panels.
2.
Manual fire alarm stations.
3.
Automatic smoke and heat detectors.
4.
Fire alarm signaling appliances.
5.
Auxiliary fire alarm equipment.
B. Related
Sections include the following:
1.
Electrical: Section 16100.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code.
B. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code.
C. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72, manual and automatic local fire alarm system with
connections to central station.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide annunciator layout and system wiring diagram showing
each device and wiring connection required.
C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16721-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
D. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of
products.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of initiating devices, signaling appliances, and end -of -line
devices.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Operation Data: Operating instructions.
B. Maintenance Data: Maintenance and repair procedures.
1.08 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years experience, and with service facilities.
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years experience, and certified by State of Texas as fire alarm
installer.
1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and
indicated.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide ten manual station break -glass rods.
B. Provide six keys of each type.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16721-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
C. Provide three of each type of automatic smoke detector.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. CSI compatible with existing City of Belton system.
B. All Fire Protection equipment shall be compatible with existing City systems.
2.02 FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION CONTROL PANEL
A. Use a CSI control panel that corresponds with the following:
1. Control Panel: Modular construction with surface wall -mounted enclosure.
2. Power supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors,
remote annunciators, smoke dampers, relays, and alarm signaling devices.
Include battery -operated emergency power supply with capacity for operating
system in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 10 minutes.
3. System Supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in
trouble mode.
4. Initiating Device Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble
indication; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in
trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from initiating an alarm.
5. Indicating Appliance Circuits: Supervised signal module, sufficient for signal
devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition
places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from signaling
an alarm.
6. Remote Station Signal Transmitter: Electrically supervised digital alarm
communicator transmitter, capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals
over telephone lines to central station receiver.
7. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each
detection zone to provide accessory functions specified.
8. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, and ALARM SILENCE
switch.
9. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuit trouble places system in
trouble mode, which causes the following system operations:
a. Visual and audible trouble alarm indicated by zone at fire alarm control
panel.
b. Visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel.
C. Trouble signal transmitted to remote station.
d. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences
audible trouble alarm; visual alarm is displayed until initiating failure or
circuit trouble is cleared.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16721-3
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
10. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of initiating device places circuit in
alarm mode, which causes the following system operations:
a. Sound and display local fire alarm signaling devices with signal.
b. Transmit zone -coded signal to remote station equipment.
C. Indicate location of alarm zone on fire alarm control panel and on remote
annunciator panel.
d. Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to initiate shutdown of
fans and damper operation.
11. Alarm Reset: System remains in alarm mode until manually reset with
key -accessible reset function; system resets only if initiating circuits are out of
alarm mode.
12. Lamp Test: Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at each zone at
fire alarm control panel and at annunciator panel.
13. Drill Sequence of Operation: Manual drill function causes alarm mode
operation as described above.
14. Zoning: As indicated.
2.03 INITIATING DEVICES
A. Manual Station: Surface mounted, coded type, double action manual station with
break -glass rod. Provide manufacturer's standard backbox.
B. Ceiling Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72, ionization type, photoelectric type
with adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, auxiliary relay contact, integral thermal
element rated 135 degrees F and visual indication of detector actuation, suitable for
mounting on 4 inch outlet box. Provide two -wire detector with common power
supply and signal circuits.
C. Wall Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72, projected beam type with transmitter and
receiver.
D. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72, photoelectric type with key -operated
NORMAL -RESET -TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, and
visual indication of detector actuation, in duct -mounted housing. Provide two -wire
detector with common power supply and signal circuits.
E. Ceiling Mounted Heat Detector: Hardwire, 120 VAC, heat detector with battery
backup, with test button, LED "Power On" indicator, flashing red LED alarm light,
85dB alarm horn, 5-year warranty, by Kidde or equal.
2.04 SIGNALING APPLIANCES
A. Alarm Lights: NFPA 72, strobe lamp and flasher with red lettered "FIRE" on white
lens.
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16721-4
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
I
B. Alarm Horn: NFPA 72, surface type fire alarm horn. Sound Rating: 85 dB at 10
feet. Provide integral strobe lamp and flasher with red lettered "FIRE" on white
lens.
C. Annunciator: Provide supervised remote annunciator including audible and visual
indication of fire alarm by zone, and audible and visual indication of system trouble.
Install in surface wall -mounted enclosure.
2.05 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire.
B. Initiating Device and Indicating Appliance Circuits: Power limited fire -protective
signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor, 300
volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handling ducts, hollow
spaces used as ducts, and plenums.
2.06 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FRCP)
A. By Simplex. See Electrical Schedule on contract drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install manual station with operating handle and audible and visual signal devices
the required distance above the floor in accordance with the NFPA.
C. Use 12 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit
conductors. Install wiring in conduit.
D. Mount end -of -line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last
device in circuit.
E. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16721-5
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
A. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final
connections, and system testing.
3.04 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE
A. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded as follows, or
using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box.
B. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white.
C. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red.
D. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown.
E. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative).
F. Door Release: Gray, gray.
G. Municipal Trip Circuit: Orange, orange.
H. Municipal Fire Alarm Loop: Black, white.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to
each.
END OF SECTION 16721
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16721-6
OCTOBER 20, 2006 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
SECTION 16741 — VOICE/DATA SYSTEM PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of
Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work Included: Provide voice/data provisions and raceway system work as shown,
scheduled, indicated, and as specified.
B. Type: Provide a complete sleeve and raceway system for installation of the
voice/data cabling system under a separate contract.
C. System Installation: Voice/data system wiring, connections, outlets, instruments,
devices and accessories will be provided under a separate contract.
D. Coordinate: Coordinate with local telephone supplier exact requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
A. Plywood: Provide 3/4" exterior grade plywood terminal boards sized as shown and
scheduled. Boards shall be painted with a fire retardant white paint.
B. Raceways: Provide sleeve and raceway system as specified in Section 16100, 'Basic
Materials and Methods", Section 16110, "Electrical Raceways and Fittings", and
Section 16112, "Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
C. Wall Type Voice/Data Outlets: Provide a single gang wall outlet box with a conduit
with pull string to the telephone terminal board for voice/data.
PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAY SYSTEM:
A. General: Refer to Section 16100, 'Basic Materials and Methods", Section 16110,
"Electrical Raceways and Fittings", and Section 16112, "Electrical Boxes and
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16741-1
OCTOBER 20, 2006 VOICE/DATA SYSTEM PROVISIONS
Fittings", for installation requirements of the voice/data sleeve and raceway
systems.
B. Grounding: Extend from a 1/4" x 2"xl2" copper bus bar a #4 green insulated copper
ground looped between each voice/data terminal location to the building MSB.
Leave a 24" pigtail at each terminal location. Install ground conductors in an
approved raceway where subject to physical damage or where concealed in
inaccessible locations.
C. Receptacles: Provide duplex or fourplex receptacles at terminal boards, as shown.
D. Misuse: Do not use voice/data sleeves for temporary construction power wiring.
E. Pullcords: Provide a polypropylene pullcord in all voice/data conduits and to all
voice/data outlets.
3.02 COORDINATION:
A. General: Prior to installation of voice/data system provisions, coordinate required
provisions with the voice/data system vendor/installer selected for the project.
Where power, conduit and terminal board provisions are significantly different from
those shown on the Drawings, notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of the
requirements. Where minor modifications to provisions are required, they shall be
made at no cost as a matter of job coordination.
B. Building Service: Provisions for voice/data cable entry to the building shall be
coordinated with the utilities providing service, prior to installation.
END OF SECTION 16741
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3 16741-2
OCTOBER 20, 2006 VOICE/DATA SYSTEM PROVISIONS